JP7765126B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), slot machines, enclosed gaming machines, and medal-less slot machines.

One type of gaming machine known in the art is a pachinko machine equipped with a flow path through which gaming balls can flow (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-191967

However, there is room for improvement in the flow paths of conventional gaming machines.

The object of the present invention is to provide an amusement machine with a distinctive flow path.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a gaming board and a flow path through which gaming balls flow, the flow path being configured to have a first flow path, a second flow path, a third flow path, and a fourth flow path, the first flow path being a flow path through which gaming balls can flow during normal play, the second flow path being a flow path through which gaming balls have difficulty flowing during the normal play and through which gaming balls can easily flow during a winning play, the third flow path being a flow path through which gaming balls can flow during the normal play, and the fourth flow path being a flow path through which gaming balls have difficulty flowing during the normal play. A flow path in which balls are difficult to circulate and which facilitates the circulation of game balls during a certain time-shortened game, wherein a first screw insertion port into which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the first flow path, a screw insertion port into which a screw can be inserted is not formed on the flow path of the second flow path, a third screw insertion port into which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the third flow path, and a screw insertion port into which a screw can be inserted is not formed on the flow path of the fourth flow path, and a screw insertion port into which a screw can be inserted is not formed on the flow path of the second flow path. a second screw insertion port is formed in an area where a screw is not inserted correctly into the first screw insertion port, and the first screw insertion port is formed at a position where a gaming ball that has circulated through the first flow path will come into contact with the screw and a structural body that forms the first flow path if the screw is not inserted correctly into the third screw insertion port; the third flow path has a first opening and a second opening, and the first opening is located upstream of the second opening; the third screw insertion port is formed at a position where a gaming ball that has circulated through the third flow path will come into contact with the screw and a structural body that forms the third flow path if the screw is not inserted correctly into the third screw insertion port, and is closer to the first opening than the second opening; at least a part of the structural body that forms the first flow path is fixed to the game board using a screw inserted into the first screw insertion port, and at least a part of the structural body that forms the second flow path is fixed to the game board using a screw inserted into the second screw insertion port .

This invention makes it possible to create gaming machines with distinctive flow paths.

1 is an external perspective view of the enclosed gaming machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 1 shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit of an enclosed gaming machine 100. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the flow of game balls in an enclosed game machine 100. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of counting processing by the frame control unit 600. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of reference signal processing by the frame control unit 600. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game ball subtraction process of the frame control unit 600. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing command types between a main control unit and a frame control unit. 10 is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication between the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600 in chronological order after the enclosed gaming machine 100 is powered on. FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication in time series when a communication line disconnection error occurs in the main control unit 300 during communication between the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600. FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing, in time series, an example of communication between the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600 when a communication line disconnection error occurs in the frame control unit 600. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing types of commands between a slot control unit and a lending device, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing types of gaming machine information notification commands. FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing an example of basic communication (without game information) between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 in chronological order. A sequence diagram showing an example of priority transmission of a gaming machine information notification command (with gaming information) in communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 in chronological order. 10 is a sequence diagram showing an example of count notification in communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 in chronological order. FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a lending notification in communication between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 in chronological order. FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a case where a communication interruption occurs in communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 in time series. FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a case where a communication interruption occurs in communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 in time series. FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a communication abnormality in a count notification between the slot control unit 600 and the rental device 614 in time series. FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a communication abnormality in a lending notification between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 in time series. FIG. FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 during a game in chronological order. This is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 in chronological order when an increase in the number of game balls occurs at the same time as a short press of the counting button. A sequence diagram showing an example of communication between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 in chronological order when an increase in the number of game balls occurs and the counting button is pressed and held down at the same time. 10 is a time chart showing the changes in various signals when the number of game balls is one and the launch operation of one game ball is performed. This is a time chart showing the changes in various signals when one game ball is released and one ball is counted when one game ball is present. This is a time chart showing the changes in various signals when one game ball is fired and 250 balls are counted when there are 250 game balls. This is a time chart showing the changes in various signals when one game ball is fired and 250 balls are counted when there are 251 game balls. 10 is a time chart showing changes in various signals when the subtraction sensor signal of the subtraction sensor 618 does not change to an ON level after the reference signal flag is set to ON. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the enclosed gaming machine 100. This is a rear view of the front frame door 106 seen from the rear side. 1A is a partial enlarged view showing the slide lock 170 in a state where it has moved to the lock position, FIG. 1B is a partial enlarged view showing the slide lock 170 in a state where it has moved to the unlock position, and FIG. 1C is a rear view of the upper unit 154. (a) A top view of the front frame door 106 as seen from above, (b) A front view showing the upper unit 154 moving to the locked position, and (c) A front view showing the upper unit 154 moving to the unlocked position. FIG. 2 is a simplified front view of the game board 200. 10 is a simplified rear view of the game board 200 as seen from the back. (a) is a partially enlarged view showing the first ball passage 250 with the first ball passage cover 254 removed, and the second ball passage 260 with the second ball passage cover 264 removed. (b) is a partially enlarged view of the general winning port flow path 256. A partially enlarged view showing the second ball passage 260 with the first ball passage 250 removed. 1A is a side cross-sectional view showing a ball passage 270 having a screw insertion opening 274 formed therein, and FIG. 1B is a partially enlarged view showing the vicinity of the screw insertion opening 274. (a) is a front view of the ball passage 270 with the upper surface portion 270d omitted; (b) is a side cross-sectional view schematically showing the ball passage 280 according to the first modified example; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 1 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing the main board storage case 640 and the main control board 600. FIG. A plan view showing the main control board 600 housed in the main board housing case 640. 42A is a side view taken along the line AA in FIG. 41. FIG. 42B is a side view taken along the line BB in FIG. 6A is a plan view showing a substrate storage case 650 and a mirror 657 according to a modified example, and FIG. 6B is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the line CC in FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the medalless slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 10 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of a medal-less slot machine 100 according to a modified example. FIG. 10 is a plan view of the main board storage case 740. 47A is a side view of the main control board 750 shown in FIG. 46 as seen from the left side; (b) is a partial cross-sectional side view showing the periphery of a recess 756 according to a modified example; (c) is a partial plan view showing the periphery of the recess 756 as seen from the direction indicated by the symbol Z in (b). 1 is an external oblique view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, seen from the front side (player side). This is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a simplified front view of the game board as seen from the front side (player side). This is an enlarged view of a portion of the attacca unit 23 shown in Figure 50, where (a) shows the internal state of the unit main body 23a, and (b) shows the state of the back side of the unit cover body 23b that covers the unit main body 23a. FIG. 1 is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. These are examples of display patterns for a pachinko machine, where (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 2, (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern, and (d) shows an example of a stop display pattern for a regular pattern. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether a special symbol has been won, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win occurs in a non-time-saving play state, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win occurs in a time-saving play state, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win occurs in a time-saving state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special chart determination table for when a small jackpot is won in a non-time-shortened state, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special chart determination table for when a small jackpot is won in a time-shortened play state, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special chart determination table for when a small jackpot is won in a time-shortened play state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether a normal map has been won, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal map determination table for use when a normal map is won in a non-time-shortened play state, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal map determination table for use when a normal map is won in an a1 time-shortened play state, (d) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal map determination table for use when a normal map is won in an a2 time-shortened play state, (e) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the waiting time from passing through the normal power activation gate until the normal electric device is activated, and (f) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the activation time of the normal electric device when passing through the normal power activation gate. (a) is a diagram explaining an example of the relationship between the state of the normal map change display and the operation when passing through a normal power operation gate, (b) is a diagram explaining an example of the relationship between the state of the change display of special map 1 and the state of the change display of special map 2, and (c) is a diagram explaining the state of the normal map change display when passing through a normal power operation gate while the normal map change display is on. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the first sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the second sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the transition of game states. This is a diagram showing an example of a presentation related to the decorative pattern change display centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. A figure showing the continuation of the example of the presentation shown in Figure 63 in stages. This figure shows another example of the presentation following Figure 63(q) in stages. This is a diagram showing an example of the presentation in stages during a jackpot game centered around a decorative pattern display device. A diagram showing another example of the presentation in a jackpot game centered on a decorative pattern display device in stages. This figure shows a step-by-step example of prioritizing the presentation of the pattern that is displayed first in a stopped state when different patterns are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. In this example, when both the variable display of the normal symbol, which indicates a win, and the variable display of the special symbol 2, which indicates a jackpot, are being executed in the normal game state, the effect of the symbol that stops and displays first takes priority. This figure shows in stages an example different from the example shown in Figure 68 when both the normal pattern change display and the special pattern 2 change display, which is a jackpot, are being executed in the normal game state. c) A diagram showing an example of a step-by-step transition from the final change in the time-shortened game state (RUSH state) to the normal game state (non-time-shortened game state). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example of a standby display. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a game in which the presentation mode is changed in a time-saving game state (RUSH state) step by step. This figure shows a step-by-step example of what happens when a winning command is missed when presentation mode A is selected. This is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of what happens when a winning command is missed when presentation mode C is selected. This is a diagram showing an example in stages of when power is interrupted for a moment in each performance mode and then immediately restored. This is a diagram showing an example of what happens in stages when a winning command is missed when the modified presentation mode C is selected. 1 is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, seen from the front side (player side). 1A and 1B are diagrams showing gaming machines according to modified examples of the present invention, in which (a) shows a casino machine 2000, (b) shows a mobile phone 3000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, (d) shows a portable gaming machine 4000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, (d) shows a home video game machine 5000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. 1 is an external oblique view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, seen from the front side (player side). This is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a simplified front view of the game board as seen from the front side (player side). 84A and 84B are enlarged views of a portion of the attacca unit 23, where (a) shows the internal state of the unit main body 23a, and (b) shows the back side of the unit cover body 23b that covers the unit main body 23a. FIG. 1 is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. These are examples of display patterns for a pachinko machine, where (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 2, (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern, and (d) shows an example of a stop display pattern for a regular pattern. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether a special symbol has been won, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win occurs in a non-time-saving play state, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win occurs in a time-saving play state, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win occurs in a time-saving state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special chart determination table for when a small jackpot is won in a non-time-shortened state, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special chart determination table for when a small jackpot is won in a time-shortened play state, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special chart determination table for when a small jackpot is won in a time-shortened play state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of operation of a normal electric device. (a) is a diagram showing a table for determining whether a regular map is a winner or loser in a regular map lottery, (b) is a diagram showing a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of a regular map used in a non-time-saving game state, (c) is a diagram showing a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of a regular map used in a time-saving game state, and (d) is a diagram showing a table for determining the confirmed stop time of a regular map. (a-1) is a diagram showing a judgment table for the start time of a win (OP time) of a normal pattern trigger in a non-time-shortened game state, (a-2) is a diagram showing a judgment table for the start time of a win (OP time) of a normal pattern trigger in a time-shortened game state, (b-1) is a diagram showing an opening time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger in a non-time-shortened game state, (b-2) is a diagram showing an opening time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger in an a1 time-shortened game state and a c time-shortened game state, (b-3) is a diagram showing an opening time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger in an a2 time-shortened game state, (c) is a diagram showing a closing time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger, (d-1) is a diagram showing a winning end time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger in a non-time-shortened game state, and (d-2) is a diagram showing a winning end time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger in a time-shortened game state. (a) is a diagram showing a judgment table for the start time (OP time) of the normal power operation gate trigger, (b) is a diagram showing a judgment table for the operation time of the normal power operation gate trigger in various game states, (c) is a diagram showing how to handle when a game ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g, (d) is a diagram showing how to handle special charts 1 and 2 when they are changing simultaneously, and (e) is a diagram showing how to handle when a game ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g while the normal chart is changing. This is a timing chart that explains the timing for determining the opening time of the normal electric device (electric chute) triggered by the normal electric operation gate. This is a timing chart explaining the measures taken to ensure the fixed stop time of the normal pattern shown in Figure 92-2 (d). A flowchart showing the processing flow in the first sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the second sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the transition of game states. This is a diagram showing an example of a presentation related to the decorative pattern change display centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. A figure showing the continuation of the example of the presentation shown in Figure 97 in stages. This figure shows another example of the presentation following Figure 97(q) in stages. This is a diagram showing an example of the presentation in stages during a jackpot game centered around a decorative pattern display device. A diagram showing another example of the presentation in a jackpot game centered on a decorative pattern display device in stages. This figure shows a step-by-step example of prioritizing the presentation of the pattern that is displayed first in a stopped state when different patterns are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. In this example, when both the variable display of the normal symbol, which indicates a win, and the variable display of the special symbol 2, which indicates a jackpot, are being executed in the normal game state, the effect of the symbol that stops and displays first takes priority. This figure shows in stages an example different from the example shown in Figure 102 when both the normal pattern change display and the special pattern 2 change display, which indicates a jackpot, are being executed in normal game mode. c) A diagram showing an example of a step-by-step transition from the final change in the time-shortened game state (RUSH state) to the normal game state (non-time-shortened game state). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example of a standby display. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a game in which the presentation mode is changed in a time-saving game state (RUSH state) in stages. This figure shows a step-by-step example of what happens when a winning command is missed when presentation mode A is selected. This is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of what happens when a winning command is missed when presentation mode C is selected. This is a diagram showing an example in stages of when power is interrupted for a moment in each performance mode and then immediately restored. This is a diagram showing an example of what happens in stages when a winning command is missed when the modified presentation mode C is selected. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the presentation mode. This is a diagram showing two examples in which a hold change effect and an advance notification effect are executed in stages. (a) is a diagram showing a hit/miss determination table for normal symbols in the second embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing a hit/miss determination table for special symbols in the second embodiment, (c) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for when a small hit is won that is used in the non-time-saving play state of the second embodiment, and (d) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for when a small hit is won that is used in the time-saving play state of the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an operation time determination table for the normal power operation gate trigger in various game states in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the handling of special charts 1 and 2 in a state in which special charts 1 and 2 are fluctuating simultaneously in the second embodiment. A diagram showing the flow of play on the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A flowchart showing the flow of the additional performance determination process in the second embodiment. A diagram showing an example of an added effect being executed in stages. This is a diagram showing another example of a predictive presentation for a jackpot game in stages. This is a diagram showing a normal symbol reach pattern determination table that determines the type of reach pattern in the variable display of the normal symbol decorative pattern in the normal game state. This is a diagram showing a special chart 2 reach pattern determination table that determines the type of reach pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern of special chart 2 in the a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state). 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of the decorative pattern determination process for regular maps in the second embodiment. This is a table showing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon and the expected probability of winning in each presentation mode of the second embodiment. 124A is a table showing a modified example of the table shown in FIG. 124, and FIG. 124B is a table showing a modified example of the table shown in FIG. 124 that is different from the modified example shown in FIG. 124A. A figure showing two examples in stages of execution of a hold change effect and an advance notification effect on a gaming machine of the second embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo presentation on the gaming machine of the second embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow when termination condition 1 or termination condition 2 is met during the execution of the demo presentation. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of demo presentation control processing in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow when, during execution of a demo presentation in normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode), a touch to the ball launching handle 134 is not detected and the display of the decorative pattern changes begins, and then a touch to the ball launching handle 134 is detected; (b) is a timing chart showing the flow when, during execution of a demo presentation in normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode), a touch to the ball launching handle 134 is not detected and the display of the special pattern 2 changes begins twice, and a small win is won on the second display of the special pattern 2 changes. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of the demo performance control process in Smapachi. 1 is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine 1000 to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front side (player side). 1A and 1B are diagrams showing gaming machines according to modified examples of the present invention, in which (a) shows a casino machine 2000, (b) shows a mobile phone 3000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, (d) shows a portable gaming machine 4000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, (d) shows a home video game machine 5000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine 100 according to an embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel 110 to 112 in a planar form and an explanatory diagram of the symbol names. 1A is a partially enlarged view showing the state before the reel band 150 is attached to the reel frames 212 and 214. FIG. 1B is a partially enlarged view showing the state after the lower end of the reel band 150 has been attached to the reel frames 212 and 214. FIG. 2 is a partially exploded perspective view of the reel drive unit 200. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of reels 110 to 112 and peripheral components. 1A is an exploded perspective view of a backlight module 240. FIG. 1B is a front view of the backlight module 240. (a) is a front view showing peripheral parts of the right reel 112 in the reel drive unit 200. (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in (a). (c) is a partially enlarged view showing the dotted line portion indicated by the symbol B in (b). 1A is a perspective view showing an example of the structure of a double-sided tape 252. FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the reel band fixing surface of the reel frame. FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view showing a cross section of a portion where the reel band 152 overlaps twice. 1A is a front view of the stop button unit 136. FIG. 1B is a view showing a state in which a slide stop operation is started using the stop buttons 137 to 139. (a) A front view of a stop button unit 270 according to Modification 1. (b) A cross-sectional view along line CC in (a). (c) A front view of a stop button unit 275 according to Modification 2. (d) A front view of a stop button unit 280 according to Modification 3.

The following describes in detail the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention using the drawings.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of an enclosed gaming machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 1. Fig. 1 is a perspective view of the enclosed gaming machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The enclosed gaming machine 100 has an external structure comprising an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a lower door 108, and a gaming board 200 on its front.

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (such as an island facility) in an amusement machine installation store. The main body 104, also known as the inner frame or frame, is a vertically rectangular member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as the base shaft of the amusement machine, rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. It also has an inner frame open sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 when it is opened.

The front frame door 106, also known as a front door or glass frame, is a door element that has a locking function and is attached via a hinge 112 to the front of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, so that it can be opened and closed freely. It is frame-shaped and has an opening on the inside. The front frame door 106 has a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 attached to the front side. The rear side of the front frame door 106 and the front side of the game board 200 define a playing area. A front frame door opening sensor (not shown) is also provided to detect the opening of the front frame door 106 when it is opened.

The lower door 108 is a door member with a locking function attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front of the pachinko machine 100 so that it can be opened and closed freely. The lower door 108 is equipped with a ball launching handle 134 (launching operation means) that is operated by the player to launch game balls guided to the launching device into the playing area of the game board 200, an effect button 136 that is operated by the player to change the presentation mode of various presentation devices, and an operation panel unit 138 with multiple buttons such as a plus button, a minus button, a cross button, and a confirm button.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the enclosed gaming machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 2. Fig. 2 shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit of the enclosed gaming machine 100.

The control unit of the enclosed gaming machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, a frame control unit 600 that mainly controls the supply of gaming balls etc. in response to commands sent by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of gaming balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the enclosed gaming machine 100.

<Main control unit>
First, we will explain the main control unit 300 of the enclosed gaming machine 100. The main control unit 300 has a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire machine. This basic circuit 302 is equipped with a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, etc.

The basic circuit 302 is equipped with a sensor circuit that receives signals output by various sensors 320 (sensors (detection means) that detect game balls passing through each start port, winning port, and variable winning port, front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, etc.), a drive circuit for controlling the display of the special symbol display devices (first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214), a drive circuit for controlling the display of the normal symbol display device 210, a drive circuit for controlling the display of various status indicators 328 (normal symbol hold lamp, first special symbol hold lamp, second special symbol hold lamp, high probability lamp, etc.), and a drive circuit for controlling various solenoids 332 that drive various movable members (wing members of the second special symbol start port, door members of the variable winning port, etc.).

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage monitoring circuit that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. If the power supply voltage value is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), this voltage monitoring circuit outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an input/output interface for sending commands to the frame control unit 600, and this configuration enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the frame control unit 600.

Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. On the other hand, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600 is two-way communication, and the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600 are configured so that they can send and receive signals such as commands to each other (details will be described later).

<First sub-control unit>
Next, we will explain the first sub-control unit 400 of the enclosed gaming machine 100. The first sub-control unit 400 has a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main control unit 300. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a ROM 406 in which various performance data etc. are stored, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data etc.

The basic circuit 402 also includes a detection sensor that detects when the effect button 136 is pressed, a sound source IC for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit for controlling the various lamps 418, and a drive circuit for controlling the drive of the effect device 246.

<Second sub-control unit>
Next, we will explain the second sub-control unit 500 of the enclosed gaming machine 100. The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a ROM 506 in which image display data and the like are stored, and a VDP (video display processor) 434 that reads the image display data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on signals from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device (liquid crystal display device) 157.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the frame control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the enclosed gaming machine 100 will be described.

The frame control unit 600 (control means) is equipped with an input/output interface for sending commands to the main control unit 300 and an input/output interface for sending commands to the launch control unit 630, enabling communication with both the main control unit 300 and the launch control unit 630.

Information communication between the frame control unit 600 and the main control unit 300, and information communication between the frame control unit 600 and the launch control unit 630 are both bidirectional, and the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600, and the frame control unit 600 and the launch control unit 630 are configured to be able to send and receive signals such as commands to and from each other.

The frame control unit 600 is equipped with a basic circuit 602 that controls the supply of game balls, etc., mainly based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300. This basic circuit 602 is equipped with a CPU 604, a ROM 606 that stores various data, a RAM 608 for temporarily storing data, a sensor circuit that receives signals output by a foul ball detection sensor 616, a counting button 617 (predetermined operating means), or a subtraction sensor 618 (detection means), a drive circuit for controlling the display of the game ball count display device 619, and a drive circuit for controlling the drive of the ball lifting motor 601 of the lifting device 714 (see Figure 3). The foul ball detection sensor 616 and the subtraction sensor 618 will be described later using Figure 3.

The basic circuit 602 also communicates with a rental device 614, which is provided separately from the enclosed gaming machine 100, via an interface unit. Information communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 is two-way, and the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 are configured to be able to send and receive signals such as commands to each other (details will be described later). The enclosed gaming machine 100 can also send information to a hall computer (so-called hall computer) installed in an amusement parlor, etc., via the rental device 614.

The loan button 614a on the loan device 614 is an operating means for withdrawing the "money balance" stored on the card inserted into the loan device 614 to obtain the number of game balls. By operating the loan button 614a at the start of play or during play, the number of game balls managed by the frame control unit 600 is increased according to the amount of money withdrawn.

The number of game balls, prize balls, etc. are managed as numerical data by the frame control unit 600 and displayed using the game ball number display device 619. Furthermore, at the end of play, by pressing the count button 617, the number of game balls managed by the frame control unit 600 can be transferred to the lending device 614 and stored on the card.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and launch hammer 148 (see Figure 3) and the ball feed solenoid 634 that supplies balls toward the ball launch handle 134, based on predetermined signals output by the frame control unit 600, such as control signals that indicate whether to allow or stop launch, and control signals that indicate the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, output by a launch intensity output circuit provided within the ball launch handle 134.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied externally to the enclosed gaming machine 100 into DC, converts it to a specified voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and first sub-control unit 400, as well as various devices. The power supply control unit 660 also includes a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) to supply power to specified components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a specified period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off.

<Enclosed gaming machine/game ball flow>
Next, the flow of game balls in the enclosed gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of game balls in the enclosed gaming machine 100.

In the enclosed gaming machine 100, the gaming balls stored in the ball storage cover 712 arranged inside the lower door 108 are transported (lifted) to the upper passage 736 of the ball lifting upper passage unit 718 via the lifting device (transport device) 714 and the ball polishing device 716, and then supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 149 of the launching device 140 (launching means) via the ball feeding device 127 (ball feeding means).

The launch solenoid 632 of the launching device 140 is then driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball launching handle 134 by the player, and the launch rod 146 and launching hammer 148 of the launching device 140 launch the game ball toward the game board 200. Game balls that do not reach the game board 200 (foul balls (return balls) FB) fall into the foul ball passage 764, pass through the foul ball detection sensor (proximity sensor) 616, which can detect game balls passing through this foul ball passage 764, and are then discharged into the ball storage cover 712.

When a game ball reaches the top of the game board 200, it falls downwards while changing direction due to a ball direction changer or game peg, and either enters (goes into) a winning hole (variable winning hole 234, etc.) or a starting hole (first special starting hole 232, etc.), or reaches the outlet 240 without entering (going into) any winning hole or starting hole, or by simply passing through the regular starting hole.

Game balls that enter (score) the winning hole or starting hole of the game board 200 pass through the winning ball passage 760 located on the back side of the game board 200, and game balls that do not enter (score) the winning hole or starting hole pass through the out ball passage 762 located on the back side of the game board 200 via the outlet 240 at the bottom of the game board 200, and each enter the first rail 752 of the lower passage 750, roll inside the first rail 752 along the slope of the first rail 752, and reach the downstream side of the first rail 752.

Game balls that enter the second rail 756 from the first rail 752 of the lower passage 750 roll inside the second rail 756 along the slope of the second rail 756 and are stored in the ball storage cover 712. After that, they are transported (lifted) by the lifting device 714, while dust and dirt adhering to the surface are removed by the ball polishing device 716.

The gaming balls transported by the lifting device 714 enter the upper passage 736 of the ball lifting upper passage unit 718, roll, and pass through a subtraction sensor (proximity sensor) 618 that can detect gaming balls passing through the upper passage 736. After passing through this subtraction sensor 618, the gaming balls are discharged into the launcher ball passage 748 by the ball feed solenoid 634 of the ball feed device 127, and then guided through the launcher ball passage 748 to the launch rail 149 of the launcher 140.

As explained above, the enclosed gaming machine 100 is similar to conventional pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines) in that players play by shooting gaming balls onto the surface of the gaming board 200. However, the minimum number of gaming balls required for launching are circulated within the gaming machine, and along the way, devices such as the launcher 140, ball feeder 127, ball polisher 716, and lifting device 714 are provided. Unlike conventional pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), there are no upper or lower trays, and the machine is designed so that players cannot directly touch the gaming balls.

In addition, in the enclosed gaming machine 100, the speed at which the gaming balls are transported (lifted) by the lifting device 714 (in this example, 200 balls per minute) is set to be faster than the speed at which the gaming balls are fired by the launching device 140 (in this example, 100 balls per minute). This prevents situations in which the launching device 140 runs out of gaming balls to fire and gameplay is interrupted.

In addition, in the enclosed gaming machine 100, the cycle in which gaming balls circulate (the time from when a gaming ball is launched from the launching device 140 towards the gaming board 200 to when the same gaming ball returns to the launching device 140) is approximately 28 seconds, although this varies depending on the number and arrangement of ball-direction changing members and gaming nails on the gaming board 200.

<Frame control unit/counting process>
Next, the counting process executed by the frame control unit 600 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the flow of the counting process executed by the frame control unit 600.

In step S101 of the counting process, it is determined whether operation of the counting button 617 (in this example, a "short press" or "long press") has been accepted. If operation of the counting button 617 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S102; if no operation has been accepted, the counting process ends.

Here, the determination of the operation of the count button 617 in step S101 will be explained. The frame control unit 600 monitors the button detection signal output from the count button 617 at predetermined intervals, and after detecting an ON level (e.g., high level) button detection signal for 1 ms or more but less than 500 ms, if it detects a falling edge (down edge) of the button detection signal, it determines that a "short press" operation of the count button 617 has been accepted. If it determines that a "short press" operation has been accepted, it sets the count ball count information (count ball count data) stored in RAM 608 to "1," a value corresponding to 1 ball.

On the other hand, if an ON level (e.g., high level) button detection signal is detected for 500 ms or more, it is determined that a "long press" operation of the counting button 617 has been accepted, and thereafter, each time an ON level button detection signal of 300 ms is detected, it is determined that a "long press" operation has been accepted. If it is determined that a "long press" operation has been accepted, and the number of game balls is 250 or more, the count ball number information (count ball number data) stored in RAM 608 is set to "250", which corresponds to 250 balls, and if the number of game balls is less than 250, the number corresponding to all game balls is set (for example, if the number of game balls is 150, the number corresponding to 150 balls is set to "150").

In step S102, it is determined whether the planned counting number is greater than the number of game balls sent in the gaming machine information notification command described below. If so, the process proceeds to step S103, where the planned correction data is set; if not, the process proceeds to step S104.

Here, an example of the planned correction data set in step S103 will be described. For example, in the example shown in Figure 21, which will be described later, a "short press" of the counting button 617 is accepted at the timing shown by reference symbol T7c, immediately after the winning ball shown by reference symbol T7b. However, since the number 1 (planned count number), which indicates one ball counted in response to the "short press" of the counting button 617, is greater than the number of game balls sent by the gaming machine information notification command at the timing shown by reference symbol T7a, the number of counted balls (count data) is not set to 1, which indicates one ball counted in response to the "short press" of the counting button 617, and 0 is set as the planned correction data for the counting data (number of counted balls) in step S103.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 22, which will be described later, a "long press" of the counting button 617 is accepted at the timing shown by symbol T8a. However, the number 250 (planned count number), which indicates 250 balls counted in response to the "long press" of the counting button 617, is greater than the number of game balls, 245, sent by the gaming machine information notification command at the timing shown by symbol T8b. Therefore, the number of counted balls (counting data) is not set to 250, which indicates 250 balls counted in response to the "long press" of the counting button 617, and 245 is set as the planned correction data for the counting data (number of counted balls) in step S103.

In this example, if the number of gaming balls increases during a specified period after sending gaming ball count data information (gaming machine information notification command) to the external device (rental device 614) and before sending count data information (count notification command), it is possible to prevent the sending of more count data information than gaming ball count data information.This prevents the sending of information that could lead the external device to mistakenly believe it is fraud or a malfunction, allowing for smooth operation of the gaming machine.

In step S104, it is determined whether or not there is data to be corrected. If there is data to be corrected, the process proceeds to step S108; if there is no data to be corrected, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, it is determined whether the reference signal flag has been set. If it has been set, the process proceeds to step S106; if not, the process proceeds to step S107, where the uncorrected counting data (number of balls counted) is set and the counting process ends.

In step S106, it is determined whether the result of subtracting the planned counting number from the number of game balls (number of game balls - planned counting number) is 0. If the result is 0, the process proceeds to step S108; if not, the process proceeds to step S107, where the planned correction data is set and the counting process ends.

In step S108, the corrected counting data (number of balls counted) is set and the counting process ends.

Here, we will explain an example of the counting data (number of counted balls) that is set when step S106 returns Yes. In the example shown in Figure 24, which will be described later, at the timing indicated by symbol T11b, the result of subtracting the planned counting number (1 in this example) from the number of game balls (1 in this example) is 0 (= number of game balls 1 - planned counting number 1), so the result of subtracting 1 from the planned counting number (1 in this example) (0 in this example) is set as the counting data (number of counted balls) in step S108.

In this example, even if the launch of a game ball and the counting process for counting game ball count data overlap, the value (1 ball) corresponding to the first operation mode (short press) of the specified operation means (count button 617) is not counted from the game ball count data (1 ball), allowing for appropriate processing.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 25, which will be described later, at the timing shown by symbol T12b, the result of subtracting the planned count number (250 in this example) from the number of game balls (250 in this example) is 0 (= number of game balls 250 - planned count number 250), so the result of subtracting 1 from the planned count number (250 in this example) (249 in this example) is set as the count data (number of balls counted) in step S108.

For example, if processing were performed without any restrictions on the launch of game balls and the counting process that counts the game ball count data, and the game ball count data was 250, if the game ball launch and the counting (250 balls) due to a long press overlap, 250 balls would be counted, resulting in a problem where game balls would be launched even though the game ball count data shows there were no game balls. However, according to this example, even if the game ball launch and the counting process that counts the game ball count data overlap, the value (250 balls) corresponding to the first operation mode (long press) of the specified operation means (count button 617) is not counted from the game ball count data (250 balls), allowing for appropriate processing.

<Frame control unit/reference signal processing>
Next, the reference signal processing executed by the frame control unit 600 will be described with reference to Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the reference signal processing executed by the frame control unit 600.

In step S201 of the reference signal processing, it is determined whether or not a reference signal has been received from the launch control unit 630. If a reference signal has been received, the process proceeds to step S202; if not, the reference signal processing ends.

Here, the "reference signal" refers to a signal sent by the launch control unit 630 to the frame control unit 600, and the launch control unit 630 sends the reference signal to the frame control unit 600 when it drives the ball feed solenoid 634 of the ball feed device 127 described using Figure 3 (when it discharges a gaming ball that has passed through the subtraction sensor 618 in the upper passage 736 into the launch device ball passage 748).

In step S202, the reference signal flag is set to ON and then reference signal processing is terminated.

<Frame control unit/game ball subtraction processing>
Next, the game ball subtraction process executed by the frame control unit 600 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game ball subtraction process executed by the frame control unit 600.

In step S301, it is determined whether the subtraction sensor signal output from the subtraction sensor 618 has changed from an ON level (e.g., a high level) to an OFF level (e.g., a low level) (whether the subtraction sensor 618 has detected a gaming ball). If this is the case (if the subtraction sensor 618 has detected a gaming ball), the process proceeds to step S302; if this is not the case (if the subtraction sensor 618 has not detected a gaming ball), the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S302, the process subtracts 1 from the game ball count data (game ball count data) stored in RAM 608, and then proceeds to step S304. In step S303, it is determined whether a predetermined period (e.g., 640 ms) has elapsed. If the predetermined period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S304; if not, the game ball subtraction process ends.

In step S304, the reference signal flag is set (reset) to OFF, and then the game ball subtraction process is terminated.

<Communication between the main control unit and the frame control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600 will be described.

As mentioned above, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600 is two-way communication, and the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600 are configured to be able to send and receive signals such as commands to and from each other.

Figure 7 shows the types of commands exchanged between the main control unit and the frame control unit. There are four types of commands that can be sent and received between the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600: gaming machine installation information notification command, gaming machine installation information response command, gaming machine information notification command, and gaming machine information response command.

<Communication between the main control unit and the frame control unit/gaming machine installation information notification command>
The gaming machine installation information notification command is a command sent from the main control unit 300 to the frame control unit 600, and is a command by which the main control unit 300 notifies the frame control unit 600 of "gaming machine installation information."

This "gaming machine installation information" includes information such as "gaming machine type," main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, and main control chip product code, and "gaming machine type" includes information that identifies the type of gaming machine (pachinko, slot, arrange ball, jan ball).

The gaming machine installation information notification command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the frame control unit 600 when the enclosed gaming machine 100 is powered on. After sending this command, the main control unit 300 sends this command to the frame control unit 600 a total of 10 times at 108 ms intervals until it receives a gaming machine installation information response command from the frame control unit 600.

If the main control unit 300 does not receive a gaming machine installation information response command from the frame control unit 600 within 1080 ms after starting to send this command, a disconnection error will occur and gameplay will be suspended until power is restored.

On the other hand, if the frame control unit 600 does not receive this command within 180 seconds (3 minutes) after startup, it will report a disconnection error, indicating that the communication line has been disconnected. Furthermore, if this command is received successfully from the main control unit 300 after the communication line has been disconnected, it will clear the disconnection error.

<Communication between the main control unit and the frame control unit/gaming machine installation information response command>
The gaming machine installation information response command is a command sent from the frame control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, and is a command that notifies the main control unit 300 that the frame control unit 600 has received the gaming machine installation information notification command.

The gaming machine installation information response command is sent from the frame control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 within 10 ms of receiving the gaming machine installation information notification command from the main control unit 300 after the enclosed gaming machine 100 is powered on.

<Communication between the main control unit and the frame control unit/gaming machine information notification command>
The gaming machine information notification command is a command sent from the main control unit 300 to the frame control unit 600, and is a command in which the main control unit 300 notifies the frame control unit 600 of gaming machine information such as the number of game balls, the number of counted balls, and the number of prize balls.

After receiving the gaming machine installation information response command from the frame control unit 600, the main control unit 300 transmits this command to the frame control unit 600 at intervals of 108 ms.

Note that this command is not sent every 108 ms after receiving the gaming machine installation information response command from the frame control unit 600, but rather the type of gaming machine installation information notification command sent every 108 ms is switched to the gaming machine information notification command in question and sent.

<Communication between the main control unit and the frame control unit/gaming machine information response command>
The gaming machine information response command is a command sent from the frame control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, and is a command that notifies the main control unit 300 of information such as the number of counted balls, the number of loaned balls, and the total number of prize balls included in the gaming machine information notification command.

The gaming machine information response command is sent from the frame control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 within 10 ms of receiving the gaming machine information notification command from the main control unit 300.

<Communication between the main control unit and the frame control unit / Example>
Next, a specific example of communication between the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600 will be described.

<Communication between the main control unit and the frame control unit/Communication after power-on>
8 is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication between the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600 in chronological order after the power is turned on for the enclosed gaming machine 100. In the following drawings, the word "command" may be omitted from each command name to make the drawings easier to read.

When the enclosed gaming machine 100 is powered on (T11) and the main control unit 300 is started up, it sends (notifies) a gaming machine installation information notification command (communication serial number = 0) to the frame control unit 600 (T12). The frame control unit 600 receives this gaming machine installation information notification command and then sends a gaming machine installation information response command (communication serial number = 0) to the main control unit 300 within 10 ms of receiving the command (T13). The main control unit 300, having received the gaming machine installation information response command, authorizes the launch of gaming balls. The communication serial number is reset to 0 when the power is turned on and is incremented by 1 each time a command is sent.

After that, after receiving the gaming machine installation information response command from the frame control unit 600, the main control unit 300 transmits a gaming machine information notification command to the frame control unit 600 at 108 ms intervals, instead of the gaming machine installation information notification command (T14, T16, T18). Meanwhile, the frame control unit 600 transmits a gaming machine information response command to the main control unit 300 within 10 ms of receiving the gaming machine information notification command (T15, T17, T19).

As mentioned above, if the frame control unit 600 fails to receive the gaming machine installation information notification command within 180 seconds (3 minutes) after startup, it will report a disconnection error, indicating that the communication line has been disconnected. Furthermore, if the frame control unit 600 successfully receives the gaming machine installation information notification command from the main control unit 300 after the communication line has been disconnected, it will clear the disconnection error.

To summarize the control of the frame control unit 600, when the frame control unit 600 receives a gaming machine information notification command from the main control unit 300, it adds the number of prize balls included in the command to the number of gaming balls, and displays this on the display device for the number of gaming balls, etc. Furthermore, in the gaming ball subtraction process described using FIG. 6, when the subtraction sensor 618 detects the launch of a gaming ball, the frame control unit 600 subtracts one from the number of gaming balls, and displays this on the display device for the number of gaming balls, etc. Furthermore, when the foul ball detection sensor 616 detects the passage of a gaming ball, the frame control unit 600 adds one to the number of gaming balls, and displays this on the display device for the number of gaming balls, etc.

Although not shown in the figure, when the main control unit 300 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the frame control unit 600, the frame control unit 600 may send the received prize ball information back to the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 may execute a process to check whether the prize ball information sent to the frame control unit 600 matches the prize ball information received from the frame control unit 600.

This configuration increases the reliability of the information sent and received by the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600, preventing fraudulent activities, communication failures, and other problems.

<Communication between the main control unit and the frame control unit/Communication line disconnection error by the main control unit>
9 is a sequence diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of communication when a communication line disconnection error occurs in the main control unit 300 during communication between the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600. In the following drawings, the gaming machine installation information notification command and the gaming machine information notification command may be collectively referred to as a "notification message," and the gaming machine installation information response command and the gaming machine information response command may be collectively referred to as a "response message."

If the main control unit 300 fails to receive a response message from the frame control unit 600 ten times in a row, it will detect a disconnection error, signal a disconnection error, and issue an error notification to notify the player of the disconnection error. The game will be suspended until power is restored.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T21 in FIG. 9, the main control unit 300 sent the nth notification message (communication serial number = n) to the frame control unit 600, but was unable to receive a response message (communication serial number = n) to that notification message. At the subsequent timing indicated by reference symbol T22, the main control unit 300 sent the n+1th notification message (communication serial number = n+1) to the frame control unit 600, but was unable to receive a response message (communication serial number = n+1) to that notification message. At the subsequent timing indicated by reference symbol T23, the main control unit 300 sent the n+2th notification message (communication serial number = n+2) to the frame control unit 600, but was unable to receive a response message (communication serial number = n+2) to that notification message.

After starting to send the nth notification message (communication serial number = n), the main control unit 300 sent the notification message to the frame control unit 600 a total of 10 times at 108 ms intervals. However, since it was unable to receive a response message from the frame control unit 600 10 times in a row over a period of 1080 ms (108 ms x 10 times), a disconnection error occurred at the timing indicated by reference symbol T24, indicating that the communication line had been disconnected. An error message was issued to notify the user of the disconnection error, and gameplay was suspended until power was restored.

If the main control unit 300 experiences a disconnection error, it is possible to recover from the disconnection error by turning the power to the enclosed gaming machine 100 off and then on again (re-powering it on). Once the power is turned on again, the main control unit 300 will restart the communication after power-on described using Figure 8 from the beginning.

<Communication between the main control unit and the frame control unit/Communication line disconnection error by the frame control unit>
FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram showing, in time series, an example of communication when a communication line disconnection error occurs in the frame control unit 600 during communication between the main control unit 300 and the frame control unit 600. In FIG.

If the frame control unit 600 does not receive the next notification message within 1000 ms after receiving a notification message (gaming machine installation information notification command or gaming machine information notification command), it will detect a disconnection error, indicating that the communication line has been disconnected, and will issue an error notification to notify the user of the disconnection error.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T31, the main control unit 300 sends the nth notification message (communication serial number = n) to the frame control unit 600, and at the subsequent timing indicated by reference symbol T32, the frame control unit 600 sends a response message (communication serial number = n) to the notification message to the main control unit 300. However, at the subsequent timings indicated by reference symbols T33 and T34, the main control unit 300 is unable to send the n+1th notification message (communication serial number = n+1) and the n+2nd notification message (communication serial number = n+2) to the frame control unit 600.

Since the frame control unit 600 received the notification message (communication serial number = n) at the timing indicated by reference symbol T31, it was unable to receive the next notification message (communication serial number = n+1, n+2, ...) for 1000 ms, and therefore at the timing indicated by reference symbol T35, a disconnection error occurred, indicating that the communication line had been disconnected, and an error notification was issued to notify the user of the disconnection error.

The frame control unit 600 can recover from a disconnection error if it successfully receives a notification message from the main control unit 300.

<Communication between the frame control unit and the rental device>
Next, communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 will be described.

As mentioned above, information communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 is two-way communication, and the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 are configured to be able to send and receive signals such as commands to and from each other.

Figure 11(a) is a diagram showing the types of commands exchanged between the slot control unit and the lending device. The four commands that can be sent and received between the slot control unit 600 and the lending device 614 are the gaming machine information notification command, the counting notification command, the lending notification command, and the lending receipt result response command.

<Communication between frame control unit and rental device/gaming machine information notification command>
The gaming machine information notification command is a command sent from the frame control unit 600 to the lending device 614, and periodically sends commands related to three types of gaming machines.

Figure 11(b) shows the types of gaming machine information notification commands.

Gaming machine information notification commands can be broadly divided into three types: hall control/fraud monitoring information commands, gaming machine installation information commands, and gaming machine performance information commands. Hall control/fraud monitoring information commands can be further divided into two types: hall control/fraud monitoring information commands (main control status updated or game information included) and hall control/fraud monitoring information commands (main control status not updated and no game information included).

The "priority" shown in Figure 11(b) indicates the priority when sending commands. If the transmission timing of multiple types of commands overlaps, the command with the highest "priority" will be sent first. In this example, the transmission priority is highest in the following order: 1: Hall control/fraud monitoring information command (main control status updated or game information available), 2: gaming machine installation information command, 3: gaming machine performance information command, 4: Hall control/fraud monitoring information command (main control status not updated and no game information available).

The "Notification Conditions" shown in Figure 11(b) indicate the conditions (timing) for sending each command. In this example, the slot control unit 600 sends a hole control/fraud monitoring information command (main control status update or game play information) to the rental device 614 every 300 ms after the enclosed gaming machine 100 has finished booting up, and sends a gaming machine installation information command to the rental device 614 every 60 seconds after the enclosed gaming machine 100 has finished booting up.

In addition, a gaming machine performance information command is sent to the rental device 614 every 180 seconds after the enclosed gaming machine 100 has completed startup, and a hall control/fraud monitoring information command (no update of the main control status and no game information) is sent to the rental device 614 every 300 ms after the enclosed gaming machine 100 has completed startup.

The "Contents" shown in Figure 11 (b) indicate the information sent with each command. For example, a hall control/fraud monitoring information command (with main control status update or game information) sends the number of game balls, number of balls fired, total number of winning balls, main control status, gaming machine error status, fraud detection status, performance information status notification, game information, etc.

Here, the "number of gaming balls" refers to the number of balls held (the number of balls held in the gaming machine), and the "number of fired balls" is a value calculated by adding +1 when the gaming ball passes through the subtraction sensor 618 and subtracting -1 when the gaming ball passes through the foul ball detection sensor 616, and is cleared to 0 after the gaming machine information notification command is sent. The "total number of prize balls" refers to the total number of "prize balls" since the enclosed gaming machine 100 was powered on.

"Main control status" includes information such as jackpot signal 1 (during a specific jackpot), jackpot signal 2 (during all jackpots), jackpot signal 3 (during time-saving mode, during special mode), high probability mode, during time-saving mode, during special mode or advantageous mode, jackpot + time-saving mode, during special mode or advantageous mode, and firing stop request. "Machine error status" includes information such as the type of error that has occurred, and "fraud detection status" includes information such as settings being changed/checked, RAM being cleared, an error occurring, and the complete function being activated. "Performance information status notification" includes information such as not using time-saving mode, time-saving mode, during a jackpot, low probability, and high probability, and "game information" includes information such as winning at each winning slot, the number of times a pattern has been determined, and the number of jackpots.

The hall control/fraud monitoring information command (no update to main control status and no game information) transmits all information other than the main control status and game information that is transmitted by the hall control/fraud monitoring information command (main control status updated or game information present).

The gaming machine installation information command transmits the total number of game balls fired, the total number of game balls won, the payout rate, the number of game balls won per minute (low base), the ratio of special features, the ratio of consecutive special features, the number of jackpots, etc.

Here, "total number of game balls fired" is the total number of "balls fired" since the enclosed gaming machine 100 was powered on. "Total number of game balls acquired" is the total number of game balls acquired since the enclosed gaming machine 100 was powered on. "Ball payout rate" is a value calculated by (total number of game balls acquired / total number of game balls fired) x 100, and "number of game balls acquired per minute (low base)" is a value calculated by (total number of game balls acquired during low base / total number of game balls fired during low base) x 100. "Gem ratio" is a value calculated by (game balls acquired by mechanism operation / total number of game balls acquired) x 100, and "continuous mechanism ratio" is a value calculated by (number of game balls acquired by mechanism operation / total number of game balls acquired) x 100.

The gaming machine performance information command transmits the main control unit/frame control unit CPU chip ID, chip manufacturer code, chip product code, etc.

<Communication between the frame control unit and the rental device/count notification command>
The counting notification command is a command sent from the frame control unit 600 to the lending device 614, and is a command that includes information such as the number of balls counted and the cumulative number of balls counted.

Here, "counted ball count" is the number of game balls to be counted (0-250 balls), and information indicating 0 balls is sent even if the count button 617 is not operated. "Cumulative counted ball count" is the cumulative number of "counted balls" since the enclosed gaming machine 100 was powered on, and is cleared to 0 after the enclosed gaming machine 100 is powered on.

The frame control unit 600 sends this command to the lending device 614 at intervals of 300 ms within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command.

<Communication between frame control unit and rental device/rental notification command>
The loan notification command is a command sent from the loan device 614 to the frame control unit 600, and includes information on the number of loaned balls.

Here, "number of loaned balls" refers to the number of gaming balls loaned from the loaning device 614 to the enclosed gaming machine 100.

The rental device 614 sends this command to the quota control unit 600 within 170 ms of receiving the count notification command from the quota control unit 600.

<Communication between frame control unit and rental device/rental receipt result response command>
The loan receipt result response command is a command sent from the frame control unit 600 to the loan device 614, and is a command that includes information such as the loan ball number receipt result (the result of whether or not information such as the loan ball number was received successfully).

The frame control unit 600 sends this command to the rental device 614 within 10 ms of receiving the rental notification command from the rental device 614.

<Communication between the frame control unit and the rental device / Example>
Next, a specific example of communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 will be described.

<Communication between the frame control unit and the rental device/basic communication (no game information)>
12 is a sequence diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of basic communication (without game information) between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614. In the following drawings, the word "command" may be omitted from each command name to make the drawings easier to read.

The frame control unit 600 transmits the hole control/fraud monitoring information command, which is one of the gaming machine information notification commands, to the lending device 614 at intervals of 300 ms after the start-up of the enclosed gaming machine 100 is complete, and then transmits the counting report notification command to the lending device 614 at intervals of 300 ms during a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification command.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T41, the start-up of the enclosed gaming machine 100 is completed, and the frame control unit 600 sends the hall control/fraud monitoring information command from the gaming machine information notification command. However, since the main control status from the gaming machine information has not been updated and there is no gaming information, the frame control unit 600 sends the hall control/fraud monitoring information command from the gaming machine information notification command (main control status has not been updated and there is no gaming information) to the lending device 614.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T42, the frame control unit 600 transmits a counting notification command to the lending device 614 within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification command.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T43, the lending device 614 receives a counting notification command from the quota control unit 600, and transmits a lending notification command to the quota control unit 600 within 170 ms of receiving the command. At the timing indicated by reference symbol T44, the quota control unit 600 receives a lending notification command from the lending device 614, and transmits a lending receipt result response command to the lending device 614 within 10 ms of receiving the command.

After that, if the main control status in the gaming machine information has not been updated and there is no gaming information, the frame control unit 600 will send the hall control/fraud monitoring information command (main control status has not been updated and there is no gaming information) from the gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 at 300 ms intervals, and then send a counting notification command to the lending device 614. Upon receiving the counting notification command, the lending device 614 will send a lending notification command to the frame control unit 600, and upon receiving the lending notification command, the frame control unit 600 will send a lending receipt result response command to the lending device 614.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T45, 60 seconds have passed since the start-up of the enclosed gaming machine 100 was completed, and the gaming machine installation information command of the gaming machine information notification command is transmitted to the rental device 614.
At the timing indicated by symbol T46, 180 seconds have passed since the enclosed gaming machine 100 completed its startup, and so an attempt is made to send the gaming machine performance information command among the gaming machine information notification commands to the rental device 614. However, in this example, the timing of the transmission of the gaming machine installation information command (priority 2), which has a higher priority than the gaming machine performance information command (priority 3), overlaps, so the gaming machine installation information command among the gaming machine information notification commands is given priority and sent to the rental device 614 first.

After sending the gaming machine installation information command, the slot control unit 600 sends a counting notification command to the rental device 614. Upon receiving the counting notification command, the rental device 614 sends a rental notification command to the slot control unit 600. Upon receiving the rental notification command, the slot control unit 600 sends a rental receipt result response command to the rental device 614.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T47, the gaming machine performance information command, whose transmission timing overlaps with the gaming machine installation information command, is transmitted to the rental device 614 300 ms after the timing indicated by reference symbol T46.

Although not shown in the figure, after sending the gaming machine performance information command, the frame control unit 600 sends a counting notification command to the lending device 614, and the lending device 614, having received the counting notification command, sends a lending notification command to the frame control unit 600, and the frame control unit 600, having received the lending notification command, sends a lending receipt result response command to the lending device 614.

To summarize the control of the frame control unit 600, when the count button 617 is pressed, the frame control unit 600 transmits the counted number of balls to the lending device 614, subtracts the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, and displays the number of game balls after subtraction on the game ball number display device.

If the counting button 617 is pressed briefly, data indicating 1 ball is sent to the lending device 614, and 1 is subtracted from the number of game balls, which is then displayed on the game ball count display device. If the counting button 617 is pressed and held, data indicating a maximum of 250 balls is sent to the lending device 614 (if the number of game balls is less than 250, data indicating the total number of game balls is sent to the lending device 614), and a maximum of 250 is subtracted from the number of game balls (if the number of game balls is less than 250, the total number is subtracted from the number of game balls), which is then displayed on the game ball count display device.

In addition, when the frame control unit 600 receives the number of loaned balls from the loaning device 614, it displays the sum of the number of loaned balls and the current number of game balls as the new number of game balls on the game ball number display device.

<Communication between slot control unit and rental device/priority transmission of gaming machine information notification (with gaming information)>
FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram showing an example of priority transmission of a gaming machine information notification command (with gaming information) in communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 in chronological order.

The frame control unit 600 transmits the hall control/fraud monitoring information command, which is one of the gaming machine information notification commands, to the lending device 614 at intervals of 300 ms after the enclosed gaming machine 100 has completed booting, and transmits the gaming machine installation information command, which is one of the gaming machine information notification commands, to the lending device 614 at intervals of 60 seconds after the enclosed gaming machine 100 has completed booting.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T52, 60 seconds have passed since the enclosed gaming machine 100 completed its startup, and an attempt is made to send the gaming machine installation information command, one of the gaming machine information notification commands, to the lending device 614. However, in this example, gaming information is held at that time, and the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information command (with gaming information) (priority 1), which has a higher priority than the gaming machine installation information command (priority 2), overlaps, so the hall control/fraud monitoring information command (with gaming information), one of the gaming machine information notification commands, is given priority and sent to the lending device 614 first.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T53, the game information held by the frame control unit 600 is exhausted, so a gaming machine installation information command whose transmission timing overlaps with the hall control/fraud monitoring information command (game information present) is transmitted to the rental device 614 300 ms after the timing indicated by reference symbol T52.

In addition, the frame control unit 600 transmits the gaming machine performance information command, which is part of the gaming machine information notification command, to the lending device 614 at intervals of 180 seconds after the enclosed gaming machine 100 has completed startup.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T54, 180 seconds have passed since the enclosed gaming machine 100 completed its startup, and an attempt is made to send the gaming machine performance information command, which is one of the gaming machine information notification commands, to the lending device 614. However, in this example, the frame control unit 600 is holding gaming information at that time, and the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information command (with gaming information) (priority 1), which has a higher priority than the gaming machine performance information command (priority 3), overlaps, so the hall control/fraud monitoring information command (with gaming information), which is one of the gaming machine information notification commands, is given priority and sent to the lending device 614 first.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T55, the game information held by the frame control unit 600 is exhausted, so a gaming machine performance information command whose transmission timing overlaps with the hall control/fraud monitoring information command (game information present) is transmitted to the rental device 614 300 ms after the timing indicated by reference symbol T54.

<Communication between the slot control unit and the rental device/count notification>
FIG. 14 is a sequence diagram showing an example of count notification in communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614 in chronological order.

This example shows a count notification when the count button 617 of the enclosed gaming machine 100 is pressed and held, and 250 balls are counted twice (500 balls in total).

Specifically, at the timing indicated by symbol T1a, when the number of game balls is 1,000 and the cumulative counted balls is 0, the first "long press" of the counting button 617 is received, so the number of counted balls is set to "250," which represents 250 balls, and the cumulative counted balls is updated to 250 by adding 250 counted balls to the cumulative counted balls of 0.

At the timing indicated by symbol T1b, the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as serial number = n (n is a positive integer) and number of gaming balls = 1,000. Then, at the timing indicated by symbol T1c, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, the frame control unit 600 sends a count notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as counting serial number = m (m is a positive integer), number of counted balls = 250, and cumulative counted number of balls = 250. Then, the frame control unit 600 subtracts 250 counted balls from 1,000 to update the number of gaming balls to 750.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T1d, the rental device 614 receives the counting notification command and adds the counted balls of 250 contained in the received counting notification command to the number of balls held before receiving the counting notification command, which was 100, updating the number of balls held to 350. Since the number of loaned balls is 0, the rental notification command containing the information loan serial number = k (k is a positive integer) and number of loaned balls = 0 is sent to the frame control unit 600.

At the timing indicated by symbol T1e, the slot control unit 600 receives the loan notification command and sends a loan receipt result response command to the loan device 614, including the information that the loan serial number = k and the loan ball number receipt result = normal.

After that, in this example, the counting button 617 continues to be pressed and held when the number of game balls is 750 and the cumulative counted balls is 250. When the counting button 617 is pressed and held a second time, the number of counted balls is set to "250," which represents 250 balls, and the cumulative counted balls is updated to 500 by adding 250 counted balls to the cumulative counted balls of 250.

At the timing indicated by symbol T1f, the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as serial number = n+1 and number of gaming balls = 750. Then, at the timing indicated by symbol T1g, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, the frame control unit 600 sends a count notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 250, and cumulative number of counted balls = 500. Then, the frame control unit 600 subtracts 250 counted balls from 750 gaming balls to update the number of gaming balls to 500.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T1h, the rental device 614 receives the count notification command and adds the counted balls of 250 contained in the received count notification command to the number of balls held before receiving the count notification command, which was 350, updating the number of balls held to 600. Since the number of loaned balls is 0, the rental device 614 also sends a rental notification command to the frame control unit 600 containing the information: rental serial number = k+1, number of loaned balls = 0.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T1i, the slot control unit 600 receives the loan notification command and sends a loan receipt result response command to the loan device 614, including the information that the loan serial number = k+1 and the loan ball number receipt result = normal.

At the timing indicated by symbol T1j, the long press of the counting button 617 is released, and at the subsequent timing indicated by symbol T1k, the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification to the lending device 614 including information such as serial number = n+2 and number of gaming balls = 500. Then, at the subsequent timing indicated by symbol T1l, during a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, it sends a counting notification command to the lending device 614 including information such as counting serial number = m+2, number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative number of counted balls = 500. However, because the number of counted balls is 0, the number of gaming balls is maintained at 500.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T1m, the rental device 614 receives the count notification command. Since the counted number of balls is 0, the rental device 614 maintains the number of balls in its possession at 600. Since the number of loaned balls is 0, the rental device 614 sends a rental notification command to the frame control unit 600 containing the information rental serial number = k + 2 and number of loaned balls = 0.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T1n, the slot control unit 600 receives the loan notification command and sends a loan receipt result response command to the loan device 614, including the information that the loan serial number = k+2 and the loan ball number receipt result = normal.

<Communication between the frame control unit and the rental device/rental notification>
FIG. 15 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a lending notification in communication between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 in chronological order.

This example shows a loan notification when the loan button 614a on the loan device 614 is operated and 125 balls are loaned once.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T2a, the lending device 614 accepts operation of the lending button 614a and updates the number of balls lent to 125.

At the timing indicated by symbol T2b, since the number of gaming balls is 50, the frame control unit 600 transmits a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 including information such as serial number = n (n is a positive integer) and number of gaming balls = 50. Then, at the timing indicated by symbol T2c, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification command, it transmits a count notification command to the lending device 614 including information such as counting serial number = m (m is a positive integer), number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative counted number of balls = 0.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T2d, the rental device 614 receives the counting notification command and sends a rental notification command containing information such as rental serial number = k (k is a positive integer) and number of loaned balls = 125 to the frame control unit 600 within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification command.

At the timing indicated by symbol T2e, the frame control unit 600, which has received the loan notification command, adds the number of loaned balls (125) included in the received loan notification command to the number of game balls (50) to update the number of game balls to 175, and sends a loan receipt result response command containing information such as loan serial number = k and loaned ball number receipt result = normal to the loaning device 614 within 10 ms of receiving the loan notification command. This allows the loaning device 614 to confirm that the frame control unit 600 has successfully received information such as the number of loaned balls.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T2f, the number of gaming balls is 175, so the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification to the rental device 614, including information such as serial number = n+1 and number of gaming balls = 175.

<Communication/Disconnection Between Frame Control Unit and Rental Device>
16 and 17 are sequence diagrams showing, in time series, an example of a case where communication interruption occurs in communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614. FIG.

This example shows communication when a communication interruption (cable disconnection) occurs between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614.

At the timing indicated by symbol T3a, the number of gaming balls is 1,000, so the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as serial number = n (n is a positive integer) and number of gaming balls = 1,000.Then, at the timing indicated by symbol T3b, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, it sends a count notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as counting serial number = m (m is a positive integer), number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative counted number of balls = 0.

Furthermore, at the timing indicated by symbol T3c, the lending device 614 receives the counting notification command, and since the number of loaned balls is 0, it sends a loan notification command to the frame control unit 600 including information such as loan serial number = k (k is a positive integer) and number of loaned balls = 0; at the timing indicated by symbol T3d, the frame control unit 600 receives the loan notification command, and sends a loan receipt result response command to the lending device 614 including information such as loan serial number = k (k is a positive integer) and loaned ball number receipt result = normal; and at the timing indicated by symbol T3e, it sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 including information such as serial number = n+1 and number of gaming balls = 1000.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T3f, a communication interruption (cable disconnection) occurred in the communication between the frame control unit 600 and the rental device 614, and thereafter the frame control unit 600 set VL=OFF (disabled to fire, counting button disabled), and the rental device 614 set VL=OFF (disabled to fire) and PSI=OFF (counting button disabled).

At the timing indicated by symbol T3g, the counting button is disabled, so a counting notification command containing the information counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative number of counted balls = 0 is sent to the rental device 614. However, due to a communication interruption (cable disconnection), the rental device 614 is unable to receive the command correctly.

Furthermore, at the timing indicated by symbol T3h, the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as serial number = n+2 and number of gaming balls = 1000, and then at the subsequent timing indicated by symbol T3i, during a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, it sends a counting notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as counting serial number = m+2, number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative counted number of balls = 0; however, due to a communication interruption (cable disconnection), the lending device 614 is unable to receive these commands correctly.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T3j in Figure 17, an amusement parlor staff member checks the number of game balls, resolves the communication interruption (cable disconnection), and restores the cable, so the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 are in VL=ON (game ball launch permitted state) and PSI=ON (counting button enabled state). Note that in the lending device 614, after VL=ON (game ball launch permitted state) is reached, an amusement parlor staff member checks the cable connection status.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T3k, the number of gaming balls is 1,000, so the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 containing the information serial number = n+3 and number of gaming balls = 1,000.Then, at the timing indicated by reference symbol T3l, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, it sends a counting notification command to the lending device 614 containing the information counting serial number = m+3, number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative counted number of balls = 0.

Furthermore, at the timing indicated by symbol T3m, the rental device 614 receives the counting notification command and resets the rental serial number to 0 since a communication interruption (cable disconnection) has occurred, and since the number of rental balls is 0, it sends a rental notification command to the frame control unit 600 containing the information rental serial number = 0 and number of rental balls = 0.At the timing indicated by symbol T3n, the frame control unit 600 receives the rental notification command and sets the rental serial number to the last rental serial number k sent (rental serial number k of the rental receipt result response command sent at the timing indicated by symbol T3d), and then sends a rental receipt result response command to the rental device 614 containing the information rental serial number = k and rental ball number receipt result = normal.

At the timing indicated by symbol T3o, a gaming machine information notification command including the information serial number = n+4 and number of gaming balls = 1000 is sent to the lending device 614, and at the timing indicated by symbol T3p, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, a counting notification command including the information counting serial number = m+4, number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative counted number of balls = 0 is sent to the lending device 614.

Furthermore, at the timing indicated by symbol T3q, the rental device 614 receives the counting notification command, and since the cable has been restored, adds 1 to the rental serial number k to update it to k+1.Since the number of rental balls is 0, it sends a rental notification command to the frame control unit 600 containing the information rental serial number = k+1 and number of rental balls = 0.At the timing indicated by symbol T3r, the frame control unit 600 receives the rental notification command, and sends a rental receipt result response command to the rental device 614 containing the information rental serial number = k+1 and rental ball number receipt result = normal.

<Communication error between the frame control unit and the rental device/count notification>
FIG. 18 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a communication abnormality in the count notification between the slot control unit 600 and the rental device 614 in chronological order.

This example shows a count notification when a "long press" operation is performed on the counting button 617 of the enclosed gaming machine 100, 250 balls are counted once (a total of 250 balls), and a communication error occurs while the "long press" operation is continuing.

Specifically, at the timing indicated by reference symbol T4a, when the number of game balls is 1,000 and the cumulative counted balls is 0, the first "long press" of the counting button 617 is received, so the number of counted balls is set to "250," which represents 250 balls, and the cumulative counted balls is updated to 250 by adding 250 counted balls to the cumulative counted balls of 0.

At the timing indicated by symbol T4b, the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as serial number = n (n is a positive integer) and number of gaming balls = 1,000. Then, at the timing indicated by symbol T4c, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, the frame control unit 600 sends a count notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as counting serial number = m (m is a positive integer), number of counted balls = 250, and cumulative counted number of balls = 250. Then, the frame control unit 600 subtracts 250 counted balls from 1,000 to update the number of gaming balls to 750.

At the timing indicated by symbol T4d, the rental device 614 receives the counting notification command and adds the counted balls of 250 contained in the received counting notification command to the number of balls held before receiving the counting notification command, which was 100, updating the number of balls held to 350. Since the number of loaned balls is 0, the rental notification command containing the information loan serial number = k (k is a positive integer) and number of loaned balls = 0 is sent to the frame control unit 600.

At the timing indicated by symbol T4e, the slot control unit 600 receives the loan notification command and sends a loan receipt result response command to the loan device 614, including the information that the loan serial number = k and the loan ball number receipt result = normal.

In this example, the counting button 617 continues to be pressed and held when the number of game balls is 750 and the cumulative counted balls is 250. When the counting button 617 is pressed and held a second time, the number of counted balls is set to "250," which represents 250 balls, and the cumulative counted balls is updated to 500 by adding 250 counted balls to the cumulative counted balls of 250.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T4f, the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as serial number = n+1 and number of gaming balls = 750. Then, at the timing indicated by reference symbol T4g, during a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, the frame control unit 600 sends a count notification command to the lending device 614 containing information such as counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 250, and cumulative number of counted balls = 500. Then, the frame control unit 600 subtracts 250 counted balls from 750 to update the number of gaming balls to 500. However, due to a communication error, the lending device 614 is unable to receive the command correctly.

Furthermore, at the timing indicated by the symbol T4h, the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command containing information such as serial number = n+2 and number of gaming balls = 500 to the rental device 614, but due to a communication abnormality, the rental device 614 is unable to receive the command correctly.

Meanwhile, the lending device 614 detects a communication abnormality because it is unable to properly receive the gaming machine information notification command from the frame control unit 600, and sets VL=OFF (unable to fire) and PSI=OFF (counting button disabled) up to 300 ms after detecting the communication abnormality. Also, because the frame control unit 600 is unable to properly receive the lending notification command in response to the counting notification command from the lending device 614, it sets VL=OFF (unable to fire, counting button disabled).

In the frame control unit 600, since the counting button 617 was disabled, the number of counted balls was reset from 250 to 0, and then at the timing indicated by symbol T4i, a counting notification command containing the information counting serial number = m + 2, number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative counted balls = 500 was sent to the rental device 614. However, due to a communication abnormality, the rental device 614 was unable to receive these commands correctly.

At the timing indicated by symbol T4j, an amusement parlor employee checks the number of game balls and the number of balls in hand, and the system waits for the communication error to be resolved until the communication error is resolved. Once the communication error is resolved, the dispensing device 614 sets VL=ON (game ball release permitted) and PSI=ON (counting button enabled).

<Communication between the frame control unit and the rental device/Communication error during rental notification>
FIG. 19 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a communication abnormality in a lending notification between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 in time series.

This example shows a rental notification when a communication error occurs when the rental button 614a on the rental device 614 is operated and 125 balls are loaned once.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T5a, the lending device 614 accepts operation of the lending button 614a and updates the number of balls lent to 125.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T5b, since the number of gaming balls is 50, the frame control unit 600 transmits a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 including information such as serial number = n (n is a positive integer) and number of gaming balls = 50. Then, at the timing indicated by reference symbol T5c, the frame control unit 600 transmits a counting notification command to the lending device 614 including information such as counting serial number = m (m is a positive integer), number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative counted number of balls = 0 within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification command.

At the timing indicated by symbol T5d, the rental device 614 receives the counting notification command and sends a rental notification command containing information such as rental serial number = k (k is a positive integer) and number of loaned balls = 125 to the frame control unit 600 within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification command.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T5e, the frame control unit 600 receives the loan notification command, adds the number of loaned balls (125) included in the command to the number of game balls (50) to update the number of game balls to 175, and sends a loan receipt result response command containing information such as loan serial number = k and loaned ball number receipt result = normal to the loan device 614 within 10 ms of receiving the loan notification command. However, in this example, due to a communication abnormality, the loan device 614 is unable to receive the command normally.

The quota control unit 600 sends a loan receipt result response command to the loan device 614 within 10 ms of receiving a loan notification command from the loan device 614. However, in this example, at the timing indicated by symbol T5f, the loan device 614 has not received a loan receipt result response command from the quota control unit 600 even though more than 10 ms has passed since sending the loan notification command to the quota control unit 600. Therefore, it determines that the loan processing is not complete and continues the loan processing.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T5g, since the number of gaming balls is 175, the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification to the lending device 614 including the information serial number = n+1 and number of gaming balls = 175. Then, at the timing indicated by reference symbol T5h, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, it sends a counting notification command to the lending device 614 including the information counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative counted number of balls = 0.

The lending device 614 was unable to successfully receive the loan receipt result response command in response to the loan notification command sent at the timing indicated by reference symbol T5d, and it was unclear whether the slot control unit 600 had successfully received the loan notification command. Therefore, at the timing indicated by reference symbol T5i, the same k was set again as the loan serial number, and a loan notification command containing the information loan serial number = k and number of loaned balls = 125 was sent to the slot control unit 600 within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification command.

The slot control unit 600 checks the continuity of the loan serial numbers included in the loan notification command, and if the loan serial numbers are not consecutive, it sends a loan receipt result response command containing information indicating that the loan ball count receipt result is abnormal.

In this example, the frame control unit 600 receives a loan notification command from the loaning device 614 at the timing indicated by symbol T5i, which includes information such as loan serial number = k and number of loaned balls = 125.Since there is no continuity with the loan serial number k included in the previous loan notification command received at the timing indicated by symbol T5d (the loan serial number is not k+1), at the timing indicated by symbol T5j, it sends a loan receipt result response command to the loaning device 614 within 10 ms of receiving the loan notification command, which includes information such as loan serial number = k and loaned ball number receipt result = abnormal.

On the other hand, if the loan serial number included in the loan receipt result response command received from the quota control unit 600 matches the loan serial number included in the previously sent loan notification command, the loan device 614 determines that the quota control unit 600 has successfully received the loan notification command and completes the loan processing.

In this example, when the lending device 614 receives a loan receipt result response command from the quota control unit 600 at the timing indicated by symbol T5j, it determines that the quota control unit 600 has successfully received the loan notification command, as the loan serial number k contained in the loan receipt result response command matches the loan serial number k contained in the previous loan notification command sent to the quota control unit 600 at the timing indicated by symbol T5i, and completes the loan processing.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T5k, the number of gaming balls is 175, so the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification to the lending device 614, including information on serial number = n+1 and number of gaming balls = 175.

<Communication between the frame control unit and the rental device/during play>
FIG. 20 is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 during a game in chronological order.

This example is an example of communication that occurs when a game is played on the enclosed gaming machine 100, and a gaming ball is launched toward the gaming board 200, or a gaming ball (foul ball) that does not reach the gaming board 200 is detected.

Here, the "total number of fired game balls" in Figure 20 is the total number of "fired balls" since the enclosed game machine 100 was turned on, and the "number of fired balls" is a value calculated by adding +1 when a game ball passes the subtraction sensor 618 and subtracting -1 when a game ball passes the foul ball detection sensor 616.

At the timing indicated by symbol T6a, the number of gaming balls is 1,000, so the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614, including information such as serial number = n (n is a positive integer) and number of gaming balls = 1,000.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T6b, the frame control unit 600 transmits a counting notification command to the lending device 614 within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification command, including the information that the counting serial number = m (m is a positive integer), the number of counted balls = 0, and the cumulative number of counted balls = 0. After that, since one gaming ball has been fired toward the gaming board 200 (the gaming ball has passed the subtraction sensor 618), the number of fired balls is set to 1 and the number of gaming balls is updated from 1000 to 999 by subtracting 1 from the number of gaming balls.

At the timing indicated by symbol T6c, the lending device 614 receives the counting notification command and, since the number of loaned balls is 0, sends a loan notification command to the frame control unit 600 containing information such as loan serial number = k (k is a positive integer) and number of loaned balls = 0.At the timing indicated by symbol T6d, the frame control unit 600 receives the loan notification command and sends a loan receipt result response command to the lending device 614 containing information such as loan serial number = k and loaned ball number receipt result = normal.

At the timing indicated by symbol T6e, the number of game balls is 999 and the number of balls fired is 1, so the frame control unit 600 sends a game machine information notification command to the rental device 614 containing the information: serial number = n+1, number of game balls = 999, number of balls fired = 1. Upon receiving this command, the rental device 614 adds 1 to the total number of balls fired, which is 100, thereby updating the total number of balls fired to 101.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T6f, the frame control unit 600, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, sends a count notification command to the lending device 614 containing the information: count serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative number of counted balls = 0. After that, it detects one foul ball (a gaming ball passes through the foul ball detection sensor 616), so it sets the number of fired balls to -1 and adds 1 to the number of gaming balls of 999, updating the number of gaming balls to 1,000.

At the timing indicated by symbol T6g, the lending device 614 receives the counting notification command and, since the number of loaned balls is 0, sends a loan notification command to the frame control unit 600 containing information such as loan serial number = k+1 and number of loaned balls = 0.At the timing indicated by symbol T6h, the frame control unit 600 receives the loan notification command and sends a loan receipt result response command to the lending device 614 containing information such as loan serial number = k+1 and loaned ball number receipt result = normal.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T6i, the number of game balls is 1,000 and the number of balls fired is -1, so the frame control unit 600 sends a game machine information notification command to the rental device 614, including the information: serial number = n+2, number of game balls = 1,000, and number of balls fired = -1. Upon receiving this command, the rental device 614 adds the -1 number of balls fired included in the command to the total number of balls fired of 101, updating the total number of balls fired to 100.

After that, one game ball was fired toward the game board 200 (the game ball passed through the subtraction sensor 618), so the frame control unit 600 set the number of fired balls to 1 and subtracted 1 from the number of game balls, updating the number of game balls from 1,000 to 999.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T6j, the frame control unit 600, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, sends a count notification command to the lending device 614 containing the information that the count serial number = m + 2, the number of counted balls = 0, and the cumulative number of counted balls = 0. After that, it detects one foul ball (the gaming ball passes through the foul ball detection sensor 616), and updates the number of fired balls from 1 to 0, and adds 1 to the number of gaming balls to update the number of gaming balls from 999 to 1000.

At the timing indicated by symbol T6k, the lending device 614 receives the counting notification command and, since the number of loaned balls is 0, sends a loan notification command to the frame control unit 600 containing information such as loan serial number = k+2 and number of loaned balls = 0.At the timing indicated by symbol T6l, the frame control unit 600 receives the loan notification command and sends a loan receipt result response command to the lending device 614 containing information such as loan serial number = k+2 and loaned ball number receipt result = normal.

At the timing indicated by the symbol T6m, the number of game balls is 1,000 and the number of balls fired is 0 (= 1 (fired) - 1 (foul ball)), so the frame control unit 600 sends a game machine information notification command to the lending device 614, including the information: serial number = n + 3, number of game balls = 1,000, and number of balls fired = 0.

<Communication between the frame control unit and the lending device/When an increase in the number of game balls and a short press of the counting button occur at the same time>
FIG. 21 is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 in chronological order when an increase in the number of game balls occurs at the same time as a short press of the counting button.

This example is an example of communication that occurs when the timing of an increase in the number of game balls due to a prize ball and the timing of counting due to a short press of the counting button 617 overlap in an enclosed gaming machine 100. Note that while this example describes an example in which the number of game balls increases due to a prize ball, the same applies when the number of game balls increases due to a foul ball.

At the timing indicated by symbol T7a, the number of game balls is 0, so the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 including information such as serial number = n (n is a positive integer) and number of game balls = 0.After that, at the timing indicated by symbol T7b, the number of game balls has increased by 1 due to a prize ball, so the frame control unit 600 adds 1 to the number of game balls to update the number of game balls from 0 to 1.

In addition, in this example, when the number of game balls is 1 and the cumulative number of counted balls is 0, the first "short press" of the counting button 617 is accepted at the timing indicated by reference symbol T7c immediately after the winning ball.

However, since the numerical value 1 (planned count number), which indicates one ball counted in response to the "short press" of the counting button 617, is greater than the number of game balls, 0, sent in the gaming machine information notification command sent at the timing shown by reference symbol T7a, in this example, the numerical value 1, which indicates one ball counted in response to the "short press" of the counting button 617, is not set as the number of game balls counted, but 0 is set as the planned correction data for the count data (number of balls counted) (step S103 of the counting process shown in Figure 4), and at the timing shown by reference symbol T7d, a count notification command is sent to the lending device 614 containing the information: counting serial number = m (m is a positive integer), number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative number of counted balls = 0.

In other words, in this example, in a situation where the detection means (ball detection sensor) detects gaming balls during a predetermined period and the gaming ball count data (data on the number of gaming balls) increases (a situation where the number of gaming balls increases by one due to a winning ball, as shown by symbol T7b in Figure 21), if a counting process is executed during the predetermined period in response to the operation of a predetermined operating means (counting button 617), the value (the numerical value 1 indicating one ball) corresponding to the operation of the predetermined operating means (counting button 617) may not be counted.

In this example, if the number of gaming balls increases during a specified period after sending gaming ball count data information (gaming machine information notification command) to the external device (rental device 614) and before sending count data information (count notification command), it is possible to prevent the sending of more count data information than gaming ball count data information.This prevents the sending of information that could lead the external device to mistakenly believe it is fraud or a malfunction, allowing for smooth operation of the gaming machine.

At the timing indicated by symbol T7e, the lending device 614 receives the counting notification command and, since the number of loaned balls is 0, sends a loan notification command to the frame control unit 600 containing information such as loan serial number = k (k is a positive integer) and number of loaned balls = 0.At the timing indicated by symbol T7f, the frame control unit 600 receives the loan notification command and sends a loan receipt result response command to the lending device 614 containing information such as loan serial number = k and loaned ball number receipt result = normal.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T7g, since the number of gaming balls is 1, the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 including the information serial number = n+1 and number of gaming balls = 1. Then, at the timing indicated by reference symbol T7h, since the planned correction data for the counting data (number of counted balls) is set to 0, the frame control unit 600 sends a counting notification command to the lending device 614 including the information counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative counted number of balls = 0 during a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command.

Furthermore, the frame control unit 600 accepts a second "short press" of the count button 617 at the timing indicated by reference symbol T7i.

In this case, the number 1 (planned count number) indicating one ball, which is the count in response to the "short press" of the count button 617, is not greater than the number of game balls, 1, sent in the gaming machine information notification command sent at the timing shown by symbol T7g. Therefore, in this example, the number of counted balls is set to "1," which indicates one ball, and the cumulative counted ball number is updated to 1 by adding 1 to the cumulative counted ball number of 0.

At the timing indicated by symbol T7j, the lending device 614 receives the counting notification command and, since the number of loaned balls is 0, sends a loan notification command to the frame control unit 600 containing information such as loan serial number = k+1 and number of loaned balls = 0.At the timing indicated by symbol T7k, the frame control unit 600 receives the loan notification command and sends a loan receipt result response command to the lending device 614 containing information such as loan serial number = k+1 and loaned ball number receipt result = normal.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T7l, the number of gaming balls is 1, so the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 including the information serial number = n+2 and number of gaming balls = 1. Then, at the timing indicated by reference symbol T7m, the number of counted balls and the cumulative counted number of balls are 1, so within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, the frame control unit 600 sends a count notification command to the lending device 614 including the information count serial number = m+2, number of counted balls = 1, and cumulative counted number of balls = 1.

When the rental device 614 receives this counting notification command, it adds the counting number of balls (1) contained in the received counting notification command to the number of balls held (0) before receiving the counting notification command, updating the number of balls held to 1.

<Communication between the frame control unit and the lending device/When an increase in the number of game balls occurs and the counting button is pressed and held down>
FIG. 22 is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication between the frame control unit 600 and the lending device 614 in chronological order when an increase in the number of game balls occurs at the same time as the counting button is pressed and held down.

This example is an example of communication that occurs when the timing of an increase in the number of game balls due to a prize ball in an enclosed gaming machine 100 coincides with the timing of counting due to a long press of the count button 617. Note that while this example describes an example in which the number of game balls increases due to a prize ball, the same applies when the number of game balls increases due to a foul ball.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T8b, the number of game balls is 245, so the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 including information such as serial number = n (n is a positive integer) and number of game balls = 245.After that, at the timing indicated by reference symbol T8c, the number of game balls has increased by 15 due to winning balls, so the number of game balls is updated from 245 to 260 by adding 15 to the number of game balls.

In addition, in this example, when the number of game balls is 245 and the cumulative counted number of balls is 0, a "long press" of the count button 617 is accepted at the timing indicated by symbol T8a.

However, since the number 250 (planned count number), which indicates the count of 250 balls in response to the "long press" of the count button 617, is greater than the number of game balls (245) sent in the gaming machine information notification command sent at the timing shown by reference symbol T8b, the number of counted balls (count data) is not set to 250, which indicates the count of 250 balls in response to the "long press" of the count button 617, but 245 is set as the planned correction data for the count data (number of counted balls) (step S103 of the counting process shown in Figure 4), and at the timing shown by reference symbol T8d, a count notification command including the information count serial number = m (m is a positive integer), number of counted balls = 245, and cumulative number of counted balls = 245 is sent to the lending device 614, and then the number of counted balls 245 is subtracted from the number of game balls 260 to update the number of game balls to 15.

In other words, in this example, in a situation where the detection means (ball detection sensor) detects game balls during a predetermined period and the game ball count data (game ball count data) increases (a situation where the number of game balls increases by 15 due to winning balls, as shown by symbol T8c in Figure 21), if a counting process is executed during the predetermined period in response to operation of a predetermined operation means (counting button 617), the value corresponding to the operation of the predetermined operation means (counting button 617) (the number 250 indicating 250 balls) may not be counted.

In this example, if the number of gaming balls increases during a specified period after sending gaming ball count data information (gaming machine information notification command) to the external device (rental device 614) and before sending count data information (count notification command), it is possible to prevent the sending of more count data information than gaming ball count data information.This prevents the sending of information that could lead the external device to mistakenly believe it is fraud or a malfunction, allowing for smooth operation of the gaming machine.

At the timing indicated by symbol T8e, the lending device 614, which has received the counting notification command, adds the number of counted balls (245) contained in the received counting notification command to the number of balls held (0) before receiving the counting notification command, updating the number of balls held to 245.Since the number of loaned balls is 0, it sends a loan notification command to the frame control unit 600 containing information such as loan serial number = k (k is a positive integer) and number of loaned balls = 0.At the timing indicated by symbol T8f, the frame control unit 600, which has received the loan notification command, sends a loan receipt result response command to the lending device 614 containing information such as loan serial number = k and loaned ball number receipt result = normal.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T8g, the number of gaming balls is 15, so the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command including the information that serial number = n+1 and number of gaming balls = 15 to the lending device 614. After that, at the subsequent timing indicated by reference symbol T8h, the counting button 617 continues to be "long pressed," and a second "long press" operation is accepted.

However, since the number of game balls is 15, which is less than the 250 balls counted in response to the "long press" of the counting button 617, the counted balls are set to 15, which indicates the total number of game balls, 15, and the cumulative counted balls are updated to 260 by adding 15 to the cumulative counted balls of 245. Then, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, a counting notification command is sent to the lending device 614 containing the information: counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 15, cumulative counted balls = 260.

At the timing indicated by symbol T8i, the lending device 614, which has received the counting notification command, adds the number of counted balls (15) contained in the received counting notification command to the number of balls held before receiving the counting notification command (245), updating the number of balls held to 260.Since the number of loaned balls is 0, it sends a loan notification command to the frame control unit 600 containing the information loan serial number = k+1 and number of loaned balls = 0.At the timing indicated by symbol T8j, the frame control unit 600, which has received the loan notification command, sends a loan receipt result response command to the lending device 614 containing the information loan serial number = k+1 and loaned ball number receipt result = normal.

At the timing indicated by reference symbol T8k, the long press of the counting button 617 is released, and at the timing indicated by reference symbol T8l, the number of gaming balls is 0, so the frame control unit 600 sends a gaming machine information notification command to the lending device 614 including the information serial number = n+2 and number of gaming balls = 0, and then at the timing indicated by reference symbol T8m, within a period of 90 ms to 100 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification command, it sends a counting notification command to the lending device 614 including the information counting serial number = m+2, number of counted balls = 0, and cumulative counted number of balls = 260.

<Communication between the frame control unit and the rental device/Summary>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine capable of storing the number of gaming balls as gaming ball number data in a predetermined storage area (for example, the RAM 608 of the frame control unit 600 shown in FIG. 2), and includes a control means (for example, the frame control unit 600 shown in FIG. 2), a detection means capable of detecting gaming balls (for example, various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 2 (sensors that detect gaming balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port)), and a predetermined operation means (for example, the counting button shown in FIG. 2). and a control means for adding ball data corresponding to the detection of a gaming ball by the detection means to the gaming ball count data, and the control means for executing a counting process (for example, the counting process shown in FIG. 4) for counting the gaming ball count data when the predetermined operation means is operated in a situation where the gaming ball count data is not 0, and the control means for transmitting first information (for example, the gaming machine information notification frame shown in FIG. 20 or 21) to an external device (for example, the lending device 614 shown in FIG. 2). and a means capable of transmitting second information (e.g., a count notification command shown in FIG. 20 or 21) after a predetermined period (e.g., 100 ms) has elapsed since the first information was transmitted, the first information including the game ball number data (e.g., the game ball number shown in FIG. 21 or 22), the second information including count data (e.g., the counted ball number shown in FIG. 21 or 22) indicating the value counted from the previous transmission of the second information to the transmission of the current second information, and the control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in a situation where the detection means detects gaming balls during the specified period and the gaming ball count data increases (for example, (1) a situation where the number of gaming balls increases by one due to a prize ball, as shown by symbol T7b in Figure 21, or (2) a situation where the number of gaming balls increases by 15 due to a prize ball, as shown by symbol T8c in Figure 22), if the counting process is executed during the specified period due to the operation of the specified operating means, the means may not count a value corresponding to the operation of the specified operating means.

If it were possible to send more counting data information to an external device than game ball count data information (i.e., total number of balls held), the external device would receive more counting data information than the total number of balls held, which could result in an error. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, if the game ball count data increases during a specified period after sending game ball count data information to the external device and before sending counting data information, it is possible to prevent the sending of more counting data information than game ball count data information. Therefore, by not sending information that could be mistakenly interpreted by the external device as fraud or a malfunction, the gaming machine can be operated smoothly.

The control means is also a means for counting a second value (e.g., 250 balls) smaller than the first value from the game ball number data when the specified operation means is operated in a first operation manner (e.g., long press) in a situation where the game ball number data is equal to or greater than a first value (e.g., 251 balls), and the control means is also a means for counting a second value (e.g., 250 balls) from the game ball number data when the specified operation means is operated in the first operation manner (e.g., long press) in a situation where the game ball number data is equal to or greater than the second value (e.g., 250 balls), and the control means is also a means for counting a third value (e.g., 250 balls) from the game ball number data when the specified operation means is operated in the first operation manner (e.g., long press) in a situation where the game ball number data is equal to or greater than the second value. The control means may be means for counting the third value (e.g., 249 balls) from the game ball count data when the specified operation means is operated in the first operation mode (e.g., long press) in a situation where the game ball count data is already at a third value (e.g., 249 balls), and the control means may be means for counting the third value when the counting process is executed during the specified period due to the specified operation means being operated in the first operation mode in a situation where the detection means detects game balls and the game ball count data increases to a fourth value (e.g., 250 balls or more) that is greater than the third value during the specified period after transmitting the game ball count data that is the third value as the first information.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate counting processing according to the game ball count data, and in situations where the game ball count data has increased during the specified period after game ball count data information has been sent to the external device but before count data information is sent, it is possible to prevent the sending of more count data information than game ball count data information.This prevents the sending of information that could be mistakenly interpreted by the external device as fraud or a malfunction, allowing for smooth operation of the gaming machine.

<Control by frame control unit and launch control unit>
Next, the control by the frame control unit 600 and the launch control unit 630 will be described with reference to FIGS.

As described above, the launch control unit 630 controls the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod and launch hammer, and the ball feed solenoid 634 that supplies balls toward the ball launch handle 134, based on predetermined signals output by the frame control unit 600, such as control signals that instruct launch permission or halt, and control signals that instruct the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, output by a launch intensity output circuit provided within the ball launch handle 134.

In Figures 23 to 27, "ball feed solenoid" refers to the ball feed solenoid 634 of the ball feed device 127 described using Figures 2 and 3, and "drive" and "stop" refer to the state in which the drive signal for the ball feed solenoid 634 is driven and the state in which the drive signal is stopped, respectively.

The "reference signal" refers to the signal sent by the launch control unit 630 to the frame control unit 600. When the launch control unit 630 drives the ball feed solenoid 634, it sends an ON-level reference signal to the frame control unit 600.

The "reference signal flag" refers to a flag that the frame control unit 600 sets to ON or OFF during the reference signal processing described using Figure 5 or the game ball subtraction processing described using Figure 6. The frame control unit 600 sets the reference signal flag to ON when it receives a reference signal from the launch control unit 630, and sets (resets) the reference signal flag to OFF when the subtraction sensor signal output from the subtraction sensor changes from ON level to OFF level, or when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 640 ms) has elapsed since the reference signal flag was set to ON.

"Subtraction sensor signal" refers to the subtraction sensor signal output from subtraction sensor 618. When a gaming ball enters subtraction sensor 618 and is detected by subtraction sensor 618, the subtraction sensor signal changes from ON level to OFF level. When a gaming ball leaves subtraction sensor 618 and is not detected by subtraction sensor 618, the subtraction sensor signal changes from OFF level to ON level.

A "counting operation" refers to the operation of the counting button 617. The frame control unit 600 monitors the button detection signal output from the counting button 617 at predetermined intervals, and after detecting an ON level (e.g., high level) button detection signal for 1 ms or more but less than 500 ms, if it detects a falling edge (down edge) of the button detection signal, it determines that the counting button 617 has been operated as a "short press." Furthermore, if it detects an ON level (e.g., high level) button detection signal for 500 ms or more, it determines that the counting button 617 has been operated as a "long press." Thereafter, it determines that a "long press" has been accepted each time it detects an ON level button detection signal for 300 ms.

"Firing solenoid" refers to the firing solenoid 632 of the firing device 140 described using Figures 2 and 3, and "driving" and "stopping" refer to the state in which the drive signal for the firing solenoid 632 is driving and the state in which the drive signal is stopped, respectively.

<Control by frame control unit and launch control unit/launch operation when the number of game balls is 1>
FIG. 23 is a time chart showing the changes in various signals when the number of game balls is one and the launch operation of one game ball is performed.

At the timing indicated by symbol T10a, the launch control unit 630 drives the ball feed solenoid 634 of the ball feed device 127 to supply the gaming ball to the launch position on the launch rail 149, and based on the driving of the ball feed solenoid 634, sends an ON-level reference signal to the frame control unit 600. Upon receiving the reference signal, the frame control unit 600 sets the reference signal flag to ON (step S202 of the reference signal processing shown in Figure 5).

At the timing indicated by symbol T10b, the subtraction sensor signal output from the subtraction sensor 618 changes from ON level (high level in this example) to OFF level (low level in this example), and the subtraction sensor 618 detects a game ball. Therefore, the frame control unit 600 subtracts 1 from the current number of game balls (step S302 of the game ball subtraction process shown in Figure 6), updates the number of game balls from 1 to 0, and sets (resets) the reference signal flag to OFF (step S304 of the game ball subtraction process shown in Figure 6).

At the timing indicated by symbol T10c, the launch control unit 630 drives the launch solenoid 632 of the launch device 140, launching the gaming ball toward the gaming board 200.

<Control by the frame control unit and the launch control unit/launch operation and counting operation when the number of game balls is 1>
FIG. 24 is a time chart showing the changes in various signals when one gaming ball is released and one ball is counted.

At the timing indicated by symbol T11a, the launch control unit 630 drives the ball feed solenoid 634 of the ball feed device 127 to supply the gaming ball to the launch position on the launch rail 149, and based on the driving of the ball feed solenoid 634, sends an ON-level reference signal to the frame control unit 600. Upon receiving the reference signal, the frame control unit 600 sets the reference signal flag to ON (step S202 of the reference signal processing shown in Figure 5).

At the timing indicated by reference symbol 11b, the frame control unit 600 detects a 100 ms ON level (high level in this example) button detection signal, and upon detecting the falling edge of the button detection signal, determines that a "short press" of the counting button 617 has been accepted, and sets the number of balls to "1," which represents one ball (step S101 of the counting process shown in Figure 4).

Furthermore, since the reference signal flag is set ON, the frame control unit 600 determines whether the result of subtracting the planned counting number (1 in this example) from the number of game balls (1 in this example) is 0 (= number of game balls 1 - planned counting number 1) is 0 (step S106 of the counting process shown in Figure 4), and since the result of the subtraction is 0 in this example, it sets the result of subtracting 1 from the planned counting number (1 in this example) (0 in this example) as the number of counted balls, maintaining the number of game balls at 1 (= 1 - 0).

At the timing indicated by symbol T11c, the subtraction sensor signal output from the subtraction sensor 618 changes from ON level (high level in this example) to OFF level (low level in this example), and the subtraction sensor 618 detects a game ball. Therefore, the frame control unit 600 subtracts 1 from the current number of game balls (step S302 of the game ball subtraction process), updates the number of game balls to 0, and sets (resets) the reference signal flag to OFF (step S304 of the game ball subtraction process).

At the timing indicated by symbol T11d, the launch control unit 630 drives the launch solenoid 632 of the launch device 140, launching the gaming ball toward the gaming board 200.

If there were no restrictions on the counting process as in this example described above, and a counting operation (short press) was performed between the time when ball feed solenoid 634 was activated and the time when the subtraction sensor signal turned OFF when there was only one game ball, two balls would be used, one for launch and one for counting, even though there was only one game ball.

However, in this example, even if the launch of a game ball and the counting process for counting the game ball count data overlap, the value (1 ball) corresponding to the first operation mode (short press) of the specified operation means (count button 617) is not counted from the game ball count data (1 ball), allowing for appropriate processing.

<Control by the frame control unit and the launch control unit/launch operation and counting operation when the number of game balls is 250>
FIG. 25 is a time chart showing the changes in various signals when the number of game balls is 250 and the operation of firing one game ball and the operation of counting 250 game balls are performed.

At the timing indicated by symbol T12a, the launch control unit 630 drives the ball feed solenoid 634 of the ball feed device 127 to supply the gaming ball to the launch position on the launch rail 149, and based on the driving of the ball feed solenoid 634, sends an ON-level reference signal to the frame control unit 600. Upon receiving the reference signal, the frame control unit 600 sets the reference signal flag to ON (step S202 of the reference signal processing shown in Figure 5).

At the timing indicated by reference symbol 12b, the frame control unit 600 detects a button detection signal at an ON level (high level in this example) for 500 ms, and therefore determines that a "long press" of the counting button 617 has been accepted, and sets the number of balls to "250," which represents 250 balls (step S101 of the counting process shown in Figure 4).

Furthermore, since the reference signal flag is set ON, the frame control unit 600 determines whether the result of subtracting the planned counting number (250 in this example) from the number of game balls (250 in this example) is 0 (= number of game balls 250 - planned counting number 250) is 0 (step S106 of the counting process shown in Figure 4), and since the result of the subtraction is 0 in this example, it sets the result of subtracting 1 from the planned counting number (250 in this example) (249 in this example) as the number of counted balls, and updates the number of game balls from 250 to 1 (= 250 - 249).

At the timing indicated by symbol T12c, the subtraction sensor signal output from the subtraction sensor 618 changes from ON level (high level in this example) to OFF level (low level in this example), and the subtraction sensor 618 detects a game ball. Therefore, the frame control unit 600 subtracts 1 from the current number of game balls (step S302 of the game ball subtraction process), updates the number of game balls to 0, and sets (resets) the reference signal flag to OFF (step S304 of the game ball subtraction process).

At the timing indicated by symbol T12d, the launch control unit 630 drives the launch solenoid 632 of the launch device 140, launching the gaming ball toward the gaming board 200.

For example, if processing were performed without any restrictions on the launch of game balls and the counting process that counts the game ball count data, and the game ball count data was 250, if the game ball launch and the counting (250 balls) due to a long press overlap, 250 balls would be counted, resulting in a problem where game balls would be launched even though the game ball count data shows there were no game balls. However, according to this example, even if the game ball launch and the counting process that counts the game ball count data overlap, the value (250 balls) corresponding to the first operation mode (long press) of the specified operation means (count button 617) is not counted from the game ball count data (250 balls), allowing for appropriate processing.

<Control by the frame control unit and the launch control unit/launch operation and counting operation when the number of game balls is 251>
FIG. 26 is a time chart showing the changes in various signals when the number of game balls is 251 and the operation of firing one game ball and the operation of counting 250 game balls are performed.

At the timing indicated by symbol T13a, the launch control unit 630 drives the ball feed solenoid 634 of the ball feed device 127 to supply the gaming ball to the launch position on the launch rail 149, and based on the driving of the ball feed solenoid 634, sends an ON-level reference signal to the frame control unit 600. Upon receiving the reference signal, the frame control unit 600 sets the reference signal flag to ON (step S202 of the reference signal processing shown in Figure 5).

At the timing indicated by reference symbol 13b, the frame control unit 600 detects a button detection signal at an ON level (high level in this example) for 500 ms, and therefore determines that a "long press" of the counting button 617 has been accepted, and sets the number of balls to "250," which represents 250 balls (step S101 of the counting process shown in Figure 4).

Furthermore, because the reference signal flag is set ON, the frame control unit 600 determines whether the subtraction result of subtracting the planned counting number (250 in this example) from the number of game balls (251 in this example) is 1 (= number of game balls 251 - planned counting number 250) is 0 or not (step S106 of the counting process shown in Figure 4), and in this example, because the subtraction result is not 0, it updates the number of game balls from 251 to 1 (= 251 - 250) without subtracting 1 from the planned counting number (250 in this example).

At the timing indicated by symbol T13c, the subtraction sensor signal output from the subtraction sensor 618 changes from ON level (high level in this example) to OFF level (low level in this example), and the subtraction sensor 618 detects a game ball. Therefore, the frame control unit 600 subtracts 1 from the current number of game balls (step S302 of the game ball subtraction process), updates the number of game balls to 0, and sets (resets) the reference signal flag to OFF (step S304 of the game ball subtraction process).

At the timing indicated by symbol T13d, the launch control unit 630 drives the launch solenoid 632 of the launch device 140, launching the gaming ball toward the gaming board 200.

In this example, appropriate counting processing can be performed according to the game ball count data.

<Control by Frame Control Unit and Launch Control Unit/Reference Signal Flag Timeout>
FIG. 27 is a time chart showing the changes in various signals when the subtraction sensor signal of the subtraction sensor 618 does not change to the ON level after the reference signal flag is set to ON.

At the timing indicated by symbol T14a, the launch control unit 630 drives the ball feed solenoid 634 of the ball feed device 127 to supply the gaming ball to the launch position on the launch rail 149, and based on the driving of the ball feed solenoid 634, sends an ON-level reference signal to the frame control unit 600. Upon receiving the reference signal, the frame control unit 600 sets the reference signal flag to ON (step S202 of the reference signal processing shown in Figure 5).

At the timing indicated by reference symbol 14b, the frame control unit 600 sets (resets) the reference signal flag to OFF because a predetermined period (e.g., 640 ms) has elapsed without the subtraction sensor signal output from the subtraction sensor 618 changing from ON level (high level in this example) to OFF level (low level in this example) (step S303 → step S304 of the game ball subtraction process shown in Figure 6).

In this example, even if balls become clogged in the ball passage or a malfunction occurs in the subtraction sensor, it is possible to prevent a situation in which counting data that does not need to be corrected continues to be corrected during the counting process.

<Control by the frame control unit and launch control unit/Summary>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that can store the number of gaming balls as gaming ball number data in a predetermined storage area (for example, the RAM 608 of the frame control unit 600 shown in FIG. 2), and includes a first control means (for example, the frame control unit 600 shown in FIG. 2), a launching operation means that is operated when launching gaming balls (for example, the ball launching handle 134 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2), a launching means that launches gaming balls (for example, the launching device 140 shown in FIG. 3), and a ball feeding means that feeds gaming balls to the launch position of the launching means (for example, the ball feeding device The first control means is a means capable of executing a subtraction process (for example, a game ball subtraction process shown in FIG. 6) for subtracting the game ball number data based on the detection by the detection means that game balls are being sent to the launching means by the ball sending means, and the first control means is a means capable of executing a subtraction process (for example, a game ball subtraction process shown in FIG. 6) for subtracting the game ball number data based on the detection by the detection means that game balls are being sent to the launching means by the ball sending means, and the first control means is a means capable of executing a subtraction process (for example, a game ball subtraction process shown in FIG. 6) for subtracting the game ball number data based on the detection by the detection means that game balls are being sent to the launching means based on the detection by the detection means that game balls are being sent to the launching means based on the detection In this case, when the game ball number data is a first value (for example, (1) 251 balls, (2) 2 balls) or more, if the predetermined operation means is operated in a first operation manner (for example, (1) long press, (2) short press) during a predetermined period when game balls are released, the first control means counts a value corresponding to the first operation manner from the game ball number data (for example, (1) counts 250 balls, which is the number of balls counted according to the long press, and (2) counts 1 ball, which is the number of balls counted according to the short press), and This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the game ball count data is less than the first value (for example, (1) 250 balls, (2) 1 ball), if the specified operating means is operated in the first operating mode during the specified period when the game balls are fired, the control means does not count a value corresponding to the first operating mode from the game ball count data (for example, (1) subtracting 1 ball from the number of balls counted in response to a long press, which is 250 balls, to correct the number of counted balls to 249 balls, and counting; (2) subtracting 1 ball from the number of balls counted in response to a short press, which is 1 ball, to correct the number of counted balls to 0 and not counting).

For example, if processing is performed without any restrictions on the launch of game balls and the counting process that counts game ball count data, and the game ball count data is 250, if the launch of game balls and the counting (250 balls) caused by a long press overlap, 250 balls will be counted, resulting in the game balls being launched even though the game ball count data shows there are no game balls. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the launch of game balls and the counting process that counts game ball count data overlap, the value corresponding to the first operation mode of the specified operating means is not counted from the game ball count data, allowing for appropriate processing.

Furthermore, the first control means is means for counting a second value (e.g., 250 balls) smaller than the first value from the game ball number data when the specified operation means is operated in the first operation manner (e.g., long press) in a situation where the game ball number data is equal to or greater than the first value (e.g., 251 balls), and the first control means is means for counting the second value (e.g., 250 balls) from the game ball number data when the specified operation means is operated in the first operation manner (e.g., long press) in a situation where the game ball number data is equal to or greater than the second value (e.g., 250 balls). The first control means may be means for counting a third value (e.g., 249 balls) from the game ball number data when the specified operation means is operated in the first operation mode (e.g., long press) in a situation where the game ball number data is a third value (e.g., 249 balls) smaller than the second value, and the first control means may be means for counting a fourth value (e.g., 249 balls) smaller than the second value from the game ball number data when the specified operation means is operated in the first operation mode (e.g., long press) in a situation where the game ball number data is the second value (e.g., 250 balls).

This configuration allows appropriate counting processing to be performed according to the game ball count data, and also enables appropriate processing even if the launch of game balls and the counting processing of game ball count data overlap.

<Front frame door>
Next, the front frame door (glass frame) 106 of the enclosed gaming machine 100 will be described in detail.

<Front door frame/overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the front frame door 106 will be described with reference to Figure 28. Figure 28 is an exploded perspective view of the enclosed gaming machine 100.

The front frame door 106 (door body) is composed of a glass frame base 152 that is openably and closably attached via a hinge 112 to the front of the main body 104, which forms the front side of the enclosed gaming machine 100; an upper unit 154 (first component) that is removably attached above the glass frame base 152; a transparent glass plate member 118 that is disposed in the opening of the glass frame base 152; a lower unit 156 (second component) and an operation panel unit 158 that are removably attached below the glass frame base 152; and a UI unit 162 that is removably attached to the center of the lower part of the glass frame base 152 when viewed from the front.

In addition, a decorative film 164 (decorative member) made of a decorative sheet with decorative properties and a decorative film cover 166 (cover member) that secures this decorative film 164 (decorative member) to the upper unit 154 (first component) are removably attached to the upper unit 154 (first component).

In this example, the decorative member (decorative film 164) can be removed from the front side of the door body (front frame door 106), making it easy to replace the decorative member (decorative film 164), providing a highly convenient gaming machine.

In the past, when introducing a different type of gaming machine, it was possible to replace only the gaming board and reuse the frame. However, this could result in the overall atmosphere of the gaming machine being different from what the manufacturer intended, or if the machine was made with the assumption that the frame would be reused, it could end up being less decorative. However, with this example, the decorative sheet (design film 164) is replaceable, so when introducing a different type of gaming machine, the frame (front frame door 106) can be reused, but a decorative sheet (design film 164) that matches the gaming machine being introduced can be used, thereby enhancing the decorativeness.

<Front frame door/glass frame base and upper unit>
Next, we will explain the glass frame base 152 and upper unit 154 of the front frame door 106. Figure 29 is a rear view of the front frame door 106 as seen from the rear side.

The glass frame base 152 is equipped with a hand screw 168 (first restricting member) and a slide lock 170 (first restricting member) for securing the upper unit 154 to the glass frame base 152.

These hand screws 168 and slide locks 170 are located on the back of the front frame door 106, and are components that can be operated when the front frame door 106 (door body) is open. However, they cannot be operated by players, and are operating means that can only be operated by gaming facility staff, etc.

The hand screw 168 is composed of a drive unit 168a that can be rotated by hand, a circular, flat head 168b, and a threaded portion (not shown) that extends from the head 168b.

The threaded portion of this hand screw 168 can be tightened by rotating the drive unit 168a in one direction (for example, clockwise). When the threaded portion is tightened, the tip of the threaded portion gradually fits into the threaded hole formed in the upper unit 154, and the hand screw 168 ultimately fixes (fastens) the upper unit 154 and glass frame base 152 together.

On the other hand, the screw portion can be loosened by rotating the drive unit 168a in the other direction (for example, counterclockwise). When the screw portion is loosened, the tip of the screw portion withdraws from the screw hole formed in the upper unit 154, releasing the fixation (fastening) between the upper unit 154 and the glass frame base 152. By releasing the fixation (locking) of the slide lock 170 (described below), the upper unit 154 can be removed from the glass frame base 152.

Figure 30(a) is a partially enlarged view showing the slide lock 170 in the locked position, Figure 30(b) is a partially enlarged view showing the slide lock 170 in the unlocked position, and Figure 30(c) is a rear view of the upper unit 154.

The slide lock 170 (first restricting member) is a member that can move horizontally relative to the glass frame base 152.

By sliding the slide lock 170 in one direction (for example, horizontally to the right when viewed from the rear) from the unlocked position shown in Figure 30(b) to the locked position shown in Figure 30(a), the locking piece 170a of the slide lock 170 can be moved above the locking portion 154a of the upper unit 154. By sliding the slide lock 170 to the locked position, the glass frame base 152 and the upper unit 154 are fixed (locked), and upward movement of the upper unit 154 relative to the glass frame base 152 is restricted.

On the other hand, by sliding the slide lock 170 in the other direction (for example, horizontally to the left when viewed from the rear) from the locked position shown in Figure 30(b) to the unlocked position shown in the same figure (b), it is possible to move the locking piece 170a of the slide lock 170 out from above the locking portion 154a of the upper unit 154. Then, by sliding the slide lock 170 to the unlocked position, the glass frame base 152 and the upper unit 154 are released from the lock (lock), and by releasing the fixation (fastening) of the upper unit 154 by the hand screw 168, the upper unit 154 can be moved upward relative to the glass frame base 152.

Therefore, after releasing the fixation (fastening) of the upper unit 154 with the hand screw 168, the fixation (locking) of the upper unit 154 with the locking piece 170a of the slide lock 170 is released, the upper unit 154 is lifted upward relative to the glass frame base 152, and then the slide lock 170 is slid to the locked position shown in Figure 30(a).This allows the locking piece 170a of the slide lock 170 to support the locking piece 154a of the upper unit 154, and the upper unit 154 is held in a state where it is lifted upward relative to the glass frame base 152, i.e., in the unlocked position shown in Figure 31(c) (details will be described later).

In this example, the slide lock 170 can hold the upper unit 154 in the unlocked position, improving convenience when replacing the design film 164.

Figure 31(a) is a top view of the front frame door 106, (b) is a front view showing the upper unit 154 in the locked position, and (c) is a front view showing the upper unit 154 in the unlocked position.

A flat upper locking portion 154a is formed above the upper unit 154, protruding toward the front of the front frame door 106 and capable of engaging with the decorative film cover 166.

When the upper unit 154 is in the locked position shown in Figure 31 (b), the upper locking portion 154a (second restricting member) cannot be lifted upward, and the upper locking portion 154a restricts the attachment and detachment of the decorative film cover 166, resulting in a state (first state) in which the decorative film cover 166 (cover member) cannot be removed from the upper unit 154 (first component).

Furthermore, when the upper unit 154 is moved to the locked position shown in Figure 31 (b), the two left and right locking portions 154c (design film cover locking mechanism) (second restricting members) that can lock the lower part of the design film cover 166 to the upper unit 154 are covered by the upper unit 154 and cannot be operated, meaning that the design film cover 166 cannot be released from its lock by the design film cover locking mechanism.

On the other hand, when the upper unit 154 is moved to the unlocked position shown in Figure 31 (c), the upper locking portion 154a can be lifted upward, and the upper locking portion 154a's restriction on the attachment and removal of the decorative film cover 166 is released.

Furthermore, when the upper unit 154 is moved to the unlocked position shown in Figure 31 (c), the locking portion 154c (design film cover locking mechanism), which can lock the lower part of the design film cover 166 to the upper unit 154, appears from below the upper unit 154 to the front and becomes operable, allowing the design film cover 166 to be released from its lock by the design film cover locking mechanism.

Therefore, after moving the upper unit 154 to the unlocked position shown in Figure 31 (c), the upper locking portion 154a is lifted upward to release the lock provided by the decorative film cover locking mechanism, thereby enabling the decorative film cover 166 (cover member) to be removed from the upper unit 154 (first component) (second state).

In this example, the first restricting member (hand screw 168 and slide lock 170) is a member that can be operated when the door body (front frame door 106) is open, preventing players and others from removing the decorative member and preventing mischief and fraud.

In this example, when the threaded portion of the hand screw 168 is tightened or the slide lock 170 is slid to the locked position, the upper unit 154 and the glass frame base 152 are fixed (fastened) or locked (locked), and therefore the upper unit 154 cannot be moved from the locked position shown in Figure 31(b) to the unlocked position shown in Figure 31(c).

For this reason, when the threaded portion of the hand screw 168 is tightened or the slide lock 170 is slid to the locked position, it is not possible to change from the state shown in Figure 31(b) in which the decorative film cover 166 (cover member) can be removed from the upper unit 154 (first component) (first state) to the state shown in Figure 31(c) in which the decorative film cover 166 (cover member) cannot be removed from the upper unit 154 (first component) (second state).

In other words, the hand screw 168 and slide lock 170 are restricting members that restrict the upper unit 154 (first component) from changing from the second state (a state in which the decorative film cover 166 cannot be removed from the upper unit 154) to the first state (a state in which the decorative film cover 166 can be removed from the upper unit 154).

On the other hand, when the threaded portion of the hand screw 168 is loosened and the slide lock 170 is slid to the unlocked position, the upper unit 154 and the glass frame base 152 are released from their fixed (fastened) position, and the upper unit 154 and the glass frame base 152 are also released from their fixed (locked) position, allowing the upper unit 154 to be moved from the locked position shown in Figure 31(b) to the unlocked position shown in Figure 31(c).

Therefore, when the threaded portion of the hand screw 168 is loosened and the slide lock 170 is slid to the unlocked position, the state shown in Figure 31(b) in which the decorative film cover 166 (cover member) can be removed from the upper unit 154 (first component) (first state) can be changed to the state shown in Figure 31(c) in which the decorative film cover 166 (cover member) cannot be removed from the upper unit 154 (first component) (second state).

In this example, the first component (upper unit 154) is equipped with a second restricting member (upper locking portion 154a shown in Figure 31(a) and engaging portion 154c shown in Figure 31(c)) that restricts the cover member (decorative film cover 166) from being removed from the first component (upper unit 154). The second restricting member (upper locking portion 154a shown in Figure 31(a) and engaging portion 154c shown in Figure 31(c)) is a member that can be operated when the first component (upper unit 154) changes from the second state (state shown in Figure 31(b)) to the first state (state shown in Figure 31(c)). This prevents players and others from removing the decorative member, thereby preventing mischief and fraud.

<Front frame door/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment (for example, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in Figure 1) is a gaming machine equipped with an openable and closable door body (for example, the front frame door 106 shown in Figure 28), wherein the door body is composed of a first component part (for example, the upper unit 154 shown in Figure 28) and a second component part (for example, the lower unit 156 shown in Figure 28), and the first component part comprises a decorative member (for example, the decorative film 164 shown in Figure 28) and a cover member (for example, the decorative film cover 166 shown in Figure 28) that fixes the decorative member to the first component part, and the cover member is configured to be detachable from the first component part on the front of the gaming machine.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the decorative members can be removed from the front side of the door body, making it easy to replace the decorative members, and providing a highly convenient gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first component has a state in which the cover member can be removed from the first component (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"; for example, the state shown in FIG. 31(c)), and a state in which the cover member cannot be removed from the first component (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"; for example, the state shown in FIG. 31(b)). The door body has a first restricting member (for example, a hand screw 168 or slide lock 170 shown in FIG. 29) that restricts the first component from the second state to the first state, and the first restricting member may be a member that can be operated when the door body is opened.

This configuration prevents players and others from removing the decorative elements, preventing mischief and fraud.

The first component may also include a second restricting member (e.g., upper locking portion 154a shown in FIG. 31(a) or engaging portion 154c shown in FIG. 31(c)) that restricts the cover member from being removed from the first component, and the second restricting member may be a member that can be operated when the first component changes from the second state to the first state.

This configuration prevents players and others from removing the decorative elements, preventing mischief and fraud.

The decorative member may also be a decorative sheet.

In the past, when introducing a different type of gaming machine, it was possible to replace only the gaming board and reuse the frame. However, this could result in the overall atmosphere of the gaming machine being different from what the manufacturer intended, or, if the machine was manufactured with the assumption that the frame would be reused, it could end up being less decorative. However, with this invention, the decorative sheet is replaceable, so when introducing a different type of gaming machine, it is possible to reuse the frame while adopting a decorative sheet that matches the gaming machine being introduced, thereby enhancing its decorativeness.

<Game board>
Next, the game board 200 of the enclosed gaming machine 100 will be described in detail.

<Game board/overall configuration>
32 is a simplified front view of the game board 200. The game board 200 is provided with predetermined ball entrance openings, such as a normal winning opening 226, a normal starting opening 228, a second special starting opening 230, a first special starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234.

In this example, there are two general winning openings 226 located at the bottom left of the game board 200 and one on the right side of the game board 200. When a designated ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering one of these general winning openings 226 (when a ball enters a general winning opening 226), a designated number of game balls (for example, 10) are discharged as prize balls.

The normal ball start opening 228 is composed of a device called a gate or through chucker, which determines whether the gaming ball has passed through a specified area, and in this example, one is located in the center of the gaming board 200. When a specified ball detection sensor detects that the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball start opening 228, the pachinko machine 100 begins normal ball variable play using the normal ball display device (not shown).

In this example, the second special symbol start hole 230 is located to the right of the regular symbol start hole 228. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering this second special symbol start hole 230, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three) are discharged as prize balls, and a special symbol variable game is initiated by the first special symbol display device (not shown).

The first special symbol start opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chute), and in this example, one is located on the right side of the game board 200. This first special symbol start opening 232 has blade members that can be opened and closed left and right; while the blade members are closed, game balls cannot enter the opening; when a player wins the normal symbol variable game and the normal symbol display device (not shown) displays a stopped winning symbol, the blade members open and close at predetermined time intervals and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special symbol start opening 232, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, four) are discharged as prize balls, and the special symbol variable game is initiated by the second special symbol display device (not shown).

The variable prize opening 234 is called the big prize opening or attacker, and in this example, only one is located at the bottom right of the game board 200. This variable prize opening 234 is equipped with a door element that can be opened and closed freely; game balls cannot enter the opening while the door element is closed; when a player wins the special symbol variable game and the special symbol display device displays a frozen big win symbol, the door element opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (e.g., opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) a predetermined number of times (e.g., 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable prize opening 234, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 15) are discharged as prize balls.

In addition, disk-shaped ball direction changers 236 called windmills and multiple game nails 238 are installed near these winning holes and starting holes, and an outlet 240 is provided below the standard starting hole 228 to guide game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back of the enclosed game machine 100.

<Game board/ball passage>
33 is a simplified rear view of the game board 200. A first ball passage 250 is provided at the bottom of the rear of the game board 200, through which game balls entering the normal winning opening 226 and the normal starting opening 228 can pass, and a second ball passage 260 is provided at the left side of the rear of the game board 200, through which game balls entering the second special starting opening 230, the first special starting opening 232, and the variable winning opening 234 can pass.

The first ball passage 250 is composed of a first ball passage base 252 arranged horizontally below the back surface of the base member 201 of the game board 200, and a first ball passage cover 254 arranged to cover the ball passage formed in this first ball passage base 252.

The second ball passage 260 is composed of a second ball passage base 262 arranged vertically on the left side of the back surface of the base member 201 of the game board 200, and a second ball passage cover 264 arranged to cover the ball passage formed in this second ball passage base 262.

<Game board/first ball passage>
Figure 34 (a) is a partially enlarged view showing the first ball passage 250 with the first ball passage cover 254 removed and the second ball passage 260 with the second ball passage cover 264 removed, and Figure 34 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the general winning port flow path 256.

The first ball passage base 252 of the first ball passage 250 is formed with a general winning port flow path 256 (first flow path) through which game balls that enter the general winning port 226 flow, and a general starting port flow path 258 (first flow path) through which game balls that enter the general starting port 228 flow.

<Game board/First ball passage/General winning passage>
One end of the general winning port flow path 256 is connected to the general winning port 226 formed in the base member 201, and the other end is connected to a lower passage 750 (see FIG. 3 ) disposed below the base member 201, and the general winning port flow path 256 is capable of discharging game balls that have entered the general winning port 226 into the lower passage 750. Since the general winning port 226 is a ball entrance through which game balls can enter (easily enter) during normal play, the general winning port flow path 256 (first flow path) can be said to be a flow path through which game balls can flow during normal play.

In addition, a screw insertion port 256a into which a screw 257 can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the general winning port flow path 256, and the first ball path base 252 of the first ball path 250 is also fixed (fastened) to the base member 201 of the game board 200 by the screw 257 inserted into this screw insertion port 256a.

In this example, if a screw is not attached correctly and becomes loose during assembly of the flow path, game balls will remain in the first flow path (general winning port flow path 256). This makes it easy to detect assembly errors during test shot inspections before shipping, thereby improving convenience.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 34 (b), the general prize winning port flow path 256 is configured to have a straight section 256b that extends linearly downward from a base end near the general prize winning port 226, a serpentine section 256c that is bent to the left when viewed from the rear from this straight section 256b as its base end and then bent further downward, and a straight section 256d that extends linearly downward from this serpentine section 256c as its base end. In this example, the screw insertion port 256a is formed in the straight section 256b of the general prize winning port flow path 256.

Since serpentine section 256c has a bent section, it is inherently prone to trapping (retention) with circulating game balls, and there is a risk that game balls may become stuck not due to an assembly error, but simply due to individual differences in the screws or components that form the flow path, causing the screws to protrude slightly. However, in this example, by providing screw insertion port 256a in straight section 256b rather than in serpentine section 256c, it is possible to prevent game balls from becoming stuck in the flow path due to factors other than an assembly error.

The general winning port flow path 256 also has a flow path inlet 256in that communicates with the general winning port 226 and a flow path outlet 256out that communicates with the lower passage 750, but in this example, the screw insertion port 256a is formed in a position closer to the circulation inlet 256in than to the flow path outlet 256out.

If the screw insertion port 256a were located close to the outlet of the flow path, it would take time for game balls to become trapped in the flow path due to loose screws or other factors and overflow from the flow path, making it difficult to immediately detect the defect during pre-shipment test testing, etc. However, in this example, the first flow path (general winning port flow path 256) has a first opening (flow path inlet 256in) and a second opening (flow path outlet 256out), the first opening (flow path inlet 256in) is located upstream of the second opening (flow path outlet 256out), and the screw insertion port 256a is located closer to the first opening (flow path inlet 256in) than the second opening (flow path outlet 256out). Therefore, if game balls become trapped in the flow path due to loose screws or other factors and overflow from the flow path during pre-shipment test testing, etc., the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience.

In this example, the ball passage structure shown in Figure 34(b) is applied to the general prize opening flow path 256, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be applied to other ball passages (e.g., the general prize opening flow path 258, the first special prize opening flow path 266, the variable prize opening flow path 267, and the second special prize opening flow path 268). Furthermore, it is not limited to the general prize opening flow path 256 located on the right side of the game board 200, but can also be applied to the general prize opening flow path 256 located on the left side of the game board 200. Furthermore, the ball passage configurations described below can be applied to any of the general prize opening flow path 258, the first special prize opening flow path 266, the variable prize opening flow path 267, and the second special prize opening flow path 268.

<Game board/First ball passage/Normal starting port passage>
One end of the normal starting port flow path 258 is connected to the normal starting port 228 formed in the base member 201, and the other end is connected to a lower passage 750 (see FIG. 3) disposed below the base member 201, and the normal starting port flow path 258 is capable of discharging game balls that have entered the normal starting port 228 into the lower passage 750. Since the normal starting port 228 is a ball entrance through which game balls can enter (enter easily) during normal play, the normal starting port flow path 258 (first flow path) can be said to be a flow path through which game balls can flow during normal play.

In addition, a screw insertion port 258a into which a screw 257 can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the normal starting port flow path 258, and the first ball passage base 252 of the first ball passage 250 is also fixed (fastened) to the base member 201 of the game board 200 by the screw 257 inserted into this screw insertion port 258a.

In this example, if a screw is not attached correctly and becomes loose during assembly of the flow path, game balls will remain in the first flow path (normal starting port flow path 258). This makes it easy to detect assembly errors during test shot inspections before shipping, thereby improving convenience.

In addition, the first ball passage base 252 of the first ball passage 250 has multiple screw insertion ports 252a into which screws 257 can be inserted, formed in locations other than the flow paths of the general winning port flow path 256 and the general starting port flow path 258, and the first ball passage base 252 of the first ball passage 250 is also fixed (fastened) to the base member 201 of the game board 200 by the screws 257 inserted into these screw insertion ports 252a.

In this example, the first flow path (general winning port flow path 256 and general winning port flow path 258) can detect loose screws, etc., by detecting game balls remaining therein, and can be stably fixed to the game board 200.

<Game board/second ball passage>
Figure 35 is a partially enlarged view showing the second ball passage 260 with the first ball passage 250 removed.

The second ball passage base 262 of the second ball passage 260 is formed with a first special symbol starting port flow path 266 (second flow path) through which game balls that enter the first special symbol starting port 232 flow, a variable winning port flow path 267 (second flow path) through which game balls that enter the first special symbol starting port 232 or the variable winning port 234 flow, and a second special symbol starting port flow path 268 through which game balls that enter the second special symbol starting port 230 flow.

<Game board / Second ball passage / First special chart starting port flow path>
The first special symbol start port flow path 266 is a flow path that can discharge game balls that have entered the first special symbol start port 232 into the lower passage 750. The first special symbol start port 232 is a ball entrance that is difficult for game balls to enter during normal play but makes it easy for game balls to enter during time-saving play, so it can be said that the first special symbol start port flow path 266 (second flow path) is a flow path that is difficult for game balls to circulate through during normal play but makes it easy for game balls to circulate through during winning play.

<Game board/second ball passage/variable winning opening flow path>
The variable winning port flow path 267 is a flow path that can discharge game balls that have entered the first special symbol starting port 232 or the variable winning port 234 to the lower passage 750. The first special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234 are ball entrance ports that are difficult for game balls to enter during normal play but easy for game balls to enter during a winning (small win or big win) game, so it can be said that the variable winning port flow path 267 (second flow path) is a flow path that is difficult for game balls to circulate through during normal play but easy for game balls to circulate through during a winning game.

<Game board / Second ball passage / Second special chart starting port flow path>
The second special design start port flow path 268 is a flow path that can discharge game balls that have entered the second special design start port 230 into the lower passage 750. Since the second special design start port 230 is a ball entrance that allows game balls to enter (easily enter) during normal play, the second special design start port flow path 268 can be said to be a flow path through which game balls can flow during normal play.

The second ball passage base 262 of the second ball passage 260 has multiple screw insertion holes 262a into which screws 257 can be inserted, formed in locations other than the first special symbol starting port flow path 266, the variable winning port flow path 267, and the second special symbol starting port flow path 268. The second ball passage base 262 is fixed (fastened) to the base member 201 of the game board 200 by multiple screws 257 inserted into these screw insertion holes 262a.

In other words, in this example, the first special symbol starting port flow path 266, the variable winning port flow path 267, and the second special symbol starting port flow path 268 do not have any screw insertion holes through which screws can be inserted.

Furthermore, if a screw insertion port is formed on the second flow path but the screw is not properly attached and becomes loose, there is a risk that inspectors will not notice this during the test play inspection before shipping, as it is difficult for game balls to pass through the second flow path during normal play. Therefore, by not forming a screw insertion port through which a screw can be inserted on the second flow path, it is possible to prevent products from being shipped in a loose screw state by mistake.

In this example, no screw insertion ports are formed on the second flow paths (first special symbol starting port flow path 266 and variable winning port flow path 267). Therefore, even if the screws are not properly attached during assembly of the flow paths and become loose, the second flow paths (first special symbol starting port flow path 266 and variable winning port flow path 267) are not affected, and test shot inspections before shipping can be carried out quickly.

In addition, the second flow path (first special symbol starting port flow path 266 and variable winning port flow path 267) can be stably fixed to the gaming board, eliminating any adverse effects caused by loose screws, etc.

In this example, all game balls that enter the second special symbol starting port 230, the first special symbol starting port 232, and the variable winning port 234 are configured to pass through the common second ball passage 260, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls that enter each ball entrance port may be configured to pass through separate ball passages. In this case, a screw insertion port into which a screw can be inserted may be formed on the flow path through which game balls can flow during normal play (for example, the second special symbol starting port flow path 268).

In addition, even if the system is configured so that two types of flow paths converge - one through which game balls can flow during normal play and one through which game balls have difficulty flowing during normal play but can flow easily during a winning game - a screw insertion port through which a screw can be inserted may be formed on the flow path downstream of the ball entrance through which game balls can enter (easily enter) during normal play.

<Game board/ball path and screw>
Next, the relationship between the ball passage and the screw will be described.

Figure 36(a) is a side cross-sectional view showing a ball passage 270 with a screw insertion opening 274 formed therein, and Figure 36(b) is a partially enlarged view showing the vicinity of the screw insertion opening 274. Figure 37(a) is a front view of the ball passage 270 with the top surface 270d omitted.

The ball passage 270 is a schematic representation of a ball passage formed with a screw insertion port 274 through which a screw 272 can be inserted, and corresponds, for example, to the general winning port flow path 256 and the general starting port flow path 258 described using Figure 34.

The spherical passage 270 is a cylindrical member composed of a lower surface 270a, a left side surface 270b and a right side surface 270c extending longitudinally from either side of the lower surface 270a in the short direction, and an upper surface 270d disposed opposite the lower surface 270a.

A screw insertion hole 274 into which a screw 272 can be inserted is formed on the underside 270a of the ball passage 270, and the ball passage 270 is fixed to the rear surface of the game board 200 by the screw 272 inserted into the screw insertion hole 274. In addition, a rib 270e for smooth rolling of the game ball BL is formed on the underside 270a of the ball passage 270, protruding along the longitudinal direction of the underside 270a toward the opposing upper side 270d.

In this example, the height h1 of the rib 270e from the lower surface 270a is approximately 1 mm, and the height h2 from the lower surface 270a to the upper surface 270d is approximately 13 mm, which is higher than the height of approximately 12 mm obtained by adding the height h1 of the rib 270e (approximately 1 mm) to the diameter of the game ball BL (approximately 11 mm).

When assembling the ball passage 270, if the screw 272 is properly attached to the screw insertion port 274 without loosening, as shown enlarged in Figure 36(b), the head of the screw 272 will protrude approximately 0.5 mm from the bottom surface 270a, but will not protrude beyond the height h1 of the rib 270e (approximately 1 mm). Therefore, as shown in "Normal" in Figure 36(a), the game ball BL can pass between the head of the screw 272 and the top surface 270d and will not become lodged in the ball passage 270.

On the other hand, when assembling the ball passage 270, if the screw 272 is loose or not properly attached when being attached to the screw insertion port 274, the head of the screw 272 will protrude beyond the height h1 of the rib 270e (approximately 1 mm), as shown in "Abnormal (loose)" in Figure 36 (a), and the game ball BL that flows into the ball passage 270 will not be able to pass between the head of the screw 272 and the upper surface 270d, and will remain in the ball passage 270.

Furthermore, if the head of the screw 272 protrudes beyond the height h1 of the rib 270e (approximately 1 mm) due to loosening of the screw 272, the gap distance L1 (see Figure 37(a)) between the outer edge of the head of the screw 272 and the left side surface 270b (or right side surface 270c) will be less than the diameter of the game ball BL (approximately 11 mm). Therefore, as shown in Figure 37(a), the game ball BL will not be able to pass between the head of the screw 272 and the left side surface 270b or between the head of the screw 272 and the right side surface 270c, and will become trapped in the ball passage 270.

In this example, if a screw is not properly attached during assembly of the flow paths and becomes loose, game balls will remain in the first flow paths (general winning port flow path 256 and normal winning port flow path 258). This makes it easy to detect assembly errors during pre-shipment test runs, improving convenience. Furthermore, since no screw insertion ports are formed in the second flow paths (first special winning port flow path 266 and variable winning port flow path 267), even if a screw is not properly attached during assembly and becomes loose, the second flow paths (first special winning port flow path 266 and variable winning port flow path 267) will not be affected, and pre-shipment test runs can be carried out quickly.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 37(a), a sensor 270f (ball detection sensor) capable of detecting that a game ball BL has passed through the ball passage 270 is provided below the screw insertion port 274 in the ball passage 270. In other words, the screw insertion port 274 is disposed upstream of the sensor 270f in the ball passage 270.

In this example, if the screw 272 becomes loose and a game ball BL becomes stuck in the ball passage 270, the action corresponding to the sensor 270f (such as a change in each symbol, a warning display for a left (right) hit, the payout of game balls, or an error display) will not be performed even if the game ball BL flows down, so the looseness of the screw 272 can be noticed immediately.

<Game board/ball path and screw/ball path (variant 1)>
Next, the ball passage 280 according to Modification 1 will be described with reference to Figure 37(b). Figure 37(b) is a side cross-sectional view that schematically shows the ball passage 280 according to Modification 1.

The spherical passage 280 is a cylindrical member composed of a lower surface 280a, left and right side surfaces (not shown) extending longitudinally from both sides of the shorter side of the lower surface 280, and an upper surface 280d disposed opposite the lower surface 280a.

A screw insertion hole 284 into which a screw 282 can be inserted is formed on the underside 280a of the ball passage 280, and the ball passage 280 is fixed to the back of the game board 200 by the screw 282 inserted into the screw insertion hole 284. In addition, a first rib 281 for smooth rolling of the game ball BL is formed on the underside 280a of the ball passage 280, protruding toward the opposing upper side 280d, and a second rib 282 for smooth rolling of the game ball BL is formed on the upper side 280d of the ball passage 280, protruding toward the opposing lower side 280a.

In this example, the height of the first rib 281 from the lower surface 280a is approximately 0.5 mm, the height of the second rib 282 from the upper surface 280d is approximately 1.5 mm, and the protruding height from the lower surface 280a when the screw 282 is properly attached to the screw insertion port 284 without loosening is approximately 1 mm.

In other words, in this example, the protruding height of the screw 282 (approximately 1 mm in this example) is higher than the height from the underside 280a of the first rib 281 (approximately 0.5 mm in this example) and lower than the height from the upper side 280d of the second rib 282 (approximately 1.5 mm in this example).

In addition, the area surrounded by the dotted line and designated by the symbol ER1 in Figure 37(b) indicates a specific space above the ball passage 280 that includes at least the head 282a of the screw 282 when the screw 282 is properly installed in the screw insertion port 284.

In this example, the first rib 281 and the second rib 282 are formed in the space excluding the specific space ER1 of the ball passage 280, and no ribs are formed in at least the specific space ER1. In other words, the first rib 281 and the second rib 282 are formed on the ball passage 280, but these first ribs 281 and second ribs 282 are not located near the screw insertion port 284 of the ball passage 280.

Ribs are already prone to trapping (losing) game balls BL, and there is a risk that game balls BL will become stuck if the screw 282 protrudes even slightly due to individual differences in the parts that form the screw 282 or ball passage 280, rather than due to an assembly error. Therefore, by not providing the screw insertion opening 284 near the first rib 281 or the second rib 282 (not providing the first rib 281 or the second rib 282 near the screw insertion opening), it is possible to prevent game balls BL from becoming stuck even when there is no assembly error.

<Game board/ball path and screw/ball path (variant 2)>
Next, we will explain the ball passage 290 according to Modification 2 using Figure 37(c). Figure 37(c) is a side cross-sectional view that schematically shows the ball passage 290 according to Modification 2.

The ball passage 290 is a schematic representation of a ball passage formed with a screw insertion port 294 through which a screw 292 can be inserted, and corresponds to, for example, the general winning port flow path 256 and the general starting port flow path 258 described using Figure 34.

The spherical passage 290 is a cylindrical member composed of a lower surface 290a, a left side surface 290b and a right side surface 290c extending longitudinally from either side of the lower surface 290a in the short direction, and an upper surface (not shown) disposed opposite the lower surface 290a.

A screw insertion hole 294 is formed on the underside 290a of the ball passage 290, into which the threaded portion of the screw 292 can be inserted, and the ball passage 290 is fixed to the back of the game board 200 by the screw 292 inserted into the screw insertion hole 294.

In addition, a first rib 291 for smooth rolling of the game ball BL is formed on the left side surface 290b of the ball passage 290, protruding toward the opposing right side surface 290c, and a second rib 292 for smooth rolling of the game ball BL is formed on the right side surface 290c of the ball passage 280, protruding toward the opposing left side surface 290b.

In addition, below the screw insertion port 294 in the ball passage 290, a sensor 290f (ball detection sensor) capable of detecting that the game ball BL has passed through the ball passage 290 is provided. In other words, the screw insertion port 294 is disposed upstream of the sensor 290f in the ball passage 290.

According to this example, if the screw 292 becomes loose and a game ball BL becomes stuck in the ball passage 290, even if the game ball BL flows down, no operation according to the sensor 290f (such as changes in each pattern, a warning display for a left (right) hit, payout of the game ball, or an error display) is performed, so that the looseness of the screw 292 can be noticed immediately.

In addition, the area indicated by the symbol ER2 in Figure 37(c) indicates a specific space above the ball passage 290 that includes at least the head 292a of the screw 292 when the screw 292 is properly installed in the screw insertion port 294.

In this example, the first rib 291 and the second rib 292 are formed in the space excluding the specific space ER2 of the ball passage 290, and no ribs are formed at least in the specific space ER2. In other words, the first rib 291 and the second rib 292 are formed on the ball passage 290, but these first ribs 291 and second ribs 292 are not located near the screw insertion port 294 of the ball passage 290.

Ribs are already prone to trapping (losing) game balls BL, and there is a risk that game balls BL will become stuck if the screw 292 protrudes even slightly due to individual differences in the parts that form the screw 292 or ball passage 290, rather than due to an assembly error. Therefore, by not providing screw insertion openings 294 near the first rib 291 or second rib 292 (not providing the first rib 291 or second rib 292 near the screw insertion openings 294), it is possible to prevent game balls BL from becoming stuck even when there is no assembly error.

<Game board/winning slot, starting slot>
Next, the differences between the general winning slot 226, the first special winning slot 232, the second special winning slot 230, the general winning slot 228, and the variable winning slot 234 explained using Figure 32 will be explained.

<Game board/general prize slot>
The general winning opening 226 allows game balls to flow down in any game mode, including normal game mode, time-saving game mode, and jackpot (small jackpot) game mode. Furthermore, since it does not include any electrically driven components, game balls can flow through it even when the power to the gaming machine is turned off. The general winning opening 226 may be provided only in the left side area of the gaming board 200, only in the right side area of the gaming board 200, or in both areas.

As shown in Figure 34(b), a screw insertion port 256a into which a screw 257 can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the general winning port flow path 256. However, similar to the ball passage 270 described using Figure 37(a), the screw insertion port 256a is not located in the serpentine portion of the general winning port flow path 256, but is located upstream of the sensor that detects a ball (winning) entering the general winning port 226.

If a screw becomes loose and a game ball becomes stuck in the flow path, the sensor will not perform any actions (such as changing the symbols, displaying a warning when hitting left (right), paying out game balls, or displaying an error) even if the game ball flows down, so the loose screw can be noticed immediately. Furthermore, the meandering section of the flow path is already prone to balls getting caught (becoming stuck), and there is a risk that game balls will become stuck not due to an assembly error, but simply because the screw protrudes slightly due to individual differences in the parts that make up the screw or flow path. Therefore, by not providing a screw insertion port in the meandering section, it is possible to prevent game balls from becoming stuck even when there is no assembly error.

In addition, ribs are formed on the general winning opening flow path 256, but similar to the ball passage 290 described using Figure 37 (c), the ribs are configured so as not to be located near the screw insertion opening 256a of the general winning opening flow path 256.

Ribs are already prone to balls getting caught (being stuck), and there is a risk that balls will become stuck not due to an assembly error, but simply because a screw protrudes slightly due to individual differences in the parts that form the screw or flow path. Therefore, by not providing screw insertion openings near ribs (not providing ribs near screw insertion openings), it is possible to prevent balls from becoming stuck even when there is no assembly error.

As shown in Figure 34 (b), the general winning port flow path 256 has a first opening (flow path inlet 256in) and a second opening (flow path outlet 256out), with the first opening (flow path inlet 256in) being located upstream of the second opening (flow path outlet 256out), and the screw insertion port 256a being located closer to the first opening (flow path inlet 256in) than the second opening (flow path outlet 256out).

As a result, if game balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow due to a loose screw or other reason during a test shot inspection before shipping, the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience.

<Game board/1st special chart start gate>
The first special symbol starting hole 232 facilitates the flow of game balls in certain time-saving game modes. Furthermore, because it is equipped with an electrically driven component (openable/closable blade member), it is often difficult for game balls to flow down when the game machine's power is turned off in normal game mode. Specifically, the blade member can be driven to an open state when a game ball passes through the normal power gate 228g. However, the normal power gate 228g is positioned so that it can pass through when struck from the right, and even if it passes through in normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode), it only opens for a short time. Therefore, when the game machine's power is turned off in normal game mode, it is often difficult for game balls to flow down. The first special symbol starting hole 232 may be provided only in the left region of the game board 200, or only in the right region of the game board 200.

As shown in Figure 35, the flow path above the first special pattern starting port flow path 266 does not have a screw insertion port through which a screw can be inserted, and a screw insertion port 262a through which a screw 257 can be inserted is formed in an area not above the flow path of the first special pattern starting port flow path 266.

This eliminates the adverse effects of loose screws and the like on the first special chart starting port flow path 266, and allows it to be stably fixed to the game board.

<Game board/2nd special chart start gate>
The second special symbol starting port 230 allows game balls to flow down in any game mode, including normal game mode, time-saving game mode, and big win (small win) game mode. Furthermore, since it does not have any electrically driven components, game balls can flow even when the power to the gaming machine is turned off. The second special symbol starting port 230 may be located in the left side area of the gaming board 200.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the flow path above the second special symbol starting port flow path 268 does not have a screw insertion port through which a screw can be inserted. However, the flow path of the second special symbol starting port flow path 268 may have a screw insertion port through which a screw can be inserted. In this case, similar to the ball passage 270 described using Figure 37(a), it is preferable that the screw insertion port is not located in the serpentine portion of the second special symbol starting port 230, but is located upstream of the sensor that detects a ball entering (winning) the second special symbol starting port 230.

If a screw becomes loose and a game ball becomes stuck in the flow path, the sensor will not perform any actions (such as changing the symbols, displaying a warning when hitting left (right), paying out game balls, or displaying an error) even if the game ball flows down, so the loose screw can be noticed immediately. Furthermore, the meandering section of the flow path is already prone to balls getting caught (becoming stuck), and there is a risk that game balls will become stuck not due to an assembly error, but simply because the screw protrudes slightly due to individual differences in the screws or components that make up the flow path. Therefore, by not providing a screw insertion port in the meandering section (not providing a rib near the screw insertion port), it is possible to prevent game balls from becoming stuck even when there is no assembly error.

In addition, a rib is formed on the second special pattern starting port flow path 268, but if a screw insertion port is formed on the flow path of the second special pattern starting port flow path 268, it is preferable to configure the rib so that it is not located near the screw insertion port of the second special pattern starting port 230, as with the ball passage 290 described using Figure 37 (c).

Ribs are already prone to balls getting caught (losing), and there is a risk that balls will become stuck not due to an assembly error, but simply due to individual differences in the screws or components that form the flow path, causing the screws to protrude slightly. Therefore, by not providing screw insertion openings near the ribs, it is possible to prevent balls from becoming stuck even when there is no assembly error.

The second special starting port flow path 268 has a first opening (flow path inlet) and a second opening (flow path outlet), with the first opening (flow path inlet) being located upstream of the second opening (flow path outlet). If a screw insertion port is formed in the flow path of the second special starting port flow path 268, it is preferable that the screw insertion port be located closer to the first opening (flow path inlet) than to the second opening (flow path outlet).

With this configuration, if game balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow due to a loose screw or other reason during a test shot inspection before shipping, the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience.

<Game board/normal map starting gate>
The normal game start port 228 allows game balls to flow down in any game mode, including normal game mode, time-saving game mode, and jackpot (small jackpot) game mode. Furthermore, since it does not have any electrically driven components, game balls can flow even when the power to the game machine is turned off. The normal game start port 228 may also be located in the right area of the game board 200.

As shown in Figure 34, a screw insertion port 258a into which a screw 257 can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the normal starting port flow path 258. However, similar to the ball passage 270 described using Figure 37(a), the screw insertion port 258a is not located in the serpentine portion of the normal starting port flow path 258, but is located upstream of the sensor that detects a ball entering (winning) the normal starting port 228.

If a screw becomes loose and a game ball becomes stuck in the flow path, the sensor will not perform any actions (such as changing the symbols, displaying a warning when hitting left (right), paying out game balls, or displaying an error) even if the game ball flows down, so the loose screw can be noticed immediately. Furthermore, the meandering section of the flow path is already prone to balls getting caught (becoming stuck), and there is a risk that game balls will become stuck not due to an assembly error, but simply because the screw protrudes slightly due to individual differences in the parts that make up the screw or flow path. Therefore, by not providing a screw insertion port in the meandering section, it is possible to prevent game balls from becoming stuck even when there is no assembly error.

In addition, ribs are formed on the normal starting port flow path 258, but similar to the ball passage 290 described using Figure 37(c), the ribs are configured so as not to be located near the screw insertion port 258a of the normal starting port flow path 258.

Ribs are already prone to balls getting caught (being stuck), and there is a risk that balls will become stuck not due to an assembly error, but simply because a screw protrudes slightly due to individual differences in the parts that form the screw or flow path. Therefore, by not providing screw insertion openings near ribs (not providing ribs near screw insertion openings), it is possible to prevent balls from becoming stuck even when there is no assembly error.

The starting port flow path 258 has a first opening (flow path inlet) and a second opening (flow path outlet), with the first opening (flow path inlet) located upstream of the second opening (flow path outlet), and the screw insertion port 258a located closer to the first opening (flow path inlet) than the second opening (flow path outlet).

As a result, if game balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow due to a loose screw or other reason during a test shot inspection before shipping, the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience.

<Game board/variable winning slot>
The variable winning opening 234 allows game balls to flow easily when a big win (small win) is being played. Also, since it is equipped with an electrically driven component (an openable/closable door member), it is difficult for game balls to flow down when the power to the gaming machine is turned off during normal play. The variable winning opening 234 may be provided in the left side area of the gaming board 200.

As shown in Figure 35, the flow path above the variable winning opening flow path 267 does not have a screw insertion port through which a screw can be inserted, but a screw insertion port 262a through which a screw 257 can be inserted is formed in an area not on the flow path of the variable winning opening flow path 267.

This eliminates the adverse effects of loose screws and the like on the variable winning port flow path 267, and allows it to be stably fixed to the gaming board.

<Game board/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a flow path through which gaming balls flow, and the flow path is configured to have a first flow path (for example, the general winning port flow path 256 and the normal winning port flow path 258 shown in FIG. 34(a)) and a second flow path (for example, the first special winning port flow path 266 and the variable winning port flow path 267 shown in FIG. 35), and the first flow path is a flow path through which gaming balls can flow during normal play, and the second flow path is a flow path through which it is difficult for gaming balls to flow during normal play and through which it is easy for gaming balls to flow during winning play, and a screw insertion port (for example, the screw insertion port 256a and the screw insertion port 258a shown in FIG. 34(a)) through which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the first flow path, but the screw insertion port is not formed on the flow path of the second flow path.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, if a screw is not properly attached during assembly of the flow path and becomes loose, gaming balls will remain on the first flow path. This makes it easy to detect assembly errors during test runs before shipping, improving convenience. Furthermore, since no screw insertion openings are formed on the second flow path, even if a screw is not properly attached during assembly of the flow path and becomes loose, the second flow path will not be affected, and test runs before shipping can be carried out quickly.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a flow path through which gaming balls flow, and the flow path is configured to have a first flow path (for example, the normal game start port flow path 258 shown in FIG. 34(a)), a second flow path (for example, the first special game start port flow path 266 and the variable winning port flow path 267 shown in FIG. 35), and a third flow path (for example, the normal winning port flow path 256 shown in FIG. 34(a)). The first flow path is the flow path through which gaming balls flow during normal play. The second flow path is a flow path through which game balls can pass during the normal game, the second flow path is a flow path through which game balls have difficulty passing during the normal game and through which game balls can easily pass during the winning game, the third flow path is a flow path through which game balls can pass during the normal game, and a first screw insertion port (for example, screw insertion port 258a shown in FIG. 34(a)) through which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the first flow path, and a screw insertion port through which a screw can be inserted is not formed on the flow path of the second flow path. The third flow path has a third screw insertion port (e.g., screw insertion port 256a shown in FIG. 34(b)) formed on the flow path of the third flow path, into which a screw can be inserted. The first screw insertion port is formed at a position where, if a screw is not properly inserted into the first screw insertion port, a gaming ball circulating through the first flow path will come into contact with the screw and the structural element forming the first flow path. The third flow path has a first opening (e.g., flow path inlet 256in shown in FIG. 34(b)) and a second opening (e.g., flow path outlet 256out shown in FIG. 34(b)), the first opening is located upstream of the second opening. The third screw insertion port is formed at a position where, if a screw is not properly inserted into the third screw insertion port, a gaming ball circulating through the third flow path will come into contact with the screw and the structural element forming the third flow path, and is closer to the first opening than the second opening.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, if a screw is not attached correctly and becomes loose during assembly of the flow paths, gaming balls will remain in the first and third flow paths. This makes it easy to detect assembly errors during test hit inspections before shipping, thereby improving convenience.

In addition, since there are no screw insertion ports formed on the second flow path (the flow path through which game balls flow only during winning plays), even if the screws are not installed correctly during assembly of the flow path and become loose, the second flow path is not affected, allowing for quick test shot inspections before shipping.

In addition, because the third screw insertion port is located closer to the first opening than the second opening, if game balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow during a test shot inspection before shipping due to a loose third screw or other reason, the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience. If the third screw insertion port were located closer to the second opening than the first opening, it would take a certain amount of time for game balls to become trapped in the flow path and overflow, making it difficult to immediately detect the assembly error.

Furthermore, the screw insertion port (e.g., screw insertion port 274 shown in FIG. 36(a)) formed on the flow path of the first flow path (e.g., ball passage 270 shown in FIG. 36(a)) may be located in a position where, if the screw (e.g., screw 272 shown in FIG. 36(a)) is not properly inserted into the screw insertion port (e.g., if the screw is loose, as shown by "Abnormal" in FIG. 36(a)), a gaming ball circulating through the first flow path will come into contact with the screw and the structural body forming the first flow path (e.g., top surface portion 270d shown in FIG. 36(a), left side surface portion 270b or right side surface portion 270c shown in FIG. 37(a)).

With this configuration, if game balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow due to a loose screw or other reason during a test shot inspection before shipping, the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience.

Also, the game board may include a game board (e.g., game board 200 shown in FIG. 32), and the second flow path may have a screw insertion opening (e.g., screw insertion opening 262a shown in FIG. 35) formed in an area that is not on the flow path of the second flow path, and the first flow path may be fixed to the game board by inserting the screw into the screw insertion opening formed in the first flow path, and the second flow path may be fixed to the game board by inserting the screw into the screw insertion opening formed in an area that is not on the flow path of the second flow path.

With this configuration, the first flow path can detect loose screws and other issues by detecting accumulated game balls, and can be stably fixed to the game board. The second flow path can be stably fixed to the game board, and can be free from the adverse effects of loose screws and other issues.

Furthermore, the first flow path (for example, the general winning port flow path 256 shown in Figure 34(b)) has a first opening (for example, the flow path inlet 256in shown in Figure 34(b)) and a second opening (for example, the flow path outlet 256out shown in Figure 34(b)), the first opening being an opening located upstream of the second opening, and the screw insertion opening (for example, the screw insertion opening 256a shown in Figure 34(b)) being located closer to the first opening than the second opening.

With this configuration, if game balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow due to a loose screw or other reason during a test shot inspection before shipping, the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board and a flow path through which gaming balls flow, and the flow path has a portion that is bent in the plane of the gaming board and a portion that is not bent in the plane of the board (hereinafter referred to as the "non-bent portion"). The flow path is divided into a first flow path (for example, the normal starting port flow path 258 shown in FIG. 34(a)), a second flow path (for example, the first special starting port flow path 266 and the variable winning port flow path 267 shown in FIG. 35), and a third flow path (for example, the variable winning port flow path 267 shown in FIG. 34(b)). The first flow path is a flow path through which game balls can flow during normal play, the second flow path is a flow path through which game balls have difficulty circulating during normal play and through which game balls can easily circulate during a winning game, and the third flow path is a flow path through which game balls can flow during normal play. A first screw insertion port (for example, a screw insertion port 258a shown in FIG. 34(a)) through which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the first flow path, and a screw insertion port (for example, a screw insertion port 258b shown in FIG. 34(a)) through which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the second flow path. 34(b))。 The third flow path has a screw insertion opening (for example, a screw insertion opening 256a shown in FIG. 34(b)) on the flow path of the third flow path, into which a screw can be inserted, and the first screw insertion opening is formed at a position where, when a screw is not properly inserted into the first screw insertion opening, a game ball that has circulated through the first flow path will come into contact with the screw and a component that forms the first flow path, and the third flow path has a first opening (for example, a flow path inlet 256in shown in FIG. 34(b)) and a second opening (for example, a flow path inlet 256in shown in FIG. 4(b)), the first opening is located upstream of the second opening, the third screw insertion port is located at a position where, if a screw is not properly inserted into the third screw insertion port, a gaming ball circulating through the third flow path will come into contact with the screw and the component forming the third flow path, and is located closer to the first opening than the second opening, and the third screw insertion port is located in the non-bent portion of the flow path of the third flow path.

The second flow path may have a second screw insertion port formed in an area of the second flow path that is not on the flow path of the second flow path, the first flow path may be fixed to the gaming board by inserting a screw into the first screw insertion port, the second flow path may be fixed to the gaming board by inserting a screw into the second screw insertion port, and the third flow path may be fixed to the gaming board by inserting a screw into the third screw insertion port.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the third screw insertion port is located closer to the first opening than the second opening. This allows for immediate detection of an assembly error if, during a test play inspection before shipping, gaming balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow due to a loose third screw or other reason. This improves convenience. If the third screw insertion port were located closer to the second opening than the first opening, it would take a certain amount of time for gaming balls to become trapped in the flow path and overflow, making it difficult to immediately detect an assembly error. Furthermore, the serpentine portion (bent portion) is already prone to trapping gaming balls, and there is a risk of gaming balls becoming trapped not due to an assembly error, but simply due to a slight protrusion of the screw or individual differences in the components that form the flow path. Therefore, by providing a screw insertion port in a non-bent portion that is not a serpentine portion, it is possible to prevent gaming balls from becoming trapped even when there is no assembly error.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first operating means (for example, the ball launch handle 134 shown in FIG. 1) capable of launching gaming balls, and a flow path through which the gaming balls flow, and the flow path is configured to have a first flow path (for example, the normal starting port flow path 258 shown in FIG. 34(a)), a second flow path (for example, the first special starting port flow path 266 and the variable winning port flow path 267 shown in FIG. 35), and a third flow path (for example, the normal winning port flow path 256 shown in FIG. 34(a)), and The first flow path is a flow path through which game balls can flow when a player hits with the left side using the first operating means, the second flow path is a flow path through which game balls are difficult to flow during normal play and through which game balls can flow when a player hits with the right side using the first operating means during a winning game, and the third flow path is a flow path through which game balls can flow when a player hits with the right side using the first operating means, and a first screw insertion port (for example, screw insertion port 258a shown in FIG. 34(a)) through which a screw can be inserted is provided on the flow path of the first flow path. a screw insertion port into which a screw can be inserted (for example, a screw insertion port 256a shown in FIG. 34(b)) is formed on the flow path of the third flow path, and the first screw insertion port is formed at a position where, if a screw is not correctly inserted into the first screw insertion port, a gaming ball that has circulated through the first flow path will come into contact with the screw and a structural element that forms the first flow path; the third flow path has a first opening (for example, a flow path inlet 256in shown in FIG. 34(b)) and a second opening (for example, a flow path outlet 256out shown in FIG. 34(b)), the first opening is upstream of the second opening, and the third screw insertion port is formed at a position where, if a screw is not correctly inserted into the third screw insertion port, a gaming ball that has circulated through the third flow path will come into contact with the screw and a structural element that forms the third flow path, and is closer to the first opening than the second opening.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, if a screw is not attached correctly and becomes loose during assembly of the flow paths, gaming balls will remain in the first and third flow paths. This makes it easy to detect assembly errors during test hit inspections before shipping, thereby improving convenience.

In addition, since there are no screw insertion ports formed on the second flow path (the flow path through which game balls flow only during winning plays), even if the screws are not installed correctly during assembly of the flow path and become loose, the second flow path is not affected, allowing for quick test shot inspections before shipping.

In addition, because the third screw insertion port is located closer to the first opening than the second opening, if game balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow during a test shot inspection before shipping due to a loose third screw or other reason, the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience. If the third screw insertion port were located closer to the second opening than the first opening, it would take a certain amount of time for game balls to become trapped in the flow path and overflow, making it difficult to immediately detect the assembly error.

In addition, the first flow path is a flow path that allows flow when the screw is struck to the left, and the second and third flow paths are flow paths that allow flow when the screw is struck to the right, so screws placed at a distance can be inspected, improving inspection accuracy.

Also, the game board may include a game board (e.g., game board 200 shown in FIG. 32), in which a second screw insertion port (e.g., screw insertion port 262a shown in FIG. 35) is formed in the second flow path in an area not on the flow path of the second flow path, the first flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw (e.g., screw 257 shown in FIG. 35) into the first screw insertion port, the second flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw into the second screw insertion port, and the third flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw into the third screw insertion port.

With this configuration, the first and third flow paths can detect loose screws and other issues by detecting accumulated game balls, and can be stably fixed to the game board. The second flow path can be stably fixed to the game board, eliminating any adverse effects caused by loose screws and other issues.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a flow path through which gaming balls circulate, and the flow path is configured to have a first flow path (for example, the normal winning opening flow path 258 shown in FIG. 34(a)), a second flow path (for example, the variable winning opening flow path 267 shown in FIG. 35), a third flow path (for example, the normal winning opening flow path 256 shown in FIG. 34(a)), and a fourth flow path (for example, the first special winning opening flow path 266 shown in FIG. 35), and the first flow path is a flow path through which gaming balls can circulate during normal play, The second flow path is a flow path through which game balls have difficulty circulating during the normal game and which allows game balls to circulate easily during a winning game, the third flow path is a flow path through which game balls can circulate during the normal game, the fourth flow path is a flow path through which game balls have difficulty circulating during the normal game and which allows game balls to circulate easily during a certain time-saving game, and a first screw insertion port (for example, screw insertion port 258a shown in FIG. 34(a)) through which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the first flow path, and a screw insertion port (for example, screw insertion port 258b shown in FIG. 34(a)) through which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the second flow path. a third screw insertion port (for example, screw insertion port 256a shown in FIG. 34(b)) into which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the third flow path, a screw insertion port into which a screw can be inserted is not formed on the flow path of the fourth flow path, the first screw insertion port is formed at a position where, if a screw is not properly inserted into the first screw insertion port, a gaming ball that has circulated through the first flow path will come into contact with the screw and a component that forms the first flow path, and the third flow path has a This gaming machine has one opening (for example, the flow path inlet 256in shown in Figure 34(b)) and a second opening (for example, the flow path outlet 256out shown in Figure 34(b)), the first opening is located upstream of the second opening, and the third screw insertion opening is located closer to the first opening than the second opening so that if a screw is not properly inserted into the third screw insertion opening, a gaming ball circulating through the third flow path will come into contact with the screw and the component that forms the third flow path.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, if a screw is not attached correctly and becomes loose during assembly of the flow paths, gaming balls will remain in the first and third flow paths. This makes it easy to detect assembly errors during test hit inspections before shipping, thereby improving convenience.

In addition, since there are no screw insertion ports formed on the second flow path (the flow path through which game balls flow only during winning plays), even if the screws are not installed correctly during assembly of the flow path and become loose, the second flow path is not affected, allowing for quick test shot inspections before shipping.

In addition, because the third screw insertion port is located closer to the first opening than the second opening, if game balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow during a test shot inspection before shipping due to a loose third screw or other reason, the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience. If the third screw insertion port were located closer to the second opening than the first opening, it would take a certain amount of time for game balls to become trapped in the flow path and overflow, making it difficult to immediately detect the assembly error.

In addition, the second flow path, through which game balls circulate only during winning games, and the fourth flow path, through which game balls circulate only during time-saving games, do not have screw insertion holes through which screws can be inserted. This means that even if a screw is not installed correctly during assembly of the flow paths and becomes loose, the second and fourth flow paths will not be affected, preventing situations such as shipping a gaming machine without noticing an assembly error.

Also, the game board may include a game board (e.g., game board 200 shown in FIG. 32), in which the second flow path has a second screw insertion port (e.g., screw insertion port 262a shown in FIG. 35) formed in an area not on the second flow path, and the fourth flow path has a fourth screw insertion port (e.g., screw insertion port 262a shown in FIG. 35) formed in an area not on the fourth flow path, and the first flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw (e.g., screw 257 shown in FIG. 35) into the first screw insertion port, the second flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw into the second screw insertion port, the third flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw into the third screw insertion port, and the fourth flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw into the fourth screw insertion port.

With this configuration, the first and third flow paths can detect loose screws and other issues by detecting accumulated game balls, and can be stably fixed to the game board. The second and fourth flow paths can be stably fixed to the game board, eliminating the adverse effects of loose screws and other issues.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a flow path through which gaming balls flow, and the flow path is configured to have a first flow path (for example, the normal game start port flow path 258 shown in FIG. 34(a)), a second flow path (for example, the first special game start port flow path 266 and the variable winning port flow path 267 shown in FIG. 35), and a third flow path (for example, the normal winning port flow path 256 shown in FIG. 34(a)), and the first flow path is The second flow path is a flow path through which game balls can flow even when the power supply to the gaming machine is turned off during normal play, the second flow path is a flow path through which game balls cannot flow even when the power supply to the gaming machine is turned off, and the third flow path is a flow path through which game balls can flow even when the power supply to the gaming machine is turned off, and a first screw insertion port (for example, screw insertion port 258a shown in FIG. 34(a)) through which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the first flow path, and a screw insertion port through which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the second flow path. a third screw insertion port (e.g., screw insertion port 256a shown in FIG. 34(b)) through which a screw can be inserted is formed on the third flow path; the first screw insertion port is formed at a position where, if a screw is not inserted correctly into the first screw insertion port, a gaming ball circulating through the first flow path will come into contact with the screw and a component forming the first flow path; the third flow path has a first opening (e.g., flow path inlet 256in shown in FIG. 34(b)) and a second opening (e.g., flow path outlet 256out shown in FIG. 34(b)); the first opening is upstream of the second opening; and the third screw insertion port is formed at a position where, if a screw is not inserted correctly into the third screw insertion port, a gaming ball circulating through the third flow path will come into contact with the screw and a component forming the third flow path, and is closer to the first opening than the second opening.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, if a screw is not attached correctly and becomes loose during assembly of the flow paths, gaming balls will remain in the first and third flow paths. This makes it easy to detect assembly errors during test hit inspections before shipping, thereby improving convenience.

In addition, since there are no screw insertion ports formed on the second flow path (the flow path through which game balls flow only during winning plays), even if the screws are not installed correctly during assembly of the flow path and become loose, the second flow path is not affected, allowing for quick test shot inspections before shipping.

In addition, because the third screw insertion port is located closer to the first opening than the second opening, if game balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow during a test shot inspection before shipping due to a loose third screw or other reason, the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience. If the third screw insertion port were located closer to the second opening than the first opening, it would take a certain amount of time for game balls to become trapped in the flow path and overflow, making it difficult to immediately detect the assembly error.

In addition, the first and third flow paths allow game balls to flow through even when the gaming machine is turned off, so inspections related to the flow of game balls can be performed even after the gaming machine is turned off, improving convenience for workers.

Also, the game board may include a game board (e.g., game board 200 shown in FIG. 32), in which a second screw insertion port (e.g., screw insertion port 262a shown in FIG. 35) is formed in the second flow path in an area not on the flow path of the second flow path, the first flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw (e.g., screw 257 shown in FIG. 35) into the first screw insertion port, the second flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw into the second screw insertion port, and the third flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw into the third screw insertion port.

With this configuration, the first and third flow paths can detect loose screws and other issues by detecting accumulated game balls, and can be stably fixed to the game board. The second flow path can be stably fixed to the game board, eliminating any adverse effects caused by loose screws and other issues.

<Embodiment 2>
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (slot machine) according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 38. Figure 38 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, and right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer peripheries (not shown) are housed inside the center of the main body 101 and are configured to rotate within the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are driven to rotate by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to form each reel 110-112. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in approximately three rows through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. By spinning each reel 110-112, the symbol combinations visible to the player change. In other words, each reel 110-112 functions as a display device that variably displays multiple symbol combinations. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal displays can also be used as such display devices. In this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number and location of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is located on the back of each reel 110-112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable for the backlight to be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each reel 110-112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length attached to the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. The rotational position of the symbols on the reel is determined based on the detection results of this sensor, and the reels 110-112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The payline indicator lamp 120 indicates which paylines 114 are active. The active paylines are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as gaming media. There are five paylines 114. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal payline is active. If two medals are bet, the top horizontal payline and the bottom horizontal payline are active, adding three lines. If three medals are bet, the bottom horizontal payline and the top right-upward payline are active, adding five lines. The number of paylines 114 is not limited to five. For example, if one medal is bet, the five active paylines may be the middle horizontal payline, the top horizontal payline, the bottom horizontal payline, the bottom right-upward payline, and the top right-upward payline. Alternatively, the same number of paylines may be uniformly set as active paylines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

BET buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time BET button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three medals; two medals are inserted when BET button 131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when BET button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, BET button 132 is also referred to as the MAX BET button. The game medal insertion lamps 129 light up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up, indicating that game play can be started.

The medal slot 141 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals to start playing. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or physical medals can be inserted (inserted) through the medal slot 141; the term "inserting" encompasses both methods. The stored medal count display 125 is a display that displays the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display that displays various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during bonus play) as numerical values. The payout medal count display 127 is a display that displays the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored medal count display 125, game information display 126, and payout medal count display 127 are seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 begin to rotate. Operating the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have begun to spin when the start lever 135 is operated, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation. Light-emitting elements may be provided inside each stop button 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove inserted medals if they become jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

Below the stop button unit 136 is a title panel 162 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed. Below the title panel 162 are a medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from the speaker installed inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 installed on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to add excitement to the game. The performance device 160 is installed at the top of the front door 102, and the sound hole 143 is installed at the top of the performance device 160. This performance device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two shutters, a right shutter 163a and a left shutter 163b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (performance image display device) installed behind this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 100.

Note that the display device does not have to be an LCD display device; any display device capable of displaying various presentation images and various game information may be used, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. The display screen is rectangular and is configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Decorations (not shown) may be provided around the edges of the display screen, causing part of the edges of the display screen to be hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregularly shaped. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

<Internal structure>
FIG. 39 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open.

The main body 101 is a box-like structure surrounded by a top panel 261, left side panel 260, right side panel 260, bottom panel 264, and back panel 242, and is open at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 640 is located in a position that does not overlap with the ventilation opening 249 provided at the top of the back panel 242, and stores the main control board 600 inside. Details of the main control board 600 and the main control board storage case 640 will be described later.

The three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below this main control board storage case 640. Also, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side panel 260 on the right side, which is connected to the main control board 600 and outputs information from the slot machine 100 to an external device.

The medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower panel 264, and above this medal payout device 180, i.e., below the reels 110 to 112, is disposed a power supply device 252 having a power board, with a power switch 244 disposed on the front of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied to the slot machine 100 from an external source into DC, converts it to a specified voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and device. It also has a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) that supplies power to specified components for a specified period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power source is cut off.

To the right of the medal payout device 180 is located the auxiliary medal storage 240, with an overflow terminal (not shown) located behind it. The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 264, which extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side panel 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the symbol display window 113 are provided the performance device 160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls this performance device 160, a sub-control board storage case (not shown) that houses the sub-control board, an upper speaker 272, and the like. Below the symbol display window 113 are provided the medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which medals pass when this medal selector 170 drops illegal medals and the like into the medal tray 161. Furthermore, a low-frequency speaker 277 is provided in a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Main board storage case, mirror>
Next, the main substrate storage case 640 and the mirror 647 will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 40 is an exploded perspective view showing the main board storage case 640 and the main control board 600, and Figure 41 is a plan view showing the main control board 600 housed in the main board storage case 640.

The main board storage case 640 (board case) is a box-shaped structure consisting of a board storage body 642 (storage body) with a roughly rectangular, dish-shaped bottom and a lid body 644 that is positioned to cover the internal space of this board storage body 642.

The main control board 600 (board) is housed in the internal space of this main board storage case 640, fixed to the board storage body 642 with screws 646. The board storage body 642 and the lid body 644 are each made of translucent resin, making it possible to view the main control board 600 housed inside the main board storage case 640 from the outside through the main board storage case 640.

Gate-shaped hinge portions 642b are provided in two locations on the lower edge of the substrate container 642. The lower edge of the lid 644 has two hook-shaped hook portions 644a that engage with these hinge portions 642b, and locking tongues 644b that engage with the upper edge of the substrate container 642 are provided on both the left and right ends of the upper edge.

Therefore, when assembling the main board storage case 640, first, the hook portion 644a of the lid body 644 is engaged with the hinge portion 642b of the board container 642, and then the lid body 644 is rotated around the hinge portion 642b to combine the board container 642 and the lid body 644, and the locking tongue 644b of the lid body 644 is engaged with the locking hole on the upper edge of the board container 642, thereby securing the lid body 644 to the board container 642.

As shown in Figure 40, a mirror 647 (mirror member) made of a glass plate with a silver film attached is provided in the upper left corner of the internal space of the board housing 642 when viewed from the front. As shown in Figure 41, when the main control board 600 is housed in the board housing 642, this mirror 647 is configured to be located near one longitudinal end (in this example, the left end when viewed from above) of the main IC (main chip) 606a mounted on the main control board 600.

In this example, the mirrored member (mirror 647) makes it possible to see the backside and terminals of the IC (main IC 606a) mounted on the board (main control board 600), making it easier to detect fraudulent activity. Furthermore, the IC (main IC 606a) can be checked while the board (main control board 600) is housed in the board case (main board storage case 640), making it easier for game parlor staff and others to check, thereby increasing convenience. Furthermore, by providing the mirrored member (mirror 647) near the IC (main IC 606a), the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be increased, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activity from occurring.

In addition, the mirror 647 (mirror member) is located inside the board case (main board storage case 640), which is tightly sealed and fixed by the board housing body 642 and the lid body 644. This prevents the mirror member (mirror 647) from becoming dirty or damaged, and prevents tampering such as unauthorized removal of the mirror member (mirror 647), improving maintainability and crime prevention.

The "mirror member" of the present invention is not limited to a mirror made of glass with a silver film attached, but may also be, for example, a member made by polishing (mirror polishing) a material such as metal, aluminum, or plastic to give it a mirror-like surface, or a member made by processing (mirror processing) the surface of a material such as metal, aluminum, or plastic to give it a mirror-like surface.

In addition, while this example shows the mirror 647 (mirror member) being provided inside the board housing body 642 of the main board housing case 640 (board case), the "mirror member" of the present invention need only be provided near one longitudinal end of the IC. For example, it may be provided inside the lid 644 of the main board housing case 640 (board case), it may be provided on the main control board 600 (board), or it may be provided on a member other than the main board housing case 640 (board case) or main control board 600 (board). Furthermore, while the mirror 647 is provided near the longitudinal left side of the main IC 606a (the end where pin 1 is located), it may also be provided near the longitudinal right side of the main IC 606a (the end opposite the end where pin 1 is located).

<Main control board, mirror>
Next, the main control board 600 and the mirror 647 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main control board 600 is an example of a "board" according to the present invention. Therefore, the "board" according to the present invention is not limited to the board that constitutes the main control unit, but may be, for example, the sub-control board or performance control board described using Figure 39, or any other board mounted on the gaming machine. Furthermore, the gaming machine may be equipped with multiple boards that correspond to the "board" according to the present invention.

The main control board 600 is composed of a substrate 602 made of a rectangular plate, a wiring pattern (not shown) and a resist layer 604 formed on one surface (mounting surface 600a) of the substrate 602, and multiple types of components 606 (606a-606f) mounted on one surface (mounting surface 600a) of the substrate 602.

Components 606 mounted on the main control board 600 include a main IC 606a, various ICs 606b, passive components such as resistors, capacitors, and coils 606c, connectors 606d, LEDs 606e, and reference terminals 606f.

Main IC 606a is an IC that includes a CPU, ROM for storing control programs and various data, and RAM for temporarily storing data, and is a control IC that controls the core of the game. Note that the "IC" according to the present invention is not limited to the main IC mounted on the main control board 600, but may also be an IC other than the main IC, such as the various ICs 606b shown in Figure 41.

In this example, the main IC 606a is mounted on the mounting surface 600a of the main control board 600 via a socket 606g, and is mounted on this mounting surface 600a in an eccentric state (closer to the outer edge on the left side of the main control board 600) on one longitudinal side of the main control board 600 (in this example, the left longitudinal side). This reduces the distance between the mirror member (mirror 647) arranged on the main board storage case 640 and the IC (main IC 606a) mounted on the main control board 600, and the mirror member (mirror 647) makes the back side and terminals of the IC (main IC 606a) easier to see, making it easier for gaming parlor staff and others to notice fraud.

Furthermore, one longitudinal side (in this example, the left longitudinal side) of the main control board 600 on which the main IC 606a is mounted is the side closest to the left side panel 260 (see Figure 39) inside the main body 101 when viewed from the front, i.e., the side closest to the rotation axis DL of the front door 102 (the axis shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 41). Therefore, when a store employee or the like at an amusement parlor opens the front door 102 to look at the mirror member (mirror 647), the front door 102 does not get in the way of the inspection work, making it easier to check the mirror member (mirror 647), which not only improves the efficiency of the inspection work but also makes it easier to detect fraud.

Furthermore, since no other electronic components are provided in the area BE (the rectangular area indicated by the thick dotted line in Figure 41) between the mirror 647 (mirror member) and the main IC 606a on the main control board 600 (board), other electronic components mounted on the board (main control board 600) are less likely to be reflected in the mirror member (mirror 647). The mirror member (mirror 647) makes it easier to see the back side and terminals of the IC (main IC 606a), making it easier for gaming parlor staff to notice fraud. It is sufficient that no other electronic components are provided in area BE, and silkscreen printing, wiring patterns, lands, through-holes, etc. indicating component numbers and mounting locations may be provided as long as they do not impede the visibility of the mirror member (mirror 647).

Furthermore, since no light output means capable of outputting light (e.g., LED 606e) or display means capable of displaying information (e.g., LED segment display) are disposed in the area LE on the longitudinal extension of the main IC 606a (the area sandwiched between two thin dotted lines in Figure 41), the light output from the light output means or display means is less likely to be reflected by the mirror member (mirror 647), and the mirror member (mirror 647) makes the back side and terminals of the IC (main IC 606a) easier to see, making it easier for gaming parlor staff to notice any fraud.

Figure 42(a) is a side view taken from the direction indicated by line A-A in Figure 41.

Socket pins (terminals) (not shown) are provided inside the socket 606g mounted on the main control board 600 at positions corresponding to the terminals 606a1 of the installed main IC 606a. When the main IC 606a is installed in the socket 606g, the terminals 606a1 of the main IC 606a and the socket pins of the socket 606g are electrically connected, thereby electrically connecting the main IC 606a and the main control board 600.

In addition, a notch 606g1 recessed toward the bottom surface of the socket 606g is formed on the top surface of the socket 606g in the short direction (between the socket 606g and the main IC 606a), and a notch 606g2 recessed toward the top surface of the socket 606g is formed on the bottom surface of the socket 606g in the short direction (between the socket 606g and the main control board 600).

The body of socket 606g is made from a transparent or translucent resin material, making it possible to visually confirm through the body of socket 606g that no unauthorized components are present. However, in this example, a mirror 647 is also provided near one longitudinal end of main IC 606a, making it possible to visually check the state of notch 606g1 and notch 606g2 through mirror 647, and making it possible to visually confirm that no unauthorized components are present between socket 606g and main IC 606a, or between socket 606g and main control board 600.

LED 606e is an electronic component equipped with multiple light-emitting elements (LED elements) capable of outputting light, and has a maximum height of h3.

The verification terminal 606f is a terminal to which a test terminal (not shown) can be connected, and has a maximum height of h4. When a test terminal is connected to this verification terminal 606f, the test terminal verifies the checksum and determines whether the main control board 600 connected to the test terminal is a genuine main control board.

In this example, a reference terminal 606f, whose maximum height h4 is higher than the maximum height h3 of the LED 606e, is mounted in an area closer to the main IC 606a and mirror 647 than the LED 606e.

In this example, the verification terminal 606f makes it difficult for the light output from the LED 606e to be reflected by the mirror 647, which makes it easier to see the back side and terminals of the main IC 606a, making it easier for gaming parlor staff to notice fraud.

In this example, a reference terminal is mounted on the main control board 600, but if a light output means capable of outputting light (e.g., a lamp or LED) or a display means capable of displaying information (e.g., an LED segment indicator) is mounted on the main control board 600, a component with a maximum height higher than the maximum height of the light output means or display means can be mounted in an area closer to the main IC 606a or mirror 647 than the light output means or display means, and the component in question is not limited to a reference terminal.

Figure 42(b) is a side view taken from the direction indicated by line B-B in Figure 41.

A base 643 is provided on the bottom surface 642a of the board housing body 642 of the main board housing case 640 (board case), to which a mirror 647 (mirror member) can be attached. This base 643 has an inclined surface 643a that is inclined at a predetermined angle α (e.g., 60 degrees) relative to the mounting surface 600a of the main control board 600, and the mirror 647 (mirror member) is placed and fixed on the upper surface of this inclined surface 643a.

In other words, the mirror 647 (mirror member) is tilted at a predetermined angle (e.g., 60 degrees) relative to the mounting surface 600a of the main control board 600 (board).

In this example, the back side and terminals of the IC (main IC 606a) are easily visible, making it easier for gaming parlor staff to notice fraud.

Note that while an example has been shown in which the mirror 647 is raised and tilted toward the main IC 606a, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the mirror 647 is raised and tilted toward the main IC 606a (first direction) and further tilted toward the top of the front door 102 (second direction), the back side and terminals of the main IC 606a become more visible when viewing the error 647 from above the front door 102, which may make it easier for amusement parlor staff to notice fraud.

<Main board storage case, mirror/modified example>
Next, a modified example of the main substrate case and mirror will be described with reference to Fig. 43. Fig. 43(a) is a plan view showing a substrate storage case 650 and a mirror 657 according to a modified example, and Fig. 43(b) is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol CC in Fig. 43(a).

The slot machine in this example is equipped with a board storage case 650 that can store a main control board 600 and a peripheral board 652 that is connected to the main control board 600 via a harness (not shown).

The board housing case 650 is composed of a first housing section 650a capable of housing the main control board 600, and a second housing section 650b capable of housing the peripheral board 652. The second housing section 650b has a rectangular opening 650b1 that opens upward.

In this example, a mirror 657 is disposed below the opening 650b1 in the second storage section 650b (on the bottom surface of the second storage section 650b), and arcade staff and others can directly view the mirror 657 through the opening 650b1 (without going through the board storage case 650).

In this example, the mirror surface member (mirror 657) can be viewed directly without any other components in between, which increases the visibility of the mirror surface member (mirror 657). This makes it easier to see the back side and terminals of the IC (main IC 606a), making it easier for gaming parlor staff to notice any fraud.

In addition, the main control board 600 has a connector CN1 arranged in an area vertically below the mirror 657 on the front door, and the peripheral board 652 has a connector CN2 arranged in an area vertically below the mirror 657 on the front door. Connector CN1 on the main control board 600 and connector CN2 on the peripheral board 652 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown).

In this example, neither the main control board 600 nor the peripheral board 652 has a connector for connecting them located in the area vertically above the mirror 657 on the front door. This means that the harness (wiring) connecting the two connectors does not hang down above the mirror member (mirror 657) and impede the visibility of the mirror member (mirror 657). This makes it easier to see the back side and terminals of the IC (main IC 606a), making it easier for arcade staff to notice any fraud.

<Main board storage case, main control board, mirror/setup>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 38 or the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a board (for example, the main control board 600 shown in FIG. 40 or 41) and a board case that houses the board (for example, the main board storage case 640 shown in FIG. 40 or 41), and is characterized in that at least an IC (for example, the main IC 606a shown in FIG. 40 or 41) is mounted on the board, and a mirror member (for example, the mirror 647 shown in FIG. 40 or 41) is provided near one longitudinal end of the IC.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the mirrored member makes it possible to see the backside and terminals of the IC when it is mounted on the board, making it easier to detect fraudulent activity. Furthermore, since the IC can be checked while the board is housed in the board case, it is easier for gaming parlor staff and others to check, increasing convenience. Furthermore, by providing a mirrored member near the IC, it is possible to increase the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity and prevent it from occurring.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 38 or the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a board (for example, the main control board 600 shown in FIG. 40 or 41) and a board case (for example, the main board storage case 640 shown in FIG. 40 or 41) that houses the board, and at least a certain IC (for example, the main IC 606a shown in FIG. 40 or 41) is mounted on the board, and a certain mirror member (for example, the mirror 647 shown in FIG. 40 or 41) is provided near one longitudinal end of the certain IC so that at least a portion of the certain IC is reflected. The gaming machine is characterized in that no other electronic components are mounted in the area of the board between the certain mirrored member and the certain IC, the first electronic component is not mounted in an area on the longitudinal extension of the certain IC, the board case is attached to the rear wall of the housing facing the opening of the housing, the board case is surrounded on all sides by walls and has a recess that opens toward the opening of the housing, and the certain mirrored member is provided in the recess of the board case at a predetermined angle relative to the mounting surface of the board on which the certain IC is mounted.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a certain mirrored member makes it possible to see the backside and terminals of the IC when it is mounted on the board, making it easier to detect fraudulent activity. Furthermore, since the IC can be checked while the board is housed in the board case, it is easier for gaming parlor staff and others to check, increasing convenience. Furthermore, by providing a certain mirrored member near the IC, it is possible to increase the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity and prevent it from occurring.

In addition, because no other electronic components are mounted in the area between a certain mirrored member and a certain IC on the board, other electronic components mounted on the board are less likely to be reflected in the certain mirrored member. Furthermore, because the first light-emitting electronic component is not mounted in an area on the longitudinal extension of a certain IC, the light emitted from the first electronic component is less likely to be reflected in the certain mirrored member. The certain mirrored member makes it easy to see the side of a certain IC, making it easier to confirm cheating and making it easier for gaming parlor staff and others to notice cheating.

The board case is surrounded by walls on all sides and has a recess that opens toward the opening of the housing. A certain mirrored surface is installed in the recess of the board case at a predetermined angle relative to the mounting surface of the board on which a certain IC is mounted. This leaves an unobstructed view of the mirrored surface, improving its visibility. This not only allows for reliable checks for fraudulent activity, but also allows the location of the mirrored surface to be immediately determined using the recess as a clue, improving work efficiency. Even if dust or dirt adheres to the mirrored surface, it is possible to polish or replace it through the recess, maintaining its visibility. Even if the mirrored surface is damaged, fragments of the mirrored surface can be collected through the recess. Furthermore, because the recess is surrounded by walls on all four sides, fragments of the mirrored surface do not affect the electronic components on the board.

The housing may include a front door that can be opened and closed around a rotation axis, and the IC may be mounted at a position closer to the rotation axis than the longitudinal center of the board, and the longitudinal end of the IC on which the mirrored member is provided may be the side closer to the rotation axis. Also, the board may have at least one non-light-emitting electronic component (hereinafter referred to as a "second electronic component") mounted thereon, and the second electronic component may be mounted at a position closer to the mirrored member than the first electronic component, and closer to the first electronic component than the mirrored member, and the height of the second electronic component may be greater than the height of the first electronic component, and the width of the second electronic component may be greater than the width of the first electronic component.

The mirror member may also be provided on the substrate case.

This configuration can prevent the mirror surface member from becoming dirty or damaged, as well as fraudulent acts such as unauthorized removal of the mirror surface member, improving maintainability and crime prevention.

Furthermore, the area between the mirror member and the IC on the substrate (e.g., area BE shown in Figure 41) does not need to have any other electronic components.

With this configuration, other electronic components mounted on the board are less likely to be reflected in the mirrored member, making the backside of the IC and terminals easier to see through the mirrored member, making it easier for gaming parlor staff to notice fraud.

The mirror member may also be provided tilted at a predetermined angle (e.g., 60 degrees) relative to the mounting surface of the substrate on which the IC is mounted (e.g., mounting surface 600a shown in Figure 42(b)).

This configuration makes it easier to see the back of the IC and the terminals, making it easier for gaming parlor staff to notice any fraud.

Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferred actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, or appendix, as explained above, that component may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, or appendix. In other words, as long as there are no factors preventing such application, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, or appendix, it will still constitute a single, cohesive technical idea even if it is applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, or appendix.

<Medalless slot machine>
Next, the basic configuration of the medal-less slot machine 100 and the basic configuration of the lending machine 700 will be described with reference to Figure 44. Figure 44 is an external perspective view of the medal-less slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 as viewed from the front side (player side).

In order to avoid redundant explanation, only the configuration that differs from the slot machine 100 described using Figure 38 will be explained here.

The medal count display device 170 is a five-digit, seven-segment (SEG) display that displays the medal count recorded by the medal count control unit 350 shown in Figure 45. The count button 171 is an operating means for transmitting information about the medal count recorded by the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700.

The lending machine 700 shown in Figure 44 is sometimes referred to as a card unit and corresponds to an example of the gaming media management device of the present invention. This lending machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the medalless slot machine 100.

The lending machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" referred to here. One is a visitor card (also called a general card) with a prepaid function, which is a gaming storage medium issued to general players who are not registered as members. The other is a member card, which is a gaming storage medium issued to member players who have registered as members at the gaming center. An IC card is used as the card.

The card stores a value. The value stored on the card includes the "number of medals held" and the "money balance," which is the remaining balance of prepaid money. The lending machine 700 that accepts the card has the function of converting the "number of medals held" stored on the card into the "number of gaming medals (number of credits)."

The "number of gaming medals (number of credits)" is data that can be used to set the bet amount and can also be converted into the "number of possessed medals." The "number of gaming medals" can be obtained by debiting the card's "money balance" or "number of possessed medals." The "number of gaming medals" also includes the number of medals won by winning. This "number of gaming medals" is managed by the medal count control unit 350 shown in Figure 45, and is the number of electronic medals electromagnetically stored (amount of electronic gaming value). The "number of gaming medals" is decremented by inserting coins using the bet buttons 130, 132.

The "number of medals in possession" is a value obtained by converting the "number of game medals (number of credits)" into a count. This "number of medals in possession" is stored in a manner that allows it to be identified by the player's card. In other words, by operating the count button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of medals in possession" and can be stored on the card. The "number of medals in possession" may also be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals in possession installed in the gaming facility.

The front side of the lending machine 700 is provided with a bill insertion slot 701 at the top for inserting bills and a card insertion slot 702 at the bottom for inserting cards. A membership card or visitor card inserted into this card insertion slot 702 is accepted by a card reader/writer, and the information stored on the card is read. Bills inserted into the bill insertion slot 701 are identified for authenticity and type, and the face value of the bill is stored as the "money balance" on the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702.

An information display 703 is provided below the bill insertion slot 701. This information display 703 is a display that provides operating instructions for the lending machine 700 and the status of the medal-less slot machine 100 using text and images. The surface may be configured as a touch panel, allowing various operations to be input by touching the various displayed items with a finger.

Below the information display 703, a cash balance display 705 and a medal count balance display 706 are arranged in two rows, one above the other. The cash balance display 705 displays the "cash balance" stored on the card inserted into the card slot 702 as a monetary amount. Meanwhile, the medal count balance display 706 displays the "number of medals held" stored on the card inserted into the card slot 702 as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card return button 708 are provided in the vertical center of the lending machine 700. The lending button 707 is an operating means for withdrawing the "money balance" stored on the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 to obtain the "number of game medals." Specifically, if there is a "money balance" on the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702, the LED lamp built into the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the lending button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is increased according to the amount of money withdrawn.

For example, a predetermined amount of 1,000 yen worth of "game medals" is added. Also, if the card's "money balance" is less than the predetermined amount (for example, less than 1,000 yen), only the "game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate are added. Note that even if the card's "money balance" is less than the predetermined amount, medals may be replenished from the "number of medals held" stored on the card, and the predetermined amount of "game medals" may be added.

The card return button 708 is operated when the player ends play, and is an operating means for storing the "number of medals held" determined at the end of play into the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 and ejecting the card. The "number of medals held" determined at the end of play is the number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of medals converted to the "number of game medals" from the "number of medals held" stored on the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702, and then adding the number of game medals counted by the counting operation.

The data for "cash balance," "number of medals held," and "number of game medals" explained above are converted in the following order: "cash balance" and "number of medals held" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals held." In this way, the "number of medals held" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals," and the medal-less slot machine 100 of this example can use this "number of game medals" to set the number of bets. This makes it possible to provide a new medal-less slot machine (controlled game machine) that does not use real medals for gaming, without causing confusion to players accustomed to conventional slot machines where real medals are loaned, credits are secured by inserting those medals, and the number of bets is set using those credits.

Note that while this specification does not refer to the "number of saved medals," this "number of saved medals" is not stored on the card, but rather refers to the number of medals that are deposited at the amusement facility. At the amusement facility, the number of medals that a player has acquired through play may be managed as "points" by the hall management terminal or other management computer for the day, and as "number of saved medals" from the day after the acquisition. If both the "number of saved medals" and the "number of owned medals" are stored, priority is given to deducting from the "number of owned medals." Furthermore, both the "number of owned medals" and the "number of saved medals" may be stored in a host server in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the "number of owned medals" is stored directly on the visitor card, but the "number of owned medals" may also be stored in a host server in association with the card number.

When storing the card number in the host server, data that can identify the time the card was stored in the host server may be written to the card (member card, visitor card) and then discharged. The "money balance" is written directly to the card (member card, visitor card) and then discharged. The "number of medals held" is stored on the card (member card, visitor card) or the host server, for example, when the counting button 171 is operated and the counting process is performed. However, instead of this, the information may be stored all at once when the card is returned. Furthermore, when a player finishes playing and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals held" stored in the lending machine 700 is temporarily stored as saved medals. When the player inserts the card into the hall management terminal or another lending machine 700, only the "number of medals held" for that day that was temporarily stored as saved medals is stored again in that lending machine 700, and the "number of medals played" is added within the range of the "number of medals held" so that the player can continue playing.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the medal-less slot machine 100 according to the modified example will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit of the medal-less slot machine 100 according to the modified example.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, we will explain the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. The main control unit 300 has a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game, and a medal count control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player.

The game control unit 302 is equipped with a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used during the internal lottery for winning combinations, reel stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500 described below.

The CPU 304 of this game control unit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312. The counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits drive pulses in response to this interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data in the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generation circuit 316 (which has two random number generation circuits built in) that derives a number in the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 begins game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers to be used by the game control unit 302. There are two main methods for generating random numbers in this random number generation circuit 316: counter mode and random number mode. In counter mode, a number that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained and this number is derived as a random number. There are two further methods in random number mode. The first method in random number mode uses a random number seed to perform a calculation using a predetermined function (e.g., a modulus function) and derives the result as a random number. The second method reads a number from a random number table in which numbers ranging from 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and then derives the read number as a random number. The random number generation circuit 316 obtains irregular values by utilizing white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320. The random number generation circuit 316 uses the value thus obtained as the initial value for a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the start position for reading from the random number table.

The main control unit 300 also has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted through medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, reel 110 optical sensor, reel 111 optical sensor, reel 112 optical sensor, open/close sensor, setting key SW sensor, reset SW sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects that the start lever sensor is at an H level, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141 and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. Stop button 137 sensors, stop button 138 sensors, and stop button 139 sensors are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are installed on each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The optical sensors for reel 110, reel 111, and reel 112 are installed in predetermined positions on the mounting bases of each reel 110-112, and go low every time a light-shielding piece attached to the reel frame passes by. When CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation and resets the reel rotational position information to zero.

As described above, the open/close sensor is a sensor that can detect the open/close state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is closed, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a low-level signal) indicating a closed detection state to the CPU 304. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is open, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a high-level signal) indicating an open detection state to the CPU 304.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives display devices such as an instruction monitor, and a drive circuit 326 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of reserved coins indicator 125, game information indicator 126, number of paid coins indicator 127, and main board indicator 190).

In addition, an information output circuit 328 (external centralized terminal board) is connected to the game control unit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the slot machine 100 via this information output circuit 328 to an information input circuit 650 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

Like the game control unit 302, the medal count control unit 350 is equipped with a CPU 354, ROM 356, RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 362 for measuring time, number of times, etc.

The basic circuit of the medal count control unit 350 is connected to a game medal count display device 170 consisting of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a count button 171, and a game medal count clear button 172.

The basic circuit of the medal count control unit 350 is also connected to the lending machine 700 via the lending machine connection terminal board 790. The medal count control unit 350 communicates bidirectionally with the lending machine 700.

The medal count control unit 350 sends various commands to the game control unit 302. The game control unit 302 also sends various commands to the medal count control unit 350. In other words, communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 is also two-way communication.

The medal count control unit 350 also stores the "game medal count" in a designated area of RAM 358. Specifically, the "game medal count" is stored in a credit counter. The medal count control unit 350 updates the "game medal count" stored in a designated area of RAM 358 by adding or subtracting. Examples of adding processes include processes based on a payout command sent from the game control unit 302, processes based on a settlement command sent from the game control unit 302, and processes based on a loan notification sent from the loan machine 700. On the other hand, examples of subtracting processes include counting processes based on the operation of the count button 171, and processes based on an input command sent from the game control unit 302.

The medal count clear button 172 is located in a position that cannot be operated by the player (for example, a position that cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened), and is an operating means for clearing the "medal count" stored in a specified area of RAM 358.

For example, if a player leaves with two remaining medals, it becomes difficult to determine whether the player with two medals intends to continue playing, preventing another player from starting play. However, if the medal count can be cleared by a store clerk, another player can be welcomed sooner. Note that the medal count does not necessarily have to be cleared when the medal count clear button 172 is operated. For example, it may be cleared if the medal count is two or less, and if the medal count is three or more, the medals may be counted in the same way as if the count button 171 were operated. If the count button 171 malfunctions or is unable to recognize that it has been operated, the medal count cannot be converted to the medal count, potentially causing a disadvantage to the player. However, if the medal count can be performed by a store clerk, this will prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Furthermore, there is no need to provide a new counting button for store clerks, so there is no increase in costs. Note that instead of distinguishing between clearing and counting by determining the number of game medals played, clearing and counting can also be distinguished by the method of operating the game medal count clear button 172. For example, clearing occurs when the button is pressed briefly, and counting occurs when the button is pressed long. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals played. Furthermore, clearing occurs when only the game medal count clear button 172 is operated, and counting occurs when the game medal count clear button 172 and another button are operated simultaneously. There is little chance of making an incorrect operation, and either clearing or counting can be easily selected.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands sent by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays, etc.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a sound source IC 418, which is connected to speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamps, lower lamps, side lamps 144, title panel 162 lamps, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is connected to the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to commands from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a sensor circuit 426, which is connected to the shutter 163 sensor (shutter sensor) via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the status of the shutter 163 sensor at each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also sends and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the liquid crystal display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 also has a VDP 516 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and other data stored in the ROM 506 based on signals from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

<Main board storage case>
Next, the main board housing case 740 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 46. Figure 46 is a plan view of the main board housing case 740.

The main board storage case 740 is composed of a box-shaped storage body 742 with one open side and a lid 744 arranged to cover the opening of this storage body 742. Furthermore, the storage body 742 is composed of a central storage section 742a arranged in the center when viewed from above, a left storage section 742b formed integrally with the left side of this central storage section 742a when viewed from above, and a right storage section 742c formed integrally with the right side of the central storage section 742a when viewed from above.

The container 742 and lid 744 are each made of transparent resin, making it possible to view the circuit boards, components, etc. stored inside the main circuit board storage case 740 from the outside through the main circuit board storage case 740.

On the upper left and right sides of the storage body 742 and the lid body 744 when viewed from above, there are provided crimping portions 747 for inserting crimping pins 746 to seal (crimp) the two so that they cannot be separated. These crimping portions 747 are configured so that when the storage body 742 and the lid body 744 are combined, one crimping portion 746 is housed within the other crimping portion 746, and the insertion holes into which the crimping pins 746a can be inserted are connected to each other.

The crimping pin 746 inserted into this communicating insertion hole is irremovably engaged with the crimping portions 747 of the housing body 742 and the lid body 744. In other words, by inserting the crimping pin 746 into each crimping portion 746, the housing body 742 and the crimping portions 747 of the lid body 744 are irremovably joined to each other, and the main board storage case 740 is sealed.

When opening the sealed main board storage case 740, the crimping pin 746 is detached from the main board storage case 740, and the storage body 742 and lid body 744 are separated. At this time, the tip of the crimping pin 746 is configured to remain in the storage body 742 even after the storage body 742 and lid body 744 are separated, leaving a trace that the main board storage case 740 has been opened.

<Main board storage case/game control IC and mirror>
Next, the relationship between the game control IC 752 mounted on the main control board 750 and the mirror 755 will be explained.

The central storage section 742a of the storage body 742 is large enough to accommodate the main control board 750 (a board corresponding to the main control unit 300 described using Figure 45), and the main control board 750 is housed in the internal space of the central storage section 742a and secured with screws.

A socket 753 is mounted on the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750, at a position offset to the left when viewed from the front (closer to the short side on the left when viewed from the front), along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 750. A game control IC 752 (an IC equivalent to the game control unit 302 described using Figure 45; a first IC) is attached to this socket 753.

The game control IC 752 is located in area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the medal count control IC 754 (the area sandwiched between two dotted lines in Figure 46). It is sufficient that at least a portion of the game control IC 752 is located in area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the medal count control IC 754, and a portion of the game control IC 752 may be located in an area other than area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the medal count control IC 754. Furthermore, since the game control IC 752 and medal count control IC 754 are mounted on the main control board 750 via sockets 753 and 755, respectively, one of sockets 753 and 755 may be configured to be located in an area on the longitudinal extension of the other of sockets 753 and 755.

A recess 756 (first recess) is formed near the game control IC 752 in the left-side storage section 742b, where a mirror 755 (first mirror member) can be placed. This recess 756 is composed of a rectangular bottom surface 756a and wall portions 756b extending upward from the four sides of this bottom surface 756a, with the side facing the bottom surface 756a (front side) open. The mirror 755 is provided on the bottom surface 756a of this recess 756, inclined at a predetermined angle with respect to the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 (for example, as shown in Figure 42(b)).

That is, a mirror 755 is provided near one longitudinal end of the game control IC 752, in an area including area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the game control IC 752, so that at least a portion of the game control IC 752 is reflected.

As a result, the mirror 755 (first mirror member) makes it possible to see the back side and terminals of the game control IC 752 (first IC) when it is mounted on the main control board 750, making it easier to notice fraudulent activity. Furthermore, since the game control IC 752 can be checked while the main control board 750 is housed in the main board housing case 740 (board case), checking by game parlor staff and the like is simplified, improving convenience. Furthermore, by providing the mirror 755 near the game control IC 752, the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be increased, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activity before it occurs.

The device also includes a recess 756 (first recess), and the mirror 755 (first mirror surface member) is disposed in the recess 756 of the circuit board case at a predetermined angle relative to the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the game control IC 752 (first IC) is mounted. This leaves nothing obstructing the view in front of the mirror 755, improving its visibility. This allows for reliable checking for fraudulent activity and also allows the location of the mirror 755 to be immediately determined using the recess 756 as a clue, improving work efficiency. Even if the mirror 755 becomes dusty or dirty, it can be polished or replaced through the recess 756, maintaining its visibility. Even if the mirror 755 is damaged, fragments of the mirror 755 can be collected through the recess 756. Furthermore, the recess 756 is surrounded on all four sides by walls, preventing fragments of the mirror 755 from affecting the electronic components on the circuit board.

In addition, in this example, a mirror 755 is positioned near the crimped portion 747 in the left storage section 742b. Therefore, by visually inspecting the crimped portion 747 at the same time as inspecting the game control IC 752 using the mirror 755, it is possible to check for any signs that the main board storage case 740 has been opened, making it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, the error reset button 760 is located near the mirror 755 in the central storage section 742a. Therefore, when the error reset button 760 is operated, the game control IC 752 can be inspected by the mirror 755 at the same time, making it easier to detect fraudulent activity. Note that the operating means located near the mirror 755 is not limited to the error reset button, and may be other operating means (e.g., a reset button, setting switch, etc.) that can be operated by gaming facility staff (but not by players). Furthermore, instead of (or in addition to) being located near the mirror 755, the operating means may be located near the mirror 757 or crimping section 747, which will be described later.

In addition, in this example, the area between the mirror 755 and the game control IC 752 on the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 is configured so that no components are mounted, and no silkscreen printing indicating the component name, pin number, mounting location, etc. is applied. This prevents the components mounted on the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 or the printed silkscreen from being reflected in the mirror 755, and the mirror 755 makes it easier to see the back side and terminal parts of the game control IC 752, making it easier for gaming parlor staff to notice fraud. Note that the area between the mirror 755 and the game control IC 752 on the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 may be configured so that no wiring patterns, lands, or through-holes are formed.

<Main board storage case/medal count control IC and mirror>
Next, the relationship between the medal count control IC 754 mounted on the main control board 750 and the mirror 757 will be described.

A socket 755 is mounted on the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750, at a position offset to the right when viewed from the front (closer to the short side on the right side when viewed from the front), along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 750. A medal count control IC 754 (an IC equivalent to the medal count control unit 350 described using Figure 45; a second IC) is mounted in this socket 755.

The medal count control IC 754 is located in area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the game control IC 752 (the area sandwiched between two dotted lines in Figure 46). Note that it is sufficient that at least a portion of the medal count control IC 754 is located in area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the game control IC 752, and a portion of the medal count control IC 754 may be located in an area other than area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the game control IC 752.

A recess 758 (second recess) is formed near the medal count control IC 754 in the right storage section 742c, where a mirror 757 (second mirror member) can be placed. This recess 758 is composed of a rectangular bottom surface 758a and wall portions 758b extending upward from the four sides of this bottom surface 758a, with an open side facing the bottom surface 758a (front side). The mirror 757 is provided on the bottom surface 758a of this recess 758, inclined at a predetermined angle with respect to the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 (for example, as shown in Figure 42(b)).

That is, a mirror 757 is provided near one longitudinal end of the medal count control IC 754, in an area including area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the medal count control IC 754, so that at least a portion of the medal count control IC 754 is reflected.

As a result, the mirror 757 (second mirrored member) makes it possible to see the backside and terminals of the medal count control IC 754 (second IC) when it is mounted on the main control board 750, making it easier to detect fraudulent activity. Furthermore, since the medal count control IC 754 can be checked while the main control board 750 is housed in the main board housing case 740 (board case), checking by game parlor staff and the like is simplified, improving convenience. Furthermore, by providing the mirror 757 near the medal count control IC 754, the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be enhanced, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activity from occurring.

Furthermore, the machine includes a recess 758 (second recess), and the mirror 757 (second mirror surface member) is disposed in the recess 758 of the circuit board case at a predetermined angle relative to the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the medal count control IC 754 (second IC) is mounted. This provides an unobstructed view of the mirror 757, improving its visibility. This allows for reliable checking for fraudulent activity and improves work efficiency by allowing the location of the mirror 757 to be immediately determined using the recess 758 as a clue. Even if the mirror 757 becomes dusty or dirty, it can be polished or replaced through the recess 758, maintaining its visibility. Even if the mirror 757 is damaged, fragments of the mirror 757 can be collected through the recess 758. Furthermore, the recess 758 is surrounded on all four sides by walls, preventing fragments of the mirror 757 from affecting the electronic components on the circuit board.

In addition, in this example, a mirror 757 is placed near the crimped portion 747 in the right-side storage section 742c. Therefore, by visually inspecting the crimped portion 747 at the same time as inspecting the medal count control IC 754 using the mirror 757, it is possible to check for any signs that the main board storage case 740 has been opened, making it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, the area between the mirror 757 and the medal count control IC 754 on the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 is configured so that no components are mounted and no silkscreen printing indicating the component names, pin numbers, mounting locations, etc. is applied. This prevents components mounted on the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 or printed silkscreen printing from being reflected in the mirror 757, and the mirror 757 makes it easier to see the back side and terminal parts of the medal count control IC 754, making it easier for gaming parlor staff to notice fraud. It is also possible to configure the area between the mirror 757 and the medal count control IC 754 on the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 so that no wiring patterns, lands, or through-holes are formed.

The placement locations of the "ICs (first IC, second IC)" according to the present invention are not limited to this example. For example, the placement locations of the game control IC 752 (first IC) and the medal count control IC 754 (second IC) may be interchanged. For example, medal count control IC 754 may be installed in socket 753, and game control IC 752 may be installed in socket 755. Furthermore, while the game control IC 752 and medal count control IC 754 are placed so that their longitudinal directions are aligned with the longitudinal direction of the main control board 750, the game control IC 752 and medal count control IC 754 may also be placed so that their short sides are aligned with the longitudinal direction of the main control board 750.

Furthermore, the structure of the "recess (first recess, second recess)" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be formed, for example, from multiple members (e.g., a first member (first substrate case) and a second member (second substrate case)), or may be formed from a substrate case and another member, or may be formed only from another member separate from the substrate case. Furthermore, while an example has been shown in which walls extend upward from the four sides of the bottom surface, a recess may also have a wall extending upward from at least one of the four sides of the bottom surface. Furthermore, the bottom surface is not limited to a rectangle, and may be a polygon other than a rectangle, or may be circular or elliptical.

<Main board storage case/mirror and other parts>
Next, the relationship between the mirrors 755 and 757 mounted on the main control board 750 and other components will be described.

In addition to the mirror 755, the left-side storage section 742b of the storage body 742 also contains a relay board 780 that connects the main control board 750 to other boards. This relay board 780 is equipped with a connector 780a to which wiring (harness) connected to other boards can be connected, and multiple electronic components 780b (in this example, resistors), but does not contain any light-emitting electronic components (e.g., LEDs or LED segment displays).

Furthermore, the right-side storage section 742c of the storage body 742 contains a mirror 757, but no light-emitting electronic components (e.g., LEDs, LED segment displays) are installed.

Note that light-emitting electronic components (e.g., LEDs, LED segment displays) may be mounted in the left storage section 742b or right storage section 742c of the storage body 742, but even in this case, it is preferable not to mount light-emitting electronic components (e.g., LEDs, LED segment displays) in the area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the game control IC 752 in the left storage section 742b or right storage section 742c.

In this example, mirrors 755, 757, and connector 780a of relay board 780 are arranged in area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of game control IC 752 and medal count control IC 754, but the area is configured so that no light-emitting electronic components (e.g., LEDs, LED segment displays) are installed.

As a result, the light emitted from the light-emitting electronic components is less likely to be reflected by mirrors 755 and 757, the visibility of mirrors 755 and 757 is not impaired, and the back and terminal parts of game control IC 752 and medal count control IC 754 are easier to see, making it easier for game parlor staff to notice any fraud.

Here, "emitting light" in the "light-emitting electronic component" of the present invention refers to the electronic component emitting light as a performance (function). For example, a state in which the electronic component emits light due to ignition caused by a short circuit or the like, or a state in which light emitted from a light-emitting electronic component is reflected and emits light, are excluded from the "emitting light" of the present invention.

In addition, while this example shows an example in which no light-emitting electronic components are provided in the left-side storage section 742b and right-side storage section 742c of the main board storage case 740, it is also possible to configure the device so that no light-emitting electronic components are provided in a location other than the main board storage case 740 (for example, a sub-board storage case (a case that stores the first sub-controller 400 described using Figure 45) that is separate from the main board storage case 740 that is provided on the back panel 242 (see Figure 39) of the main body 101 and is provided on the left side panel 260 of the main body 101).

For example, a sub-board storage case (a case that stores the first sub-control unit 400 described using Figure 45) may be provided on the left side panel 260 of the main body 101, and light-emitting electronic components may be provided on the sub-board storage case (a sub-board corresponding to the first sub-control unit 400 described using Figure 45). However, even in this case, it is preferable not to mount light-emitting electronic components (e.g., LEDs, LED segment displays) in the area LE2 on the longitudinal extension line of the game control IC 752 on the sub-board storage case (sub-board).

With this configuration, when the front door 102 is opened and the worker looks into the mirror inside the main board housing case 740 arranged on the back panel 242 of the main body 101, the light emitted from the light-emitting electronic components is less likely to reach the worker's eyes, improving the visibility of the mirror.

<Main board storage case/IC and connector>
Next, the relationship between the ICs mounted on the main control board 750 and the connectors will be described.

Four connectors 763a to 763d are mounted on the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 at a position offset downward when viewed from the front (closer to the long side on the lower side when viewed from the front), and are aligned horizontally at a predetermined interval when viewed from the front.

In other words, in this example, on the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750, the connectors 763a to 763d are mounted in an eccentric position on the lower side of the main control board 750 in the short direction (vertically below the main body 101 when the main board storage case 740 is fixed to the back panel 242 of the main body 101), while the game control IC 752 and medal count control IC 754 are mounted above the connectors 763a to 763d in the short direction of the main control board 750 (vertically above the main body 101 when the main board storage case 740 is fixed to the back panel 242 of the main body 101).

As a result, the wiring (harness) connected to connectors 763a to 763d hangs down below connectors 763a to 763d, preventing the wiring (harness) connected to connectors 763a to 763d from overlapping the game control IC 752 or medal count control IC 754, which would reduce the visibility of the game control IC 752 or medal count control IC 754 and improve maintainability.

<Main board storage case/IC and other electronic components>
Next, the relationship between the ICs and other electronic components mounted on main control board 750 will be described with reference to Figure 47(a). Figure 47(a) is a side view of main control board 750 shown in Figure 46, viewed from the left side.

As shown in Figure 46, when viewed from the front of the main control board 750, three capacitors 783 are mounted above the game control IC 752, and two capacitors 783, a reference terminal 784, and an LED 786 are mounted below the game control IC 752.

Capacitor 783 is composed of a main body 783a made of a capacitor element and a metal case, and lead wires 783b connected to both ends of this main body 783a. Note that because all five capacitors 783 are identical, the reference numerals for the main body 783a and lead wires 783b have been omitted from Figure 46.

The three capacitors 783 arranged above the game control IC 752 have one lead wire 783b soldered to the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 near the upper long side of the main control board 750, and the other lead wire 783b soldered to the main control board 750 near the game control IC 752, and are all arranged vertically in a plan view along the short side of the main control board 750.

Two capacitors 783 are arranged below the game control IC 752. One lead wire 783b is soldered to the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 near the game control IC 752, and the other lead wire 783b is soldered to the mounting surface 750a of the main control board 750 near the reference terminal 784. Both are arranged vertically in a plan view along the short side of the main control board 750.

If an external force is applied to capacitor 783 (for example, if an operator inspecting main control board 750 accidentally touches capacitor 783), the main body 783a of capacitor 783 will bend left and right in a plan view (the short side direction of capacitor 783) along the long side of main control board 750, with two lead wires 783b as fulcrums.

However, in this example, the silkscreen printing indicating the capacitor part name and number (in this example, the strings "C1", "C2", and "C3") is applied above the lead wire 783b of capacitor 783, i.e., in the longitudinal direction of capacitor 783. Therefore, even if capacitor 783 is bent in the lateral direction, the silkscreen printing will not be hidden by the bent capacitor 783, ensuring the visibility of the silkscreen printing and improving maintainability.

The location of the silkscreen printing corresponding to the capacitor 783 is not limited to above the capacitor 783, but may be anywhere other than where the capacitor 783 may be bent and its visibility may be impaired, for example, it may be below the capacitor 783 in the longitudinal direction. Furthermore, the components to which this technical concept applies are not limited to capacitors, but may also be resistors, coils, etc. Furthermore, the silkscreen printing is not limited to component names and numbers, but may also be shapes indicating the component mounting locations, pin numbers, etc.

In addition, in this example, the game control IC 752 and socket 753 are arranged horizontally in a plan view along the long side of the main control board 750, while the capacitor 783 is arranged vertically in a plan view along the short side of the main control board 750. Therefore, even if the capacitor 783 is bent in the short direction, it is possible to prevent the capacitor 783 from coming into contact with the game control IC 752 or socket 753, preventing malfunctions and other problems and improving the reliability of the board.

In addition, even if the capacitor 783 is bent, it is unlikely to be reflected in the mirrors 755 and 757, so the visibility of the mirrors 755 and 757 is not impaired, making it easier to see the back and terminal parts of the game control IC 752 and medal count control IC 754, making it easier for game parlor staff to notice any fraud.

Verification terminals 784, 785 are terminals to which a test terminal (not shown) can be connected. When a test terminal is connected to either of these verification terminals 784, 785, the test terminal confirms the checksum and determines whether the main control board 750 connected to the test terminal is a genuine main control board. LED 786, located near verification element 784, is composed of multiple light-emitting elements (LED elements) that can output light.

Now, looking at the width of the components mounted around the game control IC 752, as shown in Figure 46, the maximum width of the surface of the verification terminal 784 facing the game control IC 752 is w1, and the maximum width of the surface of the LED 786 facing the game control IC 752 is w2. The maximum widths of the surfaces facing the game control IC 752 increase in order from the maximum width w2 of the LED 786 to the maximum width w1 of the verification terminal 784 (w1 > w2), and the verification terminal 784, whose maximum width w1 is wider than the maximum width w2 of the LED 786, is mounted in an area closer to the game control IC 752 and mirror 755 than the LED 786.

In this example, the relatively wide verification terminal 784 (a non-light-emitting electronic component) can block the light output from the relatively narrow LED 786 (a light-emitting electronic component), making it less likely that the light output from the LED 786 will be reflected by the mirror 755. Furthermore, since the light output from the LED 786 is not reflected by the game control IC 752, the mirror 755 makes it easier to see the back and terminals of the game control IC 752, making it easier for game parlor staff to notice any fraud. Note that the electronic component wider than the LED 786 (a light-emitting electronic component) is not limited to a verification terminal, but may be another component (IC, socket, connector, etc.).

Furthermore, looking at the height of the components mounted around the game control IC 752, as shown in Figure 47 (a), if the maximum height of the capacitor 783 is h5, the maximum height of the comparison terminal 784 is h6, and the maximum height of the LED 786 is h7, the maximum height of the components increases in the following order: maximum height h5 of the capacitor 783, maximum height h7 of the LED 786, and maximum height h6 of the comparison terminal 784 (h5 < h7 < h6), and the comparison terminal 784, whose maximum height h6 is higher than the maximum height h7 of the LED 786, is mounted in an area closer to the game control IC 752 and mirror 755 than the LED 786.

In this example, the relatively tall verification terminal 784 (a non-light-emitting electronic component) can block the light emitted from the relatively short LED 786 (a light-emitting electronic component), making it less likely that the light emitted from LED 786 will be reflected by mirror 755. Furthermore, since the light emitted from LED 786 is not reflected by game control IC 752, mirror 755 makes it easier to see the back and terminals of game control IC 752, making it easier for game parlor staff to notice fraud. Note that the electronic component that is taller than LED 786 (a light-emitting electronic component) is not limited to a verification terminal, but may be another component (IC, socket, connector, etc.).

In addition, in this example, the capacitor 783 is arranged in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the game control IC 752 and socket 753. This makes it less likely for the capacitor 783 to be reflected in the mirror 755, compared to when the capacitor 783 is arranged in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the game control IC 752 and socket 753, thereby improving the visibility of the mirror 755. Furthermore, the restricted area for mounting electronic components can be reduced, allowing for efficient use of the mounting surface of the board.

In this example, the relationship between the game control IC 752 and the peripheral components has been described, but the same configuration may be adopted for the medal count control IC 754 instead of the game control IC 752. <Main board storage case/IC and lid>
Next, the relationship between the IC mounted on the main control board 750 and the lid 744 of the main board housing case 740 will be described.

A board management sticker 782 containing information about the main control board 750 (e.g., name, manufacturer, control number, etc.) is affixed to the lid 744 of the main board storage case 740 in a position (in this example, slightly below the center of the lid 744) that does not overlap the area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the game control IC 752 or medal count control IC 754.

This prevents the board management seal 782 from covering the game control IC 752 or medal count control IC 754, reducing the visibility of the game control IC 752 or medal count control IC 754, thereby improving maintainability.

The position of the board management sticker 782 on the lid 744 is not limited to this example, and may be any position that does not overlap the area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the game control IC 752 or medal count control IC 754. The board management sticker 782 may also be affixed to a position (for example, the side) on the container 742 that does not overlap the area LE2 on the longitudinal extension of the game control IC 752 or medal count control IC 754.

<Modifications of Main Board Storage Case/Recess>
Next, a modified example of the recess 756 will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 47(b) is a partial cross-sectional side view showing the area around the recess 756 in a modified example, and Figure 47(c) is a partial plan view showing the area around the recess 756 as viewed from the direction indicated by the symbol Z in Figure 47(b).

The recess 756 in this example has an uneven portion 788 on the side of the wall portion 756b. This uneven portion 788 is composed of a rectangular base portion 788a and multiple protrusions 788b that protrude integrally from one surface of the base portion 788a as its base end. The protrusions 788b are rectangular in shape when viewed from above, and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the width direction of the base portion 788a (the vertical direction in Figure 47 (c)) on the surface of the base portion 788a facing the game control IC 752 (the surface opposite the surface facing the mirror 755).

The surface of the uneven portion 788 facing the game control IC 752 (the surface opposite the surface facing the mirror 755) has a portion (concave) that does not have a protrusion 788b and is formed by the base portion 788a, and a portion (convex) that is formed by the protrusion 788b, forming an uneven shape overall.

Amusement parlors are often dimly lit, and inspections of the main unit often require the use of a light. However, when shining the light directly onto the mirror during inspection, it can be difficult to see. However, in this example, the uneven portion 788 disperses the light from the light and the light reflected by the mirror 755, reducing glare. The mirror 755 also makes it easier to see the back of the game control IC 752 and the terminals, improving workability.

The form of the uneven shape is not limited to this example. For example, multiple protrusions 788b may be formed lined up at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction of the base portion 788a (vertical direction in Figure 47 (b)), multiple triangular pyramidal or spherical protrusions may be formed on one surface of the base portion 788a, fine unevenness may be formed on one surface of the base portion 788a, or protrusions 788b separate from the base portion 788a may be attached to the base portion 788a.

Also, one surface of the base portion 788a may be roughened without forming the protrusions 788b. The roughening method is not particularly limited, but examples include pressing, thermal transfer of unevenness, embossing, shrinkage, surface treatment, etc. to form an uneven roughened surface on one surface of the base portion 788a; attaching tape or the like to the surface of one surface of the base portion 788a to form a roughened surface on one surface of the base portion 788a; or applying paint or the like to the surface of one surface of the base portion 788a to form a roughened surface on one surface of the base portion 788a.

Note that while a modified example in which the side of the wall portion 756b of the recess 756 is provided with an uneven portion 788 has been described, the side of the wall surface 758b of the recess 758 may also be provided with an uneven portion in a similar manner.

<Main board storage case/summary>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 38, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, and the medal-less slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 44) is a gaming machine including a housing (for example, the main body 101 shown in FIG. 44) having an opening on the front side, a board (for example, the main control board 750 shown in FIG. 46), and a board case (for example, the board case 740 shown in FIG. 46) for accommodating the board, and the board includes at least a first IC (for example, the game board 100 shown in FIG. 46). A first electronic component (hereinafter referred to as a "first electronic component"; for example, an LED 786 shown in FIG. 46) that emits light is mounted on the board, and a first mirror member (for example, a mirror 755 shown in FIG. 46) is provided near one end of the first IC in the longitudinal direction so that at least a part of the first IC is reflected, and a second IC (for example, a medal count control IC 754 shown in FIG. 46) is mounted on the board. a second mirror member (e.g., mirror 757 shown in FIG. 46) is provided so as to reflect at least a portion of the second IC, at least a portion of the second IC is located in an area (e.g., area LE2) on a longitudinal extension of the first IC, the first electronic component is not mounted in an area on a longitudinal extension of the first IC, the board case is attached to a rear wall of the housing facing the opening, the board case is surrounded on all sides by walls and has a first recess (e.g., recess 756 shown in FIG. 46) and a second recess (e.g., recess 758 shown in FIG. 46) that open toward the opening of the housing, the first mirror member is provided in the first recess of the board case at a tilted state at a predetermined angle with respect to the mounting surface of the board on which the first IC is mounted, and the second mirror member is provided in the second recess of the board case at a tilted state at a predetermined angle with respect to the mounting surface of the board on which the second IC is mounted.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first and second mirrored members make it possible to see the backsides and terminals of the first and second ICs mounted on the board, making it easier to detect fraudulent activity. Furthermore, since the first and second ICs can be checked while the board is housed in the board case, checking by gaming parlor staff and the like is simplified, improving convenience. Furthermore, by providing mirrored members near the first and second ICs, the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be increased, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activity before it occurs.

Furthermore, because the light-emitting first electronic component is not mounted in an area on the longitudinal extension of the first IC, the light emitted from the first electronic component is less likely to be reflected by a certain mirrored member, making the side of the first IC easier to see through the first mirrored member, making it easier to check for fraudulent activity and making it easier for gaming parlor staff and others to notice fraud.

The board case is surrounded by walls on all four sides and includes a first recess and a second recess that open toward the opening of the housing. The first mirrored member is provided in the first recess of the board case at a predetermined angle relative to the mounting surface of the board on which the first IC is mounted, and the second mirrored member is provided in the second recess of the board case at a predetermined angle relative to the mounting surface of the board on which the second IC is mounted. This leaves an unobstructed view of the mirrored member, improving its visibility, allowing for reliable checks for fraud and other operations. The recessed portion also allows for the location of the mirrored member to be immediately determined, improving work efficiency. Even if dust or dirt adheres to the mirrored member, it can be polished or replaced through the recessed portion, maintaining the visibility of the mirrored member. Furthermore, even if the mirrored surface is damaged, fragments of the mirrored surface can be collected through the recess, and because the recess is surrounded on all four sides by walls, fragments of the mirrored surface will not affect the electronic components on the board.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 38, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, or the medalless slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 44) is a gaming machine that includes a housing (for example, the main body 101 shown in FIG. 44) with an opening on the front side, a board (for example, the main control board 750 shown in FIG. 46), and a board case (for example, the board case 740 shown in FIG. 46) that houses the board, and at least a certain IC (for example, the game control IC 752 shown in FIG. 46) is mounted on the board, and a certain mirror member (for example, the mirror 755 shown in FIG. 46) is provided near one longitudinal end of the certain IC so that at least a portion of the certain IC is reflected, and the area on the board between the certain mirror member and the certain IC is , no other electronic components are mounted, the board case is attached to the rear wall of the housing facing the opening of the housing, the board case is surrounded by walls on all sides and has a recess that opens toward the opening of the housing (for example, recess 756 shown in Figures 46, 47(b), and 47(c)), the certain mirrored member is provided in the recess of the board case at a predetermined angle with respect to the mounting surface of the board on which the certain IC is mounted, the wall of the recess includes a wall (hereinafter referred to as "certain wall") located between the certain mirrored member and the certain IC, and at least a portion of the certain wall is provided with an uneven portion (for example, uneven portion 788 shown in Figures 47(b) and 47(c)).

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a certain mirrored member makes it possible to see the backside and terminals of the IC when it is mounted on the board, making it easier to detect fraudulent activity. Furthermore, since the IC can be checked while the board is housed in the board case, it is easier for gaming parlor staff and others to check, increasing convenience. Furthermore, by providing a certain mirrored member near the IC, it is possible to increase the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity and prevent it from occurring.

In addition, since no other electronic components are mounted in the area between a certain mirrored surface member and a certain IC on the board, other electronic components mounted on the board are less likely to be reflected in the certain mirrored surface member.

The board case is surrounded by walls on all sides and has a recess that opens toward the opening of the housing. A certain mirrored surface is installed in the recess of the board case at a predetermined angle relative to the mounting surface of the board on which a certain IC is mounted. This leaves an unobstructed view of the mirrored surface, improving its visibility. This not only allows for reliable checks for fraudulent activity, but also allows the location of the mirrored surface to be immediately determined using the recess as a clue, improving work efficiency. Even if dust or dirt adheres to the mirrored surface, it is possible to polish or replace it through the recess, maintaining its visibility. Even if the mirrored surface is damaged, fragments of the mirrored surface can be collected through the recess. Furthermore, because the recess is surrounded by walls on all four sides, fragments of the mirrored surface do not affect the electronic components on the board.

In addition, gaming parlors are often dimly lit, and inspections of the inside of the machine are often performed using a light. However, when shining the light directly onto the mirrored member during inspection, it can be difficult to see. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, the uneven surface disperses the light from the light and the light reflected by the mirrored member, reducing glare, and the mirrored member makes it easier to see the back of the IC and the terminals, improving workability.

<Other Embodiments>
Next, other gaming machines that can be applied to the present invention (for example, pinball gaming machines such as pachinko machines and reel gaming machines such as slot machines) will be described in detail using Figures 48 to 70. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 48 to 70 will, in principle, be used only in the description using Figures 48 to 70, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 48 to 70 will take precedence in the description using Figures 48 to 70.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 48. This figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that allows players to win profits when certain conditions are met, and is equipped with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a launching device 110, and a gaming board 200 on its front (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island equipment, etc.) in an amusement machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as the base shaft of the gaming machine, shaped like a vertical rectangle and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via hinges 112. The main body 104 is also formed in a frame shape, with a space 114 inside. Staff at the store (gaming parlor) where this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and it is equipped with a main body opening sensor 1041 that detects when the main body 104 is open.

The front frame door 106 is a door element with a locking function and is attached to the front of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. It is frame-shaped and has an opening on the inside. Gaming parlor staff can also open and close this front frame door 106, and it is also equipped with a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front of the game board 200 define a space in which the play area 124 is located. The front frame door 106 is an example of a door body. In this embodiment, lamps that use LED light sources are also referred to as lamps.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door element that has a locking function and is attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front of the pachinko machine 100 so that it can be opened and closed freely. The ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pressing the opening lever 1081, which can be operated when the front frame door 106 is open. A ball storage tray door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage tray door 108 is open. The door 108 with ball storage tray is equipped with a ball storage tray 126 that can store multiple game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and has a passageway for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110, a ball removal button 130 that is operated by the player to eject the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 from the ball storage tray 126, a ball launch handle 134 that is operated by the player to launch the game balls that have been guided to the launching device 110 into the game area 124 of the game board, an effect button 136 that is operated by the player to change the effect mode of various effect devices, a button lamp 138 that is built into the effect button 136 and causes the effect button 136 to light up, and a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending command to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade. Also, although not shown in Figure 48, a return operation button is provided to the right of the ball lending operation button 140, which is used to instruct the card unit to return the player's balance. It also has an operation key unit 190 on which a cross key and a decision button are located.

The launching device 110 is attached to the bottom of the main body 104 and comprises a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, this launching device 110 launches a game ball toward the play area 124 of the game board every predetermined launch period (e.g., 0.6 seconds), and is an example of a launching means.

Figure 49 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 in Figure 48.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 with an opening that opens upwards for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154 located below the ball tank 150 for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball tank 150 to a payout device 152 located on the right side of the back.

The dispensing device 152 consists of a cylindrical member, and inside it is equipped with a dispensing motor, sprocket, and dispensing sensor (not shown). This dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached to a predetermined position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains gaming balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152. By driving the payout motor and rotating it a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained gaming balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies driving force to gaming balls to transport them.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of gaming balls sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 52) when a gaming ball is passing, and the other signal, either a high or low, when a gaming ball is not passing. Gaming balls that pass this payout sensor are configured to travel through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the ball storage tray 126 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and when a predetermined award condition is met, the pachinko machine 100 uses this configuration to award (pay out) to the player an amount of gaming value (gaming balls) according to that award condition.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152 are a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see Figure 52) that performs overall control processing for the game, a first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see Figure 52) that performs control processing related to presentation based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300, a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see Figure 52) that performs control processing related to presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, and an error release switch that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 52) that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls and releases errors when operated by a gaming store employee. The system is equipped with a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 equipped with a switch 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 52) that performs control processing related to the launch of gaming balls, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 52) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines and is equipped with a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off when operated by an amusement facility employee and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on, and a CR interface unit 186 that sends and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and a bonus ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated provided that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the machine can transition to a setting change mode in which the machine can be set to one of several settings with at least different jackpot probabilities. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the machine may also be configured so that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed.

The reel ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and located inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to store staff. The reel ratio/setting display 196 consists of two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, with a single-digit 7-segment LED modularized on the right side. The reel ratio monitor is an indicator that reports the reel ratio (YH) and consecutive reel ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current setting. The reel ratio/setting display 196 is composed of single-color LEDs, such as red, green, blue, and white, but may also be capable of emitting light in three colors: red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a portion of the reel ratio/setting display 196 may be mounted on the game board 200, for example, to be visible to players.

In addition, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

Figure 50 is a simplified front view of the gaming board 200. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed in place. Arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand as the right. Arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side may be referred to as the top and the lower side as the bottom. Although not shown in Figure 50, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-to-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the near side may be referred to as the front side or front side, and the far side may be referred to as the rear side or back side.

The game board 200 has a play area 124 on the front and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the play area 124 can be observed through the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

A variety of structures can be used to attach the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, one possible structure is to insert the left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the game board 200 as seen from the front into the left side of the main body 104 as seen from the front, and then rotate the game board 200 around this position while pressing the right side (right side) 200b of the game board 200 against the main body 104 to set it in place. This structure may improve workability.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to the game board 201, which is a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is formed, for example, from resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters from the pachinko machine 100, etc. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters from the pachinko machine 100, etc. are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is disposed on the lower right of the game board 201. If a vibration is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, an alert using an image or sound, or stopping the game to prevent further play) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may also be a magnetic sensor or other fraud detection sensor.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, defining a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached and detached to the main body 104. Within the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the launched game ball.

Areas on the game board 200 other than the play area 124 may be referred to as non-play areas. The play area 124 and non-play areas can be distinguished by the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Furthermore, the area inside the area through which game balls pass when the game ball's launch strength is at its maximum may be referred to as the play area 124. The play area 124 may include areas through which game balls do not pass due to the presence of a performance device or the like within the play area 124. The play area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area because game balls flow down during play, and the non-play area may be referred to as a non-flow-down area because game balls do not flow down during play except during maintenance or accidents. The entire play area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but areas through which game balls do not flow down due to the presence of a performance device or the like may also be referred to as non-flow-down areas.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is located approximately in the center of the play area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the play area 124, and on the main control lamp board 254 are arranged a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220. In addition, the main control lamp board 254 is further provided with a high probability lamp HL, an electric support lamp TL, and a right hit lamp RL. Note that, below, normal symbols may be referred to as "normal symbols" and special symbols as "special symbols."

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various decorative patterns and effects, and in this embodiment is configured as a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c each display a different decorative pattern, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used in the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used as long as they are capable of displaying various effects and various game information, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The regular map display device 210 is a display device for displaying regular maps, and in this embodiment is configured with a 7-segment LED. The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps, and in this embodiment are each configured with a 7-segment LED.

The regular symbol reserve lamp 216 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved regular symbol variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of regular symbol variable games. The second special symbol reserve lamp 220 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games. Note that in this embodiment, the first special symbol reserve lamp is not provided, but it may be provided.

The high probability lamp HL is a lamp that indicates that the game state is in a high probability state where a jackpot is likely to occur, or that it will enter a high probability state. The electric support lamp TL is a lamp that indicates that the normal symbol variable display time is shortened and that the electric support state, in which the blade members 2311 (see Figure 51) of the electric tulip (electric chute) described below, are likely to open for a long period of time. The right hit indicator lamp RL is a lamp that indicates that the game is in a jackpot game state, a probability variable state, or an electric support state, and that the player can benefit from these states by hitting right. In the event of a jackpot, a round indicator lamp may be provided to show the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to that jackpot.

The game board 200 shown in Figure 50 has a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in an area where game balls can roll. The warp device 242 ejects game balls that enter a warp entrance 242a located on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 from a warp exit 242b onto the stage 244. The stage 244 is located below and forward of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is the stage where game balls that pass through the warp device 242 exhibit movements such as reciprocating and rotational motion. The reciprocating and rotational motion of the game balls increases the time they remain on the stage 244. A stage cover 245 is provided on the stage 244.

In addition, a first movable effect unit 7 is positioned above the play area 124 and supported by the main body 104. Furthermore, a second movable effect unit 8 is positioned below and behind the stage 244 and supported by the main body 104, but the second movable effect unit 8 is not visible in Figure 50.

As shown in FIG. 50, a portion of the top of the play area 124 is covered with a decorative upper cover 203. In addition, the upper right portion of the play area 124 is covered with a decorative upper right cover 205.

In addition, in this embodiment, a normal map start opening 228 is located in the lower center of the gaming board 200. In this embodiment, one normal map start opening 228 is located in the lower center of the gaming board 200. When a ball enters the normal map start opening 228, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 49 is driven to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, four balls), and the entering game ball is guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged toward the game island. Note that the game ball that enters the normal map start opening 228 may be returned to the board surface, and no prize balls may be paid out. The normal map start opening 228 may also be located in the left side area. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the normal map start opening 228, the pachinko machine 100 begins normal map variable play using the normal map display device 210.

In addition, a general prize opening is also located in the lamp unit 9 extending to the left. Although not shown, general prize openings are provided in several other locations in the game area. When a ball enters a general prize opening, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, determining that the general prize opening has been won, and driving the payout device 152, which discharges a predetermined number of balls (for example, four) as prize balls into the ball storage tray 126. The balls discharged into the ball storage tray 126 can be freely removed by the player, and this configuration allows prize balls to be paid out to the player based on the win. Balls that enter a general prize opening are guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 before being discharged towards the game island.

As shown in Figure 51(a), the attacker unit 23 is provided with a first special starting hole (variable) 231, a second special starting hole 232, multiple variable winning holes (attackers) 234, 235, and a normal electric gate 228g. As shown in Figure 50, the normal starting hole 228 located at the bottom center is configured such that it is difficult for a game ball to enter it when hit from the right. Meanwhile, a special route 244a is provided in the center of the above-mentioned stage 244, making it easier for a ball that reaches the stage 244 to enter the normal starting hole 228 located at the bottom center of the game board 200. It is also possible to aim for the normal starting hole 228 from the left side without passing through the stage 244. Therefore, the normal starting hole 228 located at the bottom center of the game board 200 is a starting hole where a ball can be expected to enter when hit from the left. Thus, in this embodiment, in normal game mode, where left-handed hitting is recommended, the game is played primarily by having the game ball enter the normal map start hole 228 and displaying the normal map fluctuations on the normal map display device 210.

Furthermore, the play area 124 is equipped with a disk-shaped ball direction changer 236 called a windmill and multiple play nails, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204 is an outlet 240 that guides balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharges them to the play island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies a ball stored in the ball storage tray 126 to the launch position on the launch rail, which drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, causing the ball to pass through the outer rail 202 and inner rail 204 using the launch rod and launch hammer and launch into the play area 124. The ball then flows downward, changing direction using the ball direction changing member 236 and play pins, and either enters one of the various winning slots or starting slots, or reaches the outlet 240 without entering any winning slots or starting slots, or simply passing through the normal starting slot 228. In this embodiment, a discharged ball receiving port (not shown) that receives all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower edge of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward, and an out ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of game balls received in the discharged ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may also be provided on the game board 200 side. In this embodiment, all game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the outlet 240 and game balls that have entered various winning ports) are received by this discharged ball receiving port and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage; however, it is also possible for only game balls discharged from the outlet 240 to pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, we will explain the attacker unit 23 located in the lower right corner of the play area 124.

The attacca unit 23 shown in Figures 51(a) and 51(b) is arranged on the back side of the attacca front plate 2301 (Figure 50). An attacca seal 2302 is affixed to the front of the attacca front plate 2301 (see Figure 50). Note that the decorative pattern of the attacca seal 2302 is omitted in Figure 50.

As shown in Figures 51(a) and 51(b), the attacca unit 23 is composed of a unit main body 32a placed on the gaming board 200 side and a unit cover body 23b that covers the front side of the unit main body 32a.

The unit main body 32a has an electric chute-type special symbol 1 starting opening (variable) 231, a first variable winning opening 234 which serves as the first attacker, a second variable winning opening 235 which serves as the second attacker, and a second special symbol starting opening 232. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the special symbol 1 starting opening (variable) 231, the ball detection sensor 2312 detects it and, assuming that the special symbol 1 starting opening (variable) 231 has been won, activates the payout device 152 and discharges a predetermined number of balls (e.g., one ball) into the ball storage tray 126 as prize balls. Furthermore, the game ball that has entered the special symbol 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is discharged from the discharge opening 231a to the back side of the game board 200. Furthermore, when a ball enters the first variable winning opening 234, a ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a prize in the first variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is activated, and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 15 balls) are discharged as prize balls into the ball storage tray 126. Furthermore, a specific area 234v is provided inside the first variable winning opening 234 through which a gaming ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 can pass, and in this embodiment, when a gaming ball passes through the specific area 234v during a small jackpot game, the game transitions to a big jackpot game. Note that a specific area may be provided inside the second variable winning opening 235 without providing the first variable winning opening 234. When a ball enters second variable winning opening 235, ball detection sensor 2352 detects it, and as a winning ball, second variable winning opening 235 is activated, and payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 15 balls) into ball storage tray 126 as prize balls. Also, when a ball enters special chart 2 starting opening 232, a ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning ball, special chart 2 starting opening 232 is activated, and payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 1 ball) into ball storage tray 126 as prize balls.

The size of the special chart 1 starting opening (variable) 231 can be changed by the shutter member 2311, and the shutter member 2311 shown in Figure 51(a) is movable forward and backward. When the shutter member 2311 is advanced forward, the game ball passes over the advanced shutter member 2311. That is, in Figure 51(a), the game ball passes from the right side to the left side of the figure. The ball detection sensor 2312 of the special chart 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is located below the shutter member 2311, downstream, facing upstream. Therefore, when the shutter member 2311 is advanced forward, the game ball can easily pass through the ball detection sensor 2312, and the special chart 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. A gaming ball that passes through ball detection sensor 2312 passes through ball passage 2313 and is guided to the back of the gaming board 200 through outlet 231a. On the other hand, when shutter member 2311 is retracted to the rear, it is difficult for the gaming ball to pass through ball detection sensor 2312, and special chart 1 starting port (variable) 231 becomes a state in which it is difficult to win. In addition, in this embodiment, a normal power activation gate 228g is located near the upstream side of special chart 2 starting port 232, and when a gaming ball passes through normal power activation gate 228g, the shutter member 2311, described below, is activated regardless of the status of the normal chart variable display. In other words, in this embodiment, a gaming ball that passes through normal power activation gate 228g enters special chart 2 starting port 232 directly.

The second variable winning opening 235, which serves as the second attacker, is located downstream in the direction of ball rolling (flow) from the first variable winning opening 234, which serves as the first attacker. The size of this second variable winning opening 235 is variable using a shutter member 2351, and the shutter member 2351 shown in Figure 51(a) is movable forward and backward. When the shutter member 2351 is advanced forward, the game ball passes over the advanced shutter member 2351. In other words, in Figure 51(a), the game ball passes from right to left in the figure. The ball detection sensor 2352 for the second variable winning opening is located below the shutter member 2351 and faces upward. Therefore, when the shutter member 2351 is advanced forward, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the ball detection sensor 2352, and the second variable winning opening 235 is in a state where it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize. On the other hand, when the shutter member 2351 is retracted to the rear, game balls can easily pass through the ball detection sensor 2352, and the second variable winning opening 235 is in a state where winning is easy.

The first variable winning opening 234 can be switched between an open and closed state by the door element 2341. When the door element 2341 is in the open state, game balls can be received into the first variable winning opening 234, but when it is in the closed state, game balls cannot be received (or are difficult to receive) into the first variable winning opening 234.

The second special symbol start opening 232 is located where the gaming ball falls. This second special symbol start opening 232 has a fixed size winning opening, and gaming balls that enter the second special symbol start opening 232 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then ejected onto the gaming island side.

As shown in Figure 51 (b), the unit cover body 23b is provided with a ball passage forming wall 230r that protrudes toward the unit main body 23a. The ball passage forming wall 230r forms a ball passage 239 that is inclined toward the downstream side, along which a gaming ball that enters the attacker unit 23 rolls. Furthermore, the ball passage forming wall 230r is not provided at the position where the shutter member 2311 advances or the position where the shutter member 2351 advances, and the advanced shutter member 2311 or shutter member 2351 becomes the ball passage forming wall. In other words, when the shutter member 2311 or shutter member 2351 advances forward, it is inclined downward toward the downstream side, and this inclination is used to roll the gaming ball downstream.

The solid arrows in Figure 51(a) indicate the path of the game ball that rolls over the ball passage forming wall 230r and the advanced shutter member 2311 (the same applies to the arrows in the following figures). In other words, the game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 shows the route on the special chart 1 starting port (variable) 231 side indicated by the solid arrow. Also, the dashed arrows in Figure 51(a) indicate the path of the game ball that rolls over the ball passage forming wall 230r and the advanced shutter member 2351 when the shutter member 2311 retracts and the shutter member 2351 advances. In other words, the game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 shows the route on the special chart 2 starting port 232 side indicated by the dashed arrow. Here, when the shutter member 2351 is retracted, as shown by the solid arrows at the bottom of Figure 51 (a), the game ball falls from the shutter member 2311 and the shutter member 2351 and enters the second variable winning opening 235, and after being detected as a winning ball by the ball detection sensor 2352, it passes through the ball passage 2343 and is guided to the back of the game board through the discharge opening 235a.

A game ball that falls to just before the second special symbol start port 232 passes through the normal power operation gate 228g and enters the second special symbol start port 232, causing the shutter member 2311 to advance forward and starting the special symbol 2 variable game. In this embodiment, ribs 23r5 are protruding from the left and right sides of the upstream side of the normal power operation gate 228g so that most game balls flowing down toward the second special symbol start port 232 are guided by the normal power operation gate 228g. However, some game balls flowing down toward the second special symbol start port 232 may pass through the normal power operation gate 228g, while others may not. Alternatively, the game balls may be guided by the normal power operation gate 228g so that all game balls pass through the normal power operation gate 228g. Furthermore, because this embodiment is configured in this manner, for example, when the second special symbol display device 214 is prevented from displaying a pattern change of special symbol 2 while the first special symbol display device 212 is allowed to display a pattern change of special symbol 1, it may be possible to prevent the occurrence of irregular gameplay, such as activating the shutter member 2311 by targeting only the normal power operating gate 228g and displaying a pattern change of special symbol 1.

As shown in Figure 51(a), multiple ribs are provided on the unit main body 23a. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 51(b), multiple ribs are also provided on the unit cover body 23b. Looking upstream along the flow of the game balls, multiple ribs are spaced apart and protrude from the downstream side of the first variable winning opening 234 to just before the shutter member 2311 of the special game ball starting opening 231. That is, in the passage that passes through the first variable winning opening 234 and turns back in an S shape, four ribs 23r1 protrude from the unit main body 23a side and five ribs 23f1 protrude from the unit cover body 23b side. These ribs 23r1, 23f1 are alternately arranged in a plan view to prevent balls from clogging the passage. The passage in which ribs 23r1 and 23f1 are arranged faces downward, and three ribs 23r2 protrude from the downward-facing passage on the unit main body 23a side and two ribs 23f2 protrude from the unit cover body 23b side. These ribs 23r2 and 23f2 are similarly arranged alternately in a side view. In this embodiment, because of this configuration, a game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 flows down while colliding with the ribs before reaching the shutter member 2311 of the special drawing 1 starting port 231, which may reduce the flow speed of the game ball.

In addition, a rib 2314 protrudes above the shutter member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting hole 231 in the unit main body 23a, and a rib 2315 protrudes above the shutter member 2311 in the unit cover body 23b. As a result, for example, if the shutter member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting hole 231 is operated for a short period of time to make it difficult for a ball to enter the special figure 1 starting hole 231, the game ball rolling on the shutter member 2311 can be caused to collide with the ribs 2314 and 2315, slowing the ball's downward flow speed and making it even more difficult for the ball to enter the special figure 1 starting hole 231.

Furthermore, four ribs 23r3 are protruding along the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 above the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 in the unit main body 23a, and four ribs 23f3 are protruding along the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 above the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 in the unit cover body 23b. These ribs 23r3, 23f3 are arranged alternately in a plan view to prevent ball clogging in the flow path. Furthermore, in this embodiment, due to this configuration, multiple game balls may be more likely to become trapped on the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235. Furthermore, two ribs 23f3 are also arranged downstream of the second variable winning opening 235 in the unit cover body 23b. The width of the ball passage 239 is specified on the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 to prevent multiple game balls from flowing down in parallel. In this embodiment, because of this configuration, game balls rolling on the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 collide with the ribs as they flow down, which may reduce the speed at which the game balls flow down.

The ball passage 239 downstream of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 has a downwardly S-shaped passageway, which then bends downward and is guided to the normal-operated gate 228g. Here, at the bend in the S-shaped portion of the ball passage 239, two ribs 23f4 protrude from the corners of the ball passage-forming wall 230r to guide the flow path of the game balls flowing down there. This may prevent ball jams from occurring. It may also reduce the flow speed of game balls flowing down the ball passage 239. In this embodiment, the time it takes for a game ball flowing down the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 to enter the special game starting opening 232 is configured to be the time required to fire two or more game balls (e.g., 1.2 seconds). This may prevent deviations from the designed ball payout rate, for example, when the game state changes. Note that as long as two or more shots can be fired, the time is not limited to 1.2 seconds, but can be any time longer than 1.2 seconds.

In addition, in the ball passage 239 downstream of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235, the only winning opening (winning opening) through which a game ball is paid out when a ball enters is the special chart 2 starting opening 232. Note that if a ball does not enter the special chart 2 starting opening 232, it may enter the outlet 240, but no prize balls will be paid out even if the ball enters the outlet 240. This may make it possible to prevent deviation from the designed ball payout rate, for example, when the game state changes.

Specifically, during a jackpot game, most game balls will generally enter the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235, and therefore, in the a2 time-saving game state that transitions to the jackpot game described below, there are (in most cases) no game balls remaining downstream of the second variable winning opening 235. Therefore, by configuring the time it takes for a game ball flowing down the top surface of the shutter member 2351 to enter the special chart 2 starting opening 232 to be a time that allows two or more game balls to be fired (e.g., 1.2 seconds), it is possible to prevent a situation in which the number of winning game balls exceeds the number of game balls fired in the a2 time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the incitement of gambling desires. If the time it takes for the ball to enter another winning slot (special chart 2 starting slot 232) from the top of the shutter member 2351 is short, it may enter the winning slot (special chart 2 starting slot 232) before the game ball is released in the A2 time-saving game state, resulting in a situation where a prize ball is paid out even though the game ball has not been released, which can encourage gambling.

In the above example, the ribs are provided on both the unit main body 23a and the unit cover body 23b, but some may be provided only on the unit main body 23a side, or some may be provided only on the unit cover body 23b side. Furthermore, the configuration may also include ribs provided only on the unit main body 23a side, or ribs provided only on the unit cover body 23b side.

As described above, in the attacker unit 23 according to this embodiment, the attacker for the first variable winning slot 234 is an attacker that opens and closes during small win play, and the attacker for the second variable winning slot 235 is an attacker that opens and closes during big win play. In the special symbol low probability time-saving play state, as described below, a right hit is made, and the A2 time-saving play state, in which the ball is more likely to land in the special symbol 1 starting slot 231, or the A1 time-saving play state, in which the ball is more likely to land in the special symbol 2 starting slot 232, is entered, and the pattern change display is centered on special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. Furthermore, in this embodiment, for special symbol 1, if a big win does not result, a small win is always obtained. If a small win occurs, the first variable winning slot 234 opens (e.g., 5,800 ms x 1 time), and if special symbol 2 is currently being displayed, the pattern change display for that special symbol 2 is discarded, resulting in a miss. For this reason, in the event of a small win, the game ball is more likely to enter the first variable winning opening 234 and pass through the specific area 234v. This makes it more likely that a jackpot game will be initiated based on the ball passing through the specific area 234v. In this case, the opening operation of the first variable winning opening 234 is treated as the opening operation of the first round, and therefore the round in which the second variable winning opening 235 opens first after the transition to the jackpot game is treated as the second round. Control by game state will be described later. In this embodiment, two variable winning openings, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, are provided, but only one variable winning opening may be provided. In this case, only the second variable winning opening 235 may be provided.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be explained in detail using Figure 52. Note that this figure is a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls in response to commands sent by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100.

First, we will explain the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring program processing anomalies, and a random number generator (counter circuit) 318 (which is assumed to have two built-in counters). Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308; the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, described below. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 316b as the system clock. Additionally, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a. Note that although the random number generation circuit 318 is assumed to be built into the basic circuit 302, it may also be connected to the basic circuit 302.

The basic circuit 302 also includes a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320, including predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors that detect game balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a lower tray full sensor, and outputting the amplification results and comparison results with a reference voltage to the CPU 304 and random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302; a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of predetermined pattern display devices, such as the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214; and a drive circuit 325 for controlling the display of predetermined pattern display devices, such as the regular pattern display device 210. Drive circuit 326 is connected to drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of various status indicators 328 (e.g., normal symbol hold lamp 216, special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, high probability lamp, etc.), and drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including predetermined movable parts such as drive means for driving shutter member 2311 of first special symbol start slot 231 as a normal electric device, and drive means for driving door member 2341 of first variable winning slot 234 as a special electric device, and shutter member 2351 of second variable winning slot 235. In this example, crystal oscillator 316a and random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but crystal oscillator 316a may also be included in random number generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 2312 detects that a ball has entered the first special symbol start hole 231, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special symbol start hole 231 at that timing and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the first special symbol start hole 231. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has entered the second special symbol start hole 232, it latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special symbol start hole 232 at that timing and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special symbol start hole 232.

Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the pachinko machine 100 via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 also has a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. If the power supply voltage value is below a predetermined value (9 V in this example), this voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 also has a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal from this start-up signal output circuit 340, it starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing, which will be described later).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for sending commands to the dispensing control unit 600, and this configuration enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, while information communication between the main control unit 300 and the dispensing control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured not to allow the first sub-control unit 400 to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be two-way communication. Also, the dispensing control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but may be configured not to allow the dispensing control unit 600 to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

Next, we will explain the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I/O 410 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the control program and various effect data may be stored in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440, which controls the game board lamp 442, and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450, which controls the game frame lamp 452, and controls lighting via serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450.

The basic circuit 402 is also connected to a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the performance devices 2-5, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 outputs to the basic circuit 402 detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the performance devices 2-5, and a button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the performance button 136 and various buttons that make up the operation key unit 190.

Next, we will explain the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. The basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads image data stored in ROM 506 based on signals from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, ROM 506 is connected to basic circuit 502, which stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, as well as data for image display. In this embodiment, memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and is composed of a recording medium (e.g., EEPROM or flash memory) that can retain its stored state even when power is cut off. This allows, for example, information for displaying the jackpot history to be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or settings are changed. It is also possible to use RAM, which volatilizes stored information when power is cut off.

Next, we will explain the payout control unit 600, launch control unit 630, and power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300, and detects whether the payout of prize balls or loan balls has been completed based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608, which is provided separately from the pachinko machine 100, via an interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also outputs prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been paid out, loan ball information indicating that a predetermined number of loan balls (e.g., 25 balls) have been paid out, and other information to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is also connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects when the main body 104 is open, and a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects when the front frame door 106 is open. These sensors detect when the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is open and output an open signal. When the frame sensor 605 outputs an open signal, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and launch hammer 148, and the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper tray 126 to the launch device 110, based on a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs whether to allow or stop launching, and a control signal output by the launch intensity output circuit located within the ball launch handle 134 that instructs the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied externally to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit, such as the main control unit 300 and first sub-control unit 400, and each device, such as the payout device 152. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) to supply power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. Note that in this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. However, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and device via another power supply path.

Next, using Figures 53 (a) to (d), we will explain the types of special and regular symbols that are displayed when stopped by the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and regular symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100.

Special chart 1 variable play begins when the ball detection sensor 2312 of the first starting port detects that a ball has entered the special chart 1 starting port 231, and special chart 2 variable play begins when the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 2 starting port 232. When special chart 1 variable play begins, the first special chart display device 212 performs a "special chart 1 variable display" (special chart variable play), for example, by repeatedly turning on and off all seven segments. Furthermore, when special chart 2 variable play begins, the second special chart display device 214 performs a "special chart 2 variable display" (special chart variable play), by repeatedly turning on and off all seven segments. Then, when the change time determined before the start of special chart 1 change has elapsed, the first special chart display device 212 will display a stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1, and when the change time determined before the start of special chart 2 change has elapsed, the second special chart display device 214 will display a stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 2. Hereinafter, the change display from the start of this "change display of special chart 1 or 2" to the stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 or 2 may be referred to as the special chart change display. This special chart change display may be performed multiple times in succession.

Figure 53(a) shows an example of the stopping pattern pattern for Special Chart 1. Six types of special charts are shown in Figure 53(a): Special Chart A, Special Chart a, Special Chart b, Special Chart c, Special Chart d, and Special Chart h. In Figure 53(a), the white areas indicate the locations of segments that will be unlit, and the black areas indicate the locations of segments that will be lit.

In this embodiment, one type of jackpot symbol ("Special Symbol A") is provided as the special symbol's stopping pattern. "Special Symbol A" is a 10-round (R) jackpot symbol, a 10R jackpot symbol that can be expected to result in winning balls in all 10 rounds. "Special Symbol A," "Special Symbol B," "Special Symbol C," and "Special Symbol D" are 10R small jackpot symbols. When "Special Symbol A" stops, a small jackpot game is initiated in which the first variable winning slot 234 is opened and closed. When the game ball passes through specific area 234v during this small jackpot game, a 10R jackpot game is initiated, which is a 10R small jackpot symbol. Note that, while this embodiment provides one type of jackpot symbol and four types of small jackpot symbols, the types of jackpot symbols and small jackpot symbols are not limited to these. It is also possible to provide jackpots that are virtually difficult to win in some rounds.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has occurred during special symbol variable play is made by a hardware random number lottery, and the jackpot symbol that will stop is determined by a software random number lottery. Furthermore, in this embodiment, after a jackpot play ends, the machine may transition to a time-saving state a. Here, the time-saving state refers to a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than in a non-time-saving state, such as by shortening the time until the next jackpot begins. More specifically, when the time-saving state a is entered, if the operating conditions for the normal electric device are met, the normal electric device enters an advantageous state (electric support state), making it easier to win the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, and the variable time of special symbol 1 is shortened. A time-saving flag is provided in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, the machine is in an electric support state. That is, in the electric support state, the shutter member 2311 of the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 tends to open for a longer time per opening (extended electric chute opening period) compared to the non-electric support state. For example, the 40 ms electric chute opening period in the non-electric support state is extended to 5,800 ms in the electric support state. Furthermore, the shutter member 2311 may be configured to open more frequently in the electric support state compared to the non-electric support state (increased electric chute opening frequency). For example, when a normal electric device is activated, the shutter member 2311, which opens only once in the non-electric support state, may open twice in the electric support state (open for 2.5 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, and open again for 2.5 seconds). The extended electric chute opening period and increased electric chute opening frequency increase the probability of the ball landing in the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. The time-saving flag is set to off during jackpot play. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during jackpot play. This is because, particularly during jackpot games, if game balls are picked up by electric chutes with a small number of winning balls, the player may be disadvantaged if the number of game balls entering the variable winning slots (attackers) 234, 235 decreases. In this embodiment, in the time-saving mode (electric support mode), only the opening period of the shutter member 2311 is extended. However, one or more of the following may be performed: normal probability change, normal variable change, extension of the electric chutes' opening period, and an increase in the number of electric chutes opened. In the non-electric support mode, it is more difficult for game balls to enter the special game slot 1 starting slot 231 than in the electric support mode. As described above, the special game slot 1 starting slot 231 changes between a difficult-to-enter state where game balls have difficulty entering and an easy-to-enter state where game balls can easily enter. In the electric support mode, the entrance of this special game slot 1 starting slot 231 remains in an easy-to-enter state for a longer period of time than in the non-electric support mode. In this embodiment, when "Special Chart A", "Special Chart a", "Special Chart b", and "Special Chart c" are displayed in a non-time-saving state, after the end of the subsequent jackpot game, the electric support state is maintained until the fifth pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins, or until the second pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins. When the fifth pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins, or the second pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins, the state transitions to a non-electric support state. On the other hand, when "Special Chart d" is displayed in a stopped state and the subsequent jackpot game ends, the state transitions to a non-electric support state without transitioning to an electric support state. Also, in the a time-saving state and the c time-saving state, if "Special Chart A" is displayed in a stopped state and a jackpot occurs, the state transitions to an electric support state after the end of the jackpot game until the fifth pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins, or the second pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins. Furthermore, "Special symbols a" to "Special symbols d" result in a small win, and the system transitions to the electric support state after the end of the jackpot game associated with that small win. In this case, after the end of the jackpot game, the system remains in the electric support state until the first symbol change display by Special symbol 1 or Special symbol 2 begins. However, since the electric support state ends when the first special symbol change display begins, it can be said that the system transitions to a non-electric support state. Note that all jackpot symbols or small jackpot symbols for Special symbol 1 may transition to the electric support state after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, while this embodiment does not involve probability changes (probability change), a probability change symbol may be provided, and when the probability change symbol is displayed and a jackpot game is played, the system may transition to a probability change state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes high (special symbol high probability state) after the end of the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when "Special Symbol A" is displayed in a stopped state during non-electric support mode, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to electric support mode. Furthermore, when "Special Symbol A," "Special Symbol B," and "Special Symbol C" are displayed in a stopped state, a small jackpot occurs, and when the gaming ball passes through specific area 234v during the small jackpot game, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to electric support mode. Furthermore, when "Special Symbol D" is displayed in a stopped state, a small jackpot occurs, and when the gaming ball passes through specific area 234v during the small jackpot game, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to non-electric support mode. Furthermore, when "Special Symbol A" is displayed in a stopped state during electric support mode, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to electric support mode. Additionally, when "Special Chart A" to "Special Chart D" are displayed, a small win occurs, and when the game ball passes through specific area 234v during the small win game, a big win occurs, and after the big win game ends, the control state essentially becomes a non-electric support state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stopping symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special Symbol H" is the losing symbol.

Figure 53(b) shows an example of the stopping pattern of special symbol 2. Figure 53(b) shows eight types of special symbols: "Special Symbol B," "Special Symbol C," "Special Symbol D," "Special Symbol E," "Special Symbol e," "Special Symbol f," "Special Symbol g," and "Special Symbol i," of which three types of special symbols are big win symbols ("Special Symbol B," "Special Symbol C," and "Special Symbol D"), three types of special symbols are small win symbols ("Special Symbol e," "Special Symbol f," and "Special Symbol g"), one type of special symbol is a time-saving symbol ("Special Symbol E"), and one type of special symbol is a losing symbol ("Special Symbol i"). When "Special symbol B" to "Special symbol D" are displayed, a jackpot is awarded, and a 10R jackpot game begins after the symbols stop. When the small jackpot symbols of "Special symbol e" and "Special symbol f" are displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the symbols stop, and the game ball that entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the specific area 234v, resulting in a jackpot (type 2 jackpot). In other words, when a small jackpot is awarded with "Special symbol e" or "Special symbol f," if the game ball passes through the specific area 234v to award a jackpot, the game of passing the game ball through the specific area 234v is considered the first round, and then jackpot games from the second round onwards begin. The second variable winning opening 235 opens repeatedly until the tenth round, allowing the player to win balls. Furthermore, if a small win occurs on "special symbol g" and then the game ball passes through the specific area 234v, resulting in a jackpot, the game of passing the game ball through the specific area 234v is considered the first round, and the jackpot game from the second round onwards begins, with the second variable prize opening 235 remaining open until the second round, allowing balls to be won. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the game state after the jackpot game on special symbol 2 ends differs depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot. If a jackpot occurs on "special symbol B," "special symbol C," or "special symbol D" in the non-electric support state, the game will transition to the non-electric support state after the jackpot game ends. If a jackpot occurs on "special symbol B," "special symbol C," or "special symbol D" in the a time-saving state or the c time-saving state (a time-saving state transitioned to by the display of a time-saving symbol), the game will transition to the electric support state after the jackpot game ends. More specifically, if a jackpot occurs on "Special Chart B" or "Special Chart C" in the time-saving state a or c, after the jackpot play ends, the system will essentially enter an electric support state until the fifth pattern change display by Special Chart 1 begins, but if a jackpot occurs on "Special Chart D," the electric support state will end when the jackpot play ends and the first special chart change display begins, so it can be said that the system will essentially transition to a non-electric support state. Furthermore, if a small hit occurs on Special Chart 2 and the game transitions to a jackpot game state during that small hit game, the game state after the end of that jackpot game will differ depending on the game state at the time of the small hit. If a small hit occurs on "Special Chart e," "Special Chart f," or "Special Chart g" during non-electric support mode, the game will transition to a non-electric support mode after the end of the jackpot game related to that small hit. If a small hit occurs on "Special Chart e," "Special Chart f," or "Special Chart g" during time-saving mode A or time-saving mode C (time-saving mode transitioned to by the display of time-saving symbols), the game will transition to an electric support mode after the end of the jackpot game related to that small hit. However, if a small hit occurs on "Special Chart e," "Special Chart f," or "Special Chart g" during time-saving mode A or time-saving mode C, the electric support mode will end when the jackpot game ends and the first special chart variable display begins, so in some cases it can be said that the game will essentially transition to a non-electric support mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when "Special Chart E" is displayed, a time-saving symbol is provided that transitions to a special chart time-saving state without resulting in a big win or small win. In other words, "Special Chart E" is a time-saving symbol, and when "Special Chart E" is displayed, the special chart time-saving state is entered, in which the special chart fluctuation display time is shortened until the first pattern fluctuation display of Special Chart 1 begins or the 144th pattern fluctuation display of Special Chart 2 begins. In addition, one type of stopping symbol is provided as a losing symbol. "Special Chart i" is a losing symbol.

Figure 52(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, there are ten types of decorative patterns, "Decoration 1" through "Decoration 10." When a ball is detected as having entered the normal starting slot 228 or the special starting slot 232, a "decorative pattern change display" is performed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208, switching the display in the following order: "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → ... In other words, the decorative pattern display device 208 changes the decorative patterns separately from the normal pattern display device 210 and the second special pattern display device 214. It also displays the stop pattern, which is a combination of decorative patterns. In this embodiment, the decorative patterns are not changed in response to the special pattern 1 change display, but this may be done.

When announcing a 10R big win, 10R small win, or 2R small win, a decorative pattern combination of three decorative patterns of the same number lined up (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7") is displayed in a static manner in the pattern display areas 208a-208c. When announcing a losing pattern, a decorative pattern combination other than those described above (for example, scattered patterns) is displayed in a static manner in the pattern display areas 208a-208c.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "decorative pattern variable display" in the decorative pattern display device 208 to the display of the stopped decorative pattern pattern may be referred to as the decorative pattern variable display. The decorative pattern variable display is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

Figure 53(d) shows an example of a normal symbol stop pattern. In this embodiment, there are two types of normal symbol stop display patterns: "Normal Symbol A," which is a winning symbol, and "Normal Symbol B," which is a losing symbol. When the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start hole 228, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a "normal symbol change display" (normal symbol change game) in which all seven segments are alternately lit and extinguished. Then, after the change time has elapsed, either "Normal Symbol A," which is a winning symbol, or "Normal Symbol B," which is a losing symbol, is displayed as a stopped symbol. In Figure 52(d), the white areas in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are extinguished, and the black areas indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "regular map change display" to the stop display of the regular map's stop pattern may be referred to as the regular map change display.

<Main processing of main control unit>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in Fig. 52 will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Note that Fig. 54 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 stores special symbol random number values, special symbol round determination random number values, special symbol electric support determination random number values, and special symbol pattern determination random number values. RAM 308 also has a random number counter that generates these various random number values. RAM 308 also stores the number of reserved special symbols, special symbol winning random number values, and various judgment (lottery) results. Hereinafter, the area in RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special symbols may be referred to as the special symbol reserved number storage area. RAM 308 also has a start information storage area for special symbols, which is divided into areas for the maximum number of symbols (four in this example) that can be reserved for the start of the win/loss judgment (lottery), as well as a random number value storage area for regular symbols. As described below, the start information storage area for special symbols stores multiple types of start information as a set, with one set per area in order of winning (reserved order).

As mentioned above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When this start signal is input, the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 54 in accordance with a control program pre-stored in ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. This initial setting 1 sets the stack initial value (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, sets the interrupt mask, initializes the I/O 310, initializes various variables stored in the RAM 308, and sets operation permission and initial values for the WDT 314. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value for the WDT 314.

In step S103, the counter value of WDT314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, the process monitors whether the low voltage signal is ON, i.e., whether the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is outputting a low voltage signal indicating a voltage drop when the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500 is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is ON (the CPU 304 has detected a power interruption), the process returns to step S103. If the low voltage signal is OFF (the CPU 304 has not detected a power interruption), the process proceeds to step S107. Note that if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after power is turned on, the process also returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. This initial setting 2 includes setting a value in the timer circuit 312 that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below, outputting a clear signal from a specified port of the I/O 310 (e.g., a test output port, an output port to the first sub-control unit 400), and setting to allow writing to RAM 308.

In step S109, a determination is made as to whether the state before the power was interrupted (before power was cut off) will be restored. If the state before power was cut off will not be restored (if the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is to be reset to its initial state), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to perform initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power outage will be restored (Step S109; No), it is determined whether the cause is the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 49 being operated by a gaming parlor staff member or the like (Step S113). That is, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that an operation has been performed). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (Step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (Step S115). If it is determined that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (Step S115; Yes), it executes the setting change process (Step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor on the bonus ratio/setting display 196 flashes to "1," indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, the 7-segment display on the setting monitor increments each time the setting change button 194 is pressed. Pressing the setting change button 194 while the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor is at "3" returns the display to "1." In this embodiment, settings 1 through 3, which have different jackpot probabilities, can be selected. After changing to the desired setting, the setting is confirmed by pressing the setting change key 192 to the OFF position. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. While the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the bonus ratio/setting display 196 in this embodiment, it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or announced via audio output, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, there are three settings, 1 to 3, but it may be a two-step setting, or four or more settings may be possible, or the setting may not be changed. Also, in this embodiment, the initial setting value displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1," but the setting value before the power was turned off may be retained and the retained setting value may be displayed.

Furthermore, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; No), the setting change process of step S117 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S119.

In step S119, initialization processing is performed to return the basic circuit 302 to its initial state (step S119). Here, if the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area in RAM 308 is read. If this power status information does not indicate a suspend state, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a specified area (e.g., all areas) of RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. The checksum is then determined to be a specific value (e.g., 0) (i.e., whether the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is anything other than the specific value (e.g., 0) (i.e., if the checksum result is abnormal), initialization processing is performed to return the pachinko machine 100 to its initial state. This initialization processing includes disabling interrupts, setting the stack pointer to a stack initial value (main setting), and initializing all storage areas in RAM 308. Note that in this embodiment, even after initialization, the settings set in the setting change processing (step S117) are retained. Furthermore, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the settings selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process of the main control unit 300 (step S119) has been performed, and like the power recovery command described below, is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300.

In step S121, after setting interrupt prohibition, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, one initial value generation random number counter is updated to generate the initial value of each special random number counter. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as special random number values is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating special random number values provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the value is then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except while performing timer interrupt processing, which starts at a predetermined cycle.

Meanwhile, in step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power restoration processing, the stack pointer value stored in the stack pointer save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. The values of each register stored in the register save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage are also read and reset to each register, and then interrupt permission is set. The CPU 304 then executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, and the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state it was in at the time of power outage. In other words, processing resumes from the command following the command (specified in step S121) executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described below) immediately before power outage. The RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 49 also has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in that transmission information storage area. This power restoration command indicates that the state at the time of power outage has been restored, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 55. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in Figure 52 is equipped with a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal triggers the start of main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. This timer interrupt start processing includes processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of processing abnormalities).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, detection signals from various sensors 320 (shown in FIG. 52), including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of I/O 310, and the presence or absence of detection signals is monitored and stored in signal status memory areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 320 in RAM 308. Using ball detection sensor detection signals as an example, information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process two times before last (approximately 4 ms ago) is read from the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308. Information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the previous timer interrupt process (approximately 2 ms ago) is read from the current detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previously detected signal memory area. In addition, the detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected this time are stored in the currently detected signal storage area mentioned above.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area is compared to determine whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches the winning determination pattern information. While a gaming ball passes through a ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeatedly activates at very short intervals of approximately 4 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, the aforementioned step S205 checks for a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor are stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area. In other words, when a gaming ball begins to pass through a ball detection sensor, there will be no second-to-last detection signal, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In this embodiment, taking into account erroneous detection and noise from the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal is detected, a win is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating no detection signal two times previously, a detection signal present the previous time, and a detection signal present this time). In this step S205, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating no detection signal two times previously, a detection signal present the previous time, and a detection signal present this time), it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning slot 226, the variable winning slots 234 and 235, the first special starting slot 231, and the second special starting slot 232, or the general starting slot 228. In other words, it is determined that a win has occurred in these winning slots 234, 235, and 226 or these starting slots 231, 232, and 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects a ball entering the first special symbol start port 231 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, it is determined that a prize has been won in the first special symbol start port 231, that is, that a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with subsequent winning in the first special symbol start port 231 is performed, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with subsequent winning in the first special symbol start port 231 is not performed and the processing branches to subsequent processing. Note that winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there was a detection signal two times before last, that there was no detection signal last time, and that there was no detection signal this time) is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. After it is determined that a win has occurred, it is not determined that a win has occurred until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the win determination clear pattern information. If the information matches the win determination clear pattern information, it will then be determined whether or not it matches the win determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processes and basic random number update processes, the value of the random number counter for generating initial values performed in step S121 above is updated, and then the random number counter for generating special random number values used by the main control unit 300 is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as special random number values is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating special random number values provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the value is then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Furthermore, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, the value of the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to that random number counter is obtained and set in the random number counter memory area. For example, if a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers, which fluctuates within a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7) stored in a predetermined initial value storage area in RAM 308, a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to the random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers, and set in the random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers, and the currently set initial value is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area to determine when the random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers has completed its next cycle.

In step S211, a random number update process is performed. This process updates the random number counter used to generate random numbers for performances used by the main control unit 300.

In step S213, a timer update process is performed. This timer update process updates various timers, including a normal symbol display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, and timers for timing the specified winning performance time, specified opening time, specified closing time, specified ending performance period, etc.

In step S215, a prize slot counter update process is performed. In this prize slot counter update process, when a prize is won at prize slots 234, 235, 226 or starting slots 228, 231, 232, the value in the prize ball count memory area provided for each prize slot or starting slot in RAM 308 is read, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball count memory area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning entry acceptance process is performed. During the winning entry acceptance process, if certain conditions are met, multiple types of start information are acquired. The multiple types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an available area in the start information storage section of RAM 308 according to the order of winning (order of pending).

In step S219, which follows step S217, a payout request count transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in Figure 52 consists of one byte, with bit 7 indicating strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bit 6 indicating power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission since power-on), bits 4 and 5 indicating the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 indicating the payout request count after encryption processing.

In step S221, a normal map status update process is performed. This normal map status update process performs one of a number of processes corresponding to the state of the normal map. For example, in the normal map status update process during the normal map variation display (when the value of the normal map display pattern update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal pattern display device 210. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 displays the variations in the normal map (normal map variation play).

In addition, during the normal symbol status update process when the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the display mode is a winning symbol, and if the winning flag is off, the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the display mode is a losing symbol. Also, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has a setting area for various settings to be made in various processes, not just the normal symbol status update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting and turning-off control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal symbol is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms and displays either the winning symbol (normal symbol A shown in Figure 53(d)) or the losing symbol (normal symbol B shown in Figure 53(d)). Furthermore, to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the regular symbol stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. This setting causes the confirmed symbol to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the regular symbol variable game is notified to the player.

Furthermore, if the result of the normal symbol variable play is a win, the normal symbol win flag is turned on, as described below. When this normal symbol win flag is on, the normal symbol status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the normal symbol stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) sets the setting area of RAM 308 to "normal symbol in operation," outputs a signal to the solenoid (332) that drives the opening and closing of the shutter member 2311 of the first special symbol start port 231 to advance the shutter member 2311 forward for a specified opening period (e.g., 5000 ms), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the blade opening time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, the normal status update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (332) that drives the shutter member 2311 to open and close, causing the shutter member 2311 to move backward for a specified closed period (e.g., 500 ms), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the blade closed time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal map status update process that begins when the specified closure period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the blade closure time changes from 1 to 0), the normal map is set to "not operating" in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variable game is a loss, as described below, the normal map loss flag is turned on. If this normal map loss flag is on, the normal map status update process that occurs when the specified stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the normal map to "not operating" in the setting area of RAM 308. In the normal map status update process when the normal map is not operating, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S223.

In step S223, a regular map-related lottery process is performed. In this regular map-related lottery process, when regular map variable play and the opening/closing control of the first special map start port 231 are not being performed (the regular map state is inactive), and the number of reserved regular map variable play games is one or more, a win determination is made to determine whether the result of the regular map variable play will be a win or a loss by random number lottery from the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 52. If a win is determined, the win flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. If a loss is determined, the win flag is set to OFF. Regardless of the result of the win determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is obtained as the regular map timer random number value, and one time for displaying the regular map variable on the regular map display device 210 is selected from multiple variable times based on the obtained regular map timer random number value, and this variable display time is stored as the regular map variable display time in the regular map variable time memory area provided in RAM 308. The number of reserved normal variable games is stored in a reserved normal game number storage area provided in RAM 308, and each time a win is determined, the number of reserved normal variable games minus 1 is stored again in this reserved normal game number storage area. The random number value used to determine the win is also erased.

Next, the pre-reading process (step S224) is executed. In the pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information for each of the regular and special symbols 2, pre-determines the stop symbols and change time before the hit/miss determination process, and stores the pre-determination results (pre-reading results) in the pre-reading result storage unit in RAM 308. Note that in this embodiment, no pre-reading is performed because special symbol 1 is not reserved, but it is also possible to perform pre-reading on special symbol 1 as it can be reserved.

Next, special chart status update processing is performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. First, special chart status update processing (special chart 2 status update processing) is performed for special chart 2 (step S225). In this special chart 2 status update processing, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 2.

For example, during the special symbol 2 status update process when the special symbol 2 variable display is in progress (when the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the special symbol 2 display device 214. By performing this control, the special symbol 2 display device 214 displays the variable special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big win flag, a 10R small win flag, a 2R small win flag, a miss flag, and a time-saving flag. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stopping symbol in the special chart 2 related lottery process described below. In the special chart 2 state update process, which starts when the special chart 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, in the case of a 10R time-saving jackpot flag, special charts B to D shown in Figure 53(b) are displayed, in the case of a 10R time-saving small jackpot flag (when the game ball passes through the specific area 234v, it transitions to a 10-round jackpot), special charts e and f shown in Figure 53(b) are displayed, in the case of a 2R time-saving small jackpot flag (when the game ball passes through the specific area 234v, it transitions to a 2-round jackpot), special chart g shown in Figure 53(b), in the case of a time-saving flag, special chart E, and in the case of a miss flag, special chart i are displayed, and a setting is made in the setting area of RAM 308 to indicate that the special chart 2 is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the special symbol 2 display device 214 will confirm and display one of the following symbols: a jackpot symbol (special symbol B to special symbol D), a small jackpot symbol (a 10R jackpot when passing through the specific area 234v) (special symbol e, special symbol f), a small jackpot symbol (a 2R jackpot when passing through the specific area 234v) (special symbol g), a time-saving symbol (special symbol E), or a losing symbol (special symbol i).

Furthermore, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stopped display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the fixedly displayed special chart 2 is displayed stopped for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 2 variable play is notified to the player. Furthermore, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving number memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern that will stop the variable display is special pattern 2 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described below, before terminating the process.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol 2 variable play is a small hit, the small hit flag is turned on. If the small hit flag is on, in the special symbol 2 status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), special symbol 2 is set to be in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for the specified winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, specified transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area described above.

In addition, the special symbol 2 status update process, which begins when the specified winning presentation period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door element 2341 to keep the first variable winning opening 234 open for a specified open period (e.g., 10 seconds, or until the specified number of game balls (e.g., 10) have entered the first variable winning opening 234), and sets information indicating the open period in the memory area of the opening and closing mechanism open time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, in the command setting and sending process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that processing is to be executed while the jackpot generating device is operating is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special chart 2 state update process, which begins when the specified opening period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the opening and closing mechanism opening time changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door element 2341 to keep the first variable winning opening 234 closed. At this time, if the gaming ball passes through the specific area 234v, the jackpot flag is turned on. If the jackpot flag is on, the special chart 2 state update process, which begins when the specified jackpot transition display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the special chart 2 jackpot transition changes from 1 to 0), sets information indicating the jackpot transition presentation period in the memory area of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for the specified jackpot occurrence presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image is displayed notifying the player that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 234v and a jackpot has occurred. Additionally, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the jackpot transition effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area. On the other hand, if the gaming ball does not pass through the specific area 234v, the jackpot flag is not turned on, and the special chart 2 inactive state is set in the setting area of RAM 308. When the special chart 2 is inactive, the special chart 2 status update process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

The special symbol 2 state update process, which begins when the specified jackpot transition presentation period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 to remove the shutter member 2351 and maintain it in an open state for the specified opening period (e.g., 29 seconds, or until the entry of a specified number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) into the second variable prize opening 235 is detected), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door open time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special prize opening opening setting transmission process should be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special chart 2 state update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 for the specified closed period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) to advance the shutter member 2351 and maintain it in a closed state, and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special winning opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

Furthermore, the opening and closing control of the shutter member 2351 is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 10 rounds or 2 rounds excluding the first time), and the special symbol 2 state update process begins when the control ends. In order to set the process to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 10 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot has ended on the decorative symbol display device 208, information indicating the effect wait period is set in the memory area of the effect wait time management timer provided in RAM 308. Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is set on, the number of time-saving times (e.g., special symbol 1: 1 time, special symbol 2: 1 time) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Note that if the time-saving flag is set off, the number of time-saving times is not set in the time-saving times memory section, and the time-saving flag is not turned on.

The term "time-saving" here refers to shortening the time between the end of a jackpot in special chart variable play and the start of the next jackpot, putting the pachinko machine in a state that is advantageous to the player. When the time-saving flag is set to on, the opening time of the shutter member 2351 of the special chart 1 starting port 231 during one operation tends to be longer (electric chute opening extension).

Also, as mentioned above, the time-saving flag is set to off during jackpot play (special play state). Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during jackpot play. This is to solve the problem that if the electric support state is in effect during jackpot play, many game balls may enter the special chart 1 starting port 231 before a predetermined number of game balls enter the second variable winning port 235 during jackpot play, increasing the number of game balls that can be won during the jackpot and increasing the tendency to gamble.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the special chart 2 status update process, which begins when the specified end display period ends (when the value of the display standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), sets the special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 2 variable play is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 2 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets the special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. When the special chart 2 status update process is in the case where the special chart 2 is inactive, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Next, a special chart status update process (special chart 1 status update process) is performed for special chart 1 (step S227). In this special chart 1 status update process, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 1.

For example, during the special symbol 1 status update process when the special symbol 1 variable display is in progress (when the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the special symbol 1 display device 212. By performing this control, the special symbol 1 display device 212 displays the variable display of special symbol 1 (special symbol 1 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big win flag, a 10R small win flag, a miss flag, and a time-saving flag. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stopping pattern in the special chart 1 related lottery process described below. In the special chart 1 state update process, which starts when the special chart 1 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 1 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R big hit flag is on and the time-saving flag is also on, the special chart A shown in Figure 53(a) is displayed; when the 10R small hit flag is on and the time-saving flag is also on, the special chart a to special chart c shown in Figure 53(a) is displayed; when the 10R small hit flag is on and the time-saving flag is off, the special chart d shown in Figure 53(a) is displayed; and when the miss flag is on, the special chart h is displayed, and a setting is made in the setting area of RAM 308 to indicate that the special chart 1 is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the special symbol 1 display device 212 will confirm and display one of the following symbols: a 10R big win symbol (special symbol A), a 10R small win symbol with time reduction (special symbols a-c), a 10R small win symbol without time reduction (special symbol d), or a losing symbol (special symbol h).

Furthermore, to maintain the display for a predetermined stopped display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 1 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed special chart 2 is displayed stopped for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 1 variable play is notified to the player. Furthermore, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving number memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the time-saving flag is turned off unless the special chart probability is fluctuating. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern that will stop the variable display is special pattern 1 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described below, and then the process terminates.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol 1 variable play is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. If the jackpot flag is on, in the special symbol 1 status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special symbol 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), special symbol 1 is set to "operating" in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for the specified winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, specified transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area described above.

In addition, the special drawing 1 status update process, which begins when the specified winning presentation period ends (when the value of the special drawing 1 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the slide member 2351 of the second variable drawing opening 235 to keep the slide member 2351 in an open state for the specified opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until the entry of a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) into the second variable drawing opening 235 is detected), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special drawing opening setting transmission process should be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special chart 1 status update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the slide member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 to keep the slide member 2351 in a closed state for the specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special prize opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

Furthermore, the opening and closing control of the second variable winning opening 235 is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 2 rounds in this example), and the special symbol 1 state update process, which begins when the control ends, sets information indicating the effect waiting period in the memory area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 10 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot has ended on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is set on, the number of time-saving times (e.g., special symbol 1: 5 times, special symbol 2: 2 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Note that if the time-saving flag is set off, the number of time-saving times is not set in the time-saving times memory section, and the time-saving flag is not turned on.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the special chart 1 status update process, which begins when the specified end performance period ends (when the value of the performance standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), sets the special chart 1 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 1 variable play is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 1 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. When special chart 1 is inactive, the special chart 1 status update process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

Once the special chart status update processing in steps S225 and S227 is completed, special chart-related lottery processing is then performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. Here again, the special chart-related lottery processing for special chart 2 (special chart 2-related lottery processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special chart-related lottery processing for special chart 1 (special chart 1-related lottery processing) is performed (step S231). The special chart 2-related lottery processing is executed using the earliest special chart 2 winning random number value and special chart 2 random number value in the special chart 2 random number value memory area, with the starting conditions being that variable play for special chart 1 and special chart 2 is not being performed, the states of special chart 1 and special chart 2 are both inactive, and the number of reserved special chart 2 variable play games is 1 or more. The special chart 1 related lottery process is executed using the first special chart 1 winning random number value and special chart 1 random number value in the special chart 1 random number value storage area, with the starting conditions being that variable play for special chart 1 and special chart 2 is not being performed, both special chart 1 and special chart 2 are inactive, and the number of reserved special chart 1 variable play times is 1 or more.

With regard to these special symbol-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special symbol 2-related lottery process before the special symbol 1-related lottery process, so that if the start conditions for the special symbol 2 variable game and the start conditions for the special symbol 1 variable game are met simultaneously, the special symbol 2 variable game will be in play first, followed by the special symbol 1 variable game. Furthermore, the results of the special symbol variable game win/fail judgment by the decorative symbol display device 208 are reported by the first sub-control unit 400, which reports the results of the lottery based on winning at the special symbol 2 start port 232, but does not report the results of the lottery based on winning at the special symbol 1 start port 231. Thus, in this embodiment, if a lottery based on winning at the special chart 2 start port 232 is held while special chart 1 variable play is being executed, special chart 2 variable play will start while special chart 1 variable play is being executed, and if a lottery based on winning at the special chart 1 start port 231 is held while special chart 2 variable play is being executed, special chart 1 variable play will start while special chart 2 variable play is being executed.

In the case of the special chart 2-related lottery processing in step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires the special chart 2 start information (a set of the special chart 2 winning random number and the special chart 2 random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) reserved position in the special chart 2 random number memory area, and determines whether it will be a big hit, a small hit, a time-saving state, or a miss (win/lose determination) based on the special chart 2 winning random number etc. in the acquired special chart 2 start information using the win/lose determination table stored in ROM 306. Note that when determining whether or not the special chart 1 is a win/lose, a decision is made as to whether it will be a big hit, a small hit, a time-saving state, or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the pattern (stop pattern) to be displayed after the special chart 2 changes display using the special chart determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 random number value in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the determined win/lose determination result etc. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the variable display time (timer number) for the special symbol 2 using various tables stored in ROM 306, based on, for example, the result of the hit/miss judgment, the stopped symbol, the number of special symbols 2 reserved at the time of the hit/miss judgment, and the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol variable time.

After retrieving the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area and subtracts 1 from the special chart 2 reserved number storage area. At this time, the special chart 2 start information retrieved from the special chart 2 random number value storage area may be stored in a temporary area provided in RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision may be made based on the special chart 2 start information stored in this temporary area.

After the above-described special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229), the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special symbol status update process and special symbol-related lottery process are performed independently for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, allowing multiple special symbols to fluctuate simultaneously. In this case, when multiple special symbols are fluctuated simultaneously, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided with multiple areas that display the lottery results for each special symbol, or multiple decorative symbol display devices may be provided that display the lottery results for each special symbol, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results for multiple special symbols. Furthermore, when fluctuations related to multiple special symbols are occurring simultaneously, the lottery results for the special symbol that stopped fluctuating first may affect the lottery results for the special symbol that stops fluctuating later. Furthermore, without being limited to this, it is also possible to not perform lottery processing or variable play for the reservation of one special symbol depending on the state of the other special symbol.

In step S233, which follows step S231, a command setting and transmission process is performed. In this command setting and transmission process, various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bits 11 to 14 being command type (in this example, information that can identify the type of command, such as basic command, pattern change start command, pattern change stop command, win effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, advance read result information command, and setting command), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. Furthermore, if the command type is a symbol change start (spin start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, loss flags, and the timer number selected in the special symbol-related lottery process. If the command type is a symbol change stop (spin stop) command, the command data includes the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags. If the command type is a jackpot round number designation command, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the special symbol 1 start port 230, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the special symbol 2 start port 232, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the variable prize port 234, and so on. If the command type is a look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, the look-ahead number stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If the command type is a setting command, the command data includes setting information and so on.

In addition, in the above-mentioned spin start setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags stored in RAM 308, the timer number selected in the special chart 1 related lottery process and special chart 2 related lottery process, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc., is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned spin stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags stored in RAM 308, etc., is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned ending effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned large prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the number of jackpot rounds, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the process of transmitting the jackpot closure settings described above, the command data is set with information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc.

In addition, step S233 also performs a general command special drawing reserve increase process. In this general command special drawing reserve increase process, the command data is set with special drawing identification information (information indicating special drawing 1 or special drawing 2) and advance notice information (either advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and can also determine the presentation control content based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S235, which follows step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in RAM 308 is output via the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100.

In step S237, the step following step S235, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal status memory area in step S205 are read to monitor for the presence or absence of specified errors, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error. If a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-controller 400. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 1 start port 231 and the variable winning ports 234 and 235, and display data output to the normal drawing display device 210, special drawing 1 display device 212, special drawing 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. via drive circuits 324, 326, and 330 is set to the output port of I/O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request quantity transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of I/O 310.

In step S239, which follows step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243; if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the process then returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in Figure 54. Meanwhile, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers used to restore the state at the time of power interruption when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power interruption processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and the process then enters a HALT state.

Next, the winning/losing determination table used in the special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229) and the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in Figure 55 will be explained with reference to Figures 56 and 57.

The special drawing pass/fail determination table shown in Figure 56 (a) is a table that is referenced when determining whether special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 are pass/fail. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

When determining whether a jackpot is selected for Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, if a number between 0 and 204 is drawn from the random number range of 0 to 65535, a jackpot will be selected with a probability of approximately 1 in 319.688. Furthermore, when determining whether a jackpot is selected for Special Chart 1, if a number between 205 and 65535 is drawn, a small jackpot will be selected with a probability of 1 in 1.003. Furthermore, when determining whether a jackpot is selected for Special Chart 2, if a number between 205 and 655 is drawn, a small jackpot will be selected with a probability of 1 in 145.313. Furthermore, for Special Chart 2, provided that the machine is in time-saving mode a, if a number between 656 and 65535 is drawn, a time-saving symbol will be selected with a probability of 1 in 1.010. In other words, Special Chart 1 is designed so that a jackpot is selected with a probability of approximately 1 in 319.688, and if a jackpot is not selected, a small jackpot is selected, and there are no misses on Special Chart 1. Special Chart 2 is designed so that a jackpot is selected with a probability of approximately 1 in 319.688, and a small jackpot is selected with a probability of 1 in 145.313, and in time-saving state A, if neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot is selected, the time-saving symbol is always selected, and there are no misses. On the other hand, in game states other than time-saving state A, if neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot is selected, it is designed so that it is a miss. Note that Special Chart 1 may also have misses, but even in that case, it is desirable to make it so that a small jackpot is the most likely to be won.

In this embodiment, when a small win occurs, the first variable winning slot 234 opens, and when it passes through the specific area 234v, it becomes a big win. Therefore, special chart 1 can be said to be a pattern change display that will result in a big win when a pattern change display is performed. Also, in the time-saving state A, if neither a big win nor a small win is selected, the time-saving pattern stops and the game transitions to the time-saving state C, so it can be said to be a pattern change display that will result in a big win when a pattern change display is performed, or a transition to the time-saving game state. Furthermore, in game states other than the time-saving state A, special chart 2 will result in a miss if neither a big win nor a small win is selected.

The special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving symbol is won, used in non-time-saving game mode as shown in Figure 56 (b), is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a jackpot or time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the judgment of whether or not special symbols 1 and 2 are successful. This table is also stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a jackpot is selected as a result of the special jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart A will be selected with a 100% probability. In other words, a 10R jackpot will always be selected, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the a2 time-saving play state will be selected. Here, the a2 time-saving play state is a more advantageous state than the non-time-saving play state, the a1 time-saving play state described below, and the c time-saving play state. Specifically, in the a2 time-saving play state, if the normal chart win lottery result is a win or if the normal power activation gate 228g is passed, the shutter member 2311 advances for a longer time than in the non-time-saving play state and the a1 time-saving play state. In other words, it can be said that this is a play state in which it is easier to win at the special chart 1 starting port 231. Furthermore, in the a2 time-saving game state, the variation time of the special symbol 1 symbol change display is shorter than that of the special symbol 2 symbol change display and the normal symbol change display. In other words, the a2 time-saving game state can be said to be a game state in which the next jackpot is likely to occur in an extremely short time. The variation time of the special symbol 1 symbol change display in the a2 time-saving game state may be one type or multiple types. For example, if multiple types are available, any selected variation time should be shorter than that of the special symbol 2 symbol change display and the normal symbol change display in the a2 time-saving game state. Furthermore, the number of time-saving cycles in the rightmost column of the special symbol determination table for jackpots and sudden time-saving wins indicates the termination condition of the time-saving game state. Specifically, in the case of special symbol A, the game ends when the fifth variation display of special symbol 1 in the a2 time-saving game state begins, or when the second variation display of special symbol 2 begins. The conditions for ending the time-saving game state are not limited to the number of times Special Chart 1 is played and the number of times Special Chart 2 is played; in addition to these two, the combined number of times Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 can be set, or the number of times regular charts can be added, or these can be combined as appropriate.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for Special Chart 2, Special Chart B will be selected with a probability of 50/100, Special Chart C with a probability of 30/100, and Special Chart D with a probability of 20/100. In other words, if a jackpot is selected on Special Chart 2 in non-time-saving play mode, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which symbol is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to non-time-saving play mode.

The special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving symbol is selected in the time-saving game state shown in Figure 56 (c) is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a jackpot or time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the judgment of whether or not special symbols 1 and 2 are selected. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart A will be selected with a 100% probability. In other words, a 10R jackpot will always be selected, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected. Also, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart B will be selected with a 50/100 probability, special chart C will be selected with a 30/100 probability, and special chart D will be selected with a 20/100 probability. In this embodiment, a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 80/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected, and a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 20/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A1 time-shortened play state will be selected. Here, the a1 time-saving game state is a more advantageous state than the non-time-saving game state, but a less advantageous state than the a2 time-saving game state. Specifically, in the a1 time-saving game state, if the normal winning lottery result is a win or if the player passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 advances for a longer time than in the non-time-saving game state. While details will be described later, this is a game state in which if the normal winning lottery result is a win, it is easy to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231, but if the player passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, it is difficult to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231.

For Special Chart D, the condition for ending the a1 time-saving play state is until the first symbol change display for Special Chart 1 begins or the first symbol change display for Special Chart 2 begins. Therefore, after the end of a jackpot play, Special Chart 2 is reserved during jackpot play. Normally, the reserved Special Chart 2 is consumed and the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 begins, immediately ending the a1 time-saving play state and transitioning to a non-time-saving play state. However, since the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 is executed in the a time-saving play state, the result of the lottery in the a time-saving play state is used to determine whether Special Chart 2 is a win or lose. Furthermore, if a time-saving symbol that can only be won in the a time-saving play state is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for Special Chart 2, Special Chart E is selected. If a time-saving symbol is selected, the game will transition to the c time-saving play state from the symbol change display following the execution of that symbol change display. Here, the time-saving c game state is a more advantageous state than the non-time-saving game state, but a less advantageous state than the time-saving a2 game state. Specifically, in the time-saving c game state, if the normal winning lottery result is a win or if the player passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 advances for a longer time than in the non-time-saving game state. While details will be explained later, this is a game state in which if the normal winning lottery result is a win, it is easy to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231, but if the player passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, it is difficult to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231.

The special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving symbol is selected in the time-saving game state c shown in Figure 56 (d) is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a jackpot or time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the judgment of whether or not special symbols 1 and 2 are selected. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart A will be selected with a 100% probability. In other words, a 10R jackpot will always be selected, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected. Also, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart B will be selected with a 50/100 probability, special chart C will be selected with a 30/100 probability, and special chart D will be selected with a 20/100 probability. In this embodiment, a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 80/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected, and a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 20/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A1 time-shortened play state will be selected. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state a or the time-saving game state c ends when the number of times the pattern of special chart 1 has changed has been set or when the number of times the pattern of special chart 2 has changed has been set, but the time-saving game state may also end when the total number of times the pattern of special chart 1 and special chart 2 have changed has reached a set number.

The special symbol determination table for small wins used in non-time-saving play mode shown in Figure 57(a) is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a small win is selected as a result of the determination of whether special symbols 1 and 2 are selected. This table is also stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart a will be selected with a 20/100 probability, special chart b with a 20/100 probability, special chart c with an 11/100 probability, and special chart d with a 49/100 probability. If special charts a to c are selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the a2 time-saving play state. Also, if special chart d is selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the non-time-saving play state.

Furthermore, if a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart e will be selected with a probability of 35/100, special chart f with a probability of 35/100, and special chart g with a probability of 30/100. In other words, if a small jackpot is selected on special chart 2 in non-time-limited play mode and special chart e or special chart f is selected, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which chart is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to non-time-limited play mode. If special chart g is selected, a 2R jackpot will result, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to non-time-limited play mode.

The special symbol determination table for when a small win is won, used in the time-saving game mode shown in Figure 57 (b), is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a small win is selected as a result of the determination of whether special symbols 1 and 2 are wins. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a small jackpot is selected as a result of the special jackpot lottery for Special Chart 1, there is a 20/100 chance that Special Chart A will be selected, a 20/100 chance that Special Chart B will be selected, an 11/100 chance that Special Chart C will be selected, and a 49/100 chance that Special Chart D will be selected. If Special Charts A to C are selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the A2 time-saving play state. However, if Special Chart A is selected, the A time-saving play state will continue until the start of the fifth change display for Special Chart 1 or the start of the second change display for Special Chart 2. However, if Special Charts B and C are selected, the A2 time-saving play state will end and the game will transition to the non-time-saving play state (normal play state) upon the start of the first pattern change display for Special Chart 1 or the start of the first pattern change display for Special Chart 2. Additionally, when special chart d is selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected, which will transition to a1 time-saving play state.

Also, if a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart e will be selected with a probability of 35/100, special chart f with a probability of 35/100, and special chart g with a probability of 30/100. In other words, if a small jackpot is selected on special chart 2 in the A1 time-saving play state and special chart e or special chart f is selected, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which design is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the A1 time-saving play state. If special chart g is selected, a 2R jackpot will result, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the A1 time-saving play state.

If special symbols b or c are selected, the game will enter the a2 time-saving game state after the jackpot play ends. However, this a2 time-saving game state ends when the first symbol change display for special symbol 1 or the first symbol change display for special symbol 2 begins, making it virtually impossible to win at the special symbol 1 start gate 231. Specifically, after the jackpot play ends, special symbol 2 is reserved during the jackpot play. Normally, the reserved symbol 2 is consumed and the symbol change display for special symbol 2 begins, immediately ending the a1 time-saving game state and transitioning to the non-time-saving game state. However, since the symbol change display for special symbol 2 is executed in the a time-saving game state, the result of the lottery in the a time-saving game state will be used to determine whether special symbol 2 is a winner. Furthermore, if the time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special symbol 2, special symbol E will be selected. When a time-saving symbol is selected, the game will transition to time-saving game state c from the next symbol change display after that symbol change display is executed.

Here, when special symbols b or c are selected, the state after the jackpot play ends is the a2 time-saving play state rather than the a1 time-saving play state, and the reason for setting the end condition to the initiation of the first symbol change display on special symbol 1 or the initiation of the first symbol change display on special symbol 2 is to change the rate of transition to the c time-saving play state without changing the state after the jackpot play ends when special symbols b or c are selected (the a1 time-saving play state). By doing this, when a small jackpot is won on special symbol 1 in non-time-saving play state, there is a 51% chance that the ball will land in the special symbol 1 starting slot 231, meaning that the next jackpot is likely to occur immediately. When a small jackpot is won on special symbol 1 in time-saving play state, there is a 20% chance that the ball will land in the special symbol 1 starting slot 231. By changing the end condition without changing the destination play state, it is possible to control the rate of the state in which the next jackpot is likely to occur immediately, making it easier to design ball output performance.

The special symbol determination table for when a small win is won, used in the time-saving play state c shown in Figure 57 (c), is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a small win is selected as a result of the win/loss determination of special symbols 1 and 2. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a small jackpot is selected as a result of the special jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart a will be selected with a 20/100 probability, special chart b with a 20/100 probability, special chart c with an 11/100 probability, and special chart d with a 49/100 probability. If special charts a through c are selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the a2 time-saving play state. If special chart d is selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the a1 time-saving play state.

Also, if a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart e will be selected with a probability of 35/100, special chart f with a probability of 35/100, and special chart g with a probability of 30/100. In other words, if a small jackpot is selected on special chart 2 in the c time-saving play state and special chart e or special chart f is selected, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which design is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the a1 time-saving play state. If special chart g is selected, a 2R jackpot will result, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the a1 time-saving play state.

Next, we will explain the winning/losing determination table used in the general map status update process (step S221) and the general map-related lottery process (step S223) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in Figure 55, with reference to Figure 58.

The table for determining whether a regular drawing is a hit or miss, shown in Figure 58 (a), is a table that is referenced when determining whether a regular drawing is a hit or miss. The determination of whether a regular drawing is a hit or miss is made when the ball is hit from the left and enters the regular drawing starting hole 228. This table is referenced in the regular drawing-related lottery process (step S223) in the main control unit timer interrupt process, and is stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

When determining whether a regular winning lottery is successful, if a number between 0 and 204 is extracted from the random number range of 0 to 65535, the probability of a winning lottery is approximately 1 in 319.688. This is the same regardless of the game state. The probability of a winning lottery may be changed depending on the game state. In this embodiment, when a winning lottery is successful, the shutter member 2311 of the special game starting hole 231 operates for a predetermined period of time, making it easier for the game ball to enter the special game starting hole 231.

The normal symbol determination table for use when a normal symbol wins in the non-time-saving game mode shown in Figure 58 (b) is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a win is selected as a result of the normal symbol win/loss determination in the non-time-saving game mode. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a winning lottery result for the normal symbol is selected, normal symbol A will be selected. In other words, when normal symbol A is displayed in non-time-saving play mode, after a predetermined waiting time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed, the shutter member 2311 of the special symbol 1 starting port 231 will operate (open) for the normal opening time (5000 ms), making it easier to win at the special symbol 1 starting port 231. Note that in this embodiment, the shutter member 2311 advances once over a period of 5000 ms, but it may also be configured to advance and withdraw multiple times repeatedly over a period of 5000 ms.

The normal symbol determination table for when a normal symbol wins, used in the a1 time-saving play state and the c time-saving play state shown in Figure 58 (c), is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a win is selected as a result of the normal symbol win/loss determination in the a1 time-saving play state and the c time-saving play state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a winning lottery for the normal symbol is selected, normal symbol A is selected. That is, when normal symbol A is displayed in the a1 time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state, after a predetermined waiting time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed, the shutter member 2311 of the special symbol 1 starting port 231 operates (opens) for the first extended opening time (5,500 ms), making it easier to win the special symbol 1 starting port 231. Note that in this embodiment, the shutter member 2311 advances once for a period of 5,500 ms, but it may also advance and withdraw multiple times repeatedly over a period of 5,500 ms. Note that while the extended opening time (5,500 ms) of the shutter member 2311 of the special symbol 1 starting port 231 in the a1 time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state is the same, it may be different. The a1 time-saving game state may be longer than the c time-saving game state, or vice versa.

The normal symbol determination table for use when a normal symbol wins in the a2 time-limited play state shown in Figure 58 (d) is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a win is selected as a result of the normal symbol win/loss determination in the a2 time-limited play state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a winning lottery for the normal symbol results in a winning selection, normal symbol A will be selected. In other words, when normal symbol A is displayed in the A2 time-saving game mode, after a predetermined waiting time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed, the shutter member 2311 of the special symbol 1 starting port 231 will operate (open) for the second extended opening time (5800 ms), making it easier to win at the special symbol 1 starting port 231. Note that in this embodiment, the shutter member 2311 advances once over a period of 5800 ms, but it may also be configured to advance and withdraw multiple times repeatedly over a period of 5800 ms.

A timer table for setting the waiting time from passing through the normal electric operation gate 228g shown in Figure 58 (e) until the normal electric feature operates is stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In this embodiment, when a gaming ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, if the activation conditions are met (if the gate is not disabled), the timer table shown in Figure 58 (e) is referenced, and the waiting time (500 ms) until the shutter member 2311 of the special chart 1 starting port 231, which serves as a normal electric device, is activated is set. As a result, when a gaming ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 is activated after the waiting time (500 ms) set in the timer table has elapsed.

A timer table that sets the activation time of the normal electric device when the game ball passes through the normal electric activation gate 228g shown in Figure 58 (f) is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In this embodiment, when the normal power operation gate 228g is passed in the non-time-saving play state, the shutter member 2311 is advanced once by 40 ms as the opening time; when the normal power operation gate 228g is passed in the a1 time-saving play state and the c time-saving play state, the shutter member 2311 is advanced once by 45 ms; and when the normal power operation gate 228g is passed in the a2 time-saving play state, the shutter member 2311 is advanced once by 5800 ms. In other words, in the non-time-saving play state, the a1 time-saving play state, and the c time-saving play state, it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the special chart 1 start hole 231 even after passing through the normal power operation gate 228g; but in the a2 time-saving play state, it can be said that it is easy to get the game ball to enter the special chart 1 start hole 231 after passing through the normal power operation gate 228g.

Next, with reference to Figure 59 (a), we will explain how the game ball is handled when it passes through the normal power operation gate 228g. The processing states of the normal power operation gate 228g include the standby state of the normal power operation gate 228g (the state before the game ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g), normal power OP (the state in which the game ball has passed through the normal power operation gate 228g and the electric chute has started to open), normal electric device in operation (the state in which the game ball has passed through the normal power operation gate 228g and the electric chute is in operation), and normal electric device operation completed (the state at the point in time when the game ball has passed through the normal power operation gate 228g and the electric chute has finished operating).

The explanation here also explains the relationship with the normal symbol processing state based on winning the normal symbol starting hole 228. The normal symbol processing states include the normal symbol waiting state (the state before the ball enters the normal symbol starting hole 228), the normal symbol changing state, the normal symbol fixed stop state, normal electric OP (the state in which the electric chute starts to open due to a normal symbol win), normal electric device operating (the state in which the electric chute is operating due to a normal symbol win), normal electric device operation completed (the state at the point when operation of the electric chute due to a normal symbol win has ended), and normal electric ED (the state after operation of the electric chute has ended due to a normal symbol win). Also, Figure 59(a) shows the results of the normal symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the normal symbol starting hole 228, divided into win and loss cases.

When the normal power operation gate 228g is in a standby state and the normal symbol is in a standby state or a changing normal symbol state, a gaming ball that passes through the normal power operation gate 228g is treated as valid.

When the normal power operation gate 228g is in a standby state and a winning normal symbol is displayed, a gaming ball that passes through the normal power operation gate 228g is treated as invalid. In other words, a winning normal symbol lottery takes priority. On the other hand, when a gaming ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g while a losing normal symbol is displayed, its passage is treated as valid.

In the normal electric opening, when the normal electric device is in operation, when the normal electric device has finished operating, and in the normal ending, the normal symbol is considered a winning symbol, so any game ball that passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g is treated as having been invalidated. In other words, the operation of the electric chute due to a winning normal symbol lottery currently being held takes priority. Note that there are no losing cases in the normal electric opening, when the normal electric device is in operation, when the normal electric device has finished operating, and in the normal ending, so these are marked with a diagonal line.

Furthermore, if the processing status of the normal electric operation gate 228g is normal electric OP, normal electric device in operation, or normal electric device operation finished, regardless of the processing status of the normal symbol, the passage of a game ball that passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g will be treated as invalid. In other words, if the electric chute is activated based on the passage through the normal electric operation gate 228g, the next passage through the normal electric operation gate 228g will be treated as invalid.

Next, with reference to Figure 59 (b), we will explain how to handle Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 when they are fluctuating simultaneously. Diagonal lines represent combinations that are impossible in the first place. As mentioned above, there are no misses for Special Chart 1. Furthermore, if Special Chart 2 lands on Special Chart 1 during a jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot will not be selected on Special Chart 1 and it will be a miss, and if Special Chart 1 lands on Special Chart 2 during a jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot will not be selected on Special Chart 2 and it will be a miss. Therefore, it is impossible for Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 to be jackpots at the same time. Furthermore, horizontal bars indicate that special control will not be executed.

As shown in Figure 59 (b), if Special Chart 1 stops displaying a jackpot or small jackpot while both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 are displaying a jackpot, the display result of Special Chart 2 during the jackpot display is discarded and a losing symbol is displayed. Also, for example, if Special Chart 1 wins while Special Chart 2 is displaying a jackpot, Special Chart 1 will not select a jackpot and will result in a loss, causing a losing symbol to be displayed on Special Chart 1 and the jackpot Special Chart 2 display to continue as normal. As will be explained later, when a jackpot symbol is displayed on Special Chart 2, the display of the losing Special Chart 1 is interrupted. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the display of the losing Special Chart 1 will resume, and the display of the losing Special Chart 2 may begin with the display of the losing Special Chart 1 symbol resumed. In this case, when a losing symbol is displayed on Special Chart 1, the display of the losing Special Chart 2 will continue as normal.

On the other hand, if Special Chart 2 stops displaying due to a big or small win while both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 are displaying a changing pattern, the display of Special Chart 1 will be interrupted, and the display will resume once the big or small win game has ended. Note that the display will not be interrupted for time-saving patterns selected only on Special Chart 2 in the time-saving play state c.

Next, with reference to Figure 59 (c), we will explain how to handle the situation when a gaming ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g while the normal map is changing.

As shown in Figure 59 (c), if a game ball enters the normal map start port 228 and passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g while the normal map is being displayed, the normal map being displayed will be interrupted regardless of the display result, and the display of the normal map will resume when the opening and closing operation of the electric chute shutter member 2311 based on the game ball passing through the normal electric operation gate 228g is completed.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. Figure 60 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of Figure 60 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S301. This initialization processing includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization processing of the memory area in RAM 408.

In step S303, which follows step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, the timer variable is assigned a value of 0.

In step S307, which follows step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, which follows step S307, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S307, processing such as reading performance data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is performed.

In step S311, which follows step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control processing, operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190, depending on the detection result.

In step S313, the step following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315, which follows step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains commands for the various lamps 442, 452, these commands are output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450.

In step S317, which follows step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command for the first performance movable unit 7 at the top shown in Figure 50 or the second performance movable unit 8 hidden at the rear, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319, the next step after step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command. Then, processing returns to step S303.

Figure 60 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Figure 60 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S343, the next step after step S341, the control command set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and other processes such as updating random number values for performance are performed.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. Figure 61 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of Figure 61 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S401. This initialization processing includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization processing of the memory area in RAM (not shown).

In step S403, which follows step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, the timer variable is assigned a value of 0.

In step S407, which follows step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, which follows step S407, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S407, processing such as reading the performance data corresponding to this command (performance data from the decorative pattern display device 208) from ROM (not shown) is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is performed.

In step S411, the step following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the performance data read in step S409 contains a command to the VDP 516, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, processing returns to step S403.

Figure 61 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM.

Figure 61 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S443, which follows step S441, other processing such as updating random number values for presentation purposes is performed.

Figure 61 (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main processing. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, described below). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 in VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (source address in ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (destination address in VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453, which follows step S451, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455; if not (step S453: No), the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on image data information (such as VRAM 518 coordinate axes, image size, and VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates)) that constitutes the display image in order to form a display image in frame buffer 1 or 2 of VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to VRAM 518 in step S451. The VDP 516 sets parameters in accordance with the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S457, the next step after step S455, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S459, the step following step S457, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the completion of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), the process proceeds to step S461; if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and processing ends.

Next, the flow of the game according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 62. Note that this explains the normal flow of the game, and may not explain irregular flow.

The first game state is (1) the normal game state, i.e., the non-time-saving state. In this game state, left-handed play is recommended, and the gameplay revolves around the normal map changing display when the game ball enters the normal map starting slot 228.

Then, when the normal map display shows a win (normal map A) as a result of the change (A), (2) a normal map win game is executed, and the shutter member 2311 of the special map 1 starting port 231 advances for a predetermined time as described above.

In normal winning mode, when a game ball enters the special game ball 1 starting port 231 (B), the variable display of special game ball 1 begins, and a big win or small win symbol is displayed. When a small win symbol is displayed, the first variable winning port 234 opens, allowing a game ball to enter. When the game ball that entered the first variable winning port 234 passes through the specific area 234v (3), a big win occurs, and the big win game begins. On the other hand, when a big win symbol is displayed, a big win occurs without the first variable winning port 234 being opened, and the big win game begins.

When the initial jackpot play ends, the game will transition to one of two routes depending on the symbol on Special Chart 1. Specifically, if "Special Chart d" appears on Special Chart 1, indicating a small jackpot, and if the small jackpot leads to a jackpot, after the jackpot play related to that jackpot ends (C), the game will not transition to the time-saving play state, but will transition to (1) the normal play state. If a jackpot is achieved with any other symbol, after the jackpot play related to that jackpot ends (D), the game will transition to the a2 time-saving play state described above (4), which makes it easier to win at Special Chart 1 starting hole 231, and the game ball will immediately pass through the normal power operation gate 228g, making it possible to win at Special Chart 1 starting hole 231 without any symbol change. In the a2 time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of special chart 1 is the shortest of the multiple types of fluctuation times (i.e., a fluctuation time shorter than that of special chart 2 (e.g., 0.2 seconds)), so the fluctuation display result of special chart 1 is displayed in priority to special chart 2 (E), and (5) a big hit or small hit occurs in a short time. As a result, two big hit games may be played seamlessly. In the a2 time-saving game state, there may be multiple fluctuation times for special chart 1, or there may be only one, but in either case, it is sufficient that the fluctuation time is shorter than any of the fluctuation times of the multiple special charts 2. It is also sufficient that the fluctuation time is shorter than any of the fluctuation times of the multiple normal charts. In addition, if there are multiple fluctuation times for special chart 1, the average of the fluctuation times of the multiple special charts 1 may be shorter than the average of the fluctuation times of the multiple special charts 2 (normal charts).

When the second or subsequent jackpot play ends, the game will transition to one of two routes depending on the symbol on Special Chart 1. In this case, the special chart determination table for a jackpot or sudden time-saving win in the time-saving play state a, or the special chart determination table for a small win in the time-saving play state a, shown in Figures 56 (c) and 57 (b), is referenced. Specifically, if "Special Chart A" appears on Special Chart 1, indicating a jackpot, or "Special Chart A" appears, indicating a small win, and the jackpot is reached via the small win, when the jackpot play ends (F), (6) the game will transition to the time-saving play state a2, and this will continue until the symbol change display on Special Chart 1 has started five times or the symbol change display on Special Chart 2 has started twice. In this case, too, the game enters a time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to land on Special Chart 1, so the variable display result of Special Chart 1 is displayed in priority to Special Chart 2 (G), and (5) another big hit or small hit occurs in a short period of time (1G consecutive).

On the other hand, if "Special Chart B" or "Special Chart C" appears on Special Chart 1, indicating a small win, and then a big win is reached via the small win, once the big win play ends (H), (7) the game transitions to the a2 time-saving play state, which continues until either the symbol change display of Special Chart 1 begins once or the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 begins once. In most cases, since Special Chart 2 is reserved during a big win, when the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 begins for the first time, the a2 time-saving play state ends (I), and (8) the game transitions to the normal play state. However, since the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 during play is determined by lottery in the a time-saving play state, in most cases the time-saving symbol will be selected, as shown in Figure 56(a). Therefore, when the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 results in the time-saving symbol (Special Chart E) being displayed (J), (9) the game transitions to the RUSH state, which is the c time-saving play state. Furthermore, if "Special Chart d" appears on Special Chart 1, resulting in a small win, and then that small win leads to a big win, when the big win game ends (H), (7) the game will transition to the a1 time-saving game state, which will continue until the pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins once or the pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins once. In other words, the game will operate in substantially the same way as the a2 time-saving game state, which is transitioned to after the big win game that was transitioned to due to the display of "Special Chart b" or "Special Chart c" ends.

In the c time-saving play state (RUSH state), the gameplay is centered around the pattern change display of special symbol 2. The c time-saving play state continues until the pattern change display of special symbol 1 has started once or the pattern change display of special symbol 2 has started 144 times. Therefore, in the c time-saving play state, the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win is won in the c time-saving play state or the special symbol determination table for when a small win is won in the c time-saving play state shown in Figures 56 (d) and 57 (c) is referenced until the pattern change display of special symbol 2 has started 144 times. Specifically, if "Special Chart B" or "Special Chart C" is displayed on Special Chart 2 and a jackpot occurs (N), a 10R jackpot game is executed (3), and when the jackpot game ends (D), (4) the game transitions to a2 time-saving game state, which continues until the pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins five times or the pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins two times.

On the other hand, if "Special Chart D" appears on Special Chart 2, indicating a jackpot, or if "Special Chart e," "Special Chart f," or "Special Chart g" appears, indicating a small jackpot, and then a 10R or 2R jackpot is reached via the small jackpot (K), (10) when the jackpot game ends (L), (7) the game will transition to the a1 time-saving game state, which will continue until the symbol change display for Special Chart 1 begins once or the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 begins once (I), after which (8) the game will transition to the normal game state. As mentioned above, in this normal game state, the symbol change display for Special Chart 2, which is usually the trigger for the end of the a1 time-saving game state, is executed, and Special Chart E will be selected as the result of the jackpot lottery for Special Chart 2 (unless a jackpot is reached), and the game will immediately transition to the c time-saving game state (J). Additionally, when the 144th symbol change display by special symbol 2 ends during the time-saving c game mode, the time-saving c game mode ends (M) and the game transitions to the normal game mode (1).

In the game flow according to this embodiment described above, in normal game mode, gameplay is centered around the variable display of the normal symbol, in c time-saving game mode (RUSH mode), gameplay is centered around the variable display of special 2, and when a normal symbol wins in normal game mode or when the normal symbol passes through the normal power activation gate 228g (1G consecutive) in a2 time-saving game mode where the number of time-saving times is set to 5 (special symbol 1), in other words, when the shutter member 2311 is open in a manner allowing entry into the special symbol 1 starting port 231, gameplay is centered around the variable display of special 1.

Next, we will explain specific examples of effects that are executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment.

Figure 63 is a diagram showing an example of a staged effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

Figure 63 shows the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal pattern display device 210, the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern hold lamp 216, and the special pattern 2 hold lamp 220.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 63(a) displays a static decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7." Note that the background here is not displayed, but a default background image, which will be described later, is displayed. In the following explanation, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may also be displayed.

The decorative pattern display device 208 has a fourth pattern display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern display area 284 is an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing (or a pattern is stopped), and from top to bottom is an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing for a normal pattern, an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing for a special pattern 1, and an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing for a special pattern 2. When a normal pattern is stopped, a circle or cross symbol is displayed lit up, but when a normal pattern is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. When a special pattern 1 is stopped, a circle or cross symbol is displayed lit up, but when a special pattern 1 is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. When a special pattern 2 is stopped, a circle, cross or triangle symbol is displayed lit up, but when a special pattern 2 is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. In this way, not only does the fourth symbol have a different display position, but the display format (here, shape) also differs, allowing the player to distinguish it at a glance. Note that advance notice may be given by changing the display format, lighting format, or blinking format of the fourth symbol.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 has a variable icon display area 280 located at the bottom center of the performance display area 208d.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in Figure 63 is a non-time-saving game state. In this non-time-saving game state, the decorative pattern display device 208 has a normal symbol hold icon display area 281 to the left of the variable icon display area 280. Note that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 in the non-time-saving game state, the hold icon display areas for special symbols 1 and 2 are not explicitly shown, but hold icon display areas for special symbols 1 and 2 may also be provided.

The reserve icon display area 281 for regular maps displays reserve icons representing reserves for regular maps. The number of reserves for regular maps is represented by the number of lit regular map reserve lamps 216 as well as the number of reserve icons for regular maps, and the number of reserves for special map 2 is represented by the number of lit special map 2 reserve lamps 220. It may also be represented by the number of reserve icons for special map 2. In other words, the reserve icons correspond to the start information stored in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the reserve icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first reserve icon, the reserve icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second reserve icon, and so on. In the reserve icon display area 281 for regular maps, reserve icons are displayed side by side, with the reserve icon on the right being the oldest winning icon. In this embodiment, special map 1 is not reserved, so no reserve icon is displayed, but this may be done.

In Figure 63(a), two regular map hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the regular map hold icon display area 281, and these two regular map hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode). In other words, the default hold icon for regular maps is a round hold icon. Note that in Figure 63(a), to make it easier to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the regular map hold icon display area 281, hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown with dotted lines.

On the other hand, no hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area of Special Chart 2. This is because, as mentioned above, the control state (game state) shown in Figure 63 is a non-time-saving game state, and therefore winning at Special Chart 2 start port 232 is not recommended.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the reserve icon display area for the normal or special 2 symbol that is more likely to result in a win is displayed depending on the control state (game state). That is, when the control state is a non-time-saving game state, the reserve icon display area 281 for the normal symbol is displayed in the effect display area 208d, as shown in FIG. 63(a), and when the control state is a time-saving game state, conversely, the reserve icon display area 282 for the special 2 symbol may be displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the regular map and the default display mode of the hold icon in the special map 2 may be the same, or they may be different display modes.

In this embodiment, the display of the pattern change for the normal or special pattern begins in the following order: change begins on the special pattern display device or normal pattern display device → the fourth pattern starts flashing or goes out → the pending icon movement animation starts or disappears → the decorative pattern starts changing; however, this order may be reversed.

In Figure 63 (b), the display of the pattern change on the normal map begins, the pattern change begins on the normal map display device 210, and the fourth pattern goes off, but no change has yet occurred to the reserved icon or decorative pattern.

In Figure 63 (c), the animation of the movement of the regular reserved icons h11 and h12 has begun. In this animation, the reserved icon (the reserved icon subject to this pattern change) that was in the display position of the first reserved icon h11 begins to move towards the changing icon display area 280, and the reserved icon that was in the display position of the second reserved icon h12 begins to move towards the display position of the first reserved icon h11 on the regular map. At this stage, the display of the decorative pattern change has not begun.

In Figure 63 (d), the movement animation continues, and in Figure 63 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the change began reaches the hold icon display area 280 and is displayed as the hold icon h0, and the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the change began reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but even at this stage the display of the decorative pattern change has not yet begun. Note that when the pattern change begins in the general pattern display device 210, the hold icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the hold icon h0, and the hold icon that was previously the second hold icon h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, the decorative pattern begins to change as shown in Figure 63 (f).

As shown in FIG. 63(g), when the decorative pattern display device 208 begins displaying the decorative pattern changes, an operation prompt notification image 136P is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 to encourage the player to press the effect button 136 within the valid period. This operation prompt notification image 136P displays an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period to the right of the main character image. Although the decorative pattern changes are hidden by the operation prompt notification image 136P, the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284, etc. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation prompt notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in Figure 63(h), the valid period is decreasing, and in Figure 63(i), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in Figure 63(j), a reach state entry notification image 2071 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in place of the operation prompt notification image 136P. In the reach state entry notification image 2071, the words "It's your chance!!" are displayed to the right of the main character's character image.

In Figure 63 (k), the reach state entry warning image 2071 disappears, the changing display of the decorative symbols becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in the same figure (l). Note that even if the reach state entry warning image 207 is displayed, there are cases where the reach state is not entered, but it is also possible to set it so that the reach state is always entered.

As explained above, the appearance of the operation prompt notification image 136P corresponds to a performance that triggers a notice regarding the currently occurring pattern change display.

In Figure 63(m), the background image has been switched from the default background image to hidden, and the variable icon display area 280 and the regular reserved icon display area 281 have disappeared. The fourth pattern display area 284 is still displayed. In addition, the variable decorative pattern displays that had previously been displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c have been moved to the bottom right corner and reduced in size, and in Figure 63(n), this has developed into a special reach (swordsman reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 63(n) displays a large image of the villainous swordsman, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the following Figure (o) displays an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist lord and the villainous swordsman.

Note that the reach state entry warning image 2071 may not only be a warning that the reach state will be entered, but may also be a warning that the game will progress to an SP reach.

Figure 64 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example of the effect shown in Figure 63.

Continuing from Figure 63(o), Figure 64(p) shows the continuation of the duel scene animation, which continues until Figure 64(s). In Figure 64(s), the lord, the protagonist, defeats the villain, the master swordsman, and in Figure 64(t), everything except the fourth symbol display area 284 is temporarily hidden. Note that instead of being hidden, a different background image may be displayed. Alternatively, a setting suggestion may be displayed in this scene. Eventually, as shown in Figure 63(u), a fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be hidden, or may be a different background image from before. Furthermore, the variable icon display area 280 and the regular reserved icon display area 281 remain hidden, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 64(v) displays a static display of the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7." Also, the fourth symbol (a round symbol) of the normal symbol shown in Figure 64(v) is lit. In Figure 64(v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in Figure 64(w), the word "Jackpot" is displayed along with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the jackpot as the jackpot game start effect. Note that a display including setting suggestions may be displayed during the jackpot game start effect shown in Figure 64(w). In this case, a display including setting suggestions may be displayed only when a jackpot that satisfies certain conditions occurs (e.g., only when it is the first jackpot after power-on, only when five or more consecutive jackpots occur, or only when it is the jackpot with the largest number of balls out of multiple jackpots with different payouts (e.g., a 10R jackpot, etc.)).

Figure 65 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of a different presentation following Figure 64 (q).

In Figure 65(a), the animation of the duel scene that began in Figure 63(o) continues, and this animation continues until Figure 65(b). In Figure 65(b), the main character, the lord, is defeated by the villain, the master swordsman. In Figure 65(c), as in Figure 64(t), everything except the fourth symbol display area 284 is temporarily hidden. Note that in this scene, a setting suggestion display may be displayed. This may, for example, create a sense of anticipation regarding the setting while the player is feeling disappointed after missing the SP reach. Eventually, in Figure 65(d), the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" begins to fluctuate. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the normal symbol pending icon display area 281 is restored, and the variable icon h0 and the normal symbol's first pending icon h11 are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 65 (e), the fourth pattern (circular pattern) of the regular map is lit, and the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed frozen. Next, during the period when the regular map is displayed as confirmed, an animation for the disappearance of the variable icon h0 is executed in the variable icon display area 280. In Figure 65 (f), the animation for the disappearance of the variable icon h0 begins, and in Figure 65 (g), the animation for the disappearance continues, and in Figure 65 (h), the variable icon h0 has completely disappeared. Note that the animation for the disappearance of the variable icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the regular map is performed.

Figure 66 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of a presentation centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. Note that Figure 66 omits the illustration of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the special symbol 2 hold lamp 220.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 66(a) displays the changes in the decorative patterns. Also, in the state shown in Figure 66(a), the changes in the normal pattern are displayed, and both Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2 are displayed stationary. To indicate this, the fourth pattern of the normal pattern is displayed flashing in the fourth pattern display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the fourth patterns of Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2 are displayed lit.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in Figure 66 is a non-time-saving game state, a regular pending icon display area 281 is provided to the left of the variable icon display area 280.

The regular map hold icon display area 281 displays hold icons representing regular map holds. The number of regular map holds is represented by the number of regular map hold icons in addition to the number of lit regular map hold lamps 216, and the number of special map 2 hold lamps 220. The number may also be represented by the number of special map 2 hold icons. In other words, the hold icons correspond to the start information stored in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second hold icon, and so on. In the regular map hold icon display area 281, hold icons are displayed side by side, with the hold icon on the right being the hold icon with the oldest winning. In Figure 66(a), the number of regular map holds is 0, so no regular map hold icons are displayed in the regular map hold icon display area 281.

Then, at the timing shown in Figure 66(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4," and the display result of the normal win is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Additionally, in the fourth symbol display area 284, a circle symbol indicating a normal win is displayed.

When a normal winning game begins, the shutter member 2311 of the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 advances, making it easier to win at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66(c) displays a right-hit display U4 in the center of the display screen to encourage right-hit, promoting winning at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. In addition, a right-hit display is also displayed on the left side of the fourth symbol display area 284. At this time, it is also possible to display a presentation regarding the number of prize balls that can be expected to be won in this jackpot (for example, a suggestion of a 1500-ball jackpot, a suggestion of a 3000-ball jackpot, or a presentation to tease whether it is a 1500-ball or a 3000-ball jackpot). Furthermore, at the timing shown in Figure 66 (c), a game ball enters the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, the display of the changing special symbol 1 symbol begins, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284 begins to flash a "-" symbol, indicating that the changing special symbol 1 symbol is being displayed.

After that, when a predetermined variation time for special symbol 1 (e.g., 0.2 seconds) has elapsed, special symbol 1 is displayed as stopped. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 66 (d), the display result of special symbol 1 is a small win, so a triangular symbol is displayed as stopped in the display area of special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284, indicating that a small win has occurred. When a small win occurs, the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and when the gaming ball enters this first variable winning opening 234 and passes through the specific area 234v, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game begins. Note that Figure 66 (e) shows the situation in which the gaming ball passes through the specific area 234v during small win gameplay, resulting in a jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 66(e) displays a background (jackpot background) indicating a jackpot, and the number of prize balls acquired since the first jackpot is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the lower center of the display screen displays the number of prize balls expected to be acquired in the current jackpot and the number of prize balls acquired since the first jackpot. At the timing shown in Figure 66(e), one game ball enters the first variable prize opening 234, so 15 prize balls are paid out. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays "+15" in the upper center, indicating the number of prize balls associated with the win, and adds "15" to the number of prize balls acquired. After that, when 10 game balls enter the first variable prize opening 234, the first variable prize opening 234 is closed. Next, the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 retracts, opening the second variable winning opening 235 and starting a round of play. In this case, the game in which the first variable winning opening 234 opens is counted as the first round, so the first game in which the second variable winning opening 235 opens is the second round of play.

Figure 66 (f) shows the end of the first jackpot game. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the number of prize balls won since the first jackpot, as 1,500 balls have been won, and also displays "TOTAL 01,500pt" in the display of the number of prize balls won, with "1,500/3,000" also displayed in the lower center. Also, in the center of the display screen, a message is displayed warning players to avoid becoming addicted and forgetting to remove their prepaid card: "Be careful not to get addicted. If you forget to remove your card, please stop." This warning message is displayed after each jackpot game, but it may also be displayed only at the end of the jackpot game related to the first jackpot.

After that, when the game transitions to the a2 time-saving game state, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 66 (g) displays "Please hit right," instructing the player to continue hitting right, indicating that the game has transitioned to the time-saving game state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(h), when the gaming ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g and enters the special chart 2 starting hole 232, the variable display of special chart 2 begins, while the shutter member 2311 of the special chart 1 starting hole 231 advances upon passing through the normal power activation gate 228g, making it easier for the ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231. In other words, in this embodiment, the shutter member 2311 is configured to be activated when triggered by either a normal winning or the gaming ball passing through the normal power activation gate 228g. Note that in the a2 time-saving gaming state, as described above, the operating time of the shutter member 2311 is longer (e.g., 5,800 ms), making it easier for the ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231 and the variable display of special chart 1 begin. The number of winning balls also continues to be displayed. In this embodiment, only the number of prize balls acquired by winning through the first variable prize slot 234 and the second variable prize slot 235 is displayed in the number of prize balls acquired display; however, the number of prize balls acquired by winning through other prize slots (for example, the general prize slot or the starting slot) may also be added to the number of prize balls acquired display. Also, in this embodiment, since the time between the end of the first jackpot and the start of the second jackpot is short, the jackpot background is also continuously displayed. In other words, ending and opening effects are not executed.

After that, at the timing shown in Figure 66(i), a gaming ball enters the special symbol 1 start port 231, and the display of the special symbol 1 change is shown to have begun. Note that in this embodiment, since the machine is a simultaneous change machine that can change special symbols 1 and 2 simultaneously, the display of the special symbol 1 change begins without waiting for the change of special symbol 2 to stop. Note that in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 66(i), the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 is four, and the fourth symbol display area 284 indicates that the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 is four. Note that in this embodiment, the display of the special symbol 1 change is not reserved, so even if multiple gaming balls enter the special symbol 1 start port 231, only the prize balls are paid out and the display of the symbol change is not reserved.

After that, as shown in Figure 66 (j), when special symbol 1 stops and a small win symbol (for example, "special symbol b") is displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and when the game ball enters the opened first variable winning opening 234 and passes through the specific area 234v, the second big win game begins in the same manner as the first big win. Note that in this embodiment, when special symbol 1 stops and the variable display of special symbol 2 is discarded and a losing symbol is displayed.

Figure 66 (k) shows the end of the second jackpot game. The second jackpot occurred because Special Chart 1 stopped at "Special Chart B" during the A2 time-saving game state, and so after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to the A2 time-saving game state. However, when the first symbol change display for Special Chart 1 or the first symbol change display for Special Chart 2 begins, this A2 time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, after the jackpot game ends, the reserved symbol for Special Chart 2 is consumed and the change display for Special Chart 2 begins, effectively transitioning to the non-time-saving game state, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the Special Chart 1 starting hole 231. However, the first symbol change display of Special Chart 2 that is consumed after this jackpot game has ended is drawn using the judgment table for the a2 time-saving game state (see Figures 56(c) and 57(b)), so the change time is relatively short (for example, 5 seconds) and in most cases the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary, resulting in a transition to time-saving game state c. Therefore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 66(k) displays the words "Entering Ox/X RUSH!!" indicating a transition to time-saving game state c, suggesting a transition to time-saving game state c.

At the timing shown in Figure 66 (l), the reserved Special Chart 2 is consumed and the first symbol change display begins. At this time, the word "Ready" is displayed, amplifying the player's sense of anticipation for the transition to time-saving game state c. Note that at this timing, the game state is in a non-time-saving game state, but because the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 shown in Figure 66 (l) began in time-saving game state a, the right-hit display continues.

After that, as shown in Figure 66 (m), when the symbol fluctuation display of Special Symbol 2 ends and the time-saving symbol ("Special Symbol E") stops, a star is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 284 to indicate that the time-saving symbol has stopped. Also, at this time, the word "GO" is displayed in the center of the display screen, notifying the player that the game has transitioned to time-saving game state c. As mentioned above, in time-saving game state c, the operating time of the shutter member 2311 of the Special Symbol 1 start port 231 is extremely short (e.g., 45 ms), making it difficult to win on Special Symbol 1; however, because a fluctuation time with a short fluctuation display time for Special Symbol 2 is likely to be selected, it may be possible to play while minimizing the loss of balls in the player's possession.

Figure 66(n) shows the state in which the time-saving c game state has begun and the symbol change display of special symbol 2 has begun. When the time-saving c game state is entered, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a "RUSH TIME display" in the upper center of the display screen, which indicates the execution time of the time-saving c game state, and also displays the number of symbol changes remaining until the time-saving c game state ends in the lower left corner of the display screen. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 66(n) indicates that 0.18 seconds have passed since the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) began, and that the number of symbol changes remaining until the time-saving c game state ends is 143.

In addition, when the c time-saving game state begins, decorative symbols for the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed, and a mini symbol is also displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a variable icon display area 280 in the lower center of the performance display area 208d, and a special pattern 2 hold icon display area 282 to the right of that. The special pattern 2 hold icon display area 282 displays hold icons representing holds for special pattern 2. The number of holds for special pattern 2 is represented by the number of lit special pattern 2 hold lamps 220 as well as the number of hold icons for special pattern 2. In the special pattern 2 hold icon display area 282, hold icons are displayed side by side, with the hold icons on the left being the hold icons with the oldest winning entries.

In Figure 66 (n), four special chart hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the special chart 2 hold icon display area 282, and all four of these special chart 2 hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode). In other words, the default hold icon for special chart 2 is a round hold icon.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 66(o), special symbol 2 stops at the losing symbol ("special symbol i"), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7," indicating that the display result is a losing symbol. The variable icon h0 also disappears. The fourth symbol display area 284 also displays special symbol 2 as a stopped cross, indicating that the display result is a losing symbol. At this time, the "RUSH TIME" display shows "00:01:98," indicating that 1.98 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving c game mode. While this "RUSH TIME" display shows the time since the time-saving c game mode began, the progression of time may be suspended during standby mode when no symbol variation display is being performed. It may also be displayed from the start of the first jackpot game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 66 (p) displays the state in which one reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 has been consumed and the symbol variation display for Special Symbol 2 has begun. At this time, the reserved symbols h21, h22, h23, and h24 for Special Symbol 2 are each displayed moving using a moving animation. The reserved symbol at the display position of the first reserved symbol h21 moves to the variable symbol display area 280 and becomes variable symbol h0. The reserved symbol at the display position of the second reserved symbol h22 becomes the first reserved symbol h21 for Special Symbol 2. The reserved symbol at the display position of the third reserved symbol h23 becomes the second reserved symbol h22 for Special Symbol 2. The reserved symbol at the display position of the fourth reserved symbol h24 becomes the third reserved symbol h23 for Special Symbol 2. The decorative symbol variation display then begins. At this time, the "RUSH TIME" display shows "00:02:37," indicating that 2.37 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving game mode c. It also notifies the player that the number of symbol changes until the time-saving game mode c ends is 142.

Figure 67 shows a step-by-step example of the presentation that occurs when a jackpot symbol stops and appears on Special Chart 2 during the c time-saving game mode (RUSH mode), resulting in a jackpot.

Figure 67(a) shows how the symbol change display of special symbol 2 has been performed 44 times since the transition to time-saving play state c. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 67(a) is displaying the decorative symbol change. Also, in the state shown in Figure 67(a), the special symbol 2 change display is being performed, and both the normal symbol and special symbol 1 are displayed as still symbols. To indicate this, the fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 flashing, and the fourth symbols of the normal symbol and special symbol 1 are displayed as lit symbols.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in Figure 67 (a) is the time-saving game state c, a special chart 2 reserve icon display area 282 is provided to the right of the variable icon display area 280. Reserve icons representing reserves for special chart 2 are displayed in the special chart 2 reserve icon display area 282. The number of reserves for special chart 2 is represented by the number of lit special chart 2 reserve lamps 220 as well as the number of reserve icons for special chart 2. In the special chart 2 reserve icon display area 282, reserve icons are displayed side by side, with the reserve icons on the left being the reserve icons with the oldest winnings.

In Figure 67 (a), four special chart hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the special chart 2 hold icon display area 282, and all four of these special chart 2 hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode). In other words, the default hold icon for special chart 2 is a round hold icon.

Furthermore, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 67(a), the "RUSH TIME" display is "00:46:10," indicating that 46.1 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving c game state. Furthermore, the number of times the special symbol 2 will change display until the time-saving c game state ends is "100 times."

After that, as shown in Figure 67(b), Special Chart 2 stops and displays the jackpot symbol ("Special Chart B"), and at the same time, it stops and displays the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Additionally, Special Chart 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 also stops and displays a circle, indicating a jackpot. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Furthermore, the "RUSH TIME" display shows "01:30:00", indicating that 1 minute and 30 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving game mode c.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 67(c) displays "3000pt Jackpot!!" in the center of the display screen, indicating that two jackpots will occur. A right-hit display encouraging continued right-hit play is also displayed in the lower center of the display screen. The "RUSH TIME" display shows "01:40:87," indicating that 1 minute, 40 seconds, and 87 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving c game mode. When the jackpot game begins, the first variable winning slot 234 is not opened, and the second variable winning slot 235 is opened, starting the first round. After that, the effects shown in Figures 67(d) to 67(h) are performed. The effects shown in Figures 67(d) to 67(h) are similar to those shown in Figures 66(f) to 66(j), and therefore will not be described here.

Figure 67(i) shows a situation in which a gaming ball passes through a specific area 234v during a small jackpot game, resulting in a jackpot. At the timing shown in Figure 66(e), one gaming ball enters the first variable winning opening 234, resulting in the dispensing of 15 prize balls. At the same time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "+15" in the upper center, indicating the number of winning balls involved. Also, "15" is added to the number of winning balls, resulting in the display of "TOTAL 04515pt." After that, when the entry of 10 gaming balls into the first variable winning opening 234 is detected, the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. Next, the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 retracts, opening the second variable winning opening 235 and commencing the round of play.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 67(j) shows an in-animation in which translucent button images move from the left and right sides of the display screen to the center. This can create a sense of anticipation as to whether or not a button effect will begin. If the button effect does not begin, the translucent button images do not merge, and instead frame out of the screen. At the timing shown in Figure 67(j), the total number of prize balls acquired is displayed as "04665pt," indicating that 4665 prize balls have been acquired since the first jackpot. The number of prize balls acquired in the lower center is displayed as "1665/3000," indicating that 1665 prize balls have been acquired since the previous jackpot. The "RUSH TIME" display continues to progress, showing "02:34:87," indicating that 2 minutes, 34 seconds, and 87 seconds have passed since the initial c-time-saving game state began.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 67 (k), a pair of translucent button images merge in the center, the button effect begins, a remaining time display bar is displayed along with the button image, and the words "Press!" are displayed to encourage the player to operate the effect button 136.

When the player then operates the effect button 136, as shown in Figure 67(l), the letter "V" appears along with the words "Added!!," indicating that one more jackpot is available. On the other hand, the button effect may also be performed even if there is no additional jackpot. In this case, for example, a message such as "Sorry" may be displayed to indicate that there is no additional jackpot. Furthermore, the button effect may always be performed during a jackpot game, or it may be performed in some cases and not in others. At the timing shown in Figure 67(l), the total number of prize balls acquired is displayed as "04710pt," indicating that 4710 prize balls have been acquired since the first jackpot. The number of prize balls acquired in the lower center is displayed as "1710/4500," indicating that 1710 prize balls have been acquired since the previous jackpot and the number of prize balls (4500) that can be expected to be acquired in three jackpots. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be won is updated to indicate an additional jackpot, but instead the number of rounds may be displayed and the additional rounds may be displayed to indicate an additional jackpot. Also, while the "V" display is set to disappear after a predetermined time has elapsed, it may be set to continue to be displayed until the jackpot game related to the additional jackpot has ended. Furthermore, the "RUSH TIME" display continues to progress and shows "02:35:87," indicating that 2 minutes, 35 seconds, and 87 seconds have passed since the initial c-time-saving game mode began.

Then, the jackpot game shown in Figure 67(m) continues, and the effects shown in Figures 67(n) to 67(r) are played. Note that the effects shown in Figures 67(n) to 67(r) are similar to the effects shown in Figures 67(d) to 67(h), so a description of them will be omitted.

In the above description,
"A first starting winning means [for example, a normal starting gate 228, etc.],
A first symbol display means (e.g., a general symbol display device 210, etc.) capable of executing a first symbol change display when a game ball enters the first start winning means;
When a winning symbol [for example, "normal symbol A"] is displayed in the first symbol change display, a certain electric device [for example, shutter member 2311] that can change from a first state [for example, closed state] to a second state [for example, open state],
an actuated gate [e.g., a normally-operated gate 228g, etc.];
a first playing area (e.g., a left playing area, etc.);
A gaming machine having a second gaming area (for example, a right gaming area) that is different from the first gaming area,
When the game ball passes through the operating gate, the certain electric device can change from the first state to the second state (for example, when the game ball passes through the normal electric operating gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 is activated and advances, making it easier for the game ball to enter the special drawing 1 starting hole 231, etc.),
The first start winning means is a winning means arranged in the first game area (for example, as shown in FIG. 50, the start opening 228 is arranged in the center of the game board 200, and a game ball flowing down the game area on the left side can win a prize, etc.),
The certain electric device is a device arranged in the second play area (for example, as shown in Figures 50 and 51, the shutter member 2311 is arranged in the play area on the right side),
The operating gate is a gate located in the second play area (for example, as shown in Figures 50 and 51, the normally powered operating gate 228g is located in the play area on the right side).

While conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in terms of playability, this gaming machine can provide a gaming machine with unique playability.

Furthermore, this gaming machine may be able to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay features, allowing the first starting winning means and the operating gate to activate a common device.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of only displaying the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means, or may be capable of displaying other symbols besides the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means. Furthermore, the first symbol display means may always display the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means, or may not always display the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means.

Also, a certain electric device may only be able to change from the first state to the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display, or may be able to change from the first state to a state other than the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display.Also, a certain electric device may always change from the first state to the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display, or may not be able to change from the first state to the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may only be able to change from the first state to the second state, or when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may also be able to change from the first state to a state other than the second state. Further, when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may always change from the first state to the second state, or when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may not always change from the first state to the second state.

Furthermore, the first start winning means may be located only in the first game area, or may be located in an area other than the first game area. Furthermore, the first start winning means may always be located in the first game area, or may not always be located in the first game area.

Furthermore, a certain electric device may be placed only in the second play area, or may be placed in areas other than the second play area. Further, a certain electric device may always be placed in the second play area, or may not be placed in the second play area.

Furthermore, the operating gate may be arranged only in the second play area, or may be arranged in areas other than the second play area. Furthermore, the operating gate may always be arranged in the second play area, or may not always be arranged in the second play area.

Also,
"A second starting winning means [for example, the special drawing 1 starting port 231, etc.] that makes it easier to win when the certain electric device is in the second state,
A third starting winning means [for example, special drawing 2 starting port 232, etc.],
A second pattern display means [for example, a special pattern 1 display device 212, etc.] capable of executing a second pattern change display;
A third pattern display means (e.g., special pattern 2 display device 214, etc.) capable of executing a third pattern change display;
A first variable winning means (e.g., a first variable winning port 234, etc.),
A specific area (e.g., specific area 234v, etc.) through which the gaming ball that has entered the first variable winning means can pass;
A game control means (for example, a CPU 304 in the main control unit 300) capable of executing a small win game and a big win game is provided.
The first variable winning means is a means by which the game ball can enter in the small win game (for example, when a small win occurs in special drawing 1, the first variable winning port 234 opens, making it easier for the ball to enter, etc.),
The game control means is a means capable of transitioning to the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the specific area in the small win game (for example, as shown in Figures 66(d) to 66(e), when a small win occurs on special chart 1 and the game ball passes through the specific area 234v in the small win game related to the small win, the game transitions to the jackpot game, etc.),
The first gaming area is a gaming area in which it is recommended to let the gaming ball flow down in a first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, etc.),
The second game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in a second game state [for example, a time-saving game state, etc.] and a third game state [for example, c time-saving game state, etc.],
the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
the third gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The third gaming state is a gaming state different from the second gaming state,
The second symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the second symbol change display when a game ball enters the second start winning means [for example, when a game ball enters the special symbol 1 start hole 231, the special symbol 1 change display is executed, etc.],
The third symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the third symbol change display when a game ball enters the third start winning means (for example, when a game ball enters the special symbol 2 start hole 232, the special symbol 2 change display is executed, etc.),
The second game state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start winning means than in the first game state (for example, in a time-saving game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special game starting hole 232 than in the normal game state),
The third game state is a game state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the second start winning means than in the second game state (for example, in the c time-saving game state, it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the special chart 2 start hole 232 than in the a time-saving game state),
After the jackpot game that has been transitioned to based on the result of the second pattern change display has ended, there is a case where the game state is transitioned to the second game state or the third game state (for example, if the result of the change display of special pattern 1 is a jackpot or a small jackpot, after the jackpot game that has been transitioned to based on this has ended, there is a case where the game state is transitioned to a time-saving game state or a case where the game state is substantially transitioned to c time-saving game state, etc.),
In the second symbol variable display, the result of a small win is more likely to be displayed than the result of a loss [for example, in the variable display of special symbol 1, the small win symbol is more likely to be displayed than the loss symbol].

This gaming machine may be able to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay that allows consecutive jackpots to be won in a short period of time and can even generate additional jackpots.

Here, the second symbol display means may be capable of only displaying the second symbol variation, or may be capable of displaying other symbols besides the second symbol variation. Furthermore, the second symbol display means may always display the second symbol variation, or may not always display the second symbol variation.

Furthermore, the third pattern display means may be capable of only executing the third pattern variable display, or may be capable of executing displays other than the third pattern variable display. Furthermore, the third pattern display means may always execute the third pattern variable display, or may not execute the third pattern variable display in some cases.

Furthermore, the specific area may be one that only gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means can pass through, or one that only gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means can pass through.Furthermore, the specific area may be one that gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means always pass through, or one that gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means may not pass through.

Furthermore, the game control means may be capable of executing only small hit games and big hit games, or may be capable of executing games other than small hit games and big hit games.Furthermore, the game control means may be capable of always executing small hit games and big hit games, or may be capable of not executing small hit games and big hit games in some cases.

The game control means may be such that a transition to a jackpot game is only possible when a game ball passes through a specific area during a small hit game, or may be such that a transition to a game other than a jackpot game is possible when a game ball passes through a specific area during a small hit game. The game control means may be such that a transition to a jackpot game is always possible when a game ball passes through a specific area during a small hit game, or may be such that a transition to a jackpot game is not possible when a game ball passes through a specific area during a small hit game.

Furthermore, the first game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down only in the first game state, or one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down in game states other than the first game state. Further, the first game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down always in the first game state, or one in which it is not recommended to let game balls flow down in the first game state.

Furthermore, the second game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down only in the second game state and the third game state, or one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down in game states other than the second game state and the third game state. Further, the second game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down always in the second game state and the third game state, or one in which it is not recommended to let game balls flow down in the second game state and the third game state.

Furthermore, the second symbol display means may be capable of only executing the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means, or may be capable of executing displays other than the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means.Furthermore, the second symbol display means may be capable of always executing the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means, or may be capable of not executing the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means.

Furthermore, the third symbol display means may be capable of only displaying the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means, or may be capable of displaying other symbols in addition to the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means.Furthermore, the third symbol display means may always display the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means, or may not always display the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means.

Furthermore, the second gaming state may be one in which it is easier for gaming balls to win only the second start winning means than in the first gaming state, or it may be one in which it is easier for gaming balls to win in winning means other than the second start winning means than in the first gaming state.Furthermore, the second gaming state may be one in which it is always easier for gaming balls to win in the second start winning means than in the first gaming state, or it may be one in which it is sometimes less easier for gaming balls to win in the second start winning means than in the first gaming state.

Furthermore, the third gaming state may be one in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to win only the second start winning means than in the second gaming state, or it may be one in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to win in winning means other than the second start winning means than in the second gaming state.Furthermore, the third gaming state may be one in which it is always more difficult for a gaming ball to win in the second start winning means than in the second gaming state, or it may be one in which it is not always more difficult for a gaming ball to win in the second start winning means than in the second gaming state.

In addition, only after the big win game that was transitioned based on the result of the second pattern change display has ended,
There may be cases where the game state shifts to the second game state and cases where the game state shifts to the third game state, and there may be cases where the game state shifts to the second game state and cases where the game state shifts to the third game state other than after the end of the jackpot game to which the game state shifts based on the result of the second symbol variation display. Also, after the end of the jackpot game to which the game state shifts based on the result of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where the game state shifts to the second game state and cases where the game state shifts to the third game state, and there may be cases where the game state shifts to the second game state and cases where the game state shifts to the third game state does not happen after the end of the jackpot game to which the game state shifts based on the result of the second symbol variation display.

Furthermore, the second pattern changing display may only display a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss, or the second pattern changing display may have cases other than a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss. Further, the second pattern changing display may always display a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss, or the second pattern changing display may not display a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss.

Also,
"The second symbol change display is a symbol change display that can be executed at a change display time selected from a plurality of change display times,
The third symbol variable display is a symbol variable display that can be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times,
In the second gaming state, the second symbol variable display is more likely to have a shorter variable display time [for example, a variable display time of 0.2 seconds] than the third symbol variable display.

With this gaming machine, the change time of the second symbol change display is short, which makes the transition from the first jackpot game to the second jackpot game feel seamless, and may improve the feeling of immediate consecutive wins.

Here, the second symbol variable display may be one that can be executed only at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times, or one that can be executed at a variable display time other than the variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times. Furthermore, the second symbol variable display may be one that is always executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times, or one that may not be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times.

Furthermore, the third pattern variable display may be one that can be executed only at a variable display time selected from multiple variable display times, or one that can be executed at a variable display time other than the variable display time selected from multiple variable display times.Furthermore, the third pattern variable display may be one that is always executed at a variable display time selected from multiple variable display times, or one that may not be executed at a variable display time selected from multiple variable display times.

Furthermore, in the second gaming state, only the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display may be more likely to be selected, or in the second gaming state, variable display times other than the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display may also be more likely to be selected. Further, in the second gaming state, the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display may always be selected, or in the second gaming state, there may be cases where the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display is not selected.

Also,
"Equipped with a display means (e.g., decorative pattern display device 208, etc.) capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display,
When the first pattern change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display may be executed [for example, when the normal pattern change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display is executed, etc.],
When the third pattern change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display may be executed [for example, when the special pattern 2 change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display is executed, etc.],
Even if the second symbol variable display is executed, the decorative symbol variable display is not executed [for example, even if the special symbol 1 variable display is executed, the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, etc.].

With this gaming machine, by not displaying decorative symbol changes during the second symbol change display, it may be possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative pattern change display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the decorative pattern change display. Furthermore, the display means may always display the decorative pattern change display, or may not always display the decorative pattern change display.

Furthermore, when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where only the decorative pattern change display is executed, or when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where displays other than the decorative pattern change display are also executed. Further, when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is always executed, or when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is not executed.

Furthermore, when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where only the decorative pattern change display is executed, or when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where displays other than the decorative pattern change display are also executed. Further, when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is always executed, or when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is not executed.

Furthermore, even if the second pattern change display is executed, it is not necessary for only the decorative pattern change display to be executed, and even if the second pattern change display is executed, it is not necessary for displays other than the decorative pattern change display to be executed. Furthermore, even if the second pattern change display is executed, it is not necessary for the decorative pattern change display to be executed, and even if the second pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is executed.

Also,
We also explained that "a gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a second variable winning means [for example, a second variable winning opening 235, etc.] that can be opened and closed during the jackpot game."

Here, the second variable winning means may be capable of opening and closing only during a jackpot game, or may be capable of opening and closing during games other than a jackpot game. Furthermore, the second variable winning means may be capable of always opening and closing during a jackpot game, or may not always open and close during a jackpot game.

Also,
"Even if a game ball passes through the operating gate during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the certain electric device will be in the second state [for example, during the normal symbol variation display, the normal electric operating gate 22
When the gaming ball passes through the gap 8g, the shutter member 2311 advances even if the normal map is being displayed.

With this gaming machine, even if the first symbol change display is performed between jackpots or during an instant win streak, the activation gate is active, so a certain electric device can be activated without waiting for the first symbol change display to end. This makes the transition to the jackpot game between jackpots feel seamless, which may improve the feel of instant wins.

Here, even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, only a certain electric device may enter the second state, or even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, things other than the certain electric device may enter the second state. Also, even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, a certain electric device may always enter the second state, or even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, a certain electric device may not enter the second state.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized in that, when a gaming ball passes through the operating gate, the certain electric device can change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol variation display."

Here, when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, only a certain electric device may be able to change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display, or when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, devices other than the certain electric device may also be able to change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display. Also, when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, a certain electric device may always change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display, or when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, a certain electric device may not change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display.

Furthermore, in the above description,
"A certain starting winning means [for example, special drawing 2 starting port 232, etc.],
A certain pattern display means [for example, a special pattern 2 display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a certain pattern change display when a game ball enters the certain start winning means;
A variable winning means (e.g., a second variable winning opening 235) that can be opened and closed during a jackpot game;
a first playing area (e.g., a left playing area, etc.);
A gaming machine having a second gaming area that is a gaming area different from the first gaming area [for example, a right gaming area, etc.],
the certain start winning means is a winning means disposed in the second game area,
the certain variable winning means is a winning means arranged in the second game area,
A game ball passage (for example, a ball passage 239) through which game balls that have not entered the variable winning means can flow down is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage provided with first protrusions [for example, ribs 23f1 to 23f3, ribs 23r1 to 23r3, etc.] for causing the gaming balls flowing down the gaming ball passage to collide with the first protrusions and slow down the flow speed of the gaming balls.

While conventional gaming machines have had room for improvement in the ball path, this gaming machine can provide a gaming machine with a distinctive ball path.

In addition, this gaming machine may be able to reduce the speed at which gaming balls flow down, thereby improving the winning rate.

Furthermore, with this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a gaming ball that was shot during a jackpot but has not yet won a prize will win before the gaming ball is shot in the game state immediately after the jackpot, causing a payout before the gaming ball is shot, thereby suppressing gambling.

Here, a certain symbol display means may be capable of only displaying a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means, or may be capable of displaying other symbols in addition to a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means. Also, a certain symbol display means may be capable of always displaying a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means, or may not always display a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means.

Furthermore, a certain variable winning means may be capable of opening and closing only during a jackpot game, or may be capable of opening and closing during other games as well. Further, a certain variable winning means may be capable of always opening and closing during a jackpot game, or may not always open and close during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, a certain start winning means may be arranged only in the second game area, or may be arranged in areas other than the second game area. Further, a certain start winning means may be arranged always in a certain game area, or may not be arranged in the second game area.

Furthermore, a certain variable winning means may be arranged only in the second play area, or may be arranged in areas other than the second play area. Further, a certain variable winning means may be arranged always in the second play area, or may not always be arranged in the second play area.

Furthermore, the game ball passage may be such that only game balls that have not entered a certain variable winning means can flow down, or such that game balls other than those that have not entered a certain variable winning means can also flow down.Furthermore, the game ball passage may be such that game balls that have not entered a certain variable winning means can always flow down, or such that game balls that have not entered a certain variable winning means may not always be able to flow down.

Also,
"The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage having a width that does not allow two or more gaming balls to flow down in parallel [for example, the ball passage 239 has a width that does not allow multiple gaming balls to flow down in parallel, etc.]."

Also,
"The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage that does not allow a gaming ball received without entering the certain variable winning means to enter a winning means other than the certain initial winning means."

Also,
"The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage having a serpentine portion (for example, an S-shaped structure extending from the second variable winning opening 235 to the special drawing 2 starting opening 232) that has a structure in which a portion of the gaming ball passage snakes downward."

Also,
The article also explained that "a gaming machine is characterized in that a second protrusion [e.g., rib 23f4, etc.] is provided on the serpentine portion to guide gaming balls flowing down the serpentine portion along the flow path."

The following is an additional note, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 11)
a first starting winning means;
a first symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means;
When a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol variation display, an electric device that changes from a first state to a second state;
an operating gate;
a first game area into which the game ball is more likely to enter when hit from the left than when hit from the right;
A second game area into which the game ball is more likely to enter when hit from the right than when hit from the left.
When the game ball passes through the activation gate, the certain electric device changes from the first state to the second state,
the first start winning means is a winning means arranged in the first game area,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the certain electric device is a device placed in the second gaming area.

(Appendix 12)
12. The gaming machine according to claim 11,
A second starting winning means;
A third starting winning means;
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variable display;
a third symbol display means capable of executing a third symbol variable display;
a first variable winning means;
a specific area through which a gaming ball that has entered the first variable winning means can pass;
A game control means capable of executing a small win game and a big win game is provided.
The game control means is a means for transitioning to the big win game when the game ball passes through the specific area in the small win game,
The first game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in a first game state,
The second game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in the second game state and the third game state,
the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
the third gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The third gaming state is a gaming state different from the second gaming state,
The second symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the second symbol variation display when a gaming ball enters the second start winning means,
the third symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the third symbol variation display when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means;
The second game state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to win via the second start winning means than via the third start winning means,
The third gaming state is a gaming state in which the gaming ball is more likely to win via the third starting winning means than via the second starting winning means,
After the jackpot game to which the transition is made based on the result of the second symbol variation display is completed, there are cases where the game state is transitioned to the second game state and cases where the game state is transitioned to the third game state,
In the second symbol variation display, the game machine is characterized in that a result of a small win is displayed more often than a result of a loss.

(Appendix 13)
13. The gaming machine according to claim 12,
The second symbol variable display is a symbol variable display that can be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times,
The third symbol variable display is a symbol variable display that can be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times,
In the second gaming state, the shortest variable display time is more likely to be selected for the second variable pattern display than for the third variable pattern display.

(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to claim 12 or 13,
A display means is provided for displaying a decorative pattern variation display,
When the first symbol variation display is executed, the decorative symbol variation display may be executed,
When the third symbol variation display is executed, the decorative symbol variation display may be executed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the decorative symbol variation display is not executed even when the second symbol variation display is executed.

(Appendix 15)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note 11 to Supplementary Note 14,
The gaming machine is characterized by being provided with a second variable winning means that can be opened and closed during the jackpot game.

(Appendix 16)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note 11 to Supplementary Note 15,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the certain electric device is in the second state even when the gaming ball passes through the operating gate while the first pattern variation display is being executed.

(Appendix 17)
A starting winning means;
A certain symbol display means capable of executing a certain symbol variation display when a game ball enters the certain starting winning means;
A variable winning means that can be opened and closed in a jackpot game;
A gaming machine having a certain gaming area into which a gaming ball is more likely to enter when hit from the right than when hit from the left,
the certain start winning means is a winning means arranged in the certain game area,
the certain variable winning means is a winning means arranged in the certain game area,
a guide path for guiding a gaming ball that has not entered the variable winning means to the start winning means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the guideway is a passage provided with a first protrusion for colliding with a gaming ball flowing down the guideway to slow down the speed at which the gaming ball flows down the guideway.

(Appendix 18)
18. The gaming machine according to claim 17,
The guideway is a passageway having a width such that two or more game balls cannot flow down in parallel,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to claim 17 or 18,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the guide path is a passageway having a serpentine portion, part of which is structured to snake downward.

(Appendix 19)
19. The gaming machine according to claim 18,
A gaming machine characterized in that a second protrusion is provided in the serpentine portion for guiding gaming balls flowing down the serpentine portion along a flow path.

Next, we will further explain specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment.

As explained using Figure 56, in Special Chart 2, if the time-saving play state is A, there are no misses, and either a big win symbol, a small win symbol, or a time-saving symbol will be displayed, with the probability that a time-saving symbol will be displayed. Conversely, in Special Chart 2, if the play state is other than A (normal play state, C time-saving play state), the time-saving symbol will not be displayed, and there is the highest probability that a miss symbol will be displayed. In other words, the time-saving symbol is only displayed in A time-saving play state. Also, in Special Chart 1, there are no misses regardless of the play state, and either a big win symbol or a small win symbol will be displayed, with the highest probability that a small win symbol will be displayed.

Also, as mentioned above, in the flow of play according to this embodiment, in the normal play state, play is centered on the variable display of the normal symbol, while in the time-saving play state c (RUSH state), play is centered on the variable display of special symbol 2. In other words, in the normal play state, among the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2, the variable display of the normal symbol takes top priority, while in the time-saving play state c (RUSH state), among the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2, the variable display of special symbol 2 takes top priority. Here, top priority means that a presentation corresponding to the variable display (for example, a decorative symbol variable display) is given priority. In the normal play state, if only the normal symbol is displaying a variable display among the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2, a decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the normal symbol variable display (normal symbol decorative symbol variable display) is executed. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if only special symbol 2 of the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2 is displaying a change, the decorative symbol change effect corresponding to the special symbol 2 change effect (special symbol 2 decorative symbol change effect) is not executed. However, whether or not the special symbol 2 change effect is being executed is also notified on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the mini symbol and the symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284. On the other hand, in the c time-saving game state (RUSH state), if only special symbol 2 of the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2 is displaying a change, the decorative symbol change effect corresponding to the special symbol 2 change effect (special symbol 2 decorative symbol change effect) is executed. Note that with special symbol 1, the decorative symbol change effect corresponding to the special symbol 1 change effect is not executed under any circumstances. However, whether or not the special symbol 1 change effect is being executed is also notified on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the mini symbol and the symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284.

Figure 68 shows a step-by-step example of prioritizing the presentation of the symbol that is displayed first when different symbols are displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

In the normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode), it is recommended to hit from the left and aim for the normal game start hole 228, so a win at the special game start hole 232, which cannot be won without hitting from the right, is an irregular win, but immediately after switching from the time-saving game mode, in which hitting from the right is recommended, to the normal game mode, the special game 2 variable display may be displayed due to the reserved consumption of the special game 2. Therefore, it is possible that both the normal game variable display and the special game 2 variable display will be displayed in the normal game mode.

Figures 68(a) to (j) show examples where priority is given to the symbol that stops first when both the normal symbol and the special symbol 2, which indicates a jackpot, are being displayed in normal play mode. Note that if the special symbol 2 display is a miss, no special symbol 2 effect will be displayed even if the special symbol 2 stops first. The special symbol 2 display takes longer to change in normal play mode than the normal symbol, and multiple normal symbol display changes may occur while one special symbol 2 display is being displayed.

A fourth pattern display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 68. The fourth pattern display area 284 is, from top to bottom, a display area for the normal pattern, a display area for special pattern 1, and a display area for special pattern 2. In the display area for each pattern, the left area is a hold number notification area, and the right area is a pattern change notification area. In this embodiment, there are no holds for special pattern 1, and normal pattern and special pattern 2 can each store a maximum of four holds. In the pattern change notification area for the normal pattern, while the normal pattern is stopped, a circle symbol indicating a win or a cross symbol indicating a loss is displayed lit up, but while the normal pattern is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. In the notification area for special chart 1 during pattern change, while the special chart 1 pattern is stopped, a circle indicating a big win, a triangle indicating a small win, or a cross indicating a miss is displayed lit up, but while the special chart 1 pattern is changing, a "-" is displayed flashing. In the notification area for special chart 2 during pattern change, while the special chart 2 pattern is stopped, a circle indicating a big win, a triangle indicating a small win, a star indicating a time-saving pattern has stopped, or a cross indicating a miss is displayed lit up, but while the special chart 2 pattern is changing, a "-" is displayed flashing.

In addition, a regular map hold icon display area 281 is provided in the left portion of the effect display area 208d in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 68. This regular map hold icon display area 281 displays a hold icon representing the hold of a regular map. Furthermore, a variable icon display area 280 is provided in the center of the effect display area 208d. The variable icon display area 280 displays a variable icon corresponding to the currently occurring pattern change display.

The fourth pattern display area 284, regular pattern pending icon display area 281, and variable icon display area 280 described above are the same in the subsequent figures.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, in the normal game state, no change effects using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2 are performed, but change effects using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of the regular symbol are performed. Note that in the c time-saving game state, the change display of the symbol on special symbol 2 is the main focus, so change effects using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2 are performed.

In Figure 68(a), only the special symbol 2, which is the jackpot, is showing a variable display. As mentioned above, in normal game mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform a variable display using a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 68(a) displays a stop display using a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol. That is, "Decoration 8" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Decoration 3" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "Decoration 4" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the right symbol display area 208c, and since the symbols are random, a miss for the normal symbol is announced. Additionally, a mini symbol MIN is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. This mini symbol MIN corresponds to a display that notifies whether or not a variable display of the symbol (regular symbol, special symbol 1, special symbol 2) is being performed. While a variable display of the symbol is being performed, the mini symbol is displayed as a variable display, and while a static display of the symbol is being performed, the mini symbol is also displayed as a static display. In the mini symbol MIN shown in Figure 68(a), the 8-3-4 mini symbol combination is displayed as a static display.

In normal game mode, it is recommended to aim for the normal map start port 228 (see Figure 50) and make a left-handed hit. In Figure 68 (b), a win occurs at the normal map start port 228, and the display of the normal map changes begins on the normal map display device 210 shown in Figure 50. Hereinafter, when we refer to the display of the normal map changes, we mean the display of the changes on the normal map display device 210 controlled by the main control unit 300. Also, when we refer to the display of the special map changes, we mean the display of the changes on the first special map display device 212 or the second special map display device 214 controlled by the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 sends a map change start command to the first sub-control unit 400 when the display of the normal map changes and when the display of the special map changes. The map change start command includes the time of the display of the changes (change time). The first sub-control unit 400 is aware of the remaining time for the variable display of the special symbol 2, which continues from FIG. 68(a). If the currently active variable display of the special symbol 2 is a jackpot, upon receiving the normal symbol variable start command, it determines which variable display will end first: the normal symbol variable or the special symbol 2 symbol variable. Note that if the currently active variable display of the special symbol 2 is a miss, the above determination is not made. Also, while the above determination may be made, if the variable display of the special symbol 2 is a miss, no effect related to the variable display of the special symbol 2 will be performed even if the variable display of the special symbol 2 ends first. In this case, the variable display of the normal symbol ends first. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a variable display using decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol. In other words, the decorative symbols that had been displayed as still symbols begin to change, and the decorative symbols are rapidly changing in the left symbol display area 208a, the center symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Additionally, the mini symbol will also begin to change in the upper left corner. The regular symbol change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280 in the lower center.

In Figure 68 (c), the normal map's changing display continues, and the changing performance using the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal map's changing display shows a fluctuating display of "Decoration 5" - "Decoration 4" - "Decoration 7". Because the normal map's changing display continues, the mini pattern MIN does not show a fluctuating display and continues to show the changing display, and the mini pattern MIN notifies that the normal map is changing. In this situation, a win is again made in the normal map start port 228, and the normal map reserve is accumulated. The normal map reserve icon h11 is displayed in the normal map reserve icon display area 281. Also, in the fourth pattern display area 284, "1" is displayed in the normal map reserve number notification area.

In Figure 68(d), there are three winning entries in the normal map start slot 228, and one more normal map is reserved. The normal map reserve icon h12 is additionally displayed in the normal map reserve icon display area 281. Additionally, in the fourth pattern display area 284, the value in the normal map reserve number notification area is updated to display "2." At the timing of Figure 68(d), the normal map fluctuation display ends, and the fluctuation performance using the decorative patterns corresponding to the normal map fluctuation display also ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 7" as frozen. Additionally, the mini pattern MIN combination of 5-4-7 is also frozen in the upper left. The normal map fluctuation icon h0 has disappeared in the fluctuation icon display area 280 in the lower center. Note that the fluctuation display of special map 2 is still ongoing.

In Figure 68(e), one reserved regular map is consumed, and the display of the regular map's changes begins. A pattern change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines which change display will end first: the current regular map pattern change or the special 2 pattern change continuing from Figure 68(a). Here again, the regular map pattern change display ends first. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 208 again starts a change performance using a decorative pattern corresponding to the regular map's change display. Note that the regular map reserved icon display area 281 displays an animation of the reserved icon moving, and the regular map change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280. In addition, notifications of the regular map's changes also begin via the mini pattern MIN and the regular map pattern change notification area in the fourth pattern display area 284.

In Figure 68 (f), the display of the regular map's changes continues, and in the following Figure (g), the display of the regular map's changes ends, and the display of the changes using the decorative patterns corresponding to the regular map's change also ends, with the decorative pattern display device 208 displaying a static display of the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7." Additionally, the mini pattern display displays a static display of the mini pattern combination of 4-1-7, and a cross is lit in the regular map's pattern change notification area in the fourth pattern display area 284, indicating that the regular map has stopped displaying. At this point, the number of reserved regular maps is 1. The display of the special map 2's change is still ongoing.

In Figure 68 (h), the remaining regular symbol is reserved, and the display of the regular symbol's changes begins. A symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, which determines which of the symbol changes, the current regular symbol or the special 2 symbol change continuing from Figure 68 (a), will end first. Here, the special 2 symbol change display that has been continuing until now ends first. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a presentation that suggests a jackpot with the current special symbol 2 symbol change display. In other words, in conjunction with the start of the regular symbol change display, a shutter effect is started, which is a presentation that suggests a jackpot with that change, rather than a change effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the regular symbol change display. When the shutter effect starts, a shutter image STG in a closed state is displayed on the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The shutter image STG displays the words "Rush Challenge Approaching," suggesting that the jackpot game is about to begin. Also, because this shutter image STG overlaps, the regular map's pending icon display area 281 and variable icon display area 280 are not visible, but the fourth symbol display area 284 and mini symbol MIN are displayed. The mini symbol indicates that the regular map is currently variable.

In Figure 68(i), the display of the variation of special symbol 2 ends. A circle indicating a jackpot is displayed in the pattern variation notification area of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 68(i). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit display U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen so as to overlap the shutter image STG, promoting a win in the second variable winning slot 235. In addition, a small right-hit display U5 is displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284.

In Figure 68 (j), a jackpot game (10R jackpot game) for special symbol 2 has begun, and the shutter image STG has disappeared on the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image during the jackpot game, such as "Rush Challenge Bonus," is displayed. The display of the normal symbol's change continues, and the mini symbol MIN and the normal symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 indicate that the normal symbol is changing. Also, below the mini symbol MIN, a prize ball count display TAL is displayed, which shows the cumulative number of prize balls won since the first jackpot game. Furthermore, the right-hit display U4 has disappeared, but the small right-hit display U5 is still displayed.

The above explanation was an example of a jackpot being indicated by the variable display of special chart 2, but the same applies when the variable display of special chart 2 is indicated by a small jackpot. In other words, the shutter effect may be an effect that suggests a small jackpot in the currently active variable display of special chart 2. In this case, the text displayed on the shutter image SRG may be the same or different (e.g., "V Challenge Approaching"). Conversely, if the variable display of special chart 2 indicates a small jackpot, the shutter effect may not be performed. For example, if the variable display of special chart 2, which indicates a small jackpot, stops while the normal chart is changing, only a small right-hit display U5 may be displayed after the fixed stop of special chart 2 (at the start of the small jackpot). In other words, the background display and the variable display of the normal chart may continue as is. Here, if the game ball passes through specific area 234v during a small jackpot game, an image of the jackpot game may be displayed.

Also, if both the normal symbol and the special symbol 2, which is a losing symbol, are being displayed during normal play, regardless of which symbol stops first, the display will not feature a decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2's display, but will feature a decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol's display.

Figures 68 (A) to (D) show an example in which, in the time-saving c game state, when both the variable display of special symbol 2 and the variable display of special symbol 1, which will result in a jackpot, are being executed (so-called simultaneous fluctuations), the effect of the symbol that stops first is prioritized. In the time-saving c game state (RUSH state), a right hit is made, aiming for the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a jackpot is aimed at the variable display of special symbol 2. The variable time of special symbol 2 in this time-saving c game state is shorter than the variable time of special symbol 2 in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state). In the time-saving c game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the variable display of special symbol 2 is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

Figure 68(A) shows the state immediately after the c time-saving game state begins and the symbol change display of special symbol 2 begins. When the c time-saving game state is entered, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a "RUSH TIME display" in the upper center of the display screen, which indicates the execution time of the c time-saving game state. The lower left corner of the display screen also displays the number of symbol changes remaining until the end of the c time-saving game state. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 68(A) indicates that 0.01 seconds have passed since the c time-saving game state (RUSH state) began, and that there are 143 symbol changes remaining until the end of the c time-saving game state. Furthermore, a small right-hit display U5 is also displayed. Below the number of symbol changes remaining until the end of the c time-saving game state, a presentation mode selection display DMS is displayed. Presentation modes will be described in more detail below, but in this case, presentation mode A, the default presentation mode, is selected.

In addition, when the c time-saving game state begins, decorative symbols for the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed, and a mini symbol MIN is also displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and a special pattern 2 hold icon display area 282 is displayed to the right of that. In Figure 68 (A), the variable icon h0 for special pattern 2 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the variable display of special pattern 2 is being performed. In the central area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable effect using a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of special pattern 2 has begun. In other words, in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of special pattern 2 has begun.

In Figure 68 (B), a win occurs at the special symbol 1 start port 231 in the electric chute, which opens for a longer time than in the normal game mode but shorter than in the A2 time-saving game mode. This win corresponds to an irregular win. The main control unit 300 sends a command to start the special symbol 1 pattern change to the first sub-control unit 400, which then determines which of the two patterns, the special symbol 1 pattern change or the currently running special symbol 2 pattern change, will end first. Here, the special symbol 1 pattern change ends first. As mentioned above, in the special symbol 1 pattern change display, losing symbols are not displayed as stopped symbols, and either a jackpot symbol or a small jackpot symbol is always displayed as stopped symbols. The decorative symbol display device 208 prioritizes the display of the symbol that stops first, but in this embodiment, no change effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol 1 pattern change display is performed, and instead, a shutter effect, which is an effect suggesting a jackpot, is initiated by the special symbol 1 pattern change display. Here, the shutter image STG is displayed so as to overlap the display of the decorative pattern change effect corresponding to the special pattern 2 change display that has been performed until now. In other words, a new shutter effect is started in place of the decorative pattern change effect corresponding to the special pattern 2 change display. The mini pattern MIN continues to notify that special pattern 1 is changing. Also, in the special pattern 1 change notification area in the fourth pattern display area 284, a "-" pattern is flashing, continuing to notify that special pattern 1 is changing. The shutter image STG shown in Figure 68 (B) displays the words "Chance occurring," suggesting that the start of the jackpot game is imminent.

In Figure 68 (C), the display of the variation of special symbol 1 ends. A circle indicating a jackpot is displayed in the pattern variation notification area of special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 68 (C). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit indicator U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen so as to overlap the shutter image STG, promoting a win in the second variable winning slot 235. A small right-hit indicator U5 is also displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284. Note that in special symbol 2, which was supposed to have a longer variation display than special symbol 1, the lottery result is discarded because the jackpot symbol was displayed frozen on special symbol 1, and a cross indicating a loss is displayed in the pattern variation notification area of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 68 (C), and a random mini symbol combination such as 4-1-7 is displayed frozen on mini symbol MIN. The timing for discarding the lottery results is when the jackpot symbol stops and is displayed on Special Chart 1, but it may be earlier (for example, when Special Chart 1 wins) or later (when the jackpot game begins).

In Figure 68 (D), the jackpot game of special symbol 1 (10R jackpot game) has started, and on the decorative symbol display device 208, the shutter image STG has disappeared and an image of the jackpot game, such as "Big Bonus," is displayed. The number of winning balls display TAL is displayed below the mini symbol MIN. Also, the right-hand hit display U4 has disappeared, but the small right-hand hit display U5 is displayed.

The text displayed on the shutter image STG changes depending on the type of jackpot. If the jackpot game always transitions to RUSH state after the end of the jackpot game, the text "Chance occurring" is displayed (Figure 68 (B)), and if the jackpot game transitions to RUSH state or normal game state after the end of the jackpot game, the text "RUSH challenge approaching" is displayed (Figure 68 (h)). Also, the time-limited game state in which it is difficult to win (7) in Figure 62) appears to be a RUSH state (c time-limited game state). Similarly, the normal game state in (8) in Figure 62 also appears to be a RUSH state. If special chart 1 is hit here, even though it appears to be a RUSH state, it is actually a normal game state in terms of control, so the text "RUSH challenge approaching" is displayed.

In addition, for special symbol 1 that results in a big win or a small win, a shutter effect may be displayed at the start of the change, regardless of the change time of the other symbol (special symbol 2 or regular symbol). However, even in this case, if special symbol 2 that results in a big win or small win stops first, it is preferable to execute the effect of special symbol 2 without executing the shutter effect at the start of the change.

Figure 69 shows an example in which, when both the normal symbol variable display, which indicates a win, and the special symbol 2 variable display, which indicates a jackpot, are being displayed in normal game mode, the effect of the symbol that stops first is given priority.

Figures 69(a) to 69(c) are the same as Figures 68(a) to 68(c), and the variable display of special symbol 2, which indicates a jackpot, is being displayed (Figure 69(a)), but a prize is awarded at the normal symbol start port 228, and the variable display of the normal symbol ends before the variable display of special symbol 2, so the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a variable display using decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (Figure 69(b)). In Figure 69(c), the variable display of the normal symbol continues, a prize is awarded again at the normal symbol start port 228, and the reserved number of normal symbols is accumulated.

In Figure 69 (d), there is no new winning entry in the normal map starting slot 228, the normal map changing display ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5" - "Decoration 4" - "Decoration 7" in a stopped state.

In Figure 69 (e), the reserved regular map is consumed and the display of regular map changes begins. The regular map change display here becomes a winning change display. A pattern change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines which change display will end first: the current regular map pattern change or the currently ongoing special 2 pattern change. Here too, the regular map pattern change display ends first. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 208 again begins a change performance using decorative patterns according to the regular map pattern change display.

In Figure 69 (f), the display of the normal symbol changes ends, the display of the change using the decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbol change also ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 4" as a static display. Also, the mini symbol combination of 4-4-4 is displayed as a static display, and a circle is displayed lit in the normal symbol symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284, indicating that the normal symbol has stopped displaying.

Since the regular symbol has been won, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 69(g) displays a right-hit indicator U4 and a small right-hit indicator U5 to recommend aiming for the electric chute inside the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. Note that at the timing of Figure 69(g), the variable display of special symbol 2 is still continuing. Also, at the timing of Figure 69(g), a win occurs at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, the variable display of special symbol 1 occurs in an extremely short period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the small win symbol is displayed stationary on special symbol 1. In the symbol-changing notification area of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 69(h), a triangular mark lights up, the variable display of special symbol 1 ends, and it is notified that a small win has been won. At the timing of Figure 69(g), special chart 2 was still displaying a variable effect, but the small win symbol was displayed as a static symbol on special chart 1, causing the jackpot lottery result to be discarded, and a cross mark indicating a loss is displayed in the symbol-changing notification area for special chart 2 in fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 69(g). Furthermore, in decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 69(h), since a small win has been won, right-hit indicator U4 and small right-hit indicator U5 are displayed to promote entry into first variable winning slot 234. In Figure 69(h), the game ball enters first variable winning slot 234, passes through specific area 234v, and is promoted to a jackpot.

In Figure 69 (i), a jackpot game has begun, and on the decorative pattern display device 208, the right-hit display U4 disappears and an image of a jackpot game that has been upgraded from a small jackpot, such as a "Rush Challenge Bonus," is displayed. Also displayed is the number of winning balls displayed (TAL), and a small right-hit display U5.

Figure 70 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example different from the example shown in Figure 68 when both the normal symbol variable display and the special symbol 2 variable display, which indicates a jackpot, are being displayed during normal gameplay.

Figure 70(a) is the same as Figure 68(a), and only the special symbol 2, which is the jackpot, is displayed in a variable manner. In the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a stop display using a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the regular symbol is displayed.

In Figure 70 (b), two balls win consecutively in the normal ball starting hole 228, and the decorative pattern display device 208 starts a variable effect using decorative patterns according to the normal ball variable display based on the previous win, and the hold icon h11 is displayed in the normal ball hold icon display area 281 based on the later win.

In Figure 70(c), the display of the normal symbol based on the previous win ends with a stop display of the losing symbol, and the display of the normal symbol based on the subsequent win begins. The main control unit 300 sends a command to start the normal symbol change to the first sub-control unit 400, which then determines which of the two symbol changes will end first: the current normal symbol change or the special 2 symbol change that continues from Figure 70(a). Here, the display of the special 2 symbol change that has continued until now ends first. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a shutter effect, which is an effect that suggests that the current special 2 symbol change will result in a jackpot. The shutter image STG shown in Figure 70(c) displays the words "Rush Challenge Approaching," suggesting that the jackpot game is about to begin. From Figure 70(c) to (e), both the special symbol 2 change display and the regular symbol change display are being executed, and the special symbol 2 change display ends at the timing of Figure 70(f). A circle indicating a jackpot is displayed in the symbol change notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 70(f). On the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit display U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen so that it overlaps with the shutter image STG, promoting a win in the second variable winning slot 235. In addition, a small right-hit display U5 is displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284.

In Figure 70 (g), a jackpot game (10R jackpot game) for special symbol 2 has begun, and the shutter image STG has disappeared on the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image during the jackpot game, such as "Rush Challenge Bonus," is displayed. The display of the normal symbol change continues, and the mini symbol MIN and the normal symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 indicate that the normal symbol is changing. Also, the number of winning balls display TAL is displayed below the mini symbol MIN. Furthermore, the right-hit display U4 has disappeared, but the small right-hit display U5 is still displayed.

Figures 70(d'), (h), and (i) are modified versions of Figure 70(d). In Figure 70(d'), normally, a game ball would not enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231, but by chance, a game ball enters the special chart 1 starting hole 231, and the special chart 1 change display begins. Note that this special chart 1 change display is assumed to be a small win. A command to start the special chart 1 change display is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines which change display will end first: the current special chart 1 change display or the special 2 change display continuing from Figure 70(c). Here, the special chart 1 change display ends before the special chart 2 change display. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 208 would normally start a shutter effect, which is an effect suggesting a small win with the changing display of special pattern 1, but since the shutter effect, which is an effect suggesting a big win with the changing display of special pattern 2, is already in progress, the shutter effect currently being displayed continues to be displayed. Note that even if the image is the same, a new display process may be performed. Furthermore, a new shutter image may be displayed as the changing display of special pattern 1 begins, without comparing the changing times of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2.

In Figure 70(h), the normal symbol continues to change, while the special symbol 1 changes and displays a small win symbol. A triangle symbol indicating a small win is displayed in the symbol change notification area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 70(h). In special symbol 2, which continued to change, the small win symbol was displayed as a small win symbol on special symbol 1, resulting in the big win lottery result being discarded, and a cross symbol indicating a loss is displayed in the symbol change notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 70(h). Since a small win was won on special symbol 1, a right-hit indicator U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen, overlapping the shutter image STG, to promote winning in the first variable winning slot 234, thereby promoting winning in the second variable winning slot 235. Additionally, a small right-hit indicator U5 is displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284.

In Figure 70(i), the game ball enters the first variable winning slot 234, passes through the specific area 234v, and is upgraded to a jackpot. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 70(i), in response to the upgrade of the small jackpot on Special Chart 1 to a jackpot, the display switches to an image of a jackpot game that has been upgraded from a small jackpot, such as a "Rush Challenge Bonus." In this image of a jackpot game, a small right-hit display U5 and the number of prize balls won display TAL are also displayed.

In this way, the appearance appears to be that the shutter effect, which is an effect that suggests a jackpot when the special chart 2 changes, has been shortened. This prevents players from feeling uncomfortable even when an irregular jackpot occurs. It also makes it less likely that the jackpot on special chart 2 has been discarded. In Figure 70(c''), the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, which can be passed by hitting the right while the normal chart is changing in Figure 70(b). As explained using Figure 59(c), if the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g while the normal chart is changing, the normal chart being displayed is interrupted regardless of the display result. When the opening and closing operation of the shutter member 2311 of the electric chute based on the game ball's passage through the normal power activation gate 228g is completed, the display of the normal chart's change resumes. Because the normal symbol change display is interrupted, the special symbol 2 change display, which indicates a jackpot, ends first, and a circle indicating a jackpot is displayed in the symbol change notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 70 (j). In other words, the order of the normal symbol hit and the special symbol 2 jackpot has been reversed, and a sudden jackpot has occurred. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit display U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen, and a small right-hit display U5 is also displayed. However, no shutter effect is performed, and the shutter image STG is not displayed.

According to the above description,
"A first detection means for detecting a game ball [for example, a ball detection sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting hole 228];
A second detection means (e.g., a second starting hole sensor) that is provided in a different area from the first detection means and detects the game ball;
A presentation means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208),
Equipped with
A gaming machine having a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
When the first detection means detects a gaming ball, a first pattern [for example, a normal pattern] may be displayed in a variable manner [for example, a normal pattern variable manner].
When the game ball is detected by the second detection means, a variable display of a second pattern [for example, special pattern 2] [for example, special pattern 2 variable display] may be executed.
The first gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that the first detection means detect a gaming ball [for example, a normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)],
The second game state is a game state [for example, a time-saving game state c] that recommends that the second detection means detect a game ball,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a first pattern change performance [for example, a normal decorative pattern change display] in accordance with the change display of the first pattern,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second pattern change performance [for example, a special pattern 2 decorative pattern change display] in accordance with the change display of the second pattern,
The presentation means is a means capable of executing the first symbol variation presentation in accordance with the first symbol variation display when the first symbol variation display is being executed in the first gaming state,
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second symbol variation effect in accordance with the variable display of the second symbol when the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the second game state [for example, FIG. 71(a)],
the effect means is means for not executing the second symbol variation effect in response to the variable display of the second symbol when the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the first gaming state;
The presentation means is a means for executing a presentation (hereinafter referred to as a "first specific presentation") [for example, a shutter presentation] suggesting that the jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second symbol when both the variable display of the first symbol and the variable display of the second symbol, which will result in the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed, are being executed in the first game state [for example, FIG. 68(h)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, the main variable display is determined depending on the gaming state, and players must aim to see that variable display while playing. In the first gaming state, the variable display of the first symbol is the main focus, but if the variable display of the second symbol is also being executed, the first specific effect may be executed, and by executing effects according to the situation, it is possible to liven up the game.

In this gaming machine, since the first gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that a gaming ball be detected by the first detection means, the first gaming state has the highest priority to the variable display of the first symbol, and since the second gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that a gaming ball be detected by the second detection means, the second gaming state has the highest priority to the variable display of the second symbol. In the first gaming state, if the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side, which results in a jackpot, and the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side are both active, if the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side stops before the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side, the first specific effect will not be executed, and if the variable display of the second symbol stops before the variable display of the first symbol, the first specific effect will be executed.

The presentation means may also be means that, when the first game state is being executed and both the first symbol variable display and the second symbol variable display resulting in a small win symbol being displayed stationary, may execute a presentation (hereinafter referred to as the "second specific presentation") [for example, a shutter presentation] that suggests a small win.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be a display means, and the first pattern change presentation may be a presentation executed in the central area of the display means, and the second pattern change presentation may also be a presentation executed in the central area of the display means.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for not executing the second symbol variation presentation as the main presentation in response to the variable display of the second symbol when, in the first gaming state, only the second symbol of the first and second symbols is being displayed in a variable display. The "main presentation" here refers to the presentation with the largest presentation area (display area) or the most noticeable presentation.

The presentation means may be means for executing the first pattern change presentation in response to the change display of the first pattern when, in the first gaming state, a change display of only the first pattern of the first and second patterns is being executed; the presentation means may be means for executing the second pattern change presentation in response to the change display of the second pattern when, in the second gaming state, a change display of only the second pattern of the first and second patterns is being executed [for example, Figure 71 (a)]; and the presentation means may be means for not executing the second pattern change presentation in response to the change display of the second pattern when, in the first gaming state, a change display of only the second pattern of the first and second patterns is being executed.

Also,
"The presentation means is a means for executing the first specific presentation without executing the first symbol variation presentation even if the execution of the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation in which a jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed in the first game state, and the second symbol variation presentation ends before the first symbol variation presentation [for example, FIG. 68(h)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

If the presentation (first pattern change presentation) of another symbol (the first symbol) can be completed before a jackpot occurs, the first specific presentation is not executed. This prevents the player from knowing that a jackpot will occur until just before the jackpot occurs, allowing players to continue firing game balls until just before the jackpot occurs, making it possible for gaming establishments to provide gaming machines that are popular with gaming establishments. Even if the first symbol change display finishes before the second symbol change display, if the first specific presentation is executed, the player will wait for the second symbol change display to result in a jackpot when they see the first specific presentation, and will stop firing game balls, causing a disadvantage to the gaming establishment.

In addition, in the first gaming state, the variable display of the first symbol takes priority over the variable display of the second symbol, and if the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side stops and displays before the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side, the first specific effect is executed.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for executing the second specific presentation without executing the first symbol variation presentation even when the first symbol variation presentation has started, if the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation in which a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second symbol variation presentation ends before the first symbol variation presentation in the first gaming state.

Also,
"The presentation means is a means for executing the first symbol variation presentation without executing the first specific presentation when, in the first gaming state, the execution of the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation in which a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and the first symbol variation presentation ends before the second symbol variation presentation [for example, Fig. 68(b) and Fig. 68(e)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

By minimizing the timing of special displays such as the first specific effect, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort and to ensure that the tempo of the effect is not impaired.

In addition, in the first gaming state, if the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side stops and displays before the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side, the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side will be executed.

The presentation means may also be means for executing the first symbol variation presentation without executing the second specific presentation if, in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation, which results in a small win symbol being displayed in a stopped state, and the first symbol variation presentation ends before the second symbol variation presentation.

Also,
"The production means is a means capable of executing a second change notification (for example, notification of a mini pattern or/and a pattern change notification area of the special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284) that notifies whether the change display of the second pattern is being performed or not,
The presentation means is a means for, when the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the first gaming state, not executing the second symbol variation presentation in response to the variable display of the second symbol, but executing the second variation informing.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The presentation means may be a means capable of executing a first change notification that notifies whether the first symbol is being displayed in a changing state (for example, a notification in the mini symbol and/or regular symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284).

The first fluctuation notification may be a notification that is executed in an area of the display means that is outside the central area, and the second fluctuation notification may also be a notification that is executed in an area of the display means that is outside the central area.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means that, when a variable display of only the second symbol out of the first symbol and the second symbol is being executed in the first gaming state, may not execute the second symbol variation presentation in response to the variable display of the second symbol, but may execute the second variation in progress notification.

Also,
"The first design is a normal design,
The second design is a special design [e.g., special design 2].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The special symbol may undergo a variable display when it wins a starting hole where the ease of winning remains unchanged, and may be a symbol that opens a variable winning hole when a jackpot is hit.

Figure 71 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the transition from the final fluctuation in the time-saving game state (RUSH state) to the normal game state (non-time-saving game state).

In the c time-saving play state, it is recommended to aim for the special symbol 2 starting hole 232 and hit to the right. In Figure 71(a), up to four special symbol 2s are reserved, and the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 each display a change effect (a swinging display in Figure 71(a)) using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of the special symbol 2. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 71(a) indicates that 3 minutes 25.01 seconds have passed since the start of the c time-saving play state (RUSH state), and that the number of symbol change displays until the c time-saving play state ends is 0. In other words, the current change display of the special symbol 2 will be the final change in the c time-saving play state. Also displayed are the mini symbol MIN, which indicates that the special symbol 2 is changing, and the fourth symbol display area 284. In the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 71 (a), the symbol change notification area for special symbol 2 indicates that special symbol 2 is changing. In addition, the number of winning balls display TAL and a small right-hand hit display U5 are also displayed.

Also displayed are a variable icon display area 280 and a special chart 2 hold icon display area 282. The variable icon display area 280 displays the special chart 2 variable icon h0 corresponding to the currently changing special chart 2 variable display, and the special chart 2 hold icon display area 282 displays four hold icons h21 to h24.

In addition, below the number of remaining symbol changes until the end of the time-saving play state c, the presentation mode selection display DMS is displayed, and the default presentation mode, presentation mode A, is selected.

In the state shown in Figure 71(a), a left-handed hit is made even though a right-handed hit is recommended, resulting in a win at the normal starting hole 228. This win at the normal starting hole 228 corresponds to an irregular win.

In Figure 71(b), the pattern of the normal symbol has begun to change. The fact that the normal symbol is changing is notified in the normal symbol pattern change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 71(b). In addition, the losing symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a stop symbol, the display of the change of special symbol 2 has ended, and the time-saving play state c (RUSH state) has also ended. In other words, in Figure 71(b), the game has transitioned to the normal play state. Upon the end of the RUSH state, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 71(b) displays the result display of the RUSH state (result display RST) for a predetermined display period. The result display RST displays a time display RST1 that shows the total time from the start to the end of the RUSH state, and a prize ball count display RST2 that shows the cumulative prize balls won since the first jackpot play.

In addition, when the game transitions from the time-saving game mode to the normal game mode, when the game transitions from the jackpot game mode or the small jackpot game mode to the normal game mode, or when a 1G consecutive win transitions to the normal game mode, the main control unit 300 transmits the remaining time for the normal game mode to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 may also count the remaining time for the normal game mode. Because the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing the result display RST, it cannot start a variation effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the normal game mode variation display and must wait for the result display RST to end. However, if the variation effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the normal game mode variation display is started after the result display RST has ended, the variation effect using the decorative symbols will start halfway through, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. For example, if a reach effect is being performed using a variation display using decorative symbols on the normal game mode and the reach effect starts halfway through, it may cause the player to feel very uncomfortable or may lead to suspicion of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 does not initiate a variation effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the normal map variation display, but instead determines whether the remaining variation time of the normal map transmitted from the main control unit 300 upon transition to the normal game state is greater than or equal to a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). If the remaining variation time is greater than or equal to the predetermined time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a waiting display when the result display RST ends. If the remaining variation time is less than the predetermined time, the result display RST continues to be displayed until the normal map variation display ends. If the result display RST continues to be displayed for too long, some players may mistakenly believe that the transition to the normal game state has not yet occurred and hit the right button. In the normal game state, the normal map variation display is the main focus. However, as described above, if the game ball passes through the normal map activation gate 228g upon hitting the right button, the normal map variation display is interrupted, preventing game progress. Therefore, if the remaining variation time of the normal map variation display is greater than or equal to the predetermined time, the waiting display is displayed instead of the result display RST. On the other hand, the waiting display is a special display that is only displayed in irregular situations, such as when the normal game mode is returned to and the normal map variable display is already in progress. For example, if the normal map variable display starts to be executed during normal game mode, the waiting display will not be displayed, and as in Figure 68(b), a variable effect using decorative patterns corresponding to the normal map variable display begins. For players who have never seen a waiting display before, seeing it for the first time can be strange, and if the time is less than the specified time, even if the waiting display is not displayed, there is little chance that they will be mistaken for not having transitioned to normal game mode, so the result display RST continues to be displayed.

Figure 71(c) shows an example where the remaining time for the normal map change display is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. When the result display RST ends on the decorative symbol display device 208, the waiting display WAT is displayed, indicating that the remaining time for the normal map change display is 20 seconds. In other words, it is clearly indicated that the normal map change display is occurring, and it is prevented from interrupting the normal map change display by hitting to the right. This waiting display WAT may also include an indication encouraging left-handed hitting. Note that a symbol change start command for special symbol 2 has also been sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and in Figure 71(c), the change display for special symbol 2 has also started, and the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 has decreased by one. The first sub-control unit 400 determines which change display will end first: the normal symbol pattern change that started in Figure 71(b) or the special symbol pattern change for special 2. In this case, the normal symbol pattern change display ends first.

In the waiting display WAT in Figure 71 (d), there are 19 seconds left until the normal map changing display ends, and there is another win at the normal map start port 228.

The waiting display WAT in Figure 71 (e) shows that the remaining time is 0 seconds. While the waiting display WAT is displayed, the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed, but the mini symbol MIN is not. However, the mini symbol MIN may also be displayed. The reserved number notification area for the regular symbol in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 71 (e) displays 1.

In Figure 71 (f), the normal map variation display has ended, and the waiting performance has also ended. The normal map variation display here is a miss. In the decorative pattern display device 208, instead of the waiting display WAT, a stop display using a decorative pattern (a combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 5" - "Decoration 4" - "Decoration 7") corresponding to the missing stop pattern of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is displayed.

In Figure 71 (g), one reserved regular map is consumed and the display of regular map changes begins.

In Figure 71 (f), the variable display of the normal map is a miss, while in the same figure (f'), the variable display of the normal map is a win. In the decorative pattern display device 208, instead of the waiting display WAT, a decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 7" - "Decoration 7" - "Decoration 7" corresponding to the winning stopped pattern of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is displayed.

In the following Figure 69 (h), since the regular symbol has been won, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a right-hit indicator U4 and a small right-hit indicator U5 to recommend aiming for the electric chute inside the special symbol 1 starting hole 231.

Figure 71 (c') shows an example of a case where the remaining time for the normal map fluctuation display is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the result display RST. Before the player suspects that the game has not transitioned to the normal game state, a stop display using a decorative pattern corresponding to the normal map stopping pattern, as shown in Figure 71 (f) and (f'), is displayed.

In Figure 71(A), just like in Figure 71(a), the final change is taking place in the time-saving c game state, and four reserved special symbols 2 have accumulated. The decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a change effect (swing display) using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2. Also, in Figure 71(A), a left-handed hit is made even though a right-handed hit is recommended, resulting in a win in the normal symbol start slot 228 and the change display of the normal symbol starting. It is notified that the normal symbol is changing in the normal symbol symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 71(A).

In the following Figure 71 (B), the losing symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a static display, the variable display of special symbol 2 ends, and the time-saving game state c (RUSH state) also ends. In other words, in Figure 71 (b), the game has transitioned to the normal game state. The result display RST is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 71 (B). Also, at the timing of Figure 71 (B), the variable display of the normal symbol also ends, the winning symbol of the normal symbol is displayed as a static display, and a circle symbol indicating a normal winning symbol is displayed lit up in the normal symbol symbol variable notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284.

In this example, the game transitions to normal play during the period from when a normal symbol hits until the electric chute containing the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 begins to operate, and a right-hit display is displayed to encourage the player to aim at the electric chute. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 71 (C), the result display RST ends, and a right-hit display U4 is displayed in the central area, with a small right-hit display U5 also displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284. Note that the result display RST may continue to be displayed, and the right-hit display U4 may be displayed so that it overlaps with the result display RST, making it difficult to see.

In the example of Figure 71 (B'), the variable display of a normal winning symbol ends even earlier than in Figure 71 (B), and in Figure 71 (B'), the electric chute begins to operate. In other words, the transition to normal game mode occurs while the electric chute is operating. In this case, the right-hit display U4 is not displayed in the central area as shown in Figure 71 (C), and the result display RST continues to be displayed as shown in Figure 71 (B'), with a small right-hit display U5 displayed. Note that the electric chute operating includes any of the following states: the electric chute is waiting to start operating (during opening), the electric chute is open, and the electric chute has finished operating (during ending). If the right-hit display U4 were displayed so that it overlapped the result display RST, the player would not be able to see the result display for the RUSH state, which could affect their motivation to continue playing. Therefore, the right-hit display U4 is not displayed to prioritize the result display RST.

As mentioned above, Figure 71 shows an example of the c time-saving game state ending and transitioning to the normal game state, but the same applies when a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state in which right-hand play is performed ends and transitions to the normal game state. The same also applies when a 1G streak in the a2 time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state. In this case, instead of the result display RST, only the number of winning balls may be displayed, or a display indicating the end of the jackpot game (for example, a text display indicating the end of the jackpot game) may be displayed. Furthermore, a puncture display (a disappointment display when a jackpot or small jackpot does not win a V or when a jackpot does not win in the electric chute (winning the electric chute = 1/1 for a jackpot or small jackpot)) may continue to be displayed.

Figure 72 shows a modified example of the standby display.

As the game state (stage) transitions to the normal game state, the waiting display WAT1 shown in Figure 72 (a) displays "Stage transition in 20 seconds."

In the waiting display WAT2 shown in Figure 72 (b), there is no display regarding the remaining change time, and the message "Stage transition in progress" is displayed. If a right hit is performed while the waiting display WAT2 is displayed, and the game ball passes through the normal map activation gate 228g, the normal map change display will be interrupted as described above, resulting in a discrepancy between the remaining change time and the actual end timing. For this reason, in this example, the display regarding the remaining change time has been omitted.

In the example shown in Figure 72 (c), the result display RST is displayed while the waiting display WAT3 is also displayed. This waiting display WAT3 displays the time remaining until the result display RST, which is the result of the time-saving game state c, ends (in other words, the time remaining until the game transitions to the normal game state).

According to the above description,
"A first detection means for detecting a game ball [for example, a ball detection sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting hole 228];
A second detection means (e.g., a second starting hole sensor) that is provided in a different area from the first detection means and detects the game ball;
A presentation means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208),
Equipped with
A gaming machine having a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
When the first detection means detects a gaming ball, a first pattern [for example, a normal pattern] may be displayed in a variable manner [for example, a normal pattern variable manner].
When the game ball is detected by the second detection means, a variable display of a second pattern [for example, special pattern 2] [for example, special pattern 2 variable display] may be executed.
The first gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that the first detection means detect a gaming ball [for example, a normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)],
The second game state is a game state [for example, a time-saving game state c] that recommends that the second detection means detect a game ball,
The presentation means is a means capable of displaying a certain display (for example, a display capable of displaying a certain display if the remaining time of the display of the normal symbol variation is equal to or longer than a predetermined time) when the display of the first symbol variation is being executed (for example, FIG. 71(b)) at the time of transition from the second game state to the first game state (for example, when the final variation in the second game state is completed),
The certain display is a display that cannot be displayed when the execution of the variable display of the first symbol is started in the first gaming state [for example, a display that will not be displayed in FIG. 68(b)] [for example, a waiting display WAT],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, the aforementioned display can alert players to irregular conditions, preventing them from mistaking them for malfunctions or other issues.

The presentation means is capable of displaying a certain display if the variable display of the first symbol is being executed when transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

Also,
"The presentation means is a means for not displaying the certain display even when the first symbol variation display is being executed at the time of transition from the second game state to the first game state [for example, when the final variation in the second game state has ended] [for example, when the remaining variation time of the normal symbol variation display is less than a predetermined time] [for example, Figure 71 (c')].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

In addition, when transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the certain display may not be displayed even if the variable display of the first symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for, when the variable display of the first symbol is being executed at the time of transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, displaying the certain display if the remaining variable display time of the currently executing variable display of the first symbol is equal to or greater than a predetermined time, and not displaying the certain display if it is less than the predetermined time.

Also,
"The certain display is a display that notifies the remaining variable time of the variable display of the first pattern that is being executed,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

This makes it easy to know when you can resume playing, providing a convenient gaming machine.

The certain display may be a display relating to the time period during which the variable display of the first symbol is being executed, a display relating to the end of the variable display of the first symbol being executed, or a display relating to the transition of the game state [for example, the waiting display WAT1 shown in FIG. 72(a) or the waiting display WAT2 shown in FIG. 72(b)]. Alternatively, the certain display may be a display relating to the second game state [for example, the waiting display WAT3 shown in FIG. 72(c)].

Also,
The first detection means is provided in a first game area (for example, an area where a game ball hit by a left hand can be detected (a central area or a left side area)),
The second detection means is provided in a second game area (for example, an area (right area) where a game ball hit to the right can be detected),
The second game area is a game area provided with a third detection means (e.g., a normal operating gate 228g) in addition to the second detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, if a gaming ball is detected by the third detection means, the variable display of the first symbol is suspended for a certain period of time [for example, while the electric chute is operating].
He also explained.

More specifically, the device may be equipped with a device that activates when the third detection means detects a game ball (for example, an electric chute with a special starting hole 231 inside and a shutter member 2311 that opens and closes), and the certain period may refer to the period during which the device is operating.

Furthermore, the first game area may be an area that the game ball can reach when hitting either left-handed or right-handed, and the second game area may be an area that the game ball can reach when hitting either left-handed or right-handed.

Furthermore, a fourth detection means may be provided in the second gaming area, and when a gaming ball is detected by the fourth detection means, a variable display of a third pattern [for example, special pattern 1] [for example, special pattern 1 variable display] may be executed, and the third pattern may execute a variable display when it enters a starting hole [for example, special pattern 1 starting hole 231] where the ease of winning varies, and may be a special pattern that opens a variable winning hole when a jackpot is hit, and in the case of a small win, when the gaming ball that enters the variable winning hole passes through a specific area [for example, specific area 234v], it may be upgraded to a jackpot.

Also,
"The first design is a normal design,
The second design is a special design [e.g., special design 2].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The special symbol may undergo a variable display when it enters a starting slot where the ease of winning remains unchanged, and when a jackpot is won, a variable winning slot opens.

Next, we'll go into more detail about the presentation modes.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, in the time-saving play state (RUSH state), the player can select one of multiple presentation modes by operating the up and down buttons on the cross key of the operation key unit 190 shown in Figure 48. This presentation mode is a mode related to the way presentations are performed using reserved icons and variable icons.

Figure 73 is a diagram explaining the presentation modes.

Figure 73(a) is a table showing the selectable rendering modes.

There are three types of presentation modes available. Presentation mode A is the default presentation mode. Presentation mode B is a presentation mode in which the presentation is executed less frequently than presentation mode A. The presentation here refers to a pre-reading preview presentation for the pending icon, and a presentation suggesting a jackpot for that change for the variable icon. Presentation mode C is a presentation mode in which the probability of a jackpot is displayed on the pending icon or variable icon.

Note that while a player can only select this in the c time-saving game state (RUSH state), it may also be possible to make the selection in other game states (for example, the normal game state, the a1 time-saving game state, the a2 time-saving game state, or the probability variable game state). Alternatively, it may only be possible to make the selection in one or more of the c time-saving game state, the normal game state, the a1 time-saving game state, the a2 time-saving game state, or the probability variable game state. Furthermore, the above-mentioned presentation modes are merely examples, and presentation modes other than the above-mentioned presentation modes may also be selectable. For example, it may be possible to select a mode in which a specific presentation is executed more frequently, or a mode in which the likelihood of a jackpot for a certain preview presentation is higher.

Figure 73 (b) is a table showing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon in presentation mode A or presentation mode B.

The normal color is white, and the display mode of this normal color is the default display mode for both presentation mode A and presentation mode B. A rainbow color also indicates a guaranteed big win. Note that when describing the reliability of a big win in the explanation of presentation modes, the reliability of a small win is also included. This is because even a small win can be upgraded to a big win if it passes through the specific area 234v. However, it is also possible not to include the reliability of a small win.

In presentation mode B, the frequency of presentations is lower than in presentation mode A, so the frequency of normal-colored hold icons appearing increases. Also, by keeping the frequency of gold and rainbow colors, which have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more, the frequency of their appearance is the same as in presentation mode A, and making the frequency of blue, green, and red colors, which have a jackpot reliability of 10% or more but less than 50%, lower than in presentation mode A, presentation mode B becomes a presentation mode that is more likely to be executed when reliability is high, and can be considered a predictive chance mode.

Figure 73 (c) is a table showing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon in presentation mode C.

As mentioned above, in presentation mode C, when a hold icon is generated, the hold icon always displays one of the jackpot reliability levels (except when the command described below is not received correctly), and this display continues even if the hold icon changes to a variable icon. Specifically, the hold icon display mode is determined to achieve the reliability shown in Figure 73(c) based on the pre-read result information when the game ball enters special chart 2 starting hole 232, and the hold icon is displayed in the determined display mode. The displayed jackpot reliability (display mode) and the actual jackpot reliability may all be the same, but a display mode of 99% actually indicates a 100% jackpot. 100% is intentionally not displayed. Also, 3000% may be displayed, and in this case, the jackpot is actually 100% confirmed. This 3000% display is a display mode that is only displayed when special chart B or special chart C is won. If you win on Special Chart B or Special Chart C, the game will transition to a2 time-saving game mode after the jackpot play ends, and since you can expect to win 3,000 prize balls with a 1G streak (two jackpots), the maximum number of prize balls that can be won is displayed as a percentage to liven up the game. In this way, if you win and there is some kind of bonus (in this case, two wins are guaranteed), a number exceeding 100% may be displayed.

The 1% display mode is also the default display mode for presentation mode C. This 1% display mode is the display mode that is always displayed on the reserved (remaining reserved) special chart 2 that will be consumed after the time-saving play state c (RUSH state) or time-saving play state a ends. The default display mode is not limited to the 1% display mode, and can be any mode with the lowest reliability (for example, 0.1%), or a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode where the % display is not displayed or a display mode where a question mark is displayed).

Furthermore, when the number of remaining times in the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) falls below a predetermined number (for example, 10 spins, 5 spins, or a number that is at least half of the total), a display mode with a low reliability (for example, "1%" or "5%) may be more likely to be displayed. In other words, when the number of remaining times in the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) is below a predetermined number, a jackpot is more likely to occur with a lower reliability than when the remaining number of times is greater than the predetermined number. In this way, the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained even when the number of remaining times in the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) is low and only icons with a display mode that is unlikely to result in a jackpot are displayed.

The hold icon or variable icon explained above applies to Special Chart 2. In Special Chart 1, there will always be a big hit or a small hit, and there are no holds to begin with. On the other hand, for hits on regular charts, the hold icon or variable icon explained above may be the subject. In other words, the jackpot reliability becomes the hit reliability.

In this embodiment, of the multiple presentation modes, certain presentation modes such as presentation mode A and presentation mode B perform a normal change presentation of the pending icon. In this normal change presentation, the change may occur when a win is won or when the pending icon shifts. Furthermore, of the multiple presentation modes, certain presentation modes such as presentation mode C display the probability of a jackpot as a percentage (reliability display) on the pending icon or variable icon. This reliability display begins to be displayed when a pending occurs and does not change when the display shifts. Note that the reliability display may change when a shift is made, but the original reliability display should be displayed before it is displayed as a variable icon. In other words, the reliability display does not change after it is displayed as a variable icon.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 73 (b), the number of display modes in presentation mode A or presentation mode B is six, whereas as shown in the same figure (c), the number of display modes in presentation mode C is eight. In this way, the number of display modes is greater in presentation mode C than in presentation mode A or B. Note that the number of display modes in presentation mode A or presentation mode B may be greater than the number of display modes in presentation mode C.

Figure 74 shows a step-by-step example of how the game progresses while changing the presentation mode in the time-saving game mode (RUSH mode).

As mentioned above, in the c time-saving play state, it is recommended to aim for the special symbol 2 starting hole 232 and hit the ball to the right, which makes it easier to accumulate special symbol 2 reserves. The left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 74 each display a change effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol 2 change display. Furthermore, a change icon display area 280 is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and a special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282 is displayed to the right of it. Furthermore, it is notified that 0.01 seconds have passed since the c time-saving play state (RUSH state) began, and that the number of symbol change displays until the c time-saving play state ends is 143. In other words, the currently displayed change effect for special symbol 2 is the first change effect since the transition to the c time-saving play state. In addition, a mini symbol MIN is displayed to indicate that special symbol 2 is changing, and the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of winning balls display TAL, and a small right-hand hit display U5 are also displayed.

In Figure 74 (a), presentation mode A is selected, and a round, normal-colored (white) variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The round, normal-colored (white) variable icon and the hold icon are icons that are only displayed while presentation mode A is selected.

In Figure 74 (b), one reserve for Special Chart 2 has been accumulated, and the first reserve icon h21, which is round and in the normal color (white), is displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for Special Chart 2.

In Figure 74 (c), the player presses the up button on the cross key of the operation key unit 190 shown in Figure 48 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. Then, the round, normal-colored variable icon h0 and first hold icon h21 that had been displayed up until then change to the triangular, normal-colored variable icon h0 and first hold icon h21. The triangular, normal-colored variable icon and hold icon (hereinafter collectively referred to as "icons") are the default display mode for presentation mode B. When presentation mode A is changed to presentation mode B, the presentation mode A icons that had been displayed up until then are all re-displayed in the default display mode for presentation mode B. Also, when presentation mode B is changed to presentation mode A, the presentation mode B icons that had been displayed up until then are all re-displayed in the default display mode for presentation mode A (round, normal color). The same applies when changing from presentation mode C to presentation mode A, or when changing from presentation mode C to presentation mode B; in the former case, the presentation mode C icon that was previously displayed is re-displayed in the default display format for presentation mode A (round, normal color), and in the latter case, it is re-displayed in the default display format for presentation mode B (triangle, normal color). The default display format is different for presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and a triangular icon is used for presentation mode B, but it may also be common. For example, a round icon may also be used in presentation mode B. On the other hand, the default display format for presentation mode C is a square, normal color icon displayed at 1%, so it cannot be common with other modes.

In Figure 74 (d), one reserve has been added to Special Chart 2, and a triangular second reserve icon h22 in the normal color is additionally displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 of Special Chart 2. The additional reserve here actually has a jackpot probability of 15% and is green, but because presentation mode B has been selected, the frequency of the pre-read preview presentation is reduced and it is displayed in the normal color.

In Figure 74 (e), the player presses the up button on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode B to presentation mode C. Icons that were already displayed at the time the presentation mode was changed to C will not be displayed in the display mode of presentation mode C. Therefore, the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h21, and the second hold icon h22 remain triangular icons. Note that the hold icon corresponding to presentation mode C may be displayed again at the time the presentation mode is switched to presentation mode C. In other words, at the time the presentation mode is switched to presentation mode C, a lottery is re-drawn using the advance reading result information, and the reliability of the hold icon is displayed.

In Figure 74 (f), the number of reserved items for special chart 2 is increased by one. In other words, this is the increase in reserved items after changing to presentation mode C. A third reserved item h23, a square with 1% displayed, is additionally displayed in the reserved item icon display area 282 for special chart 2.

In Figure 74 (g), the variable display of Special Chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 74 (h), one reserve for special chart 2 has been consumed and a new pattern change has begun. The icon that was previously the first reserve icon h21 is now displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280, and in the reserve icon display area 282 for special chart 2, the triangular icon that was previously the second reserve icon h22 has shifted to become the first reserve icon h21, and the square icon that was previously the third reserve icon h23 and displayed as 1% has shifted to become the second reserve icon h22.

In Figure 74 (i), when presentation mode C is selected, one more hold is added to special chart 2. A third hold icon h23, a square with a 10% display, is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area 282 for special chart 2.

In Figure 74 (j), the player presses the up button on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode C to presentation mode A. As a result, as described above, all icons that had been displayed up to that point are uniformly redisplayed in the default display format of presentation mode A (round, normal color). Note that pending icons that began displaying in presentation mode C may remain displayed even if the presentation mode is changed.

In Figure 74 (j), the player presses the up button on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 shown in Figure 48 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode C to presentation mode A. As a result of step k, as described above, all icons that had been displayed up to that point are uniformly redisplayed in the default display format of presentation mode A (round, normal color).

After this, play continues in the time-saving c game state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 74 (k) indicates that 34 minutes and 10.00 seconds have passed since the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) began, and that there is only one more symbol change display until the time-saving c game state ends. The selected presentation mode is presentation mode C, and the change icon h0 is a square icon displaying 30%, and the decorative symbol change display is in a reach state. Furthermore, the number of reserved positions for special symbol 2 is 2, and the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 displays a square first reserved icon h21 displaying 10% and a square second reserved icon h22 displaying 1%. Here, the reserved special symbol 2 represented by the second reserved icon h22 becomes a remaining reserved symbol that will be consumed after the time-saving c game state ends, since there is only one more symbol change display until the time-saving c game state ends, and as mentioned above, a 1% probability is displayed, rather than the actual probability of a jackpot. In other words, because the second reserved icon h22 is a reserved symbol that represents a remaining reserve, it is displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode C.

In Figure 74 (l), the display of the decorative symbols that were in a reach state has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the decorative symbol combination that was not in a reach state is displayed as still.

In Figure 74 (m), one reserved symbol for Special Chart 2 is consumed, and the final change in time-saving game state c begins. As shown in Figure 74 (n), this final change increases the reserved symbol for Special Chart 2 by three, bringing the number of reserved symbols for Special Chart 2 to four and making it fully reserved. Since the three additional reserved symbols are also remaining symbols, the second reserved symbol h22, third reserved symbol h23, and fourth reserved symbol h24 are all displayed in the default display mode of 1% display presentation mode C.

Next, we will explain the failure of the first sub-control unit 400 to receive a winning command. The first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning command from the main control unit 300 each time a win occurs at the special chart 2 start port 232 and the number of reserved balls increases. This winning command contains the current number of reserved balls and pre-read result information that predicts the outcome of the winning ball. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a pattern change start command from the main control unit 300 each time the display of the special chart 2 changes begins. This pattern change start command also contains the current number of reserved balls and pre-read result information for each reserved ball. The first sub-control unit 400 may very rarely fail to receive a command that has been sent to it due to reasons such as a poor connection in the cable through which the command is transmitted.

Figure 75 shows a step-by-step example of what happens when a winning command is missed when presentation mode A is selected.

Figure 75(a) is the same state as Figure 74(a), so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but it shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Since presentation mode A has been selected, the icon shape is round. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 75(a) displays variable icon h0 in the normal color (white).

In Figure 75 (b), one ball wins in the special chart 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the winning command, it updates the value in the reserved ball number notification area for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284. Here, the value is updated from 0 to 1. In addition, an additional reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special chart 2. Here, a round, normal color (white) first reserved icon h21 is additionally displayed. Figure 75 (b) shows how the first reserved icon h21 is displayed by an increasing animation performed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special chart 2. This increase animation is an animation in which the hold icon gradually becomes larger; in Figure 75(b), the increase animation begins, and the first hold icon h21 is displayed small, while in the following Figure (c), the increase animation ends, and the first hold icon h21 is displayed at the specified size. Figure 75(b) also shows the speaker 120 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, and a hold increase sound (here, a "beep" sound) is output from this speaker 120.

In Figure 75(d), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, 1 remains displayed in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 75(d). In the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 75(d), the second reserved icon h22 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

More than one second after Figure 75(d) has passed, one more ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The winning command here includes the current number of reserved balls being three. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this winning command and determines that the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "3." As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the decorative pattern display device 208 to display the second reserved icon h22 and the third reserved icon h23 via the second sub-control unit 500. As shown in Figure 75(e), the third reserved icon h23 is displayed with an increasing animation, but the second reserved icon h22, which failed to display due to a failed command reception, is displayed at the specified size from the beginning without any increasing animation. By doing this, the second hold icon h22 is displayed before the third hold icon h23, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, the hold icons that were not displayed are displayed in the default display mode, i.e., in their normal colors. Furthermore, in the hold number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 75(e), 2 is not displayed, but 3 is displayed. In other words, the value of the hold number is updated from 1 to 3 in one go, skipping 2. Furthermore, the speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound indicating that the third hold has been increased, but does not output a hold increase sound indicating that the second hold has been increased. In other words, only a "beep" sound indicating an increase in one hold is output, and a "beep beep" sound indicating an increase in two hold numbers is not output.

In Figure 75 (f), the increasing animation of the third hold icon h23 has ended, and the third hold icon h23 is displayed in the normal color at the specified size.

In Figure 75 (g), the variable display of Special Chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 75 (h), one reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 75 (h) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the display of the decorative symbol change for Special Symbol 2 begins. The icon that was previously the first reserved symbol h21 moves to the variable symbol display area 280 using a moving animation and is displayed as variable symbol h0. In addition, in the reserved symbol display area 282 for Special Symbol 2, the second reserved symbol h22, which was displayed without an increase animation due to a failure to receive a winning command, moves using a moving animation and is displayed as the first reserved symbol h21, and the third reserved symbol h23, which was displayed normally, moves using a moving animation and is displayed as the second reserved symbol h22. In Figure 75, the moving animation is indicated by arrows. During this moving animation, the icon that was the second reserved symbol h22 turns blue and is displayed as the blue first reserved symbol h21. As mentioned above, the symbol change start command contains pre-read result information for each reserved icon. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the icon represented by the second reserved icon h22 from its normal color to blue based on the pre-read result information for the reserved icon. The winning command only contains pre-read result information for the winning result, and does not include the pre-read result for the reserved icon that was not displayed due to a failed command reception. For this reason, the icon is displayed in the default normal color at the start of display in Figure 75(e). It is also possible to include pre-read result information for each reserved icon in the winning command, and display the reserved icon that was not displayed in a display mode that indicates the reliability of a jackpot from the start of display. However, the reserved icon that is suddenly displayed may stand out because it is not in its default display mode, which may create a sense of incongruity. On the other hand, changing the display mode during the movement animation is more natural, as it changes amidst the movement.

Figure 75 (h) also shows a speaker 120, which outputs a hold icon change sound (here, a "beep" sound).

In Figure 75(i), the icon movement animation has ended. In addition, one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, here too, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, the number 2 is still displayed in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 75(i). In the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 75(i), the third reserved icon h23 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

In Figure 75 (j), the variable display of special chart 2 has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed frozen.

In Figure 75(k), one reserved symbol for special symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. As described above, the symbol change start command indicates that the current reserved number is two. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this symbol change start command, and even though the display of the change for special symbol 2 has begun, the reserved number for special symbol 2 remains at two, so it displays the second reserved symbol h22. This second reserved symbol h22 is also displayed in the default display mode (normal color) at a predetermined size from the beginning without any increasing animation. Furthermore, a movement animation is also started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and during this movement animation, the icon that was the second reserved symbol h22 changes from normal color to green based on the advance reading result information included in the symbol change start command. Furthermore, in the reserved symbol number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 75(k), the number 1 is not displayed, and the number 2 remains displayed. In other words, the pending number remains displayed as 2 without being reduced to 1.

In Figure 75 (l), the icon movement animation has finished, and the blue variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the first variable icon h21 in normal color and the second variable icon h22 in green are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of Special Chart 2. In addition, a hold icon change sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that here, the sound for changing to a blue icon and the sound for changing to a green icon are the same sound, but the change sound may be different depending on the changing color or value (display mode).

Figure 76 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of what happens when a winning command is missed when presentation mode C is selected. Because the timing of winning and missed commands is the same as the example shown in Figure 75, the explanation will focus on the differences, and overlapping explanations may be omitted.

Figure 76 (a) shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Since presentation mode C has been selected, the icon shape is square. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 76 (a) displays a square variable icon h0 with a 10% display.

In Figure 76(b), one ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, increasing the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Upon receiving the winning command, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the value in the reserved ball number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284. Here, the value is updated from 0 to 1. In addition, a reserved ball is additionally displayed in the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2. Here, a square first reserved ball icon h21 is additionally displayed. In the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 shown in Figure 76(b), the first reserved ball icon h21 gradually becomes larger through an increasing animation. At first, the icon is too small to see the percentage value, but gradually the percentage value becomes visible, which is more likely to pique the player's interest than a color-based reliability display. In addition, a reserved ball increase sound is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 76 (c), the increase animation has ended and the first hold icon h21 is displayed at the specified size. The first hold icon h21 displays 1%.

In Figure 76 (d), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, in the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 76 (d), the second pending icon h22 that should be displayed is shown in dotted lines.

More than one second after Figure 76(d) has elapsed, another ball lands in the Special 2 starting hole 232, and the main control unit 300 sends a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current number of reserved balls is three. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this winning command and determines that the current number of reserved balls for Special 2 is "3." In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 76(e), the second reserved icon h22, which failed to display due to a failed command reception, is already displayed at the specified size, and the third reserved icon h23 is gradually becoming larger through an increasing animation. The second reserved icon h22 is displayed in the default display mode (round, normal color display mode) of presentation mode A, rather than the square display mode displaying the probability of a jackpot in presentation mode C. This is the same display mode as the icon displayed immediately after power is restored due to a power outage, as described below. Furthermore, the default display mode for this presentation mode A (a round, normal-color display mode) is a display mode for icons that would not normally be displayed in presentation mode C. Also, in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 76(e), 2 is not displayed, but 3 is displayed. In other words, the reserved number value is updated from 1 to 3 in one go, skipping 2. Furthermore, the speaker 120 only outputs a single reserved number increase sound, such as a "beep," indicating that the third reserved number has been added.

In Figure 76 (f), the increasing animation of the third hold icon h23 has ended, and a square third hold icon h23 is displayed at 5% of the specified size.

In Figure 76 (g), the variable display of Special Chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 76 (h), one reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command containing the prediction results for each reserved symbol is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the icon movement animation begins. Due to the failure to receive the winning command, the second reserved symbol h22, which was displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode), changes to the display mode of presentation mode C as it moves through the movement animation, and is displayed as the square first reserved symbol h21 with a 5% display. The first sub-control unit 400 changes the display mode of the reserved symbol, which changes from the second reserved symbol h22 to the first reserved symbol h21, based on the prediction results for the first reserved symbol contained in the received symbol change start command. Also, a change sound is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 76(i), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, even here, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. In the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 76(i), the third pending icon h23 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

In Figure 76 (j), the variable display of special chart 2 has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed frozen.

In Figure 76 (k), one reserved symbol for special symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current number of reserved symbols is two and including the results of the preview for each reserved symbol. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this symbol change start command, and although the display of the change for special symbol 2 has begun, the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 remains at two. Therefore, the second reserved symbol h22 is displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode) at the specified size from the beginning without any increase animation. Furthermore, a movement animation is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and during this movement animation, the icon that was the third reserved symbol h23 changes to the display mode of presentation mode C based on the preview results included in the symbol change start command, and is displayed as the square second reserved symbol h22 with a 20% display. Furthermore, in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 76 (k), 2 remains displayed without displaying 1. In other words, the reserved number value remains displayed as 2 without being reduced to 1.

In Figure 76 (l), the icon movement animation has finished, and the variable icon display area 280 displays the variable icon h0 with a 5% display, while the hold icon display area 282 of Special Chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 with a 5% display and the second hold icon h22 with a 20% display. Additionally, a change sound is being output from the speaker 120.

Next, we will explain what happens when power is momentarily interrupted in each performance mode and then immediately restored.

Figure 77 shows a step-by-step example of what happens when power is interrupted momentarily in each performance mode and then immediately restored.

Figures 77(a) to 77(d) are diagrams showing, in stages, an example of a situation in which power is temporarily interrupted in rendering mode A and then immediately restored.

Figure 77(a) shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Since presentation mode A is selected, the icon is round. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 77(a) displays variable icon h0 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A, and the hold icon display area 282 of special chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 and the second hold icon h22, both of which are in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A.

In this state, power is momentarily interrupted (Figure 77(b)), and then immediately restored. Immediately after power is restored, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the message "Preparing to restore," as shown in Figure 77(c).

The state of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 77 (d) is the state after the "Preparing to return" display has disappeared, the reserved special pattern 2 has been consumed, and the display of the changing decorative pattern of the new special pattern 2 has begun. The presentation mode remains in presentation mode A, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode (normal color) and the first reserved icon h21 in the same default display mode (normal color) are displayed.

Figures 77(A) to 77(D) show a step-by-step example of what happens when power is interrupted momentarily in performance mode B and then immediately restored.

Figure 77 (A), like before, shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Here, because presentation mode B has been selected, the icon is triangular in shape. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 77 (A) displays variable icon h0 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode B, and the hold icon display area 282 of special chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 and second hold icon h22, both of which are in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode B.

In this state, power is momentarily interrupted (Figure 77(B)), and then immediately restored. Immediately after power is restored, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "Preparing to restore," as shown in Figure 77(B).

The state of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 77 (D) is the state after the display "Preparing to return" has disappeared, the reserved special pattern 2 has been consumed, and the display of the changing decorative pattern of the new special pattern 2 has begun. The presentation mode has been changed from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, which is the default presentation mode. As a result, the changing icon h0 in the default display mode (round, normal color) of presentation mode A and the first reserved icon h21 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A are displayed.

Figures 77(A) to 77(D) show a step-by-step example of what happens when power is interrupted momentarily in rendering mode C and then immediately restored.

Figure 77 (A) shows, as before, the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Here, because presentation mode C has been selected, the icon is square and the % probability of a jackpot is displayed. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 77 (A) displays a square variable icon h0 displaying 30%, and the reserved icon display area 282 of special chart 2 displays a square first reserved icon h21 displaying 10% and a square second reserved icon h22 displaying 1%.

In this state, power is interrupted for a moment (Figure 77 (a)), and then restored immediately. Immediately after power is restored, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "Preparing to restore," as shown in Figure 77 (c).

The state of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 77 (E) is the state after the display "Preparing to return" has disappeared, the reserved special pattern 2 has been consumed, and the display of the changing decorative pattern of the new special pattern 2 has begun. The presentation mode has been changed from presentation mode C to presentation mode A, which is the default presentation mode. As a result, the changing icon h0 in the default display mode (round, normal color) of presentation mode A and the first reserved icon h21 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A are displayed.

As explained above, in any presentation mode, after power is restored, the display will return to the default presentation mode A, and the icon display will return to the default display mode for presentation mode A (round, normal color).

Next, we will explain a modified presentation mode. In this modified presentation mode, the default display mode of the hold icon in presentation mode A is the same as the default display mode of the hold icon in presentation mode B, and in presentation mode C, the default display mode in presentation mode A and presentation mode B is displayed with a percentage indication of the probability of a jackpot. Furthermore, while the icon shape was triangular in presentation mode B, it is round in this modified presentation, and there is no difference in the shape of the icon in either presentation mode. Also, in this modified presentation, the pattern change start command does not include advance reading result information for each hold.

Figure 78 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of what happens when a command is missed when a winning command is received while modified presentation mode C is selected. Because the timing of winning and missed commands is the same as the example shown in Figure 76, the explanation will focus on the differences, and overlapping explanations may be omitted.

Figure 78(a) shows the state in which the first change in special chart 2 is being displayed after transitioning to the time-saving play state c. The change icon display area 280 shown in Figure 78(a) displays a round change icon h0 with a 10% indication.

In Figure 78 (b), one ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, increasing the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the winning command, it updates the value in the reserved ball number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284. Here, the value is updated from 0 to 1. In addition, a reserved ball is additionally displayed in the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2. Here, a round first reserved ball icon h21 is additionally displayed. In the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 shown in Figure 78 (b), the first reserved ball icon h21 gradually becomes larger through an increasing animation. In addition, a reserved ball increase sound is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 78 (c), the increase animation has ended and the first hold icon h21 is displayed at the specified size. The first hold icon h21 displays 1%.

In Figure 78(d), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, in the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 78(d), the second pending icon h22 that should normally be displayed is shown in dotted lines.

More than one second after Figure 78(d) has elapsed, another ball lands in the Special 2 starting hole 232, and the main control unit 300 sends a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current number of reserved balls is three. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this winning command and determines that the current number of reserved balls for Special 2 is "3." In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 78(e), the second reserved icon h22, which failed to display due to a failed command reception, is already displayed at the specified size, and the third reserved icon h23 is gradually becoming larger through an increasing animation. The second reserved icon h22 is displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode). This is the same display mode as the icon displayed immediately after power is restored following the aforementioned power outage. Furthermore, this default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode) is a display mode of an icon that would not normally be displayed in presentation mode C. Also, in the reserved number notification area of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 78(e), 2 is not displayed, but 3 is displayed. In other words, the reserved number value is updated from 1 to 3 in one go, skipping 2. Furthermore, only one reserved increase sound, such as a "beep," is output from the speaker 120, indicating that the third reserved number has been increased. Note that if there is a reserved icon that was not displayed due to a failed command reception (if there is a reserved icon whose pre-read result is unknown), the display mode of the reserved icon that appeared after this reserved icon is not changed. For example, if a display mode showing "99%" is used on a reserved icon that appeared after a reserved icon that failed to display due to a command reception failure, and the pachinko machine is equipped with a special symbol high probability state and transitions to the special symbol high probability state by having the game ball enter a specific area during a jackpot, if the reserved icon that failed to receive the command is a jackpot and the game ball fails to pass through the specific area during that jackpot and transitions to normal game mode, the reserved icon displayed as "99%" will be consumed in normal game mode (special symbol low probability state), and may not result in a jackpot (or small jackpot). In other words, since unforeseen circumstances such as the above exist as long as there are reserved icons with unknown pre-read results, not displaying the jackpot probability percentage for reserved icons that appeared after the reserved icon with unknown pre-read results can prevent incorrect information from being reported, even if the command was received correctly.

In Figure 78 (f), the animation of the third hold icon h23 increasing has finished and the third hold icon h23 is displayed. In this variant, if a winning command is not received correctly, the hold icons after the hold icon that was not displayed will also be displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode). In other words, even if the prediction result is known, it will only be displayed in the default display mode. Therefore, the third hold icon h23 is also displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode), without displaying the percentage of the probability of a jackpot.

In Figure 78 (g), the variable display of Special Chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 78 (h), one reserved special pattern 2 is consumed, and a pattern change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the icon movement animation has begun. After completing the movement animation shown in Figure 78 (h), the display mode of the first reserved icon h21 and the second reserved icon h22 remains in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode). Meanwhile, the change icon h0 displays 1%.

In Figure 78(i), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, even here, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. In the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 78(i), the third pending icon h23 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

In Figure 78 (j), the variable display of special chart 2 has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed frozen.

In Figure 78 (k), one reserved symbol for special symbol 2 is consumed, and a pattern change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current reserved number is two. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this pattern change start command, and although the display of the change in special symbol 2 has begun, the reserved number for special symbol 2 remains at two. Therefore, the second reserved icon h22 is displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode) at the specified size from the beginning without any increase animation. In addition, a movement animation has also begun in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this movement animation, the reserved icon that initially failed to display at the timing of Figure 78 (d) is displayed as the change icon h0. The change icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the currently occurring change display, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the result of the success/failure determination made by the main control unit 300 as a command at the start of the pattern change. The pending icon that was not displayed will have its jackpot reliability displayed as a percentage when it becomes the variable icon h0. Subsequent pending icons that were displayed in the default display mode even though the prediction result was known will also have their jackpot reliability displayed as a percentage at this time. If a pending icon that failed to receive a winning command results in a jackpot, it may not be possible to display an icon that reflects the change in the game status after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, the display mode is changed after the pending icon that failed to receive a winning command is actually consumed and the result of the win/loss determination is announced. Even if the pending icon that was not displayed becomes the variable icon h0, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may remain unchanged and remain in the default display mode. The display mode of subsequent pending icons that were displayed in the default display mode even though the prediction result was known may remain unchanged and remain in the default display mode. The display modes of both the variable icon h0 and the subsequent pending icons may remain unchanged and remain in the default display mode. Alternatively, the display mode of this subsequent reserved icon can be changed at any time as long as the first sub-controller 400 stores the look-ahead results. For example, the display mode may be changed based on the look-ahead results when the first reserved icon h21 is reached. Furthermore, in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 78(k), 1 is not displayed and 2 remains displayed. In other words, the reserved number value remains displayed as 2 without being reduced to 1.

In Figure 78 (l), the icon movement animation has ended, and the variable icon display area 280 displays a round variable icon h0 with a 5% indication, while the hold icon display area 282 of Special Chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 with a 5% indication. The second hold icon h22, which is the hold icon that failed to display for the second time at the timing of Figure 78 (i), is still in its default display mode, and will remain in its default display mode until it becomes variable icon h0. A changing sound is output from the speaker 120.

In addition, if a jackpot occurs in presentation mode C and the RUSH state is resumed in presentation mode C after the jackpot play, the percentage display of the jackpot reliability that was displayed before the jackpot play will be re-drawn and a new value will be displayed. Even in this case, the percentage display of the jackpot reliability will not be displayed for pending icons after the pending icon that was not displayed.

The number of reserved balls can be displayed by a lamp such as the special symbol 2 reserved lamp 220, which is displayed by the main control unit 300, or by a reserved icon display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a numerical display in the reserved number notification area of the fourth symbol display area 284, which is displayed by the first sub-control unit 400. Even in the case of a lamp display by the first sub-control unit 400, if the first sub-control unit 400 determines the correct current number of reserved balls after failing to receive a winning command, the lamps that light up according to the number of reserved balls will light up from one lamp lit, and then the second and third lamps will light up simultaneously, as shown in Figures 75(e), 76(e), and 78(e).

In addition, Figures 75 (e), 76 (e), and 78 (e) show examples where, while one reserve icon is displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning command indicating that the number of reserves for special chart 2 is 3. However, if a winning command indicating that the number of reserves for special chart 2 is 4 is received, the second reserve icon h22 and the third reserve icon h23 are displayed without increasing animation in the reserve icon display area 282 for special chart 2, and the fourth reserve icon h24 is displayed with increasing animation, and in the reserve number notification area for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284, the number is updated from 1 to 4 in one go, skipping 2 and 3. Furthermore, when two reserve icons are displayed and the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning command indicating that the reserve number for special symbol 2 is 4, the third reserve icon h23 is displayed without increasing animation in the reserve icon display area 282 for special symbol 2, and the fourth reserve icon h24 is displayed with increasing animation, and the reserve number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 is updated from 2 to 4 in one go, skipping 3. Even in these cases, the manner in which the reserve icon that failed to be displayed due to a failed command reception is displayed once the correct current reserve number is known is the same as that described above.

Note that the first sub-control unit 400 in the above description may be a sub-control unit that combines the functions of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500.

According to the above description,
"A main control means [for example, a main control unit 300] capable of counting the increase in the number of reserved balls based on the ball entering the starting hole;
A sub-control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that receives an increase signal (e.g., a winning command) sent from the main control means when the reserved number increases;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) controlled by the sub-control means,
The production means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon in the first display area [for example, the hold icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2],
The production means is a means capable of displaying the reserved number display in the second display area [for example, the reserved number notification area of the special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284],
The sub-control means is a means for displaying a hold icon in the first display area when the increase signal is received (e.g., Figures 75(b) to 75(c), 76(b) to 76(c), and 78(b) to 78(c)),
The sub-control means is a means for updating and displaying the value of the hold number display when the increase signal is received [e.g., Figure 75(b), Figure 76(b), Figure 78(b)],
The presentation means is a means for, when one hold icon is displayed and the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the hold number is three [e.g., Figures 75(e), 76(e), 78(e)], displaying a second hold icon [e.g., second hold icon h22] and a third hold icon [e.g., third hold icon h23] in the first display area, while updating the value of the hold number display to 3 without updating it to 2 in the second display area [e.g., skipping 2 and updating from 1 to 3 in one go].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine makes it possible to quickly inform players of the exact number of reserved balls, and also to notify them of any abnormalities by changing the display depending on the display area.

Note that the phrase "when the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the reserved number is 3" means "when the sub-control means does not receive an increase signal indicating that the reserved number is 2, but receives an increase signal indicating that the reserved number is 3" (the same applies hereinafter).
Also,
"The effect means is a means for, when one hold icon is displayed and the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of holds is three [for example, Figures 75(e), 76(e), and 78(e)], displaying the second hold icon in the first display area without using an increase animation [for example, an animation in which the hold icon gradually becomes larger toward a predetermined size] [for example, displaying it at a predetermined size from the beginning], and displaying the third hold icon using the increase animation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

By quickly displaying hold icons that should already be displayed, and using the aforementioned increasing animation for hold icons that are displayed at the correct time, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the correct number of hold icons and also to add excitement to the game.

Also,
"When the presentation means displays the hold icon in a first presentation mode [for example, presentation mode A, presentation mode B, or presentation mode C], it may display the icon in a manner suggesting the possibility that the player will be in an advantageous position (hereinafter referred to as a "suggestion manner") [for example, the reliability of a jackpot may be indicated by a color or by a number in a percentage],
The presentation means is a means for, in the first presentation mode, when one hold icon is displayed and the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of holds is three, not starting to display the second hold icon in the suggested mode, and not starting to display the third hold icon in the suggested mode either [for example, Figures 78(e) to 78(f)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

If the increase signal is not received properly, the hold icon will not be displayed in the suggested manner, preventing incorrect information from being provided.

The presentation means may be a means for displaying the second hold icon, which was not displayed in the suggested mode, in the suggested mode when the icon becomes a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0 in Figure 78(l)]. Furthermore, the presentation means may be a means for displaying the third hold icon, which was not displayed in the suggested mode, in the suggested mode when the second hold icon becomes a variable icon [for example, first hold icon h21 in Figure 78(l)].

Furthermore, in the first presentation mode, when one hold icon is displayed and the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of holds is three, the presentation means may be means for not displaying the second hold icon [for example, the second hold icon h22 in Figure 76(e)] in the suggested manner, but displaying the third hold icon in the suggested manner [for example, the third hold icon h23 in Figures 76(e) to 76(f)].

Furthermore, not displaying in the suggested mode may mean displaying in the default display mode. The default display mode is a display mode that does not indicate the possibility of the player gaining an advantage, and may be the display mode that is displayed after power is restored after a power outage [for example, the display mode of the first hold icon h21 shown in Figure 77 (d), (D), or (E)].

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for displaying the second hold icon in the default display mode of the suggestion mode [for example, a display mode suggesting the lowest possibility] when the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of holds is three while one hold icon is being displayed in the first presentation mode [for example, the second hold icon h22 in Figure 75 (e) is displayed in a normal color display mode indicating an 8% probability of winning].

Also,
"The suggestion mode is a mode in which a number indicating the reliability suggesting the possibility that the player will be in an advantageous state is displayed on the hold icon [for example, a mode in which the reliability of a jackpot is displayed in a percentage number in presentation mode C].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

By allowing players to directly grasp the reliability of the indication of the possibility of an advantageous situation, the presentation is easy to understand even for beginners, increasing the enjoyment of the game. It also makes it easier to understand the timing of the variable displays that should be noted.

Figure 79 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in Figure 79, a predetermined number of gaming media (e.g., gaming balls) are circulated inside the gaming machine. In other words, gaming media fired from the firing means 901 into the gaming area 902 can be ejected from the gaming area 902 and supplied to the firing means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 that displays information on the number of gaming media (prize balls, loaned balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the gaming area 902 on the front of the gaming machine, and the upper tray 126 and lower tray 128 shown in Figure 48 are not provided.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48 may further include the display means 903 described above on the upper tray 126, and may further include a touch panel on the display means 903. That is, the touch panel on the display means 903 may function as an operation means. A single touch operation, a rapid tap operation, or a long press operation on the touch panel may execute an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136. Alternatively, if the long press auto rapid tap function is enabled, a pseudo rapid tap operation may be performed on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. The long press auto rapid tap function may also be disabled. The long press auto rapid tap function may also be enabled for some effects. In other words, the long press auto rapid tap function may be enabled on the touch panel, or may not be enabled, and the touch panel may be configured to activate more or fewer effects. Additionally, there are multiple effects that can be achieved by repeatedly tapping the touch panel, and when using the touch panel, the long press auto-tap function may be configured to be inactive more often or less often.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in Figure 79 is a machine in which balls are enclosed and circulated within the machine for use; the enclosed balls may be used as fired balls, and the payout of balls may be carried out using credits.

Next, we will use Figure 80 to explain a slot machine (reel gaming machine) as a gaming machine applicable to the present invention. Here, Figure 79 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention, viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 80 comprises a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, center reel 1011, right reel 1012) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer peripheries (not shown in Figure 80) are housed inside the center of the main body 1001 and are configured to rotate within the slot machine 1000. These reels 1010 to 1012 are driven to rotate by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to form each reel 1010-1012. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 1010-1012 are displayed vertically in approximately three columns through the symbol display window 1013, for a total of nine symbols. By spinning each reel 1010-1012, the symbol combinations visible to the player change. In other words, each reel 1010-1012 functions as a display device that variably displays multiple symbol combinations. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal displays can also be used as such display devices. In this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and their installation locations are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) is located on the back of each reel 1010-1012 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable for the reel backlight to be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each reel 1010-1012, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length attached to the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. The rotational position of the symbols on the reel is determined based on the detection results of this sensor, and the reels 1010-1012 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The payline indicator lamp 1020 indicates which paylines 1014 are active. The active paylines are predetermined based on the number of medals bet as gaming media. There are five paylines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal payline is active. If two medals are bet, the top horizontal payline and the bottom horizontal payline are active, adding three lines. If three medals are bet, the bottom horizontal payline and the top right-upward payline are active, adding five lines. Note that the number of paylines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, if one medal is bet, the five lines active may be the middle horizontal payline, the top horizontal payline, the bottom horizontal payline, the bottom right-upward payline, and the top right-upward payline. Hereinafter, active paylines may be referred to as active lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

Medal insertion buttons 1030-1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, up to a maximum of three medals; two medals are inserted when medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. Hereinafter, medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. Note that game medal insertion lamps 1029 light up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, game start lamp 1021 lights up, indicating that game play can be started.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals to start a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030-1032, or physical medals can be inserted (inserted) through the medal insertion slot 1041; the term "inserting" encompasses both. The stored medal count display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout medal count display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a certain winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored medal count display 1025, game information display 1026, and payout medal count display 1027 are configured as 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. In other words, when the desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or when the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 begin to rotate. Operating the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037-1039 as an example of an operating means. The stop buttons 1037-1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010-1012 that have begun to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010-1012. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1037-1039 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation. The reel targeted by the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel targeted by the second stop operation being referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel targeted by the third stop operation being referred to as the third stop reel. Light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037-1039, and when the stop buttons 1037-1039 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that can be pressed to remove inserted medals if they become jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button that can be used to settle medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout outlet for dispensing medals.

To the right of the medal insertion button 1032 is provided a chance button 1100, which serves as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operation of the reels 1010-1012, or operations related to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Furthermore, like the pachinko machine 100 of the above embodiment, the chance button 1100 can be in multiple states, and may be able to change states during the valid period for operation of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is an operation button for calling up a user menu (e.g., a menu for setting a player's personal gaming history information), and is composed of multiple buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to the operation means.

Below the stop button unit 1036 is a title panel 1062 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed, and a title panel lamp 1064 lights up the title panel 1062. Below the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

Sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker installed inside slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 installed on the left and right sides of front door 1002 are decorative lamps to add excitement to the game. A performance device 1060 is installed above front door 1002, and sound hole 1043 is installed above performance device 1060. This performance device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two shutters, right shutter 1063a and left shutter 1063b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown, performance image display device) installed behind this shutter 1063. When right shutter 1063a and left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally outward in front of liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears on the front (player side) of slot machine 1000.

Note that the device does not have to be an LCD display, as long as it is configured to display various presentation images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen may be used. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Furthermore, decorations (not shown) may be provided around the edges of the display screen, so that part of the edges of the display screen are hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregularly shaped. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

With the slot machine 1000 described above, for example, normal play can be made to correspond to a first play state (e.g., normal play state) in the pachinko machine 100, and the CZ (chance zone) or premonition effect that signals a transition to AT (assist time) or ART (assist replay time) can be made to correspond to a second play state (e.g., a special state) in the pachinko machine 100. AT or ART can be made to correspond to a third play state (e.g., a small win rush) in the pachinko machine 100, and bonuses such as BB (big bonus) and RB (regular bonus) can be made to correspond to jackpot play in the pachinko machine 100. By adapting these to the above-described embodiments, the present invention can also be realized in the slot machine 1000.

The gaming machine according to the present invention may be a casino machine 2000 as shown in Figure 81(a), which "inputs a bill into the bill slot 2002, conducts a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, displays the lottery results on the lottery result display device 2008, adds the number of bonus coins to the remaining credits when a win is made, and if cash out 2009 is selected, issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 bearing a code corresponding to the remaining credits."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 1(b), the present invention may be applied to a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that implements the present invention, as shown in Figure 1(c), a portable game console 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that implements the present invention, and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that implements the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in Figure (b) comprises an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data via a mobile phone line, a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory unit and operation of the operation unit.

The portable game console 4000 in Figure (c) comprises an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a specified storage medium (such as a DVD), a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory and operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in Figure (d) comprises an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a specified storage medium (such as a DVD), a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory and operation of the operation unit.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 1(e), the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data embodying the present invention. Electronic data embodying the present invention may be downloaded from this data server 6000 via an internet line to a home video game console 5000 shown in Figure 1(d).

The present invention can also be applied to game programs that simulate the operation of real machines such as pachinko machines for home gaming machines. In such cases, the recording medium for recording the game program can be a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium.

Furthermore, while the present invention has been described using pachinko machines and slot machines as examples of gaming machines, it is not limited to these and may also be applied to arrange ball gaming machines, Jankyu gaming machines, smart ball gaming machines, etc.

Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferred actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, or appendix, as explained above, that component may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, or appendix. In other words, as long as there are no factors preventing such application, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, or appendix, it will still constitute a single, cohesive technical idea even if it is applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, or appendix.

Next, using Figures 82 to 104, we will explain in detail other gaming machines that can be used with the present invention (for example, pinball gaming machines such as pachinko machines and reel gaming machines such as slot machines). As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in Figures 82 to 104 will only be used in explanations using Figures 82 to 104, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 82 to 104 will take precedence in explanations using Figures 82 to 104.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 82. Note that this figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that allows players to win profits when certain conditions are met, and is equipped with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a launching device 110, and a gaming board 200 on its front (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island equipment, etc.) in an amusement machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as the base shaft of the gaming machine, shaped like a vertical rectangle, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via hinges 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. Staff at the store (gaming parlor) where this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 is provided to detect when the main body 104 is open.

The front frame door 106 is a door element with a locking function and is attached to the front of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. It is frame-shaped and has an opening on the inside. Gaming parlor staff can also open and close this front frame door 106, and it is also equipped with a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front of the game board 200 define a space in which the play area 124 is located. The front frame door 106 is an example of a door body. In this embodiment, lamps that use LED light sources are also referred to as lamps.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door element that has a locking function and is attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front of the pachinko machine 100 so that it can be opened and closed freely. The ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pressing the opening lever 1081, which can be operated when the front frame door 106 is open. A ball storage tray door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage tray door 108 is open. The door 108 with ball storage tray is equipped with a ball storage tray 126 that can store multiple game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and has a passageway for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110, a ball removal button 130 that is operated by the player to eject the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 from the ball storage tray 126, a ball launch handle 134 that is operated by the player to launch the game balls that have been guided to the launching device 110 into the game area 124 of the game board, an effect button 136 that is operated by the player to change the effect mode of various effect devices, a button lamp 138 that is built into the effect button 136 and causes the effect button 136 to light up, and a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending command to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade. Although not shown in Figure 1, a return operation button is also provided to the right of the ball lending operation button 140, which is used to instruct the card unit to return the player's balance. It also has an operation key unit 190 on which a cross key and a decision button are located.

The launching device 110 is attached to the bottom of the main body 104 and comprises a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, this launching device 110 launches a game ball toward the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined launch period (e.g., 0.6 seconds), and is an example of a launching means.

Figure 83 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 in Figure 82.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 with an opening that opens upwards for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154 located below the ball tank 150 for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball tank 150 to a payout device 152 located on the right side of the back.

The dispensing device 152 consists of a cylindrical member, and inside it is equipped with a dispensing motor, sprocket, and dispensing sensor (not shown). This dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached to a predetermined position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains gaming balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152. By driving the payout motor and rotating it a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained gaming balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies driving force to gaming balls to transport them.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of gaming balls sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 86) when a gaming ball is passing, and the other signal, either a high or low, when a gaming ball is not passing. Gaming balls that pass this payout sensor are configured to travel through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the ball storage tray 126 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and when a predetermined award condition is met, the pachinko machine 100 uses this configuration to award (pay out) to the player an amount of gaming value (gaming balls) according to that award condition.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152 are a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see Figure 86) that performs overall control processing for the game, a first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see Figure 86) that performs control processing related to presentation based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300, a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see Figure 86) that performs control processing related to presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, and an error release switch that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 86) that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls and releases errors when operated by a gaming store employee. The system is equipped with a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 equipped with a switch 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see Figure 86) that performs control processing related to the launch of gaming balls, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 (see Figure 86) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines and is equipped with a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off when operated by an amusement facility employee and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on, and a CR interface unit 186 that sends and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and a bonus ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated provided that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the machine can transition to a setting change mode in which the machine can be set to one of several settings with at least different jackpot probabilities. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the machine may also be configured so that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed.

The reel ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and located inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to store staff. The reel ratio/setting display 196 consists of two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, with a single-digit 7-segment LED modularized on the right side. The reel ratio monitor is an indicator that reports the reel ratio (YH) and consecutive reel ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current setting. The reel ratio/setting display 196 is composed of single-color LEDs, such as red, green, blue, and white, but may also be capable of emitting light in three colors: red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a portion of the reel ratio/setting display 196 may be mounted on the game board 200, for example, to be visible to players.

In addition, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

Figure 84 is a simplified front view of the gaming board 200. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed in place. Arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand as the right. Arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side may be referred to as the top and the lower side as the bottom. Although not shown in Figure 84, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-to-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the near side may be referred to as the front side or front side, and the far side may be referred to as the rear side or back side.

The game board 200 has a play area 124 on the front and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the play area 124 can be observed through the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

A variety of structures can be used to attach the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, one possible structure is to insert the left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the game board 200 as seen from the front into the left side of the main body 104 as seen from the front, and then rotate the game board 200 around this position while pressing the right side (right side) 200b of the game board 200 against the main body 104 to set it in place. This structure may improve workability.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to the game board 201, which is a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is formed, for example, from resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters from the pachinko machine 100, etc. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters from the pachinko machine 100, etc. are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is disposed on the lower right of the game board 201. If a vibration is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, an alert using an image or sound, or stopping the game to prevent further play) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may also be a magnetic sensor or other fraud detection sensor.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, defining a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached and detached to the main body 104. Within the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the launched game ball.

Areas on the game board 200 other than the play area 124 may be referred to as non-play areas. The play area 124 and non-play areas can be distinguished by the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Furthermore, the area inside the area through which game balls pass when the game ball's launch strength is at its maximum may be referred to as the play area 124. The play area 124 may include areas through which game balls do not pass due to the presence of a performance device or the like within the play area 124. The play area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area because game balls flow down during play, and the non-play area may be referred to as a non-flow-down area because game balls do not flow down during play except during maintenance or accidents. The entire play area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but areas through which game balls do not flow down due to the presence of a performance device or the like may also be referred to as non-flow-down areas.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is located approximately in the center of the play area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the play area 124, and on the main control lamp board 254 are arranged a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220. In addition, the main control lamp board 254 is further provided with a high probability lamp HL, an electric support lamp TL, and a right hit lamp RL. Note that, below, normal symbols may be referred to as "normal symbols" and special symbols as "special symbols."

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various decorative patterns and effects, and in this embodiment is configured as a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c each display a different decorative pattern, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used in the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used as long as they are capable of displaying various effects and various game information, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The regular map display device 210 is a display device for displaying regular maps, and in this embodiment is configured with a 7-segment LED. The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps, and in this embodiment are each configured with a 7-segment LED.

The regular symbol reserve lamp 216 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved regular symbol variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of regular symbol variable games. The second special symbol reserve lamp 220 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games. Note that in this embodiment, the first special symbol reserve lamp is not provided, but it may be provided.

The high probability lamp HL is a lamp that indicates that the game state is in a high probability state where a jackpot is likely to occur, or that it will enter a high probability state. The electric support lamp TL is a lamp that indicates that the normal symbol variable display time is shortened and that the electric support state, in which the blade members 2311 (see Figure 85) of the electric tulip (electric chute) described below, are likely to open for a long period of time. The right hit indicator lamp RL is a lamp that indicates that the game is in a jackpot game state, a probability variable state, or an electric support state, and that the player can benefit from these states by hitting right. In addition, in the event of a jackpot, a round indicator lamp may be provided to show the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to that jackpot.

The game board 200 shown in Figure 84 has a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in an area where game balls can roll. The warp device 242 ejects game balls that enter a warp entrance 242a located on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 from a warp exit 242b onto the stage 244. The stage 244 is located below and forward of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is the stage where game balls that pass through the warp device 242 exhibit movements such as reciprocating and rotational motion. The reciprocating and rotational motion of the game balls increases the time they remain on the stage 244. A stage cover 245 is provided on the stage 244.

In addition, a first movable effect unit 7 is positioned above the play area 124 and supported by the main body 104. Furthermore, a second movable effect unit 8 is positioned below and behind the stage 244 and supported by the main body 104, but the second movable effect unit 8 is not visible in Figure 84.

As shown in FIG. 84, a portion of the top of the play area 124 is covered with a decorative cover 203. In addition, the upper right portion of the play area 124 is covered with a decorative upper right cover 205.

In addition, in this embodiment, a normal map start opening 228 is located in the lower center of the gaming board 200. In this embodiment, one normal map start opening 228 is located in the lower center of the gaming board 200. When a ball enters the normal map start opening 228, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 83 is driven to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, four balls), and the entering game ball is guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. Note that the game ball that enters the normal map start opening 228 may be returned to the board surface, and no prize balls may be paid out. The normal map start opening 228 may also be located in the left side area. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the normal map start opening 228, the pachinko machine 100 begins normal map variable play using the normal map display device 210.

In addition, a general prize opening is also located in the lamp unit 9 extending to the left. Although not shown, general prize openings are provided in several other locations in the game area. When a ball enters a general prize opening, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, determining that the general prize opening has been won, and driving the payout device 152, which discharges a predetermined number of balls (for example, four) as prize balls into the ball storage tray 126. The balls discharged into the ball storage tray 126 can be freely removed by the player, and this configuration allows prize balls to be paid out to the player based on the win. Balls that enter a general prize opening are guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 before being discharged towards the game island.

As shown in Figure 85(a), the attacker unit 23 is provided with a first special starting hole (variable) 231, a second special starting hole 232, multiple variable winning holes (attackers) 234, 235, and a normal electric gate 228g. As shown in Figure 84, the normal starting hole 228 located at the bottom center is configured such that it is difficult for a game ball to enter it when hit from the right. Meanwhile, a special route 244a is provided in the center of the above-mentioned stage 244, making it easier for a ball that reaches the stage 244 to enter the normal starting hole 228 located at the bottom center of the game board 200. It is also possible to aim for the normal starting hole 228 from the left side without passing through the stage 244. Therefore, the normal starting hole 228 located at the bottom center of the game board 200 is a starting hole where a ball can be expected to enter when hit from the left. Thus, in this embodiment, in normal game mode, where left-handed hitting is recommended, the game is played primarily by having the game ball enter the normal map start hole 228 and displaying the normal map fluctuations on the normal map display device 210.

Furthermore, the play area 124 is equipped with a disk-shaped ball direction changer 236 called a windmill and multiple play nails, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204 is an outlet 240 that guides balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharges them to the play island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies a ball stored in the ball storage tray 126 to the launch position on the launch rail, which drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, causing the ball to pass through the outer rail 202 and inner rail 204 using the launch rod and launch hammer and launch into the play area 124. The ball then flows downward, changing direction using the ball direction changing member 236 and play pins, and either enters one of the various winning slots or starting slots, or reaches the outlet 240 without entering any winning slots or starting slots, or simply passing through the normal starting slot 228. In this embodiment, a discharged ball receiving port (not shown) that receives all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower edge of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward, and an out ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of game balls received in the discharged ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may also be provided on the game board 200 side. In this embodiment, all game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the outlet 240 and game balls that have entered various winning ports) are received by this discharged ball receiving port and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage; however, it is also possible for only game balls discharged from the outlet 240 to pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, we will explain the attacker unit 23 located in the lower right corner of the play area 124.

The attacca unit 23 shown in Figures 85(a) and (b) is arranged on the back side of the attacca front plate 2301 (Figure 84). An attacca seal 2302 is affixed to the front of the attacca front plate 2301 (see Figure 84). Note that the decorative pattern of the attacca seal 2302 is omitted in Figure 84.

As shown in Figures 85(a) and 85(b), the attacca unit 23 is composed of a unit main body 32a placed on the gaming board 200 side and a unit cover body 23b that covers the front side of the unit main body 32a.

The unit body 32a has an electric chute-type special symbol 1 starting hole (variable) 231, a first variable winning hole 234 which serves as the first attacker, a second variable winning hole 235 which serves as the second attacker, and a second special symbol starting hole 232. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the special symbol 1 starting hole (variable) 231, the ball detection sensor 2312 detects it, and as a prize in the special symbol 1 starting hole (variable) 231, the payout device 152 is activated and a predetermined number of balls (for example, one ball) are discharged into the ball storage tray 126 as prize balls. The game ball that enters the special symbol 1 starting hole (variable) 231 is discharged from the discharge hole 231a to the back side of the game board 200. Furthermore, when a ball enters the first variable winning opening 234, a ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a prize in the first variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is activated, and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 15 balls) are discharged as prize balls into the ball storage tray 126. Furthermore, a specific area 234v is provided inside the first variable winning opening 234 through which a gaming ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 can pass, and in this embodiment, when a gaming ball passes through the specific area 234v during a small jackpot game, the game transitions to a big jackpot game. Note that a specific area may be provided inside the second variable winning opening 235 without providing the first variable winning opening 234. When a ball enters second variable winning opening 235, ball detection sensor 2352 detects it, and as a winning ball, second variable winning opening 235 is determined to have been entered, so payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls (for example, 15 balls) are discharged as prize balls into ball storage tray 126. Also, when a ball enters special drawing 2 starting opening 232, a ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning ball, special drawing 2 starting opening 232 is determined to have been entered, so payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls (for example, 1 ball) are discharged as prize balls into ball storage tray 126.

The size of the special chart 1 starting opening (variable) 231 can be changed by the shutter member 2311, and the shutter member 2311 shown in Figure 85(a) is movable forward and backward. When the shutter member 2311 is advanced forward, the game ball passes over the advanced shutter member 2311. That is, in Figure 85(a), the game ball passes from the right side to the left side of the figure. The ball detection sensor 2312 of the special chart 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is located below the shutter member 2311, downstream, facing upstream. Therefore, when the shutter member 2311 is advanced forward, the game ball can easily pass through the ball detection sensor 2312, and the special chart 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. A gaming ball that passes through ball detection sensor 2312 passes through ball passage 2313 and is guided to the back of the gaming board 200 through outlet 231a. On the other hand, when shutter member 2311 is retracted to the rear, it is difficult for the gaming ball to pass through ball detection sensor 2312, and special chart 1 starting port (variable) 231 becomes a state in which it is difficult to win. In addition, in this embodiment, a normal power activation gate 228g is located near the upstream side of special chart 2 starting port 232, and when a gaming ball passes through normal power activation gate 228g, the shutter member 2311, described below, is activated regardless of the status of the normal chart variable display. In other words, in this embodiment, a gaming ball that passes through normal power activation gate 228g enters special chart 2 starting port 232 directly.

The second variable winning opening 235, which serves as the second attacker, is located downstream in the direction of ball rolling (flow) from the first variable winning opening 234, which serves as the first attacker. The size of this second variable winning opening 235 is variable using a shutter member 2351, and the shutter member 2351 shown in Figure 85(a) is movable forward and backward. When the shutter member 2351 is advanced forward, the game ball passes over the advanced shutter member 2351. In other words, in Figure 85(a), the game ball passes from the right side to the left side of the figure. The ball detection sensor 2352 for the second variable winning opening is located below the shutter member 2351 and faces upward. Therefore, when the shutter member 2351 is advanced forward, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the ball detection sensor 2352, and the second variable winning opening 235 is in a state where it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize. On the other hand, when the shutter member 2351 is retracted to the rear, game balls can easily pass through the ball detection sensor 2352, and the second variable winning opening 235 is in a state where winning is easy.

The first variable winning opening 234 can be switched between an open and closed state by the door element 2341. When the door element 2341 is in the open state, game balls can be received into the first variable winning opening 234, but when it is in the closed state, game balls cannot be received (or are difficult to receive) into the first variable winning opening 234.

The second special symbol start opening 232 is located where the gaming ball falls. This second special symbol start opening 232 has a fixed size winning opening, and gaming balls that enter the second special symbol start opening 232 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then ejected onto the gaming island side.

As shown in Figure 85 (b), the unit cover body 23b is provided with a ball passage forming wall 230r that protrudes toward the unit main body 23a. The ball passage forming wall 230r forms a ball passage 239 that is inclined toward the downstream side, along which the gaming ball that enters the attacker unit 23 rolls. Furthermore, the ball passage forming wall 230r is not provided at the position where the shutter member 2311 advances or the position where the shutter member 2351 advances, and the advanced shutter member 2311 or shutter member 2351 becomes the ball passage forming wall. In other words, when the shutter member 2311 or shutter member 2351 advances forward, it is inclined downward toward the downstream side, and this inclination is used to roll the gaming ball downstream.

The solid arrows in Figure 85(a) indicate the path of the game ball that rolls over the ball passage forming wall 230r and the advanced shutter member 2311 (the same applies to the arrows in the following figures). In other words, the game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 shows the route toward the special chart 1 starting port (variable) 231, as indicated by the solid arrow. Also, the dashed arrows in the same figure (a) indicate the path of the game ball that rolls over the ball passage forming wall 230r and the advanced shutter member 2351 when the shutter member 2311 retracts and the shutter member 2351 advances. In other words, the game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 shows the route toward the special chart 2 starting port 232, as indicated by the dashed arrow. Here, when the shutter member 2351 is retracted, as shown by the solid arrow at the bottom in Figure 85 (a), the game ball falls from the shutter member 2311 and the shutter member 2351 and enters the second variable winning opening 235, and after being detected as a winning ball by the ball detection sensor 2352, it passes through the ball passage 2343 and is guided to the back of the game board through the discharge opening 235a.

A game ball that falls to just before the second special symbol start port 232 passes through the normal power operation gate 228g and enters the second special symbol start port 232, causing the shutter member 2311 to advance forward and starting the special symbol 2 variable game. In this embodiment, ribs 23r5 are protruding from the left and right sides of the upstream side of the normal power operation gate 228g so that most game balls flowing down toward the second special symbol start port 232 are guided by the normal power operation gate 228g. However, some game balls flowing down toward the second special symbol start port 232 may pass through the normal power operation gate 228g, while others may not. Alternatively, the game balls may be guided by the normal power operation gate 228g so that all game balls pass through the normal power operation gate 228g. Furthermore, because this embodiment is configured in this manner, for example, when the second special symbol display device 214 is prevented from displaying a pattern change of special symbol 2 while the first special symbol display device 212 is allowed to display a pattern change of special symbol 1, it may be possible to prevent the occurrence of irregular gameplay, such as activating the shutter member 2311 by targeting only the normal power operating gate 228g and displaying a pattern change of special symbol 1.

As shown in Figure 85(a), multiple ribs are provided on the unit main body 23a. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 85(b), multiple ribs are also provided on the unit cover body 23b. Looking upstream along the flow of the game balls, multiple ribs are spaced apart along the flow path of the game balls from the downstream side of the first variable winning opening 234 to just before the shutter member 2311 of the special game ball starting opening 231. That is, in the passage that passes through the first variable winning opening 234 and turns back in an S shape, four ribs 23r1 are protruding on the unit main body 23a side, and five ribs 23f1 are protruding on the unit cover body 23b side. These ribs 23r1, 23f1 are alternately arranged in a plan view to prevent balls from clogging the flow path. The passage in which ribs 23r1 and 23f1 are arranged faces downward, and three ribs 23r2 protrude from the downward-facing passage on the unit main body 23a side and two ribs 23f2 protrude from the unit cover body 23b side. These ribs 23r2 and 23f2 are similarly arranged alternately in a side view. In this embodiment, because of this configuration, a game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 flows down while colliding with the ribs before reaching the shutter member 2311 of the special drawing 1 starting port 231, which may reduce the flow speed of the game ball.

In addition, a rib 2314 protrudes above the shutter member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting hole 231 in the unit main body 23a, and a rib 2315 protrudes above the shutter member 2311 in the unit cover body 23b. As a result, for example, if the shutter member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting hole 231 is operated for a short period of time to make it difficult for a ball to enter the special figure 1 starting hole 231, the game ball rolling on the shutter member 2311 can be caused to collide with the ribs 2314 and 2315, slowing the ball's downward flow speed and making it even more difficult for the ball to enter the special figure 1 starting hole 231.

Furthermore, four ribs 23r3 are protruding along the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 above the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 in the unit main body 23a, and four ribs 23f3 are protruding along the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 above the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 in the unit cover body 23b. These ribs 23r3, 23f3 are arranged alternately in a plan view to prevent ball clogging in the flow path. Furthermore, in this embodiment, due to this configuration, multiple game balls may be more likely to become trapped on the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235. Furthermore, two ribs 23f3 are also arranged downstream of the second variable winning opening 235 in the unit cover body 23b. The width of the ball passage 239 is specified on the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 to prevent multiple game balls from flowing down in parallel. In this embodiment, because of this configuration, game balls rolling on the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 collide with the ribs as they flow down, which may reduce the speed at which the game balls flow down.

The ball passage 239 downstream of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 has a downwardly S-shaped passageway, which then bends downward and is guided to the normal-operated gate 228g. Here, at the bend in the S-shaped portion of the ball passage 239, two ribs 23f4 protrude from the corners of the ball passage-forming wall 230r to guide the flow path of the game balls flowing down there. This may prevent ball jams from occurring. It may also reduce the flow speed of game balls flowing down the ball passage 239. In this embodiment, the time it takes for a game ball flowing down the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 to enter the special game starting opening 232 is configured to be the time required to fire two or more game balls (e.g., 1.2 seconds). This may prevent deviations from the designed ball payout rate, for example, when the game state changes. Note that as long as two or more shots can be fired, the time is not limited to 1.2 seconds, but can be any time longer than 1.2 seconds.

In addition, in the ball passage 239 downstream of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235, the only winning opening (winning opening) through which a game ball is paid out when a ball enters is the special chart 2 starting opening 232. Note that if a ball does not enter the special chart 2 starting opening 232, it may enter the outlet 240, but no prize balls will be paid out even if the ball enters the outlet 240. This may make it possible to prevent deviation from the designed ball payout rate, for example, when the game state changes.

Specifically, during a jackpot game, most game balls will generally enter the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235, and therefore, in the a2 time-saving game state that transitions to the jackpot game described below, there are (in most cases) no game balls remaining downstream of the second variable winning opening 235. Therefore, by configuring the time it takes for a game ball flowing down the top surface of the shutter member 2351 to enter the special chart 2 starting opening 232 to be a time that allows two or more game balls to be fired (e.g., 1.2 seconds), it is possible to prevent a situation in which the number of winning game balls exceeds the number of game balls fired in the a2 time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the incitement of gambling desires. If the time it takes for the ball to enter another winning slot (special chart 2 starting slot 232) from the top of the shutter member 2351 is short, it may enter the winning slot (special chart 2 starting slot 232) before the game ball is released in the A2 time-saving game state, resulting in a situation where a prize ball is paid out even though the game ball has not been released, which can encourage gambling.

In the above example, the ribs are provided on both the unit main body 23a and the unit cover body 23b, but some may be provided only on the unit main body 23a side, or some may be provided only on the unit cover body 23b side. Furthermore, the configuration may also include ribs provided only on the unit main body 23a side, or ribs provided only on the unit cover body 23b side.

As described above, in the attacker unit 23 according to this embodiment, the attacker for the first variable winning slot 234 is an attacker that opens and closes during small win play, and the attacker for the second variable winning slot 235 is an attacker that opens and closes during big win play. In the special symbol low probability time-saving play state, as described below, a right hit is made, and the A2 time-saving play state, in which the ball is more likely to land in the special symbol 1 starting slot 231, or the A1 time-saving play state, in which the ball is more likely to land in the special symbol 2 starting slot 232, is entered, and the pattern change display is centered on special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. Furthermore, in this embodiment, for special symbol 1, if a big win does not result, a small win is always obtained. If a small win occurs, the first variable winning slot 234 opens (e.g., 5,800 ms x 1 time), and if special symbol 2 is currently being displayed, the pattern change display for that special symbol 2 is discarded, resulting in a miss. For this reason, in the event of a small win, the game ball is more likely to enter the first variable winning opening 234 and pass through the specific area 234v. This makes it more likely that a jackpot game will be initiated based on the ball passing through the specific area 234v. In this case, the opening operation of the first variable winning opening 234 is treated as the opening operation of the first round, and therefore the round in which the second variable winning opening 235 opens first after the transition to the jackpot game is treated as the second round. Control by game state will be described later. In this embodiment, two variable winning openings, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, are provided, but only one variable winning opening may be provided. In this case, only the second variable winning opening 235 may be provided.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be explained in detail using Figure 86. Note that this figure is a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls in response to commands sent by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100.

First, we will explain the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring program processing anomalies, and a random number generator (counter circuit) 318 (which is assumed to have two built-in counters). Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308; the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, described below. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 316b as the system clock. Additionally, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a. Note that although the random number generation circuit 318 is assumed to be built into the basic circuit 302, it may also be connected to the basic circuit 302.

The basic circuit 302 also includes a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320, including predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors that detect game balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a lower tray full sensor, and outputting the amplification results and comparison results with a reference voltage to the CPU 304 and random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302; a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of predetermined pattern display devices, such as the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214; and a drive circuit 325 for controlling the display of predetermined pattern display devices, such as the regular pattern display device 210. Drive circuit 326 is connected to drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of various status indicators 328 (e.g., normal symbol hold lamp 216, special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, high probability lamp, etc.), and drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including predetermined movable parts such as drive means for driving shutter member 2311 of first special symbol start slot 231 as a normal electric device, and drive means for driving door member 2341 of first variable winning slot 234 as a special electric device, and shutter member 2351 of second variable winning slot 235. In this example, crystal oscillator 316a and random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but crystal oscillator 316a may also be included in random number generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 2312 detects that a ball has entered the first special symbol start hole 231, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special symbol start hole 231 at that timing and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the first special symbol start hole 231. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has entered the second special symbol start hole 232, it latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special symbol start hole 232 at that timing and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special symbol start hole 232.

Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the pachinko machine 100 via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 also has a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. If the power supply voltage value is below a predetermined value (9 V in this example), this voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 also has a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal from this start-up signal output circuit 340, it starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing, which will be described later).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for sending commands to the dispensing control unit 600, respectively. This configuration enables communication between the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, while information communication between the main control unit 300 and the dispensing control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured not to be able to send signals such as commands from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be two-way communication. The dispensing control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but may be configured not to be able to send signals such as commands from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Next, we will explain the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I/O 410 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the control program and various effect data may be stored in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440, which controls the game board lamp 442, and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450, which controls the game frame lamp 452, and controls lighting via serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450.

The basic circuit 402 is also connected to a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the performance devices 2-5, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 outputs to the basic circuit 402 detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the performance devices 2-5, and a button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the performance button 136 and various buttons that make up the operation key unit 190.

Next, we will explain the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. The basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads image data stored in ROM 506 based on signals from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, ROM 506 is connected to basic circuit 502, which stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, as well as data for image display. In this embodiment, memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and is composed of a recording medium (e.g., EEPROM or flash memory) that can retain its stored state even when power is cut off. This allows, for example, information for displaying the jackpot history to be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or settings are changed. It is also possible to use RAM, which volatilizes stored information when power is cut off.

Next, we will explain the payout control unit 600, launch control unit 630, and power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300, and detects whether the payout of prize balls or loan balls has been completed based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608, which is provided separately from the pachinko machine 100, via an interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also outputs prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been paid out, loan ball information indicating that a predetermined number of loan balls (e.g., 25 balls) have been paid out, and other information to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is also connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects when the main body 104 is open, and a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects when the front frame door 106 is open. These sensors detect when the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is open and output an open signal. When the frame sensor 605 outputs an open signal, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and launch hammer 148, and the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper tray 126 to the launch device 110, based on a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs whether to allow or stop launching, and a control signal output by the launch intensity output circuit located within the ball launch handle 134 that instructs the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied externally to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit, such as the main control unit 300 and first sub-control unit 400, and each device, such as the payout device 152. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) to supply power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. Note that in this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. However, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and device via another power supply path.

Next, using Figures 87(a) to (d), we will explain the types of special and regular symbols that are displayed as stopped symbols by the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and regular symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100.

Special chart 1 variable play begins when the ball detection sensor 2312 of the first starting port detects that a ball has entered the special chart 1 starting port 231, and special chart 2 variable play begins when the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 2 starting port 232. When special chart 1 variable play begins, the first special chart display device 212 performs a "special chart 1 variable display" (special chart variable play), for example, by repeatedly turning on and off all seven segments. Furthermore, when special chart 2 variable play begins, the second special chart display device 214 performs a "special chart 2 variable display" (special chart variable play), by repeatedly turning on and off all seven segments. Then, when the change time determined before the start of special chart 1 change has elapsed, the first special chart display device 212 will display a stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1, and when the change time determined before the start of special chart 2 change has elapsed, the second special chart display device 214 will display a stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 2. Hereinafter, the change display from the start of this "change display of special chart 1 or 2" to the stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 or 2 may be referred to as the special chart change display. This special chart change display may be performed multiple times in succession.

Figure 87(a) shows an example of the stopping pattern pattern for Special Chart 1. Six types of special charts are shown in Figure 87(a): Special Chart A, Special Chart a, Special Chart b, Special Chart c, Special Chart d, and Special Chart h. In Figure 87(a), the white areas indicate the locations of segments that will be unlit, and the black areas indicate the locations of segments that will be lit.

In this embodiment, one type of jackpot symbol ("Special Symbol A") is provided as the special symbol's stopping pattern. "Special Symbol A" is a 10-round (R) jackpot symbol, a 10R jackpot symbol that can be expected to result in winning balls in all 10 rounds. "Special Symbol A," "Special Symbol B," "Special Symbol C," and "Special Symbol D" are 10R small jackpot symbols. When "Special Symbol A" stops, a small jackpot game is initiated in which the first variable winning slot 234 is opened and closed. When the game ball passes through specific area 234v during this small jackpot game, a 10R jackpot game is initiated, which is a 10R small jackpot symbol. Note that, while this embodiment provides one type of jackpot symbol and four types of small jackpot symbols, the types of jackpot symbols and small jackpot symbols are not limited to these. It is also possible to provide jackpots that are virtually difficult to win in some rounds.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the determination of whether or not a jackpot occurs during special symbol variable play is performed by hardware random number lottery, and the jackpot symbol to be stopped is determined by software random number lottery. Furthermore, in this embodiment, after a jackpot play ends, the machine may transition to a time-saving state a. Here, the time-saving state refers to a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than in a non-time-saving state, for example, by shortening the time until the next jackpot begins. More specifically, in the time-saving state a, when the operating conditions for the normal electric device are met, the normal electric device enters an advantageous state (electric support state), making it easier to win the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 and shortening the variable time of the special symbol 1. A time-saving flag is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, the machine is in the electric support state. That is, in the electric support state, the shutter member 2311 of the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 tends to open for a longer time per opening (extended electric chute opening period) compared to the non-electric support state. For example, the 40 ms electric chute opening period in the non-electric support state is extended to 5,800 ms in the electric support state. Furthermore, the shutter member 2311 may be configured to open more frequently in the electric support state compared to the non-electric support state (increased electric chute opening frequency). For example, when a normal electric device is activated, the shutter member 2311, which opens only once in the non-electric support state, may open twice in the electric support state (open for 2.5 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, and open again for 2.5 seconds). The extended electric chute opening period and increased electric chute opening frequency increase the probability of the ball landing in the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. The time-saving flag is set to off during jackpot play. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during jackpot play. This is because, particularly during jackpot games, if game balls are picked up by the electric chute with a small number of winning balls, the player may be disadvantaged if the number of game balls entering the variable winning slots (attackers) 234, 235 decreases. In this embodiment, in the time-saving mode (electric support mode), only the opening period of the shutter member 2311 is extended. However, one or more of several time-saving functions, such as normal probability variation, normal variable variation, extension of the electric chute opening period, and increase in the number of electric chute openings, may also be performed. In the non-electric support mode, it is more difficult for game balls to enter the special game slot 1 starting slot 231 than in the electric support mode. As described above, the special game slot 1 starting slot 231 changes between a difficult-to-enter state where game balls have difficulty entering and an easy-to-enter state where game balls can easily enter. In the electric support mode, the entrance of this special game slot 1 starting slot 231 remains in an easy-to-enter state for a longer period of time than in the non-electric support mode. In this embodiment, when "Special Chart A", "Special Chart a", "Special Chart b", and "Special Chart c" are displayed in a non-time-saving state, after the end of the subsequent jackpot game, the electric support state is maintained until the fifth pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins, or until the second pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins. When the fifth pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins, or the second pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins, the state transitions to a non-electric support state. On the other hand, when "Special Chart d" is displayed in a stopped state and the subsequent jackpot game ends, the state transitions to a non-electric support state without transitioning to an electric support state. Also, in the a time-saving state and the c time-saving state, if "Special Chart A" is displayed in a stopped state and a jackpot occurs, the state transitions to an electric support state after the end of the jackpot game until the fifth pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins, or the second pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins. In addition, "Special symbol a" to "Special symbol d" result in a small win, and the game transitions to the electric support state after the end of the jackpot game related to the small win. In this case, after the end of the jackpot game, the game remains in the electric support state until the first symbol change display by Special symbol 1 or Special symbol 2 begins. However, since the electric support state ends when the first special symbol change display begins, it can be said that the game transitions to a non-electric support state. Note that all jackpot symbols or small jackpot symbols for Special symbol 1 may transition to the electric support state after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, probability change (probability change) is not performed for the special symbol, but if a probability change symbol is provided and the probability change symbol is displayed and a jackpot game is played, the game transitions to a probability change state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes a high probability state (special symbol high probability state) after the end of the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when "Special Symbol A" is displayed in a stopped state during non-electric support mode, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to electric support mode. Furthermore, when "Special Symbol A," "Special Symbol B," and "Special Symbol C" are displayed in a stopped state, a small jackpot occurs, and when the gaming ball passes through specific area 234v during the small jackpot game, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to electric support mode. Furthermore, when "Special Symbol D" is displayed in a stopped state, a small jackpot occurs, and when the gaming ball passes through specific area 234v during the small jackpot game, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to non-electric support mode. Furthermore, when "Special Symbol A" is displayed in a stopped state during electric support mode, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to electric support mode. Additionally, when "Special Chart A" to "Special Chart D" are displayed, a small win occurs, and when the game ball passes through specific area 234v during the small win game, a big win occurs, and after the big win game ends, the control state essentially becomes a non-electric support state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stopping symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special Symbol H" is the losing symbol.

Figure 87(b) shows an example of the stop pattern mode of special symbol 2. This Figure 87(b) shows eight types of special symbols: "Special Symbol B,""Special Symbol C,""Special Symbol D,""Special Symbol E,""Special Symbol e,""Special Symbol f,""Special Symbol g," and "Special Symbol i," of which three types of special symbols are big win symbols ("Special Symbol B,""Special Symbol C," and "Special Symbol D"), three types of special symbols are small win symbols ("Special Symbol e,""Special Symbol f," and "Special Symbol g"), one type of special symbol is a time-saving symbol ("Special Symbol E"), and one type of special symbol is a losing symbol ("Special Symbol i"). When "Special symbol B" to "Special symbol D" are displayed, a jackpot is awarded, and a 10R jackpot game begins after the symbols stop. When the small jackpot symbols of "Special symbol e" and "Special symbol f" are displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the symbols stop, and the game ball that entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the specific area 234v, resulting in a jackpot (type 2 jackpot). In other words, when a small jackpot is awarded with "Special symbol e" or "Special symbol f," if the game ball passes through the specific area 234v to award a jackpot, the game of passing the game ball through the specific area 234v is considered the first round, and then jackpot games from the second round onwards begin. The second variable winning opening 235 opens repeatedly until the tenth round, allowing the player to win balls. Furthermore, if a small win occurs on "special symbol g" and then the game ball passes through the specific area 234v, resulting in a jackpot, the game of passing the game ball through the specific area 234v is considered the first round, and the jackpot game from the second round onwards begins, with the second variable prize opening 235 remaining open until the second round, allowing balls to be won. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the game state after the jackpot game on special symbol 2 ends differs depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot. If a jackpot occurs on "special symbol B,""special symbol C," or "special symbol D" in the non-electric support state, the game will transition to the non-electric support state after the jackpot game ends. If a jackpot occurs on "special symbol B,""special symbol C," or "special symbol D" in the a time-saving state or the c time-saving state (a time-saving state transitioned to by the display of a time-saving symbol), the game will transition to the electric support state after the jackpot game ends. More specifically, if a jackpot occurs on "Special Chart B" or "Special Chart C" in the time-saving state a or c, after the jackpot play ends, the system will essentially enter an electric support state until the fifth pattern change display by Special Chart 1 begins, but if a jackpot occurs on "Special Chart D," the electric support state will end when the jackpot play ends and the first special chart change display begins, so it can be said that the system will essentially transition to a non-electric support state. In addition, if a small hit occurs on special symbol 2 and the game state transitions to a big hit game state during the small hit game, the game state after the end of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the small hit. If a small hit occurs on "Special Symbol e,""Special Symbol f," or "Special Symbol g" in a non-electric support state, the game will transition to a non-electric support state after the end of the big hit game related to the small hit. If a small hit occurs on "Special Symbol e,""Special Symbol f," or "Special Symbol g" in the a time-saving state or the c time-saving state (a time-saving state transitioned to by the display of a time-saving symbol), the game will transition to an electric support state after the end of the big hit game related to the small hit. However, if a small hit occurs on "Special Symbol e,""Special Symbol f," or "Special Symbol g" in the a time-saving state or the c time-saving state, the electric support state ends when the big hit game ends and the first special symbol variable display begins, so it can be said that the game will essentially transition to a non-electric support state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when "Special Chart E" is displayed, a time-saving symbol is provided that transitions to a special chart time-saving state without resulting in a big win or small win. In other words, "Special Chart E" is a time-saving symbol, and when "Special Chart E" is displayed, the special chart time-saving state is entered, in which the special chart fluctuation display time is shortened until the first pattern fluctuation display of Special Chart 1 begins or the 144th pattern fluctuation display of Special Chart 2 begins. In addition, one type of stopping symbol is provided as a losing symbol. "Special Chart i" is a losing symbol.

Figure 5(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, there are ten types of decorative patterns, "Decoration 1" through "Decoration 10." When a ball is detected as having entered the normal starting slot 228 or the special starting slot 232, a "decorative pattern change display" is performed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208, switching the display in the following order: "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... → "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → ... In other words, the decorative pattern display device 208 changes the decorative patterns separately from the normal pattern display device 210 and the second special pattern display device 214. It also displays the stop pattern, which is a combination of decorative patterns. In this embodiment, the decorative patterns are not changed in response to the special pattern 1 change display, but this may be done.

When announcing a 10R big win, 10R small win, or 2R small win, a decorative pattern combination of three decorative patterns of the same number lined up (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7") is displayed in a static manner in the pattern display areas 208a-208c. When announcing a losing pattern, a decorative pattern combination other than those described above (for example, scattered patterns) is displayed in a static manner in the pattern display areas 208a-208c.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "decorative pattern variable display" in the decorative pattern display device 208 to the display of the stopped decorative pattern pattern may be referred to as the decorative pattern variable display. The decorative pattern variable display is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

Figure 87(d) shows an example of a normal symbol stop pattern. In this embodiment, there are two types of normal symbol stop display patterns: "Normal Symbol A," which is a winning symbol, and "Normal Symbol B," which is a losing symbol. When the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start hole 228, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a "normal symbol change display" (normal symbol change game) in which all seven segments alternately light up and then light out. Then, after the change time has elapsed, either "Normal Symbol A," which is a winning symbol, or "Normal Symbol B," which is a losing symbol, is displayed as a stopped symbol. In Figure 87(d), the white areas in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that will be unlit, and the black areas indicate the locations of the segments that will be lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "regular map change display" to the stop display of the regular map's stop pattern may be referred to as the regular map change display.

<Main processing of main control unit>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in Fig. 86 will be described with reference to Fig. 88. Note that Fig. 88 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 86 stores special symbol random number values, special symbol round determination random number values, special symbol electric support determination random number values, and special symbol pattern determination random number values. RAM 308 also has a random number counter that generates these various random number values. RAM 308 also stores the number of reserved special symbols, special symbol winning random number values, and various judgment (lottery) results. Hereinafter, the area in RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special symbols may be referred to as the special symbol reserved number storage area. RAM 308 also has a start information storage area for special symbols, which is divided into areas for the maximum number of symbols (four in this example) that can be reserved for the start of the win/loss judgment (lottery), as well as a random number value storage area for regular symbols. As described below, the start information storage area for special symbols stores multiple types of start information as a set, with one set of this start information stored in each area in order of winning (reserved order).

As mentioned above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 86 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When this start signal is input, the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 88 in accordance with the control program pre-stored in ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. This initial setting 1 sets the stack initial value (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, sets the interrupt mask, initializes the I/O 310, initializes various variables stored in the RAM 308, and sets operation permission and initial values for the WDT 314. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value for the WDT 314.

In step S103, the counter value of WDT314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, the process monitors whether the low voltage signal is ON, i.e., whether the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is outputting a low voltage signal indicating a voltage drop when the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500 is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is ON (the CPU 304 has detected a power interruption), the process returns to step S103. If the low voltage signal is OFF (the CPU 304 has not detected a power interruption), the process proceeds to step S107. Note that if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after power is turned on, the process also returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. This initial setting 2 includes setting a value in the timer circuit 312 that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below, outputting a clear signal from a specified port of the I/O 310 (e.g., a test output port, an output port to the first sub-control unit 400), and setting to allow writing to RAM 308.

In step S109, a determination is made as to whether the state before the power was interrupted (before power was cut off) will be restored. If the state before power was cut off will not be restored (if the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is to be reset to its initial state), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to perform initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power outage will be restored (Step S109; No), it is determined whether the cause is the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 being operated by a game parlor employee or the like (Step S113). That is, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that an operation has been performed). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (Step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (Step S115). If it is determined that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (Step S115; Yes), it executes the setting change process (Step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor on the bonus ratio/setting display 196 flashes to "1," indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, the 7-segment display on the setting monitor increments each time the setting change button 194 is pressed. Pressing the setting change button 194 while the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor is at "3" returns the display to "1." In this embodiment, settings 1 through 3, which have different jackpot probabilities, can be selected. After changing to the desired setting, the setting is confirmed by pressing the setting change key 192 to the OFF position. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. While the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the bonus ratio/setting display 196 in this embodiment, it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or announced via audio output, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, there are three settings, 1 to 3, but it may be a two-step setting, or four or more settings may be possible, or the setting may not be changed. Also, in this embodiment, the initial setting value displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1," but the setting value before the power was turned off may be retained and the retained setting value may be displayed.

Furthermore, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; No), the setting change process of step S117 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S119.

In step S119, initialization processing is performed to return the basic circuit 302 to its initial state (step S119). Here, if the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area in RAM 308 is read. If this power status information does not indicate a suspend state, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a specified area (e.g., all areas) of RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. The checksum is then determined to be a specific value (e.g., 0) (i.e., whether the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is anything other than the specific value (e.g., 0) (i.e., if the checksum result is abnormal), initialization processing is performed to return the pachinko machine 100 to its initial state. This initialization processing includes disabling interrupts, setting the stack pointer to a stack initial value (main setting), and initializing all storage areas in RAM 308. Note that in this embodiment, even after initialization, the settings set in the setting change processing (step S117) are retained. Furthermore, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the settings selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process of the main control unit 300 (step S119) has been performed, and like the power recovery command described below, is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300.

In step S121, after setting interrupt prohibition, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, one initial value generation random number counter is updated to generate the initial value of each special random number counter. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as special random number values is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating special random number values provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the value is then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except while performing timer interrupt processing, which starts at a predetermined cycle.

Meanwhile, in step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power restoration processing, the stack pointer value stored in the stack pointer save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. The values of each register stored in the register save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage are also read and reset to each register, and then interrupt permission is set. The CPU 304 then executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, and the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state it was in when power was lost. In other words, processing resumes from the command following the command (specified in step S121) executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described below) immediately before power outage. The RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 shown in Figure 2 also has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in that transmission information storage area. This power restoration command indicates that the state at the time of power outage has been restored, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 89. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in Figure 86 is equipped with a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal triggers the start of main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. This timer interrupt start processing includes processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of processing abnormalities).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, detection signals from various sensors 320 (shown in FIG. 86), including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of I/O 310, and the presence or absence of detection signals is monitored and stored in signal status memory areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 320 in RAM 308. Using ball detection sensor detection signals as an example, information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process two times before last (approximately 4 ms ago) is read from the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308. Information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the previous timer interrupt process (approximately 2 ms ago) is read from the current detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previously described previous detection signal memory area. In addition, the detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected this time are stored in the currently detected signal storage area mentioned above.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area is compared to determine whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches the winning determination pattern information. While a gaming ball passes through a ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeatedly activates at very short intervals of approximately 4 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, the aforementioned step S205 checks for a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor are stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area. In other words, when a gaming ball begins to pass through a ball detection sensor, there will be no second-to-last detection signal, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In this embodiment, taking into account erroneous detection and noise from the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal is detected, a win is determined to have occurred. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 86 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating no detection signal two times previously, a detection signal present the previous time, and a detection signal present this time). In this step S205, if the information regarding the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating no detection signal two times previously, a detection signal present the previous time, and a detection signal present this time), it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning slot 226, the variable winning slots 234 and 235, the first special starting slot 231, and the second special starting slot 232, or the general starting slot 228. In other words, it is determined that a win has occurred in these winning slots 234, 235, and 226 or these starting slots 231, 232, and 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects a ball entering the first special symbol start port 231 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, it is determined that a prize has been won in the first special symbol start port 231, that is, that a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with subsequent winning in the first special symbol start port 231 is performed, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with subsequent winning in the first special symbol start port 231 is not performed and the processing branches to subsequent processing. Note that winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there was a detection signal two times before last, that there was no detection signal last time, and that there was no detection signal this time) is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. After it is determined that a win has occurred, it is not determined that a win has occurred until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the win determination clear pattern information. If the information matches the win determination clear pattern information, it will then be determined whether or not it matches the win determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processes and basic random number update processes, the value of the random number counter for generating initial values performed in step S121 above is updated, and then the random number counter for generating special random number values used by the main control unit 300 is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as special random number values is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating special random number values provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the value is then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Furthermore, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, the value of the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to that random number counter is obtained and set in the random number counter memory area. For example, if a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers, which fluctuates within a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7) stored in a predetermined initial value storage area in RAM 308, a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to the random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers, and set in the random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers, and the currently set initial value is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area to determine when the random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers has completed its next cycle.

In step S211, a random number update process is performed. This process updates the random number counter used to generate random numbers for performances used by the main control unit 300.

In step S213, a timer update process is performed. This timer update process updates various timers, including a normal symbol display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, and timers for timing the specified winning performance time, specified opening time, specified closing time, specified ending performance period, etc.

In step S215, a prize slot counter update process is performed. In this prize slot counter update process, when a prize is won at prize slots 234, 235, 226 or starting slots 228, 231, 232, the value in the prize ball count memory area provided for each prize slot or starting slot in RAM 308 is read, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball count memory area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning entry acceptance process is performed. During the winning entry acceptance process, if certain conditions are met, multiple types of start information are acquired. The multiple types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an available area in the start information storage section of RAM 308 according to the order of winning (order of pending).

In step S219, which follows step S217, a payout request count transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in Figure 86 consists of one byte, with bit 7 indicating strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bit 6 indicating power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission since power-on), bits 4 and 5 indicating the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 indicating the payout request count after encryption processing.

In step S221, a normal map status update process is performed. This normal map status update process performs one of a number of processes corresponding to the state of the normal map. For example, in the normal map status update process during the normal map variation display (when the value of the normal map display pattern update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal pattern display device 210. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 displays the variations in the normal map (normal map variation play).

In addition, during the normal symbol status update process when the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the display mode is a winning symbol, and if the winning flag is off, the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the display mode is a losing symbol. Also, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has a setting area for various settings to be made in various processes, not just the normal symbol status update process. Here, the above-mentioned on and off control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal symbol is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms and displays either the winning symbol (normal symbol A shown in Figure 87(d)) or the losing symbol (normal symbol B shown in Figure 87(d)). Furthermore, to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the regular symbol stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. This setting causes the confirmed symbol to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the regular symbol variable game is notified to the player.

Furthermore, if the result of the normal symbol variable play is a win, as described below, the normal symbol win flag is turned on. When this normal symbol win flag is on, the normal symbol status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the normal symbol stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) sets the setting area of RAM 308 to "normal symbol in operation," outputs a signal to the solenoid (332) that drives the opening and closing of the shutter member 2311 of the first special symbol start port 231 to advance the shutter member 2311 forward for a specified opening period (e.g., 5000 ms), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the blade opening time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, the normal status update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (332) that drives the shutter member 2311 to open and close, causing the shutter member 2311 to move backward for a specified closed period (e.g., 500 ms), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the blade closed time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal map status update process that begins when the specified closure period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the blade closure time changes from 1 to 0), the normal map is set to "not operating" in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variable game is a loss, as described below, the normal map loss flag is turned on. If this normal map loss flag is on, the normal map status update process that occurs when the specified stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the normal map to "not operating" in the setting area of RAM 308. In the normal map status update process when the normal map is not operating, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S223.

In step S223, a regular map-related lottery process is performed. In this regular map-related lottery process, when regular map variable play and the opening/closing control of the first special map start port 231 are not being performed (the regular map state is inactive), and the number of reserved regular map variable play games is one or more, a win determination is made to determine whether the result of the regular map variable play will be a win or a loss by random number lottery from the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 86. If a win is determined, the win flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. If a loss is determined, the win flag is set to OFF. Regardless of the result of the win determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is obtained as the regular map timer random number value, and one time for displaying the regular map variable on the regular map display device 210 is selected from multiple variable times based on the obtained regular map timer random number value, and this variable display time is stored as the regular map variable display time in the regular map variable time memory area provided in RAM 308. The number of reserved normal variable games is stored in a reserved normal game number storage area provided in RAM 308, and each time a win is determined, the number of reserved normal variable games minus 1 is stored again in this reserved normal game number storage area. The random number value used to determine the win is also erased.

Next, the pre-reading process (step S224) is executed. In the pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information for each of the regular and special symbols 2, pre-determines the stop symbols and change time before the hit/miss determination process, and stores the pre-determination results (pre-reading results) in the pre-reading result storage unit in RAM 308. Note that in this embodiment, no pre-reading is performed because special symbol 1 is not reserved, but it is also possible to perform pre-reading on special symbol 1 as it can be reserved.

Next, special chart status update processing is performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. First, special chart status update processing (special chart 2 status update processing) is performed for special chart 2 (step S225). In this special chart 2 status update processing, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 2.

For example, during the special symbol 2 status update process when the special symbol 2 variable display is in progress (when the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the special symbol 2 display device 214. By performing this control, the special symbol 2 display device 214 displays the variable special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big win flag, a 10R small win flag, a 2R small win flag, a miss flag, and a time-saving flag. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stopping symbol in the special chart 2 related lottery process described below. In the special chart 2 state update process, which starts when the special chart 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, in the case of a 10R time-saving jackpot flag, special charts B to D shown in Figure 87(b) are displayed, in the case of a 10R time-saving small jackpot flag (when the game ball passes through the specific area 234v, it transitions to a 10-round jackpot), special charts e and f shown in Figure 87(b), in the case of a 2R time-saving small jackpot flag (when the game ball passes through the specific area 234v, it transitions to a 2-round jackpot), special chart g shown in Figure 87(b), in the case of a time-saving flag, special chart E, and in the case of a miss flag, special chart i are displayed, and a setting is made in the setting area of RAM 308 to indicate that the special chart 2 is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the special symbol 2 display device 214 will confirm and display one of the following symbols: a jackpot symbol (special symbol B to special symbol D), a small jackpot symbol (a 10R jackpot when passing through the specific area 234v) (special symbol e, special symbol f), a small jackpot symbol (a 2R jackpot when passing through the specific area 234v) (special symbol g), a time-saving symbol (special symbol E), or a losing symbol (special symbol i).

Furthermore, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stopped display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the fixedly displayed special chart 2 is displayed stopped for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 2 variable play is notified to the player. Furthermore, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving number memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern that will stop the variable display is special pattern 2 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described below, before terminating the process.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol 2 variable play is a small hit, the small hit flag is turned on. If the small hit flag is on, in the special symbol 2 status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), special symbol 2 is set to be in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for the specified winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, specified transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area described above.

In addition, the special symbol 2 status update process, which begins when the specified winning presentation period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door element 2341 to keep the first variable winning opening 234 open for a specified open period (e.g., 10 seconds, or until the specified number of game balls (e.g., 10) have entered the first variable winning opening 234), and sets information indicating the open period in the memory area of the opening and closing mechanism open time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, in the command setting and sending process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that processing is to be executed while the jackpot generating device is operating is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special chart 2 state update process, which begins when the specified opening period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the opening and closing mechanism opening time changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door element 2341 to keep the first variable winning opening 234 closed. At this time, if the gaming ball passes through the specific area 234v, the jackpot flag is turned on. If the jackpot flag is on, the special chart 2 state update process, which begins when the specified jackpot transition display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the special chart 2 jackpot transition changes from 1 to 0), sets information indicating the jackpot transition presentation period in the memory area of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for the specified jackpot occurrence presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image is displayed notifying the player that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 234v and a jackpot has occurred. Additionally, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the jackpot transition effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area. On the other hand, if the gaming ball does not pass through the specific area 234v, the jackpot flag is not turned on, and the special chart 2 inactive state is set in the setting area of RAM 308. When the special chart 2 is inactive, the special chart 2 status update process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

The special symbol 2 state update process, which begins when the specified jackpot transition presentation period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 to remove the shutter member 2351 and maintain it in an open state for the specified opening period (e.g., 29 seconds, or until the entry of a specified number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) into the second variable prize opening 235 is detected), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door open time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special prize opening opening setting transmission process should be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special chart 2 state update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 for the specified closed period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) to advance the shutter member 2351 and maintain it in a closed state, and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special winning opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

Furthermore, the opening and closing control of the shutter member 2351 is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 10 rounds or 2 rounds excluding the first time), and the special symbol 2 state update process begins when the control ends. In order to set the process to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 10 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot has ended on the decorative symbol display device 208, information indicating the effect wait period is set in the memory area of the effect wait time management timer provided in RAM 308. Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is set on, the number of time-saving times (e.g., special symbol 1: 1 time, special symbol 2: 1 time) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Note that if the time-saving flag is set off, the number of time-saving times is not set in the time-saving times memory section, and the time-saving flag is not turned on.

The term "time-saving" here refers to shortening the time between the end of a jackpot in special chart variable play and the start of the next jackpot, putting the pachinko machine in a state that is advantageous to the player. When the time-saving flag is set to on, the opening time of the shutter member 2351 of the special chart 1 starting port 231 during one operation tends to be longer (electric chute opening extension).

Also, as mentioned above, the time-saving flag is set to off during jackpot play (special play state). Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during jackpot play. This is to solve the problem that if the electric support state is in effect during jackpot play, many game balls may enter the special chart 1 starting port 231 before a predetermined number of game balls enter the second variable winning port 235 during jackpot play, increasing the number of game balls that can be won during the jackpot and increasing the tendency to gamble.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the special chart 2 status update process, which begins when the specified end effect period ends (when the value of the effect waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), sets the special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 2 variable play is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 2 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets the special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. When the special chart 2 status update process is in the case where the special chart 2 is inactive, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S227.

Next, a special chart status update process (special chart 1 status update process) is performed for special chart 1 (step S227). In this special chart 1 status update process, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 1.

For example, during the special symbol 1 status update process when the special symbol 1 variable display is in progress (when the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the special symbol 1 display device 212. By performing this control, the special symbol 1 display device 212 displays the variable display of special symbol 1 (special symbol 1 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big win flag, a 10R small win flag, a miss flag, and a time-saving flag. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stopping pattern in the special chart 1 related lottery process described below. In the special chart 1 state update process, which starts when the special chart 1 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 1 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R big hit flag is on and the time-saving flag is also on, the special chart A shown in Figure 87(a) is displayed; when the 10R small hit flag is on and the time-saving flag is also on, the special chart a to special chart c shown in Figure 87(a) is displayed; when the 10R small hit flag is on and the time-saving flag is off, the special chart d shown in Figure 87(a) is displayed; and when the miss flag is on, the special chart h is displayed, and a setting is made in the setting area of RAM 308 to indicate that the special chart 1 is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the special symbol 1 display device 212 will confirm and display one of the following symbols: a 10R big win symbol (special symbol A), a 10R small win symbol with time reduction (special symbols a-c), a 10R small win symbol without time reduction (special symbol d), or a losing symbol (special symbol h).

Furthermore, to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 1 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed special chart 2 is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 1 variable play is notified to the player. Furthermore, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving number memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the time-saving flag is turned off unless the special chart probability is fluctuating. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern that will stop the variable display is special pattern 1 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described below, and then the process terminates.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol 1 variable play is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. If the jackpot flag is on, in the special symbol 1 status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special symbol 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), special symbol 1 is set to "operating" in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for the specified winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, specified transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area described above.

In addition, the special drawing 1 status update process, which begins when the specified winning presentation period ends (when the value of the special drawing 1 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the slide member 2351 of the second variable drawing opening 235 to keep the slide member 2351 in an open state for the specified opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until the entry of a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) into the second variable drawing opening 235 is detected), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special drawing opening setting transmission process should be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special chart 1 status update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the slide member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 to keep the slide member 2351 in a closed state for the specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special prize opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

Furthermore, the opening and closing control of the second variable winning opening 235 is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 2 rounds in this example), and the special symbol 1 state update process, which begins when the control ends, sets information indicating the effect waiting period in the memory area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 10 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot has ended on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is set on, the number of time-saving times (e.g., special symbol 1: 5 times, special symbol 2: 2 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Note that if the time-saving flag is set off, the number of time-saving times is not set in the time-saving times memory section, and the time-saving flag is not turned on.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the special chart 1 status update process, which begins when the specified end performance period ends (when the value of the performance standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), sets the special chart 1 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 1 variable play is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 1 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. When special chart 1 is inactive, the special chart 1 status update process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

Once the special chart status update processing in steps S225 and S227 is completed, special chart-related lottery processing is then performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. Here again, the special chart-related lottery processing for special chart 2 (special chart 2-related lottery processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special chart-related lottery processing for special chart 1 (special chart 1-related lottery processing) is performed (step S231). The special chart 2-related lottery processing is executed using the earliest special chart 2 winning random number value and special chart 2 random number value in the special chart 2 random number value memory area, with the starting conditions being that variable play for special chart 1 and special chart 2 is not being performed, the states of special chart 1 and special chart 2 are both inactive, and the number of reserved special chart 2 variable play games is 1 or more. The special chart 1 related lottery process is executed using the first special chart 1 winning random number value and special chart 1 random number value in the special chart 1 random number value storage area, with the starting conditions being that variable play for special chart 1 and special chart 2 is not being performed, both special chart 1 and special chart 2 are inactive, and the number of reserved special chart 1 variable play times is 1 or more.

With regard to these special symbol-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special symbol 2-related lottery process before the special symbol 1-related lottery process, so that if the start conditions for the special symbol 2 variable game and the start conditions for the special symbol 1 variable game are met simultaneously, the special symbol 2 variable game will be in play first, followed by the special symbol 1 variable game. Furthermore, the results of the special symbol variable game win/fail judgment by the decorative symbol display device 208 are reported by the first sub-control unit 400, which reports the results of the lottery based on winning at the special symbol 2 start port 232, but does not report the results of the lottery based on winning at the special symbol 1 start port 231. Thus, in this embodiment, if a lottery based on winning at the special chart 2 start port 232 is held while special chart 1 variable play is being executed, special chart 2 variable play will start while special chart 1 variable play is being executed, and if a lottery based on winning at the special chart 1 start port 231 is held while special chart 2 variable play is being executed, special chart 1 variable play will start while special chart 2 variable play is being executed.

In the case of the special chart 2-related lottery processing in step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires the special chart 2 start information (a set of the special chart 2 winning random number and the special chart 2 random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) reserved position in the special chart 2 random number memory area, and determines whether it will be a big hit, a small hit, a time-saving state, or a miss (win/lose determination) based on the special chart 2 winning random number etc. in the acquired special chart 2 start information using the win/lose determination table stored in ROM 306. Note that when determining whether or not the special chart 1 is a win/lose, a decision is made as to whether it will be a big hit, a small hit, a time-saving state, or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the pattern (stop pattern) to be displayed after the special chart 2 changes display using the special chart determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 random number value in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the determined win/lose determination result etc. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the variable display time (timer number) for the special symbol 2 using various tables stored in ROM 306, based on, for example, the result of the hit/miss judgment, the stopped symbol, the number of special symbols 2 reserved at the time of the hit/miss judgment, and the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol variable time.

After retrieving the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area and subtracts 1 from the special chart 2 reserved number storage area. At this time, the special chart 2 start information retrieved from the special chart 2 random number value storage area may be stored in a temporary area provided in RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision may be made based on the special chart 2 start information stored in this temporary area.

After the above-described special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229), the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special symbol status update process and special symbol-related lottery process are performed independently for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, allowing multiple special symbols to fluctuate simultaneously. In this case, when multiple special symbols are fluctuated simultaneously, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided with multiple areas that display the lottery results for each special symbol, or multiple decorative symbol display devices may be provided that display the lottery results for each special symbol, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results for multiple special symbols. Furthermore, when fluctuations related to multiple special symbols are occurring simultaneously, the lottery results for the special symbol that stopped fluctuating first may affect the lottery results for the special symbol that stops fluctuating later. Furthermore, without being limited to this, it is also possible to not perform lottery processing or variable play for the reservation of one special symbol depending on the state of the other special symbol.

In step S233, which follows step S231, a command setting and transmission process is performed. In this command setting and transmission process, various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bits 11 to 14 being command type (in this example, information that can identify the type of command, such as basic command, pattern change start command, pattern change stop command, win effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, advance read result information command, and setting command), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. Furthermore, if the command type is a symbol change start (spin start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, loss flags, and the timer number selected in the special symbol-related lottery process. If the command type is a symbol change stop (spin stop) command, the command data includes the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags. If the command type is a jackpot round number designation command, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the special symbol 1 start port 230, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the special symbol 2 start port 232, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the variable prize port 234, and so on. If the command type is a look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, the look-ahead number stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If the command type is a setting command, the command data includes setting information and so on.

In addition, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags stored in RAM 308, the timer number selected in the special chart 1 related lottery process and special chart 2 related lottery process, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc., is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags stored in RAM 308, etc., is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned ending effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned large prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the number of jackpot rounds, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the process of transmitting the jackpot closure settings described above, the command data is set with information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc.

In addition, step S233 also performs a general command special drawing reserve increase process. In this general command special drawing reserve increase process, the command data is set with special drawing identification information (information indicating special drawing 1 or special drawing 2) and advance notice information (either advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and can also determine the presentation control content based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S235, which follows step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in RAM 308 is output via the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100.

In step S237, the step following step S235, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal status memory area in step S205 are read to monitor for the presence or absence of specified errors, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error. If a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-controller 400. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 1 start port 231 and the variable winning ports 234 and 235, and display data output to the normal drawing display device 210, special drawing 1 display device 212, special drawing 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. via drive circuits 324, 326, and 330 is set to the output port of I/O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request quantity transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of I/O 310.

In step S239, which follows step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON. If the low voltage signal is ON (a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243; if the low voltage signal is OFF (a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the process then returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 88. Meanwhile, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers used to restore the state at the time of power interruption when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power interruption processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and the process then enters a HALT state.

Next, the winning/losing determination table used in the special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229) and the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in Figure 89 will be explained with reference to Figures 90 to 91.

The special drawing pass/fail determination table shown in Figure 90(a) is a table that is referenced when determining whether special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 are pass/fail. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

When determining whether a jackpot is selected for Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, if a number between 0 and 204 is drawn from the random number range of 0 to 65535, a jackpot will be selected with a probability of approximately 1 in 319.688. Furthermore, when determining whether a jackpot is selected for Special Chart 1, if a number between 205 and 65535 is drawn, a small jackpot will be selected with a probability of 1 in 1.003. Furthermore, when determining whether a jackpot is selected for Special Chart 2, if a number between 205 and 655 is drawn, a small jackpot will be selected with a probability of 1 in 145.313. Furthermore, for Special Chart 2, provided that the machine is in time-saving mode a, if a number between 656 and 65535 is drawn, a time-saving symbol will be selected with a probability of 1 in 1.010. In other words, Special Chart 1 is designed so that a jackpot is selected with a probability of approximately 1 in 319.688, and if a jackpot is not selected, a small jackpot is selected, and there are no misses on Special Chart 1. Special Chart 2 is designed so that a jackpot is selected with a probability of approximately 1 in 319.688, and a small jackpot is selected with a probability of 1 in 145.313, and in time-saving state A, if neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot is selected, the time-saving symbol is always selected, and there are no misses. On the other hand, in game states other than time-saving state A, if neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot is selected, it is designed so that it is a miss. Note that Special Chart 1 may also have misses, but even in that case, it is desirable to make it so that a small jackpot is the most likely to be won.

In this embodiment, when a small win occurs, the first variable winning slot 234 opens, and when it passes through the specific area 234v, it becomes a big win. Therefore, special chart 1 can be said to be a pattern change display that will result in a big win when a pattern change display is performed. Also, in the time-saving state A, if neither a big win nor a small win is selected, the time-saving pattern stops and the game transitions to the time-saving state C, so it can be said to be a pattern change display that will result in a big win when a pattern change display is performed, or a transition to the time-saving game state. Furthermore, in game states other than the time-saving state A, special chart 2 will result in a miss if neither a big win nor a small win is selected.

The special symbol determination table for jackpot/sudden time-saving winning used in non-time-saving game mode shown in Figure 90 (b) is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a jackpot or time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the hit/miss determination of special symbols 1 and 2. This table is also stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a jackpot is selected as a result of the special jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart A will be selected with a 100% probability. In other words, a 10R jackpot will always be selected, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the a2 time-saving play state will be selected. Here, the a2 time-saving play state is a more advantageous state than the non-time-saving play state, the a1 time-saving play state described below, and the c time-saving play state. Specifically, in the a2 time-saving play state, if the normal chart win lottery result is a win or if the normal power activation gate 228g is passed, the shutter member 2311 advances for a longer time than in the non-time-saving play state and the a1 time-saving play state. In other words, it can be said that this is a play state in which it is easier to win at the special chart 1 starting port 231. Furthermore, in the a2 time-saving game state, the variation time of the special symbol 1 symbol change display is shorter than that of the special symbol 2 symbol change display and the normal symbol change display. In other words, the a2 time-saving game state can be said to be a game state in which the next jackpot is likely to occur in an extremely short time. The variation time of the special symbol 1 symbol change display in the a2 time-saving game state may be one type or multiple types. For example, if multiple types are available, any selected variation time should be shorter than that of the special symbol 2 symbol change display and the normal symbol change display in the a2 time-saving game state. Furthermore, the number of time-saving cycles in the rightmost column of the special symbol determination table for jackpots and sudden time-saving wins indicates the termination condition of the time-saving game state. Specifically, in the case of special symbol A, the game ends when the fifth variation display of special symbol 1 in the a2 time-saving game state begins, or when the second variation display of special symbol 2 begins. The conditions for ending the time-saving game state are not limited to the number of times Special Chart 1 is played and the number of times Special Chart 2 is played; in addition to these two, the combined number of times Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 may be set, or the number of times regular charts may be added, or these may be combined as appropriate.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for Special Chart 2, Special Chart B will be selected with a probability of 50/100, Special Chart C with a probability of 30/100, and Special Chart D with a probability of 20/100. In other words, if a jackpot is selected on Special Chart 2 in non-time-saving play mode, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which symbol is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to non-time-saving play mode.

The special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving symbol is won, used in the time-saving game state a shown in Figure 90 (c), is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a jackpot or time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the judgment of whether special symbols 1 and 2 are successful. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart A will be selected with a 100% probability. In other words, a 10R jackpot will always be selected, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected. Also, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart B will be selected with a 50/100 probability, special chart C will be selected with a 30/100 probability, and special chart D will be selected with a 20/100 probability. In this embodiment, a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 80/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected, and a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 20/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A1 time-shortened play state will be selected. Here, the a1 time-saving game state is a more advantageous state than the non-time-saving game state, but a less advantageous state than the a2 time-saving game state. Specifically, in the a1 time-saving game state, if the normal winning lottery result is a win or if the player passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 advances for a longer time than in the non-time-saving game state. While details will be described later, this is a game state in which if the normal winning lottery result is a win, it is easy to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231, but if the player passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, it is difficult to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231.

For Special Chart D, the condition for ending the a1 time-saving play state is until the first symbol change display for Special Chart 1 begins or the first symbol change display for Special Chart 2 begins. Therefore, after the end of a jackpot play, Special Chart 2 is reserved during jackpot play. Normally, the reserved Special Chart 2 is consumed and the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 begins, immediately ending the a1 time-saving play state and transitioning to a non-time-saving play state. However, since the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 is executed in the a time-saving play state, the result of the lottery in the a time-saving play state is used to determine whether Special Chart 2 is a win or lose. Furthermore, if a time-saving symbol that can only be won in the a time-saving play state is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for Special Chart 2, Special Chart E is selected. If a time-saving symbol is selected, the game will transition to the c time-saving play state from the symbol change display following the execution of that symbol change display. Here, the time-saving c game state is a more advantageous state than the non-time-saving game state, but a less advantageous state than the time-saving a2 game state. Specifically, in the time-saving c game state, if the normal winning lottery result is a win, the shutter member 2311 advances for a longer time than in the non-time-saving game state. Note that, as will be described in more detail below, if the normal winning lottery result is a win, it is easy to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231, but if the ball passes through the normal electric gate 228g, it is difficult to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231.

The special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving symbol is won, used in the time-saving game state c shown in Figure 90 (d), is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a jackpot or time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the hit/miss determination of special symbols 1 and 2. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart A will be selected with a 100% probability. In other words, a 10R jackpot will always be selected, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected. Also, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart B will be selected with a 50/100 probability, special chart C will be selected with a 30/100 probability, and special chart D will be selected with a 20/100 probability. In this embodiment, a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 80/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected, and a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 20/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A1 time-shortened play state will be selected. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state a or the time-saving game state c ends when the number of times the pattern of special chart 1 has changed has been set or when the number of times the pattern of special chart 2 has changed has been set, but the time-saving game state may also end when the total number of times the pattern of special chart 1 and special chart 2 have changed has reached a set number.

The special symbol determination table for small wins used in non-time-saving game mode shown in Figure 91(a) is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a small win is selected as a result of the determination of whether special symbols 1 and 2 are selected. This table is also stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart a will be selected with a 20/100 probability, special chart b with a 20/100 probability, special chart c with an 11/100 probability, and special chart d with a 49/100 probability. If special charts a to c are selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the a2 time-saving play state. Also, if special chart d is selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the non-time-saving play state.

Furthermore, if a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart e will be selected with a probability of 35/100, special chart f with a probability of 35/100, and special chart g with a probability of 30/100. In other words, if a small jackpot is selected on special chart 2 in non-time-limited play mode and special chart e or special chart f is selected, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which chart is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to non-time-limited play mode. If special chart g is selected, a 2R jackpot will result, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to non-time-limited play mode.

The special symbol determination table for when a small win is won, used in the time-saving game state a shown in Figure 91 (b), is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a small win is selected as a result of the win/loss determination for special symbols 1 and 2. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a small jackpot is selected as a result of the special jackpot lottery for Special Chart 1, there is a 20/100 chance that Special Chart A will be selected, a 20/100 chance that Special Chart B will be selected, an 11/100 chance that Special Chart C will be selected, and a 49/100 chance that Special Chart D will be selected. If Special Charts A to C are selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the A2 time-saving play state. However, if Special Chart A is selected, the A time-saving play state will continue until the start of the fifth change display for Special Chart 1 or the start of the second change display for Special Chart 2. However, if Special Charts B and C are selected, the A2 time-saving play state will end and the game will transition to the non-time-saving play state (normal play state) upon the start of the first pattern change display for Special Chart 1 or the start of the first pattern change display for Special Chart 2. Additionally, when special chart d is selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected, which will transition to a1 time-saving play state.

Also, if a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart e will be selected with a probability of 35/100, special chart f with a probability of 35/100, and special chart g with a probability of 30/100. In other words, if a small jackpot is selected on special chart 2 in the A1 time-saving play state and special chart e or special chart f is selected, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which design is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the A1 time-saving play state. If special chart g is selected, a 2R jackpot will result, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the A1 time-saving play state.

If special symbols b or c are selected, the game will enter the a2 time-saving game state after the jackpot play ends. However, this a2 time-saving game state ends when the first symbol change display for special symbol 1 or the first symbol change display for special symbol 2 begins, making it virtually impossible to win at the special symbol 1 start gate 231. Specifically, after the jackpot play ends, special symbol 2 is reserved during the jackpot play. Normally, the reserved symbol 2 is consumed and the symbol change display for special symbol 2 begins, immediately ending the a1 time-saving game state and transitioning to the non-time-saving game state. However, since the symbol change display for special symbol 2 is executed in the a time-saving game state, the result of the lottery in the a time-saving game state will be used to determine whether special symbol 2 is a winner. Furthermore, if the time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special symbol 2, special symbol E will be selected. When a time-saving symbol is selected, the game will transition to time-saving game state c from the next symbol change display after that symbol change display is executed.

Here, when special symbols b or c are selected, the state after the jackpot play ends is the a2 time-saving play state rather than the a1 time-saving play state, and the reason for setting the end condition to the initiation of the first symbol change display on special symbol 1 or the initiation of the first symbol change display on special symbol 2 is to change the rate of transition to the c time-saving play state without changing the state after the jackpot play ends when special symbols b or c are selected (the a1 time-saving play state). By doing this, when a small jackpot is won on special symbol 1 in non-time-saving play state, there is a 51% chance that the ball will land in the special symbol 1 starting slot 231, meaning that the next jackpot is likely to occur immediately. When a small jackpot is won on special symbol 1 in time-saving play state, there is a 20% chance that the ball will land in the special symbol 1 starting slot 231. By changing the end condition without changing the destination play state, it is possible to control the rate of the state in which the next jackpot is likely to occur immediately, making it easier to design ball output performance.

The special symbol determination table for when a small win is won, used in the time-saving play state c shown in Figure 91 (c), is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a small win is selected as a result of the win/loss determination of special symbols 1 and 2. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a small jackpot is selected as a result of the special jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart a will be selected with a 20/100 probability, special chart b with a 20/100 probability, special chart c with an 11/100 probability, and special chart d with a 49/100 probability. If special charts a through c are selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the a2 time-saving play state. If special chart d is selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the a1 time-saving play state.

Also, if a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart e will be selected with a probability of 35/100, special chart f with a probability of 35/100, and special chart g with a probability of 30/100. In other words, if a small jackpot is selected on special chart 2 in the c time-saving play state and special chart e or special chart f is selected, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which design is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the a1 time-saving play state. If special chart g is selected, a 2R jackpot will result, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the a1 time-saving play state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, there are two factors that activate the regular electric device (electric chute) having a shutter member 2311 that changes the possibility (difficulty) of winning in the special symbol 1 starting hole (variable) 231. One is when a game ball enters the regular symbol starting hole 228, which can be won by hitting with the left hand, and if it wins in the regular symbol lottery (determining whether the regular symbol is a hit or not), the regular electric device activates after the regular symbol pattern changes. The other is when a game ball passes through the regular electric activation gate 228g, which can be passed by hitting with the right hand, and the regular symbol lottery is not held, and the regular electric device activates without the regular symbol pattern changes.

Figure 92-1 is a timing chart showing the operation of a normal electric device. In Figure 92-1, time passes from left to right on the diagram.

Figure 92-1(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of operation of the normal electric device when a gaming ball enters the normal symbol start hole 228. In this case, the normal symbol pattern is displayed changing on the normal symbol display device 210, and hence this may be referred to as the normal symbol trigger.

The upper part of Figure 92-1(a) shows a timing chart illustrating the fluctuation and stopping of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 210. The lower part of Figure 92-1(a) shows a timing chart illustrating the opening and closing of the shutter member 2311 of the normal electric device, which has the special symbol 1 starting port (variable) 231 installed inside. Note that "open" refers to the state in which the shutter member 2311 is advanced, and "closed" refers to the state in which the shutter member 2311 is retracted.

When a left-handed shot is made and the game ball enters the normal ball starting hole 228, if there are three or fewer reserved balls, a normal ball lottery (to determine whether the normal ball is a winning ball) will be held.

Figure 92-2(a) shows the winning/losing determination table for the regular lottery.

This winning/losing determination table is referenced in the general map-related lottery process (step S223) in the main control unit timer interrupt process, and is stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Note that the tables shown up to Figure 92-3 are also referenced in the general map-related lottery process (step S223), and are stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

When determining whether a regular lottery draw is a success, if a number between 0 and 204 is extracted from the random number range of 0 to 65535, the probability of a success is approximately 1 in 319.688. This is the same regardless of the game state. The probability of a success may be changed depending on the game state. In this embodiment, when a success is determined, the shutter member 2311 of the special game 1 starting hole 231 operates for a predetermined period of time, making it easier for the game ball to enter the special game 1 starting hole 231.

Also, when a left-handed shot is made and the game ball enters the normal map starting hole 228, the normal map display device 210 begins to display changes in the normal map. As shown in Figure 92-1 (a), the change time is the time from when the normal map display device 210 starts to display changes in the normal map until it stops.

Figure 92-2 (b) shows a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal map used in non-time-saving play mode, and (c) shows a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal map used in time-saving play mode.

In non-time-saving play mode, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative patterns of the normal map in response to the display of the normal map changes on the normal map display device 210, and a reach effect may be performed. There are three types of reach effects: normal reach effect, super (SP) reach effect, and special super (SPSP) reach effect.

If the normal map is judged to be a hit, one of the variation patterns 06 to 08 will be selected. In all variation patterns, a reach effect will be produced. The normal map variation time is 40,000 ms for variation pattern 06, which produces a normal reach effect, 80,000 ms for variation pattern 07, which produces an SP reach effect, and 100,000 ms for variation pattern 08, which produces an SPSP reach effect.

If the normal map is a miss, one of the variation patterns 01-05 will be selected. First, a determination is made as to whether or not to perform a reach effect, with a 10% chance of a reach effect being performed. The normal map's variation time is 14,000 ms for variation pattern 03, which performs a normal reach effect, 40,000 ms for variation pattern 04, which performs an SP reach effect, and 80,000 ms for variation pattern 05, which performs an SPSP reach effect. These are shorter than the variation time for the same type of reach effect in the case of a hit. On the other hand, if the result is a miss and a reach effect is not performed, the variation pattern is determined according to the number of reserved balls on the normal map. If the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), variation pattern 01 will be selected, with a relatively long variation time of 8,000 ms. If the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3), variation pattern 02 will be selected, with a relatively short variation time of 4,000 ms.

In time-saving play mode, if the normal map is judged to be a hit, variation pattern 10 is determined, and if the normal map is judged to be a miss, variation pattern 11 is determined. Whether variation pattern 10 or variation pattern 11 is selected, the shortening function of the time-saving play mode results in an ultra-shortened variation of 200 ms. In time-saving play mode, right-handed hits are recommended in the first place, and left-handed hits, which can result in a win in the normal map starting slot 228, are not recommended, and the normal map variation display in time-saving play mode is an irregular variation display.

As shown in Figure 92-1 (a), when the display of the changing normal map on the normal map display device 210 ends, the confirmation stop of the normal map is displayed for the confirmation stop time. If the normal map is correct or incorrect, normal map A is confirmed and stopped, and if it is incorrect, normal map B is confirmed and stopped.

Figure 92-2 (d) shows a table for determining the confirmed stop time for regular trains.

The fixed stopping time for a normal drawing is determined regardless of the game state and whether the normal drawing is a hit or miss. In other words, a uniform 500 ms is guaranteed.

As shown in Figure 92-1(a), once the fixed stop time has elapsed, it is time for the normal electric device to start winning (OP time). This winning start time is the time (standby time) until the normal electric device (electric chute) starts operating.

If the main control unit 300 determines that the regular lottery is a winning lottery, it determines the winning start time and the opening time, closing time, and winning end time (described below) in the regular lottery-related lottery processing (step S223) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

Figure 92-3 (a-1) shows a determination table for the start time (OP time) of a win triggered by a normal symbol in a non-time-saving game mode, and Figure 92-3 (a-2) shows a determination table for the start time (OP time) of a win triggered by a normal symbol in a time-saving game mode.

After normal symbol A is confirmed and stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, if the game is in a non-time-saving mode, the winning start time of 24,800 ms begins. In a non-time-saving mode, a left-handed shot is performed, and at this winning start time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display instructing a "right-handed shot" to aim for the normal electric device (electric chute), and this winning start time is used to shoot the game ball into the right-hand area. A display indicating that the electric chute will open is also displayed.

On the other hand, after normal map A is confirmed and stopped on the normal map display device 210, if the game is in a time-saving game state (a1 time-saving game state, a2 time-saving game state, c time-saving game state), a win start time of just 20 ms will begin. Here too, the time-saving function makes this shorter than in a non-time-saving game state.

As shown in Figure 92-1 (a), once the winning start time has elapsed, the regular electric device (electric chute) begins to operate. In other words, the shutter member 2311, which had been in a retracted position until then, begins to advance and enters an advanced state. The shutter member 2311 maintains its advanced state until the end of the opening time. When the shutter member 2311 is in an advanced state, it becomes easier to win at the special chart 1 starting hole 231. The opening time here is the time from when the shutter member 2311 begins to advance until it stops maintaining its advanced state. Note that the opening time may also be the time from when the shutter member 2311 begins to advance until it completely retreats.

Figure 92-3 (b-1) shows the opening time determination table for normal symbol triggers in the non-time-saving game state, (b-2) shows the opening time determination table for normal symbol triggers in the a1 time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state, and (b-3) shows the opening time determination table for normal symbol triggers in the a2 time-saving game state.

In any game state, the shutter member 2311 opens (operates) once, but it may also be configured to repeat multiple advances and retreats.

When not in time-saving play mode, the opening time will be the normal opening time of 5000 ms.

In the a1 time-saving play state and the c time-saving play state, the opening time is the same as the normal opening time, 5000 ms. However, it may be longer than the normal opening time (for example, 5500 ms). Also, while the opening time is the same in the c time-saving play state and the a1 time-saving play state, it may be longer in the a1 time-saving play state than in the c time-saving play state, or vice versa.

In the a2 time-saving game mode, the opening time is the extended opening time of 5,800 ms. Note that the time it takes for the shutter member 2311 to change from a retracted state to an advanced state is the same in either game mode, and during the extended opening time, the time it maintains the advanced state is 800 ms longer than the normal opening time due to the time-saving function.

As shown in Figure 92-1 (a), once the opening time of a normal electric device (electric chute) has elapsed, it enters the closing time. This closing time is the time during which the closed state is maintained after the opening time has ended. If a game ball enters the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 located inside the normal electric device during the closing time, the entry is treated as valid. Although the shutter member 2311 is not in an advanced state, taking into account the time lag until the ball detection sensor in the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 detects the game ball, and detection delays due to the game ball getting caught, the detection of the winning ball by the ball detection sensor is treated as valid during the closing time.

Figure 92-3 (c) shows the closing time determination table for normal symbol triggers.

The closing time is the same in all game modes and is 56 ms.

As shown in Figure 92-1 (a), the winning end time occurs when the closing time of the normal electric device (electric chute) has elapsed. This winning end time is the time after the normal electric device (electric chute) has finished operating. In other words, it is the time after the shutter member 2311 has retracted, and once this winning end time has elapsed, the variable display of the normal figure can begin. The detection of a winning ball by the ball detection sensor installed in the special figure 1 starting hole 231 is treated as valid during the closing time, but is treated as invalid during the winning end time to prevent cheating.

Figure 92-3 (d-1) shows a table for determining the winning end time of a normal symbol trigger in a non-time-saving game mode, and Figure 92-3 (d-2) shows a table for determining the winning end time of a normal symbol trigger in a time-saving game mode.

The winning time is 4500 ms in non-time-saving play mode, but 500 ms in time-saving play mode. Here again, the time-saving function makes the time in time-saving play mode shorter than in non-time-saving play mode.

Figure 92-1(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of operation of the normal electric device when the gaming ball passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g. Hereinafter, this case may be referred to as the normal electric operation gate trigger.

The upper part of Figure 92-1(b) shows a timing chart indicating the state of the detection signal output from the ball detection sensor installed in the normal electric operation gate 228g. The lower part of Figure 92-1(b) shows a timing chart indicating the opening and closing of the shutter member 2311 of the normal electric device, similar to the lower part of Figure 92-1(a).

When the ball detection sensor detects a game ball passing through the normal power operation gate 228g, an ON-level detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives this detection signal, it determines the start time for the normal ball status update process (step S221) in the main control unit timer interrupt process.

Figure 93-1(a) shows a determination table for the start time (OP time) of the normal power operation gate trigger.

The start time (OP time) of the normal power operation gate trigger is the time (standby time) from when an ON-level detection signal is output from the ball detection sensor of the normal power operation gate 228g until the normal electric device (electric chute) begins to operate.

The opening time here is 500 ms, the same in both game modes. That is, as shown in Figures 92-3 (a-1) and (a-2), the winning start time (OP time) for the normal symbol trigger differs in length between the non-time-saving game mode and the time-saving game mode, but the normal power activation gate trigger has the same length in both the non-time-saving game mode and the time-saving game mode. The normal power activation gate 228g can be passed by hitting it to the right, and since hitting it to the right is recommended in the time-saving game mode, the player can simply continue hitting it to the right. Note that, since hitting it to the left is recommended in the non-time-saving game mode, it is irregular for the game ball to pass through the normal power activation gate 228g in the non-time-saving game mode.

As shown in Figure 92-1 (b), once the start time has elapsed, the normal electric device (electric chute) begins to operate. In other words, the opening time here is the same as the opening time of a normal electric device triggered by a normal symbol, and is the time from when the shutter member 2311 begins to advance until it stops maintaining its advanced state. Once the opening time has elapsed, the closing time begins. This closing time is also the same as the closing time of a normal electric device triggered by a normal symbol, and is the time from when the shutter member 2311 moves from its advanced state to its retracted state. Even during this closing time, the detection of a winning ball by the ball detection sensor installed in the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 is treated as valid.

Figure 93-1(b) shows a table showing the activation time determination for the normal power activation gate trigger in various game states.

In any game state, the shutter member 2311 opens (actuates) once, but it may also be configured to repeat the advance and retreat operation multiple times.

When the start time has elapsed, the main control unit 300 determines the opening time according to the game state in the normal game state update process (step S221) in the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the non-time-saving game state, the opening time is 44 ms, and in the a1 time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state, the opening time is also 44 ms. In other words, there is no difference in the opening time between the non-time-saving game state and the a1 time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state. On the other hand, in the a2 time-saving game state, the opening time is the extended opening time of 5,800 ms. As a result, in the non-time-saving game state, the a1 time-saving game state, and the c time-saving game state, even if the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231. However, in the a2 time-saving game state, once the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, it can be said that it is easy to get the game ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231.

As explained above, with a normal power gate trigger, the opening time and start time (OP time) are the same between the non-time-saving game state and the a1 and c time-saving game states, but with a normal symbol trigger, first, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state (Figure 92-2(c)), the winning opening time (OP time) is also shorter in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state (Figure 92-3(a-2)), and furthermore, the winning end time is shorter in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state (Figure 92-3(d-2)). Therefore, it can be said that the requirements for the time-saving game state are met. In particular, since the time-saving game state is acquired by a normal symbol trigger in the normal state at the start of play (non-time-saving game state), it is important that the requirements for the time-saving game state are met by a normal symbol trigger.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, in the a1 time-saving play state and the c time-saving play state, it is not desirable for the game ball to enter the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. Therefore, the shutter member 2311 of the normal electric device (electric chute) must be set to an operating mode that makes it as difficult as possible for a winning ball to enter. By setting the operating mode to the same as in the non-time-saving play state, it is possible to make it as difficult as possible for a winning ball to enter the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, thereby ensuring game playability and preventing cheating (fraud). Furthermore, data on the opening time and start time (OP time) can be shared between the non-time-saving play state and the a1 time-saving play state and the c time-saving play state, which also reduces data volume.

Also, in the non-time-saving game state, the start time for a win (OP time) at the normal symbol trigger may be 10 seconds, and the start time (OP time) at the normal power gate trigger may be 20 seconds. In the time-saving game state (a1 time-saving game state, a2 time-saving game state, c time-saving game state), the start time for a win (OP time) at the normal symbol trigger may be 5 seconds, and the start time (OP time) at the normal power gate trigger may be 15 seconds. In this case, when comparing the start time for a win (10 seconds) at the normal symbol trigger in the non-time-saving game state with the start time (15 seconds) at the normal power gate trigger in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is longer. However, when comparing the start time (20 seconds) at the normal power gate trigger in the non-time-saving game state with the start time (15 seconds) at the normal power gate trigger in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is shorter, ensuring the time-saving requirements. Here, an example of the start time (OP time) is given, but the same applies to the opening time. That is, in the non-time-saving game state, the opening time for the normal symbol trigger may be 10 seconds, and the opening time for the normal power gate trigger may be 20 seconds, and in the time-saving game state (a1 time-saving game state, a2 time-saving game state, c time-saving game state), the opening time for the normal symbol trigger may be 5 seconds, and the opening time for the normal power gate trigger may be 25 seconds. In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the start time (OP time) for the normal symbol trigger is 20 seconds, and the start time (OP time) for the normal power gate trigger is 10 seconds. In the time-saving game state (a1 time-saving game state, a2 time-saving game state, c time-saving game state), the start time (OP time) for the normal symbol trigger is 15 seconds, and the start time (OP time) for the normal power gate trigger is 5 seconds. Even if the normal symbol trigger is longer than the normal power gate trigger, the time-saving requirements are guaranteed in the same way as described above. Note that the number of seconds exemplified here is just an example. For example, if the OP time is shorter in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state for the same trigger, it may be shorter in the non-time-saving game state than in the time-saving game state for different triggers, or it may be the same in the time-saving game state and the non-time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the case of open time, as long as the time-shortened game state is longer than the non-time-shortened game state at the same trigger, the non-time-shortened game state may be longer than the time-shortened game state at different triggers, or the time-shortened game state and the non-time-shortened game state may be the same.

In the above description,
"An operating gate [for example, a normal electric operating gate 228g] through which the game ball can pass,
A first ball entry means [e.g., special drawing 1 starting hole 231];
Ordinary electric devices [for example, electric chute],
A control means (e.g., a main control unit 300),
A gaming machine equipped with
The control means is capable of controlling a gaming state,
The normal electric device can be activated when the game ball passes through the activation gate,
The first ball entry means is a ball entry means that can be achieved when the normal electric device is activated (for example, when the shutter member 2311 is advanced),
The game states include a non-time-shortened game state, a first time-shortened game state [for example, an a1 time-shortened game state and/or a c time-shortened game state], and a second time-shortened game state [for example, an a2 time-shortened game state] in which a game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than in the first time-shortened game state,
When the normal electric device is activated based on the game ball passing through the activation gate, if the game state when determining the activation time is the non-time-reduction game state, the control means determines a first time value [for example, 44 ms in the non-time-reduction game state shown in FIG. 93-1(b)] as the activation time [for example, the opening time shown in FIG. 92-1(b)],
When the normal electric device is activated based on the game ball passing through the activation gate, if the game state when determining the activation time is the first time-saving game state, the control means determines a second time value [for example, 44 ms in the a1 time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state as shown in FIG. 93-1(b)] as the activation time,
When the normal electric device is activated based on the game ball passing through the activation gate, if the game state when determining the activation time is the second time-saving game state, the control means determines a third time value [for example, 5800 ms in the a2 time-saving game state shown in FIG. 93-1(b)] as the activation time,
the third time value is a longer time value than the first time value,
the third time value is a longer time value than the second time value,
the first time value and the second time value are the same time value;
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

In this gaming machine, in the first time-saving game state, it is not desirable for game balls to enter the first ball entry means, and the normal electric device must be set to an operating mode that makes it as difficult as possible for balls to enter. By setting the operating mode to the same as in the non-time-saving game state, it is possible to make it as difficult as possible for balls to enter the first ball entry means, thereby ensuring game playability and preventing cheating (fraud). Furthermore, the operating time data can be shared between the non-time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state, which also reduces data volume.

Also,
"When the normal electric device is activated based on the game ball passing through the activation gate in the non-time-reduced game state, the control means determines a fourth time value [for example, 500 ms in the non-time-reduced game state shown in FIG. 93-1(a)] as the time until the normal electric device starts to operate [for example, the start time shown in FIG. 92-1(b)],
When the normal electric device is activated based on the game ball passing through the activation gate in the first time-saving game state, the control means determines a fifth time value [for example, 500 ms in the a1 time-saving game state shown in FIG. 93-1 (a)] as the time until the normal electric device starts to operate,
the fourth time value and the fifth time value are the same time value;
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

Also,
"A second ball entry means [for example, a normal starting hole 228] is provided,
The control means may start a variable display of a normal symbol when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means,
The normal electric device is operable when a winning symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the variable display of the normal symbol.
When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time-reduction gaming state and the normal electric device is activated, the control means determines a sixth time value [for example, 24,800 ms shown in FIG. 92-3(a-1)] as the time until the normal electric device starts to operate [for example, the winning start time shown in FIG. 92-1(a)],
When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the first time-shortened game state and the normal electric device is activated, the control means determines a seventh time value [for example, 20 ms shown in FIG. 92-3 (a-2)] as the time until the normal electric device starts to operate,
the seventh time value is a time value shorter than the sixth time value,
The normal electric device is operable when the game ball passes through the operation gate without executing the variable display of the normal symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

Also,
"The second ball entry means is provided in the first game area [for example, the left-hand hitting area],
The operating gate is provided in a second play area (e.g., a right-hand play area),
The first gaming area is a gaming area in which it is recommended to let the gaming ball flow down in the non-time-reduction gaming state,
The second game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in the first time-saving game state [for example, a1 time-saving game state],
The second game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in the second time-saving game state [for example, a2 time-saving game state],
The second game area is a game area provided with the first ball entry means [e.g., special figure 1 starting hole 231], the third ball entry means [e.g., special figure 2 starting hole 232], and a variable ball entry means [e.g., attacker unit 23] having a specific area [e.g., specific area 234v],
The control means is capable of starting a big win game when a game ball passes through the specific area during a small win game,
The control means may start a variable display of a first special symbol [for example, special symbol 1] when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means,
The control means may start a variable display of a second special symbol [for example, special symbol 2] when a gaming ball enters the third ball entry means,
After a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol [for example, a jackpot, a jackpot via a small jackpot], the second time-saving game state [for example, an a2 time-saving game state (a time-saving game state where it is easy to score: 1G consecutive loop)] may be entered, or the first time-saving game state [for example, an a1 time-saving game state (a time-saving game state where it is difficult to score)] may be entered.
In the variable display of the first special symbol, the possibility of a small win is higher than a miss (for example, the miss shown in FIG. 90(a) includes 0%),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine allows for consecutive jackpots (1G consecutive) in a short period of time, and offers new gaming features that allow for 1G consecutive wins to be looped.

Figure 93-2 is a timing chart that explains the timing for determining the opening time of the normal electric device (electric chute) triggered by the normal electric gate. In this timing chart, time also progresses from left to right on the diagram.

At the top of Figure 93-2, a timing chart is shown showing the state of the detection signal output from the ball detection sensor installed in the normal power operation gate 228g. Below that, a timing chart is shown showing the state of the detection signal output from the ball detection sensor installed in the special symbol 2 start port 232 located immediately below the normal power operation gate 228g. Below that, a timing chart is shown showing the operation and non-operation of the normal electric device. In other words, the operation of the normal electric device corresponds to the state during the open time, and the non-operation of the normal electric device corresponds to a state other than the open time. Below the timing chart for the normal electric device, a timing chart is shown showing the change and stop of special symbol 2 on the second special symbol display device 214. At the bottom, the game status is shown.

As described above, when the ball detection sensor detects a game ball passing through the normal power operation gate 228g, an ON level detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives this detection signal, it starts the normal game state update process (step S
221), a start time (OP time) is determined according to the current game state. That is, a start time (OP time) is determined according to the game state after the game ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g, more specifically, a start time (OP time) is determined according to the game state when the game ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g. As shown in FIG. 93-1(a), in this embodiment, the start time (OP time) is 500 ms regardless of the game state.

Because the special symbol 2 start port 232 is located directly below the normal power gate 228g, a game ball passing through the normal power gate 228g immediately enters the special symbol 2 start port 232 and is detected by a ball detection sensor installed in the special symbol 2 start port 232, initiating the variable display of the special symbol 2. In other words, the special symbol 2 start port 232 is positioned so that a game ball can enter after passing through the normal power gate 228g and before the normal symbol electric device begins to operate. As described above, in the a time-saving game state (a1 time-saving game state or the a2 time-saving game state after winning special symbols b and c in the time-saving game state), where winning is difficult, the time-saving game state ends when the variable display of the special symbol 2 begins, and the game transitions to a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, as shown in Figure 93-2, even if the game state at the start of the start time is a time-saving game state, the game state at the end of the start time may be a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game state when determining the opening time of the normal electric device is not the game state at the timing referenced when determining the start time, but the game state after the opening time has elapsed, more specifically, the game state when the normal electric device starts to operate. Therefore, in the case of Figure 93-2, the opening time is determined to be 44 ms (see Figure 93-1 (b)), which is the opening time corresponding to the non-time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to ensure an opening time that is in line with the current situation, and it is possible to properly control the winning rate for the first special symbol starting port 231.

In the above description,
"An operating gate through which the game ball can pass [for example, a normal electric operating gate 228g],
Ordinary electric devices [for example, electric chute],
A control means (e.g., a main control unit 300),
A gaming machine equipped with
The normal electric device operates for a second period [for example, the opening time shown in FIG. 92-2] after a first period [for example, the start time (OP time) shown in FIG. 92-2] has elapsed when the game ball passes through the operating gate,
The control means determines the length of the first period by referring to the game state when the game ball passes through the operating gate (for example, the game state after receiving the detection signal output from the ball detection sensor of the normal power operating gate 228g: time-shortened game state a) among a plurality of game states (for example, by using the judgment table shown in FIG. 93-1(a)),
The control means determines the length of the second period by referring to the game state when the normal electric device starts to operate (for example, the game state immediately before the operation of the normal electric device: time-saving game state) among the multiple game states (for example, by using the judgment table shown in FIG. 93-1(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine makes it possible to control the rate at which balls enter the standard electric device, ensuring playability.

Also,
"A first ball entry means [for example, the starting hole 231 in Special Drawing 1],
A third ball entry means [e.g., special drawing 2 starting hole 232];
Equipped with
The first ball entry means is capable of entering the ball when the normal electric device is activated,
The control means may start a variable display of a second special symbol [for example, special symbol 2] when a gaming ball enters the third ball entry means,
The plurality of types of game states include a non-time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state [for example, a2 time-saving game state],
The second time-shortened game state is a time-shortened game state that may end when the first variable display of a special symbol [for example, a special symbol] begins after the second time-shortened game state is set [for example, when a jackpot is reached with special symbol D shown in FIG. 90(c)], or when the variable display of a special symbol begins a certain number of times [for example, five or two times] after the second time-shortened game state is set [for example, when a jackpot is reached with special symbol B or special symbol C shown in FIG. 90(c)].
When the game state when the normal electric device starts to operate is the non-time-reduction game state, the control means determines the length of the second period to be shorter than when the game state when the normal electric device starts to operate is the second time-reduction game state [for example, FIG. 93-1(b)].
The actuation gate is provided upstream of the third ball entry means (e.g., immediately above the third ball entry means).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

With this gaming machine, even in the same second time-saving game state, by changing the ending conditions, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can be scored into the first ball scoring means, or a state in which the second time-saving game state ends without the ball scoring into the first ball scoring means, thereby controlling the rate at which the ball scores into the first ball scoring means.

The third ball entry means may be located in a position that allows the game ball to enter the slot after passing through the operating gate and before the normal electric device has finished operating.

Figure 93-3 is a timing chart that explains the measures taken to ensure the fixed stop time for the normal symbol shown in Figure 92-2 (d). In this timing chart, time also passes from left to right on the diagram.

Figure 93-3(a) is a diagram explaining the problems with pachinko machines that do not incorporate the above-mentioned innovations, while Figure 93-3(b) below it explains how the above-mentioned problems are resolved by incorporating the above-mentioned innovations. At the top of both figures is a timing chart showing the fluctuations and stops of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 210, and below that is a timing chart showing the state of the detection signal output from the ball detection sensor installed in the normal electric operation gate 228g. Furthermore, at the bottom of both figures is a timing chart showing the operation and stop of the normal electric device (electric chute). In other words, the operation of the normal electric device corresponds to the state during the open time, and the stop of the normal electric device corresponds to the state outside the open time.

The normal map display device 210 can begin displaying the changing patterns of the normal map when the normal electric device (electric chute) finishes operating. As described below, if a gaming ball passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g while the changing patterns of the normal map are being displayed, the changing patterns of that normal map are interrupted. However, if a gaming ball passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g while the normal map is being fixed and stopped, the fixed stop will continue. However, if a normal map is on hold, as shown in Figure 93-3(a), once the opening time of the normal electric device has elapsed, the fixed stop of the normal map will end, even before the fixed stop time (500 ms) has elapsed, and the changing patterns of the normal map will begin to be displayed. This can cause problems if the player is distracted by the operation of the normal electric device (electric chute) and misses the fixed display of the normal map. Conversely, there can be cases where the player is distracted by the fixed display of the normal map and misses the operation of the normal electric device, which can also be problematic.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, the time length from when a detection signal is output from the ball detection sensor installed in the normal operation gate 228g to when the opening time of the normal electric device ends, i.e., the time length L from when the player passes through the normal operation gate 228g to when the operation of the normal electric device ends, is set to be longer than the normal device's confirmation stop time (500 ms). This time length L is the total time length of the start time (500 ms) of the normal electric device triggered by the normal operation gate plus the minimum opening time (44 ms) of the normal electric device triggered by the normal operation gate. This ensures that the timing at which the operation of the normal electric device ends is after the confirmation stop of the normal device has ended, reducing the risk of the player missing the confirmation display of the normal device or the operation of the normal electric device. Furthermore, if the length of time from when a detection signal is output from the ball detection sensor installed in the normal power operation gate 228g until the opening time of the normal power device begins, i.e., the length of time OP from when the game ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g until the normal power device begins to operate, is set to be longer than the normal power device confirmation stop time, there will be no overlap between the period when the normal power device confirmation display is on and the period when the normal power device is operating, and the two can be clearly seen separately.

In the above explanation, the fixed stop time of the normal map was < the start time + opening time of the normal electric device triggered by the normal electric gate, but it could also be the fixed stop time of the normal map < the start time + opening time of the normal electric device triggered by the normal electric gate, or the fixed stop time of the normal map < the start time + opening time + closing time of the normal electric device triggered by the normal electric gate, or the fixed stop time of the normal map < the start time of the normal electric device triggered by the normal electric gate, or the fixed stop time of the normal map < the opening time. Or it could be the fixed stop time of the normal map < the closing time.

In the above description,
"An operating gate [for example, a normal electric operating gate 228g] through which the game ball can pass,
Ordinary electric devices [for example, electric chute],
a second ball entry means (e.g., a general entry hole 228);
A control means (e.g., a main control unit 300),
A gaming machine equipped with
The control means may start a variable display of a normal symbol when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means,
The normal electric device can be activated when the game ball passes through the activation gate,
The variable display of the normal pattern is a variable display that can start when the operation of the normal electric role is completed,
The normal electric device has a time length from when the game ball passes through the operating gate to when it finishes operating [for example, the time length from when a detection signal is output from the ball detection sensor provided in the normal electric operating gate 228g to when the opening time of the normal electric device ends] (hereinafter referred to as the "first time length") that is longer than the time length from when the variable display of the normal symbol ends and a stop display is made [for example, the fixed stop time of the normal symbol (500 ms)] (hereinafter referred to as the "second time length").
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, by making the first time length longer than the second time length, it is possible to confirm both the operation of the normal electric device and the display of the stopped normal symbol. If the first time length were shorter than the second time length, there is a risk that the player will be distracted by the operation of the normal electric device and miss the display of the stopped normal symbol, or conversely, there is a risk that the player will be distracted by the display of the stopped normal symbol and miss the operation of the normal electric device.

Also,
"The control means is capable of controlling the gaming state,
The gaming state includes a non-time-saving gaming state and a time-saving gaming state,
The normal electric device has a first time length [for example, start time (500 ms) + opening time] longer than the second time length [for example, the fixed stop time of the normal figure (500 ms)] whether in the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state [for example, the start time = the fixed stop time of the normal figure regardless of the game state, so it is always longer by the opening time].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also,
"The normal electric device will not start operating even if the game ball passes through the operating gate while the variable display of the normal symbol has finished and the stop display of the winning symbol is being displayed [for example, while the winning symbol is stopped to be confirmed] [for example, the normal symbol winning is invalid when the normal symbol is stopped to be confirmed as shown in Figure 93-1 (c)].
The normal electric device starts operating when the game ball passes through the operating gate while the variable display of the normal symbol has finished and the stop display of the losing symbol is being performed [for example, during the confirmation stop of the losing symbol] [for example, when the normal symbol is confirmed and stopped as shown in Figure 93-1 (c), the normal symbol miss is valid],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also, as shown in Figure 93-1 (b), the closing time of the shutter member 2311 of the normal symbol electric device when the normal symbol activation gate is triggered is 56 ms, the same as the closing time when the normal symbol is triggered. In other words, the closing time is the same for the non-time-saving game state, the a1 time-saving game state, and the c time-saving game state. As such, since the closing time does not change depending on the game state, it may be determined when determining the opening time. However, once the opening time has elapsed, the main control unit 300 may determine the closing time in the normal symbol state update process (step S221) in the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In Figure 92-1 (b), the operation of a normal electric device (electric chute) triggered by a normal electric gate does not have a set winning end time, unlike the operation of a normal electric device triggered by a normal symbol, but a winning end time of 500 ms may be set as a common time in any game state.

In addition, when referring to the operating time of a normal electric device (electric chute), it may be the opening time alone, or the opening time plus both the opening time (i.e., the start time or start time of a win) and the closing time, or it may be the time plus only one of the two times. Alternatively, it may be the opening time + opening time + closing time + winning end time, or the opening time + closing time + winning end time. In other words, it is sufficient as long as it includes at least the opening time.

Next, with reference to Figure 93-1 (c), we will explain how a gaming ball is handled when it passes through the normally-powered gate 228g.

Figure 93-1(c) shows how a gaming ball is handled when it passes through the normally-operated gate 228g.

The processing states of the normal-power operation gate 228g include the standby state of the normal-power operation gate 228g (the state before passing through the normal-power operation gate 228g), normal-power OP (the open state in Figure 92-1(b)), the normal-powered device in operation (the open state in Figure 92-1(b)), and the end of operation of the normal-powered device (the closed state in Figure 92-1(b)).

This explanation also explains the relationship between the normal symbol processing state based on winning the normal symbol starting hole 228. The normal symbol processing states include the normal symbol waiting state (the state before winning the normal symbol starting hole 228), the normal symbol changing state (the changing time state in Figure 92-1(a)), the normal symbol fixed stop state (the fixed stop time state in Figure 92-1(a)), normal power OP (the win start time state in Figure 92-1(a)), the normal symbol electric device operating (the open time state in Figure 92-1(a)), the normal symbol electric device operation completed (the closed time state in Figure 92-1(a)), and normal power ED (the win end time state in Figure 92-1(a)). Also, Figure 93-1(a) summarizes the results of the normal symbol lottery executed when a ball enters the normal symbol starting hole 228, divided into winning and losing cases.

When the normal power operation gate 228g is in a standby state and the normal symbol is in a standby state or a changing normal symbol state, a gaming ball that passes through the normal power operation gate 228g is treated as valid.

When the normal power operation gate 228g is in a standby state and a winning normal symbol is displayed, a gaming ball that passes through the normal power operation gate 228g is treated as invalid. In other words, a winning normal symbol lottery takes priority. On the other hand, when a gaming ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g while a losing normal symbol is displayed, its passage is treated as valid.

In the normal electric opening, when the normal electric device is in operation, when the normal electric device has finished operating, and in the normal ending, the normal symbol is considered a winning symbol, so any game ball that passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g is treated as having been invalidated. In other words, the operation of the electric chute due to a winning normal symbol lottery currently being held takes priority. Note that there are no losing cases in the normal electric opening, when the normal electric device is in operation, when the normal electric device has finished operating, and in the normal ending, so these are marked with a diagonal line.

Furthermore, if the processing status of the normal electric operation gate 228g is normal electric OP, normal electric device in operation, or normal electric device operation finished, regardless of the processing status of the normal symbol, the passage of a game ball that passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g will be treated as invalid. In other words, if the electric chute is activated based on the passage through the normal electric operation gate 228g, the next passage through the normal electric operation gate 228g will be treated as invalid.

Next, we will explain how to handle Special Drawings 1 and 2 when they are fluctuating simultaneously, with reference to Figure 93-1 (d).

Figure 93-1 (d) shows how Special Drawings 1 and 2 are handled when they are fluctuating simultaneously.

The diagonal lines in Figure 93-1 (d) represent combinations that are impossible to achieve in the first place. As mentioned above, there are no misses on Special Chart 1. Also, if Special Chart 2 lands on Special Chart 1 during a jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot will not be selected on Special Chart 1 and it will be a miss, and if Special Chart 1 lands on Special Chart 2 during a jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot will not be selected on Special Chart 2 and it will be a miss. Therefore, it is impossible for Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 to result in a jackpot at the same time. Also, the horizontal bar indicates that special control will not be executed.

As shown in Figure 93-1 (d), if special chart 1 stops displaying a jackpot or small jackpot while both special chart 1 and special chart 2 are changing, the display result of special chart 2 during the changing display is discarded and a losing symbol is displayed. Also, for example, if special chart 1 wins during the changing jackpot of special chart 2, a jackpot will not be selected on special chart 1 and it will become a loss, so a losing symbol will be displayed on special chart 1, and the changing display of the jackpot special chart 2 will proceed as usual. As will be described later, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on special chart 2, the changing display of the losing special chart 1 will be interrupted. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the changing display of the losing special chart 1 will resume, and the changing display of the losing special chart 1 may begin with the changing display of the losing special chart 1 resumed. In this case, when a losing symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on special chart 1, the changing display of special chart 2 will proceed as usual.

On the other hand, if Special Chart 2 stops displaying due to a big or small win while both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 are displaying a changing pattern, the display of Special Chart 1 will be interrupted, and the display will resume once the big or small win game has ended. Note that the display will not be interrupted for time-saving patterns selected only on Special Chart 2 in the time-saving play state c.

Next, with reference to Figure 93-1 (e), we will explain how to handle the situation when a gaming ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g while the normal map is changing.

Figure 93-1(e) shows how to handle a game ball that passes through the normal power operation gate 228g while the normal map is changing.

As shown in Figure 93-1 (e), if a game ball enters the normal map start port 228 and passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g while the normal map is being displayed, the normal map being displayed will be interrupted regardless of the display result, and the display of the normal map will resume when the opening and closing operation of the electric chute shutter member 2311 based on the game ball passing through the normal electric operation gate 228g is completed.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. Figure 94 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of Figure 94 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S301. This initialization processing includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization processing of the memory area in RAM 408.

In step S303, which follows step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, the timer variable is assigned a value of 0.

In step S307, which follows step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, which follows step S307, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S307, processing such as reading performance data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is performed.

In step S311, which follows step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control processing, operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190, depending on the detection result.

In step S313, the step following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315, which follows step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains commands for the various lamps 442, 452, these commands are output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450.

In step S317, which follows step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command for the first performance movable unit 7 at the top shown in Figure 84 or the second performance movable unit 8 hidden at the rear, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319, the next step after step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command. Then, processing returns to step S303.

Figure 94 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Figure 94 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S343, the next step after step S341, the control command set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and other processes such as updating random number values for performance are performed.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. Figure 95 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of Figure 95 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S401. This initialization processing includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization processing of the memory area in the RAM (not shown).

In step S403, which follows step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, the timer variable is assigned a value of 0.

In step S407, which follows step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, which follows step S407, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S407, processing such as reading the performance data corresponding to this command (performance data from the decorative pattern display device 208) from ROM (not shown) is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is performed.

In step S411, the step following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the performance data read in step S409 contains a command to the VDP 516, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, processing returns to step S403.

Figure 95 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM.

Figure 95 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S443, which follows step S441, other processing such as updating random number values for presentation purposes is performed.

Figure 95(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main processing. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, described below). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 in VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (source address in ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (destination address in VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453, which follows step S451, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455; if not (step S453: No), the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on image data information (such as VRAM 518 coordinate axes, image size, and VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates)) that constitutes the display image in order to form a display image in frame buffer 1 or 2 of VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to VRAM 518 in step S451. The VDP 516 sets parameters in accordance with the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S457, the next step after step S455, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S459, the step following step S457, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the completion of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), the process proceeds to step S461; if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and processing ends.

Next, the flow of the game according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 96. Note that this explains the normal flow of the game, and may not explain irregular flow.

The first game state is (1) the normal game state, i.e., the non-time-saving state. In this game state, left-handed play is recommended, and the gameplay revolves around the normal map changing display when the game ball enters the normal map starting slot 228.

Then, when the normal map display shows a win (normal map A) as a result of the change (A), (2) a normal map win game is executed, and the shutter member 2311 of the special map 1 starting port 231 advances for a predetermined time as described above.

In normal winning mode, when a game ball enters the special game ball 1 starting port 231 (B), the variable display of special game ball 1 begins, and a big win or small win symbol is displayed. When a small win symbol is displayed, the first variable winning port 234 opens, allowing a game ball to enter. When the game ball that entered the first variable winning port 234 passes through the specific area 234v (3), a big win occurs, and the big win game begins. On the other hand, when a big win symbol is displayed, a big win occurs without the first variable winning port 234 being opened, and the big win game begins.

When the initial jackpot play ends, the game will transition to one of two routes depending on the symbol on Special Chart 1. Specifically, if "Special Chart d" appears on Special Chart 1, indicating a small jackpot, and if the small jackpot leads to a jackpot, after the jackpot play related to that jackpot ends (C), the game will not transition to the time-saving play state, but will transition to (1) the normal play state. If a jackpot is achieved with any other symbol, after the jackpot play related to that jackpot ends (D), the game will transition to the a2 time-saving play state described above (4), which makes it easier to win at Special Chart 1 starting hole 231, and the game ball will immediately pass through the normal power operation gate 228g, making it possible to win at Special Chart 1 starting hole 231 without any symbol change. In the a2 time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of special chart 1 is the shortest of the multiple types of fluctuation times (i.e., a fluctuation time shorter than that of special chart 2 (e.g., 0.2 seconds)), so the fluctuation display result of special chart 1 is displayed in priority to special chart 2 (E), and (5) a big hit or small hit occurs in a short time. As a result, two big hit games may be played seamlessly. In the a2 time-saving game state, there may be multiple fluctuation times for special chart 1, or there may be only one, but in either case, it is sufficient that the fluctuation time is shorter than any of the fluctuation times of the multiple special charts 2. It is also sufficient that the fluctuation time is shorter than any of the fluctuation times of the multiple normal charts. In addition, if there are multiple fluctuation times for special chart 1, the average of the fluctuation times of the multiple special charts 1 may be shorter than the average of the fluctuation times of the multiple special charts 2 (normal charts).

When the second or subsequent jackpot play ends, the game will transition to one of two routes depending on the symbol on Special Chart 1. In this case, the special chart determination table for a jackpot or sudden time-saving win in the time-saving play state a or the special chart determination table for a small win in the time-saving play state a shown in Figures 90(c) and 91(b) is referenced. Specifically, if "Special Chart A" appears on Special Chart 1, indicating a jackpot, or "Special Chart A" appears, indicating a small win, and the jackpot is reached via the small win, when the jackpot play ends (F), (6) the game will transition to the time-saving play state a2, and this will continue until the symbol change display on Special Chart 1 has started five times or the symbol change display on Special Chart 2 has started twice. In this case, too, the game enters a time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to land on Special Chart 1, so the variable display result of Special Chart 1 is displayed in priority to Special Chart 2 (G), and (5) another big hit or small hit occurs in a short period of time (1G consecutive).

On the other hand, if "Special Chart B" or "Special Chart C" appears on Special Chart 1, indicating a small win, and then a big win is reached via the small win, once the big win play ends (H), (7) the game transitions to the a2 time-saving play state, which continues until either the symbol change display of Special Chart 1 begins once or the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 begins once. In most cases, since Special Chart 2 is reserved during a big win, when the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 begins for the first time, the a2 time-saving play state ends (I), and (8) the game transitions to the normal play state. However, since the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 during play is determined by lottery in the a time-saving play state, in most cases the time-saving symbol will be selected, as shown in Figure 90(a). Therefore, when the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 results in the time-saving symbol (Special Chart E) being displayed (J), (9) the game transitions to the RUSH state, which is the time-saving play state c. Furthermore, if "Special Chart d" appears on Special Chart 1, resulting in a small win, and then that small win leads to a big win, when the big win game ends (H), (7) the game will transition to the a1 time-saving game state, which will continue until the pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins once or the pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins once. In other words, the game will operate in substantially the same way as the a2 time-saving game state, which is transitioned to after the big win game that was transitioned to due to the display of "Special Chart b" or "Special Chart c" ends.

In the c time-saving play state (RUSH state), the gameplay is centered around the pattern change display of special symbol 2. The c time-saving play state continues until the pattern change display of special symbol 1 has started once or the pattern change display of special symbol 2 has started 144 times. Therefore, in the c time-saving play state, the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win is won in the c time-saving play state or the special symbol determination table for when a small win is won in the c time-saving play state shown in Figures 90 (d) and 91 (c) is essentially referenced until the pattern change display of special symbol 2 has started 144 times. Specifically, if "Special Chart B" or "Special Chart C" is displayed on Special Chart 2 and a jackpot occurs (N), a 10R jackpot game is executed (3), and when the jackpot game ends (D), (4) the game transitions to a2 time-saving game state, which continues until the pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins five times or the pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins two times.

On the other hand, if "Special Chart D" appears on Special Chart 2, indicating a jackpot, or if "Special Chart e," "Special Chart f," or "Special Chart g" appears, indicating a small jackpot, and then a 10R or 2R jackpot is reached via the small jackpot (K), (10) when the jackpot game ends (L), (7) the game will transition to the a1 time-saving game state, which will continue until the symbol change display for Special Chart 1 begins once or the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 begins once (I), after which (8) the game will transition to the normal game state. As mentioned above, in this normal game state, the symbol change display for Special Chart 2, which is usually the trigger for the end of the a1 time-saving game state, is executed, and Special Chart E will be selected as the result of the jackpot lottery for Special Chart 2 (unless a jackpot is reached), and the game will immediately transition to the c time-saving game state (J). Additionally, when the 144th symbol change display by special symbol 2 ends during the time-saving c game mode, the time-saving c game mode ends (M) and the game transitions to the normal game mode (1).

In the game flow according to this embodiment described above, in normal game mode, gameplay is centered around the variable display of the normal symbol, in c time-saving game mode (RUSH mode), gameplay is centered around the variable display of special 2, and when a normal symbol wins in normal game mode or when the normal symbol passes through the normal power activation gate 228g (1G consecutive) in a2 time-saving game mode where the number of time-saving times is set to 5 (special symbol 1), in other words, when the shutter member 2311 is open in a manner allowing entry into the special symbol 1 starting port 231, gameplay is centered around the variable display of special 1.

Next, we will explain specific examples of effects that are executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment.

Figure 97 is a diagram showing an example of a staged presentation centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

Figure 97 shows the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal pattern display device 210, the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern hold lamp 216, and the special pattern 2 hold lamp 220.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 97(a) displays a static decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7." Note that the background here is not displayed, but a default background image, which will be described later, is displayed. In the following explanation, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may also be displayed.

The decorative pattern display device 208 has a fourth pattern display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern display area 284 is an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing (or a pattern is stopped), and from top to bottom is an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing for a normal pattern, an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing for a special pattern 1, and an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing for a special pattern 2. When a normal pattern is stopped, a circle or cross symbol is displayed lit up, but when a normal pattern is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. When a special pattern 1 is stopped, a circle or cross symbol is displayed lit up, but when a special pattern 1 is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. When a special pattern 2 is stopped, a circle, cross or triangle symbol is displayed lit up, but when a special pattern 2 is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. In this way, not only does the fourth symbol have a different display position, but the display format (here, shape) also differs, allowing the player to distinguish it at a glance. Note that advance notice may be given by changing the display format, lighting format, or blinking format of the fourth symbol.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 has a variable icon display area 280 located at the bottom center of the performance display area 208d.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in Figure 97 is a non-time-saving game state. In this non-time-saving game state, the decorative pattern display device 208 has a normal symbol hold icon display area 281 to the left of the variable icon display area 280. Note that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 in the non-time-saving game state, the hold icon display areas for special symbols 1 and 2 are not explicitly shown, but hold icon display areas for special symbols 1 and 2 may also be provided.

The regular map hold icon display area 281 displays hold icons representing regular map holds. The number of regular map holds is represented by the number of regular map hold icons in addition to the number of lit regular map hold lamps 216, and the number of special map 2 hold lamps is represented by the number of lit special map 2 hold lamps 220. The number of special map 2 hold icons may also be displayed. In other words, the hold icons correspond to the start information stored in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second hold icon, and so on. In the regular map hold icon display area 281, hold icons are displayed side by side, with the hold icon on the right being the oldest hold icon. In this embodiment, special map 1 is not held, so a hold icon is not displayed, but this may be done.

In Figure 97(a), two regular map hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the regular map hold icon display area 281, and these two regular map hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode). In other words, the default hold icon for regular maps is a round hold icon. Note that in Figure 97(a), to make it easier to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the regular map hold icon display area 281, hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown with dotted lines.

On the other hand, no hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area of Special Chart 2. This is because, as mentioned above, the control state (game state) shown in Figure 97 is a non-time-saving game state, and therefore winning at Special Chart 2 start port 232 is not recommended.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the reserve icon display area for the normal or special 2 symbol that is more likely to result in a win is displayed depending on the control state (game state). That is, when the control state is a non-time-saving game state, the reserve icon display area 281 for the normal symbol is displayed in the effect display area 208d, as shown in FIG. 97(a), and when the control state is a time-saving game state, conversely, the reserve icon display area 282 for the special 2 symbol may be displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the regular map and the default display mode of the hold icon in the special map 2 may be the same, or they may be different display modes.

In this embodiment, the display of the pattern change for the normal or special pattern begins in the following order: change begins on the special pattern display device or normal pattern display device → the fourth pattern starts flashing or goes out → the pending icon movement animation starts or disappears → the decorative pattern starts changing; however, this order may be reversed.

In Figure 97 (b), the display of the pattern change on the normal map begins, the pattern change begins on the normal map display device 210, and the fourth pattern goes off, but no change has yet occurred in the reserved icon or decorative pattern.

In Figure 97 (c), the movement animation of the regular pending icons h11 and h12 has begun. In this movement animation, the pending icon (the pending icon subject to this pattern change) that was in the display position of the first pending icon h11 begins to move towards the changing icon display area 280, and the pending icon that was in the display position of the second pending icon h12 begins to move towards the display position of the first pending icon h11 on the regular map. At this stage, the display of the decorative pattern change has not begun.

In Figure 97 (d), the movement animation continues, and in the same figure (e), the reserved icon that was the first reserved icon h11 before the change started reaches the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon that was the second reserved icon h12 before the change started reaches the display position of the first reserved icon h11 and is displayed as the first reserved icon h11, but even at this stage, the display of the decorative pattern change has not yet begun. Note that, when the pattern change in the general display device 210 starts, the reserved icon that was the first reserved icon h11 may be viewed as the variable icon h0, or the reserved icon that was the second reserved icon h12 may be viewed as the first reserved icon h11.

Then, the decorative pattern begins to change as shown in Figure 97 (f).

As shown in FIG. 97(g), when the decorative pattern display device 208 begins displaying the decorative pattern changes, an operation prompt notification image 136P is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 to encourage the player to press the effect button 136 within the valid period. This operation prompt notification image 136P displays an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period to the right of the main character image. Although the decorative pattern changes are hidden by the operation prompt notification image 136P, the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284, etc. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation prompt notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in Figure 97(h), the valid period is decreasing, and in Figure 97(i), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in Figure 97(j), a reach state entry notification image 2071 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in place of the operation prompt notification image 136P. In the reach state entry notification image 2071, the words "It's your chance!!" are displayed to the right of the main character's character image.

In Figure 97(k), the reach state entry notification image 2071 disappears, the changing display of the decorative symbols becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in the same figure (l). Note that even if the reach state entry notification image 207 is displayed, there are cases where the reach state is not entered, but it is also possible to set it so that the reach state is always entered.

As explained above, the appearance of the operation prompt notification image 136P corresponds to a performance that triggers a notice regarding the currently occurring pattern change display.

In Figure 97(m), the background image has been switched from the default background image to hidden, and the variable icon display area 280 and the regular reserved icon display area 281 have disappeared. The fourth pattern display area 284 is still displayed. In addition, the variable decorative pattern displays that had previously been displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c have been moved to the bottom right corner and reduced in size, and in Figure 97(n), this has developed into a special reach (swordsman reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 97(n) displays a large image of the villainous swordsman, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the following Figure (o) displays an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist lord and the villainous swordsman.

Note that the reach state entry warning image 2071 may not only be a warning that the reach state will be entered, but may also be a warning that the game will progress to an SP reach.

Figure 98 shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in Figure 97 in stages.

In Figure 98(p), which follows Figure 97(o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until Figure 98(s). In Figure 98(s), the protagonist, the lord, defeats the villain, the swordsman, and in Figure 98(t), all but the fourth symbol display area 284 is temporarily hidden. Note that instead of being hidden, a different background image may be displayed. Alternatively, a setting suggestion may be displayed in this scene. Eventually, as shown in Figure 97(u), a fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a different background image. Furthermore, the variable icon display area 280 and the regular reserved icon display area 281 remain hidden, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 98(v) displays a static display of the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7." Also, the fourth symbol (a round symbol) of the normal symbol shown in Figure 98(v) is lit. In Figure 98(v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in Figure 98(w), the word "Jackpot" is displayed along with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the jackpot as the jackpot game start effect. Note that a display including setting suggestions may be displayed during the jackpot game start effect shown in Figure 98(w). In this case, a display including setting suggestions may be displayed only when a jackpot that satisfies certain conditions occurs (e.g., only when it is the first jackpot after power-on, only when five or more consecutive jackpots occur, or only when it is the jackpot with the largest number of balls out of multiple jackpots with different payouts (e.g., a 10R jackpot, etc.)).

Figure 99 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of another example of the presentation following Figure 98 (q).

In Figure 99(a), the animation of the duel scene that began in Figure 97(o) continues, and this animation continues until Figure 99(b). In Figure 99(b), the main character, the lord, is defeated by the villain, the master swordsman. In Figure 99(c), as in Figure 98(t), everything except the fourth symbol display area 284 is temporarily hidden. Note that in this scene, a setting suggestion display may be displayed. This may, for example, create a sense of anticipation regarding the setting while the player is feeling disappointed after missing the SP reach. Eventually, in Figure 99(d), the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" begins to fluctuate. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the normal symbol pending icon display area 281 is restored, and the variable icon h0 and the normal symbol's first pending icon h11 are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 99(e), the fourth pattern (circular pattern) of the regular map is lit, and the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed frozen. Next, during the period when the regular map is displayed as confirmed, an animation for the disappearance of the variable icon h0 is executed in the variable icon display area 280. In Figure 99(f), the animation for the disappearance of the variable icon h0 begins, and in Figure 99(g), the animation for the disappearance continues, and in Figure 99(h), the variable icon h0 has completely disappeared. Note that the animation for the disappearance of the variable icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the regular map is performed.

Figure 100 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of a presentation centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. Note that Figure 100 omits the illustration of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the special symbol 2 hold lamp 220.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 100(a) displays the changes in the decorative patterns. Also, in the state shown in Figure 100(a), the changes in the normal pattern are displayed, and both special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are displayed stationary. To indicate this, the fourth pattern of the normal pattern is displayed flashing in the fourth pattern display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the fourth patterns of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are displayed lit.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in Figure 100 is a non-time-saving game state, a normal pending icon display area 281 is provided to the left of the variable icon display area 280.

The regular map hold icon display area 281 displays hold icons representing regular map holds. The number of regular map holds is represented by the number of regular map hold icons in addition to the number of lit regular map hold lamps 216, and the number of special map 2 hold lamps 220. The number may also be represented by the number of special map 2 hold icons. In other words, the hold icons correspond to the start information stored in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second hold icon, and so on. In the regular map hold icon display area 281, hold icons are displayed side by side, with the hold icon on the right being the hold icon with the oldest winning. Note that in Figure 100(a), since there are 0 regular map holds, no regular map hold icons are displayed in the regular map hold icon display area 281.

After that, at the timing shown in Figure 100(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4," and the display result of the normal winning symbol is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Additionally, in the fourth symbol display area 284, a circle symbol indicating a normal winning symbol is displayed.

When a normal winning game begins, the shutter member 2311 of the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 advances, making it easier to win at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100(c) displays a right-hit display U4 in the center of the display screen to encourage right-hit, promoting winning at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. In addition, a right-hit display is also displayed on the left side of the fourth symbol display area 284. At this time, it is also possible to display a presentation regarding the number of prize balls that can be expected to be won in this jackpot (for example, a suggestion of a 1500-ball jackpot, a suggestion of a 3000-ball jackpot, or a presentation to tease whether it is a 1500-ball or a 3000-ball jackpot). Furthermore, at the timing shown in Figure 100 (c), a game ball enters the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, the display of the changing special symbol 1 symbol begins, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284 begins to flash a "-" symbol, indicating that the changing special symbol 1 symbol is being displayed.

After that, when a predetermined variation time for special symbol 1 (e.g., 0.2 seconds) has elapsed, special symbol 1 is displayed as stopped. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 100(d), the display result of special symbol 1 is a small win, so a triangular symbol is displayed as stopped in the display area of special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284, indicating that a small win has occurred. When a small win occurs, the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and when the gaming ball enters this first variable winning opening 234 and passes through the specific area 234v, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game begins. Note that Figure 100(e) shows the situation in which the gaming ball passes through the specific area 234v during small win gameplay, resulting in a jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100(e) displays a background (jackpot background) indicating a jackpot, and the number of prize balls acquired since the first jackpot is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the lower center of the display screen displays the number of prize balls expected to be acquired in the current jackpot and the number of prize balls acquired since the first jackpot. At the timing shown in FIG. 100(e), one game ball enters the first variable prize opening 234, so 15 prize balls are paid out. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays "+15" in the upper center, indicating the number of prize balls associated with the win, and adds "15" to the number of prize balls acquired. After that, when 10 game balls enter the first variable prize opening 234, the first variable prize opening 234 is closed. Next, the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 retracts, opening the second variable winning opening 235 and starting a round of play. In this case, the game in which the first variable winning opening 234 opens is counted as the first round, so the first game in which the second variable winning opening 235 opens is the second round of play.

Figure 100(f) shows the end of the first jackpot game. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the number of prize balls won since the first jackpot, as 1,500 balls have been won, and also displays "TOTAL 01,500pt" in the display of the number of prize balls won, with "1,500/3,000" also displayed in the lower center. Also, in the center of the display screen, a message is displayed warning players to avoid becoming addicted and forgetting to remove their prepaid card: "Be careful not to get addicted. If you forget to remove your card, please stop." This warning message is displayed after each jackpot game, but it may also be displayed only at the end of the jackpot game related to the first jackpot.

After that, when the game transitions to the A2 time-saving game state, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 100 (g) displays "Please hit right," instructing the player to continue hitting right, indicating that the game has transitioned to the time-saving game state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(h), when the gaming ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g and enters the special chart 2 starting hole 232, the variable display of special chart 2 begins, while the shutter member 2311 of the special chart 1 starting hole 231 advances upon passing through the normal power activation gate 228g, making it easier for the ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231. In other words, in this embodiment, the shutter member 2311 is configured to be activated when triggered by either a normal winning or the gaming ball passing through the normal power activation gate 228g. Note that in the a2 time-saving gaming state, as described above, the operating time of the shutter member 2311 is longer (e.g., 5,800 ms), making it easier for the ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231 and the variable display of special chart 1 begin. The number of winning balls also continues to be displayed. In this embodiment, only the number of prize balls acquired by winning through the first variable prize slot 234 and the second variable prize slot 235 is displayed in the number of prize balls acquired display; however, the number of prize balls acquired by winning through other prize slots (for example, the general prize slot or the starting slot) may also be added to the number of prize balls acquired display. Also, in this embodiment, since the time between the end of the first jackpot and the start of the second jackpot is short, the jackpot background is also continuously displayed. In other words, ending and opening effects are not executed.

After that, at the timing shown in Figure 100(i), a gaming ball enters the special symbol 1 start port 231, and the display of the special symbol 1 change is shown to have begun. Note that in this embodiment, since the simultaneous change machine is capable of simultaneous change of special symbols 1 and 2, the display of the special symbol 1 change begins without waiting for the change of special symbol 2 to stop. Note that in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 100(i), the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 is four, and the fourth symbol display area 284 indicates that the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 is four. Note that in this embodiment, the display of the special symbol 1 change is not reserved, so even if multiple gaming balls enter the special symbol 1 start port 231, only the prize balls are paid out and the display of the symbol change is not reserved.

After that, as shown in Figure 100(j), when special symbol 1 stops and a small win symbol (for example, "special symbol b") is displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and when the game ball enters the opened first variable winning opening 234 and passes through the specific area 234v, the second big win game begins in the same manner as the first big win. Note that in this embodiment, when special symbol 1 stops and a small win symbol is displayed, special symbol 2, which is being displayed in a variable manner, is discarded and a losing symbol is displayed.

Figure 100(k) shows the end of the second jackpot game. Because the second jackpot occurred due to the special symbol 1 stopping at "special symbol b" during the a2 time-saving game mode, the game transitions to the a2 time-saving game mode after the jackpot game ends. However, when the first symbol change display for special symbol 1 or the first symbol change display for special symbol 2 begins, the a2 time-saving game mode ends and the game transitions to the non-time-saving game mode. Therefore, after the jackpot game ends, the reserved symbol 2 is consumed and the special symbol 2 change display begins, effectively transitioning to the non-time-saving game mode, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. However, the first symbol change display of special symbol 2 that is consumed after this jackpot game is completed is drawn using the judgment table in the a2 time-saving game state (see Figures 90(c) and 91(b)), so the change time is relatively short (for example, 5 seconds), and in most cases the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary, resulting in a transition to the c time-saving game state. Therefore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 100(k) displays the words "Entering Ox/X RUSH!!", indicating a transition to the c time-saving game state, suggesting a transition to the c time-saving game state.

At the timing shown in Figure 100(l), the reserved Special Chart 2 is consumed and the first symbol change display begins. At this time, the word "Ready" is displayed, amplifying the player's sense of anticipation for the transition to time-saving game state c. Note that at this timing, the game state is in a non-time-saving game state, but the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 shown in Figure 100(l) began in time-saving game state a, so the right-hit display continues.

After that, as shown in Figure 100 (m), when the symbol fluctuation display of Special Symbol 2 ends and the time-saving symbol ("Special Symbol E") stops, a star is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 284 to indicate that the time-saving symbol has stopped. Also, at this time, the word "GO" is displayed in the center of the display screen, notifying players that they have transitioned to time-saving game state c. As mentioned above, in time-saving game state c, the operating time of the shutter member 2311 of the Special Symbol 1 start port 231 is extremely short (e.g., 45 ms), making it difficult to win on Special Symbol 1; however, because a fluctuation time with a short fluctuation display time for Special Symbol 2 is likely to be selected, it may be possible to play while minimizing the loss of balls in your possession.

Figure 100(n) shows the start of the time-saving c game state and the start of the symbol change display of special symbol 2. When the time-saving c game state is entered, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a "RUSH TIME display" in the upper center of the display screen, which indicates the execution time of the time-saving c game state, and also displays the number of symbol changes remaining until the end of the time-saving c game state in the lower left corner of the display screen. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 100(n) indicates that 0.18 seconds have passed since the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) began, and that the number of symbol changes remaining until the end of the time-saving c game state is 143.

In addition, when the c time-saving game state begins, decorative symbols for the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed, and a mini symbol is also displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a variable icon display area 280 in the lower center of the performance display area 208d, and a special pattern 2 hold icon display area 282 to the right of that. The special pattern 2 hold icon display area 282 displays hold icons representing holds for special pattern 2. The number of holds for special pattern 2 is represented by the number of lit special pattern 2 hold lamps 220 as well as the number of hold icons for special pattern 2. In the special pattern 2 hold icon display area 282, hold icons are displayed side by side, with the hold icons on the left being the hold icons with the oldest winning entries.

In Figure 100(n), four special chart hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the special chart 2 hold icon display area 282, and all four special chart 2 hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode). In other words, the default hold icon for special chart 2 is a round hold icon.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 100(o), special symbol 2 stops at the losing symbol ("special symbol i"), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7," indicating a losing display result. The variable icon h0 also disappears. The fourth symbol display area 284 also displays special symbol 2 as a stopped cross, indicating a losing display result. At this time, the "RUSH TIME" display shows "00:01:98," indicating that 1.98 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving c game mode. While this "RUSH TIME" display shows the time since the time-saving c game mode began, the progression of time may be suspended during standby mode when no symbol variation display is being performed. It may also be displayed from the start of the first jackpot game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 100 (p) displays the state in which one reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 has been consumed and the symbol variation display for Special Symbol 2 has begun. At this time, the reserved symbols h21, h22, h23, and h24 for Special Symbol 2 are each displayed moving using a moving animation. The reserved symbol at the display position of the first reserved symbol h21 moves to the variable symbol display area 280 and becomes variable symbol h0. The reserved symbol at the display position of the second reserved symbol h22 becomes the first reserved symbol h21 for Special Symbol 2. The reserved symbol at the display position of the third reserved symbol h23 becomes the second reserved symbol h22 for Special Symbol 2. The reserved symbol at the display position of the fourth reserved symbol h24 becomes the third reserved symbol h23 for Special Symbol 2. The decorative symbol variation display then begins. At this time, the "RUSH TIME" display shows "00:02:37," indicating that 2.37 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving game mode c. It also notifies the player that the number of symbol changes until the time-saving game mode c ends is 142.

Figure 101 shows a step-by-step example of the presentation that occurs when a jackpot symbol stops and appears on Special Chart 2 during the c time-saving game mode (RUSH mode), resulting in a jackpot.

Figure 101(a) shows how the symbol change display of special symbol 2 has been performed 44 times since the transition to time-saving play state c. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 101(a) is displaying the decorative symbol change. Also, in the state shown in Figure 101(a), the special symbol 2 change display is being performed, and both the normal symbol and special symbol 1 are displayed as still symbols. To indicate this, the fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 flashing, and the fourth symbols of the normal symbol and special symbol 1 are displayed as lit symbols.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in Figure 101 (a) is the time-saving game state c, a special chart 2 reserve icon display area 282 is provided to the right of the variable icon display area 280. Reserve icons representing reserves for special chart 2 are displayed in the special chart 2 reserve icon display area 282. The number of reserves for special chart 2 is represented by the number of lit special chart 2 reserve lamps 220 as well as the number of reserve icons for special chart 2. In the special chart 2 reserve icon display area 282, reserve icons are displayed side by side, with the reserve icons on the left being the reserve icons with the oldest winnings.

In Figure 101 (a), four special chart hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the special chart 2 hold icon display area 282, and all four of these special chart 2 hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode). In other words, the default hold icon for special chart 2 is a round hold icon.

Furthermore, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 101(a), the "RUSH TIME" display is "00:46:10," indicating that 46.1 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving c game state. Furthermore, the number of times the special symbol 2 will change display until the time-saving c game state ends is "100 times."

After that, as shown in Figure 101(b), Special Chart 2 stops and displays the jackpot symbol ("Special Chart B"), and at the same time, it stops and displays the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Additionally, Special Chart 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 also stops and displays a circle, indicating a jackpot. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Furthermore, the "RUSH TIME" display shows "01:30:00", indicating that 1 minute and 30 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving game mode c.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 101(c) displays "3000pt Jackpot!!" in the center of the display screen, indicating that two jackpots will occur. A right-hit display encouraging continued right-hit play is also displayed in the lower center of the display screen. The "RUSH TIME" display shows "01:40:87," indicating that 1 minute, 40 seconds, and 87 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving c game mode. When the jackpot game begins, the first variable winning slot 234 is not opened, and the second variable winning slot 235 is opened, starting the first round. After that, the effects shown in Figures 101(d) to 101(h) are performed. The effects shown in Figures 101(d) to 101(h) are similar to those shown in Figures 100(f) to 100(j), and therefore will not be described here.

Figure 101(i) shows a situation in which a gaming ball passes through a specific area 234v during a small jackpot game, resulting in a jackpot. At the timing shown in Figure 100(e), one gaming ball enters the first variable winning opening 234, so 15 prize balls are paid out, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "+15" in the upper center to indicate the number of winning balls. Also, "15" is added to the number of winning balls, and "TOTAL 04515pt" is displayed. After that, when 10 gaming balls enter the first variable winning opening 234, the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. Next, the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 retracts, opening the second variable winning opening 235 and starting the round game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 101(j) shows an in-animation in which translucent button images move from the left and right sides of the display screen to the center. This can create a sense of anticipation as to whether or not a button effect will begin. If the button effect does not begin, the translucent button images do not merge, and an effect display is displayed in which they frame out of the screen. At the timing shown in Figure 101(j), the total number of prize balls acquired is displayed as "04665pt," indicating that 4665 prize balls have been acquired since the first jackpot, and the number of prize balls acquired in the lower center is displayed as "1665/3000," indicating that 1665 prize balls have been acquired since the previous jackpot. The "RUSH TIME" display continues to progress, showing "02:34:87," indicating that 2 minutes, 34 seconds, and 87 seconds have passed since the initial c-time-saving game state began.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 101 (k), a pair of translucent button images merge in the center, the button effect begins, a remaining time display bar is displayed along with the button image, and the words "Press!" are displayed to encourage the player to operate the effect button 136.

When the player then operates the effect button 136, as shown in Figure 101(l), the letter "V" appears along with the words "Add-on!!," indicating that one more jackpot is available. On the other hand, the button effect may also be performed even if there is no additional jackpot. In this case, for example, a message such as "Sorry" may be displayed to indicate that there is no additional jackpot. Furthermore, the button effect may always be performed during a jackpot game, or it may be performed in some cases and not in others. At the timing shown in Figure 101(l), the total number of prize balls acquired is displayed as "04710pt," indicating that 4710 prize balls have been acquired since the first jackpot. The number of prize balls acquired in the lower center is displayed as "1710/4500," indicating that 1710 prize balls have been acquired since the previous jackpot and the number of prize balls (4500) that can be expected to be acquired in three jackpots. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be won is updated to indicate an additional jackpot, but instead the number of rounds may be displayed and the additional rounds may be displayed to indicate an additional jackpot. Also, while the "V" display is set to disappear after a predetermined time has elapsed, it may be set to continue to be displayed until the jackpot game related to the additional jackpot has ended. Furthermore, the "RUSH TIME" display continues to progress and shows "02:35:87," indicating that 2 minutes, 35 seconds, and 87 seconds have passed since the initial c-time-saving game mode began.

Then, the jackpot game shown in Figure 101(m) continues, and the effects shown in Figures 101(n) to 101(r) are played. Note that the effects shown in Figures 101(n) to 101(r) are similar to the effects shown in Figures 101(d) to 101(h), so a description of them will be omitted.

In the above description,
"A first starting winning means [for example, a normal starting gate 228, etc.],
A first symbol display means (e.g., a general symbol display device 210, etc.) capable of executing a first symbol change display when a game ball enters the first start winning means;
When a winning symbol [for example, "normal symbol A"] is displayed in the first symbol change display, a certain electric device [for example, shutter member 2311] that can change from a first state [for example, closed state] to a second state [for example, open state],
an actuated gate [e.g., a normally-operated gate 228g, etc.];
a first playing area (e.g., a left playing area, etc.);
A gaming machine having a second gaming area (for example, a right gaming area) that is different from the first gaming area,
When the game ball passes through the operating gate, the certain electric device can change from the first state to the second state (for example, when the game ball passes through the normal electric operating gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 is activated and advances, making it easier for the game ball to enter the special drawing 1 starting hole 231, etc.),
The first start winning means is a winning means arranged in the first game area (for example, as shown in FIG. 84, a start opening 228 is arranged in the center of the game board 200, and a game ball flowing down the game area on the left side can win a prize, etc.),
The certain electric device is a device arranged in the second play area (for example, as shown in Figures 84 and 85, the shutter member 2311 is arranged in the play area on the right side),
The operating gate is a gate located in the second play area (for example, as shown in Figures 84 and 85, the normally powered operating gate 228g is located in the play area on the right side).

While conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in terms of playability, this gaming machine can provide a gaming machine with unique playability.

Furthermore, this gaming machine may be able to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay features, allowing the first starting winning means and the operating gate to activate a common device.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of only displaying the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means, or may be capable of displaying other symbols besides the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means. Furthermore, the first symbol display means may always display the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means, or may not always display the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means.

Furthermore, a certain electric device may be capable of only changing from the first state to the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display, or may be capable of changing from the first state to a state other than the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display. Furthermore, a certain electric device may always change from the first state to the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display, or may not be capable of changing from the first state to the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may only be able to change from the first state to the second state, or when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may also be able to change from the first state to a state other than the second state. Further, when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may always change from the first state to the second state, or when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may not always change from the first state to the second state.

Furthermore, the first start winning means may be located only in the first game area, or may be located in an area other than the first game area. Furthermore, the first start winning means may always be located in the first game area, or may not always be located in the first game area.

Furthermore, a certain electric device may be placed only in the second play area, or may be placed in areas other than the second play area. Further, a certain electric device may always be placed in the second play area, or may not be placed in the second play area.

Furthermore, the operating gate may be arranged only in the second play area, or may be arranged in areas other than the second play area. Furthermore, the operating gate may always be arranged in the second play area, or may not always be arranged in the second play area.

Also,
"A second starting winning means [for example, the special drawing 1 starting port 231, etc.] that makes it easier to win when the certain electric device is in the second state,
A third starting winning means [for example, special drawing 2 starting port 232, etc.],
A second pattern display means [for example, a special pattern 1 display device 212, etc.] capable of executing a second pattern change display;
A third pattern display means (e.g., special pattern 2 display device 214, etc.) capable of executing a third pattern change display;
A first variable winning means (e.g., a first variable winning port 234, etc.),
A specific area (e.g., specific area 234v, etc.) through which the gaming ball that has entered the first variable winning means can pass;
A game control means (for example, a CPU 304 in the main control unit 300) capable of executing a small win game and a big win game is provided.
The first variable winning means is a means by which the game ball can enter in the small win game (for example, when a small win occurs in special drawing 1, the first variable winning port 234 opens, making it easier for the ball to enter, etc.),
The game control means is a means capable of transitioning to the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the specific area in the small win game (for example, as shown in Figures 100(d) to 100(e), when a small win occurs on special chart 1 and the game ball passes through the specific area 234v in the small win game related to the small win, the game transitions to the jackpot game, etc.),
The first gaming area is a gaming area in which it is recommended to let the gaming ball flow down in a first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, etc.),
The second game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in a second game state [for example, a time-saving game state, etc.] and a third game state [for example, c time-saving game state, etc.],
the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
the third gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The third gaming state is a gaming state different from the second gaming state,
The second symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the second symbol change display when a game ball enters the second start winning means [for example, when a game ball enters the special symbol 1 start hole 231, the special symbol 1 change display is executed, etc.],
The third symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the third symbol change display when a game ball enters the third start winning means (for example, when a game ball enters the special symbol 2 start hole 232, the special symbol 2 change display is executed, etc.),
The second game state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start winning means than in the first game state (for example, in a time-saving game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special game starting hole 232 than in the normal game state),
The third game state is a game state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the second start winning means than in the second game state (for example, in the c time-saving game state, it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the special chart 2 start hole 232 than in the a time-saving game state),
After the jackpot game that has been transitioned to based on the result of the second pattern change display has ended, there is a case where the game state is transitioned to the second game state or the third game state (for example, if the result of the change display of special pattern 1 is a jackpot or a small jackpot, after the jackpot game that has been transitioned to based on this has ended, there is a case where the game state is transitioned to a time-saving game state or a case where the game state is substantially transitioned to c time-saving game state, etc.),
In the second symbol variable display, the result of a small win is more likely to be displayed than the result of a loss [for example, in the variable display of special symbol 1, the small win symbol is more likely to be displayed than the loss symbol].

This gaming machine may be able to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay that allows consecutive jackpots to be won in a short period of time and can even generate additional jackpots.

Here, the second symbol display means may be capable of only displaying the second symbol variation, or may be capable of displaying other symbols besides the second symbol variation. Furthermore, the second symbol display means may always display the second symbol variation, or may not always display the second symbol variation.

Furthermore, the third pattern display means may be capable of only executing the third pattern variable display, or may be capable of executing displays other than the third pattern variable display. Furthermore, the third pattern display means may always execute the third pattern variable display, or may not execute the third pattern variable display in some cases.

Furthermore, the specific area may be one that only gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means can pass through, or one that only gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means can pass through.Furthermore, the specific area may be one that gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means always pass through, or one that gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means may not pass through.

Furthermore, the game control means may be capable of executing only small hit games and big hit games, or may be capable of executing games other than small hit games and big hit games.Furthermore, the game control means may be capable of always executing small hit games and big hit games, or may be capable of not executing small hit games and big hit games in some cases.

The game control means may be such that a transition to a jackpot game is only possible when a game ball passes through a specific area in a small hit game, or such that a transition to a game other than a jackpot game is possible when a game ball passes through a specific area in a small hit game. The game control means may be such that a transition to a jackpot game is always possible when a game ball passes through a specific area in a small hit game, or such that a transition to a jackpot game is not possible when a game ball passes through a specific area in a small hit game.

Furthermore, the first game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down only in the first game state, or one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down in game states other than the first game state. Further, the first game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down always in the first game state, or one in which it is not recommended to let game balls flow down in the first game state.

Furthermore, the second game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down only in the second game state and the third game state, or one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down in game states other than the second game state and the third game state. Further, the second game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down always in the second game state and the third game state, or one in which it is not recommended to let game balls flow down in the second game state and the third game state.

Furthermore, the second symbol display means may be capable of only executing the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means, or may be capable of executing displays other than the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means.Furthermore, the second symbol display means may be capable of always executing the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means, or may be capable of not executing the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means.

Furthermore, the third symbol display means may be capable of only displaying the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means, or may be capable of displaying other symbols in addition to the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means.Furthermore, the third symbol display means may always display the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means, or may not always display the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means.

Furthermore, the second gaming state may be one in which it is easier for gaming balls to win only the second start winning means than in the first gaming state, or it may be one in which it is easier for gaming balls to win in winning means other than the second start winning means than in the first gaming state.Furthermore, the second gaming state may be one in which it is always easier for gaming balls to win in the second start winning means than in the first gaming state, or it may be one in which it is sometimes less easier for gaming balls to win in the second start winning means than in the first gaming state.

Furthermore, the third gaming state may be one in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to win only the second start winning means than in the second gaming state, or it may be one in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to win in winning means other than the second start winning means than in the second gaming state.Furthermore, the third gaming state may be one in which it is always more difficult for a gaming ball to win in the second start winning means than in the second gaming state, or it may be one in which it is not always more difficult for a gaming ball to win in the second start winning means than in the second gaming state.

Also, there may be cases where the game state transitions to the second game state or the third game state only after the jackpot game to which the game state transitions based on the result of the second symbol variation display has ended, or there may be cases where the game state transitions to the second game state or the third game state other than after the jackpot game to which the game state transitions based on the result of the second symbol variation display has ended. Also, there may be cases where the game state transitions to the second game state or the third game state always after the jackpot game to which the game state transitions based on the result of the second symbol variation display has ended, or there may be cases where the game state transitions to the second game state or the third game state does not occur after the jackpot game to which the game state transitions based on the result of the second symbol variation display has ended.

Furthermore, the second pattern changing display may only display a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss, or the second pattern changing display may have cases other than a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss. Further, the second pattern changing display may always display a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss, or the second pattern changing display may not display a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss.

Also,
"The second symbol change display is a symbol change display that can be executed at a change display time selected from a plurality of change display times,
The third symbol variable display is a symbol variable display that can be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times,
In the second gaming state, the second symbol variable display is more likely to have a variable display time [for example, a variable display time of 0.2 seconds] selected than the third symbol variable display.

With this gaming machine, the change time of the second symbol change display is short, which makes the transition from the first jackpot game to the second jackpot game feel seamless, and may improve the feeling of immediate consecutive wins.

Here, the second symbol variable display may be one that can be executed only at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times, or one that can be executed at a variable display time other than the variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times. Furthermore, the second symbol variable display may be one that is always executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times, or one that may not be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times.

Furthermore, the third pattern variable display may be one that can be executed only at a variable display time selected from multiple variable display times, or one that can be executed at a variable display time other than the variable display time selected from multiple variable display times.Furthermore, the third pattern variable display may be one that is always executed at a variable display time selected from multiple variable display times, or one that may not be executed at a variable display time selected from multiple variable display times.

Furthermore, in the second gaming state, only the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display may be more likely to be selected, or in the second gaming state, variable display times other than the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display may also be more likely to be selected. Further, in the second gaming state, the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display may always be selected, or in the second gaming state, there may be cases where the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display is not selected.

Also,
"Equipped with a display means (e.g., decorative pattern display device 208, etc.) capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display,
When the first pattern change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display may be executed [for example, when the normal pattern change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display is executed, etc.],
When the third pattern change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display may be executed [for example, when the special pattern 2 change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display is executed, etc.],
Even if the second symbol variable display is executed, the decorative symbol variable display is not executed [for example, even if the special symbol 1 variable display is executed, the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, etc.].

With this gaming machine, by not displaying decorative symbol changes during the second symbol change display, it may be possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative pattern change display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the decorative pattern change display. Furthermore, the display means may always display the decorative pattern change display, or may not always display the decorative pattern change display.

Furthermore, when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where only the decorative pattern change display is executed, or when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where displays other than the decorative pattern change display are also executed. Further, when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is always executed, or when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is not executed.

Furthermore, when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where only the decorative pattern change display is executed, or when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where displays other than the decorative pattern change display are also executed. Further, when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is always executed, or when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is not executed.

Furthermore, even if the second pattern change display is executed, it is not necessary for only the decorative pattern change display to be executed, and even if the second pattern change display is executed, it is not necessary for displays other than the decorative pattern change display to be executed. Furthermore, even if the second pattern change display is executed, it is not necessary for the decorative pattern change display to be executed, and even if the second pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is executed.

Also,
We also explained that "a gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a second variable winning means [for example, a second variable winning opening 235, etc.] that can be opened and closed during the jackpot game."

Here, the second variable winning means may be capable of opening and closing only during a jackpot game, or may be capable of opening and closing during games other than a jackpot game. Furthermore, the second variable winning means may be capable of always opening and closing during a jackpot game, or may not always open and close during a jackpot game.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized in that, even if a gaming ball passes through the operating gate while the first symbol variation display is being executed, the certain electric device enters the second state [for example, if a gaming ball passes through the normal electric operating gate 228g while a normal symbol variation display is being executed, the shutter member 2311 advances even though the normal symbol variation display is being executed]." was also explained.

With this gaming machine, even if the first symbol change display is performed between jackpots or during an instant win streak, the activation gate is active, so a certain electric device can be activated without waiting for the first symbol change display to end. This makes the transition to the jackpot game between jackpots feel seamless, which may improve the feel of instant wins.

Here, even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, only a certain electric device may enter the second state, or even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, things other than the certain electric device may enter the second state. Also, even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, a certain electric device may always enter the second state, or even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, a certain electric device may not enter the second state.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized in that, when a gaming ball passes through the operating gate, the certain electric device can change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol variation display."

Here, when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, only a certain electric device may be able to change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display, or when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, devices other than the certain electric device may also be able to change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display. Also, when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, a certain electric device may always change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display, or when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, a certain electric device may not change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display.

Furthermore, in the above description,
"A certain starting winning means [for example, special drawing 2 starting port 232, etc.],
A certain pattern display means [for example, a special pattern 2 display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a certain pattern change display when a game ball enters the certain start winning means;
A variable winning means (e.g., a second variable winning opening 235) that can be opened and closed during a jackpot game;
a first playing area (e.g., a left playing area, etc.);
A gaming machine having a second gaming area that is a gaming area different from the first gaming area [for example, a right gaming area, etc.],
the certain start winning means is a winning means disposed in the second game area,
the certain variable winning means is a winning means arranged in the second game area,
A game ball passage (for example, a ball passage 239) through which game balls that have not entered the variable winning means can flow down is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage provided with first protrusions [for example, ribs 23f1 to 23f3, ribs 23r1 to 23r3, etc.] for causing the gaming balls flowing down the gaming ball passage to collide with the first protrusions and slow down the flow speed of the gaming balls.

While conventional gaming machines have had room for improvement in the ball path, this gaming machine can provide a gaming machine with a distinctive ball path.

In addition, this gaming machine may be able to reduce the speed at which gaming balls flow down, thereby improving the winning rate.

Furthermore, with this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a gaming ball that was shot during a jackpot but has not yet won a prize will win before the gaming ball is shot in the game state immediately after the jackpot, causing a payout before the gaming ball is shot, thereby suppressing gambling.

Here, a certain symbol display means may be capable of only displaying a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means, or may be capable of displaying other symbols in addition to a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means. Also, a certain symbol display means may be capable of always displaying a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means, or may not always display a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means.

Furthermore, a certain variable winning means may be capable of opening and closing only during a jackpot game, or may be capable of opening and closing during other games as well. Further, a certain variable winning means may be capable of always opening and closing during a jackpot game, or may not always open and close during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, a certain start winning means may be arranged only in the second game area, or may be arranged in areas other than the second game area. Further, a certain start winning means may be arranged always in a certain game area, or may not be arranged in the second game area.

Furthermore, a certain variable winning means may be arranged only in the second play area, or may be arranged in areas other than the second play area. Further, a certain variable winning means may be arranged always in the second play area, or may not always be arranged in the second play area.

Furthermore, the game ball passage may be such that only game balls that have not entered a certain variable winning means can flow down, or such that game balls other than those that have not entered a certain variable winning means can also flow down.Furthermore, the game ball passage may be such that game balls that have not entered a certain variable winning means can always flow down, or such that game balls that have not entered a certain variable winning means may not always be able to flow down.

Also,
"The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage having a width that does not allow two or more gaming balls to flow down in parallel [for example, the ball passage 239 has a width that does not allow multiple gaming balls to flow down in parallel, etc.]."

Also,
"The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage that does not allow a gaming ball received without entering the certain variable winning means to enter a winning means other than the certain initial winning means."

Also,
"The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage having a serpentine portion (for example, an S-shaped structure extending from the second variable winning opening 235 to the special drawing 2 starting opening 232) that has a structure in which a portion of the gaming ball passage snakes downward."

Also,
The article also explained that "a gaming machine is characterized in that a second protrusion [e.g., rib 23f4, etc.] is provided on the serpentine portion to guide gaming balls flowing down the serpentine portion along the flow path."

The following is an additional note, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 11)
a first starting winning means;
a first symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means;
When a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol variation display, an electric device that changes from a first state to a second state;
an operating gate;
a first game area into which the game ball is more likely to enter when hit from the left than when hit from the right;
A second game area into which the game ball is more likely to enter when hit from the right than when hit from the left.
When the game ball passes through the activation gate, the certain electric device changes from the first state to the second state,
the first start winning means is a winning means arranged in the first game area,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the certain electric device is a device placed in the second gaming area.

(Appendix 12)
12. The gaming machine according to claim 11,
A second starting winning means;
A third starting winning means;
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variable display;
a third symbol display means capable of executing a third symbol variable display;
a first variable winning means;
a specific area through which a gaming ball that has entered the first variable winning means can pass;
A game control means capable of executing a small win game and a big win game is provided.
The game control means is a means for transitioning to the big win game when the game ball passes through the specific area in the small win game,
The first game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in a first game state,
The second game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in the second game state and the third game state,
the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
the third gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The third gaming state is a gaming state different from the second gaming state,
The second symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the second symbol variation display when a gaming ball enters the second start winning means,
the third symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the third symbol variation display when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means;
The second game state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to win via the second start winning means than via the third start winning means,
The third gaming state is a gaming state in which the gaming ball is more likely to win via the third starting winning means than via the second starting winning means,
After the jackpot game to which the transition is made based on the result of the second symbol variation display is completed, there are cases where the game state is transitioned to the second game state and cases where the game state is transitioned to the third game state,
In the second pattern variation display, the game machine is characterized in that a result of a small win is displayed more often than a result of a loss.

(Appendix 13)
13. The gaming machine according to claim 12,
The second symbol variable display is a symbol variable display that can be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times,
The third symbol variable display is a symbol variable display that can be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times,
In the second gaming state, the shortest variable display time is more likely to be selected for the second variable pattern display than for the third variable pattern display.

(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to claim 12 or 13,
A display means is provided for displaying a decorative pattern variation display,
When the first symbol variation display is executed, the decorative symbol variation display may be executed,
When the third symbol variation display is executed, the decorative symbol variation display may be executed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the decorative symbol variation display is not executed even when the second symbol variation display is executed.

(Appendix 15)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note 11 to Supplementary Note 14,
The gaming machine is characterized by being provided with a second variable winning means that can be opened and closed during the jackpot game.

(Appendix 16)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note 11 to Supplementary Note 15,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the certain electric device is in the second state even when the gaming ball passes through the operating gate while the first pattern variation display is being executed.

(Appendix 17)
A starting winning means;
A certain symbol display means capable of executing a certain symbol variation display when a game ball enters the certain starting winning means;
A variable winning means that can be opened and closed in a jackpot game;
A gaming machine having a certain gaming area into which a gaming ball is more likely to enter when hit from the right than when hit from the left,
the certain start winning means is a winning means arranged in the certain game area,
the certain variable winning means is a winning means arranged in the certain game area,
a guide path for guiding a gaming ball that has not entered the variable winning means to the start winning means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the guideway is a passage provided with a first protrusion for colliding with a gaming ball flowing down the guideway to slow down the speed at which the gaming ball flows down the guideway.

(Appendix 18)
18. The gaming machine according to claim 17,
The guideway is a passageway having a width that does not allow two or more game balls to flow down in parallel.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to claim 17 or 18,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the guide path is a passageway having a serpentine portion, part of which is structured to snake downward.

(Appendix 19)
19. The gaming machine according to claim 18,
A gaming machine characterized in that a second protrusion is provided in the serpentine portion for guiding gaming balls flowing down the serpentine portion along a flow path.

Next, we will further explain specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment.

As explained using Figure 90, in Special Chart 2, if the time-saving play state is A, there are no misses, and either a big win symbol, a small win symbol, or a time-saving symbol will be displayed, with the probability that a time-saving symbol will be displayed. Conversely, in Special Chart 2, if the play state is other than A (normal play state, C time-saving play state), the time-saving symbol will not be displayed, and the probability that a miss symbol will be displayed is the highest. In other words, the time-saving symbol is only displayed in A time-saving play state. Also, in Special Chart 1, there are no misses regardless of the play state, and either a big win symbol or a small win symbol will be displayed, with the probability that a small win symbol will be displayed.

Also, as mentioned above, in the flow of play according to this embodiment, in the normal play state, play is centered on the variable display of the normal symbol, while in the time-saving play state c (RUSH state), play is centered on the variable display of special symbol 2. In other words, in the normal play state, among the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2, the variable display of the normal symbol takes top priority, while in the time-saving play state c (RUSH state), among the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2, the variable display of special symbol 2 takes top priority. Here, top priority means that a presentation corresponding to the variable display (for example, a decorative symbol variable display) is given priority. In the normal play state, if only the normal symbol is displaying a variable display among the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2, a decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the normal symbol variable display (normal symbol decorative symbol variable display) is executed. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if only special symbol 2 of the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2 is displaying a change, the decorative symbol change effect corresponding to the special symbol 2 change effect (special symbol 2 decorative symbol change effect) is not executed. However, whether or not the special symbol 2 change effect is being executed is also notified on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the mini symbol and the symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284. On the other hand, in the c time-saving game state (RUSH state), if only special symbol 2 of the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2 is displaying a change, the decorative symbol change effect corresponding to the special symbol 2 change effect (special symbol 2 decorative symbol change effect) is executed. Note that with special symbol 1, the decorative symbol change effect corresponding to the special symbol 1 change effect is not executed under any circumstances. However, whether or not the special symbol 1 change effect is being executed is also notified on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the mini symbol and the symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284.

Figure 102 shows a step-by-step example of prioritizing the presentation of the pattern that is displayed first when different patterns are displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

In normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode), it is recommended to hit from the left and aim for the normal game start slot 228, so a win at the special game 2 start slot 232, which requires a right-handed hit, is an irregular win. However, immediately after switching from the time-saving game mode, in which a right-handed hit is recommended, to the normal game mode, the special game 2 change display may be displayed due to the reserved special game 2 being consumed. Therefore, it is possible that both the normal game change display and the special game 2 change display may be displayed in the normal game mode.

102(a) to 102(j) are examples in which the symbol that stops first is given priority when both the normal symbol and the special symbol 2, which indicates a jackpot, are being displayed in normal play mode. Note that if the special symbol 2 is a miss, no special symbol 2 effect will be displayed even if the special symbol 2 stops first. The time that the special symbol 2 changes during normal play mode is longer than the time that the normal symbol changes, and multiple normal symbol changes may occur during one special symbol 2 change.

A fourth pattern display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 102. The fourth pattern display area 284 is, from top to bottom, the display area for the normal pattern, the display area for special pattern 1, and the display area for special pattern 2. In the display area for each pattern, the area on the left is the reserved number notification area, and the area on the right is the pattern change notification area. In this embodiment, there are no reserved numbers for special pattern 1, and normal pattern and special pattern 2 can each store a maximum of four reserved numbers. In the pattern change notification area for the normal pattern, while the normal pattern is stopped, a circle symbol indicating a win or a cross symbol indicating a loss is displayed lit up, but while the normal pattern is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. In the notification area for special chart 1 during pattern change, while the special chart 1 pattern is stopped, a circle indicating a big win, a triangle indicating a small win, or a cross indicating a miss is displayed lit up, but while the special chart 1 pattern is changing, a "-" is displayed flashing. In the notification area for special chart 2 during pattern change, while the special chart 2 pattern is stopped, a circle indicating a big win, a triangle indicating a small win, a star indicating a time-saving pattern has stopped, or a cross indicating a miss is displayed lit up, but while the special chart 2 pattern is changing, a "-" is displayed flashing.

In addition, a regular map hold icon display area 281 is provided in the left portion of the effect display area 208d in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 102. This regular map hold icon display area 281 displays a hold icon representing the hold of a regular map. Furthermore, a variable icon display area 280 is provided in the center of the effect display area 208d. The variable icon display area 280 displays a variable icon corresponding to the currently occurring pattern change display.

The fourth pattern display area 284, regular pattern pending icon display area 281, and variable icon display area 280 described above are the same in the subsequent figures.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, in the normal game state, no change effects using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2 are performed, but change effects using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of the regular symbol are performed. Note that in the c time-saving game state, the change display of the symbol on special symbol 2 is the main focus, so change effects using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2 are performed.

In Figure 102(a), only the special symbol 2, which is the jackpot, is showing a variable display. As mentioned above, in normal game mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform a variable display using a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 102(a) displays a stop display using a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol. That is, "Decoration 8" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Decoration 3" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "Decoration 4" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the right symbol display area 208c, and since the symbols are scattered, a miss for the normal symbol is announced. Additionally, a mini symbol MIN is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. This mini symbol MIN corresponds to a display that notifies whether or not a variable symbol (regular symbol, special symbol 1, special symbol 2) is being displayed. While a variable symbol is being displayed, the mini symbol is displayed as a variable symbol, and while a static symbol is being displayed, the mini symbol is also displayed as a static symbol. In the mini symbol MIN shown in Figure 102(a), the 8-3-4 mini symbol combination is displayed as a static symbol.

In normal game mode, it is recommended to aim for the normal map start port 228 (see Figure 84) and make a left-handed hit. In Figure 102 (b), a win occurs at the normal map start port 228, and the normal map change display begins on the normal map display device 210 shown in Figure 84. Hereinafter, when we refer to the normal map change display, we mean the change display on the normal map display device 210 controlled by the main control unit 300. Also, when we refer to the special map change display, we mean the change display on the first special map display device 212 or second special map display device 214 controlled by the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 sends a map change start command to the first sub-control unit 400 when the normal map change display begins and when the special map change display begins. The map change start command includes the time for the change display (change time). The first sub-control unit 400 is aware of the remaining time for the variable display of special symbol 2, which continues from FIG. 102(a). If the currently active variable display of special symbol 2 is a jackpot, upon receiving a command to start the variable display of the normal symbol, it determines which variable display will end first: the variable display of the normal symbol or the variable display of special symbol 2. Note that if the currently active variable display of special symbol 2 is a miss, the above determination is not made. Also, while the above determination may be made, if the variable display of special symbol 2 is a miss, no effect related to the variable display of special symbol 2 will be performed even if the variable display of special symbol 2 ends first. In this case, the variable display of the normal symbol ends first. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a variable display using decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol. In other words, the decorative symbols that had been displayed as still symbols begin to change, and the decorative symbols are rapidly changing in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Additionally, the mini symbol will also begin to change in the upper left corner. The regular symbol change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280 in the lower center.

In Figure 102 (c), the normal map's changing display continues, and the changing performance using the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal map's changing display shows a fluctuating display of "Decoration 5" - "Decoration 4" - "Decoration 7". Because the normal map's changing display continues, the mini pattern MIN does not show a fluctuating display and continues to show the changing display, and the mini pattern MIN notifies that the normal map is changing. In this situation, a win is again made in the normal map start port 228, and normal map reserves are accumulated. The normal map reserve icon h11 is displayed in the normal map reserve icon display area 281. Also, in the fourth pattern display area 284, "1" is displayed in the normal map reserve number notification area.

In Figure 102(d), there are three winning entries in the normal map start slot 228, and one more normal map is reserved. The normal map reserve icon h12 is additionally displayed in the normal map reserve icon display area 281. Additionally, in the fourth pattern display area 284, the value in the normal map reserve number notification area is updated to display "2." At the timing of Figure 102(d), the normal map fluctuation display ends, and the fluctuation performance using the decorative patterns corresponding to the normal map fluctuation display also ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 7" as frozen. Additionally, the mini pattern MIN combination of 5-4-7 is also frozen in the upper left. The normal map fluctuation icon h0 has disappeared in the fluctuation icon display area 280 in the lower center. Note that the fluctuation display of special map 2 is still ongoing.

In Figure 102(e), one reserved regular map is consumed, and the display of the regular map's changes begins. A pattern change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines which change display will end first: the current regular map pattern change or the special 2 pattern change continuing from Figure 102(a). Here again, the regular map pattern change display ends first. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 208 again starts a change performance using a decorative pattern corresponding to the regular map's change display. Note that the regular map reserved icon display area 281 displays a moving animation of the reserved icon, and the regular map change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280. In addition, notifications of the regular map's changes also begin via the mini pattern MIN and the regular map pattern change notification area in the fourth pattern display area 284.

In Figure 102 (f), the display of the regular map's changes continues, and in the following figure (g), the display of the regular map's changes ends, and the display of the changes using the decorative patterns corresponding to the regular map's change also ends, with the decorative pattern display device 208 displaying a static display of the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7." Additionally, the mini pattern display displays a static display of the mini pattern combination of 4-1-7, and a cross is lit in the regular map's pattern change notification area in the fourth pattern display area 284, indicating that the regular map has stopped displaying. At this point, the number of reserved regular maps is 1. The display of the special map 2's change is still ongoing.

In Figure 102(h), the remaining regular symbol is reserved, and the display of the regular symbol's changes begins. A symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, which determines which of the symbol changes, the current regular symbol or the special 2 symbol change continuing from Figure 102(a), will end first. Here, the special 2 symbol change display that has been continuing ends first. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a presentation that suggests a jackpot with the current special symbol 2 symbol change display. In other words, in conjunction with the start of the regular symbol change display, a shutter effect is started, which is a presentation that suggests a jackpot with that change, rather than a change effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the regular symbol change display. When the shutter effect starts, a shutter image STG in a closed state is displayed on the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The shutter image STG displays the words "Rush Challenge Approaching," suggesting that the jackpot game is about to begin. Also, because this shutter image STG overlaps, the regular map's pending icon display area 281 and variable icon display area 280 are not visible, but the fourth symbol display area 284 and mini symbol MIN are displayed. The mini symbol indicates that the regular map is currently variable.

In Figure 102(i), the display of the variation of special symbol 2 ends. A circle symbol indicating a jackpot is displayed in the pattern variation notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 102(i). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit display U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen so as to overlap the shutter image STG, promoting a win in the second variable winning slot 235. In addition, a small right-hit display U5 is displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284.

In Figure 102 (j), a jackpot game (10R jackpot game) for special symbol 2 has begun, and on the decorative symbol display device 208, the shutter image STG has disappeared and an image during the jackpot game, such as "Rush Challenge Bonus," is displayed. The display of the normal symbol change continues, and the mini symbol MIN and the normal symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 indicate that the normal symbol is changing. Also, below the mini symbol MIN, a prize ball count display TAL is displayed, which shows the cumulative number of prize balls won since the first jackpot game. Furthermore, the right-hit display U4 has disappeared, but the small right-hit display U5 is still displayed.

The above explanation was an example of a jackpot being indicated by the variable display of special chart 2, but the same applies when the variable display of special chart 2 is indicated by a small jackpot. In other words, the shutter effect may be an effect that suggests a small jackpot in the currently active variable display of special chart 2. In this case, the text displayed on the shutter image SRG may be the same or different (e.g., "V Challenge Approaching"). Conversely, if the variable display of special chart 2 indicates a small jackpot, the shutter effect may not be performed. For example, if the variable display of special chart 2, which indicates a small jackpot, stops while the normal chart is changing, only a small right-hit display U5 may be displayed after the fixed stop of special chart 2 (at the start of the small jackpot). In other words, the background display and the variable display of the normal chart may continue as is. Here, if the game ball passes through specific area 234v during a small jackpot game, an image of the jackpot game may be displayed.

Also, if both the normal symbol and the special symbol 2, which is a losing symbol, are being displayed during normal play, regardless of which symbol stops first, the display will not feature a decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2's display, but will feature a decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol's display.

Figures 102 (A) to (D) show an example in which, in the time-saving c game state, when both the variable display of special symbol 2 and the variable display of special symbol 1, which will result in a jackpot, are being executed (so-called simultaneous fluctuations), the effect of the symbol that stops first is prioritized. In the time-saving c game state (RUSH state), a right hit is made, aiming for the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a jackpot is aimed at the variable display of special symbol 2. The variable time of special symbol 2 in this time-saving c game state is shorter than the variable time of special symbol 2 in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state). In the time-saving c game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the variable display of special symbol 2 is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

Figure 102(A) shows the state immediately after the c time-saving game state begins and the symbol change display of special symbol 2 begins. When the c time-saving game state is entered, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a "RUSH TIME display" in the upper center of the display screen, which indicates the execution time of the c time-saving game state. The lower left corner of the display screen also displays the number of symbol changes remaining until the end of the c time-saving game state. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 102(A) indicates that 0.01 seconds have passed since the c time-saving game state (RUSH state) began, and that there are 143 symbol changes remaining until the end of the c time-saving game state. Furthermore, a small right-hit display U5 is also displayed. Below the number of symbol changes remaining until the end of the c time-saving game state, a presentation mode selection display DMS is displayed. Presentation modes will be described in more detail below, but in this case, the default presentation mode, presentation mode A, is selected.

In addition, when the c time-saving game state begins, decorative symbols for the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed, and a mini symbol MIN is also displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and a special pattern 2 hold icon display area 282 is displayed to the right of that. In Figure 102 (A), the variable icon h0 for special pattern 2 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the variable display of special pattern 2 is being performed. In the central area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable effect using a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of special pattern 2 has begun. In other words, in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of special pattern 2 has begun.

In Figure 102 (B), a win occurs at the special symbol 1 start port 231 in the electric chute, which opens for a longer time than in the normal game mode but shorter than in the A2 time-saving game mode. This win corresponds to an irregular win. The main control unit 300 sends a command to start the special symbol 1 pattern change to the first sub-control unit 400, which then determines which of the two patterns, the special symbol 1 pattern change or the currently running special symbol 2 pattern change, will end first. Here, the special symbol 1 pattern change ends first. As mentioned above, in the special symbol 1 pattern change display, losing symbols are not displayed as stopped symbols, and either a jackpot symbol or a small jackpot symbol is always displayed as stopped symbols. The decorative symbol display device 208 prioritizes the display of the symbol that stops first, but in this embodiment, no change effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol 1 pattern change display is performed. Instead, a shutter effect, which is an effect suggesting a jackpot when the special symbol 1 pattern change display is performed, begins. Here, the shutter image STG is displayed so as to overlap the display of the decorative pattern change effect corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2 that has been performed until now. In other words, a new shutter effect is started in place of the decorative pattern change effect corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2. Note that the mini symbol MIN continues to notify that special symbol 1 is changing. Also, in the special symbol 1 pattern change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284, a "-" symbol is flashing, continuing to notify that special symbol 1 is changing. The shutter image STG shown in Figure 102 (B) displays the words "Chance occurring," suggesting that the start of the jackpot game is imminent.

In Figure 102(C), the display of the variation of special symbol 1 ends. A circle indicating a jackpot is displayed in the pattern variation notification area of special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 102(C). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit indicator U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen so as to overlap the shutter image STG, promoting a win in the second variable winning slot 235. A small right-hit indicator U5 is also displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284. Note that in special symbol 2, which was supposed to have a longer variation display than special symbol 1, the lottery result is discarded because the jackpot symbol was displayed frozen on special symbol 1, and a cross indicating a loss is displayed in the pattern variation notification area of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 102(C), and a random mini symbol combination such as 4-1-7 is displayed frozen on mini symbol MIN. The timing for discarding the lottery results is when the jackpot symbol stops and is displayed on Special Chart 1, but it may be earlier (for example, when Special Chart 1 wins) or later (when the jackpot game begins).

In Figure 102 (D), the jackpot game of special symbol 1 (10R jackpot game) has started, and on the decorative symbol display device 208, the shutter image STG has disappeared and an image of the jackpot game, such as "Big Bonus," is displayed. The number of winning balls display TAL is displayed below the mini symbol MIN. Also, the right-hand hit display U4 has disappeared, but the small right-hand hit display U5 is displayed.

The text displayed on the shutter image STG changes depending on the type of jackpot. If the jackpot game always transitions to RUSH state after the end of the jackpot game, the text "Chance occurring" is displayed (Fig. 102 (B)), and if the jackpot game transitions to RUSH state or normal game state after the end of the jackpot game, the text "RUSH challenge approaching" is displayed (Fig. 102 (h)). Also, the time-limited game state in which it is difficult to win (7) in Fig. 96 appears to be a RUSH state (c time-limited game state). Similarly, the normal game state in (8) in Fig. 96 also appears to be a RUSH state. If special chart 1 is hit here, even though it appears to be a RUSH state, it is actually a normal game state in terms of control, so the text "RUSH challenge approaching" is displayed.

In addition, for special symbol 1 that results in a big win or a small win, a shutter effect may be displayed at the start of the change, regardless of the change time of the other symbol (special symbol 2 or regular symbol). However, even in this case, if special symbol 2 that results in a big win or small win stops first, it is preferable to execute the effect of special symbol 2 without executing the shutter effect at the start of the change.

Figure 103 shows an example in which, when both the normal symbol variable display, which indicates a win, and the special symbol 2 variable display, which indicates a jackpot, are being displayed in normal game mode, the effect of the symbol that stops first is given priority.

Figures 103(a) to 103(c) are the same as Figures 102(a) to 102(c), and the variable display of special symbol 2, which indicates a jackpot, is being displayed (Figure 103(a)), but a prize is won at the normal symbol start port 228, and the variable display of the normal symbol ends before the variable display of special symbol 2, so the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a variable display using decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (Figure 103(b)). In Figure 103(c), the variable display of the normal symbol continues, a prize is won again at the normal symbol start port 228, and the reserved number of normal symbols is accumulated.

In Figure 103 (d), there is no new winning entry into the normal map starting slot 228, the normal map changing display ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5" - "Decoration 4" - "Decoration 7" in a stopped state.

In Figure 103 (e), the reserved regular map is consumed and the display of regular map changes begins. The regular map change display here becomes a winning change display. A pattern change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines which change display will end first: the current regular map pattern change or the currently ongoing special 2 pattern change. Here too, the regular map pattern change display ends first. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 208 again begins a change performance using decorative patterns according to the regular map pattern change display.

In Figure 103 (f), the display of the regular symbol changes ends, the display of the changes using the decorative symbols corresponding to the regular symbol change also ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 4" as a static display. Also, the mini symbol combination of 4-4-4 is displayed as a static display, and a circle is lit in the regular symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284, indicating that the regular symbol has stopped displaying.

Since the regular symbol has been won, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 103(g) displays a right-hit indicator U4 and a small right-hit indicator U5 to recommend aiming for the electric chute inside the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. Note that at the timing of Figure 103(g), the variable display of special symbol 2 is still continuing. Also, at the timing of Figure 103(g), a win occurs at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, the variable display of special symbol 1 occurs in an extremely short period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the small win symbol is displayed stationary on special symbol 1. In the symbol-changing notification area of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 103(h), a triangular mark lights up, the variable display of special symbol 1 ends, and it is notified that a small win has been won. At the timing of Figure 103(g), special chart 2 was still displaying a variable effect, but the small win symbol was displayed as a static symbol on special chart 1, causing the jackpot lottery result to be discarded, and a cross mark indicating a loss is displayed in the symbol-changing notification area for special chart 2 in fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 103(g). Furthermore, in decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 103(h), since a small win has been won, right-hit indicator U4 and small right-hit indicator U5 are displayed to promote entry into first variable winning slot 234. In Figure 103(h), the game ball enters first variable winning slot 234, passes through specific area 234v, and is promoted to a jackpot.

In Figure 103(i), a jackpot game has begun, and on the decorative pattern display device 208, the right-hit display U4 has disappeared, and an image of a jackpot game that has been upgraded from a small jackpot, such as a "Rush Challenge Bonus," is displayed. Also, the number of winning balls display TAL is displayed, and a small right-hit display U5 is also displayed.

Figure 104 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example different from the example shown in Figure 102, when both the normal symbol variable display and the special symbol 2 variable display, which indicates a jackpot, are being displayed during normal gameplay.

Figure 104(a) is the same as Figure 102(a), and only the special symbol 2, which is the jackpot, is displayed in a variable manner. In the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a stop display using a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the regular symbol is displayed.

In Figure 104 (b), two balls win consecutively in the normal map starting hole 228, and the decorative pattern display device 208 starts a variable effect using decorative patterns according to the normal map variable display based on the previous win, and the hold icon h11 is displayed in the normal map hold icon display area 281 based on the later win.

In Figure 104(c), the display of the normal symbol based on the previous win ends with a stop display of the losing symbol, and the display of the normal symbol based on the subsequent win begins. The main control unit 300 sends a command to start the normal symbol change to the first sub-control unit 400, which then determines which of the two symbol changes will end first: the current normal symbol change or the special 2 symbol change that continues from Figure 104(a). Here, the display of the special 2 symbol change that has continued until now ends first. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a shutter effect, which is an effect that suggests that the current special 2 symbol change will result in a jackpot. The shutter image STG shown in Figure 104(c) displays the words "Rush Challenge Approaching," suggesting that the jackpot game is about to begin. From Figure 104(c) to (e), both the special symbol 2 change display and the regular symbol change display are being executed, and the special symbol 2 change display ends at the timing of Figure 104(f). A circle indicating a jackpot is displayed in the symbol change notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 104(f). On the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit display U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen so as to overlap the shutter image STG, promoting a win in the second variable winning slot 235. In addition, a small right-hit display U5 is displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284.

In Figure 104 (g), a jackpot game (10R jackpot game) for special symbol 2 has begun, and the shutter image STG has disappeared on the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image during the jackpot game, such as "Rush Challenge Bonus," is displayed. The display of the normal symbol changes continues, and the mini symbol MIN and the normal symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 indicate that the normal symbol is changing. Also, the number of winning balls display TAL is displayed below the mini symbol MIN. Furthermore, the right-hit display U4 has disappeared, but the small right-hit display U5 is still displayed.

Figures 104(d'), (h), and (i) are modified versions of Figure 104(d). In Figure 104(d'), normally, a game ball would not enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231, but by chance, a game ball enters the special chart 1 starting hole 231, and the display of the special chart 1 change begins. This display of the special chart 1 change is assumed to be a small win. The main control unit 300 sends a command to start the change of the special chart 1 pattern to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines which change display will end first: the current change of the special chart 1 pattern or the change of the special chart 2 pattern continuing from Figure 104(c). Here, the display of the special chart 1 change ends before the display of the special chart 2 change. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 208 would normally start a shutter effect, which is an effect suggesting a small win with the changing display of special pattern 1, but since the shutter effect, which is an effect suggesting a big win with the changing display of special pattern 2, is already in progress, the shutter effect currently being displayed continues to be displayed. Note that even if the image is the same, a new display process may be performed. Furthermore, a new shutter image may be displayed as the changing display of special pattern 1 begins, without comparing the changing times of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2.

In Figure 104(h), the normal symbol continues to change, while the special symbol 1 changes and displays a stopped small win symbol. A triangle symbol indicating a small win is displayed in the symbol change notification area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 104(h). In special symbol 2, which continued to change and displayed a stopped small win symbol in special symbol 1, the result of the big win lottery is discarded, and a cross symbol indicating a loss is displayed in the symbol change notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 104(h). Since a small win has been won on special symbol 1, in order to encourage a win in the first variable winning slot 234, a right-hit display U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen so as to overlap the shutter image STG, thereby promoting a win in the second variable winning slot 235. Additionally, a small right-hit indicator U5 is displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284.

In Figure 104(i), the game ball enters the first variable winning slot 234, passes through the specific area 234v, and is upgraded to a jackpot. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 104(i), in response to the upgrade of the small jackpot on Special Symbol 1 to a jackpot, the display switches to an image of a jackpot game that has been upgraded from a small jackpot, such as a "Rush Challenge Bonus." In this image of a jackpot game, a small right-hit display U5 and the number of prize balls won display TAL are also displayed.

In this way, the appearance appears to be that the shutter effect, which is an effect that suggests a jackpot when the special chart 2 changes, has been shortened. This prevents players from feeling uncomfortable even when an irregular jackpot occurs. It also makes it less likely that the jackpot on special chart 2 has been discarded. In Figure 104(c''), the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, which can be passed by hitting the right while the normal chart is changing in Figure 104(b). As explained using Figure 93(c), if the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g while the normal chart is changing, the normal chart being displayed is interrupted regardless of the display result. When the opening and closing operation of the shutter member 2311 of the electric chute based on the game ball's passage through the normal power activation gate 228g is completed, the display of the normal chart's change resumes. Because the normal symbol variation display is interrupted, the special symbol 2 variation display, which indicates a jackpot, ends first, and a circle indicating a jackpot is displayed in the special symbol 2 symbol variation notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 104 (j). In other words, the order of the normal symbol hit and the special symbol 2 jackpot has been reversed, and a sudden jackpot has occurred. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit display U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen, and a small right-hit display U5 is also displayed. However, no shutter effect is performed, and the shutter image STG is not displayed.

According to the above description,
"A first detection means for detecting a game ball [for example, a ball detection sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting hole 228];
A second detection means (e.g., a second starting hole sensor) that is provided in a different area from the first detection means and detects the game ball;
A presentation means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208),
Equipped with
A gaming machine having a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
When the first detection means detects a gaming ball, a first pattern [for example, a normal pattern] may be displayed in a variable manner [for example, a normal pattern variable manner].
When the game ball is detected by the second detection means, a variable display of a second pattern [for example, special pattern 2] [for example, special pattern 2 variable display] may be executed.
The first gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that the first detection means detect a gaming ball [for example, a normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)],
The second game state is a game state [for example, a time-saving game state c] that recommends that the second detection means detect a game ball,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a first pattern change performance [for example, a normal decorative pattern change display] in accordance with the change display of the first pattern,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second pattern change performance [for example, a special pattern 2 decorative pattern change display] in accordance with the change display of the second pattern,
The presentation means is a means capable of executing the first symbol variation presentation in accordance with the first symbol variation display when the first symbol variation display is being executed in the first gaming state,
The presentation means is a means capable of executing the second symbol variation presentation in accordance with the variable display of the second symbol when the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the second game state [for example, FIG. 105(a)],
the effect means is means for not executing the second symbol variation effect in response to the variable display of the second symbol when the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the first gaming state;
The presentation means is a means for executing a presentation (hereinafter referred to as a "first specific presentation") [for example, a shutter presentation] suggesting that the jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed in the display of the second symbol when both the display of the first symbol and the display of the second symbol, which will result in the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed, are being executed in the first game state [for example, FIG. 102(h)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, the main variable display is determined depending on the gaming state, and players must aim to see that variable display while playing. In the first gaming state, the variable display of the first symbol is the main focus, but if the variable display of the second symbol is also being executed, the first specific effect may be executed, and by executing effects according to the situation, it is possible to liven up the game.

In this gaming machine, since the first gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that a gaming ball be detected by the first detection means, the first gaming state has the highest priority to the variable display of the first symbol, and since the second gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that a gaming ball be detected by the second detection means, the second gaming state has the highest priority to the variable display of the second symbol. In the first gaming state, if the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side, which results in a jackpot, and the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side are both active, if the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side stops before the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side, the first specific effect will not be executed, and if the variable display of the second symbol stops before the variable display of the first symbol, the first specific effect will be executed.

The presentation means may also be means that, when the first game state is being executed and both the first symbol variable display and the second symbol variable display resulting in a small win symbol being displayed stationary, may execute a presentation (hereinafter referred to as the "second specific presentation") [for example, a shutter presentation] that suggests a small win.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be a display means, and the first pattern change presentation may be a presentation executed in the central area of the display means, and the second pattern change presentation may also be a presentation executed in the central area of the display means.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for not executing the second symbol variation presentation as the main presentation in response to the variable display of the second symbol when, in the first gaming state, only the second symbol of the first and second symbols is being displayed in a variable display. The "main presentation" here refers to the presentation with the largest presentation area (display area) or the most noticeable presentation.

The presentation means may be means for executing the first pattern change presentation in response to the change display of the first pattern when, in the first gaming state, a change display of only the first pattern of the first and second patterns is being executed; the presentation means may be means for executing the second pattern change presentation in response to the change display of the second pattern when, in the second gaming state, a change display of only the second pattern of the first and second patterns is being executed [for example, Figure 105(a)]; and the presentation means may be means for not executing the second pattern change presentation in response to the change display of the second pattern when, in the first gaming state, a change display of only the second pattern of the first and second patterns is being executed.

Also,
"The presentation means is a means for executing the first specific presentation without executing the first symbol variation presentation even if the execution of the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation in which a jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed in the first gaming state, and the second symbol variation presentation ends before the first symbol variation presentation [for example, Fig. 102(h)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

If the presentation (first pattern change presentation) of another symbol (the first symbol) can be completed before a jackpot occurs, the first specific presentation is not executed. This prevents the player from knowing that a jackpot will occur until just before the jackpot occurs, allowing players to continue firing game balls until just before the jackpot occurs, making it possible for gaming establishments to provide gaming machines that are popular with gaming establishments. Even if the first symbol change display finishes before the second symbol change display, if the first specific presentation is executed, the player will wait for the second symbol change display to result in a jackpot when they see the first specific presentation, and will stop firing game balls, causing a disadvantage to the gaming establishment.

In addition, in the first gaming state, the variable display of the first symbol takes priority over the variable display of the second symbol, and if the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side stops and displays before the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side, the first specific effect is executed.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for executing the second specific presentation without executing the first symbol variation presentation even when the first symbol variation presentation has started, if the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation in which a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second symbol variation presentation ends before the first symbol variation presentation in the first gaming state.

Also,
"The presentation means is a means for executing the first symbol variation presentation without executing the first specific presentation when, in the first gaming state, the execution of the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation in which a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and the first symbol variation presentation ends before the second symbol variation presentation [for example, Fig. 102(b) and Fig. 102(e)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

By minimizing the timing of special displays such as the first specific effect, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort and to ensure that the tempo of the effect is not impaired.

In addition, in the first gaming state, if the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side stops and displays before the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side, the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side will be executed.

The presentation means may also be means for executing the first symbol variation presentation without executing the second specific presentation if, in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation, which results in a small win symbol being displayed in a stopped state, and the first symbol variation presentation ends before the second symbol variation presentation.

Also,
"The production means is a means capable of executing a second change notification (for example, notification of a mini pattern or/and a pattern change notification area of the special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284) that notifies whether the change display of the second pattern is being performed or not,
The presentation means is a means for, when the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the first gaming state, not executing the second symbol variation presentation in response to the variable display of the second symbol, but executing the second variation informing.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The presentation means may be a means capable of executing a first change notification that notifies whether the first symbol is being displayed in a changing state (for example, a notification in the mini symbol and/or regular symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284).

The first fluctuation notification may be a notification that is executed in an area of the display means that is outside the central area, and the second fluctuation notification may also be a notification that is executed in an area of the display means that is outside the central area.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means that, when a variable display of only the second symbol out of the first symbol and the second symbol is being executed in the first gaming state, may not execute the second symbol variation presentation in response to the variable display of the second symbol, but may execute the second variation in progress notification.

Also,
"The first design is a normal design,
The second design is a special design [e.g., special design 2].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The special symbol may undergo a variable display when it wins a starting hole where the ease of winning remains unchanged, and may be a symbol that opens a variable winning hole when a jackpot is hit.

Figure 105 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the transition from the final fluctuation in the time-saving game state (RUSH state) to the normal game state (non-time-saving game state).

In the c time-saving play state, it is recommended to aim for the special symbol 2 starting hole 232 and hit to the right. In Figure 105(a), up to four special symbol 2s are reserved, and the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 each display a change effect (a swinging display in Figure 105(a)) using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of the special symbol 2. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 105(a) indicates that 3 minutes 25.01 seconds have passed since the start of the c time-saving play state (RUSH state), and that the number of symbol change displays until the c time-saving play state ends is 0. In other words, the current change display of the special symbol 2 will be the final change in the c time-saving play state. Also displayed are the mini symbol MIN, which indicates that the special symbol 2 is changing, and the fourth symbol display area 284. In the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 105 (a), the symbol change notification area for special symbol 2 indicates that special symbol 2 is changing. In addition, the number of winning balls display TAL and a small right-hit display U5 are also displayed.

Also displayed are a variable icon display area 280 and a special chart 2 hold icon display area 282. The variable icon display area 280 displays the special chart 2 variable icon h0 corresponding to the currently changing special chart 2 variable display, and the special chart 2 hold icon display area 282 displays four hold icons h21 to h24.

In addition, below the number of remaining symbol changes until the end of the time-saving play state c, the presentation mode selection display DMS is displayed, and the default presentation mode, presentation mode A, is selected.

In the state shown in Figure 105(a), a left-handed hit is made even though a right-handed hit is recommended, resulting in a win at the normal starting hole 228. This win at the normal starting hole 228 corresponds to an irregular win.

In Figure 105(b), the pattern of the normal symbol has begun to change. The fact that the normal symbol is changing is notified in the normal symbol pattern change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 105(b). In addition, the losing symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a stop symbol, the display of the change of special symbol 2 has ended, and the time-saving play state c (RUSH state) has also ended. In other words, in Figure 105(b), the game has transitioned to the normal play state. Upon the end of the RUSH state, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 105(b) displays the result display of the RUSH state (result display RST) for a predetermined display period. The result display RST displays a time display RST1 that shows the total time from the start to the end of the RUSH state, and a prize ball count display RST2 that shows the cumulative prize balls won since the first jackpot play.

In addition, when the game transitions from the time-saving game mode to the normal game mode, when the game transitions from the jackpot game mode or the small jackpot game mode to the normal game mode, or when a 1G consecutive win transitions to the normal game mode, the main control unit 300 transmits the remaining time for the normal game mode to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 may also count the remaining time for the normal game mode. Because the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing the result display RST, it cannot start a variation effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the normal game mode variation display and must wait for the result display RST to end. However, if the variation effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the normal game mode variation display is started after the result display RST has ended, the variation effect using the decorative symbols will start halfway through, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. For example, if a reach effect is being performed using a variation display using decorative symbols on the normal game mode and the reach effect starts halfway through, it may cause the player to feel very uncomfortable or may lead to suspicion of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 does not initiate a variation effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the normal map variation display, but instead determines whether the remaining variation time of the normal map transmitted from the main control unit 300 upon transition to the normal game mode is greater than or equal to a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). If the remaining variation time is greater than or equal to the predetermined time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a standby display when the result display RST ends. If the remaining variation time is less than the predetermined time, the result display RST continues to be displayed until the normal game mode variation display ends. If the result display RST continues to be displayed for too long, some players may mistakenly believe that the transition to the normal game mode has not yet occurred and hit the right button. In the normal game mode, the normal map variation display is the main focus. However, as described above, if the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g upon hitting the right button, the normal map variation display is interrupted, preventing gameplay from progressing. Therefore, if the remaining variation time of the normal map variation display is greater than or equal to the predetermined time, the standby display is displayed instead of the result display RST. On the other hand, the standby display is a special display that is only displayed in irregular situations, such as when the normal game mode is returned to and the normal map variable display is already in progress. For example, if the normal game mode variable display starts to be executed during normal game mode, the standby display will not be displayed, and as in Figure 102(b), a variable effect using decorative patterns corresponding to the normal game mode variable display will begin. For players who have never seen a standby display before, seeing it for the first time can be unnatural, and if the time is less than the specified time, the result display RST will continue to be displayed, as it is unlikely that the player will be mistaken for not having transitioned to normal game mode, even if the standby display is not displayed.

Figure 105(c) shows an example in which the remaining time for the normal map change display is greater than or equal to a predetermined time. When the result display RST ends on the decorative symbol display device 208, a waiting display WAT is displayed, indicating that the remaining time for the normal map change display is 20 seconds. In other words, the fact that the normal map change display is occurring is clearly indicated, preventing a right-handed hit from interrupting the normal map change display. This waiting display WAT may also include a prompt to hit left. Note that a symbol change start command for special symbol 2 is also sent to the first sub-control unit 400. In Figure 105(c), the change display for special symbol 2 also begins, and the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 is reduced by one. The first sub-control unit 400 determines which of the change displays will end first: the normal symbol change started in Figure 105(b) or the special symbol change for special symbol 2. In this case, the normal symbol change display ends first.

In the waiting display WAT in Figure 105 (d), there are 19 seconds left until the normal map changing display ends, and there is another win at the normal map start port 228.

The waiting display WAT in Figure 105(e) shows that the remaining time is 0 seconds. While the waiting display WAT is displayed, the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed, but the mini symbol MIN is not. However, the mini symbol MIN may also be displayed. The reserved number notification area for the regular symbol in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 105(e) displays 1.

In Figure 105 (f), the normal map variation display has ended, and the waiting performance has also ended. The normal map variation display here is a miss. In the decorative pattern display device 208, instead of the waiting display WAT, a stop display using a decorative pattern (a combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 5" - "Decoration 4" - "Decoration 7") corresponding to the missing stop pattern of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is displayed.

In Figure 105 (g), one reserved regular map is consumed and the display of regular map changes begins.

In Figure 105 (f), the variable display of the normal map is a miss, while in the same figure (f'), the variable display of the normal map is a win. In the decorative pattern display device 208, instead of the waiting display WAT, a decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 7" - "Decoration 7" - "Decoration 7" corresponding to the winning stopped pattern of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is displayed.

In the following Figure 103(h), since the regular symbol has been won, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a right-hit indicator U4 and a small right-hit indicator U5 to recommend aiming for the electric chute inside the special symbol 1 starting hole 231.

Figure 105(c') shows an example of a case where the remaining time for the normal map fluctuation display is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the result display RST. Before the player suspects that the game has not transitioned to the normal game state, a stop display using a decorative pattern corresponding to the normal map stopping pattern, as shown in Figure 105(f) and (f'), is displayed.

In Figure 105(A), just like in Figure 105(a), the final change is taking place in the time-saving c game state, and four reserved special symbols 2 have accumulated. The decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a change effect (swing display) using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2. Also, in Figure 105(A), a left-handed hit is made even though a right-handed hit is recommended, resulting in a win in the normal symbol start slot 228 and the change display of the normal symbol starting. It is notified that the normal symbol is changing in the normal symbol symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 105(A).

In the following Figure 105(B), the losing symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a stopped symbol, the variable display of special symbol 2 ends, and the time-saving game state c (RUSH state) also ends. In other words, in Figure 105(b), the game has transitioned to the normal game state. The result display RST is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 105(B). Also, at the timing of Figure 105(B), the variable display of the normal symbol also ends, the winning symbol of the normal symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol, and a circle symbol indicating a normal winning symbol is displayed lit up in the normal symbol symbol variable notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284.

In this example, the game transitions to normal play during the period from when a normal symbol hits until the electric chute containing the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 begins to operate, and a right-hit display is displayed to encourage the player to aim for the electric chute. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 105 (C), the result display RST ends, and a right-hit display U4 is displayed in the central area, with a small right-hit display U5 also displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284. Note that the right-hit display U4 may be displayed so that it overlaps with the result display RST while the result display RST continues to be displayed, making it difficult to see.

In the example of Figure 105(B'), the variable display of a winning normal symbol ends even earlier than in Figure 105(B), and in Figure 105(B'), the electric chute begins to operate. In other words, the transition to normal game mode occurs while the electric chute is operating. In this case, the right-hit display U4 is not displayed in the central area as shown in Figure 105(C), and the result display RST continues to be displayed as shown in Figure 105(B'), with a small right-hit display U5 displayed. Note that the electric chute operating includes any of the following states: the electric chute is waiting to start operating (during opening), the electric chute is open, and the electric chute has finished operating (during ending). If the right-hit display U4 were displayed so that it overlapped the result display RST, the player would not be able to see the result display for the RUSH state, which could affect their motivation to continue playing. Therefore, the right-hit display U4 is not displayed to prioritize the result display RST.

As mentioned above, Figure 105 shows an example of the c time-saving game state ending and transitioning to the normal game state, but the same applies when a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state in which right-hand play is performed ends and transitions to the normal game state. The same also applies when a 1G streak in the a2 time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state. In this case, instead of the result display RST, only the number of winning balls may be displayed, or a display indicating the end of the jackpot game (for example, a text display indicating the end of the jackpot game) may be displayed. Furthermore, a puncture display (a disappointment display when a jackpot or small jackpot does not win a V or when a jackpot does not win in the electric chute (winning the electric chute = 1/1 for a jackpot or small jackpot)) may continue to be displayed.

Figure 106 shows a modified example of the standby display.

As the game state (stage) transitions to the normal game state, the waiting display WAT1 shown in Figure 106(a) displays "Stage transition in 20 seconds."

In the waiting display WAT2 shown in Figure 106 (b), there is no display regarding the remaining fluctuation time, and the message "Stage transition in progress" is displayed. If a right hit is performed while the waiting display WAT2 is displayed, and the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, the normal map fluctuation display will be interrupted as described above, resulting in a discrepancy between the remaining fluctuation time and the actual end timing. For this reason, in this example, the display regarding the remaining fluctuation time has been omitted.

In the example shown in Figure 106 (c), the result display RST is displayed while the waiting display WAT3 is also displayed. This waiting display WAT3 displays the time remaining until the result display RST, which is the result of the time-saving game state c, ends (in other words, the time remaining until the game transitions to the normal game state).

According to the above description,
"A first detection means for detecting a game ball [for example, a ball detection sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting hole 228];
A second detection means (e.g., a second starting hole sensor) that is provided in a different area from the first detection means and detects the game ball;
A presentation means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208),
Equipped with
A gaming machine having a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
When the first detection means detects a gaming ball, a first pattern [for example, a normal pattern] may be displayed in a variable manner [for example, a normal pattern variable manner].
When the game ball is detected by the second detection means, a variable display of a second pattern [for example, special pattern 2] [for example, special pattern 2 variable display] may be executed.
The first gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that the first detection means detect a gaming ball [for example, a normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)],
The second game state is a game state [for example, a time-saving game state c] that recommends that the second detection means detect a game ball,
The presentation means is a means capable of displaying a certain display (for example, a display capable of displaying a certain display if the remaining time of the display of the normal symbol variation is equal to or longer than a predetermined time) when the display of the first symbol variation is being executed (for example, FIG. 105(b)) at the time of transition from the second game state to the first game state (for example, when the final variation in the second game state is completed),
The certain display is a display that cannot be displayed when the execution of the variable display of the first symbol is started in the first gaming state [for example, a display that will not be displayed in FIG. 102(b)] [for example, a waiting display WAT],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, the aforementioned display can alert players to irregular conditions, preventing them from mistaking them for malfunctions or other issues.

The presentation means is capable of displaying a certain display if the variable display of the first symbol is being executed when transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

Also,
"The presentation means is a means for not displaying the certain display (for example, when the remaining time of the normal symbol display is less than a predetermined time) even when the first symbol display is in progress at the time of transition from the second game state to the first game state (for example, when the final change in the second game state is completed) [for example, Fig. 105(c')].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

In addition, when transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the certain display may not be displayed even if the variable display of the first symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for, when the variable display of the first symbol is being executed at the time of transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, displaying the certain display if the remaining variable display time of the currently executing variable display of the first symbol is equal to or greater than a predetermined time, and not displaying the certain display if it is less than the predetermined time.

Also,
"The certain display is a display that notifies the remaining variable time of the variable display of the first pattern that is being executed,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

This makes it easy to know when you can resume playing, providing a convenient gaming machine.

The certain display may be a display relating to the time period during which the variable display of the first symbol is being executed, a display relating to the end of the variable display of the first symbol being executed, or a display relating to the transition of the game state [for example, the waiting display WAT1 shown in FIG. 106(a) or the waiting display WAT2 shown in FIG. 106(b)]. Alternatively, the certain display may be a display relating to the second game state [for example, the waiting display WAT3 shown in FIG. 106(c)].

Also,
The first detection means is provided in a first game area (for example, an area where a game ball hit by a left hand can be detected (a central area or a left side area)),
The second detection means is provided in a second game area (for example, an area (right area) where a game ball hit to the right can be detected),
The second game area is a game area provided with a third detection means (e.g., a normal power gate 228g) in addition to the second detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, if a gaming ball is detected by the third detection means, the variable display of the first symbol is suspended for a certain period of time [for example, while the electric chute is operating].
He also explained.

More specifically, the device may be equipped with a device that activates when the third detection means detects a game ball (for example, an electric chute with a special starting hole 231 inside and a shutter member 2311 that opens and closes), and the certain period may refer to the period during which the device is operating.

The first game area may be an area that the game ball can reach when hitting either left-handed or right-handed, and the second game area may be an area that the game ball can reach when hitting either left-handed or right-handed. For example, the first game area may be a left-handed area, and the second game area may be a right-handed area.

Furthermore, a fourth detection means may be provided in the second gaming area, and when a gaming ball is detected by the fourth detection means, a variable display of a third pattern [for example, special pattern 1] [for example, special pattern 1 variable display] may be executed, and the third pattern may execute a variable display when it enters a starting hole [for example, special pattern 1 starting hole 231] where the ease of winning varies, and may be a special pattern that opens a variable winning hole when a jackpot is hit, and in the case of a small win, when the gaming ball that enters the variable winning hole passes through a specific area [for example, specific area 234v], it may be upgraded to a jackpot.

Also,
"The first design is a normal design,
The second design is a special design [e.g., special design 2].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The special symbol may undergo a variable display when it enters a starting slot where the ease of winning remains unchanged, and when a jackpot is won, a variable winning slot opens.

Next, we'll go into more detail about the presentation modes.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, in the time-saving play state (RUSH state), the player can select one of multiple presentation modes by operating the up and down buttons on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 82. This presentation mode is a mode related to the way presentations are performed using reserved icons and variable icons.

Figure 107 is a diagram explaining the presentation modes.

Figure 107(a) is a table showing the selectable rendering modes.

There are three types of presentation modes available. Presentation mode A is the default presentation mode. Presentation mode B is a presentation mode in which the presentation is executed less frequently than presentation mode A. The presentation here refers to a pre-reading preview presentation for the pending icon, and a presentation suggesting a jackpot for that change for the variable icon. Presentation mode C is a presentation mode in which the probability of a jackpot is displayed on the pending icon or variable icon.

Note that while a player can only select this in the c time-saving game state (RUSH state), it may also be possible to make the selection in other game states (for example, the normal game state, the a1 time-saving game state, the a2 time-saving game state, or the probability variable game state). Alternatively, it may only be possible to make the selection in one or more of the c time-saving game state, the normal game state, the a1 time-saving game state, the a2 time-saving game state, or the probability variable game state. Furthermore, the above-mentioned presentation modes are merely examples, and presentation modes other than the above-mentioned presentation modes may also be selectable. For example, it may be possible to select a mode in which a specific presentation is executed more frequently, or a mode in which the likelihood of a jackpot for a certain preview presentation is higher.

Figure 107(b) is a table showing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon in presentation mode A or presentation mode B.

The normal color is white, and the display mode of this normal color is the default display mode for both presentation mode A and presentation mode B. A rainbow color also indicates a guaranteed big win. Note that when describing the reliability of a big win in the explanation of presentation modes, the reliability of a small win is also included. This is because even a small win can be upgraded to a big win if it passes through the specific area 234v. However, it is also possible not to include the reliability of a small win.

In presentation mode B, the frequency of presentations is lower than in presentation mode A, so the frequency of normal-colored hold icons appearing increases. Also, by keeping the frequency of gold and rainbow colors, which have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more, the frequency of their appearance is the same as in presentation mode A, and making the frequency of blue, green, and red colors, which have a jackpot reliability of 10% or more but less than 50%, lower than in presentation mode A, presentation mode B becomes a presentation mode that is more likely to be executed when reliability is high, and can be considered a predictive chance mode.

Figure 107 (c) is a table showing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon in presentation mode C.

As mentioned above, in presentation mode C, when a hold icon is generated, the hold icon always displays one of the jackpot reliability levels (except when the command described below is not received correctly), and this display continues even if the hold icon changes to a variable icon. Specifically, the hold icon display mode is determined to achieve the reliability shown in Figure 107(c) based on the pre-read result information when the game ball enters special chart 2 starting hole 232, and the hold icon is displayed in the determined display mode. The displayed jackpot reliability (display mode) and the actual jackpot reliability may all be the same, but a display mode of 99% actually indicates a 100% jackpot. A display of 100% is intentionally avoided. Also, 3000% may be displayed, and in this case, the jackpot is actually 100% confirmed. This 3000% display is a display mode that is only displayed when special chart B or special chart C is won. If you win on Special Chart B or Special Chart C, the game will transition to a2 time-saving game mode after the jackpot play ends, and since you can expect to win 3,000 prize balls with a 1G streak (two jackpots), the maximum number of prize balls that can be won is displayed as a percentage to liven up the game. In this way, if you win and there is some kind of bonus (in this case, two wins are guaranteed), a number exceeding 100% may be displayed.

The 1% display mode is also the default display mode for presentation mode C. This 1% display mode is the display mode that is always displayed on the reserved (remaining reserved) special chart 2 that will be consumed after the time-saving play state c (RUSH state) or time-saving play state a ends. The default display mode is not limited to the 1% display mode, and can be any mode with the lowest reliability (for example, 0.1%), or a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode where the % display is not displayed or a display mode where a question mark is displayed).

Furthermore, when the number of remaining times in the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) falls below a predetermined number (for example, 10 spins, 5 spins, or a number that is at least half of the total), a display mode with a low reliability (for example, "1%" or "5%) may be more likely to be displayed. In other words, when the number of remaining times in the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) is below a predetermined number, a jackpot is more likely to occur with a lower reliability than when the remaining number of times is greater than the predetermined number. In this way, the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained even when the number of remaining times in the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) is low and only icons with a display mode that is unlikely to result in a jackpot are displayed.

The hold icon or variable icon explained above applies to Special Chart 2. In Special Chart 1, there will always be a big hit or a small hit, and there are no holds to begin with. On the other hand, for hits on regular charts, the hold icon or variable icon explained above may be the subject. In other words, the jackpot reliability becomes the hit reliability.

In this embodiment, of the multiple presentation modes, certain presentation modes such as presentation mode A and presentation mode B perform a normal change presentation of the pending icon. In this normal change presentation, the change may occur when a win is won or when the pending icon shifts. Furthermore, of the multiple presentation modes, certain presentation modes such as presentation mode C display the probability of a jackpot as a percentage (reliability display) on the pending icon or variable icon. This reliability display begins to be displayed when a pending occurs and does not change when the display shifts. Note that the reliability display may change when a shift is made, but the original reliability display should be displayed before it is displayed as a variable icon. In other words, the reliability display does not change after it is displayed as a variable icon.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 107(b), the number of display modes in presentation mode A or presentation mode B is six, whereas as shown in the same figure (c), the number of display modes in presentation mode C is eight. In this way, the number of display modes is greater in presentation mode C than in presentation mode A or B. Note that the number of display modes in presentation mode A or presentation mode B may be greater than the number of display modes in presentation mode C.

Figure 108 shows a step-by-step example of how the game progresses while changing the presentation mode in the time-saving game mode (RUSH mode).

As mentioned above, in the c time-saving game state, it is recommended to aim for the special symbol 2 starting hole 232 and hit the ball to the right, which makes it easier to accumulate special symbol 2 reserves. In the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108, a change effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2 is performed. Furthermore, a change icon display area 280 is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and a special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282 is displayed to the right of it. Furthermore, 0.01 seconds have passed since the start of the c time-saving game state (RUSH state), and it is notified that the number of symbol change displays until the end of the c time-saving game state is 143. In other words, the currently active change display of special symbol 2 is the first change display since the transition to the c time-saving game state. In addition, a mini pattern MIN is displayed to indicate that special pattern 2 is changing, and a fourth pattern display area 284, a display TAL of the number of winning balls, and a small right-hit display U5 are also displayed.

In Figure 108 (a), presentation mode A is selected, and a round, normal-colored (white) variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The round, normal-colored (white) variable icon and the hold icon are icons that are only displayed while presentation mode A is selected.

In Figure 108 (b), one reserve for Special Chart 2 has been accumulated, and the first reserve icon h21, which is round and in the normal color (white), is displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for Special Chart 2.

In Figure 108 (c), the player presses the up button on the cross key of the operation key unit 190 shown in Figure 82 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. Then, the round, normal-colored variable icon h0 and first hold icon h21 that had been displayed up until then change to the triangular, normal-colored variable icon h0 and first hold icon h21. The triangular, normal-colored variable icon and hold icon (hereinafter collectively referred to as "icons") are the default display mode for presentation mode B. When presentation mode A is changed to presentation mode B, the presentation mode A icons that had been displayed up until then are all re-displayed in the default display mode for presentation mode B. Also, when presentation mode B is changed to presentation mode A, the presentation mode B icons that had been displayed up until then are all re-displayed in the default display mode for presentation mode A (round, normal color). The same applies when changing from presentation mode C to presentation mode A, or when changing from presentation mode C to presentation mode B; in the former case, the presentation mode C icon that was previously displayed is re-displayed in the default display format for presentation mode A (round, normal color), and in the latter case, it is re-displayed in the default display format for presentation mode B (triangle, normal color). The default display format is different for presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and a triangular icon is used for presentation mode B, but it may also be common. For example, a round icon may also be used in presentation mode B. On the other hand, the default display format for presentation mode C is a square, normal color icon displayed at 1%, so it cannot be common with other modes.

In Figure 108 (d), one reserve has been added to Special Chart 2, and a triangular second reserve icon h22 in the normal color is additionally displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 of Special Chart 2. The additional reserve here actually has a jackpot probability of 15% and is green, but because presentation mode B has been selected, the frequency of the pre-read preview presentation is reduced and it is displayed in the normal color.

In Figure 108 (e), the player presses the up button on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode B to presentation mode C. Icons that were already displayed at the time the presentation mode was changed to C will not be displayed in the display mode of presentation mode C. Therefore, the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h21, and the second hold icon h22 remain triangular icons. Note that the hold icon corresponding to presentation mode C may be displayed again at the time the presentation mode is switched to presentation mode C. In other words, at the time the presentation mode is switched to presentation mode C, a lottery is re-drawn using the advance reading result information, and the reliability of the hold icon is displayed.

In Figure 108 (f), the number of reserved items for special chart 2 is increased by one. In other words, this is the increase in reserved items after changing to presentation mode C. A third reserved item h23, a square with 1% displayed, is additionally displayed in the reserved item icon display area 282 for special chart 2.

In Figure 108 (g), the variable display of special chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 108 (h), one reserve for special chart 2 has been consumed and a new pattern change has begun. The icon that was previously the first reserve icon h21 is now displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280, and in the reserve icon display area 282 for special chart 2, the triangular icon that was previously the second reserve icon h22 has shifted to become the first reserve icon h21, and the square icon that was previously the third reserve icon h23 and displayed as 1% has shifted to become the second reserve icon h22.

In Figure 108 (i), when presentation mode C is selected, one more hold is added to special chart 2. A third hold icon h23, a square with a 10% display, is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area 282 for special chart 2.

In Figure 108 (j), the player presses the up button on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode C to presentation mode A. As a result, as described above, all icons that had been displayed up to that point are uniformly redisplayed in the default display format of presentation mode A (round, normal color). Note that pending icons that began displaying in presentation mode C may remain displayed even if the presentation mode is changed.

In Figure 108 (j), the player presses the up button on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 shown in Figure 82 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode C to presentation mode A. As a result of step k, as described above, all icons that had been displayed up to that point are uniformly redisplayed in the default display format of presentation mode A (round, normal color).

After this, play continues in the time-saving c game state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 108 (k) indicates that 34 minutes and 10.00 seconds have passed since the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) began, and that there is only one more symbol change display until the time-saving c game state ends. The selected presentation mode is presentation mode C, and the change icon h0 is a square icon displaying 30%, and the decorative symbol change display is in a reach state. Furthermore, the number of reserved positions for special symbol 2 is 2, and the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 displays a square first reserved icon h21 displaying 10% and a square second reserved icon h22 displaying 1%. Here, the reserved special symbol 2 represented by the second reserved icon h22 becomes a remaining reserved symbol that will be consumed after the time-saving c game state ends, since there is only one more symbol change display until the time-saving c game state ends, and as mentioned above, a 1% probability is displayed, rather than the actual probability of a jackpot. In other words, because the second reserved icon h22 is a reserved symbol that represents a remaining reserve, it is displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode C.

In Figure 108 (l), the display of the decorative symbols that were in a reach state has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the decorative symbol combination that was not in a reach state is displayed as still.

In Figure 108 (m), one reserved symbol for Special Chart 2 is consumed, and the final change in time-saving game state c begins. As shown in Figure 108 (n), this final change increases the reserved symbol for Special Chart 2 by three, bringing the number of reserved symbols for Special Chart 2 to four, and the symbol is now fully reserved. Since the three additional reserved symbols are also remaining symbols, the second reserved symbol h22, the third reserved symbol h23, and the fourth reserved symbol h24 are all displayed in the default display mode for presentation mode C, which displays 1%.

Next, we will explain the failure of the first sub-control unit 400 to receive a winning command. The first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning command from the main control unit 300 each time a win occurs at the special chart 2 start port 232 and the number of reserved balls increases. This winning command contains the current number of reserved balls and pre-read result information that predicts the outcome of the winning ball. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a pattern change start command from the main control unit 300 each time the display of the special chart 2 changes begins. This pattern change start command also contains the current number of reserved balls and pre-read result information for each reserved ball. The first sub-control unit 400 may very rarely fail to receive a command that has been sent to it due to reasons such as a poor connection in the cable through which the command is transmitted.

Figure 109 shows a step-by-step example of what happens when a winning command is missed when presentation mode A is selected.

Figure 109(a) is the same state as Figure 108(a), so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but it shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Since presentation mode A has been selected, the icon shape is round. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 109(a) displays variable icon h0 in the normal color (white).

In Figure 109 (b), one ball wins in the special chart 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the winning command, it updates the value in the reserved ball number notification area for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284. Here, the value is updated from 0 to 1. In addition, an additional reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special chart 2. Here, a round, normal color (white) first reserved icon h21 is additionally displayed. Figure 109 (b) shows how the first reserved icon h21 is displayed by an increasing animation performed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special chart 2. This increase animation is an animation in which the hold icon gradually becomes larger. In Figure 109(b), the increase animation begins, and the first hold icon h21 is displayed small, while in the following Figure 109(c), the increase animation ends, and the first hold icon h21 is displayed at the specified size. Figure 109(b) also shows the speaker 120 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, and a hold increase sound (here, a "beep" sound) is output from this speaker 120.

In Figure 109(d), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, 1 remains displayed in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 109(d). In the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 109(d), the second reserved icon h22 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

More than one second after Figure 109(d) has passed, one more ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The winning command here includes the fact that the current number of reserved balls is three. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this winning command and understands that the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "3." As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the decorative pattern display device 208 to display the second reserved icon h22 and the third reserved icon h23 via the second sub-control unit 500. As shown in Figure 109(e), the third reserved icon h23 is displayed with an increasing animation, but the second reserved icon h22, which failed to display due to a failed command reception, is displayed at the specified size from the beginning without any increasing animation. By doing this, the second hold icon h22 is displayed before the third hold icon h23, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, the hold icon that was not displayed is displayed in the default display mode, i.e., in its normal color. Furthermore, in the hold number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 109(e), 2 is not displayed, but 3 is displayed. In other words, the value of the hold number is updated from 1 to 3 in one go, skipping 2. Furthermore, the speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound indicating that the third hold has been increased, but does not output a hold increase sound indicating that the second hold has been increased. In other words, only a "beep" sound indicating an increase in one hold is output, and a "beep beep" sound indicating an increase in two hold numbers is not output.

In Figure 109 (f), the increasing animation of the third hold icon h23 has ended, and the third hold icon h23 is displayed in the normal color at the specified size.

In Figure 109 (g), the variable display of Special Chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 109 (h), one reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 109 (h) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the display of the decorative symbol change for Special Symbol 2 begins. The icon that was previously the first reserved symbol h21 moves to the variable symbol display area 280 using a moving animation and is displayed as variable symbol h0. In addition, in the reserved symbol display area 282 for Special Symbol 2, the second reserved symbol h22, which was displayed without an increase animation due to a failed command reception upon winning, moves using a moving animation and is displayed as the first reserved symbol h21, and the third reserved symbol h23, which was displayed normally, moves using a moving animation and is displayed as the second reserved symbol h22. In Figure 109, the moving animation is indicated by arrows. During this moving animation, the icon that was the second reserved symbol h22 turns blue and is displayed as the blue first reserved symbol h21. As mentioned above, the symbol change start command contains pre-read result information for each reserved icon. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the icon from its normal color to blue based on the pre-read result information for the reserved icon represented by the second reserved icon h22. The winning command only contains pre-read result information for the winning result, and does not include the pre-read result for the reserved icon that was not displayed due to a failed command reception. For this reason, the icon is displayed in the default normal color at the start of display in Figure 109(e). It is also possible to include pre-read result information for each reserved icon in the winning command, and display the reserved icon that was not displayed in a display mode that indicates the reliability of a jackpot from the start of display. However, the reserved icon that is suddenly displayed may stand out because it is not in its default display mode, which may create a sense of incongruity. On the other hand, changing the display mode during the movement animation is more natural, as it changes amidst the movement.

Figure 109 (h) also shows a speaker 120, which outputs a hold icon change sound (here, a "beep" sound).

In Figure 109(i), the icon movement animation has ended. In addition, one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, here too, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, the number 2 is still displayed in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 109(i). In the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 109(i), the third reserved icon h23 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

In Figure 109 (j), the variable display of special chart 2 has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed frozen.

In Figure 109(k), one reserved symbol for special symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. As described above, the symbol change start command indicates that the current reserved number is two. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this symbol change start command, and even though the display of the change for special symbol 2 has begun, the reserved number for special symbol 2 remains at two, so it displays the second reserved symbol h22. This second reserved symbol h22 is also displayed in the default display mode (normal color) at a predetermined size from the beginning without any increasing animation. Furthermore, a movement animation is also started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and during this movement animation, the icon that was the second reserved symbol h22 changes from normal color to green based on the advance reading result information included in the symbol change start command. Furthermore, in the reserved symbol number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 109(k), the number 1 is not displayed, and the number 2 remains displayed. In other words, the pending number remains displayed as 2 without being reduced to 1.

In Figure 109 (l), the icon movement animation has finished, and the blue variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the first variable icon h21 in normal color and the second variable icon h22 in green are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of Special Chart 2. In addition, a hold icon change sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that here, the sound for changing to a blue icon and the sound for changing to a green icon are the same sound, but the change sound may be different depending on the changing color or value (display mode).

Figure 110 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of what happens when a command is missed when a win occurs while presentation mode C is selected. Since the timing of the win and the missed command are the same as the example shown in Figure 109, the explanation will focus on the differences and may omit overlapping explanations.

Figure 110(a) shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Since presentation mode C has been selected, the icon shape is square. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 110(a) displays a square variable icon h0 with a 10% display.

In Figure 110(b), one ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, increasing the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Upon receiving the winning command, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the value in the reserved ball number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284. Here, the value is updated from 0 to 1. In addition, a reserved ball is additionally displayed in the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2. Here, a square first reserved ball icon h21 is additionally displayed. In the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 shown in Figure 110(b), the first reserved ball icon h21 gradually becomes larger through an increasing animation. At first, the icon is too small to see the percentage value, but gradually the percentage value becomes visible, which is more likely to pique the player's interest than a color-based reliability display. In addition, a reserved ball increase sound is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 110(c), the increase animation has ended and the first hold icon h21 is displayed at the specified size. The first hold icon h21 displays 1%.

In Figure 110(d), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, in the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 110(d), the second pending icon h22 that should be displayed is shown in dotted lines.

More than one second after Figure 110(d) has elapsed, another ball lands in the Special 2 starting hole 232, and the main control unit 300 sends a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current number of reserved balls is three. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this winning command and determines that the current number of reserved balls for Special 2 is "3." In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 110(e), the second reserved icon h22, which failed to display due to a failed command reception, is already displayed at the specified size, and the third reserved icon h23 is gradually becoming larger through an increasing animation. The second reserved icon h22 is displayed in the default display mode (round, normal color display mode) of presentation mode A, rather than the square display mode displaying the probability of a jackpot in presentation mode C. This is the same display mode as the icon displayed immediately after power is restored due to a power outage, as described below. Furthermore, the default display mode for this presentation mode A (a round, normal-color display mode) is a display mode for icons that would not normally be displayed in presentation mode C. Also, in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 110(e), 2 is not displayed, but 3 is displayed. In other words, the reserved number value is updated from 1 to 3 in one go, skipping 2. Furthermore, the speaker 120 only outputs a single reserved number increase sound, such as a "beep," indicating that the third reserved number has been added.

In Figure 110 (f), the increasing animation of the third hold icon h23 has ended, and a square third hold icon h23 is displayed at 5% of the specified size.

In Figure 110 (g), the variable display of Special Chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 110 (h), one reserved symbol for special symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command containing the prediction results for each reserved symbol is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the icon movement animation begins. Due to the failure to receive the winning command, the second reserved symbol h22, which was displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode), changes to the display mode of presentation mode C as it moves through the movement animation, and is displayed as the square first reserved symbol h21 with a 5% display. The first sub-control unit 400 changes the display mode of the reserved symbol, which changes from the second reserved symbol h22 to the first reserved symbol h21, based on the prediction results for the first reserved symbol contained in the received symbol change start command. Also, a change sound is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 110(i), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, even here, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. In the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 110(i), the third pending icon h23 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

In Figure 110 (j), the variable display of special chart 2 has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed frozen.

In FIG. 110(k), one reserved symbol for special symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current number of reserved symbols is two and including the results of the preview for each reserved symbol. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this symbol change start command, and although the display of the change for special symbol 2 has begun, the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 remains at two. Therefore, the second reserved symbol h22 is displayed in the default display mode (round, normal color display mode) of presentation mode A at the specified size from the beginning without any increase animation. Furthermore, a movement animation is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. During this movement animation, the icon that was the third reserved symbol h23 changes to the display mode of presentation mode C based on the preview results included in the symbol change start command, and is displayed as the square second reserved symbol h22 with a 20% display. Furthermore, in the reserved number notification area of the special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 110(k), 1 is not displayed and 2 remains displayed. In other words, the reserved number value continues to be displayed as 2 without being reduced to 1.

In Figure 110 (l), the icon movement animation has finished, and the variable icon display area 280 displays the variable icon h0 with a 5% display, while the hold icon display area 282 of Special Chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 with a 5% display and the second hold icon h22 with a 20% display. Also, a change sound is being output from the speaker 120.

Next, we will explain what happens when power is momentarily interrupted in each performance mode and then immediately restored.

Figure 111 shows a step-by-step example of what happens when a power outage occurs momentarily in each performance mode and is immediately restored.

Figures 111(a) to 111(d) are diagrams showing, in stages, an example of a situation in which power is temporarily interrupted in rendering mode A and then immediately restored.

Figure 111(a) shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Since presentation mode A is selected, the icon is round. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 111(a) displays variable icon h0 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A, and the hold icon display area 282 of special chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 and second hold icon h22, both of which are in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A.

In this state, power is momentarily interrupted (Figure 111(b)), and then immediately restored. Immediately after power is restored, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the message "Preparing to return," as shown in Figure 111(c).

The state of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 111 (d) is the state after the "Preparing to return" display has disappeared, the reserved special pattern 2 has been consumed, and the display of the changing decorative pattern of the new special pattern 2 has begun. The presentation mode remains in presentation mode A, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode (normal color) and the first reserved icon h21 in the same default display mode (normal color) are displayed.

Figures 111(A) to 111(D) show a step-by-step example of what happens when a power outage occurs momentarily in performance mode B and is immediately restored.

Figure 111 (A), like before, shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Here, because presentation mode B has been selected, the icon is triangular in shape. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 111 (A) displays variable icon h0 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode B, and the hold icon display area 282 of special chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 and second hold icon h22, both of which are in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode B.

In this state, power is momentarily interrupted (Figure 111 (B)), and then immediately restored. Immediately after power is restored, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "Preparing to restore," as shown in Figure 111 (B).

The state of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 111 (D) is the state after the display "Preparing to return" has disappeared, the reserved special pattern 2 has been consumed, and the display of the changing decorative pattern of the new special pattern 2 has begun. The presentation mode has been changed from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, which is the default presentation mode. As a result, the changing icon h0 in the default display mode (round, normal color) of presentation mode A and the first reserved icon h21 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A are displayed.

Figures 111(a) to 111(d) show a step-by-step example of what happens when power is interrupted momentarily in performance mode C and then immediately restored.

Figure 111 (A) shows, as before, the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Here, because presentation mode C has been selected, the icon is square and the % probability of a jackpot is displayed. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 111 (A) displays a square variable icon h0 displaying 30%, and the reserved icon display area 282 of special chart 2 displays a square first reserved icon h21 displaying 10% and a square second reserved icon h22 displaying 1%.

In this state, power is interrupted for a moment (Figure 111 (a)), and then restored immediately. Immediately after power is restored, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "Preparing to restore," as shown in Figure 111 (c).

The state of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 111 (E) is the state after the display "Preparing to return" has disappeared, the reserved special pattern 2 has been consumed, and the display of the changing decorative pattern of the new special pattern 2 has begun. The presentation mode has been changed from presentation mode C to presentation mode A, which is the default presentation mode. As a result, the changing icon h0 in the default display mode (round, normal color) of presentation mode A and the first reserved icon h21 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A are displayed.

As explained above, in any presentation mode, after power is restored, the display will return to the default presentation mode A, and the icon display will return to the default display mode for presentation mode A (round, normal color).

Next, we will explain a modified presentation mode. In this modified presentation mode, the default display mode of the hold icon in presentation mode A is the same as the default display mode of the hold icon in presentation mode B, and in presentation mode C, the default display mode in presentation mode A and presentation mode B is displayed with a percentage indication of the probability of a jackpot. Furthermore, while the icon shape was triangular in presentation mode B, it is round in this modified presentation, and there is no difference in the shape of the icon in either presentation mode. Also, in this modified presentation, the pattern change start command does not include advance reading result information for each hold.

Figure 112 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of what happens when a command is missed when a winning prize is awarded while modified presentation mode C is selected. Because the timing of the winning prize and the timing of the missed command are the same as the example shown in Figure 110, the explanation will focus on the differences, and overlapping explanations may be omitted.

Figure 112(a) shows the state in which the first change in special chart 2 is being displayed after transitioning to time-saving play mode c. The change icon display area 280 shown in Figure 112(a) displays a round change icon h0 with a 10% indication.

In Figure 112(b), one ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, increasing the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Upon receiving the winning command, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the value in the reserved ball number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284. Here, the value is updated from 0 to 1. In addition, a reserved ball is additionally displayed in the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2. Here, a round first reserved ball icon h21 is additionally displayed. In the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 shown in Figure 112(b), the first reserved ball icon h21 gradually becomes larger through an increasing animation. In addition, a reserved ball increase sound is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 112 (c), the increase animation has ended and the first hold icon h21 is displayed at the specified size. The first hold icon h21 displays 1%.

In Figure 112(d), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, in the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 112(d), the second pending icon h22 that should be displayed is shown in dotted lines.

More than one second after Figure 112(d) has elapsed, another ball lands in the Special 2 starting hole 232, and the main control unit 300 sends a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current number of reserved balls is three. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this winning command and determines that the current number of reserved balls for Special 2 is "3." In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 112(e), the second reserved icon h22, which failed to display due to a failed command reception, is already displayed at the specified size, and the third reserved icon h23 is gradually enlarging through an increasing animation. The second reserved icon h22 is displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode). This is the same display mode as the icon displayed immediately after power is restored following the aforementioned power outage. Furthermore, this default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode) is a display mode of an icon that would not normally be displayed in presentation mode C. Also, in the reserved number notification area of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 112(e), 2 is not displayed, but 3 is displayed. In other words, the reserved number value is updated from 1 to 3 in one go, skipping 2. Furthermore, only one reserved increase sound, such as a "beep," is output from the speaker 120, indicating that the third reserved number has been increased. Note that if there is a reserved icon that was not displayed due to a failed command reception (if there is a reserved icon whose pre-read result is unknown), the display mode of the reserved icon that appeared after this reserved icon is not changed. For example, if a display mode showing "99%" is used on a reserved icon that appeared after a reserved icon that failed to display due to a command reception failure, and the pachinko machine is equipped with a special symbol high probability state and transitions to the special symbol high probability state by having the game ball enter a specific area during a jackpot, if the reserved icon that failed to receive the command is a jackpot and the game ball fails to pass through the specific area during that jackpot and transitions to normal game mode, the reserved icon displayed as "99%" will be consumed in normal game mode (special symbol low probability state), and may not result in a jackpot (or small jackpot). In other words, since unforeseen circumstances such as the above exist as long as there are reserved icons with unknown pre-read results, not displaying the jackpot probability percentage for reserved icons that appeared after the reserved icon with unknown pre-read results can prevent incorrect information from being reported, even if the command was received correctly.

In Figure 112 (f), the animation of the third hold icon h23 increasing has finished and the third hold icon h23 is displayed. In this variant, if a winning command is not received correctly, the hold icons after the hold icon that was not displayed will also be displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode). In other words, even if the prediction result is known, it will only be displayed in the default display mode. Therefore, the third hold icon h23 is also displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode), without displaying the percentage of the probability of a jackpot.

In Figure 112 (g), the variable display of Special Chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 112 (h), one reserved special pattern 2 is consumed, and a pattern change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the icon movement animation has begun. After completing the movement animation shown in Figure 112 (h), the display mode of the first reserved icon h21 and the second reserved icon h22 remains in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode). Meanwhile, the change icon h0 displays 1%.

In Figure 112(i), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, even here, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. In the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 112(i), the third pending icon h23 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

In Figure 112 (j), the variable display of special chart 2 has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed frozen.

In FIG. 112(k), one reserved symbol for special symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current reserved symbol count is two. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this symbol change start command, and even though the display of the special symbol 2 has begun, the reserved symbol count for special symbol 2 remains at two. Therefore, the second reserved symbol h22 is displayed in the default display mode (round, normal color display mode) of presentation mode A at the specified size from the beginning without any increase animation. The decorative symbol display device 208 also starts a movement animation. In this movement animation, the reserved symbol that initially failed to display at the timing of FIG. 112(d) is displayed as a movement icon h0. The movement icon h0 corresponds to the currently occurring movement display, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the result of the hit/miss determination made by the main control unit 300 as a command when the symbol movement begins. The pending icon that was not displayed will have its jackpot reliability displayed as a percentage when it becomes the variable icon h0. Subsequent pending icons that were displayed in the default display mode even though the prediction result was known will also have their jackpot reliability displayed as a percentage at this time. If a pending icon that failed to receive a winning command results in a jackpot, it may not be possible to display an icon that reflects the change in the game status after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, the display mode is changed after the pending icon that failed to receive a winning command is actually consumed and the result of the win/loss determination is announced. Even if the pending icon that was not displayed becomes the variable icon h0, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may remain unchanged and remain in the default display mode. The display mode of subsequent pending icons that were displayed in the default display mode even though the prediction result was known may remain unchanged and remain in the default display mode. The display modes of both the variable icon h0 and the subsequent pending icons may remain unchanged and remain in the default display mode. Alternatively, the display mode of this subsequent hold icon can be changed at any time as long as the first sub-control unit 400 stores the pre-reading results, and for example, the display mode may be changed based on the pre-reading results when it becomes the first hold icon h21.
Furthermore, in the reserved number notification area of the special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 112 (k), 1 is not displayed and 2 remains displayed. In other words, the reserved number value continues to be displayed as 2 without being reduced to 1.

In Figure 112 (l), the icon movement animation has ended, and the variable icon display area 280 displays a round variable icon h0 with a 5% indication, while the hold icon display area 282 of Special Chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 with a 5% indication. The second hold icon h22, which is the hold icon that failed to display for the second time at the timing of Figure 112 (i), is still in its default display mode, and will remain in its default display mode until it becomes variable icon h0. A changing sound is output from the speaker 120.

In addition, if a jackpot occurs in presentation mode C and the RUSH state is resumed in presentation mode C after the jackpot play, the percentage display of the jackpot reliability that was displayed before the jackpot play will be re-drawn and a new value will be displayed. Even in this case, the percentage display of the jackpot reliability will not be displayed for pending icons after the pending icon that was not displayed.

The number of reserved balls can be displayed by a lamp such as the special symbol 2 reserved lamp 220, which is displayed by the main control unit 300, or by a reserved icon display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a numerical display in the reserved number notification area of the fourth symbol display area 284, which is displayed by the first sub-control unit 400. Even in the case of a lamp display by the first sub-control unit 400, if the first sub-control unit 400 determines the correct current number of reserved balls after failing to receive a winning command, the lamps that light up according to the number of reserved balls will light up at the same time from one lamp lit, as shown in Figures 109(e), 110(e), and 112(e).

In addition, Figures 109 (e), 110 (e), and 112 (e) show examples where, while one reserve icon is displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning command indicating that the number of reserves for special chart 2 is 3. However, if a winning command indicating that the number of reserves for special chart 2 is 4 is received, the second reserve icon h22 and the third reserve icon h23 are displayed without increasing animation in the reserve icon display area 282 for special chart 2, and the fourth reserve icon h24 is displayed with increasing animation, and in the reserve number notification area for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284, the number is updated from 1 to 4 in one go, skipping 2 and 3. Furthermore, when two reserve icons are displayed and the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning command indicating that the reserve number for special symbol 2 is 4, the third reserve icon h23 is displayed without increasing animation in the reserve icon display area 282 for special symbol 2, and the fourth reserve icon h24 is displayed with increasing animation, and the reserve number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 is updated from 2 to 4 in one go, skipping 3. Even in these cases, the manner in which the reserve icon that failed to be displayed due to a failed command reception is displayed once the correct current reserve number is known is the same as that described above.

Note that the first sub-control unit 400 in the above description may be a sub-control unit that combines the functions of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500.

According to the above description,
"A main control means [for example, the main control unit 300] capable of counting the increase in the number of reserved balls based on the ball entering the starting hole;
A sub-control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that receives an increase signal (e.g., a winning command) sent from the main control means when the reserved number increases;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) controlled by the sub-control means,
The production means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon in the first display area [for example, the hold icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2],
The production means is a means capable of displaying the reserved number display in the second display area [for example, the reserved number notification area of the special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284],
The sub-control means is a means for displaying a hold icon in the first display area when the increase signal is received (e.g., Figures 109(b) to 109(c), 110(b) to 110(c), and 112(b) to 112(c)),
The sub-control means is a means for updating and displaying the value of the hold number display when the increase signal is received [e.g., Figure 109(b), Figure 110(b), Figure 112(b)],
The presentation means is a means for, when one hold icon is displayed and the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the hold number is three [e.g., Figures 109(e), 110(e), and 112(e)], displaying a second hold icon [e.g., second hold icon h22] and a third hold icon [e.g., third hold icon h23] in the first display area, while updating the value of the hold number display to 3 without updating it to 2 in the second display area [e.g., skipping 2 and updating from 1 to 3 in one go].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine makes it possible to quickly inform players of the exact number of reserved balls, and also to notify them of any abnormalities by changing the display depending on the display area.

Note that the phrase "when the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the reserved number is 3" here means "when the sub-control means does not receive an increase signal indicating that the reserved number is 2, but receives an increase signal indicating that the reserved number is 3" (the same applies hereinafter).
Also,
"The presentation means is a means for, when the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of reserved items is three while one reserved item is being displayed [for example, Figure 109(e), Figure 110(e), Figure 112(e)], displaying the second reserved item in the first display area without using an increasing animation [for example, an animation in which the reserved item gradually becomes larger toward a predetermined size] [for example, displaying it at a predetermined size from the beginning], and displaying the third reserved item using the increasing animation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

By quickly displaying hold icons that should already be displayed, and using the aforementioned increasing animation for hold icons that are displayed at the correct time, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the exact number of holds and also to add excitement to the game.

Also,
"When the presentation means displays the hold icon in a first presentation mode [for example, presentation mode A, presentation mode B, or presentation mode C], it may display the icon in a manner suggesting the possibility that the player will be in an advantageous position (hereinafter referred to as a "suggestion manner") [for example, the reliability of a jackpot may be indicated by a color or by a number in a percentage],
The presentation means is a means for, in the first presentation mode, when one hold icon is displayed and the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of holds is three, not to start displaying the second hold icon in the suggested mode, and not to start displaying the third hold icon in the suggested mode either [e.g., Figures 112(e) to 112(f)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

If the increase signal is not received properly, the hold icon will not be displayed in the suggested manner, preventing incorrect information from being provided.

The presentation means may be a means for displaying the second hold icon, which was not displayed in the suggested mode, in the suggested mode when the icon becomes a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0 in Figure 112(l)]. Furthermore, the presentation means may be a means for displaying the third hold icon, which was not displayed in the suggested mode, in the suggested mode when the second hold icon becomes a variable icon [for example, first hold icon h21 in Figure 112(l)].

Furthermore, in the first presentation mode, when one hold icon is displayed and the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of holds is three, the presentation means may be a means for not displaying the second hold icon [for example, the second hold icon h22 in Figure 110(e)] in the suggested manner, but displaying the third hold icon in the suggested manner [for example, the third hold icon h23 in Figures 110(e) to 110(f)].

Furthermore, not displaying in the suggested mode may mean displaying in the default display mode. The default display mode is a display mode that does not indicate the possibility of the player gaining an advantage, and may be the display mode that is displayed after power is restored after a power outage [for example, the display mode of the first hold icon h21 shown in Figure 111 (d), (D), or (E)].

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for displaying the second hold icon in the default display mode of the suggestion mode [for example, a display mode suggesting the lowest possibility] when, in the first presentation mode, one hold icon is displayed and the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of holds is three [for example, the second hold icon h22 in Figure 109 (e) is displayed in a normal color display mode indicating an 8% probability of winning].

Also,
"The suggestion mode is a mode in which a number indicating the reliability suggesting the possibility that the player will be in an advantageous state is displayed on the hold icon [for example, a mode in which the reliability of a jackpot is displayed in a percentage by a number in presentation mode C].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

By allowing players to directly grasp the reliability of the indication of the possibility of an advantageous situation, the presentation is easy to understand even for beginners, increasing the enjoyment of the game. It also makes it easier to understand the timing of the variable displays that should be noted.

Figure 113 is a diagram illustrating a modified version of the presentation mode.

In a modified example, regardless of the game state, the player can select one of multiple presentation modes by operating the up and down buttons on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 82, and set the selected presentation mode. For example, presentation modes can be selected and set whether during a demo or while playing.

Figure 113(a) is a table showing the selectable rendering modes.

In this variant, four types of presentation modes are available. Presentation mode A is a normal mode, which is the default presentation mode in which the player has not performed any mode setting operations. Presentation mode B is a premium up mode, which is a presentation mode in which premium presentations are executed more frequently than presentation mode A. Presentation mode C is an advance notification mode, which is a type of advance notification presentation, which can be executed. Presentation mode D is an advance notification chance mode, which is a presentation mode in which the reliability (expectation) of advance notification presentations is increased.

Other predictive effects besides advance warning effects include reserve change effects that change the display mode of the reserve icon when a win is won or the reserve icon shifts, depending on the predictive results, to suggest the level of expectation; effects that stop and display chance eyes in decorative pattern change displays before the pattern change display that is the subject of the prediction; and effects in which movable parts perform a specified action in pattern change displays before the pattern change display that is the subject of the prediction. In addition to predictive effects, there are also cases where the display mode of the change icon is changed to give a warning of the currently occurring pattern change display.

Premium effects and hold change effects can be executed in normal mode, but advance notification effects cannot be executed in normal mode. In other words, effect mode C, which is the advance notification mode, is a mode in which advance notification effects that cannot be executed in other effect modes are executed. Also, as will be described in more detail below, the probability of false effects being executed is reduced in advance notification mode. For example, a miss may make it less likely for a hold change effect to occur, or a miss may make it less likely for a highly anticipated reach effect to be executed.

Execution of the hold change effect may be restricted. For example, if a hold occurs during a high-expectation reach such as an SP reach, SPSP reach, or full rotation reach, the display mode of the hold icon representing the hold that has occurred will not change, or the hold icon itself will not be displayed. Furthermore, if a hold occurs when there is a high-expectation hold in the preceding hold, or when the variable icon is displayed in a high-expectation display mode, the display mode of the hold icon representing the hold that has occurred will not change. Here, "high expectation" does not necessarily mean a hit or jackpot; for example, it refers to an expectation level of over 50%. Furthermore, even if the display mode indicates a low expectation level, the expectation level will be high if the pre-read result or hit/miss judgment result indicates a hit or jackpot. Furthermore, even if the first sub-control unit 400 misses a command from the main control unit 300, and as a result a hold occurs when there is a preceding hold for which the first sub-control unit 400 has not yet judged the pre-read result, the display mode of the hold icon representing the hold that has occurred will not change.

The look-ahead effects that are the target of effect mode D, which is the look-ahead chance mode, may be only the hold change effects, or may be all look-ahead effects that can be executed in the look-ahead chance mode, or may be any one type of look-ahead effect out of the multiple types of look-ahead effects that can be executed in the look-ahead chance mode, or may be multiple types of look-ahead effects.

Figure 113(b) is a table showing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon and the winning reliability in presentation mode A or presentation mode B.

The normal color is white, and the display mode of this normal color is the default display mode for both presentation mode A and presentation mode B. The reliability of a win is 8%. When explaining the reliability of a win, this includes the reliability of a small win as well as the reliability of a big win in the case of a special symbol. This is because even a small win can be upgraded to a big win if it passes through the specific area 234v. However, the reliability of a small win may not be included. Additionally, rainbow colors indicate a guaranteed win (100% hit reliability). Other display modes include green, which has a 15% hit reliability, red, which has a 30% hit reliability, and gold, which has a 50% hit reliability.

Figure 113(c) is a table showing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon and the probability of a jackpot in presentation mode C or presentation mode D.

There are no changes to the types of display modes between presentation modes A and B, but the reliability of winning is higher for display modes other than normal and rainbow colors. Presentation mode D is a mode that increases the reliability of winning to begin with, reducing the probability of a hold change effect occurring and increasing the expectation of a hold change effect when it occurs compared to normal mode. The same is true when set to presentation mode C, which is an advance notification mode. Presentation mode C is a mode that reduces the frequency of Gaze effects in preview effects other than advance notification effects, and the reliability of winning is also improved in preview effects using the display modes of the hold icon and variable icon. Note that the hit reliability for the normal color display mode can be set to 0% to make it exempt from preview effects, but even with normal colors, there is a very rare chance of a special jackpot or regular win, increasing the excitement of the game.

Next, we will discuss in detail the advance notification effects that can be executed in effect mode C. These advance notification effects are executed when a win is won (when a hold occurs), and there are two types: a first advance notification effect and a second advance notification effect. When the result of the pre-reading indicates a high expectation (such as a win or jackpot, or a long fluctuation time), the second advance notification effect is more likely to be executed. In this second advance notification effect, when a win is won, the light-emitting means (e.g., button lamp 136, left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, etc.) emits light in a specific color (red in this case), and a specific sound is output from the sound output means (e.g., speaker 120). On the other hand, in the first advance notification effect, when a win is won, the light-emitting means emits light in a normal color (white in this case), and no specific sound is output from the sound output means. The second advance notice effect can be considered an advance notice effect that suggests a win or jackpot, and the first advance notice effect can be considered an advance notice effect that suggests a miss, but as will be explained in more detail below, the second advance notice effect may also be a Gaze effect, and the first advance notice effect may also be a win.

However, if the preceding reserved ball is a winning ball or if the current variation is a winning ball, and the game ball enters the ball and the result of the pre-reading judgment is determined to be a "win," the second pre-reading effect (with red light and specific sound output) will not be executed. On the other hand, even in these cases, the first pre-reading effect (with white light and no specific sound output) can be executed. Also, even if the preceding reserved ball is a winning ball or if the current variation is a winning ball, if the result of the pre-reading judgment for the subsequent winning ball is determined to be a "miss," the second pre-reading effect (with red light and specific sound output) can be executed. In this case, the second pre-reading effect will be a fake effect. Furthermore, if the fake second pre-reading effect (with red light and specific sound output) is executed when the preceding reserved ball wins (when it occurs), the second pre-reading effect (with red light and specific sound output) can be executed when the subsequent reserved ball wins (when it occurs), regardless of whether the result of the pre-reading judgment is a "win" or a "miss."

Furthermore, the advance notification effect will not be executed during jackpot play or if the ball is not awarded in a recommended winning slot (for example, if the ball is awarded in the special chart 2 starting slot 232 in a non-time-saving play mode). Even in this case, the second advance notification effect may not be executed, but the first advance notification effect may be executed.

Furthermore, the execution of the advance notification effect is not restricted during a high expectation reach such as an SP reach or an SPSP reach, when the execution of the hold change effect is restricted, when there is a high expectation hold in the preceding hold, when the variable icon is displayed in a high expectation display mode (all of these states are states in which a false effect is being performed), or when the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive a command from the main control unit 300, resulting in a state in which there is a preceding hold for which the first sub-control unit 400 has not yet determined the advance reading result.

Figure 113 (d) shows the determination table for advance notification effects.

The judgment table shown in Figure 113 (d) is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, and when a winning command indicating a win at the normal starting port 228 or a winning command indicating a win at the special starting port 232 is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the CPU 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs lottery processing based on the judgment table shown in Figure 113 (d) for the type of advance notification effect.

The advance notification effect for a normal winning symbol is set to effect mode C, and is only performed when the game state is not in a time-saving game state. The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays a reach effect when the decorative symbol variation display for the normal symbol is performed, and the advance notification effect for the normal symbol is associated with the decorative symbol variation pattern scheduled to be executed when the currently obtained reserved symbol is consumed and the resulting pattern variation is executed. If the decorative symbol variation pattern scheduled to be executed is a normal variation, a shortened variation, or a normal reach, the first advance notification effect (white light emission, no specific sound output) is selected with a 100% probability. Note that in the case of a normal variation, a shortened variation, or a normal reach, there is no winning and the result is always a loss, but there may be cases where a win occurs. On the other hand, in the case of a loss resulting in an SP reach, the second advance notification effect (red light emission, specific sound output) is selected with a 40% probability, and the first advance notification effect is selected with the remaining 60% probability. In the case of a loss resulting in an SPSP reach, the second advance notice effect will be selected with a 100% probability, resulting in a 100% Gaze effect.

In the event of an SP Reach win, the first advance notification effect (white light emitted, no specific sound output) is selected with a 40% probability, and the second advance notification effect (red light emitted, specific sound output) is output with a remaining 60% probability. In the event of an SPSP Reach win, the first advance notification effect is selected with a 10% probability, and the second advance notification effect is selected with a remaining 90% probability. When a win is achieved, the light-emitting means emits white light, and if an SPSP Reach occurs with the pattern change display indicating that the reserved number has been consumed, a win is confirmed. In the event of a Full Rotation Reach win, when a win is achieved, the light-emitting means emits red light and a specific sound is output with a 100% probability. Therefore, although it cannot be determined from the advance notification effect, a win is confirmed if a Full Rotation Reach occurs.

The advance notification effect for a special jackpot is set to effect mode C and is only performed when the game is in the time-saving game mode. If the advance notification result is a miss in the time-saving game mode, the first advance notification effect (white light emitted, no specific sound output) is executed with a 100% probability, and the second advance notification effect (red light emitted, specific sound output) is not executed. On the other hand, if the advance notification result is a hit in the time-saving game mode, the first advance notification effect is not executed, and the second advance notification effect is executed with a 100% probability. Therefore, if the special 2 starting hole 232 is won in the time-saving game mode and the advance notification effect is executed, a miss is confirmed if white light is emitted or the specific sound is not output, and a jackpot is confirmed if red light is emitted or the specific sound is output. Note that while the above explanation uses white or red light, rainbow light, etc., may also be used. In this case, red light may indicate a jackpot, while rainbow light may indicate a 3000-shot jackpot or the jackpot most advantageous to the player.

In addition, when the special chart 2 start slot 232 is won during time-saving play and the advance notification effect is executed, if the light is white or a specific sound is not output, it is a confirmed miss, and if the light is red or a specific sound is output, it is a confirmed jackpot. However, even if the light is white, there is a low probability of a win. Even in this case, it is preferable that the red light is output to confirm a jackpot.

As described above, when presentation mode C is set, either the first advance notification presentation or the second advance notification presentation is executed when a game ball enters the game (when a hold occurs).

As described above, if there is a winning combination in the preceding reserved ball or if a winning combination occurs in the currently occurring variation, and the game ball enters the ball and the result of the pre-reading judgment is determined to be a "winning combination," the execution of the second pre-reading effect (with red light emitted and specific sound output) is restricted. However, if the first sub-control unit 400 has stored the pre-reading results, it may perform the lottery processing for the pre-reading effect that was restricted at the time of winning after the winning combination has occurred, either after the winning combination based on the preceding reserved ball or after the activation of a normal electric device, or after the winning combination based on the currently occurring variation or after the activation of a normal electric device. Alternatively, the lottery processing for the pre-reading effect may also be performed if the pre-reading results are sent again to the first sub-control unit 400 after the winning combination has occurred or after the activation of a normal electric device. The timing of this lottery process may be the end of the jackpot game, the closing time of the normal electric device, the end time of the win, or the timing of the start of the first symbol change after the jackpot game or the activation of the normal electric device, or the timing of the stop of the first symbol change, or the timing of the start of the next symbol change. In a pachinko machine in which the transition of the game state described using Figure 96 is performed, the lottery process for the advance notification effect regulated at the time of winning may be performed at a certain timing between the end of the jackpot game of the (5) 10R jackpot shown in Figure 96 and the start of the symbol change of the first special symbol 2 in the (9) RUSH state (for example, the start or stop of the symbol change of the first special symbol 2 after the end of the 10R jackpot game, or the start or stop of the symbol change of the next special symbol 2). During jackpot play, reserves for special chart 2 tend to accumulate, and when the 10R jackpot play ends, the pattern change for special chart 2 immediately begins, resulting in a transition to non-time-saving play mode. However, since the a2 time-saving play mode is in effect when the pattern change for special chart 2 begins, it is easy to win the time-saving pattern for special chart E shown in Figure 90 (c), and a rush state (c time-saving play mode) begins. Therefore, before this rush state begins, a lottery process is performed for the advance notification effect that is restricted when a prize is won.

Figure 114 is a diagram showing two examples in which the reserve change effect and the advance notification effect are executed in stages. The example shown in Figure 114 is in the time-saving play state C, where it is easy to win the special symbol 2 starting slot 232, and the game progresses mainly based on the change in the symbol on special symbol 2.

The variable icon display area 280 is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 114, and the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 is displayed to the right of it. Furthermore, the RUSH TIME, which indicates the elapsed time since the start of the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) (0.01 seconds in Figure 114(a)), is displayed at the top. The number of symbol fluctuations until the time-saving c game state ends (143 times in Figure 114(a)) is also displayed at the bottom left. A mini symbol MIN is also displayed to indicate that special symbol 2 is fluctuating, and the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of prize balls won display TAL, and a small right-hand hit display U5 are also displayed. In the fourth symbol display area 284, the bottom area is the display area for special symbol 2, the left side of which indicates the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2, and the right side of which is the notification area for the symbol fluctuation of special symbol 2. Furthermore, below the remaining number of symbol changes until the end of the time-saving game state c, a presentation mode selection display DMS is displayed, and in the example shown in Figure 114, it is announced that presentation mode C, which is an advance notification mode, has been set.

Also shown in each diagram in Figure 114 is a speaker 120, which is a sound output means, and a button lamp 138, which is a light-emitting means.

In Figure 114 (a), the decorative pattern is changing in accordance with the pattern change of special pattern 2 in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208. Also, in the display area for special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284, a flashing "-" pattern begins to be displayed, indicating that the change display of special pattern 2 is being performed. Also, a green change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280. The speaker 120 is in a mute state, and the button lamp 138 is off.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 114(b), the SPSP reach effect has begun. In the following Figure 114(c), while the SPSP reach effect continues, one ball enters the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, and one special pattern 2 reserve is accumulated. Hereinafter, the first reserve will be referred to as the first reserve. The pre-read result of this first reserve is a jackpot. In the fourth pattern display area 284, the number of reserves for special pattern 2 becomes 1, and the first reserve icon h21 representing the first reserve is displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for special pattern 2. However, because a reach effect with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as the SPSP reach effect, is being executed, the execution of the reserve change effect is restricted, and the display mode of the first reserve icon h21 is the normal white color. Meanwhile, even if the currently active symbol change display is a reach effect with a high probability of winning, such as an SPSP reach effect, the execution of the advance notice effect is not restricted. Instead, the second advance notice effect is selected as a result of the lottery based on the determination table shown in FIG. 113(d), and the second advance notice effect is executed. In other words, in conjunction with the winning of the special symbol 2 start slot 232 (an increase in the special symbol 2 reserve), a specific sound, "pokyun," is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 114(c), and the button lamp 138 lights up red. This indicates that the reserve acquired this time (first reserve) is promising, greatly increasing the enjoyment of the game.

After that, the SPSP reach effect ends, the losing decorative pattern combination ("Decoration 4 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 4") is displayed as a stopped combination, and after the confirmed stop, the first reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed. In Figure 114 (d), the first reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed, and the white first reserved symbol h21 shifts to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the red variable symbol h0. In other words, the reserve change effect is executed at the time of the shift, and a "beep" sound, which is the sound of the symbol changing to red, is output from the speaker 120. In addition, the display of the changing decorative symbols has begun. Note that when the display of the changing decorative symbols begins, each decorative symbol swings in the opposite direction for a moment before beginning to rotate in the forward direction.

In Figure 114 (e), one ball enters the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and one reserve for special symbol 2 is accumulated. The predictive result for the first reserve here is also a jackpot. In the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of reserves for special symbol 2 becomes 1, and the first reserve icon h21 representing the first reserve is displayed in the special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282. However, since the variable icon h0 is displayed in red and the display mode is C, the expected probability of a jackpot is high at 60%, so the execution of the reserve change display is restricted, and the display mode of the first reserve icon h21 is the normal white color. Furthermore, since the currently occurring symbol change display is a jackpot and the first reserve is also a jackpot, the execution of the second advance notification display (with red light and specific sound output) is also restricted, and the first advance notification display is executed. That is, in conjunction with a win in the special chart 2 starting hole 232 (an increase in the reserved special chart 2), the button lamp 138 shown in Figure 114 (c) lights up in white, and no sound is output from the speaker 120.

Next, we will explain another example. In Figure 114(A), play progresses in the time-saving c game state, and 8 minutes 9.71 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving c game state (RUSH state), with 43 plays remaining until the time-saving c game state ends. In Figure 114(A), presentation mode C is also set, and the decorative pattern of special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner. The variable icon h0 is displayed in the normal color, and the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 is 0.

In the following Figure 114(B), one ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and one special symbol 2 reserve is accumulated. In the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of reserves for special symbol 2 becomes 1, and the first reserve icon h21, which is displayed in green and represents the first reserve, is displayed in the special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282. The first reserve icon h21 is displayed in green and has a reliability of 30%, but the first reserve is predicted to be a jackpot, and the second advance notification effect, which suggests a jackpot, is being executed. In other words, in conjunction with the winning of the special symbol 2 starting hole 232 (the increase in the reserve for special symbol 2), a specific sound, "pokyun," is output from the speaker 120 shown in Figure 114(B), and the button lamp 138 lights up red. This indicates that the reserve acquired this time (first reserve) is promising, greatly increasing the player's interest in the game.

In Figure 114 (C), another ball enters the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a second reserve is accumulated as a reserve for special symbol 2. Hereinafter, the second reserve will be referred to as the second reserve. In the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of reserves for special symbol 2 becomes two, and the second reserve icon h22 in the normal color representing the second reserve is displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for special symbol 2. The prediction result for this second reserve is a miss, and as a result of the lottery based on the judgment table shown in Figure 113 (d), the first advance notification effect is selected and the first advance notification effect is executed. In other words, the button lamp 138 shown in Figure 114 (C) emits white light, and no sound is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 114 (D), one more ball enters the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a third reserve is accumulated as a reserve for special symbol 2. Hereinafter, the third reserve will be referred to as the third reserve. Both this third reserve and the prediction result are jackpots. In the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of reserves for special symbol 2 becomes three, and the third reserve icon h23 representing the third reserve is displayed in the special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282. However, since the prediction result for the first reserve is a jackpot, the execution of the reserve change effect is restricted, and the third reserve icon h23 is displayed in its normal color. Furthermore, since the prediction result for the first reserve is a jackpot and the prediction result for the third reserve is also a jackpot, the second advance notification effect is also restricted, the first advance notification effect is executed, the button lamp 138 lights up white, and no sound is output from the speaker 120. Also, in Figure 114 (D), the decorative pattern of Special Chart 2 is displayed fluctuating between "Decoration 5" - "Decoration 4" - "Decoration 7."

Eventually, the shaking display ends, and after the losing decorative pattern combination ("Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 7") is confirmed and stopped, the first reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed. In Figure 114(E), the first reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed, and the green first reserved symbol h21 shifts to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the gold variable symbol h0. In other words, the reserve change effect is executed at the time of the shift, and a "ping" sound, which is the sound of the symbol changing to gold, is output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the third reserved symbol representing the third reserved symbol, for which the execution of the second advance notification effect is restricted upon winning, has become the second reserved symbol h22. Furthermore, in Figure 114(E), the variable display of decorative symbols has begun.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the following Figure 114 (F) is performing an SPSP reach effect, and in the same Figure (G), the decorative symbol combination representing a jackpot ("Decoration 7" - "Decoration 7" - "Decoration 7") is confirmed and stopped.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 114 (H) executes the start effect of the jackpot game, after which the jackpot game is played, followed by the end effect of the jackpot game in Figure 114 (I). When the end effect of the jackpot game begins, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a lottery process for the second advance notification effect of the third reserve (second reserve at this point), whose execution is restricted upon winning in Figure 114 (D), and the button lamp 138 shown in Figure 114 (I) lights up red, and the speaker 120 outputs a specific sound, a "pokyun" sound. Furthermore, a lottery process is also performed to determine the display mode for the reserve change effect of the third reserve (second reserve at this point), whose execution is restricted upon winning in Figure 114 (D).

Figure 114 (I) shows an example in which, at the end of a jackpot, a lottery process is executed for the advance notification effect, the execution of which was restricted when the hold occurred, but the timing at which the lottery process for the restricted advance notification effect is executed is not limited to this timing, and may also be the timing shown in Figure 114 (I').

Specifically, as shown in Figure 114(I'), when the first symbol change begins after the jackpot, a lottery process is performed for the advance notification effect, and as a result, the second advance notification effect is selected, the button lamp 138 shown in Figure 114(I') also lights up red, and a specific sound, "pokyun," is output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the third hold, whose execution was restricted upon winning in Figure 114(D), is now the first hold, and a lottery process is also performed to determine the display mode of the hold icon for this first hold, and the first hold icon h21, displayed in green, is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of special chart 2 in Figure 114(I').

The timing at which the lottery process for the restricted advance notification effects is executed may be at the end of the jackpot, at the start of the first (first spin) fluctuation after the jackpot, at the end of the first (first spin) fluctuation after the jackpot, at the start of the second spin fluctuation, or at the start of the first fluctuation in the c-time-saving game state after the jackpot.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 is designed to change the normal symbol during normal play. When multiple winning normal symbols are reserved, after the special symbol jackpot game is played based on the first normal symbol, the normal electric device (electric chute) is activated for a long time by the normal electric gate trigger. In this so-called "time-saving play state" (A2 time-saving play state), in which winning is easy, the player can pass through the normal electric gate 228g and win another special symbol jackpot. However, if the remaining winning normal symbols are consumed, the normal electric device is activated, and the jackpot game begins before the game ball passes through the normal electric gate 228g, the special symbol jackpot triggered by the normal electric gate trigger cannot be obtained. In such cases, if an advance notification effect is executed every time a winning normal symbol is reserved, the player will be more likely to notice this phenomenon, which will make the player feel like they've lost out and reduce their motivation to play. Therefore, in such situations, restricting the execution of the advance notification effect in addition to the hold change effect can prevent a decline in motivation to play.

Furthermore, in the case of machines that determine whether or not a jackpot will occur or whether or not to transition to a special mode by passing through a specific area (V area), even if a jackpot occurs during the special mode, if the machine subsequently transitions to a normal mode without passing through the V area, it may no longer be a jackpot. In such cases, if advance warning effects are implemented, incorrect information will be given. Or, it may lead to excessive expectations. To prevent these things from happening, it is effective to restrict the implementation of advance warning effects in addition to hold change effects.

In the above description,
"A gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of pre-reading effects,
A player can select one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, presentation modes A to D shown in FIG. 113(a)) by operating the player.
The plurality of types of presentation modes include a first presentation mode [for example, presentation mode A (normal mode)] and a second presentation mode [for example, presentation mode C (advance notification mode)],
The plurality of types of pre-reading effects include a first pre-reading effect [for example, a hold change effect] and a second pre-reading effect [for example, a second pre-announcement effect],
The first look-ahead performance [for example, a hold change performance] is a look-ahead performance that can be executed in the first performance mode and can also be executed in the second performance mode [for example, the example shown in FIG. 114],
The second pre-reading effect [for example, the second pre-announcement effect] is a pre-reading effect that cannot be executed in the first effect mode but is executable in the second effect mode,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine features a pre-reading effect that can be set to execute at will, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is popular with a wide variety of players.

Also,
"The first pre-reading effect is a pre-reading effect that cannot be newly started during the first period during the pattern change display [for example, FIG. 114 (c)],
The second pre-reading effect is a pre-reading effect that can be newly started even during the first period [for example, FIG. 114(c)],
The first period is a period during which a predetermined reach effect (for example, a reach effect with a high expectation such as an SP reach, an SPSP reach, or a full rotation reach) is being executed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

With this gaming machine, the first look-ahead effect, which can be executed in any presentation mode, is not executed when the specified reach effect, which can lead to a win or jackpot, is being executed, allowing the player to concentrate on the specified reach effect and making the game more exciting. Furthermore, the second look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect that can only be executed when the second presentation mode is set by the player's operation, and can be said to be a look-ahead effect that the player actively wishes to have executed. By making this second look-ahead effect executable even when the specified reach effect is being executed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is popular with players who desire the second look-ahead effect.

Also,
"When a winning hold (for example, the third hold in FIG. 114 (D)) occurs during the pattern change display, the first pre-reading effect (for example, the hold change effect) for that hold cannot be executed if a predetermined condition is met,
When a winning hold (for example, the third hold in FIG. 114(D)) occurs during the pattern change display, the second pre-reading effect (for example, the second pre-announcement effect) for the hold cannot be executed if the predetermined condition is met.
The predetermined condition is that a matching reservation (e.g., a first reservation) is stored before the reservation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Winning the second or subsequent balls can make the player feel like they've lost out, and even if the ball was a win when the hold was created, it may no longer be a win when the hold is consumed due to changes in the situation. Because of these possibilities, it is effective to restrict the execution of the second look-ahead effect in addition to the first look-ahead effect when the specified condition is met.

Next, we will explain the second embodiment of the gaming machine described using Figures 82 to 114. In the following explanation, components with the same names as components described using Figures 82 to 114 will be assigned the same symbols as those shown in Figures 82 to 114. In addition, we will focus on points unique to the second embodiment, and may omit explanations that overlap with previous explanations.

In the second embodiment, there is no c time-saving game state, and there are two game states: an a1 time-saving game state in which it is difficult to win in the electric chute, and an a2 time-saving game state in which it is easy to win in the electric chute. Furthermore, when passing through the normal map activation gate 228g shown in Figure 85(a), the electric chute always opens (the shutter member 2311 advances) without a normal map lottery.

Figure 115(a) shows the pass/fail determination table for normal drawings in the second embodiment, and replaces Figure 40-2(a).

In the second embodiment, when determining whether a regular lottery draw is successful, if a number between 0 and 327 is extracted from the random number range of 0 to 65535, a winning result is selected with a probability of approximately 1 in 199.808. This is the same in all game states. The winning probability is higher than the winning result determination table shown in Figure 92-2 (a). Note that the winning probability may be changed depending on the game state. In this embodiment, when a winning result is obtained, the shutter member 2311 of the special lottery draw 1 starting port 231 advances for a predetermined period of time, making it easier for the game ball to enter the special lottery draw 1 starting port 231.

Figure 115(b) shows the special drawing win/lose determination table in the second embodiment, and replaces Figure 90(a).

In the second embodiment, there are no more big wins on special charts, and only big wins can occur via small wins. Furthermore, with special chart 1, you are guaranteed to win a small win (1 in 1.000) and will never lose. On the other hand, with the drawing for special chart 2, if a number between 0 and 660 is drawn from the random number range of 0 to 65535, a small win will be selected with a probability of approximately 1 in 99.147, and the remaining numbers (661 to 65535) will result in a loss.

Figure 115(c) shows the special chart determination table for when a small win is won, which is used in the non-time-saving game mode of the second embodiment, and replaces Figure 91(a).

As mentioned above, special chart 1 always results in a small jackpot. In non-time-saving play mode (normal play mode), special chart a is selected with a 20/100 probability, and special chart b is selected with a remaining 80/100 probability. When special chart a is selected in non-time-saving play mode, a 10R jackpot occurs if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to a1 time-saving play mode. The number in parentheses is the number of time-saving cycles (same below), and the a1 time-saving play mode continues until the pattern change display on special chart 1 has started 10,000 times or the pattern change display on special chart 2 has started 10,000 times. If a small jackpot has not been won by then, the game mode will return to non-time-saving play mode (normal play mode). Additionally, if special chart b is selected in non-time-saving play mode, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, but after the jackpot play ends, the game will remain in non-time-saving play mode.

If a small jackpot is won on special chart 2 in non-time-saving play mode, there is a 50/100 chance that special chart c will be selected, and a 50/100 chance that special chart d will be selected. If special chart c is selected in non-time-saving play mode, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, but after the jackpot play ends, the game will remain in non-time-saving play mode. If special chart d is selected in non-time-saving play mode, a 2R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, but after the jackpot play ends, the game will remain in non-time-saving play mode.

In addition, in any case of small winning symbols, the special symbol will remain in a low probability state.

Figure 115(d) shows the special symbol determination table for when a small jackpot is won, which is used in the time-saving game state of the second embodiment, and replaces Figure 91(b). As mentioned above, in the second embodiment, there is no time-saving game state c, so the time-saving game state becomes time-saving game state a.

Since the special chart 1 always wins a small prize, in the time-saving game state, the special chart a is selected with a probability of 20/100 in the special chart 1, and the special chart b is selected with a probability of 80/100. In the time-saving game state, whether it is the special chart a or the special chart b, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through the specific area 234v, and after the jackpot game ends, the state will shift to the a1 time-saving game state, and this a
The time-saving game state starts once if the symbol change display of special chart 1 is displayed, or continues until it starts 180 times if the symbol change display of special chart 2 is displayed. In other words, in the time-saving game state, there is no difference between special chart a and special chart b in special chart 1.

When a small jackpot is won on special symbol 2 in non-time-saving play mode, there is a 50/100 chance that special symbol c will be selected, and a 50/100 chance that special symbol d will be selected. When special symbol c is selected in non-time-saving play mode, a 10R jackpot occurs if the game ball passes through specific area 234v. After the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to the a2 time-saving play mode, and this a2 time-saving play mode continues until it has started five times if the symbol change display is special symbol 1, or until it has started twice if the symbol change display is special symbol 2. On the other hand, when special symbol d is selected in non-time-saving play mode, a 2R jackpot occurs if the game ball passes through specific area 234v. After the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to the a1 time-saving play mode, and this a1 time-saving play mode continues until it has started once if the symbol change display is special symbol 1, or until it has started 180 times if the symbol change display is special symbol 2.

In addition, in any case of small winning symbols, the special symbol will remain in a low probability state.

Figure 116(a) shows the activation time determination table for the normal power activation gate trigger in various game states in the second embodiment, and replaces Figure 93-1(b).

In any game state, the shutter member 2311 opens (actuates) once, but it may also be configured to repeat the advance and retreat operation multiple times.

In the non-time-saving play state, the opening time is 44 ms, and in the A1 time-saving play state, the opening time is also 44 ms. In other words, there is no difference in the opening time between the non-time-saving play state and the A1 time-saving play state. On the other hand, in the A2 time-saving play state, the opening time is the extended opening time of 5800 ms. As a result, in the non-time-saving play state and the A1 time-saving play state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231 even if it passes through the normal power operating gate 228g, but in the A2 time-saving play state, it can be said that it is easy to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231 once the game ball passes through the normal power operating gate 228g.

The closing time of the shutter member 2311 is 56 ms regardless of the game state.

Figure 116(b) shows how Special Drawings 1 and 2 are handled in the second embodiment when they are simultaneously changing, and replaces Figure 93-1(d).

The diagonal lines in Figure 116 (b) represent combinations that are impossible to achieve in the first place. As mentioned above, only small wins are possible on Special Chart 1. Furthermore, if Special Chart 2 lands on Special Chart 1 during a small win fluctuation, the small win will not be selected on Special Chart 1 and will result in a miss, and if Special Chart 1 lands on Special Chart 2 during a small win fluctuation, the small win will not be selected on Special Chart 2 and will result in a miss. Therefore, it is impossible for Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 to result in a small win at the same time. Furthermore, the horizontal bar display indicates that special control is not being executed.

As shown in Figure 116 (b), if special chart 1 stops and displays a small win while both special chart 1 and special chart 2 are fluctuating, the display result of special chart 2 during the fluctuating display is discarded and it stops and displays a losing pattern. In the a2 time-saving game state, the fluctuating time of special chart 1 is extremely short (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the display result of special chart 2 with a fluctuating time longer than that of special chart 1 (for example, 5.0 seconds) is discarded.

On the other hand, if Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 are fluctuating simultaneously and a small win symbol is displayed on Special Chart 2, the fluctuating display of Special Chart 1 will be interrupted. Then, after the big win game via the small win on Special Chart 2 ends, the fluctuating display of Special Chart 1 will resume.

Next, we will explain the flow of play on the gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 117 is a diagram showing the flow of play on the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This explanation will focus on the normal flow of play, and may not include irregular gameplay.

The first game state is (11) the normal game state, i.e., the non-time-saving state. In this game state, left-handed play is recommended, and the gameplay revolves around the normal map changing display when the game ball enters the normal map starting hole 228.

Then, as a result of the normal map change display, if a win (normal map A) is displayed (a), (12) a normal map win game is executed, and the shutter member 2311 of the special map 1 starting port 231 shown in Figure 85 advances for a predetermined time (e.g., 5000 ms).

When a game ball enters the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 during normal winning play (b), the variable display of special symbol 1 begins, and in the second embodiment, the small winning symbol (special symbol a or special symbol b) is always displayed. When the small winning symbol is displayed, the first variable winning hole 234 opens, allowing the game ball to enter. When the game ball that entered the first variable winning hole 234 passes through the specific area 234v, a jackpot is awarded, and (13) a 10R jackpot game begins.

After the initial 10R jackpot play ends, the game transitions to one of two routes depending on the small win symbol. If the small win symbol is special symbol b, the game will not transition to the time-saving play state even after the 10R jackpot play ends, but will remain in the normal play state (c). On the other hand, if the small win symbol is special symbol a, the game will transition to the a1 time-saving play state (RUSH state) (14), in which it is difficult to win the special symbol 1 start hole 231 (d). In this a1 time-saving play state, as described above, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 only opens short (44 ms), making it difficult to win the special symbol 1 start hole 231. Instead, the game ball will win the special symbol 2 start hole 232, located downstream of the normal symbol activation gate 228g, and the gameplay will revolve around the display of the changing special symbol 2 symbol. Additionally, when transitioning from the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) to the a1 time-saving game state, the first RUSH state is entered, and (14) the a1 time-saving game state (first RUSH state) continues until the symbol change display of special chart 1 has started 10,000 times or the symbol change display of special chart 2 has started 10,000 times (ST 10,000 times).

(14) In the a1 time-saving game state (initial RUSH state), if the result of the win/loss judgment on special chart 2 is a small win on special chart d, the first variable winning opening 234 opens, allowing the game ball to enter. When the game ball that entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the specific area 234v (e), (15) a 2R jackpot game begins. When the 2R jackpot game ends, (16) the game transitions to the a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state) in which it is difficult to win at the special chart 1 starting opening 231 (f). Here, the (16) a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state) continues until the symbol change display of special symbol 1 starts once or the symbol change display of special symbol 2 starts 180 times, but because the shutter member 2311 is short-open (44 ms), it is difficult to win in the special symbol 1 start port 231, and the game becomes centered on the symbol change display of special symbol 2 (ST 180 times). If the result of the hit/miss judgment of special symbol 2 in the (16) a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state) is again a small hit of special symbol d, the first variable winning port 234 opens, allowing the game ball to enter, and when the game ball that entered the first variable winning port 234 passes through the specific area 234v (g), the (15) 2R big win game begins. When the 2R jackpot game ends, (16) the game will transition back to the a1 time-limited game state (RUSH state), where it is difficult to win at the special chart 1 starting slot 231 (f).

(14) In the a1 time-saving game state (first RUSH state), the result of the judgment of whether or not the special chart 2 is correct is
If a player wins a small jackpot on special symbol c, the first variable winning slot 234 opens, allowing the ball to enter. When the ball enters the first variable winning slot 234 and passes through the specific area 234v (h), the (17) 10R jackpot game begins. When this 10R jackpot game ends, the game transitions to the (18) a2 time-saving game state, which makes it easier to win at the special symbol 1 starting slot 231 (i). The (18) a2 time-saving game state continues until the special symbol 1 symbol change display starts five times or the special symbol 2 symbol change display starts twice. However, when the ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 opens for a long time (5,800 ms), making it easier to win at the special symbol 1 starting slot 231. In addition, even if the special symbol 2 start port 232 located downstream of the normal symbol activation gate 228g is won and the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is initiated, as explained using FIG. 116(b), the display result of the special symbol 2 that is longer than the variation time of the special symbol 1 will be discarded, so the game will be centered on the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1. (18) In the a2 time-saving game state, even if the result of the judgment of whether the special symbol 1 is a small win of the special symbol a or a small win of the special symbol b, the first variable winning port 234 opens and becomes a state in which the game ball can enter, and when the game ball that entered the first variable winning port 234 passes through the specific area 234v (j), (19) the 10R jackpot game will begin. When this 10R jackpot game ends, whether it is the case of special chart a or special chart b, (16) the game shifts to a1 time-shortened game state (RUSH state) in which it is difficult to win at special chart 1 starting hole 231 (k).

(16) In the a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state), if the result of the win/loss judgment on special chart 2 is a small win on special chart c, the first variable winning opening 234 opens, allowing the game ball to enter. When the game ball that enters the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the specific area 234v (l), (17) a 10R jackpot game begins. When the 10R jackpot game ends here, (18) the game will transition to the a2 time-saving game state, which makes it easier to win at the special chart 1 starting opening 231 (i).

(16) In the a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state), if the Special Chart 2 pattern change display starts 180 times but no small win is won (if the RUSH state termination condition is met), the a1 time-saving game state will transition to (11) the normal game state (non-time-saving state).

The transition of the game state may occur when the final change (for example, the 180th symbol change display of Special Chart 2) begins, or when the final change ends and the next change begins.

In the game flow of the second embodiment described above, in the normal game state, gameplay is centered on the variable display of the normal symbol; in the a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state), where it is difficult to win at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, gameplay is centered on the variable display of special symbol 2; and in the a2 time-saving game state, where it is easy to win at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, gameplay is centered on the variable display of special symbol 1. Also, in the a2 time-saving game state, the variable time of special symbol 1 is extremely short (for example, 0.2 seconds), and special symbol 1 always results in a small hit, so the time between the end of the (17) 10R jackpot game and the occurrence of the small hit that triggers the (19) 10R jackpot game is extremely short. In a 10R jackpot game, you can expect to win 1,500 prize balls, and in a combination of the (17) 10R jackpot game with special chart 2 and the (19) 10R jackpot game with special chart 1, you can expect to win 3,000 prize balls. In the following explanation, it may be stated that winning a small jackpot on special chart c guarantees 3,000 balls, but this is from the perspective of the gameplay of this gaming machine, and in actual gameplay, it is possible that you will miss out. Furthermore, in the a2 time-saving game state, even if the special chart 2 start port 232 located downstream of the normal chart activation gate 228g is won and the special chart 2 pattern change display begins, the display result of the special chart 2 that is longer than the change time of the special chart 1 will be discarded.

In the second embodiment, during a jackpot game, an additional effect is executed to suggest that there is a possibility that a subsequent jackpot will result in additional prize balls. This additional effect is a type of pre-reading effect related to the jackpot game, and is an additional pre-reading effect.

In the game flow shown in Figure 117, starting from (14) a1 time-saving game state (first RUSH state) or (16) a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state), the first (17) 10R jackpot game → (18) a2 time-saving game state where it is easy to win at the special chart 1 starting hole 231 → second (19) 10R jackpot game → (16) a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state), and in the (16) a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state), 2R If you do not win the small win special symbol d that triggers a jackpot game, but instead win the small win special symbol c that triggers a 10R jackpot game, you will return to the first (17) 10R jackpot game, and this loop will be the first round. After that, if you do not win the small win special symbol d that triggers a 2R jackpot game in the (16) a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state), this loop will be repeated multiple times, such as the second round, third round, etc. Note that if special symbol 2 is a miss in the (16) a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state), the miss fluctuation will also be consumed in a short time.

Figure 118 is a flowchart showing the process for determining additional effects in the second embodiment.

The additional effect determination process shown in Figure 118 is executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. A command to stop the change in the special symbol pattern is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command to stop the change in the special symbol pattern, it starts the additional effect determination process shown in Figure 118. Note that the additional effect determination process shown in Figure 118 may also be started when a command to start a small win game or a command to start a big win game is received instead of a command to stop the change in the special symbol pattern.

In step S601, it is determined whether the current game state is in the RUSH state. In the game flow shown in Figure 117, it is determined whether the game is in the (14) a1 time-limited game state or the (16) a1 time-limited game state shown in Figure 117, and this additional effect determination process determines whether or not to execute additional effects during the second (19) 10R jackpot game.

If step S601 determines that the game is not in the RUSH state, the process for determining whether or not the additional effects are performed ends, and no additional effects are executed. On the other hand, if the game is in the RUSH state, the process proceeds to step S602. Determining whether or not the game is in the RUSH state in step S601 means determining whether or not the game is progressing with the special symbol 2 symbol change display at the center, and step S602 determines whether or not the stopped symbol on special symbol 2, which was stopped by the special symbol symbol change stop command, is special symbol c. In the case of special symbol 2, special symbol d, which can result in a 2R jackpot, may be displayed, but here we will focus on special symbol c, which can result in a 15R jackpot, which can award 1,500 prize balls. If the stopped symbol on special symbol 2 is not special symbol c, the process for determining whether or not the additional effects are executed ends.

If the stopped symbol on special symbol 2 is special symbol c, the result of the pre-reading of the reserved symbol for special symbol 2 is judged. When a reservation for special symbol 2 occurs, the first sub-control unit 400 is sent the pre-reading result of the reservation from the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400 stores the pre-reading result in RAM 408. First, it is judged whether the pre-reading result of the second reservation is special symbol c (step S603). As mentioned above, in the (18) a2 time-saving game state shown in FIG. 117, the display result of special symbol 2, which is longer than the variable time of special symbol 1, is discarded, and therefore the display result of the first reservation for special symbol 2 is discarded. For this reason, the pre-reading result of the first reservation is not judged, and the pre-reading result of the second reservation is judged.

If the result of the pre-reading of the second reserved is special chart c, it is further determined whether the result of the pre-reading of the fourth reserved is special chart c (step S604). If the second reserved is special chart c, even in the (18) a2 time-saving play state in the second round, the display result of special chart 2, which is longer than the variable time of special chart 1, will be discarded, and the display result of the third reserved for special chart 2 will be discarded. For this reason, the pre-reading result of the third reserved is not determined, and the pre-reading result of the fourth reserved is determined.

If the result of the fourth reserve read is special symbol c, processing is performed for an additional effect of 6,000 balls, combining the 3,000 balls from the second reserve and the 3,000 balls from the fourth reserve (step S605), and this additional effect determination processing ends. Note that 3,000 balls refers to the total number of prize balls: 1,500 balls from the (17) 10R jackpot game using special symbol 2 and 1,500 balls from the (19) 10R jackpot game using special symbol 1 (the same applies below). This step S605 may be processing to perform an additional effect of 6,000 balls during the second (19) 10R jackpot game, or it is not necessarily the case that an additional effect of 6,000 balls will be performed, and step S605 may be processing to determine whether or not to perform it by lottery.

If the result of the second reserved prediction is not special symbol c, it is determined whether the result of the second reserved prediction is special symbol d (step S606). In the second embodiment, the 10R jackpot background continues to be displayed from the end of the first (17) 10R jackpot game until the start of the second (19) 10R jackpot game, as explained using Figures 100 and 101. Therefore, even if the second reserved is a miss, it is consumed in a short time, and the 10R jackpot background remains displayed. However, if the second reserved is special symbol d, the 2R jackpot game begins via a small jackpot, and the 2R jackpot background is displayed instead of the 10R jackpot background. Furthermore, it is not possible to win 1,500 prize balls in 2R. For these reasons, the additional effect determination process ends without any additional effects being performed. On the other hand, if the result of the second reserved pre-read is not special chart d, i.e., if it is a miss, it is determined whether the result of the third reserved pre-read is special chart c (step S607).

The jackpot background for 10R and 2R may be the same. Even in this case, since 1,500 prize balls cannot be won in 2R, the extra effect will not be performed and the extra effect determination process will end. However, since 300 prize balls can be won in 2R, it is also possible to perform an extra effect of these 300 balls.

If the result of the pre-read for the third reserve is special chart c, even in the (18)a2 time-saving play state on the fourth spin, the display result of special chart 2, which has a longer fluctuation time than special chart 1, will be discarded, and the display result of the fourth reserve for special chart 2 will be discarded. Therefore, the pre-read result for the fourth reserve is not judged, and processing is executed for the additional performance of 3,000 shots for the third reserve (step S608), and this additional performance judgment processing ends. This step S608 may be processing to perform the additional performance of 3,000 shots during the second (19)10R jackpot play, or it is not necessarily the case that the additional performance of 3,000 shots will be executed, and step S608 may be processing to determine whether or not to execute it by lottery.

If the result of the pre-reading of the third reserved item is not special chart c, it is determined whether the result of the pre-reading of the third reserved item is special chart d (step S609). If the third reserved item is special chart d, for the same reason as above, no additional performance is performed and the additional performance determination process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the pre-reading of the third reserved item is not special chart d, i.e., if it is a miss, it is determined whether the result of the pre-reading of the fourth reserved item is special chart c (step S610).

If the result of the pre-reading of the fourth reserve is special symbol c, a process is executed to perform the 3,000-shot addition effect of the fourth reserve during the second (19) 10R jackpot game (step S608). On the other hand, if the result of the pre-reading of the fourth reserve is not special symbol c, a process related to the addition stimulation effect is executed (step S611), and this addition stimulation effect determination process is terminated. The addition stimulation effect is, for example, an effect in which the addition fails in the button effect described using FIG. 101. Step S611 may be a process for performing the addition stimulation effect during the second (19) 10R jackpot game, or the addition stimulation effect may not necessarily be performed, and step S611 may be a process for determining whether or not to perform it by lottery.

The additional effects executed in steps S605 and S608 described above are performed during the second (19) 10R jackpot game in the first round, and are not performed from the second round onwards. However, they may be performed from the second round onwards instead of the first round. The additional effects may also be performed during the first (17) 10R jackpot game in the first round.

In addition, the additional effect will be performed even if the second or third reserved bet is a miss. By performing the additional effect even if there is a miss in between, the frequency with which the additional effect is performed can be increased. Note that, to increase the rarity of the additional effect, it is also possible to not perform the additional effect if there is a miss in between.

Figure 119 shows an example of how an additional effect is executed in stages.

Figure 119(a) shows that the special symbol 2 symbol change display has been performed 80 times since the transition to the (16) a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state) in Figure 117. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 119(a) displays the number of times (remaining times) that special symbol 2 symbol changes will be displayed until the a1 time-saving game state ends as "100 times." In addition, the "RUSH TIME" display reads "01:24:10," indicating that 1 minute 24.10 seconds have passed since the a1 time-saving game state began.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 119(a) displays the changes in the decorative patterns. In the state shown in Figure 119(a), the change display of special pattern 2 is being displayed, and both the normal pattern and special pattern 1 are displayed stationary. To indicate this, the fourth pattern display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 displays special pattern 2 flashing, while the normal pattern and special pattern 1 are displayed lit. Note that in the fourth pattern display area 284 of the second embodiment, when special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 is displayed, a circle is displayed to indicate a small win.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in Figure 119 (a) is the a1 time-saving game state, it is difficult to win at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, and the pattern change display of special symbol 2 is the focus, with a special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282 provided to the right of the change icon display area 280. Reserve icons representing reserves for special symbol 2 are displayed in the special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282. The number of reserves for special symbol 2 is represented by the number of times the special symbol 2 reserve lamp 220 is lit, as well as the number of reserve icons for special symbol 2. In the special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282, reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icons on the left are the reserve icons that have won the most recently. Hereinafter, the reserve with the oldest winning entry will be referred to as the first reserve, and the reserve icon corresponding to the first reserve will be referred to as the first reserve icon h21, the reserve with the second oldest winning entry will be referred to as the second reserve, and the reserve icon corresponding to the second reserve will be referred to as the second reserve icon h22, the reserve with the third oldest winning entry will be referred to as the third reserve, and the icon corresponding to the third reserve will be referred to as the third reserve icon h23, and the reserve with the most recent winning entry will be referred to as the fourth reserve, and the reserve icon corresponding to the fourth reserve will be referred to as the fourth reserve icon h24.

In Figure 119(a), four special chart 2 hold icons, namely the first hold icon h21 to the fourth hold icon h24, are displayed in the special chart 2 hold icon display area 282. In addition, the variable icon display area 280 displays the variable icon h0 corresponding to the currently active special chart 2 variable display. These four special chart 2 hold icons h21, h22, h23, h24 and variable icon h0 are all displayed in the default display mode (a round, patternless, white display mode). However, in the currently active special chart 2 variable display, special chart c is displayed as stopped. After the jackpot game based on this special chart c ends, the game transitions to the A2 time-saving game state, which makes it easier to win at the special chart 1 start port 231. Furthermore, the results of the pre-reading show that the special chart C has been won in the variable display of special chart 2 that starts when the first reserved lottery is consumed, the variable display of special chart 2 that starts when the second reserved lottery is consumed, the variable display of special chart 2 that starts when the third reserved lottery is consumed, and the variable display of special chart 2 that starts when the fourth reserved lottery is consumed.

In Figure 119 (b), the second special symbol display device 214 (see Figure 84), not shown here, begins to display the confirmed special symbol c, and the decorative symbol display device 208 begins to display the confirmed combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7." Also, the display of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shows a lit circle indicating a small win. The variable icon h0 continues to be displayed while the confirmed stop is being performed, and is erased when the confirmed stop ends.

Furthermore, upon receiving a command to stop the pattern change of special chart 2, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 starts the additional effect determination process shown in FIG. 118. In this example, step S605 shown in FIG. 118 is executed, and the additional effect determination process ends.

Eventually, the small win game begins, the first variable winning slot 234 opens, and when the game ball that entered the first variable winning slot 234 passes through the specific area 234v, the 10R jackpot game begins. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 119(c) displays "3000pt Jackpot" in the center of the display screen, suggesting that two jackpot games have been played and it is possible to win 3000 prize balls. Additionally, the right-hit indicator RH1, which encourages the player to continue hitting the right button, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen. When the jackpot game begins, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background (10R jackpot background) indicating that a 10R jackpot game is in progress. The jackpot game here corresponds to the (17) 10R jackpot game shown in Figure 117, in which the first variable winning slot 234 is not opened, and the second variable winning slot 235 is opened, starting the first round.

When one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235, 15 prize balls are paid out, and when 10 game balls are detected entering the second variable winning opening 235, the second variable winning opening 235 closes and one round ends.

In Figure 119(d), a 10R jackpot play has ended, and the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the message "Be careful not to get addicted. If you forget to remove your card, please stop.", warning players to avoid becoming addicted and forgetting to remove their prepaid card. Also, the winning achievement display AP is displayed in the lower center of the display screen. This winning achievement display AP displays the total number of prize balls expected to be won between two jackpot plays and the cumulative number of prize balls won since the first jackpot play (1500/3000). In the first (17) 10R jackpot play, 1500 prize balls were won without any misses. Furthermore, the upper left of the display screen displays "TOTAL 04502pt" as the total display TP, which indicates the cumulative number of prize balls won since the power was turned on.

When the 10R jackpot game ends, the game state transitions to the A2 time-saving game state, which makes it easier to win at the (18) special symbol 1 starting hole 231 shown in Figure 117. The display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 119 (e) displays the message RH2 "Please hit right," which instructs the player to continue hitting right, indicating that the game state has transitioned to the time-saving game state.

In addition, in Figure 119 (e), the first of the four reserved special symbols 2 has been consumed, and the second special symbol display device 214 (not shown) has begun displaying the changing special symbol 2. The decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the changing decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special symbol 2, and the 10R jackpot background remains displayed, but in the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of reserved special symbols 2 has decreased by one to "3," and the fourth symbol has begun flashing.

In Figure 119(f), the gaming ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g shown in Figure 85, and the gaming ball that passes through the normal power activation gate 228g enters the second special symbol start port 232. As a result, the number of reserved special symbols 2 increases by one, and in the fourth symbol display area 284 in Figure 119(f), the number of reserved special symbols 2 becomes "4".

In the following Figure 119(g), as a gaming ball passes through the normal power gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 opens wide, one ball enters the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, and the display of special symbol 1 begins to change. As a result, special symbol 2 and special symbol 1 change simultaneously. Both the display of special symbol 1 and the display of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 119(g) begin to flash.

As mentioned above, in the a2 time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of special symbol 1 is extremely short (e.g., 0.2 seconds), and special symbol 1 always results in a small win. Therefore, before the fluctuation display of special symbol 2 ends, special symbol a or special symbol b is displayed frozen on the first special symbol display device 212 (see FIG. 84), not shown, and the display result of special symbol 2, which continues to fluctuate, is discarded. In other words, the display result of special symbol 2, which was a small win symbol in the advance reading, is discarded, and a losing symbol is displayed frozen on the second special symbol display device 214. In the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 119(h), a circle indicating a small win is displayed lit on special symbol 1, and a cross indicating a loss is displayed lit on special symbol 2. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIGS. 119(f) to 119(h) continues to display the 10R jackpot background.

The small win game eventually begins, the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and when the game ball that entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the specific area 234v, the 10R jackpot game begins. The 10R jackpot game that begins here corresponds to the (19) 10R jackpot game shown in Figure 117. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 119(i) displays a 10R jackpot background, and the first round has begun, with one game ball entering the second variable winning opening 235 and 15 prize balls being paid out, as indicated by the display of "+15."

After the jackpot game has begun in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes an additional effect as a jackpot prediction effect. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 119 (j) first starts an in-animation in which translucent button images move from the left and right sides of the display screen to the center. This can create a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the button effect will begin. Note that if the button effect does not begin, the translucent button images do not merge, and an effect display is displayed in which they frame out of the screen.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 119 (k), a pair of translucent button images merge in the center, the button effect begins, a remaining time display bar is displayed along with the button image, and the word "press" is displayed to encourage the player to operate the effect button 136. During this time, the cumulative number of prize balls won increases, and the AP display shows "1697/3000."

When the player then operates the effect button 136, the word "6000pt" appears along with the word "additional" as shown in FIG. 119(l), suggesting that there is a possibility that a total of 6000 prize balls will be won in subsequent jackpot games. This suggests that two subsequent jackpot games, a first (17) 10R jackpot game and a second (19) 10R jackpot game, will be played. Furthermore, the total number of prize balls that can be expected to be won in the prize achievement display AP has been changed to 9000, which is the total number of prize balls that can be expected to be won over a total of six jackpot games (3000 + 6000).

In Figure 119 (m), the second (19) 10R jackpot game continues, and in the following Figure (n), the 10R jackpot game ends, with the message "Be careful not to get addicted. If you forget to remove your card, please stop." displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, warning players to avoid getting addicted and forgetting to remove their prepaid card. Also, in the lower center of the display screen, the AP display is displayed. In the second (19) 10R jackpot game, 1,500 prize balls were won without any misses. Furthermore, in the upper left corner of the display screen, "TOTAL 06004pt" is displayed as the total display TP, which shows the cumulative number of prize balls won since the power was turned on.

When the second (19) 10R jackpot game ends, the game state transitions to the A1 time-limited game state, in which it is difficult to win the (16) special symbol 1 starting hole 231 shown in Figure 117. The display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 119 (o) displays the message RH2 "Please hit right," which instructs players to continue hitting right, indicating that the game state has transitioned to the time-limited game state.

In addition, in Figure 119 (o), of the four reserved special symbols 2, the one that was the second reserved symbol in Figure 119 (b) has been consumed, and the second special symbol display device 214 (not shown) has begun displaying the changing special symbol 2 symbol. The decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the changing decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special symbol 2 symbol, and the 10R jackpot background remains displayed, but in the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of reserved special symbols 2 has decreased by one to "3," and the display of special symbol 2 has begun to flash.

In Figure 119(p), the gaming ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g shown in Figure 85, and the gaming ball that passes through the normal power activation gate 228g enters the second special symbol start port 232. As a result, the number of reserved special symbols 2 increases by one, and in the fourth symbol display area 284 in Figure 119(p), the number of reserved special symbols 2 becomes "4".

In the following Figure 119(q), the shutter member 2311 opens in response to the game ball passing through the normal power operation gate 228g, but this opening is a short opening, there is no winning at the special symbol 1 starting port 231, the variable display of special symbol 2 ends, and special symbol c is displayed as a confirmed symbol on the second special symbol display device 214. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 in Figures 119(p) to (q) continues to display the 10R jackpot background.

The small win game eventually begins, the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and when the game ball that entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the specific area 234v, the first (17) 10R jackpot game of the second round begins. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 119(r) displays a 10R jackpot background, and the first round has begun, with one game ball entering the second variable winning opening 235 and 15 prize balls being paid out, indicated by the display of "+15."

The bonus effect described above was a type of predictive effect related to jackpot play, but we will now explain another example of predictive effect related to jackpot play.

Figure 120 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of a predictive presentation for a jackpot game.

In the example in Figure 120, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning command from the main control unit 300, a pre-read notification process for a jackpot game is executed. The winning command includes the pre-read results of the newly added reserves, and the first sub-control unit 400 stores the pre-read results included in the winning command. Alternatively, the winning command may include the pre-read results of all remaining reserves in addition to the pre-read results of the newly added reserves.

Figure 120(a) differs from Figure 119(a) in the number of reserved special symbol 2 symbols; all other aspects are the same. That is, Figure 120(a) also shows a state in which the special symbol 2 symbol change display has been performed 80 times since the transition to the (16) a1 time-saving play state (RUSH state) in Figure 117. In the a1 time-saving play state, it is difficult to win at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, and the special symbol 2 symbol change display becomes the focus, with a special symbol 2 reserved icon display area 282 being provided to the right of the variable icon display area 280 displaying the variable icon h0. This special symbol 2 reserved icon display area 282 displays three reserved icons: a first reserved icon h21, a second reserved icon h22, and a third reserved icon h23.

In Figure 120 (b), while the three decorative symbols continue to change, one ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232 (see Figure 85), and the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 becomes four. A fourth reserved symbol h24 is additionally displayed in the reserved symbol display area 282 for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 also becomes "4" in the fourth symbol display area 284.

A winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and this winning command includes the results of the look-ahead for the fourth reserved ball. In this example, special symbol c is displayed as a stop symbol in the currently running special symbol 2 variable display, the special symbol 2 variable display that will be displayed after the second reserved ball is consumed, and the special symbol 2 variable display that will be displayed after the newly added fourth reserved ball is consumed. Therefore, by playing the first (17) 10R jackpot game and the second (19) 10R jackpot game three times, it is possible to expect to win 9,000 prize balls. When the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 received the winning command for the third reserved ball, it had decided to perform a look-ahead effect suggesting that 6,000 prize balls could be won. However, when it received the winning command for the fourth reserved ball, it decided to perform a look-ahead effect suggesting that 9,000 prize balls could be won, and changed the temporary stop symbol in the currently running decorative symbol variable display for special symbol 2.

In Figure 120(c), the decorative symbol on the left is temporarily stopped. Here, the "9000 Bonus" decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, suggesting that there is a possibility of winning 9000 prize balls if the jackpot game continues. The temporary stopping of this "9000 Bonus" decorative symbol is a type of pre-reading effect regarding the jackpot game.

In Figure 120(d), the decorative symbol on the right is temporarily stopped. Here too, the "9000 Bonus" decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, creating a reach state.

Figure 120(e) shows the state in which the central decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped and is now being fixed. The central decorative symbol is also a "9000 Bonus" decorative symbol, and three "9000 Bonus" decorative symbols have been lined up. Here, the special symbol 2 display device 214 (not shown) displays the small win symbol for special symbol c as stopped. When three "9000 Bonus" decorative symbols are lined up and fixed, the currently running variable display notifies the player that a small win for special symbol c has been won, and also notifies the player that starting from the small win for special symbol c, the player can expect to win 3000 prize balls three times in two 10R jackpot games. Therefore, the combination of "9000 Bonus"-"9000 Bonus"-"9000 Bonus" decorative symbols is also a combination of decorative symbols that represents a small win for special symbol c, and also corresponds to a pre-reading effect regarding the jackpot game.

In addition, the display of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 also displays a circle, indicating a small win. Also, the variable icon h0 continues to be displayed while the fixed stop is in progress, and disappears when the fixed stop ends.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 120 (f) displays "9000pt jackpot" in the center of the display screen, suggesting that there is a possibility of winning 9000 prize balls. This "9000pt jackpot" display also corresponds to a pre-reading effect regarding jackpot play. In addition, a right-hit display RH1 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, encouraging the player to continue hitting the right button.

Figure 120(A) and subsequent figures are different examples. Figure 120(A) is the same as Figure 120(a), so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but the game state in Figure 120(A) is also the (16)a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state) shown in Figure 117, and special symbol c is displayed as a stopped symbol in the currently running special symbol 2 variable display and the variable display of special symbol 2 that will be displayed after the second reserved symbol is consumed. Therefore, by playing two sets of the first (17) 10R jackpot game and the second (19) 10R jackpot game, it is possible to expect to win 6,000 prize balls. When the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning command for the third reserved symbol, it decides to perform a pre-reading effect suggesting that there is a possibility of winning 6,000 prize balls.

In the following Figure 120(B), the three decorative symbols continue to change, but unlike Figure 120(b), there is no winning at the Special Symbol 2 starting hole 232.

In Figure 120 (C), the decorative symbol on the left is temporarily stopped. Here, the "6000 Bonus" decorative symbol, which suggests the possibility of winning 6000 prize balls, is temporarily stopped. The temporary stopping of this "6000 Bonus" decorative symbol is a type of pre-reading effect related to jackpot play. In this example, there are no new winning combinations before the first of the three decorative symbols is temporarily stopped, and after the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, one ball is won in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, bringing the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 to four. A fourth reserved icon h24 is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is also set to "4" in the fourth symbol display area 284.

A winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and this winning command includes the result of the advance read of the fourth reserved ball. In this example, the advance read of the fourth reserved ball results in the special symbol c being stopped and displayed, meaning that 9,000 prize balls can be won, but because the decorative symbol for "6,000 bonus" has already been temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, this is an example in which it was too late to change the temporarily stopped symbol.

In Figure 120 (D), the decorative symbol on the right is temporarily stopped. Here too, the "6000 Bonus" decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, creating a reach state.

Figure 120 (E) shows the state in which the central decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped and is now being fixed. The central decorative symbol is also a "6000 Bonus" decorative symbol, and three "6000 Bonus" decorative symbols have been lined up. Here, the special symbol 2 display device 214 (not shown) displays the small win symbol for special symbol c as stopped. When three "6000 Bonus" decorative symbols are lined up and fixed, the currently running variable display notifies the player that a small win for special symbol c has been won, and also notifies the player that starting from the small win for special symbol c, the player can expect to win 3000 prize balls twice in two 10R jackpot games. Therefore, the decorative symbol combination of "6000 Bonus" - "6000 Bonus" - "6000 Bonus" is also a decorative symbol combination that represents a small win for special symbol c, and also corresponds to a pre-reading effect regarding the jackpot game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 120 (F) displays "6000pt jackpot" in the center of the display screen, suggesting that there is a possibility of winning 6000 prize balls. This "6000pt jackpot" display also corresponds to a pre-reading effect regarding jackpot play. In addition, a right-hit display RH1 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, encouraging the player to continue hitting the right button.

Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background (10R jackpot background) indicating that a 10R jackpot game is in progress. The jackpot game in this case corresponds to the (17) 10R jackpot game shown in Figure 117. Eventually, this 10R jackpot game ends, and the game state transitions to the a2 time-saving game state, which makes it easier to win the (18) special symbol 1 starting hole 231 shown in Figure 117.

In Figure 120 (G), the gaming ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g shown in Figure 85, and the gaming ball that passed through the normal power activation gate 228g enters the second special symbol start port 232. As a result, the number of reserved special symbols 2 increases by one, and in the fourth symbol display area 284 in Figure 120 (G), the number of reserved special symbols 2 becomes "4." Note that the acquisition achievement display AP is displayed in the lower center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 120 (G). The acquisition achievement display AP here is 1501/6000, and in the first (17) 10R jackpot game, 1500 prize balls were acquired without any misses.

In the following Figure 120 (H), as a gaming ball passes through the normal operation gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 opens wide, one ball enters the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, and the display of special symbol 1 begins to change. As a result, special symbol 2 and special symbol 1 change simultaneously. Both the display of special symbol 1 and the display of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 120 (H) begin to flash.

As mentioned above, in the a2 time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of special symbol 1 is extremely short (for example, 0.2 seconds), and special symbol 1 always results in a small win. Therefore, before the fluctuation display of special symbol 2 ends, special symbol a or special symbol b is displayed frozen on the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) (see Figure 84). The display result of special symbol 2, which continues to fluctuate, is discarded, and a losing symbol is displayed frozen on the second special symbol display device 214. In the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 120 (I), a circle symbol indicating a small win is lit on the display of special symbol 1, and a cross symbol indicating a loss is lit on the display of special symbol 2. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 in Figures 119 (G) to (I) continues to display the 10R jackpot background.

The small win game eventually begins, the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and when the game ball that entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the specific area 234v, the 10R jackpot game begins. The 10R jackpot game that begins here corresponds to the (19) 10R jackpot game shown in Figure 117. After the jackpot game begins, the decorative pattern display device 208 executes an additional effect as a jackpot prediction effect. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 120 (J), first, an in-animation begins in which semi-transparent button images move from the left and right sides of the display screen to the center.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 120 (K), a pair of translucent button images merge in the center, the button effect begins, a remaining time display bar is displayed along with the button image, and the word "press" is displayed to encourage the player to operate the effect button 136. During this time, the cumulative number of prize balls won increases, and the AP display shows "1697/6000."

When the player then operates the effect button 136, the word "3000pt" is displayed along with the word "Additional" as shown in Figure 120 (L). These 3000 additional shots are the amount added to the amount that entered the special symbol 2 starting slot 232 after the "6000 Bonus" decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. In other words, they are the 3000 shots in the fourth reserve that were not enough to display the 9000 bonus. In this way, the pre-reading effect that could not be executed during the special symbol symbol change in which the small win symbol that triggers the first (17) 10R jackpot game is displayed is executed as an additional pre-reading effect (additional effect) during the second (19) 10R jackpot game. This additional pre-reading effect (additional effect) may also be executed during the first (17) 10R jackpot game. Additionally, in the win achievement display AP in Figure 120 (L), the total number of prize balls that can be expected to be won is changed to 9000, which is the total number of prize balls that can be expected to be won during a total of six jackpot games (6000 + 3000). After this, the decorative pattern display device 208 returns to the 10R jackpot background, and the jackpot game continues.

As explained above, it is possible to predict the reserved status of Special Chart 2 and execute predictive effects (additional effects, 6000 shot patterns, etc.).

In addition, even if the prediction result is a winning combination, if the variation is Special Chart 2, which follows the variation that won Special Chart C, the display result of Special Chart 2 will be discarded, restricting the prediction effect. In other words, a maximum of 9,000 balls can be announced: 3,000 balls for the variation in question + 3,000 balls for the second reserve + 3,000 balls for the fourth reserve.

In addition, the predictive effect that notifies 9000 shots while the symbols on Special Chart 2 are changing (such as the 9000-shot symbol stopping as shown in Figures 120(c) to (e), or the display of "9000pt jackpot" at the start of small jackpot play as shown in Figure 120(f)) can be executed when the fourth reserved prize is won and a specified condition is met (for example, before the specific period from the start of the first small jackpot winning change to the start of the temporary stopping of the decorative symbol during that change has elapsed). Because the predictive effect execution processing cannot be completed in time, the timing of the fourth reserved prize is limited to before the specific period has elapsed.

In addition, even if 9,000 shots cannot be announced during the pattern change of Special Chart 2 (a win occurs after the specified time has elapsed), a re-evaluation will be made when the pattern change stops, and 9,000 shots can be announced during a winning game, as shown in the denominator of the AP achievement display in Figure 120 (r). This increases the frequency of 9,000 shots being announced.

Furthermore, there may be cases where the pattern for Special 1 does not change, and the display result is not discarded due to a change in Special 2, which is scheduled to be discarded, resulting in a win. In this case, it will be treated as a new win. Specifically, if a 9000-shot jackpot is being displayed, that display will end and a new 3000-shot display will be executed.

According to the above description,
"A first pattern display means [for example, a first special pattern display device 212] that can execute a variable display of a first pattern [for example, special pattern 1] based on the detection of a game ball by a first detection means [for example, a ball detection sensor 2312 of the special pattern 1 starting port (variable) 231],
A second pattern display means (e.g., a second special pattern display device 214) that can execute a variable display of a second pattern (e.g., special pattern 2) based on the detection of a game ball by a second detection means (e.g., a second start port sensor (not shown) of the special pattern 2 start port 232),
A reservation storage means (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) capable of storing the right to perform the variable display of the second symbol as a reservation up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4);
A presentation means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of executing a pre-reading presentation for the reserved game;
A gaming machine equipped with
The earliest reserved item stored at the start of the variable display of the second pattern that results in a certain winning combination [for example, a small winning combination of special pattern c] (hereinafter referred to as the "first reserved item").
) [For example, the first hold] is not executed, and the read-ahead effect for the hold stored next to the first hold (hereinafter referred to as the "second hold") [For example, the second hold] is executed instead (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [For example, the judgment in step S603 in FIG. 118 is Yes].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

The first hold may result in a different outcome from the predicted outcome depending on the game's progress and game state. With this gaming machine, by not executing a predictive effect for the first hold, it is possible to prevent incorrect information from being given to the player.

Also,
"The first reservation in the first case is a pertinent reservation,
The second reservation in the first case is also a pertinent reservation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Note that the first reservation in the first case may be a losing reservation. In other words, no pre-reading is performed on the first reservation in the first case.

Also,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212] is capable of executing the variable display of the first symbol [for example, special symbol 1] during the variable display of the second symbol [for example, special symbol 2] [for example, Figure 119 (g), Figure 120 (H)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also,
"The second symbol display means [for example, the second special symbol display device 214], when a symbol indicating a win is displayed in a static manner in the variable display of the first symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second symbol, displays a symbol indicating a loss in the variable display of the second symbol that was being executed in a static manner [for example, discards the symbol in 64(b)] [for example, Fig. 119(h), Fig. 120(I)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

With this gaming machine, even though the results of the pre-reading would indicate that a symbol indicating a win should be displayed in the variable display of the first symbol that is executed when the first reserved symbol is consumed, in reality, a symbol indicating a loss is displayed in the variable display. Therefore, by not executing the pre-reading effect for the first reserved symbol, it is possible to prevent incorrect information from being given to the player.

Also,
"A normal pattern display means [for example, a normal pattern display device 210] capable of displaying the normal pattern variations;
A first game area (for example, an area where a game ball hit from the left can be detected (a central area or a left area)),
A second game area (for example, an area where a game ball hit to the right can be detected (right side area)),
A third detection means for detecting a game ball [for example, a general starting hole sensor (not shown) for detecting that a ball has entered the general starting hole 228];
A fourth detection means for detecting a gaming ball (for example, a gate passage sensor (not shown) for detecting that a gaming ball has passed through the normally-operated gate 228g);
A first variable means (e.g., an electric tube (shutter member 2311))
a second variable means (e.g., a second attacker (shutter member 2351));
A specific area (e.g., specific area 234v) through which the game ball can pass when the second variable means is activated;
A game control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states;
The first detection means [for example, the ball detection sensor 2312 of the special drawing 1 starting hole (variable) 231] is a detection means capable of detecting a game ball launched into the second game area,
The second detection means [for example, the second starting hole sensor (not shown) of the special drawing 2 starting hole 232] is a detection means capable of detecting a game ball launched into the second game area,
The third detection means (for example, a general starting hole sensor (not shown) that detects that a ball has entered the general starting hole 228) is a detection means that can detect a game ball launched into the first game area,
The fourth detection means (for example, a gate passage sensor (not shown) that detects that a gaming ball has passed through the normally-operated gate 228g) is a detection means that can detect a gaming ball launched into the second gaming area,
The first variable means is a means provided in the second game area,
The second variable means is a means provided in the second game area,
The plurality of game states include at least a non-time-saving game state [for example, (11) normal game state shown in FIG. 117], a first time-saving game state [for example, (14) or (16) a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state) in which it is difficult to win a prize shown in FIG. 117], and a second time-saving game state [for example, (18) a2 time-saving game state in which it is easy to win a prize shown in FIG. 117],
The non-time-reduction gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to launch a gaming ball into the first gaming area,
The first time-saving gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to launch a gaming ball into the second gaming area,
The second time-saving gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to launch a gaming ball into the second gaming area,
The normal symbol display means is configured to start a variable display of the normal symbol when the third detection means detects a gaming ball,
The first variable means [for example, the electric chute (shutter member 2311)] is a means that operates in a first mode [for example, a mode in which the shutter member 2311 is fully opened] in which the first detection means can detect the game ball when the fourth detection means detects the game ball in the second time-shortened game state,
The first variable means is a means that, when the fourth detection means [for example, a gate passage sensor (not shown) that detects that a game ball has passed through the normal power operation gate 228g] detects a game ball in the first time-shortened game state [for example, a1 time-shortened game state (RUSH state)], operates in a second mode [for example, a mode in which the shutter member 2311 only short-opens] in which it is more difficult for the first detection means to detect a game ball than in the first mode,
The first variable means is a means that, when a symbol indicating a win is displayed in a stopped state in the variable display of the normal symbol, operates in a third mode [for example, a mode in which the shutter member 2311 is in an open state (5000 ms)] in which the first detection means can more easily detect a gaming ball than when the first variable means is not in operation,
The specific area is an area where a big win game starts when a game ball passes through in a small win game.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The second special symbol display means may be configured to stop and display (e.g., discard as in Figure 116(b)) a symbol indicating a win (e.g., a small win symbol) in the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, and stop and display (e.g., discard as in Figure 116(b)) a symbol indicating a loss (e.g., a loss symbol) in the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed.

Next, we will provide a detailed description of the variable display effects performed by the decorative pattern display device 208.

Even in this gaming machine of the second embodiment, when in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state (11) shown in FIG. 117), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a changing display of the decorative pattern on the normal map in response to the changing display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210, and a reach effect may be performed. There are four types of reach effects: normal reach effect, super (SP) reach effect, special super (SPSP) reach effect, and full rotation reach.

Figure 121 shows the normal symbol reach symbol determination table, which determines the type of reach symbol in the variable display of normal decorative symbols during normal game play.

The normal reach symbol determination table shown in Figure 121 is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400.

Of the decorative symbols 1 to 10 shown in Figure 87(c), decorative symbols 1 to 8 are used as decorative symbols for regular reels. Odd-numbered decorative symbols are more likely to give the player an advantage than even-numbered decorative symbols, and among the odd-numbered decorative symbols, decorative symbol 7 generally has the highest potential.

As explained using Figure 117, in the gaming machine of the second embodiment, left-handed play is recommended in normal play mode (non-time-saving play mode), and the gameplay is centered around the display of a changing normal game ball when the game ball enters the normal game ball starting slot 228. When a normal game ball is won, the shutter member 2311 shown in Figure 85 is activated, and the game ball enters the special game ball 1 starting slot 231. As shown in Figure 115(c), after the jackpot play ends, there is a 20/100 probability of transitioning to the a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state), but there is an 80/100 probability of returning to the normal game state. Therefore, the display of the changing normal game ball merely triggers the drawing for special game ball 1, and simply stopping the normal game ball does not indicate whether the game will transition to the a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state). For this reason, even in the case of a normal winning combination, combinations of three odd-numbered decorative symbols that players would expect (for example, decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 or decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7) are not displayed as stops, and in the case of a normal winning combination, combinations of three even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 or decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6) are displayed as stops. Therefore, players who know this will realize that the current normal symbol variation display is a miss when an odd-numbered decorative symbol temporarily stops during a reach performance, which will ruin the excitement of the game. For this reason, the system predicts whether the normal symbol will be held and changes the reach symbol depending on the results of a preliminary determination of the next normal symbol variation.

As a result of the advance determination of the next change in the normal map, in addition to whether the normal map is a hit or a miss, the change pattern (type of reach effect) is also determined in advance.

As will be described later, the normal map reach symbol determination table shown in Figure 121 is not used when the current normal map variable display is a hit, or when an SPSP reach or full rotation reach is executed in the current normal map decorative pattern variable display, but is used only when a normal reach miss or an SP reach miss is executed in the current normal map decorative pattern variable display. In the normal map reach symbol determination table shown in Figure 121, for example, if the pre-determination result of the next normal map variation is a normal reach miss, in the current normal map decorative pattern variable display, even numbered decorative symbols (decoration 2, decoration 4, decoration 6, decoration 8) are temporarily stopped as reach symbols with a selection rate of 95%, and predetermined odd numbered decorative symbols (decoration 1, decoration 3, decoration 5) excluding decoration 7 are temporarily stopped as reach symbols with a selection rate of 5%. Also, if the pre-determined result of the next change of the normal symbol is a full rotation reach, in the display of the currently ongoing change of the decorative symbols of the normal symbol, even numbered decorative symbols (decoration 2, decoration 4, decoration 6, decoration 8) are temporarily stopped as reach symbols with a selection rate of 50%, and predetermined odd numbered decorative symbols excluding decoration 7 (decoration 1, decoration 3, decoration 5) are temporarily stopped as reach symbols with a selection rate of 50%. In either case, decoration 7 is never temporarily stopped as a reach symbol.

In addition, when a reach effect that does not result in a win is executed in the display of the decorative patterns on the normal map, and the pending next change is a win (SP reach (win), SPSP reach (win), full rotation reach (win)), it is more likely that a reach effect will be executed in which a specified odd-numbered decorative pattern excluding 7 (decoration 1, decoration 3, decoration 5) is in reach in the display of the decorative patterns on the normal map (for example, when a reach effect is executed in which the next change is an SP reach, the selection rate is 25% if the pending next change is a win, and 10% if it is a miss) than when a reach effect that does not result in a win is executed in the display of the decorative patterns on the normal map, and the pending next change is not a win (normal reach (miss), SP reach (miss), SPSP reach (miss)).

In addition, the expected probability of winning a regular symbol may be varied among the predetermined odd-numbered decorative symbols (decoration 1, decoration 3, decoration 5) excluding 7. For example, the expected probability of winning a regular symbol may be highest for decoration 3, second highest for decoration 5, and lowest for decoration 1.

In addition, while the normal map reach symbol determination table shown in Figure 121 is based on the results of a preliminary determination of the next change of the normal map, it may also be based on the results of a preliminary determination of all reserved symbols on the normal map, not just the next change. In this case, if a reach effect that does not result in a win in the display of decorative symbols on the normal map's changes and any of the reserved symbols on the normal map wins, it is more likely that a reach effect will be executed in which a specified odd-numbered decorative symbol (decoration 1, decoration 3, decoration 5) excluding 7 is in a reach state in the display of decorative symbols on the normal map that is currently being executed, compared to when a reach effect that does not result in a win in the display of decorative symbols on the normal map's changes and none of the reserved symbols on the normal map win.

Figure 122 shows the special chart 2 reach symbol determination table, which determines the type of reach symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol on special chart 2 in the a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state).

The special symbol 2 reach symbol determination table shown in Figure 122 is also stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In the a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state), as shown in Figures 119(a) and 119(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 may display a changing display of the decorative symbol of special symbol 2 in response to the changing display of special symbol 2 on the second special symbol display device 214. Note that if a 10R jackpot game continues, the 10R jackpot background may continue to be displayed, and the changing display of the decorative symbol of special symbol 2 may not be displayed.

Reach effects may also occur when the decorative patterns on Special Chart 2 change display. There are four types of reach effects: normal reach effects, super (SP) reach effects, special super (SPSP) reach effects, and full rotation reach effects.

In the currently displayed variable display of Special Chart 2, in the event of a miss, decoration 7 may be temporarily stopped as a reach symbol with a 1% selection probability only for SPSP reach misses. In the event of a miss, even-numbered decorative symbols (decorations 2, 4, 6, and 8) are more likely to temporarily stop as reach symbols than predetermined odd-numbered decorative symbols excluding decoration 7 (decorations 1, 3, and 5). On the other hand, in the event of a win on Special Chart C, which is a small win symbol that triggers a 10R jackpot, and an SPSP reach or full rotation reach is performed, predetermined odd-numbered decorative symbols excluding decoration 7 are more likely to temporarily stop as reach symbols than even-numbered decorative symbols. Therefore, when considering the Special Chart 2 reach symbol determination table shown in Figure 122 as a whole, it can be said that a reach effect in which predetermined odd-numbered decorative symbols excluding decoration 7 temporarily stop has a higher expectation of a small win on Special Chart 2 than a reach effect in which even-numbered decorative symbols temporarily stop.

In addition, if you win on special symbol d, which is the small win symbol that triggers a 2R jackpot, decoration 7 will not temporarily stop as a reach symbol, but if you win on special symbol c, which is the small win symbol that triggers a 10R jackpot, decoration 7 may temporarily stop as a reach symbol. Therefore, if you win on a reach where decoration 7 temporarily stops, it is confirmed that you have won on special symbol c, and you can expect to win 3,000 prize balls. Also, in a reach performance where decoration 7 temporarily stops, the chances of winning on special symbol c are high.

Figure 123 is a flowchart showing the decorative pattern determination process for regular tiles in the second embodiment.

The decorative pattern determination process shown in Figure 123 is executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. A command to start changing the normal pattern is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 from the main control unit 300. When the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command to start changing the normal pattern, it starts the decorative pattern determination process shown in Figure 123.

In step S701, it is determined whether the current game state is a state in which the decorative pattern display device 208 can display a variable display of the decorative pattern on the normal map in response to the variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210. For example, if the game is in a normal game state (non-time-saving game state), the variable display of the decorative pattern on the normal map can be displayed, and the process proceeds to step S702.

In step S702, it is determined whether a reach effect will be executed in the variable display of the decorative symbols on the regular symbol that has started. If a reach effect is not executed, a non-reach effect is determined (step S703), and the decorative symbol determination process ends. In step S703, a predetermined combination of losing decorative symbols (for example, a barrage) is selected with equal selection probability.

When a reach effect is to be executed, it is determined whether or not a normal map is on hold (step S704). If a normal map is on hold, the process proceeds to step S704, where it is determined whether or not the current normal map variation display is a winning variation display. If the current normal map variation display is a losing variation display, it is next determined whether an SPSP reach effect or a full rotation reach effect will be executed in the decorative pattern variation display of the started normal map (step S705). If not, reach pattern determination 1 is performed using the normal map reach pattern determination table shown in Figure 121 (step S706), and this decorative pattern determination process ends. In other words, as described above, a reach pattern is selected using the normal map reach pattern determination table shown in Figure 121 only in the case of a normal reach miss or an SP reach miss.

If there are no reserved normal symbols, if the current normal symbol variation display is a winning variation display, or if a high-expectation reach effect such as an SPSP reach effect or a full rotation reach effect is executed, reach symbol determination 2 is performed (step S707), and this decorative symbol determination process ends. In step S707, a predetermined even-numbered decorative symbol is selected with equal selection probability. Therefore, if a reach effect of an SPSP reach effect or higher is executed, a reach effect with an odd-numbered decorative symbol (for example, "Decoration 1" - "Decoration 1") will not be executed.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S701 that the current game state is not one in which the variable display of the decorative pattern on the normal symbol can be executed, the process proceeds to step S709. If the state is one in which the variable display of the decorative pattern on the special symbol 2 can be executed (for example, the a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state)), the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, it is determined whether the variable display of the decorative pattern on the special symbol 2 can be executed. For example, if the state is the a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state) and the 10R jackpot background is not being continuously displayed, a reach symbol determination 3 is performed using the special symbol 2 reach symbol determination table shown in FIG. 122 (step S710), and this decorative symbol determination process ends.

As explained above, in the normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode), odd-numbered symbols do not line up in the normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode) during the normal game mode (decorative symbol variation display), and odd-numbered symbols do not result in a win. Also, in the normal game mode, odd-numbered symbols other than "7" can result in a reach. In other words, in the normal game mode, when an odd-numbered symbol reach is executed during the normal game mode, a miss is confirmed, but it suggests that there is a high probability of the next variation. This creates anticipation for the next variation, preventing the player from being disappointed by that variation. As mentioned above, it is also possible to suggest that there is a high probability of the next variation, not just the next variation.

Furthermore, in the normal game state, when the normal symbol changes direction, the flow from step S706 to step S708 shown in FIG. 123 prevents odd symbols from reaching the ready state (forming a ready state) in high-expectation reach directions (SPSP reach or higher). If a reach with high expectation (for example, a long change time) is executed even though a miss is confirmed, and an odd symbol is reached, this could dampen the excitement of the game. Therefore, in step S708, an even symbol is reached.

On the other hand, in the variable presentation of Special Chart 2 (variable display of decorative symbols) in the time-saving play state (RUSH state), both even and odd symbols can win. Depending on the play state, odd symbols may line up, so in the normal play state, odd symbols do not line up and odd symbols do not result in a win. This rule makes it difficult to notice, and when you do notice it, it gives the person who does notice it a sense of superiority.

Also, as shown in the special chart 2 reach symbol determination table in Figure 122, if you hit with the decorative symbol "7", you will always hit with special symbol C, so 3000 shots are confirmed. Also, odd-numbered symbols are more likely to result in 3000 shots than even-numbered symbols.

According to the above description,
"A first pattern display means [for example, a general pattern display device 210] capable of displaying a variable first pattern [for example, a general pattern];
A second pattern display means [for example, a special pattern 2 display device 214] capable of executing variable display of a second pattern [for example, a special pattern 2];
A first detection means for detecting a game ball [for example, a general starting hole sensor (not shown) for detecting that a ball has entered the general starting hole 228];
A second detection means for detecting a game ball [for example, a second starting hole sensor (not shown) of the special drawing 2 starting hole 232];
A game control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states;
A presentation means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208),
A gaming machine equipped with
The plurality of game states include at least a first game state [for example, (11) normal game state shown in FIG. 117] and a second game state [for example, (14) or (16) a1 time-saving game state (RUSH state) in which it is difficult to win a prize shown in FIG. 117],
the first symbol display means is configured to start a variable display of the first symbol when the first detection means detects a gaming ball in the first gaming state;
the second symbol display means is configured to start a variable display of the second symbol when the second detection means detects a gaming ball in the second gaming state,
The presentation means is capable of executing a first variation presentation corresponding to the variation display of the first symbol in the first game state [for example, a variation display of a decorative symbol of a normal symbol],
In the second game state, the performance means is capable of executing a second variation performance corresponding to the variation display of the second pattern [for example, a variation display of the decorative pattern of special pattern 2],
The first variable effect is an effect in which a pattern [for example, a decorative pattern] is displayed in a variable manner, and when three of the same patterns are displayed in a stopped state, a winning result is notified, and when three of the same patterns are not displayed in a stopped state, a losing result is notified.
The second variable effect is an effect in which a pattern [for example, a decorative pattern] is displayed in a variable manner, and when three of the same patterns are displayed in a stopped state, a winning result is notified, and when three of the same patterns are not displayed in a stopped state, a losing result is notified.
In the second variable effect [for example, variable display of the decorative pattern of special pattern 2] in the second game state [for example, a1 time-shortened game state (RUSH state)], there are cases where three first-type patterns [for example, even-numbered decorative patterns] are lined up and stopped [for example, as shown in FIG. 122, a small win at SP reach or higher] and cases where three second-type patterns [for example, odd-numbered decorative patterns] are lined up and stopped [for example, as shown in FIG. 122, a small win at SP reach or higher], while in the first variable effect [for example, variable display of the decorative pattern of normal patterns] in the first game state [for example, normal game state], there are cases where three first-type patterns are lined up and stopped, but there are no cases where three second-type patterns are lined up and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

For example, if a player has the impression that they will definitely receive a great benefit when three of the second type of symbols are displayed in a row, but depending on the game situation, even if three of the second type of symbols are displayed in a row, this will not necessarily mean that they will receive a great benefit. This will prevent the player from having high expectations and prevent their interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, whether it is the first variation effect or the second variation effect, there are cases where three symbols line up and stop and are displayed after a reach effect, and cases where the reach effect is performed but the three symbols do not line up and stop and are displayed.

Also,
"The right to display the variable first symbol [for example, a normal symbol] is reserved and memorized up to a predetermined upper limit number [for example, 4] [for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300].
In the first variable performance in the first game state [for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern of a normal figure], a reach performance [for example, a normal reach, an SP reach, an SPSP reach, a full rotation reach] may be executed,
The reach performance includes a reach performance in which the first type of symbol is in a reach state and a reach performance in which the second type of symbol is in a reach state,
When the reach effect that does not result in a win in the first variable performance [for example, variable display of a normal decorative pattern] in the first gaming state [for example, normal gaming state] is executed and any of the holds stored in the hold storage means becomes a win, it is more likely that a reach effect in which the second type of pattern [for example, odd decorative pattern] becomes a reach effect will be executed in the first variable performance being executed than when the reach effect that does not result in a win in the first variable performance in the first gaming state is executed and none of the holds stored in the hold storage means becomes a win,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Even if the current pattern changes are not promising and interest in the game tends to decrease, there may be hope for one of the reserved symbols stored in the reserved symbol storage means, which may increase interest in the game.

The reach state may also be a state that suggests that the next reserved symbol stored in the reserved symbol storage means to be consumed has a high probability of winning (for example, the normal reach symbol determination table shown in FIG. 121).

That is,
"The right to display the variable first symbol [for example, a normal symbol] is reserved and memorized up to a predetermined upper limit number [for example, 4] [for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300].
In the first variable performance in the first game state [for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern of a normal figure], a reach performance [for example, a normal reach, an SP reach, an SPSP reach, a full rotation reach] may be executed,
The reach performance includes a reach performance in which the first type of symbol is in a reach state and a reach performance in which the second type of symbol is in a reach state,
In the case where the reach effect that does not result in a win in the first variable performance [for example, a variable display of a normal decorative pattern] in the first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state] is executed and the first variable performance executed after the first variable performance is a win, it is more likely that a reach effect in which the second type of pattern [for example, an odd decorative pattern] is in a reach state will be executed in the first variable performance being executed [for example, a normal reach effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 121] than in the case where the reach effect that does not result in a win in the first variable performance in the first gaming state is executed and the first variable performance executed after the first variable performance is not a win,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Furthermore, the first variable presentation in the first gaming state may be characterized in that a reach state [e.g., "Decoration 7" - "Decoration 7"] is not achieved by a specific symbol [e.g., a symbol of decoration 7] among the second type of symbols.

Also,
"The first variable effect in the first game state [for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern of the normal symbol] does not result in a reach state depending on the second type of symbol when a specific reach effect [for example, a reach effect of SPSP reach or higher] is executed [for example, the processing of step S708 shown in FIG. 123].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

According to this game machine, when a specific reach performance is a reach performance with high expectations, the expectation of the player who sees the specific reach performance naturally increases, so that the reach state is not reached by the second type of symbols so as not to further increase the expectation of the player.

In addition, depending on the first type of symbol, a reach state may occur.

Next, we will explain the presentation modes of the gaming machine in the second embodiment.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment also has four types of presentation modes as explained using Figure 113(a). That is, there is a default presentation mode A (default mode) in which the player has not performed any mode setting operations; presentation mode B (premium up mode) in which premium presentations are executed more frequently than presentation mode A; presentation mode C (advance notification mode) in which advance notification presentations, which are a type of advance notification presentation, can be executed; and presentation mode D (advance notification chance mode) in which the expectation of advance notification presentations is increased. The default mode is the mode that is set when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on after clearing the RAM.

In the second advance notification effect of the effect mode C, a prediction is made when a normal or special 2 win is made, and as shown in the determination table in Figure 113 (d), if the expectation level is high (if it is at or above SP reach), a notification is given by sound (specific sound) and light (red light). On the other hand, in the first advance notification effect, there is no output from the speaker 120 and only light (white light) is used, and it is treated the same as the default for the hold icon (generally the expectation level is low, but in rare cases, a win may occur).

In all four of these presentation modes, a pending icon change presentation and a variable icon change presentation are performed. The pending icon change presentation is a pre-reading presentation that changes the display mode of the pending icon when a win is won or when the pending icon shifts, depending on the pre-reading results, to suggest the likelihood of a win. The variable icon change presentation is a presentation that changes the display mode of the variable icon to suggest the likelihood of a win in the currently ongoing pattern change display.

Figure 124 is a table showing the display mode of the hold icon or variable icon and the expected hit rate in each presentation mode of the second embodiment. The expected hit rate refers to the expected small hit rate for special symbols, and the expected hit rate for regular symbols. Therefore, the hold icon referred to here includes both the hold icon representing the hold of a special symbol and the hold icon representing the hold of a regular symbol, and the variable icon referred to here includes both the variable icon representing the currently occurring pattern change for a special symbol and the variable icon representing the currently occurring pattern change for a regular symbol. Furthermore, the expectation rate also refers to the reliability of the preview.

The default color is white, and this normal color display mode is the default display mode. The winning probability is 10% for Presentation Mode A and Presentation Mode B, but 1% for Presentation Mode C and Presentation Mode D.

The probability of blue being selected is 18% in presentation mode A and 15% in presentation mode B, but 100% (guaranteed win) in presentation modes C and D. In presentation modes C and D, blue, which has the lowest expectation in presentation mode A, the default presentation mode, or presentation mode B (excluding the default (white)), has the highest expectation (although there are ties). In other words, the expectation level increases depending on the mode, and the ranking of expectation levels changes. Furthermore, in presentation modes C and D, the probability of blue being selected is lower than the probability of blue being selected in other modes. Furthermore, in presentation mode C, the probability of blue being selected is lower than the probability of purple, red, or gold being selected. Therefore, when an advance notification presentation is executed, the final display mode is more likely to be purple than blue, more likely to be red than blue, and more likely to be gold than blue. Furthermore, in presentation mode D, the probability of blue being selected is lower than the probability of green being selected, and lower than the probability of red being selected. Therefore, in presentation mode C or presentation mode D, when a blue hold icon or variable icon appears, it is likely to change to another color during a shift movement, etc. In presentation mode C and presentation mode D, the expected probability of blue is 100%, while the expected probability of rainbow is also 100%, and in presentation mode D only, the expected probability of gold is also 100%. Even within the same 100%, the selection rate may be lowest for blue or lowest for rainbow, or in presentation mode D, rainbow and gold may be lowest, or lowest for rainbow, followed by gold, and then blue.

Green is a color that appears 20% in presentation modes A and B, but does not appear in presentation mode C, and 35% in presentation mode D.

Purple is a color that does not appear in presentation modes A, B, and D, but has a 30% chance of appearing in presentation mode C. This purple color only appears in presentation mode C. When the advance notification presentation is executed, icons of a color with a winning probability of purple or higher are more likely to appear.

Red is 45% in presentation mode A, 40% in presentation mode B, 50% in presentation mode C, and 90% in presentation mode D.

Gold is 75% in presentation mode A, 70% in presentation mode B, 80% in presentation mode C, and 100% (guaranteed win) in presentation mode D.

High-expectation colors such as red and gold do not change their relative expectation rankings even when the mode is changed. Specifically, in any presentation mode, gold has a higher expectation than red, but red never has a higher expectation than gold.

As explained above, the expected degree of a pending or variable icon in presentation mode A (default mode) is in the following order: default < blue < green < red < gold < rainbow. On the other hand, the expected degree of a pending or variable icon in presentation mode C (advance notification mode) is in the following order: default < purple < red < gold < blue = rainbow. In presentation mode C (advance notification mode), blue, which has low expected degree, is ranked highest, but the ranks of icons with high expected degrees do not switch (for example, red and gold). By ranking blue, which has low expected degree, highest, the frequency of false icon changes is reduced, excessive excitement is suppressed, and players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, because the ranks of icons with high expected degrees do not switch, players are not confused. Furthermore, the sense of expectation that players remember as high expected degrees is not damaged.

In addition, some colors will not be displayed depending on the presentation mode. For example, purple will not be displayed in presentation mode A (default mode), but purple may be displayed in presentation mode C (advance notification mode). By doing this, it is possible to increase the variety of presentations while preventing a decrease in the expectation level of each icon and preventing a deviation from the expectation level expected by the player.

Also, in Presentation Mode C (Advance Notification Mode), when an icon is displayed, it is more likely to be purple or higher.

Figure 125(a) is a table showing a modified version of the table shown in Figure 124. Below, only the distinctive features of the table shown in Figure 124 will be explained.

The probability of blue being displayed is 18% in presentation mode A and 15% in presentation mode B, but the display mode (color) is guaranteed to change in presentation modes C and D. In the table shown in Figure 124, the change in display mode (color) was determined by lottery, with no conditions for guaranteed change. However, in this modified example, when a new hold icon or variable icon in a blue display mode appears in presentation mode C or D, it will always change to a different display mode. The change here refers to a change to a display mode that increases the level of expectation, and will never change to a display mode that decreases the level of expectation. The timing of the display mode change may also change immediately after appearance, or may change during a shift movement. Furthermore, if the hold icon is in a blue display mode, the hold icon in a blue display mode will change to a different display mode before the pattern variable display corresponding to that hold icon ends. If the variable icon is in a blue display mode, the variable icon in a blue display mode will change to a different display mode before the current pattern variable display corresponding to that variable icon ends.

Also, the probability of green being selected is 23% in presentation mode A and 20% in presentation mode B, but 100% (guaranteed win) in presentation modes C and D. Also, in presentation modes C and D, the probability of green being selected is as low as that of rainbow or gold, with purple and red being selected more frequently. For this reason, in presentation mode C or D, when a blue hold icon or variable icon appears, it is likely to jump over green and change to a color two or more levels higher (purple or red).

Even in this variant, in presentation mode C, the rate at which blue is selected is lower than the rates at which purple, red, or gold are selected. Furthermore, because blue is a guaranteed change, when an advance notification presentation is executed, the final display mode is more likely to be purple than blue, more likely to be red than blue, and more likely to be gold than blue. Furthermore, because blue is not ultimately displayed, it can be said that green or rainbow, which have a 100% chance of winning, are more likely to be displayed. Additionally, when an advance notification presentation is executed, it can be said that an icon of a color with a chance of winning equal to or higher than purple is more likely to be displayed.

Furthermore, in presentation mode D, the rate at which blue is selected is lower than the rates at which purple or red are selected. Because blue is a guaranteed change even in presentation mode D, when the advance notification presentation is executed, the final display mode is more likely to be purple than blue, and more likely to be red than blue. Furthermore, because blue is not ultimately displayed, it can be said that green, gold, or rainbow colors, which have a 100% expected probability of winning, are more likely to be displayed.

As explained above, in presentation mode A (default mode), the blue icon may or may not change after it is displayed, but in presentation mode C (advance notification mode), it will always change to one of the colors after it is displayed.

Figure 125(b) is a table showing a variation of the table shown in Figure 124 that is different from the variation shown in Figure 125(a).

In this variant, for example, the icon may change from the default (white) to another color, or it may change to a character (kimono). If the icon changes to a character (kimono), any further changes will not be a color change, but rather the character's clothing will change so as to achieve the expected winning probability shown in Figure 125 (b).

The default outfit is a kimono, with other outfit display styles available: pajamas, school uniform, T-shirt, and aloha shirt.

In this variant, the pajamas, which had a low expectation level in presentation mode A, have the highest expectation level in presentation mode C and presentation mode D. Note that the presentation of this character change may be performed only in specific presentation modes.

As explained above, one type of display mode for pending or variable icons is a character icon, and when it changes to a character icon, or when a character icon is displayed and then changes again, the display mode changes to something other than a color change. Specifically, the character's clothing changes.

In the case of character icons, in Presentation Mode C (Advance Announcement Mode), blue, which has low expectation, will be ranked highest, but the rankings of the high expectation icons will not be swapped.

Furthermore, in the explanation using Figures 124 and 125, the default mode and advance notification mode are described as examples, but these may also be replaced with a certain mode in the normal game state (default mode) and a certain mode in the time-saving game state (advance notification mode).

Figure 126 is a diagram showing two examples of how the reserve change effect and advance notification effect are executed in stages on the gaming machine of the second embodiment. The example shown in Figure 126 is in the normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode), where hitting from the left is recommended and the game progresses by landing the game ball in the normal map start slot 228 (see Figure 84) and focusing on the normal map changing display.

A variable icon display area 280 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 126, and a regular pending icon display area 281 is displayed to the left of that. In addition, a performance mode selection display DMS is displayed in the lower right of the display screen, and in the example shown in Figure 126, it is indicated that performance mode C, which is an advance notification mode, has been set. Furthermore, each diagram in Figure 126 also shows a speaker 120, which is a sound output means, and a button lamp 138, which is a light-emitting means.

First, the examples shown in Figures 126(a) to 126(h) or 126(h') are examples of the modified example shown in Figure 125.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 126(a), when there is one reserved regular symbol, the confirmation stop of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 7," which indicates a missed regular symbol, is performed. During this confirmation display, one ball enters the regular symbol starting hole 228, increasing the number of reserved regular symbols to two. A reserve icon h12 in blue, representing the second reserve, is additionally displayed next to the reserve icon h11 in the default color (white), representing the first reserved regular symbol. In the modified example shown in Figure 125, the blue display mode is the display mode indicating a confirmed reserve change. Furthermore, since the mode is presentation mode C (advance notification mode), the second advance notification presentation described using Figure 113(d) is being executed. That is, in conjunction with the winning of the regular symbol starting hole 228 (increase in reserved regular symbols), a specific sound, "pokyun," is output from the speaker 120 shown in Figure 126(a), and the button lamp 138 lights up red. This will increase your interest in the game as you will know that the hold you have just acquired (first hold) is promising.

In Figure 126(b), the first reserved symbol for the normal symbol is consumed, and the white reserved symbol h11 for the first symbol shifts to the variable icon display area 280, remaining displayed as variable symbol h0 while remaining in its white display mode. Meanwhile, the blue reserved symbol h12 for the second symbol shifts to become the first reserved symbol h11. During this shift, the symbol changes from blue to a highly anticipated purple, and the speaker 120 outputs a "plonk" sound, which is the sound of the symbol changing to purple. In Figure 126(b), the display of the decorative symbol for the normal symbol begins to change, and in the following Figure 126(c), a normal reach effect is being executed with the odd-numbered decorative symbol 1 as the reach symbol. As explained using Figure 121, the current display of the normal symbol indicates a guaranteed miss for an odd-numbered reach symbol, but the next change will result in a reach effect of SP reach or higher, increasing the likelihood of a normal symbol win, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Eventually, decoration 2 temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, the normal reach is lost, and "decoration 1 - decoration 2 - decoration 1" is confirmed and stopped on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 126 (d).

In Figure 126 (e), the first reserve of the normal pattern is consumed, and the purple reserve icon h11 of the first reserve shifts to the variable icon display area 280, changing to a red variable icon h0, which indicates a higher level of expectation. In other words, the reserve change effect is executed at the time of the shift, and a "beep" sound, which indicates the change to red, is output from the speaker 120. In addition, the display of the decorative pattern change has begun. When the second advance notification effect (red illumination of the button lamp 138 and output of a sound from the speaker 120) is executed in the advance notification effect, the display mode of the variable icon, i.e., the final display mode of the icon, is likely to be a color indicating a higher level of expectation than purple.

In Figure 126 (f), the even number decoration 2 is the reach symbol, creating a reach state, which then develops into an SPSP reach in the following figure (g).

In Figure 126 (h), decoration 2 temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a flickering display of the combination of decorative symbols ("Decoration 2" - "Decoration 2" - "Decoration 2") indicating a normal winning symbol is displayed, and the display stops in this state, resulting in a normal winning symbol.

On the other hand, in Figure 126 (h'), decoration 3 is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a fluctuating display of the decorative symbol combination ("Decoration 2" - "Decoration 3" - "Decoration 2") indicating a normal miss is displayed. In this way, a normal miss may occur.

The examples shown in Figures 126(A) to 126(E) are examples of the modified example shown in Figure 124.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 126(A), when there is one reserved normal symbol, the confirmation stop of "Decoration 3 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 3", which represents a missed normal symbol due to a missed reach, is performed. The reserved icon h11, which represents the first reserved normal symbol in Figure 126(A), is displayed in blue, indicating a 100% expected probability of a confirmed normal symbol win.

In Figure 126 (B), the first reserved symbol for the regular symbol is consumed, and the blue reserved symbol h11 for the first reserved symbol shifts to the variable icon display area 280, where it is displayed as variable icon h0 while still in blue. Also, the display of the decorative symbol for the regular symbol has begun to change.

In Figure 126 (C), the even number decoration 2 is the reach symbol, creating a reach state, which then develops into an SPSP reach in the following figure (D).

In Figure 126 (E), decoration 2 temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a fluctuating display of the decorative symbol combination ("Decoration 2" - "Decoration 2" - "Decoration 2") indicating a normal winning combination is displayed. If the display mode of the variable icon h0 remains blue, a definitive stop will be performed, resulting in a normal winning combination. Note that while the fluctuating display is being displayed, it may change to another color (for example, purple), ultimately resulting in a normal losing combination.

In Figures 124 and 125, if presentation mode C is set and the final display state of the icon is blue, the expectation level becomes 100%, or it is easy to change from blue, or blue is a confirmed change, but this may also be the case for the icon that is the target of the second advance notification effect when presentation mode C is set and the second advance notification effect is executed.

According to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208] capable of displaying a change icon [for example, a change icon h0 shown in FIG. 74] corresponding to a currently occurring symbol change [for example, a normal symbol change or a special symbol change],
A winning means into which a game ball can enter (for example, a normal starting hole 228 or a special starting hole 232),
An operation means (e.g., an operation key unit 190) that can be operated by a player;
Equipped with
The display means may, when a game ball enters the winning means, execute a change display of a decorative pattern in accordance with a pattern change [for example, a pattern change of a normal pattern on the normal pattern display device 210 or a pattern change of a special pattern 2 on the second special pattern display device 214],
The variable icon may change its display mode,
The display modes include at least a first display mode [e.g., default (white)], a second display mode [e.g., blue], a third display mode [e.g., red], and a fourth display mode [e.g., gold or rainbow],
The variable icon of the first display mode may change to the variable icon of the second display mode,
The variable icon of the first display mode may change to the variable icon of the third display mode,
The variable icon of the first display mode may change to the variable icon of the fourth display mode,
The variable icon of the second display mode does not change to the variable icon of the first display mode,
The variable icon of the second display mode may change to the variable icon of the third display mode,
The variable icon of the second display mode may change to the variable icon of the fourth display mode,
The variable icon of the third display mode does not change to the variable icon of the first display mode,
The variable icon of the third display mode does not change to the variable icon of the second display mode,
The variable icon of the third display mode may change to the variable icon of the fourth display mode,
The variable icon of the fourth display mode does not change to the variable icon of the first display mode,
The variable icon of the fourth display mode does not change to the variable icon of the second display mode,
The variable icon of the fourth display mode does not change to the variable icon of the third display mode,
Any one of a plurality of types of presentation modes can be set by operating the operation means,
One of the plurality of presentation modes is a first presentation mode [for example, presentation mode A (default mode)],
One of the plurality of presentation modes is a second presentation mode [for example, presentation mode C (advance notification mode)],
In the first presentation mode, the expectation of winning is higher for the variable icon of the second display mode than for the variable icon of the first display mode, higher for the variable icon of the third display mode than for the variable icon of the second display mode, and higher for the variable icon of the fourth display mode than for the variable icon of the third display mode [for example, the table shown in FIG. 72 or FIG. 73],
The first presentation mode is a mode in which a certain presentation (for example, a pre-announcement presentation) cannot be executed,
The second effect mode is a mode in which the certain effect (for example, advance notification effect) can be executed,
The certain effect may be started in response to a winning event (hereinafter referred to as a "certain winning event") when a game ball enters the winning means while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed (for example, the output of a specific sound from the speaker 120 and the red light emission of the button lamp 138 in FIG. 62(B) (second advance notification effect)).
The certain effect is an effect that will not be started in response to the certain winning during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern that starts when the reserved effect due to the certain winning is consumed [for example, immediately before Figure 62 (E) to (G)].
When the certain effect is executed in the second effect mode, the variable icon that is the target of the certain effect is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode than in the second display mode as a display mode in which the variable icon is finally displayed, and more likely to be displayed in the fourth display mode than in the second display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a reserved icon [for example, reserved icons h11 and h12 shown in FIG. 74] corresponding to a reserved pattern change [for example, a normal pattern change or a special pattern change],
A winning means into which a game ball can enter (for example, a normal starting hole 228 or a special starting hole 232),
An operation means (e.g., an operation key unit 190) that can be operated by a player;
Equipped with
The display means may, when a game ball enters the winning means, execute a change display of a decorative pattern in accordance with a pattern change [for example, a pattern change of a normal pattern on the normal pattern display device 210 or a pattern change of a special pattern 2 on the second special pattern display device 214],
The display mode of the hold icon may change,
The display modes include at least a first display mode [e.g., default (white)], a second display mode [e.g., blue], a third display mode [e.g., red], and a fourth display mode [e.g., gold or rainbow],
The hold icon of the first display mode may be changed to the hold icon of the second display mode,
The hold icon of the first display mode may be changed to the hold icon of the third display mode,
The hold icon of the first display mode may be changed to the hold icon of the fourth display mode,
The hold icon of the second display mode does not change to the hold icon of the first display mode,
The hold icon of the second display mode may be changed to the hold icon of the third display mode,
The hold icon of the second display mode may be changed to the hold icon of the fourth display mode,
The hold icon of the third display mode does not change to the hold icon of the first display mode,
The hold icon of the third display mode does not change to the hold icon of the second display mode,
The hold icon of the third display mode may change to the hold icon of the fourth display mode,
The hold icon of the fourth display mode does not change to the hold icon of the first display mode,
The hold icon of the fourth display mode does not change to the hold icon of the second display mode,
The hold icon of the fourth display mode does not change to the hold icon of the third display mode,
Any one of a plurality of types of presentation modes can be set by operating the operation means,
One of the plurality of presentation modes is a first presentation mode [for example, presentation mode A (default mode)],
One of the plurality of presentation modes is a second presentation mode [for example, presentation mode C (advance notification mode)],
In the first presentation mode, the expected probability of winning is higher for the reserved icon of the second display mode than for the reserved icon of the first display mode, higher for the reserved icon of the third display mode than for the reserved icon of the second display mode, and higher for the reserved icon of the fourth display mode than for the reserved icon of the third display mode [for example, the table shown in Figure 72 or Figure 73],
The first presentation mode is a mode in which a certain presentation (for example, a pre-announcement presentation) cannot be executed,
The second effect mode is a mode in which the certain effect (for example, advance notification effect) can be executed,
The certain effect may be started in response to a winning event (hereinafter referred to as a "certain winning event") when a game ball enters the winning means while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed (for example, the output of a specific sound from the speaker 120 and the red light emission of the button lamp 138 in FIG. 62(B) (second advance notification effect)).
The certain effect is an effect that will not be started in response to the certain winning during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern that starts when the reserved effect due to the certain winning is consumed [for example, immediately before Figure 62 (E) to (G)].
When the certain effect is executed in the second effect mode, the hold icon that is the subject of the certain effect is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode than in the second display mode as a display mode in which the hold icon is ultimately displayed, and more likely to be displayed in the fourth display mode than in the second display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

For example, when the certain effect is executed in the second effect mode, if the results of the pre-reading are suggested, the appearance rate of the second display mode, which has an intermediate probability of winning, can be reduced to ensure consistency with the certain effect.

More specifically, if the second presentation mode is presentation mode C (advance notification mode), at the time of winning, a notification will be sent as to whether the expected change in the target is high or low. In other words, players who set presentation mode C are thought to dislike false notifications. Therefore, when presentation mode C is set, the display mode of the icon with a low expected change is less likely to appear. Therefore, by making one setting (presentation mode setting), it becomes possible to create presentations that suit the player's preferences, without having to make detailed settings.

The pattern change may be a regular pattern change or a special pattern change. The icon may be a reserved icon or a variable icon.

Furthermore, even if the certain effect is not executed in the second effect mode, the final display mode of the icon is more likely to be the third display mode than the second display mode, and more likely to be the fourth display mode than the second display mode. In other words, as long as the mode has been switched to the second effect mode, regardless of whether the certain effect is executed or not, the final display mode of the icon is more likely to be the third display mode than the second display mode, and more likely to be the fourth display mode than the second display mode.

Furthermore, the second presentation mode may be configured so that the icon in the second display mode has the highest probability of winning [for example, the table shown in Figure 124].

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a flow path through which gaming balls circulate, and the flow path is configured to have a first flow path (for example, the normal game start port flow path 258 shown in FIG. 34(a)), a second flow path (for example, the first special game start port flow path 266 and the variable prize port flow path 267 shown in FIG. 35), and a third flow path (for example, the normal prize port flow path 256 shown in FIG. 34(a)), and the first flow path is a flow path through which gaming balls can circulate during normal play, the second flow path is a flow path through which gaming balls have difficulty circulating during normal play but which facilitates the circulation of gaming balls during winning play, and the third flow path is a flow path through which gaming balls can circulate during normal play, and the first flow path a first screw insertion port (for example, screw insertion port 258a shown in FIG. 34(a)) into which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the second flow path, no screw insertion port into which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the third flow path, and a third screw insertion port (for example, screw insertion port 256a shown in FIG. 34(b)) into which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the third flow path, and the first screw insertion port is formed at a position where, if a screw is not correctly inserted into the first screw insertion port, a gaming ball that has circulated through the first flow path will come into contact with the screw and a component that forms the first flow path, and the third flow path has a first opening (for example, flow path inlet 256in shown in FIG. 34(b)) and a second opening (for example, 34(b)), the first opening is located upstream of the second opening, the third screw insertion opening is formed at a position where, if a screw is not correctly inserted into the third screw insertion opening, a gaming ball that has circulated through the third flow path will come into contact with the screw and a component that forms the third flow path, and is located closer to the first opening than the second opening, and further comprises display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] that can display an icon corresponding to a pattern variation, detection means that can detect a gaming ball, and operation means [for example, an operation key unit 190] that can be operated by a player, and the display means displays an icon corresponding to a pattern variation [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] when the detection means detects a gaming ball. For example, the display of the decorative pattern may be changed in accordance with the change in the pattern of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 or the change in the pattern of the special map 2 on the second special map display device 214, and the display mode of the icon may change, and the display mode may include at least a first display mode [for example, default (white)], a second display mode [for example, blue], a third display mode [for example, red], and a fourth display mode [for example, gold or rainbow color], and the icon of the first display mode may change to an icon of the second display mode, and the icon of the first display mode may change to an icon of the third display mode, and the first display mode The icon of the second display mode may change to the icon of the fourth display mode, the icon of the second display mode may not change to the icon of the first display mode, the icon of the second display mode may change to the icon of the third display mode, the icon of the second display mode may change to the icon of the fourth display mode, the icon of the third display mode may not change to the icon of the first display mode, the icon of the third display mode may not change to the icon of the second display mode, the icon of the third display mode may change to the icon of the fourth display mode, and the icon of the fourth display mode may change to the icon of the first the icon of the fourth display mode does not change to an icon of the second display mode, the icon of the fourth display mode does not change to an icon of the third display mode, any one of a plurality of types of presentation modes can be set by operating the operation means, one type of presentation mode among the plurality of types of presentation modes is a first presentation mode [for example, presentation mode A (default mode)], one type of presentation mode among the plurality of types of presentation modes is a second presentation mode [for example, presentation mode C (advance notification mode)], the expected probability of winning in the first presentation mode is The variable icon of the second display mode is higher than the variable icon of the display mode of the first display mode, the variable icon of the third display mode is higher than the variable icon of the second display mode, and the variable icon of the fourth display mode is higher than the variable icon of the third display mode [for example, the table shown in FIG. 124 or 125], the first presentation mode is a mode in which a certain presentation [for example, an advance notification presentation] cannot be executed, the second presentation mode is a mode in which the certain presentation can be executed, and the certain presentation may be started in response to the detection means detecting a game ball (hereinafter referred to as "a certain detection") when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed. This gaming machine is characterized in that when the certain effect is executed in the second effect mode, the icon that is the subject of the certain effect is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode than in the second display mode, and more likely to be displayed in the fourth display mode than in the second display mode, and when the certain effect is executed in the second effect mode, the icon that is the subject of the certain effect is more likely to be displayed in the fourth display mode than in the second display mode, and when the certain effect is executed in the second effect mode, the gaming machine is characterized in that the certain effect is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode than in the second display mode, and when the certain effect is executed in the second effect mode, the icon that is the subject of the certain effect is more likely to be displayed in the fourth display mode than in the second display mode, and when the certain effect is executed in the second effect mode, the gaming machine is characterized in that ...

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

In addition, if a screw is not attached correctly and becomes loose during assembly of the flow path, game balls will remain in the first and third flow paths. This makes it easy to detect assembly errors during test hit inspections before shipping, thereby increasing convenience.

In addition, since there are no screw insertion ports formed on the second flow path (the flow path through which game balls flow only during winning plays), even if the screws are not installed correctly during assembly of the flow path and become loose, the second flow path is not affected, allowing for quick test shot inspections before shipping.

In addition, because the third screw insertion port is located closer to the first opening than the second opening, if game balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow during a test shot inspection before shipping due to a loose third screw or other reason, the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience. If the third screw insertion port were located closer to the second opening than the first opening, it would take a certain amount of time for game balls to become trapped in the flow path and overflow, making it difficult to immediately detect the assembly error.

Furthermore, for example, when the certain effect is executed in the second effect mode, if the results of the pre-reading are suggested, the appearance rate of the second display mode, which has an intermediate probability of winning, can be reduced to ensure consistency with the certain effect.

More specifically, if the second presentation mode is presentation mode C (advance notification mode), at the time of winning, a notification will be sent as to whether the expected change in the target is high or low. In other words, players who set presentation mode C are thought to dislike false notifications. Therefore, when presentation mode C is set, the display mode of the icon with a low expected change is less likely to appear. Therefore, by making one setting (presentation mode setting), it becomes possible to create presentations that suit the player's preferences, without having to make detailed settings.

Also, the game board may include a game board (e.g., game board 200 shown in FIG. 32), in which a second screw insertion port (e.g., screw insertion port 262a shown in FIG. 35) is formed in the second flow path in an area not on the flow path of the second flow path, the first flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw (e.g., screw 257 shown in FIG. 35) into the first screw insertion port, the second flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw into the second screw insertion port, and the third flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw into the third screw insertion port.

With this configuration, the first and third flow paths can detect loose screws and other issues by detecting accumulated game balls, and can be stably fixed to the game board. The second flow path can be stably fixed to the game board, eliminating any adverse effects caused by loose screws and other issues.

Also,
"When the certain effect is executed in the second effect mode [for example, effect mode C (advance notification mode)], if an icon of the second display mode is displayed, the icon will change to an icon of any display mode [for example, the third display mode or the fourth display mode] until the pattern change corresponding to the icon of the second display mode is completed [for example, the table shown in FIG. 125(a)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

First, by eliminating consistency with the certain effect, the player's attention is drawn to the icon, and eventually consistency with the certain effect is ensured, increasing the reliability of the effect.

In addition, even if the certain effect is not executed in the second effect mode, when an icon of the second display mode is displayed, it will change to an icon of one of the display modes until the pattern change corresponding to the icon of the second display mode is completed [for example, it will change to an icon of the third display mode or an icon of the fourth display mode]. In other words, as long as the mode has been switched to the second effect mode, regardless of whether the certain effect is executed or not, when an icon of the second display mode is displayed, it will change to an icon of one of the display modes until the pattern change corresponding to the icon of the second display mode is completed.

Also,
"Equipped with a winning means (for example, a normal starting hole 228 or a special starting hole 232) through which a game ball can enter,
The first effect mode is a mode in which the certain effect [for example, advance notification effect] cannot be executed,
The certain effect is executed when a game ball enters the winning means [for example, FIG.
4(a)] is a production,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The certain effect may be a predictive effect. The certain effect may also be an effect that may suggest a confirmed loss, or an effect that may suggest a confirmed win. Furthermore, the certain effect may be an effect that may suggest a confirmed loss when combined with a first variation pattern [for example, the normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach (first reach effect) shown in Figure 113 (d)], or an effect that may suggest a confirmed win when combined with a second variation pattern [for example, the full rotation reach effect (second reach effect) shown in Figure 113 (d)].

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying an icon [for example, a reserved icon or a change icon] corresponding to a pattern change [for example, a normal pattern change or a special pattern change],
The display mode of the icon may change,
The display modes include at least a first display mode [e.g., default (white)], a second display mode [e.g., blue], a third display mode [e.g., red], and a fourth display mode [e.g., gold],
The icon of the first display mode may be changed to the icon of the second display mode,
The icon of the first display mode may be changed to the icon of the third display mode,
The icon of the first display mode may be changed to the icon of the fourth display mode,
The icon of the second display mode does not change to the icon of the first display mode,
The icon in the second display mode may be changed to the icon in the third display mode,
The icon of the second display mode may be changed to the icon of the fourth display mode,
The icon of the third display mode does not change to the icon of the first display mode,
The icon of the third display mode does not change to the icon of the second display mode,
The icon of the third display mode may be changed to the icon of the fourth display mode,
The icon of the fourth display mode does not change to the icon of the first display mode,
The icon of the fourth display mode does not change to the icon of the second display mode,
The icon of the fourth display mode does not change to the icon of the third display mode,
Any one of a plurality of presentation modes can be set,
One of the plurality of presentation modes is a first presentation mode [for example, presentation mode A (default mode)],
One of the plurality of presentation modes is a second presentation mode [for example, presentation mode C (advance notification mode)],
In the first presentation mode, the expectation of winning is higher for the icon of the second display mode than for the icon of the first display mode, higher for the icon of the third display mode than for the icon of the second display mode, and higher for the icon of the fourth display mode than for the icon of the third display mode (for example, the table shown in FIG. 124 );
In the second presentation mode, the expectation of winning is higher for the icon of the second display mode than for the icon of the fourth display mode (for example, the table shown in FIG. 124).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, depending on the presentation mode, the display mode for low expectation levels changes to a higher expectation level, changing the ranking of the expectation levels. This means that depending on the presentation mode, the display can be novel and may surprise the player.

The pattern change may be a regular pattern change or a special pattern change. The icon may be a reserved icon or a variable icon.

Furthermore, the second presentation mode may be configured so that the icon in the second display mode has the highest probability of winning [for example, the table shown in Figure 124].

Also,
"The expectation of winning in the second presentation mode [for example, presentation mode C (advance notification mode)] is configured to be higher for the icon in the fourth display mode [for example, gold] than for the icon in the third display mode [for example, red] [for example, the table shown in FIG. 124].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

On the other hand, even if the presentation mode changes, the ranking of high expectation display modes will not change, ensuring that players' expectations are not disappointed.

Also,
"Equipped with a winning means (for example, a normal starting hole 228 or a special starting hole 232) through which a game ball can enter,
The second presentation mode [for example, presentation mode C (advance notification mode)] is a mode capable of executing a certain presentation [for example, advance notification presentation],
The first rendering mode [for example, rendering mode A (default mode)] is a mode in which the certain rendering cannot be executed,
The certain effect may be executed when a game ball enters the winning means (for example, FIG. 126(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The certain effect may be a predictive effect. The certain effect may also be an effect that may suggest a confirmed loss, or an effect that may suggest a confirmed win. Furthermore, the certain effect may be an effect that may suggest a confirmed loss when combined with a first variation pattern [for example, the normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach (first reach effect) shown in Figure 113 (d)], or an effect that may suggest a confirmed win when combined with a second variation pattern [for example, the full rotation reach effect (second reach effect) shown in Figure 113 (d)].

Next, we will provide a detailed description of the demo effects on the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

Figure 127(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo presentation on the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

The demo performance begins a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the demo performance start conditions are met. For the demo performance start conditions to be met, all four conditions must be met: (1) the decorative pattern display device 208 is not displaying a changing decorative pattern, (2) there is no pending start of the display of a changing decorative pattern, (3) the ball launch handle 134 shown in Figure 82 is not being touched, and (4) no menu operation is being performed by operating the operation key unit 190 shown in Figure 82.

Condition (1) applies when the game is in normal play mode, as the decorative symbol changes in sync with the regular symbol's change, so even if the special symbol 2 change is being displayed, it is sufficient that the decorative symbol change is not being displayed. Condition (2) also applies as long as the regular symbol is not reserved, and special symbol 2 may be reserved.

The ball launching handle 134 is also equipped with a handle touch sensor that detects changes in the electrostatic capacitance of the ball launching handle 134. This handle touch sensor detects static electricity acting on the ball launching handle 134, and when a player touches the ball launching handle 134, it detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects that the player is touching the ball launching handle 134. Condition (3) is determined based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor. The timing chart in Figure 127 indicates whether the detection signal from this handle touch sensor is detected or not.

Operation key unit 190 is equipped with a cross key and a confirmation button. By operating this operation key unit 190, a menu display is displayed on decorative pattern display device 208, and menu operation is performed by operation key unit 190. Therefore, condition (4) is determined based on whether operation key unit 190 is operated while the menu display is displayed. The timing chart in Figure 127 shows operation/non-operation of operation key unit 190, but this refers to operation/non-operation while the menu display is displayed. Note that condition (4) may also be an operation that causes the menu display to be displayed. The operation that causes the menu display to be displayed may again be, for example, operation of operation key unit 190, or pressing a dedicated menu display button.

The timing chart in Figure 127 also indicates the operation/non-operation of the sound/light intensity button, but the volume refers to the volume of the speaker 120, and the light intensity refers to the brightness of the LCD screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Note that the light intensity may also be the light intensity of the game board lamp 422 or the game table frame lamp 452 shown in Figure 86. The volume button is assigned to the up and down buttons of the operation key unit 190 when the volume adjustment window is displayed, and the light intensity button is assigned to the up and down buttons of the operation key unit 190 when the light intensity adjustment window is displayed.

Note that while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing state, background music is output from the speaker 120, but once a time shorter than the above-mentioned fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the decorative pattern has been fixed and stopped, the background music will be muted (output will stop).

The game state in Figure 127 (a) is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), in which the regular symbol changes, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol changes in accordance with the symbol changes. Timing T2 is the timing when the decorative symbol has finished being fixed and stopped. In (a-1), which shows the state of timing T2, background music is being output from the speaker 120. On the LCD display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the losing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 7" has been fixed and stopped. In addition, the mini symbol MIN is displayed in the upper left, and the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed in the upper right. The number of reserved regular symbols in the fourth symbol display area 284 is 0. Furthermore, the variable icon display area 280 is displayed in the lower center, and the regular symbol reserved icon display area 281 is displayed to the left of that. No variable icons are displayed in variable icon display area 280, and no reserved icons are displayed in regular reserved icon display area 281. From then on, the combination of decorative symbols is confirmed and stopped, and the LCD display showing mini symbol MIN, fourth symbol display area 284, variable icon display area 280, and regular reserved icon display area 281 is sometimes referred to as the decorative symbol stop display. In this example, there are no regular symbols on hold, the player releases the launch handle before the decorative symbols are confirmed and the decorative symbols are confirmed and stopped at time T2 when no menu operation is performed, so the start condition for the demo effect is met at time T2.

The demo effects include a warning display, an animation demo display, and a spec demo display. In Figure 127(a), the LCD display of the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a loop of warning display → animation demo display → spec demo display → warning display → ....

The timing of T3 occurs when the above-mentioned fixed time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing of T2, when the above-mentioned demo performance start condition is met. In (a-2), which shows the state of this timing of T3, the warning display WS is displayed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 instead of the decorative pattern combination. The warning display WS is a display that warns players to avoid becoming addicted. Note that the variable icon display area 280 and the regular reserved icon display area 281 have disappeared from the decorative pattern display device 208, but the mini pattern MIN and fourth pattern display area 284 continue to be displayed. In addition, output from the speaker 120 has stopped, and nothing is being output (muted state).

At time T4, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the warning display WS to the animated demo display, and (a-3) shows the state at time T4. The animated demo display uses animation to display information about the gaming machine model. During the animated demo display, the message "Demo in progress" continues to be displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that a demo is in progress. The mini symbol MIN and the fourth symbol display area 284 continue to be displayed. Furthermore, nothing is being output from the speaker 120 (muted).

At time T5, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation demo display to the spec demo display, and (a-4) shows the state at time T5. The spec demo display displays the specifications of the gaming machine model. Note that the mini symbol MIN and the fourth symbol display area 284 continue to be displayed. Also, nothing is being output from the speaker 120 (muted).

In addition to the warning display, animation demo display, and spec demo display, demo effects may also include the display of a company logo. A decorative pattern stop display may also be inserted between the spec demo display and the warning display that returns to the top.

Figure 128 is a flowchart showing the flow of the demo effect control process on the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

The demo performance control process shown in Fig. 128 is executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 as part of various update processes in the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 94. In step S3431, it is determined whether or not a demo performance is currently being executed. If a demo performance is not being executed, in step S3432, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned demo performance start condition is met and the above-mentioned certain time has elapsed. If the certain time has not elapsed, this demo performance control process ends. If the certain time has elapsed, demo performance start process is executed (step S3433) to start a demo performance starting with a warning display WS, and this demo performance control process ends.

On the other hand, if the demo performance is being performed, it is determined whether termination condition 1 has been met (step S3434). Termination condition 1 is met when there is a touch, such as gripping or touching the ball launching handle 134. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 detects a touch on the ball launching handle 134 by receiving information based on the detection signal of the handle touch sensor from the main control unit 300. If termination condition 1 has been met, the process proceeds to voice sound control processing (step S3435). In the voice sound control processing, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 causes a voice sound to be output from the speaker 120.

If termination condition 1 is met, a voice sound is output, which is a type of effect. The effect that is executed when termination condition 1 is met may be an effect in which a dedicated image display is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 along with the output of a voice sound, or an effect in which a dedicated image display is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 instead of the output of a voice sound, or may be an effect in which a movable object is operated.

Next, the demo performance end process is executed to end the demo performance (step S3436), and this demo performance control process ends.

Note that the timing at which the certain effect begins to be executed and the timing at which the demo effect ends may be the same or different. In other words, the timing at which the certain effect begins to be executed may be earlier or later than the timing at which the demo effect ends.

Furthermore, if the determination in step S3434 is that termination condition 1 is not met (that is, no touch to the ball launch handle 134 is detected), then it is determined whether termination condition 2 is met (step S3437). Termination condition 2 is met if a menu operation is performed, and is also met when the display of changing decorative symbols begins. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 detects menu operation by receiving a detection signal from the button sensor 426 shown in FIG. 86. It also detects the start of the display of changing decorative symbols by receiving a symbol change start command from the main control unit 300. If termination condition 2 is met, the process proceeds to step S3436 without executing the voice sound control process in step S3435, where the demo effect is ended, and this demo effect control process ends. In other words, if a menu operation is performed during a demo effect, the demo effect is ended, but certain effects such as the output of voice sounds are not executed.

If termination condition 2 is not met (no menu operation has been performed and the display of changing decorative patterns has not begun), the demo performance control process ends without executing the demo performance end process of step S3436. Therefore, the demo performance continues.

Figure 127(b) is a timing chart showing the flow when termination condition 1 or termination condition 2 is met during the execution of the demo performance.

While an animated demo display is being displayed as the LCD display of the decorative pattern display device 208, at timing T2, the handle touch sensor detects a touch to the ball launching handle 134. When the handle touch sensor detects a touch to the ball launching handle 134, the above-mentioned termination condition 1 is met, and voice sound control processing is executed in step S3435 shown in FIG. 128. In (b-1), a voice sound saying "We've been waiting for you" is output from the speaker 120. In addition, demo effect termination processing is also executed in step S3436 shown in FIG. 128, and in (b-1), the LCD display of the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the previous animated demo display to a static decorative pattern display. By switching the LCD display to a static decorative pattern display, the demo effect ends. Even when the demo effect ends, background music is not output from the speaker 120. This makes it easier for the voice sound to reach the player.

It is also possible to configure the system so that no voice sound is output (a certain effect is executed) even if the ball launch handle 134 is touched before the animation demo display begins (while the warning display is being displayed), or to configure the system so that a voice sound is output (a certain effect is executed) when the ball launch handle 134 is touched only while the animation demo display is being displayed. If a certain effect, such as the output of a voice sound, is intended to welcome a new player, its execution may be restricted if the possibility that the player is a new player is low.

In the example shown in Figure 127(b), the demo effect ends temporarily. However, when the above-mentioned demo effect start condition is met and the above-mentioned certain time period has elapsed, the demo effect begins again, and the animated demo display is again displayed as the LCD display of the decorative pattern display device 208. While the animated demo display is being displayed again, a menu start operation is performed at timing T3. That is, with the menu display MND displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, operation of the operation key unit 190 is started. This meets the above-mentioned end condition 2, and the demo effect end processing is also executed in step S3436 shown in Figure 128. In (b-2), the LCD display of the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the previous animated demo display to a static decorative pattern display, and the menu display MND is displayed so as to overlap the static decorative pattern display. Here, too, the demo effect ends by switching the LCD display to a static decorative pattern display. Note that no background music is output from the speaker 120. Additionally, the speaker 120 does not output menu operation sounds in response to menu operations, but this may be configured to be output.

The menu operation ends at timing T4. For example, the menu display MND disappears, which marks the end of the menu operation. As shown in (b-3), the LCD display of the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a static decorative pattern. No background music is output from the speaker 120.

When the menu operation is completed, the demo presentation may be resumed. In this case, the animation demo display may be restarted from the scene immediately before T2, or may start from the beginning of the animation demo display, or may return to the beginning of the demo presentation and start again.

In the example shown in Figure 127(b), the above-mentioned demo effect start condition is met, and after the above-mentioned certain time has elapsed, the demo effect begins again, and an animated demo display is displayed on the LCD screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. While the animated demo display is being displayed, at timing T5, the light intensity adjustment window LSW appears on the LCD screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and operation of the up button on the operation key unit 190 (light intensity increase operation) is initiated. A "beep" sound representing an increase in light intensity is output from the speaker 120. However, the LCD screen remains displaying the animated demo, and the light intensity adjustment window LSW is displayed overlapping the lower left corner of the animated demo display. In other words, light intensity adjustment is not included in the above-mentioned termination condition 1 or termination condition 2, and adjusting the light intensity while the demo effect is being executed does not end the demo effect. The same applies to volume adjustment. Light intensity or volume adjustment operations may be performed by game parlor staff, preventing the demo effect from ending. Additionally, since players may want to adjust the light and volume to view the animated demo display, the demo effect is not terminated.

Figure 129(a) is a timing chart showing the flow when, during execution of a demo effect in normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode), the display of varying decorative symbols begins without detecting a touch to the ball launching handle 134, and then a touch to the ball launching handle 134 is detected.

While the demo performance is being executed and an animated demo display is being shown on the LCD display of the decorative pattern display device 208, the display of the changing normal pattern begins at timing T2. In this example, the handle touch sensor does not detect a touch on the ball launch handle 134, and the game ball that was jammed just before the ball detection sensor of the normal pattern start port 228 somehow clears the jam and is detected by the ball detection sensor of the normal pattern start port 228, causing the display of the changing normal pattern decorative pattern to begin. Therefore, the above-mentioned termination condition 1 is not met, but termination condition 2 is met. In (a-1), which shows the situation at timing T2, the demo performance ends, the decorative pattern display device 208 begins displaying the changing normal pattern decorative pattern, and background music for the pattern change is output from the speaker 120. When the ball launch handle 134 is touched and a voice sound is output, ending the demo performance, no background music is output from the speaker 120; however, when the demo performance ends due to a win in the winning slot, background music is output from the speaker 120.

In this example, the ball detection sensor detected a game ball in the normal winning slot 228. That is, the ball detection (winning) triggered the display of decorative symbols. However, the demo effect may be terminated for winning slots including the normal winning slot, or for winning slots that trigger symbol changes. That is, the demo effect may be terminated even for winning slots that do not trigger the display of decorative symbols (such as the special winning slot 1 starting slot 231 or the special winning slot 232 in normal game mode). Alternatively, if a winning slot triggers the display of decorative symbols, the demo effect may not be terminated if the winning slot is a miss, but may be terminated at a predetermined timing if the winning slot is a win. Alternatively, the demo effect may be executed without terminating the demo effect (for example, a message indicating that the player should hit left). Furthermore, the demo effect may not be terminated for winning slots that do not trigger the display of decorative symbols.

Eventually, the display of the decorative symbols changes, and at T3, the fixed stop of the "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 7" decorative symbol combination also ends. As a result, the start condition for the demo effect described above is met at T3. T4 occurs after the start condition for the demo effect is met, but before the aforementioned fixed time has elapsed. At this T4, the player touches the ball launch handle 134, and this touch is detected. In (a-2), which shows the state at T4, the LCD display of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the stopped decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 7." Because the demo effect is not being executed, no voice sound is output from the speaker 120. While the player is touching the ball launch handle 134, the display of the normal decorative symbols does not change, and the LCD display of the decorative symbol display device 208 remains displaying the stopped decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 7."

Time T5 is the moment when the player releases the ball launch handle 134. At this time T5, the conditions for starting the demo effect are met again, and the above-mentioned fixed time period elapses at time T6. Therefore, the demo effect begins at time T6, and the LCD display of the decorative pattern display device 208 begins to display a warning message.

Figure 129(b) is a timing chart showing the flow when, during execution of a demo effect in normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode), the special chart 2 variable display starts twice without detecting a touch on the ball launch handle 134, and a small win is won on the second special chart 2 variable display.

As mentioned above, in normal play mode (non-time-saving play mode), play is centered around the display of regular symbol variations, and decorative symbol variations corresponding to the display of regular symbol variations are displayed, but decorative symbol variations corresponding to the display of special symbol 2 variations are not displayed.

As the demo performance is executed and an animated demo display is displayed as the LCD display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the special symbol 2 begins at timing T2. In this example, the handle touch sensor does not detect a touch on the ball launch handle 134, and the game ball that was stuck just before the ball detection sensor of the special symbol 2 starting hole 232 rolls down for some reason and is detected by the ball detection sensor of the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, thereby starting the display of the special symbol 2. As a result, the above-mentioned termination condition 1 is not met, and since no decorative symbol corresponding to the display of the special symbol 2 is displayed, termination condition 2 is not met either, and the demo performance does not end. In (b-1), which shows the state at timing T2, the animated demo display continues to be displayed as the LCD display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, the display of the special symbol 2 is flashing in the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, the normal game state is a game state in which left-handed hitting is recommended, and since the special game 2 starting hole 232 is located in the right-handed hitting area, a display recommending left-handed hitting may be displayed.

At timing T3, when the demo performance continues, the variable display of special symbol 2 ends, and the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214 (not shown in Figure 84). In (b-2), which shows the state at timing T3, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the animation demo display, and the display of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shows a lit cross mark, indicating a loss.

As the demo performance continues, at timing T4, the second display of the special symbol 2 begins. Again, the handle touch sensor does not detect a touch on the ball launch handle 134, and another game ball that had been stuck in front of the ball detection sensor of the special symbol 2 starting hole 232 rolls down for some reason and is detected by the ball detection sensor of the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, starting the second display of the special symbol 2. Again, neither end condition 1 nor end condition 2 described above is met, and the demo performance does not end. In (b-3), which shows the state at timing T4, the animated demo display continues to be displayed as an LCD display on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 2 display is flashing in the fourth symbol display area 284.

At the timing of T5, when the demo effect continues, the second display of the special symbol 2 variation ends, and the small win symbol is confirmed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214. At this timing of T5, the demo effect ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 begins displaying a win effect. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in (b-4), which shows the state at timing T5, displays a message encouraging the player to hit the right as the opening effect of the small win game. Also, background music for the win effect is output from the speaker 120. Note that, in the display of the special symbol 2 variation that results in a small win, the demo effect may end at the timing of T4, when the variation begins, rather than when the display stops. Alternatively, the demo effect may end by displaying a special effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the special symbol 2 variation is being displayed. This special effect may, for example, be a door image appearing from the left or right of the display screen, overlapping with the animated demo display and obscuring the animated demo effect.

In this example, the small win symbol is confirmed and stopped, but if a non-recommended symbol changes during the demo effect, the demo effect may also end after the big win symbol is confirmed and stopped, just like in this example, when a big win occurs.

Also, if a non-recommended symbol changes during a demo performance, if a small win occurs, the demo performance may not end even after the symbol stops (only a small right-hit display is displayed), and if a big win occurs, the demo performance may end after the symbol stops.

The explanations using Figures 127 and 129 were based on the normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode). However, in the gaming machine of the second embodiment, even in the time-saving game mode (RUSH mode), the conditions for starting the demo effect described above are met, and the demo effect begins after the aforementioned fixed time has elapsed. However, in the time-saving game mode, even if the ball launch handle 134 is touched during the demo effect, certain effects, such as the output of a voice sound, are not executed and the demo effect ends. In the normal game mode, the ball aims for the normal game start hole 228, whereas in the RUSH mode, the game ball is more likely to reach the special game start hole 232. Therefore, in the RUSH mode, compared to the normal game mode, the display of the decorative symbols begins immediately, and certain effects are not executed to avoid interfering with the display of the decorative symbols. Furthermore, certain effects are not executed because the possibility of a new player is low. Alternatively, in the time-saving game state (RUSH state), even if the start condition for the demo effect is satisfied and the predetermined time has elapsed, the demo effect may not start. If the demo effect does not start, certain effects such as the output of voice sounds will not be executed.

Furthermore, among pachinko machines (pinball gaming machines), the so-called Sumapachi, a type of enclosed gaming machine described below, is becoming popular. Sumapachi also has the lending machine 1700 described using Figures 18 and 19. Hereinafter, the lending machine 1700 will be referred to as the card unit. In this Sumapachi, a ball count display and a counting button are provided on the pachinko machine 100 side. The ball count display displays the number of game balls that can be used for play. The counting button is an operating means for transmitting information about the number of game balls displayed on the ball count display to the card unit.

The card unit accepts cards that can store "ball count" information. When the counting button is operated, a counting process is performed, and the number of game balls is stored as "ball count" information on the card accepted by the card unit. When the counting process is complete, the ball count display will show "0." Furthermore, when the "ball count" information stored on the card accepted by the card unit is sent to the pachinko machine 100, the number of game balls based on the "ball count" information is displayed on the ball count display.

Figure 130 is a flowchart showing the flow of the demo effect control process in Smapachi. The following explanation focuses on the differences from the demo effect control process shown in Figure 128. Steps S3431 to S3437 shown in Figure 130 are the same as steps S3431 to S3437 shown in Figure 128, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

If the determination in step S3432 is that the aforementioned fixed time (e.g., 30 seconds) has not elapsed, it is determined whether the counting button has been operated and the counting process has been executed (step S3438). In the determination in step S3438, if the counting button has been pressed and the ball count display shows "0," i.e., if the counting process has been completed, the determination may be Yes. Alternatively, even if the counting process has not been completed, the determination may be made as long as the counting button has been pressed. If the determination in step S3438 is No, the demo effect control process ends; if the determination is Yes, the demo effect start process is executed (step S3433), and the demo effect control process ends.

According to the above description,
"At least in a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)], a gaming machine equipped with a presentation means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a demo presentation,
A first operating means (e.g., a ball launching handle 134) capable of launching a game ball;
a detection means (e.g., a handle touch sensor) capable of detecting contact by a player with the first operating means;
A first winning means (e.g., a starting hole 228) through which a game ball can enter;
A second winning means (for example, a special drawing 2 starting hole 232) through which the game ball can win;
When a game ball enters the first winning means, a first symbol display means [for example, a symbol display device 210] may start to display a variable first symbol [for example, a symbol];
When the game ball enters the second winning means, a second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214] may start changing the display of a second symbol [for example, a special symbol 2];
Equipped with
The performance means is a means capable of executing a first change display according to the change display of the first pattern [for example, a display showing a change of ◯× in the notification area during the change of the normal pattern in the mini pattern MIN, the fourth pattern display area 284],
The production means is a means capable of executing a second change display according to the change display of the second pattern [for example, a display showing a change of ◯× in the pattern change notification area of the special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284],
The effect means is a means for terminating the demo effect when a first condition (for example, termination condition 1 in step S3434 of FIG. 76) is satisfied during execution of the demo effect (for example, step S3436 of FIG. 76),
The effect means is a means for terminating the demo effect even if the second condition (e.g., termination condition 2 in step S3434 of FIG. 76) is satisfied without the first condition being satisfied during execution of the demo effect (e.g., step S3436 of FIG. 76, T2 in FIG. 77(a)),
The performance means is a means for not ending the demo performance if the third condition [for example, winning the special drawing 2 starting hole 232] is met without the first condition being met during the execution of the demo performance [for example, T2 in FIG. 77(b)],
When the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the demo effect, a certain effect (for example, a voice sound output from the speaker 120) is executed (for example, step S3435 in FIG. 76 ).
If the second condition is satisfied without the first condition being satisfied during execution of the demo effect, the certain effect is not executed (for example, the demo effect control process shown in FIG. 76 );
If the second condition is met without the first condition being met during the execution of the demo performance, the first variable display is executed (for example, a display showing the variation of a mini symbol MIN or a circle or cross in the notification area for the normal symbol in the fourth symbol display area 284 at T2 in FIG. 77(a)).
If the first condition is not satisfied but the third condition is satisfied during the execution of the demo performance, the certain performance is not executed (for example, the speaker 120 at T2 in FIG. 77(b)).
If the third condition is met without the first condition being met during the execution of the demo performance, the second variable display is executed [for example, T2 in FIG. 77(b)],
The first gaming state is a state in which it is recommended to make the gaming ball win the first winning means and a state in which it is not recommended to make the gaming ball win the second winning means (for example, a normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)),
the first condition is a condition that is established in response to the detection means detecting a contact with the first operating means,
The second condition is a condition that is established in response to a game ball entering the first winning means (for example, the normal starting hole 228),
The third condition is a condition that is established in response to the game ball entering the second winning means [for example, the special drawing 2 starting hole 232],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

Also,
"A gaming machine equipped with a demonstration means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a demo performance,
The effect means is a means for terminating the demo effect when a first condition (for example, termination condition 1 in step S3434 of FIG. 128) is met during execution of the demo effect (for example, step S3436 of FIG. 128),
When a first condition is satisfied during the execution of the demo effect, a certain effect (for example, a voice sound output from the speaker 120) is executed (for example, step S3435 in FIG. 128).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, for example, when a player starts playing, the certain effects may be able to increase the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, the certain effects may also be able to bridge the gap (prevent the player from becoming frustrated) until the pattern changes begin (until a win is achieved).

Note that the certain effect may be executed by a second effect means different from the effect means, or may be executed by that effect means.

Furthermore, the first timing at which the execution of the demo effect ends and the second timing at which the execution of the certain effect begins may be the same timing or different timings. In other words, the first timing may be earlier or later than the second timing.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the enclosed gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes a flow path through which gaming balls flow, a first operating means [for example, a ball launching handle 134] capable of operating to launch gaming balls, a first detecting means [for example, a handle touch sensor] capable of detecting contact by a player with the first operating means, a second detecting means [for example, a ball detection sensor] capable of detecting gaming balls, and when the second detecting means detects a gaming ball, it may start displaying a varying first symbol. A gaming machine equipped with a first symbol display means (for example, a normal symbol display device 210), a presentation means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of executing demo presentations in at least a normal game state, and a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting sound, wherein the flow paths are a first flow path (for example, a normal symbol start port flow path 258 shown in FIG. 34(a)), a second flow path (for example, a first special symbol start port flow path 266 or a variable winning port flow path 267 shown in FIG. 35), and a third flow path (for example, a normal winning port flow path 256 shown in FIG. 34(a)). ), the first flow path is a flow path through which game balls can flow during normal play, the second flow path is a flow path through which game balls have difficulty flowing during normal play and through which game balls can easily flow during a winning game, the third flow path is a flow path through which game balls can flow during normal play, and a first screw insertion port (for example, screw insertion port 258a shown in FIG. 34(a)) through which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the first flow path, and a screw insertion port (for example, screw insertion port 258b shown in FIG. 34(a)) through which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the second flow path. No insertion opening is formed, and a third screw insertion opening (for example, screw insertion opening 256a shown in FIG. 34(b)) into which a screw can be inserted is formed on the flow path of the third flow path, and the first screw insertion opening is formed at a position where, when a screw is not correctly inserted into the first screw insertion opening, a gaming ball that has circulated through the first flow path will come into contact with the screw and a constituent body that forms the first flow path, the third flow path has a first opening (for example, flow path inlet 256in shown in FIG. 34(b)) and a second opening (for example, flow path outlet 256out shown in FIG. 34(b)), and the first opening is located upstream of the second opening, and the third screw insertion opening is formed at a position where, when a screw is not correctly inserted into the third screw insertion opening, a gaming ball that has circulated through the third flow path will come into contact with the screw and a constituent body that forms the third flow path, and is closer to the first opening than the second opening, and the presentation means is a means capable of executing a first variable display in accordance with the variable display of the first symbol. The presentation means is a means for terminating the demo presentation when a first condition [for example, termination condition 1 in step S3434 of FIG. 128] is satisfied during execution of the demo presentation, and the presentation means is a means for terminating the demo presentation even when a second condition [for example, termination condition 2 in step S3434 of FIG. 128] is satisfied without satisfying the first condition during execution of the demo presentation [for example, step S3436 of FIG. 128, T2 in FIG. 77(a)], and the sound output means is a means for terminating the demo presentation when a first condition [for example, termination condition 1 in step S3434 of FIG. 128] is satisfied during execution of the demo presentation The gaming machine is configured to play a certain sound when the first condition is met during execution of the demo performance, and the sound output means is configured not to play the certain sound if the second condition is met without the first condition being met during execution of the demo performance (for example, the demo performance control process shown in FIG. 129). The performance means is configured to play the first variable display if the second condition is met without the first condition being met during execution of the demo performance (for example, a display showing the variation of a mini symbol MIN or a circle or cross in the variable symbol notification area of a normal symbol in the fourth symbol display area 284 at T2 in FIG. 129(a)). The first condition is a condition that is met when the first detection means detects contact with the first operating means, and the second condition is a condition that is met when the second detection means detects a gaming ball, and the second detection means is a means capable of detecting gaming balls that have circulated through the third flow path.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can provide a gaming machine with improved marketability. Furthermore, by manually circulating gaming balls during inspection, certain sounds are not emitted, allowing the inspection to be carried out as quietly as possible.

In addition, if a screw is not attached correctly and becomes loose during assembly of the flow path, game balls will remain in the first and third flow paths. This makes it easy to detect assembly errors during test hit inspections before shipping, thereby increasing convenience.

In addition, since there are no screw insertion ports formed on the second flow path (the flow path through which game balls flow only during winning plays), even if the screws are not installed correctly during assembly of the flow path and become loose, the second flow path is not affected, allowing for quick test shot inspections before shipping.

In addition, because the third screw insertion port is located closer to the first opening than the second opening, if game balls become trapped in the flow path and overflow during a test shot inspection before shipping due to a loose third screw or other reason, the assembly error can be immediately detected, improving convenience. If the third screw insertion port were located closer to the second opening than the first opening, it would take a certain amount of time for game balls to become trapped in the flow path and overflow, making it difficult to immediately detect the assembly error.

For example, when a player starts playing, a certain effect may be used to increase their motivation to play. Also, a certain effect may be used to bridge the gap (prevent players from becoming frustrated) until the pattern changes begin (until a win is achieved).

Also, the game board may include a game board (e.g., game board 200 shown in FIG. 32), in which a second screw insertion port (e.g., screw insertion port 262a shown in FIG. 35) is formed in the second flow path in an area not on the flow path of the second flow path, the first flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw (e.g., screw 257 shown in FIG. 35) into the first screw insertion port, the second flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw into the second screw insertion port, and the third flow path is fixed to the game board by inserting a screw into the third screw insertion port.

With this configuration, the first and third flow paths can detect loose screws and other issues by detecting accumulated game balls, and can be stably fixed to the game board. The second flow path can be stably fixed to the game board, eliminating any adverse effects caused by loose screws and other issues.

Also,
"The effect means is a means for terminating the demo effect even if a second condition different from the first condition [for example, termination condition 2 in step S3434 of FIG. 128] is satisfied during the execution of the demo effect [for example, step S3436 of FIG. 128],
If the second condition is met during execution of the demo effect, the certain effect is not executed (for example, the demo effect control process shown in FIG. 128).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that results in the second condition being met (for example, a menu operation or the display of a changing decorative pattern due to a win) from being interfered with by the certain effect.

Also,
"A first operating means [e.g., a ball launching handle 134];
a detection means (e.g., a handle touch sensor) capable of detecting contact by a player with the first operating means;
Equipped with
The first operation means is an operation means capable of performing a launch operation of a game ball,
the first condition is a condition that is established in response to the detection means detecting contact with the first operating means;
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also,
"A second operating means (e.g., an operating key unit 190) is provided,
the effect means is capable of displaying a menu display (e.g., a menu display MND) when the second operation means is operated,
the second condition is a condition that is established in response to the second operating means being operated;
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also,
"A winning means into which a game ball can enter [for example, a normal starting hole 228],
A pattern display means (e.g., a general pattern display device 210) capable of displaying a variable pattern;
Equipped with
The symbol display means is configured to start a variable display of a symbol (for example, a variable display of a normal symbol) when a game ball enters the winning means,
The second condition is a condition that is established in response to a game ball entering the winning means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

In addition, a variable effect display means [e.g., decorative pattern display device 208] is provided that can execute a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the pattern [e.g., variable display of a decorative pattern], and the second condition may be a condition that is met in response to the variable effect display means starting to execute the variable effect.

Next, we will provide additional information about the multiple presentation modes A to D shown in Figure 113(a).

The multiple presentation modes A to D shown in Figure 113(a) may be set to multiple presentation modes simultaneously.

Furthermore, the manner in which the effects are executed may differ depending on whether multiple effect modes are set at the same time or only one effect mode is set. Specifically, if effect mode D (pre-reading chance mode), which increases the reliability of pre-reading effects, and effect mode C (pre-announcement mode), which enables pre-announcement effects, are set at the same time, the second pre-announcement effect (with red light and specific sound output) may not be executed in the event of a miss.

While there are two types of advance warning effects (first advance warning effect and second advance warning effect), further different advance warning effects may be provided. For example, while the button lamp 138 can emit red light for any win, a third advance warning effect may be provided in which the button lamp 138 emits rainbow light only for a 20R jackpot (the best jackpot of 3,000 shots) as shown in FIG. 119. In addition, a no-notice mode may be provided as an effect mode in which a jackpot is confirmed when a notice is executed. If the no-notice mode and the advance warning mode, effect mode C, are set simultaneously, the rate at which the rainbow light is emitted when 3,000 shots are won may be higher (including 100%) than when only a mode that allows advance warning effects to be executed is set. This can broaden the scope of gameplay. It also allows players to be more actively involved, reducing player boredom.

In addition, if the effect button 136 is pressed while the button lamp 138 is lit as an advance notification effect, and the change (reserved) for the advance notification target is a jackpot, the effect button 136 may vibrate. In other words, a hidden button function may be provided for the advance notification effect. This also makes it possible to broaden the scope of the game, encourage players to actively participate, and reduce player boredom.

In addition, after a red light is emitted as an advance notification effect, it may be possible to change to premium up mode (effect mode B). In other words, the change (reserved) of the target for which a red light is emitted as an advance notification effect will be performed in advance notification mode (effect mode C) before the change begins (before the reserved amount is consumed), and will be performed in premium up mode after the change begins. This also makes it possible to broaden the scope of gameplay, actively involve the player, and reduce player boredom.

The selected presentation mode may also have an effect during jackpot play. For example, if a jackpot occurs when the premium up mode is selected and additional presentation effects are performed during the jackpot play (e.g., Figure 121 (D)), the frequency of premium pattern additional presentation effects may be increased.

Furthermore, when a look-ahead chance mode (presentation mode D) is set, which increases the reliability (expectation) of the look-ahead effect, if a look-ahead effect occurs but the variation of the target of the look-ahead effect results in a miss, the look-ahead effect can be executed if there is a hit during one or more variations following that variation, but false look-ahead effects may not be executed. In the look-ahead chance mode, where the expectation of a hit is high when a look-ahead effect is executed, if the look-ahead effects fail consecutively, the reliability of the look-ahead chance mode will decrease, so this can be prevented and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 131 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in Figure 131, a predetermined number of gaming media (e.g., gaming balls) are circulated inside the gaming machine. In other words, gaming media fired from the firing means 901 into the gaming area 902 can be ejected from the gaming area 902 and supplied to the firing means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 that displays information on the number of gaming media (prize balls, loaned balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the gaming area 902 on the front of the gaming machine, and the upper tray 126 and lower tray 128 shown in Figure 82 are not provided.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 82 and described above may further include the display means 903 on the upper tray 126, and may further include a touch panel on the display means 903. That is, the touch panel on the display means 903 may function as an operation means. An effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by a single touch operation, a rapid tap operation, or a long press operation on the touch panel. If the long press auto rapid tap function is enabled, a pseudo rapid tap operation on the touch panel may be performed when the touch panel is continuously touched. The long press auto rapid tap function may also be disabled. The long press auto rapid tap function may also be enabled for some effects. In other words, the long press auto rapid tap function may be enabled on the touch panel, or may not be enabled, and may be configured to activate many or few effects. Additionally, there are multiple effects that can be achieved by repeatedly tapping the touch panel, and when using the touch panel, the long press auto-tap function may be configured to be inactive more often or less often.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in Figure 131 is a machine in which balls are enclosed and circulated within the machine for use, and the enclosed balls may be used as fired balls, with the payout of balls being carried out using credits.

Next, we will use Figure 132 to explain a slot machine (reel gaming machine) as an amusement machine to which the present invention can be applied. Figure 132 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 1000 to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 132 comprises a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, center reel 1011, right reel 1012) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer peripheries (not shown in Figure 132) are housed inside the center of the main body 1001 and are configured to rotate within the slot machine 1000. These reels 1010 to 1012 are driven to rotate by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to form each reel 1010-1012. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 1010-1012 are displayed vertically in approximately three columns through the symbol display window 1013, for a total of nine symbols. By spinning each reel 1010-1012, the symbol combinations visible to the player change. In other words, each reel 1010-1012 functions as a display device that variably displays multiple symbol combinations. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal displays can also be used as such display devices. In this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and their installation locations are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) is located on the back of each reel 1010-1012 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable for the reel backlight to be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each reel 1010-1012, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length attached to the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. The rotational position of the symbols on the reel is determined based on the detection results of this sensor, and the reels 1010-1012 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The payline indicator lamp 1020 indicates which paylines 1014 are active. The active paylines are predetermined based on the number of medals bet as gaming media. There are five paylines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal payline is active. If two medals are bet, the top horizontal payline and the bottom horizontal payline are active, adding three lines. If three medals are bet, the bottom horizontal payline and the top right-upward payline are active, adding five lines. Note that the number of paylines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, if one medal is bet, the five lines active may be the middle horizontal payline, the top horizontal payline, the bottom horizontal payline, the bottom right-upward payline, and the top right-upward payline. Hereinafter, active paylines may be referred to as active lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

Medal insertion buttons 1030-1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, up to a maximum of three medals; two medals are inserted when medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. Hereinafter, medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. Note that game medal insertion lamps 1029 light up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, game start lamp 1021 lights up, indicating that game play can be started.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals to start a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030-1032, or physical medals can be inserted (inserted) through the medal insertion slot 1041; the term "inserting" encompasses both. The stored medal count display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout medal count display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a certain winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored medal count display 1025, game information display 1026, and payout medal count display 1027 are configured as 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. In other words, when the desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or when the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 begin to rotate. Operating the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037-1039 as an example of an operating means. The stop buttons 1037-1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010-1012 that have begun to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010-1012. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1037-1039 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation. The reel targeted by the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel targeted by the second stop operation being referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel targeted by the third stop operation being referred to as the third stop reel. Light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037-1039, and when the stop buttons 1037-1039 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that can be pressed to remove inserted medals if they become jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button that can be used to settle medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout outlet for dispensing medals.

To the right of the medal insertion button 1032 is provided a chance button 1100, which serves as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operation of the reels 1010-1012, or operations related to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Furthermore, like the pachinko machine 100 of the above embodiment, the chance button 1100 can be in multiple states, and may be able to change states during the valid period for operation of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is an operation button for calling up a user menu (e.g., a menu for setting a player's personal gaming history information), and is composed of multiple buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to the operation means.

Below the stop button unit 1036 is a title panel 1062 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed, and a title panel lamp 1064 lights up the title panel 1062. Below the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker installed inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 installed on the left and right sides of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. An effect device 1060 is installed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is installed above the effect device 1060. This effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two shutters, a right shutter 1063a and a left shutter 1063b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown, effect image display device) installed behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 1000.

Note that the device does not have to be an LCD display, as long as it is configured to display various presentation images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen may be used. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Furthermore, decorations (not shown) may be provided around the edges of the display screen, so that part of the edges of the display screen are hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregularly shaped. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

With the slot machine 1000 described above, for example, normal play can be made to correspond to a first play state (e.g., normal play state) in the pachinko machine 100, and the CZ (chance zone) or premonition effect that signals a transition to AT (assist time) or ART (assist replay time) can be made to correspond to a second play state (e.g., a special state) in the pachinko machine 100. AT or ART can be made to correspond to a third play state (e.g., a small win rush) in the pachinko machine 100, and bonuses such as BB (big bonus) and RB (regular bonus) can be made to correspond to jackpot play in the pachinko machine 100. By adapting these to the above-described embodiments, the present invention can also be realized in the slot machine 1000.

The gaming machine according to the present invention may be a casino machine 2000 as shown in Figure 133(a), which "inputs a bill into the bill slot 2002, conducts a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, displays the lottery results on the lottery result display device 2008, adds the number of bonus coins to the remaining credits when a win occurs, and when cash out 2009 is selected, issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 bearing a code corresponding to the remaining credits."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 1(b), the present invention may be applied to a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that implements the present invention, as shown in Figure 1(c), a portable game console 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that implements the present invention, and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that implements the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in Figure (b) comprises an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data via a mobile phone line, a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory unit and operation of the operation unit.

The portable game console 4000 in Figure (c) comprises an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a specified storage medium (such as a DVD), a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory and operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in Figure (d) comprises an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a specified storage medium (such as a DVD), a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory and operation of the operation unit.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 1(e), the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data embodying the present invention. Electronic data embodying the present invention may be downloaded from this data server 6000 via an internet line to a home video game console 5000 shown in Figure 1(d).

The present invention can also be applied to game programs that simulate the operation of real machines such as pachinko machines for home gaming machines. In such cases, the recording medium for recording the game program can be a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium.

Furthermore, while the present invention has been described using pachinko machines and slot machines as examples of gaming machines, it is not limited to these and may also be applied to arrange ball gaming machines, Jankyu gaming machines, smart ball gaming machines, etc.

Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferred actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, or appendix, as explained above, that component may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, or appendix. In other words, as long as there are no factors preventing such application, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, or appendix, it will still constitute a single, cohesive technical idea even if it is applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, or appendix.

<Other Embodiments>
Next, a gaming machine according to another embodiment will be described.

<Overall structure>
Figure 134 is a perspective view of a slot machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. The slot machine 100 shown in Figure 134 comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of opening and closing relative to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer peripheries (not shown) are housed inside the center of the main body 101 and are configured to be rotatable within the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are driven to rotate by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to form each reel 110-112. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in approximately three rows through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. By spinning each reel 110-112, the symbol combinations visible to the player change. In other words, each reel 110-112 functions as a display device that variably displays multiple symbol combinations. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal displays can also be used as such display devices. In this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number and location of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is located on the back of each reel 110-112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable for the backlight to be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each reel 110-112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length attached to the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. The rotational position of the symbols on the reel is determined based on the detection results of this sensor, and the reels 110-112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The payline indicator lamp 120 indicates which paylines 114 are active. The active paylines are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as gaming media. There are five paylines 114. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal payline is active. If two medals are bet, the top horizontal payline and the bottom horizontal payline are active, adding three lines. If three medals are bet, the bottom horizontal payline and the top right-upward payline are active, adding five lines. The number of paylines 114 is not limited to five. For example, if one medal is bet, the five active paylines may be the middle horizontal payline, the top horizontal payline, the bottom horizontal payline, the bottom right-upward payline, and the top right-upward payline. Alternatively, the same number of paylines may be uniformly set as active paylines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three medals, two medals are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamps 129 light up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up, indicating that the game can be started.

The medal slot 141 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals to start playing. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or physical medals can be inserted (inserted) through the medal slot 141; the term "inserting" encompasses both methods. The stored medal count display 125 is a display that displays the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display that displays various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during bonus play) as numerical values. The payout medal count display 127 is a display that displays the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored medal count display 125, game information display 126, and payout medal count display 127 are seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 begin to rotate. Operating the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have begun to spin when the start lever 135 is operated, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation. Light-emitting elements may be provided inside each stop button 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove inserted medals if they become jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

Below the stop button unit 136 is a title panel 162 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed. Below the title panel 162 are a medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161.

The sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker installed inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 installed on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to add excitement to the game. An effect device 160 is installed at the top of the front door 102, and the sound hole 143 is installed at the top of the effect device 160. This effect device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two shutters, a right shutter 163a and a left shutter 163b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image display device) installed behind this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 100. Note that the display device does not have to be an LCD display, and any other display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information may be used. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen may be used. The display screen is rectangular and is configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Furthermore, decorations (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear irregularly shaped. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

<Pattern arrangement>
The arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to Figure 135. Figure 135 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reel bands 150 to 152 of the reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) developed in a plane and an explanatory diagram of the symbol names.

Each reel 110-112 has a rectangular reel band 150-152 that is transparent to light, and these reel bands 150-152 have a predetermined number of symbols (21 symbols numbered 0-20 in this embodiment) of the types (nine types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure arranged on them. Note that the numbers 0-20 shown on the left side of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reel bands 150-152.

For example, in this embodiment, the "blank 1" symbol is arranged on the number 0 frame of the reel band 150 of the left reel 110, the "bell" symbol is arranged on the number 0 frame of the reel band 151 of the center reel 111, and the "replay" symbol is arranged on the number 1 frame of the reel band 152 of the right reel 112.

<Reel band>
Next, the reel bands 150 to 152 of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 136(a) is a partially enlarged view showing the state before the reel band 150 is attached to the reel frames 212, 214, and Figure 136(b) is a partially enlarged view showing the state after the lower end of the reel band 150 has been attached to the reel frames 212, 214.

Note that reel bands 150-152 have the same structure except for the patterns on each reel band 150-152. Therefore, in this example, we will explain the reel band 150 of the left reel 110, and for the reel band 151 of the center reel 111, the reference numbers 150 and 170 will be read as 151 and 171, and for the reel band 152 of the right reel 112, the reference numbers 150 and 170 will be read as 152 and 172, and the explanations will be provided accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 136, the slot machine 100 according to this embodiment has reel frames 212 and 214 that hold the reel band 150. The reel frame 212 is a member that supports the left side of the reel band 150 when viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as the "left side"), and the reel frame 214 is a member that supports the right side of the reel band 150 when viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as the "right side"). Details of the reel frames 212 and 214 will be described later.

As shown in Figure 135, linear tape application areas 250 are provided on the backsides of the left and right sides of the reel band 150, extending from the upper end 150U to the lower end 150D of the reel band 150, to which double-sided tape 252 (see Figure 141(a), etc.) can be applied.

In addition, the lower end 150D of the reel band 150 is provided with a winding margin 170 consisting of a transparent rectangular area with no design. When winding and attaching the reel band 150 to the reel frames 212, 214, this winding margin 170 is first attached to a predetermined position on the reel frames 212, 214, and functions as a part for positioning the reel band 150 relative to the reel frames 212, 214. In addition, as will be described later using Figure 138, when the upper end 150U of the reel band 150 is attached above it, it also functions as a "glue margin" for the reel band 150.

Identification information is printed on the winding margin 170, allowing identification of which of the multiple reels 110-112 it belongs to. Specifically, identification information 170a (in this example, the letter "L") is printed on the upper right side of the winding margin 170 of the reel band 150 of the left reel 110, allowing identification that it is the left reel 110; identification information 171a (in this example, the letter "C") is printed on the upper right side of the winding margin 171 of the reel band 151 of the middle reel 111, allowing identification that it is the middle reel 111; and identification information 172a (in this example, the letter "R") is printed on the upper right side of the winding margin 172 of the reel band 152 of the right reel 112, allowing identification that it is the right reel 112.

In this example, because the identification information 170a-172a is applied to the winding margins 170-172, when each reel band 150-152 is wound around and attached to the reel frames 212, 214, the identification information 170a-172a can be used to reliably confirm whether the correspondence between the reel bands 150-152 and the reels 110-112 is correct, thereby preventing situations in which the reel bands 150-152 are wound around the wrong reels.

Note that the "identification means capable of identifying which of the multiple reels it is" according to the present invention is not limited to the exemplified identification information, and may be, for example, kanji characters such as left, center, and right, numbers such as 1, 2, and 3, or figures, symbols, etc. It is also not limited to printed characters, and may be handwritten, cut, or labeled, for example. At least one of the reel frames 212, 214 may be provided with the same identification information as the corresponding reel bands 150-152.

The winding margins 170-172 are printed with positioning information that allows each reel band 150-152 to be positioned relative to the reel frames 212, 214. In this example, straight lines 170b-172b are printed in the center of the right side of the winding margins 170-172, respectively.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 136(a), the reel frame 214 is marked with linear line marks MK corresponding to the lines 170b-172b of the reel bands 150-152. When winding and attaching each reel band 150-152 around the reel frames 212, 214, as shown in Figure 136(b), the lines 170b-172b printed on the winding margins 170-172 can be aligned with the line marks MK on the reel frame 214 to position each reel band 150-152 relative to the reel frames 212, 214.

This example allows for accurate positioning of each reel band 150-152 relative to the reel frames 212, 214, improving the efficiency of the reel band attachment process and preventing situations in which the reel band attachment position becomes misaligned.

In this example, the line mark MK is printed on only one of the reel frames 212, 214 (in this example, reel frame 214), but the line mark MK may be printed on only the other of the reel frames 212, 214 (reel frame 212), or on both reel frames 212, 214. Furthermore, the position information may be any information that allows for the positioning of each reel band 150-152 relative to the reel frames 212, 214, and is not limited to the straight lines shown in the example, and may be, for example, a graphic or symbol.

<Reel and surrounding structure>
Next, the structure of the reels 110 to 112 and their peripheral components will be described with reference to Figures 137 and 138. Figure 137 is a partially exploded perspective view of the reel drive unit 200, and Figure 138 is an exploded perspective view of each reel and peripheral components.

The reel drive unit 200 includes a reel case 202 made of a box-shaped metal plate. This reel case 202 houses three reels 110-112, a drive motor 220 for driving each of the reels 110-112 to rotate, an index sensor 230 for detecting the rotational position of each of the reels 110-112, and a backlight module 240 for projecting light toward the back of the reel bands 150-151 of each of the reels 110-112.

The reels 110-112 are equipped with reel bands 150-152 as described in Figure 135, are rotatably mounted on a drive motor 220, and are driven to rotate by the drive motor 220 in the direction indicated by the symbol X in Figure 138 (forward direction) or the direction opposite to the X direction (reverse direction). Also, as described in Figure 136, the upper ends 150U-152U of the reel bands 150-152 are overlapped above the winding margins 170-172, covering the lower ends 150D-152D, and are attached to the winding margins 170-172 with double-sided tape 252.

In this example, even if the upper ends 150U-152U of the reel bands 150-152 peel off from the winding margins 170-172 and hang down, the reels 110-112 will rotate primarily in the forward direction indicated by the symbol X in Figure 138, preventing the peeled portions of the reel bands 150-152 from getting caught on other components and damaging them, or interfering with the rotation of the reels 110-112 and causing a disadvantage to the player.

The upper end 150U of the reel band 150 is overlapped above the winding margin 170 so as to cover the lower end 150D, and is attached to the winding margin 170 with double-sided tape 252, resulting in a four-layer structure consisting of the winding margin 170 and double-sided tape 252, and the upper end 150U of the reel band 150 and double-sided tape 252.

In this example, the identification information 170a on the winding margin 170 is positioned so that it is covered by the reel band 150 and the double-sided tape 252 when the reel band 150 is fixed to the reel frames 212, 214 with the double-sided tape 252. This makes it difficult for the identification information on the reel band to be seen through the reel band to the front, preventing it from interfering with the player's visibility.

The backlight module 240 is positioned inside the annular reel bands 150-152 and has a light-emitting element (here, an LED) 244A. The reels 110-112 are equipped with reel frames 212 and 214 that hold the reel bands 150-152. The reel frame 212 supports the left side of the reel bands 150-152, and the reel frame 214 supports the right side of the reel bands 150-152. The reel frames 212 and 214 are made of a light-transmitting material (such as transparent or translucent plastic).

The reel frame 212 comprises an annular frame portion 212A and four support portions 212B that extend from the frame portion 212A toward the center of the frame portion 212A. An L-shaped light-shielding piece 212D is attached to one of the four support portions 212B with a screw 212E, and this light-shielding piece 212D is positioned so that it passes between the light-emitting and light-receiving portions of the index sensor 230. The reel frame 214 is made of an annular member with approximately the same diameter as the frame portion 212A of the reel frame 212, and is positioned on the opposite side of the reel frame 212 with the reel bands 150-152 in between.

The drive motor 220 is fixed to a base formed on the mounting plate 232, and the motor shaft of the drive motor 220 is fixed to the mounting portion 212C of the reels 110-112. In this embodiment, the mounting portion 212C is formed on the reel frame 212. When the drive motor 220 is driven, the reels 110-112 rotate around an axis coaxial with the motor shaft.

The index sensor 230 is fixed to the mounting plate 232 via an L-shaped mounting base 234. The backlight module 240 is composed of a reflector 242 fixed to the mounting plate 232 and an illumination board 244 equipped with a light-emitting element 244A for projecting light from behind the reflector 242. The harnesses connected to the drive motor 220, index sensor 230, and backlight module 242 are connected to the relay board 203 (see Figure 136) through a through-hole 232A formed in the mounting plate 232.

Next, the configuration of the backlight module 240 will be described with reference to Figure 139. Figure 139(a) is an exploded perspective view of the backlight module 240, and Figure 139(b) is a front view of the backlight module 240.

The backlight module 240 is composed of a reflector 242 and an illumination board 244 that is detachably attached to the back of the reflector 242. The reflector 242 has two partitions (partition members) 242a, which form three vertical openings 246A-246C. Two light-emitting elements 244A are arranged in each of the openings 246A-246C, and the light from each light-emitting element 244A is directed toward the upper symbols on the reel bands 150-152 through opening 246A, toward the middle symbols on the reel bands 150-152 through opening 246B, and toward the lower symbols on the reel bands 150-152 through opening 246C.

The shape of the reflector 242 and the number and arrangement of the light-emitting elements 244A may be any desired shape, and there are no particular restrictions on the number of dividers and openings. However, in this embodiment, the number of symbols on the reel bands 150-152 illuminated by the backlight module 240 is three, so three openings 246A-246C are formed by two dividers 242a.

<How to fix the reel band>
Next, a method for fixing the reel bands 150 to 152 will be described with reference to Figures 140 and 141(a).

Figure 140(a) is a front view showing the peripheral components of the right reel 112 in the reel drive unit 200, Figure 140(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 140(a), and Figure 140(c) is a partially enlarged view showing the dotted line portion indicated by the symbol B in Figure 140(b).

Note that reel bands 150-152 have the same structure except for the patterns on each reel band 150-152. Therefore, in this example, we will explain reel band 152 on the right reel 112. For reel band 150 on the left reel 110, we will read the reference number 152 as 150, and for reel band 151 on the center reel 111, we will read the reference number 152 as 151, and will explain each accordingly.

As shown in Figures 140(a) to 140(c), the left side of the reel band 152 is fixed to the reel frame 212 with double-sided tape 252, and the right side of the reel band 152 is fixed to the reel frame 214 with double-sided tape 252.

Before explaining how to secure the reel band 152, we will explain the structure of the double-sided tape 252 using Figure 141(a). Figure 141(a) is an external perspective view showing an example of the structure of the double-sided tape 252.

As shown in Figure 141 (a), double-sided tape 252 is composed of a base material 252a, a strong adhesive surface 252b (first adhesive surface) provided on one side of the base material 252a in the thickness direction, and a weak adhesive surface 252c (second adhesive surface) provided on the other side of the base material 252a in the thickness direction. Note that the "double-sided tape" according to the present invention is not limited to tapes having a base material, and may be a double-sided tape (substrate-less) consisting only of adhesive without a base material.

The substrate 252a is a base material for fixing the adhesive. There are no particular limitations on the material of the substrate 252a, and examples of materials that can be used include PET (polyethylene terephthalate), nonwoven fabric, acrylic firm, and metal foil. In this example, however, the substrate 252a is made of a transparent or translucent PET material.

The strong adhesive surface 252b is made of an adhesive with stronger adhesive strength than the weak adhesive surface 252c, and in this example, is used to secure the reel band 152. On the other hand, the weak adhesive surface 252c is made of an adhesive with weaker adhesive strength than the strong adhesive surface 252b, and in this example, is used to secure the reel frame 212 and reel frame 214.

The materials for the strong adhesive surface 252b and the weak adhesive surface 252c are not particularly limited, and for example, acrylic adhesive, urethane adhesive, silicone adhesive, etc. can be used.

As shown enlarged in Figure 140 (c), the reel frame 212 has a reel band fixing surface 212a to which the left side of the reel band 152 can be fixed, and although not shown, the reel frame 214 also has a reel band fixing surface to which the right side of the reel band 152 can be fixed.

When fixing the left side of the reel band 152 to the reel frame 212, the strong adhesive surface 252b of the double-sided tape 252 is attached to the back of the left side of the reel band 152, and the weak adhesive surface 252c of the double-sided tape 252 is attached to the reel band fixing surface 212a of the reel frame 212, thereby fixing the left side of the reel band 152 to the reel frame 212.

Although not shown in the figures, when fixing the right side surface of the reel band 152 to the reel frame 214, the strong adhesive surface 252b of the double-sided tape 252 is similarly attached to the back surface of the right side surface of the reel band 152, and the weak adhesive surface 252c of the double-sided tape 252 is attached to the reel band fixing surface of the reel frame 214, thereby fixing the right side surface of the reel band 152 to the reel frame 214.

In this example, the weak adhesive surface 252c (second adhesive surface) attached to the reel frames 212, 214 has weaker adhesive strength than the strong adhesive surface 252b (first adhesive surface) attached to the reel band 152. Therefore, when removing the reel band from the reel frame and reusing the reel frame (for example, for reuse, repair, or maintenance), the reel band can be easily peeled off cleanly from the reel frame (less double-sided tape remains on the reel frame), improving workability during reuse and reducing dirt and other residue adhering to the reel frame, thereby enabling a higher reuse rate for the reel frame.

In addition, as shown enlarged in Figure 140(c), the maximum width w2 of the double-sided tape 252 is set to be wider than the maximum width w1 of the reel band fixing surface 212a of the reel frame 212, and part of the weak adhesive surface 252c of the double-sided tape 252 is configured not to come into contact with the reel band fixing surface 212a.

In this example, the double-sided tape 252 has a larger contact surface area on the strong adhesive surface 252b (first adhesive surface) attached to the reel band 152 than on the weak adhesive surface 252c (second adhesive surface) attached to the reel frames 212, 214. Therefore, when removing the reel band from the reel frame and reusing the reel frame (for example, for reuse, repair, maintenance, etc.), the reel band can be easily peeled off cleanly from the reel frame (less double-sided tape remains on the reel frame), improving workability during reuse and reducing dirt and other contaminants adhering to the reel frame, thereby increasing the reusability of the reel frame.

Figure 141(b) is a cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the reel band fixing surface of the reel frame.

In the reel band fixing surface 212a of the reel frame 212 described using Figure 140(c), an example was shown in which a linear notch was formed in part of the reel frame 212 to form the reel band fixing surface 212a, but the structure of the reel band fixing surface is not limited to this example. For example, as shown in Figure 141(b), a curved notch may be formed in part of the reel frame 312 to form the reel band fixing surface 312a.

Figure 141(c) is a cross-sectional view showing the area where the reel belt 152 overlaps twice.

As explained using Figure 138, the upper end 152U of the reel band 152 is overlapped above the winding margin 172 so as to cover the lower end 152D and is attached to the winding margin 172 with double-sided tape 252, resulting in a four-layer structure consisting of the reel band 152 (lower end 152D) and double-sided tape 252, and the reel band 152 (upper end 152U) and double-sided tape 252, as shown in Figure 141 (c). In other words, a portion of the weak adhesive surface 252c (second adhesive surface) of the double-sided tape 252 is also attached to the reel band 152.

In this example, the maximum height h1 (e.g., 1.0 mm) of the wall portion 212b extending upward from the reel band fixing surface 212a of the reel frame 212 as its base end is set to be greater than the total height (e.g., 0.56 mm) of the four layers: the maximum thickness (e.g., 0.18 mm) of the lower end 152U of the reel band 152, the maximum thickness (e.g., 0.1 mm) of the double-sided tape 252, the maximum thickness (e.g., 0.18 mm) of the upper end 152U of the reel band 152, and the maximum thickness (e.g., 0.1 mm) of the double-sided tape 252.

According to this example, when wrapping and attaching the reel band around the reel frame, the wall of the reel frame can be used as a guide (guide portion) to guide the reel band, improving the efficiency of the reel band attachment work. Furthermore, because the thickness of the reel band does not exceed the height of the wall of the reel frame and the wall of the reel frame serves to protect the sides of the reel band, it is possible to prevent the reel band from coming into contact with other components or game parlor staff and becoming detached from the reel frame.

<Summary of how to secure the reel belt>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 134) is a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of rotatable reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 134), and the reels at least include a reel band having a plurality of symbols (for example, reel bands 150 to 152 shown in FIG. 135) and a reel frame capable of supporting the sides of the reel band (for example, reel frames 212, 214 shown in FIGS. 135 and 138), and the reel band is fixed to the reel frame with double-sided tape (for example, double-sided tape 252 shown in FIG. 136 and 141(a)).

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, when removing the reel band from the reel frame and reusing the reel frame (for example, for reuse, repair, maintenance, etc.), the reel band can be peeled off cleanly from the reel frame, making it possible to reuse the reel frame.

Furthermore, the reel band may include identification information (e.g., identification information 170a-172a shown in Figures 135 and 136) that can identify which of the multiple reels it corresponds to, and the identification information may be located in a position that is covered by the reel band and the double-sided tape when the reel band is fixed to the reel frame with the double-sided tape.

This configuration makes it difficult for the identification information on the reel band to show through to the front, preventing it from interfering with the player's visibility.

The double-sided tape may also have a first adhesive surface (e.g., strong adhesive surface 252b shown in Figure 141(a)) and a second adhesive surface (e.g., weak adhesive surface 252c shown in Figure 141(a)), the first adhesive surface being attached to the reel band, and most of the second adhesive surface being attached to the reel frame, and the second adhesive surface having weaker adhesive strength than the first adhesive surface.

With this configuration, when removing the reel band from the reel frame and reusing the reel frame (for example, for reuse, repair, or maintenance), the reel band can be easily peeled off cleanly from the reel frame (less double-sided tape remains on the reel frame), improving workability during reuse and reducing the amount of dirt that adheres to the reel frame, making it possible to increase the reuse rate of the reel frame.

Furthermore, the first adhesive surface may have a larger contact area with the reel frame than the second adhesive surface.

With this configuration, when removing the reel band from the reel frame and reusing the reel frame (for example, for reuse, repair, or maintenance), the reel band can be easily peeled off cleanly from the reel frame (less double-sided tape remains on the reel frame), improving workability during reuse and reducing the amount of dirt that adheres to the reel frame, making it possible to increase the reuse rate of the reel frame.

<Stop button unit>
Next, the stop button unit 136 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Figure 142(a) is a front view of the stop button unit 136, and Figure 142(b) shows the state in which the slide stop operation has been initiated using the stop buttons 137 to 139.

The stop button unit 136 is composed of a horizontally elongated trapezoidal base 146 and stop buttons 137 to 139 arranged on this base 146 in an operable manner.

The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have begun to spin when the start lever 135 is operated, and have operation surfaces 137a-139a that can be pressed by the player. The stop buttons 137-139 are associated with each of the reels 110-112, and in this specification, the stop button 137 corresponding to the left reel 110 may be referred to as the "left stop button," the stop button 138 corresponding to the center reel 111 may be referred to as the "center stop button," and the stop button 139 corresponding to the right reel 112 may be referred to as the "right stop button."

The base portion 146 comprises a plate-shaped decorative panel 146a and a frame portion 146b arranged around the decorative panel 146a. The decorative panel 146a is formed with a horizontally oval left through-hole 146c in which the left stop button 137 is disposed, a horizontally oval middle through-hole 146d in which the middle stop button 138 is disposed, and a horizontally oval right through-hole 146e in which the right stop button 139 is disposed.

The operating surface 137a of the left stop button 137 is exposed to the outside through the left through-hole 146c of the decorative panel 146a, the operating surface 138a of the middle stop button 138 is exposed to the outside through the middle through-hole 146d of the decorative panel 146a, and the operating surface 139a of the right stop button 139 is exposed to the outside through the right through-hole 146e of the decorative panel 146a, and each can be pressed.

The surface of the decorative plate 146a of the base portion 146 is composed of a rough surface, while the surface of the frame portion 146c of the base portion 146 and the operating surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139 are composed of a smooth surface.

A rough surface portion is a portion of the surface that is rougher and coarser than a smooth surface portion. For example, a rough surface portion with a roughened shape can be formed on the surface of decorative board 146a, which is made of metal or the like, by performing press processing, thermal transfer of unevenness, embossing, shrinkage processing, surface treatment, etc.; a rough surface portion can be formed on decorative board 146a by attaching tape or the like to the surface of decorative board 146a; or a rough surface portion can be formed on decorative board 146a by applying paint or the like to the surface of decorative board 146a.

A smooth surface is a portion of the surface that is smoother (finer) than a rough surface. For example, by not applying any processing to the surface (rough surface) of the decorative panel 146a of the frame 146c made of metal or the operating surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139 made of plastic, it is possible to form a smooth surface that is smoother (finer) than the rough surface.

The operating surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139, which are made up of smooth sections, are too smooth, causing fingers to stick to them when operating them, resulting in poor operability, particularly when operating the slide stop. However, by making the surface of the decorative plate 146a located between the operating surfaces 137a-139a (smooth sections) of the stop buttons 137-139 a rough section, the contact area between the fingers and the surface of the decorative plate 146a is reduced, reducing frictional resistance and improving finger sliding, thereby improving the operability of the stop buttons 137-139. Furthermore, this improved operability makes it possible to target and stop specific symbols on all reels simultaneously using the slide stop operation, making it possible to incorporate new technical intervention elements.

Furthermore, if the surface of the decorative plate 146a located between the operating surfaces 137a to 139a (smooth surfaces) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 were also made of a smooth surface, there would be a problem that the surface would be too smooth and fingers would stick to it when operating the slide stop, resulting in poor operability. However, by making the surface of the decorative plate 146a located between the operating surfaces 137a to 139a (smooth surfaces) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 a rough surface, the contact area between the fingers and the surface of the decorative plate 146a is reduced, reducing frictional resistance and allowing the fingers to slide more easily, thereby improving the operability of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

Here, slide stop refers to an operation method also known as slide operation or slide push, in which the player slides their finger along the operating surface of multiple operating means when operating the operating means.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 142 (b), slide stop is an operation method in which the player slides their finger horizontally to the right in the following order: operation surface 137a of left stop button 137 → decorative plate 146a between left through hole 146c and middle through hole 146d → operation surface 138a of middle stop button 138 → decorative plate 146a between middle through hole 146d and right through hole 146e → operation surface 139a of right stop button 139 → decorative plate 146a between right through hole 146e and frame portion 146b → frame portion 146b, thereby operating the three operation means of left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139 in succession.

This slide stop is an operating method for gaming machines in which operation of a stop button that has not yet been operated becomes effective without waiting for the reel corresponding to the operated stop button to begin the stop process by energizing all phases, or for the rotation speed to decrease and the reel to stop as a result of the stop start to become slower and the machine to stop.

Furthermore, because the decorative plate 146a between the frame portion 146b and the left through-hole 146c also has a rough surface, the slide stop does not start from the operating surface 137a of the left stop button 137, but rather the finger can start from the rough surface of the decorative plate 146a between the frame portion 146b and the left through-hole 146c and slide up to the operating surface 137a of the left stop button 137, allowing for a run-up to the slide stop and improving operability. Furthermore, this improved operability makes it possible to use the slide stop operation to aim and stop specific symbols on all reels at approximately the same time, making it possible to incorporate new technical intervention elements.

Note that the "slide operation" according to the present invention is not limited to an operation in which the three operating means, left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139, are successively operated in this order. For example, it may be an operation in which the three operating means, left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139, are successively operated in the reverse order (right → middle → left). It may also be an operation in which the two operating means, left stop button 137 and middle stop button 138, are successively operated in this order (or the reverse order, middle → left), or an operation in which the two operating means, middle stop button 138 and right stop button 139, are successively operated in this order (or the reverse order, right → middle).

Furthermore, the "slide operation" according to the present invention may be an operation of successively operating any two or more operation means other than the stop buttons 137-139, for example, any of the bet buttons 130-132 shown in FIG. 134, the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 134, the effect button, and the volume buttons (left/right buttons, up/down buttons).

If the operating surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139 were made with a rough surface, the operability of the slide stop would be improved, but there is a possibility that the fingers may slip and accidentally operate the adjacent stop button during precise operations such as when aiming at a pattern. Therefore, in this example, the operating surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139 are made with a smooth surface to prevent incorrect operation.

Furthermore, if the operation surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139 were made rough, this would get in the way when decorating the operation surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139, resulting in a poor appearance. Furthermore, the appearance would also be poor if the operation surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139 were configured to emit light using LEDs or the like. Therefore, in this example, the operation surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139 are intentionally made smooth, so as not to detract from the design or dramatic effect.

In addition, the stop button unit 136 has a rough surface and a smooth surface as contact surfaces that come into contact with the fingers when performing slide stops, etc., so even if you are concentrating on the performance on the LCD display device 157, etc., you can still recognize by touch that the three stop button units 137-139 are operating properly.

To explain the symbols in Figure 142(a), symbol HL is an imaginary line passing horizontally through the centers of the stop buttons 137-139, symbol VP1 is an imaginary point where the imaginary line HL intersects with the left edge of the operation surface 137a of the left stop button 137 when viewed from the front, and symbol VP2 is an imaginary point where the imaginary line HL intersects with the right edge of the operation surface 137a of the left stop button 137 when viewed from the front. The maximum horizontal width w4 of the operation surface 137a of the left stop button 137 can be defined as the length from imaginary point VP1 to imaginary point VP2.

Furthermore, symbol VL is an imaginary line passing vertically through the center of the left stop button 137, symbol VP3 is an imaginary point where imaginary line VL intersects with the boundary line between the decorative panel 146a and the frame portion 146b, and symbol VP4 is an imaginary point where imaginary line VL intersects with the upper end of the left through-hole 146c when viewed from the front, and the minimum distance h2 from the upper end of the left through-hole 146c when viewed from the front to the boundary line between the decorative panel 146a and the frame portion 146b can be defined as the length from imaginary point VP3 to imaginary point VP4.

Furthermore, symbol VP5 is an imaginary point where the imaginary line VL intersects with the upper end of the operation surface 137a of the left stop button 137 when viewed from the front, and symbol VP6 is an imaginary point where the imaginary line VL intersects with the lower end of the operation surface 137a of the left stop button 137 when viewed from the front. The maximum vertical height h3 of the operation surface 137a of the left stop button 137 can be defined as the length from imaginary point VP5 to imaginary point VP6.

Furthermore, symbol VP7 is an imaginary point where the imaginary line VL intersects with the lower end of the left through-hole 146c when viewed from the front, and symbol VP8 is an imaginary point where the imaginary line VL intersects with the boundary line between the decorative panel 146a and the frame portion 146b. The minimum distance h4 from the lower end of the left through-hole 146c when viewed from the front to the boundary line between the decorative panel 146a and the frame portion 146b can be defined as the length from imaginary point VP7 to imaginary point VP8.

Furthermore, symbol VP9 is the imaginary point where the imaginary line HL intersects with the right end of the left through-hole 146c in a front view, and symbol VP10 is the imaginary point where the imaginary line HL intersects with the left end of the middle through-hole 146d in a front view. The maximum width w5 of the area of the decorative panel 146a between the left through-hole 146c and the middle through-hole 146d can be defined as the length from imaginary point VP9 to imaginary point VP10.

In this example, the maximum horizontal width w4 (e.g., 4.0 mm) of the operating surface 137a (smooth surface portion) of the left stop button 137 is longer than the maximum width w5 (e.g., 2.0 mm) of the area of the decorative panel 146a between the left through-hole 146c and the middle through-hole 146d (w4 > w5). In other words, on the imaginary line HL of the stop button unit 136, the maximum width w4 of the smooth surface portion is longer than the maximum width w5 of the rough surface portion.

Although not shown in the figures, the maximum horizontal width of the operating surface 138a of the middle stop button 138 and the maximum horizontal width of the operating surface 139a of the right stop button 139 are the same as the maximum horizontal width w4 of the operating surface 137a of the left stop button 137. Furthermore, the maximum width of the area of the decorative panel 146a between the middle through-hole 146d and the right through-hole 146e is the same as the maximum width w5 of the area of the decorative panel 146a between the left through-hole 146c and the middle through-hole 146d.

In this example, the maximum horizontal width w4 of the smooth surface portion (operating surfaces 137a-139a of stop buttons 137-139) is longer than the maximum width w5 of the rough surface portion (the area of decorative panel 146a between adjacent through-holes 146c-146e). Therefore, even if a slide stop is initiated in the context of a previous game despite the game being one in which a symbol should be aimed, the area of the rough surface portion is relatively smaller than the area of the smooth surface portion, so the slide stop can be stopped before operating the second button (for example, the center stop button), and symbols can be aimed for on the remaining reels.

Returning to the symbols in Figure 142(a), symbol VP11 is the imaginary point where the imaginary line HL intersects with the right end of the right through-hole 146e when viewed from the front, and symbol VP12 is the imaginary point where the imaginary line HL intersects with the boundary line between the decorative panel 146a and the frame portion 146b. The maximum width w6 from the right stop button 139 on the decorative panel 146a of the base portion 146 to the right edge of the decorative panel 146a can be defined as the length from imaginary point VP9 to imaginary point VP10.

Furthermore, the symbol VP13 is the imaginary point where the imaginary line HL intersects with the edge of the right side surface of the frame portion 146b, and the maximum width w7 of the frame portion 146b of the base portion 146 can be defined as the length from the imaginary point VP12 to the imaginary point VP13.

In this example, the maximum width w7 (e.g., 6.0 mm) of the right side surface of the frame portion 146b (smooth surface portion) of the base portion 146 is wider than the maximum width w6 (e.g., 4.0 mm) of the area of the decorative panel 146a between the right through-hole 146e and the frame portion 146b (w7 > w6). In other words, the maximum width w7 of the smooth surface portion on the imaginary line HL of the stop button unit 136 is longer than the maximum width w6 of the rough surface portion.

In this example, the maximum width w7 of the right side surface of the frame portion 146b (smooth surface) of the base portion 146 is wider than the maximum width w6 of the area of the decorative panel 146a between the right through-hole 146e and the frame portion 146b. Therefore, when operating the slide stop and sliding a finger horizontally to the right in the following order: operation surface 137a of the left stop button 137 → operation surface 138a of the middle stop button 138 → operation surface 139a of the right stop button 139 → decorative panel 146a between the right through-hole 146e and the frame portion 146b → frame portion 146b, the presence of the frame portion 146b (smooth surface) makes it possible to recognize that the slide stop operation is complete. Furthermore, the area of the rough surface can be reduced, minimizing the area that requires rough surface processing, thereby reducing costs.

Although not shown in the figures, the maximum width between the left stop button 139 on the decorative panel 146a of the base portion 146 and the edge of the left side surface of the decorative panel 146a is the same as the maximum width w6 between the right stop button 139 on the decorative panel 146a of the base portion 146 and the edge of the right side surface of the decorative panel 146a. Furthermore, the maximum width of the left side surface of the frame portion 146b of the base portion 146 is the same as the maximum width w7 of the right side surface of the frame portion 146b of the base portion 146.

<Stop button unit/variant>
Next, a modified example of the stop button unit will be described.

<Stop button unit/Modification 1>
FIG. 143(a) is a front view of the stop button unit 270 according to the first modified example, and FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 143(a).

The stop button unit 270 is composed of a base portion 272 and stop buttons 137 to 139 operably arranged on this base portion 272.

The base portion 272 includes a plate-shaped decorative plate 272a, the surface of which is rough, while the operating surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139 are smooth.

In addition, the decorative panel 272a between the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 has an inclined portion 272a1 that gradually increases in height from the left stop button 137 toward the middle stop button 138, and the decorative panel 272a between the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 has an inclined portion 272a2 that gradually increases in height from the middle stop button 138 toward the right stop button 139.

In the case of so-called automatic transmission machines, when in the automatic transmission state, the operation sequence is frequently instructed, so the timing for performing the slide stop operation is when the machine is not in automatic transmission state. Furthermore, in recent automatic transmission machines, a penalty may be incurred if a stop operation is performed from a stop button other than the left stop button 137 (so-called irregular pressing). Therefore, in so-called automatic transmission machines, since the stop operation is often performed from the left stop button 137, the height is increased from left to right in this way, making it easier to perform a slide stop operation using the left stop button 137.

The conditions for a penalty to occur may be that it always occurs when an irregular button press is performed in an advantageous zone and not in an AT state, or that it occurs when an irregular button press is performed while in an advantageous zone and not in an AT state and the button order bell is selected, or that it occurs when a lottery is held in the above situations to determine whether or not a penalty will occur.

The penalty may be to prevent the lottery that determines whether or not to transition from normal state to AT state in the game, to prevent the value of the ceiling counter that counts the number of games in normal state up to the ceiling number of games from being updated, or to prevent counters such as the number of premonition Gs from being updated, or it may be a combination of these, or all of them.

To operate the slide stop, the player slides their finger horizontally to the right in the following order: operation surface 137a of left stop button 137 → inclined portion 272a1 of decorative panel 272a → operation surface 138a of middle stop button 138 → inclined portion 272a2 of decorative panel 272a → operation surface 139a of right stop button 139. This allows the player to operate the three operation means of left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139 in succession.

In this example, the stop button unit 270 has a rough surface portion (decorative plate 272a) and a smooth surface portion (operating surfaces 137a-139a of stop buttons 137-139) as contact surfaces that come into contact with the fingers when performing slide stops, etc. Therefore, even without visually inspecting the stop button units 137-139, it is possible to recognize by touch that the three stop button units 137-139 are operating, improving operability.

In addition, the decorative panel 272a is formed with an inclined portion 272a1 that gradually increases in height from the left stop button 137 to the middle stop button 138, and an inclined portion 272a2 that gradually increases in height from the middle stop button 138 to the right stop button 139. This allows the finger to be smoothly guided to the adjacent stop button when performing a slide stop, etc., improving the operability of the stop buttons.

<Stop button unit/Modification 2>
FIG. 143(c) is a front view of a stop button unit 275 according to the second modification.

The stop button unit 275 is composed of a base portion 277 and stop buttons 137 to 139 that are operably arranged on this base portion 277.

The base portion 277 includes a plate-shaped decorative plate 277a, the surface of which is rough, while the operating surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139 are smooth.

Furthermore, the decorative panel 277a between the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 has a protrusion 277a1 that tapers gradually from the left stop button 137 towards the middle stop button 138 and has a right-pointing arrow shape in plan view, while the decorative panel 272a between the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 has a protrusion 277a2 that tapers gradually from the middle stop button 138 towards the right stop button 139 and has a right-pointing arrow shape in plan view.

To operate the slide stop, the player slides their finger horizontally to the right in the following order: operation surface 137a of left stop button 137 → convex portion 277a1 of decorative panel 277a → operation surface 138a of middle stop button 138 → convex portion 277a2 of decorative panel 277a → operation surface 139a of right stop button 139. This allows the player to operate the three operation means of left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139 in succession.

In this example, the stop button unit 270 has a rough surface portion (decorative plate 277a) and a smooth surface portion (operating surfaces 137a-139a of stop buttons 137-139) as contact surfaces that come into contact with the fingers when performing slide stops, etc. Therefore, even without visually inspecting the stop button units 137-139, it is possible to recognize by touch that the three stop button units 137-139 are operating, improving operability.

In addition, the decorative panel 277a is formed with a protrusion 277a1 that tapers gradually from the left stop button 137 to the middle stop button 138 and has a right-pointing arrow shape in plan view, and a protrusion 277a2 that tapers gradually from the middle stop button 138 to the right stop button 139. This allows the finger to be smoothly guided to the adjacent stop button when performing a slide stop, etc., improving the operability of the stop buttons.

The shape of the convex portions 277a1 and 277a2 is not particularly limited, and they may be recessed portions that resemble a right-pointing arrow in a plan view, or may be shapes other than an arrow shape, such as a rectangular or oval shape. In other words, it is sufficient if they are provided with a guide portion that can guide (direct) the player's finger in a predetermined direction when operating the slide stop in a predetermined direction.

<Stop button unit/variation example 3>
FIG. 143(d) is a front view of a stop button unit 280 according to the third modification.

The stop button unit 280 is composed of a base portion 282 and stop buttons 137 to 139 operably arranged on this base portion 282.

The base portion 282 includes a plate-shaped decorative panel 282a, the surface of which is rough, while the operating surfaces 137a-139a of the stop buttons 137-139 are smooth.

In addition, the decorative panel 282a between the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 has a rectangular recess 282a1 in plan view that is lower in height than the operating surface 137a of the left stop button 137 and extends from the right end of the left stop button 137 in plan view to the left end of the middle stop button 138 in plan view. In addition, the decorative panel 272a between the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 has a rectangular recess 282a2 in plan view that is lower in height than the operating surface 138a of the middle stop button 138 and extends from the right end of the middle stop button 138 in plan view to the left end of the right stop button 139 in plan view.

To operate the slide stop, the player slides their finger horizontally to the right in the following order: operation surface 137a of left stop button 137 → recess 282a1 of decorative panel 282 → operation surface 138a of middle stop button 138 → recess 282a2 of decorative panel 282a → operation surface 139a of right stop button 139. This allows the player to operate the three operation means of left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139 in succession.

In this example, the stop button unit 270 has a rough surface portion (decorative plate 282a) and a smooth surface portion (operating surfaces 137a-139a of stop buttons 137-139) as contact surfaces that come into contact with the fingers when performing slide stops, etc. Therefore, even without visually inspecting the stop button units 137-139, it is possible to recognize by touch that the three stop button units 137-139 are operating, improving operability.

Furthermore, the decorative panel 282a has a rectangular recess 282a1 formed in a plan view that extends from the right end of the left stop button 137 to the left end of the middle stop button 138, and a rectangular recess 282a2 formed in a plan view that extends from the right end of the middle stop button 138 to the left end of the right stop button 139. This allows the finger to be smoothly guided to the adjacent stop button when performing a slide stop, etc., improving the operability of the stop buttons.

The shapes of the recesses 282a1 and 282a2 are not particularly limited, and may form convex portions that are rectangular in plan view, or may be shapes other than rectangular in plan view, such as triangular or elliptical. In other words, it is sufficient that they are provided with a guide portion that can guide (direct) the player's finger in a predetermined direction when operating the slide stop in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, the surface of the recess 282a1 may be at the same height as the operating surface 137a of the left stop button 137, or may be higher than the operating surface 137a of the left stop button 137. Furthermore, the surface of the recess 282a2 may be at the same height as the operating surface 138a of the middle stop button 138, or may be higher than the operating surface 138a of the middle stop button 138.

<Stop button unit/Summary>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 134) is a gaming machine equipped with a first operating means (for example, the left stop button 137 shown in FIG. 142), a second operating means (for example, the middle stop button 138 shown in FIG. 142), and a housing in which the first operating means and the second operating means are arranged (for example, the base part 146 shown in FIG. 142), and is characterized in that a certain surface of the housing located between the first operating means and the second operating means has a surface that is rougher than at least the operating surface of the first operating means.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, players can sense through touch that the operating means is operating properly, even without visually inspecting the operating means.

In addition, part (or all) of the certain surface may be configured with a surface that is rougher than part (or all) of the operating surface of the first operating means. In other words, it is sufficient that at least part of the certain surface is configured with a surface that is rougher than at least part of the operating surface of the first operating means.

Furthermore, a surface of the housing around the first operating means that is not between the first operating means and the second operating means (for example, the area of the decorative panel 146a between the frame portion 146b and the left through-hole 146c as shown in Figure 142(a)) may also have a rougher surface than the operating surface of the first operating means.

This configuration allows for a run-up to the slide operation when starting a slide operation by sliding a finger from a surface that is rougher than the first operating means onto the first operating means, thereby improving operability. Furthermore, this improved operability makes it possible to use the slide stop operation to target and stop specific symbols on all reels simultaneously, making it possible to incorporate new technical intervention elements.

Furthermore, the first operating means and the second operating means are configured to allow for a sliding operation, and the sliding operation is an operation in which the player slides his/her finger along the operating surfaces of the multiple operating means when operating the multiple operating means, and a surface with a rough surface may be provided between the first operating means and the second operating means to improve the ease with which the player's finger slides during the sliding operation.

This configuration improves finger slippage, improves operability, prevents erroneous operation of the operating means, and prevents a decline in design and presentation effects. Furthermore, even without visually inspecting the operating means, users can recognize by touch that they have been able to operate the operating means.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, an "enclosed gaming machine" is one that circulates gaming balls enclosed within the gaming machine. The main control unit, first sub-control unit, and second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and first sub-control unit may be configured to enable two-way communication. Furthermore, while two-way communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way.

Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most favorable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the multiple configurations described in the examples to other configurations, the range of play may be further expanded.

In addition, a rough surface may be provided on the surface between any two or more of the operating means among the bet buttons 130-132, the settlement button 134, the effect button, and the volume button (left/right button, up/down button), or the rough surface between one of the above buttons (e.g., the volume button, bet button 132) and another button (e.g., the effect button, bet button 130) may be higher on the surface closer to the one button than on the surface closer to the other button. In other words, the features described in the embodiments of the present invention may be applied to these buttons.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), slot machines, enclosed gaming machines, and medal-less slot machines.

100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Main body 106 Front frame door 140 Launching device 158 Operation panel unit 160, 710 Lower left unit 162 UI unit 700 Smart Pachi 710 Lower left unit 714 Conveyor device 716 Ball polishing device 736 Upper passage 748 Launching device ball passage

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a gaming board and a flow path through which gaming balls flow,
the flow path is configured to include a first flow path, a second flow path, a third flow path, and a fourth flow path;
The first flow path is a flow path through which game balls can flow during normal play,
The second flow path is a flow path through which the game balls are difficult to circulate during the normal game and through which the game balls are easily circulated during the winning game,
The third flow path is a flow path through which game balls can flow during the normal game,
The fourth flow path is a flow path through which the circulation of game balls is difficult during the normal game and through which the circulation of game balls is easy during a certain time-saving game,
a first screw insertion port into which a screw can be inserted is formed on the first flow path;
a screw insertion port through which a screw can be inserted is not formed on the second flow path;
a third screw insertion port into which a screw can be inserted is formed on the third flow path;
a screw insertion port through which a screw can be inserted is not formed on the flow path of the fourth flow path,
a second screw insertion port is formed in a region of the second flow path that is not on the flow path;
The first screw insertion port is formed at a position where, when the screw is not correctly inserted into the first screw insertion port, the game ball that has circulated through the first flow path comes into contact with the screw and a component that forms the first flow path;
the third flow path has a first opening and a second opening;
the first opening is upstream of the second opening;
The third screw insertion port is formed at a position where, when a screw is not correctly inserted into the third screw insertion port, a game ball that has circulated through the third flow path will come into contact with the screw and a component that forms the third flow path, and at a position closer to the first opening than the second opening;
At least a part of the structure forming the first flow path is fixed to the game board using a screw inserted into the first screw insertion port,
At least a part of the structure forming the second flow path is fixed to the game board using a screw inserted into the second screw insertion port,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.